THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

INCLUDING

ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

(BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND

CHARLESWORTH’S ‘ MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.’)

CONDUCTED BY

ALBERT C. L. G. GUNTHER, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.,

WILLIAM 8. DALLAS, F.LS.,

WILLIAM CARRUTHERS, F.R.S., F.LS., F.G.S.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.LS.

eee

VOL. V.—FIFTH SERIES. rie

_—_— ns Oli oes

(ote as chs

NG ona Musev™> 4

LONDON:

PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,

AND CO.; KENT AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS:

MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH :

HODGES, FOSTER, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN,

1880.

“ Omnes res createe sunt divine sapientie et potentix testes, divitie felicitatis

human :—ex harum usu Jonitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini;

ex cconomia’ in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis

elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper estimata ;

a veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper

inimica fuit.”—Linnas.

“Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour

voir quelle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor-

tent toutes ses opérations.”—Brucxyer, Théorie du Systeme Animal, Leyden,

1767.

Beers Safe ler. ban. ee heisvlvanspowers

Obey our summons; from their deepest dells

The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild

And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs

That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme

And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,

But scatter round ten thousand forms minute

Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock

Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too

Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face

They erop the lily, and each sedge and rush

That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,

Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,

The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,

All, all to us unlock their secret stores

And pay their cheerful tribute.

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818.

CONTENTS OF VOL. V.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

NUMBER XXV.

I. On the Squillide. By Epwarp J. Miers, F.LS., F.Z.S.,

Assistant in the Zoological Department, British Museum. (Plates

He WIE) rrreneratets sioralc) xc erarar avers, 8 skate, ctctieiedele sishialevs etic avertetratts eave aie

II. Preliminary Report on the Australian Amphipoda. By

Witi1am A. Hasweb., M.A., B.Se. Edinburgh .............50

II. On the Terms Bryozoa and Polyzoa. By ARTHUR WILLIAM

GN Aten STS arr vir abeeitsiial ats i nas tN aUahal eo Wess aneseranaiciondy eet f

IV. On the Genera of Felide and Canide. By E. D. Cope ...

V. On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora. By

Crsnmns WarwORTHy ue GS. teers 2. s ss... 021 sha vuelbints 0 are ansiae

VI. On the Action of Light and the Function of Chlorophyll in

ian iss qcsy Wi. DRUM GSHEUME mx 56 ape wei ai cisheraiviers aye Shabwleces oe 5

New Books :—A Manual of Paleontology for the Use of Students.

By H. Attryne Nicuotson, M.D., D.Sc., F.G.S., &. 2nd

Edition—An Introduction to Animal Morphology and Sys-

tematic Zoology. Part I. Invertebrata. By ALEXANDER

Macauisrer, M.B. &ec.—An Introduction to the Systematic

Zoology and Morphology of Vertebrate Animals. By ALEx-

ANDER Macauister, M.B. &c. ........... PA oe icc 74

The Sea-weeds of Salt Lake, by A. S. Packard, Jun. ; Observations

upon the Artificial Fertilization of Oyster-eggs, and on the

Embryology of the American Oyster, by W. K. Brooks, Asso-

ciate in Biology, John Hopkins University ; Observations on

the Salivary Glands of the Kchnidnas, by M. HH. Viallanes ;

American: durassic Mammals) ....4 dsm lie petal ee ne eee

Page

.78

80—8d

lV CONTENTS.

NUMBER XXVI.

Page

VI. On some Blind Amphipoda of the Caspian Sea. By Dr.

SCAR GRIMM: (o:2 55s iels.c is xs aie, aie orale WUENe eel PPE einen noo iotenters laseloone 85

VIII. On the Genera of Felide and Canide, By E.D.Copr .. 92

IX. On the Sguilide. By Epwarp J. Miers, F.L.S., F.ZS.,

Assistant in the Zoological Department, British Museum......... 108

X. On the Terms Polyzoa and Bryozoa. By the Rey. T. Hicks,

SAS EUS. * 2c ve ene aie cat sce ny, neler Glens releke Gua) «oe een ete ee 127

XI. The Sponge-fauna of Norway; a Report on the Rev. A. M.

Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian Coast. By W.

J. NOLLAS A EGS: &e» (Plates VI.& VIL)... 6... csc 130

XII. Notes on the Australian Maioid Brachyura. By Witi1am

Jalen SONG) Gannon keV] osc lcml ahi (ts) Oy eee amen MC coin oO omono Or 145

XIII. Description of a new Genus and Species of Heteromerous

Coleoptera. By CHaRLEs O, WATERHOUSE.............0e0e005 147

XIV. On new British Graptolites. By Cuartes LAapwortn,

Bee eCe sy) CE MAGOR LW 580) Vo)ieie's.0:s'm a oo alallois'sl Mintwats wie retary atelegens 149

XV. On the Occurrence in North America of rare Extinct Verte-

brates found fragmentarily in England.—No. 3. By Prof. R.

SO HRC UES sh Lh Eests:, 1000." (CE LALE WELL.) 5 :3,.05 cise SARS stele ae 177

Proceedings of the Geological ‘Society ............-.--00s 181—184

On Archeopteryx macroura, by Prof. Carl Vogt; Notes on the Genus

Brahmea of Walker, by A. G. Butler, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &.; New

Classification of the Crustacea, by A. S. Packard, Jun.; On two

new Species of Cephalopods, by A. E. Verrill; On Amada

Blatte, by Prof. Leidy ; On the Habits and Parthenogenesis of

the Halicti, by M. J. H. Fabres ; On the Locomotion of Insects

ane Arachmds. «by ME Gi@arlet,’.).. 0 \ ete cists se ones 185—196

NUMBER XXVII.

XVI. Investigations on the Development of the Spiders. By Dr.

J; BARROIB. Si Babe OR) Sikes et Golen pigitiiin a asors ya's + cna eet 197

XVII. The Spiral Character of Ccelenterate Development. By

Prof. Joun Youne, University of Glasgow .............00000- 212

XVUI. New Species of Coleoptera belonging to the Families

Lycide, Zophosine, Lepturine, and Glaucitine. By CHaruxrs O.

WATERHOUSE. 0.000. s eee e ee le cece ee etree ence tsetse eaeee 218

XIX. Note on the Occurrence of Pedicellaster (Sars) in the Far

Notth: By |W.) Percy SLADEN, TP oU:S., EiGeoueayiinr cenit sion 216

CONTENTS. Vv

Page

XX. On a Spine (Lophacanthus Taylori, mihi, nov. gen. et spec.)

from the Coal-measures of Northumberland. By Tuomas Srocx,

of the Natural-History Department, Museum of Science and Art,

PEA TUTE TERE Me SeF ales ease 'o cu 8'5) «11d, das) alee amera claret Pon Mtemay ete eteter me tessere asec 217

XXI. On the Nomenclature of Polyzoa, Busk. By Prof. T. R.

NOME sEWo Se GEES, sei 4 5 dave laters Snetew al avace 4. ota sl Poe meee eabatet lee te ata eT 220

XXII. On a small Collection of Lepidoptera from Western India

and Beloochistan. By Artuur G. Bururr, F.LS., F.Z.S., &e. .. 221

XXIII. On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian Region.

—Part I. Crustacea Oxyrhyncha and Cyclometopa, except Zelphu-

stdea. By Epwarp J. Mirrs, F.L.S., F.Z.S. (Plate XIII.)...... 226

XXIV. On a supposed Pterobranchiate Polyzoon from Canada.

By thether. Homas EineKs, BAC) BIR .Si ef. oc cess en cree weiner 239

XXY. The Sponge-fauna of Norway; a Report on the Rey. A. M.

Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian Coast. By W.

Jesoumss, MA. P:G:8., &e.) (Plates MARI is occ atitel se Vo vele 241

Proceedings of the Geological Society.........6..0+. seen 259, 260

The Cave-Bear of California, by E. D. Cope; On the Systematic

Position of some little-known Asiatic Mantodea, with Descrip-

tions of two new Species belonging to the Genus Hestvas, by

J. Wood-Mason ; Description of Sigerpes occidentalis, the Type

of a new Genus of Mantodea from West Africa, by J. Wood-

Mason; The Cecilie, by Prof. W. Peters; Histology, Develop-

ment, and Origin of the Testis and Ovary in Campanularia

angulata (Hincks), by M. J. Fraipont; On the Plants which

serve as the Basis of various Curares, by M. G. Planchon ;

On the Systematic Position of the Sponges, by Dr. Conrad

Betton ae Nee cuties vere aves en eran e ae Nee Se ain Sate ata ea ale 260—268

NUMBER XXVIII.

XXVI. On some Points in the Structure of a Species of the

“ Willemoesia Group of Crustacea.” By 8. I. Smriru, Prof. Comp.

FAME bap MALMO Cert atee spelen dix arses a ebsstnays ste els) ace af alee geal 269

XXVIL On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

iby Cuarung bapwoute, BiG.S. Ge... 62 6c ss wae cine emo 278

XXVIII. New South-American Coleoptera, chiefly from Ecuador.

By Caanuns ©. WATHRBOUSH! V)..).0 6.00.2 ted sedae ae toe 285

XXIX. On two new Species of the Genus Paratymolus, Miers

(Crustacea Brachyura), from Australia. By Witiram A. Has-

wELI, M.A., B.Sc., Curator of the Queensland Museum, Brisbane.

(TELS) 2980 PP Prater rae a cairo eecmenmin Any fr ererpeeec UP

al CONTENTS.

Page

XXX. On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian Region.

—Part II. Telphusidea, Catometopa, and Oxystomata. By Epwarp

J Mame BES. tZ.e. (Plate XUV) acantls stmt see step 304

XXXI. On Hypochlorin and the Conditions of its Production in

the Plant, - “By Prof. PRINGSERMEM! 6. 2.500 tise fuel teeny tegele: berate teks 317

XXXII. On a Collection of Lepidoptera from Madagascar, with

Descriptions of new Genera and Species. By ArntHur G. BUTLER,

Bead oye, Lids, QUES toxoe emiaiee rats clare ie aieisi ise ee. ete ee ee eee 508

On the Resistance of Aphides to Severe Cold, by M. J. Lichtenstein ;

Experimental Researches on the Phosphorescence of the Glow-

worm, by M. Jousset de Bellesme; On the French Jurassic

Clana Woy MEG, Mathes | bya aoik bs out sheyears oe acl 344—347

NUMBER XXIX.

XX XIII. On the Teleostean Affinities of the Genus Pleuracanthus.

Perel AURIS MV 5 OLAS; ere Oks asGGC aise lols) o)/onei apne se ba taes Wer sie iacatotcns ei eines 349

XXXIV. On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

iby OMAEL Me UAP WORTH, EGS. GCs... ccc aes. wewleials less 308

XXXY. On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian Region.

—Part UI. Crustacea Anomura and Macrura (except Peneidea).

By Enwarp.J. Mrers, FLS., F.Z.S. (Plate XV.) ........-.-5 370

XXXVI. On a Collection of Lepidoptera from Madagascar, with

Descriptions of new Genera and Species. By ArrHuR G. BuTLER,

TPT AS OT GR Sa Ce CRIS Re ie a en PV a He i Oh ae Pye 384

XXXVI. The Sponge-Fauna of Norway ; a Report on the Rey.

A. M. Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian Coast.

By W. J. Souuas, M.A., F.R.S.E., F.G.S., &e. (Plate XVIL).... 396

XXXVIII. New Genera and Species of Coleoptera from Mada-

gascar.), By CHARLES QO. WATERHOUSE... .00\chess oj0.0 (0 0/s)s 0 2 esjimcsle 409

XXXIX. New Neotropical Curculionide.—Part I. By Francis

P, Pascon;) PMS er) 32. SERRE > Meta 002, ee 419

New Books :—The Geological Antiquity of Insects. Twelve Papers

on Fossil Entomology. By Hrerserr Goss, F.L.8.—Journal

of the Royal Microscopical Society. Vol. ii. nos. 4 to7 and 7 a.

—Proceedings of the Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic

Society. Vol. vii. pt. 2. Edited by J. W. Davis, FS.A.,

1 CO: et: «a Remon rr Arey acl) fh oi os 5 pan 428—430

CONTENTS. Vil

! Page

On the Formation of the Shell in the Snails, by MM. Longe and E.

Mer; Metamorphoses of the Aphis of the Woody Galls of the

Black Poplar (Pemphigus bursarius, Linn.), by M. J. Lichten-

stein; Structure of the Kye of Limulus, by A. 8. Packard, Jun. ;

Fossil Crawfish from the Tertiaries of Wyoming, by A. 8.

Packard, Jun.; On the Occurrence of Tachymenis vivax in

Cyprus, by Dr. A. Giinther, F.R.S.; On Dana’s Lystosquilla

mommate by A. lWrnst Pisce. os nc ukcriels sce aa 430—456

NUMBER XXX.

XL. Report on Specimens dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar

and presented to the Liverpool Free Museum by Capt. W. H. Cawne

Warren. By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e. (Plates XVIII. & XIX.) 487

XLI. On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian Region.—

Part IV. Peneidea, Stomatopoda, Isopoda, Suctoria, and Xiphosura.

By Epwanrp J. Mirrs, F.LS., F.Z.S. (Plate XV.) ......h0% 5.5 457

XLII. Description of a new Bat from Java, of the Genus Ker?-

voula, By OLpFIELD THomas, F.Z.S., Assistant in the Zoological

Department, British Museum

XLII. Notes on the Gasteropoda contained in the Gilbertson

Collection, British Museum, and figured in Phillips’s ‘ Geology of

Yorkshire. By R. Erseriper, Jun., F.R.PhS.Ed. ............ 473

XLIV. New Cerambycide from Ecuador. By CuHarizs O.

VVPASEIOEUR OUR rd open y taceae sae 2 alsin Se ap ht Gia 2p ade 485

XLY. Description of two new Humming-birds from Bolivia. By

arena Gouin BPS act seis code soe ch teks ORES chats hs OR Mises Seams 488

XLVI. New Neotropical Curculionide.—Part II. By Francts

PAS COS Halas Oc Calica chetac shins ckemer eth BPO ETC Sie eee ore ate 490

On the Origin and Development of the Ovum in Encope before

Fecundation, by M. C. Merejkowsky; Observations on the

Megapodes, by M. E. Oustalet ; On the Structure of some Coral-

liaria; by M. C. Merejkowskty .. 2.060 .f¢s 0. cee: a 498—502

MGUMERS 75. 'e etatvr repent A Tat eNe oli asa cole c) o5 ails sat oral ARS akale e 504

PLATES IN VOL.

PiaTE I,

II. } Squillide.

Il.

IV.

VI.

VIU. Extinct Vertebrates.

IX. Development of Spiders.

XI.

XII.

xiv Malaysian Crustacea.

XV.

Norwegian Sponges.

XVI. New Brachyurous Crustacea.

XVII. Norwegian Sponges.

XVUI. |

XIX. |

New British Graptolites.

New Foraminifera and Zoophyte.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

Hk Be rececceesecooe per litora spargite muscum,

Naiades, et circum vitreos considite fontes:

Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores:

Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum.

At vos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas ;

Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco

Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas

Ferte, Dez pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.”

NV. Parthenii Giannetiasii Ec}. 1.

No. 25. JANUARY 1880.

1.—On the Squillide. By Epwarp J. Mirrs, F.L.S., F.Z.S.,

Assistant in the Zoological Department, British Museum.

[ Plates I.—-ILL. ]

In the present revision of the genera and species of the

Squillidee (a group which, in the most recent systems of clas-

sification, constitutes the single family of the Stomatopoda) I

have not included the numerous pelagic forms which were

formerly assigned to several distinct genera (i. e. Hrichthus,

Alima, Squillerichthus, &c.) in the family Erichthide, but

were demonstrated by Fritz Miiller* to be but the larval con-

dition of the adult Stomatopod, and whose successive stages

of development have been so ably investigated and illustrated

by Dr. Claust. In the present paper I have restricted myself

to the description of such forms as are undoubtedly adult, and

have endeavoured to facilitate their determination by brief

comparative descriptions of the several genera and species,

supplemented by notes on their geographical distribution,

based on the materials afforded by the collection of the British

Museum. It would seem that a revision of this kind is much

* Vide Miiller, Arch. f. Nat. 1862, p. 353, 1868, p. 1; ‘ Fiir Darwin,’

English translation by Dallas, Y 67 (1869).

+ “Die Metamorphose der Squilliden,” in Abhandl. konig. Gesellsch.

zu Gottingen, xvi. p. 111 (1872).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. i

2 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

needed, as no general account of the group has appeared since

the publication of the second volume of Milne-Edwards’s ‘ His-

toire naturelle des Crustacés’ in 1837 ; and since that period

numerous species have been described, not a few of which,

having been based on characters of insufficient value, are now

reduced to the rank of synonyma. In Milne-Edwards’s work

the number of distinct species does not exceed twenty ; in the

present revision fifty-three species are enumerated, distributed

into six genera. .

Milne-Edwards, in 1837, enumerated three genera, Squilla,

Coronis, and Gonodactylus, and divided the genus Squilla

into two sections of subgeneric value, to include respectively

the “ Squdlles fines-tailles”’ and “ Squilles trapues.” Dana,

in 1852*, established the genus Pseudosquilla for Mulne-

Edwards’s “ Squilles trapues,” and Lysiosquilla for the first

section of his “ Squdlles fines-tatlles.”” De Haanq, on the other

hand, only retains the genera Squilla and G'onodactylus, re-

uniting with Sgudlla not only Dana’s Lysiosquilla, but also

the genus Coronis of Latreille. As regards Coronis, De Haan

is undoubtedly right ; for this genus differs from Lystosquilla

only in the dilated and orbiculate appendage of the antepenul-

timate joint of the thoracic limbs; and to the fact, already ob-

served by De Haan, that in young Lysiosquilla maculata

the form of this appendage approaches that of Coronis, | may

add that, in a species (L. Brazier’) described below, the ap-

pendages of the fifth and sixth thoracic limbs are dilated as

in Coronis, and those of the seventh pair linear and styliform

as in the typical Lys¢osquilla, and thus a complete transition

is established from the one genus to the other.

In the present revision, the species of Squillidz are distri-

buted into six genera, the characters of which may be tabu-

lated as follows :—

I. Ophthalmic segment greatly elongated ; ros-

trum not reaching beyond half the length of

PRES EREPITOTAG A ea (als. olie gays Bead eee palene nee hes LEPTOSQUILLA.

II. Rostrum reaching to the end of the oph-

thalmic segment.

1. Dactyli of the raptorial limbs not dilated at

base.

Carapace not costate. Postabdomen loosely

articulated and depressed; terminal

segment transverse, marginal spines

small. Hye-peduncles usually dilated

at the ‘distal Mende neers ee: LysI0sQuitLia.

* Crust. U.S. Explor. Expedition, xiii. p. 615 (1852).

+ Crust. in y. Siebold’s Fauna Japonica, p. 220 (1849).

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 3

Carapace and postabdomen as in Lystosquilla.

ye-peduncles ovoid, dilated in their

middle portion, and constricted at the

distal end; cornea very small........ CHLORIDELLA.

Carapace usually costate. Postabdomen

compactly articulated; terminal seg-

ment with well-developed marginal

spines. Eye-peduncles dilated at the

GUBTAMENG. <5 10 fe cea hs aie aoe SquiLLa.

Carapace not costate. Postabdomen con-

vex, compactly articulated, smooth ;

terminal segment with two well-deve-

loped mobile spines at its distal end.

Eye-peduncles subcylindrical, but little

dilated at the distalend ............ PsEUDOSQUILLA.

2. Dactyli of the raptorial limbs dilated at

base.

Carapace and postabdomen nearly as in

EE SCUROSUBAD wey 3c.) yo tae sys Sel goat Sa GoNODACTYLUS.

The genera, it will be observed, are separated by characters

of little importance. The distinction between Pseudosquilla

and Gonodactylus is, indeed, an artificial one; and it might have

been better to have restricted the former genus to the Pseudo-

squilla Lessoni?, which is characterized by the great develop-

ment of the antennules and the form of the basal portion of the

uropoda; in practice, however, it is more convenient to adhere

to the long-established diagnosis, based on the form of the

dactyli of the raptorial limbs, which affords a ready means of

separating the species, and from which the name Gonodactylus

derives its significance.

~—

List of the Genera and Species.

LyYSIOSQUILLA,

. maculata (Fabr.). Indo-Pacific Region.

. glabriuscula (Zam.). West Indies.

seabricauda (Zam.). Atlantic Region.

Desaussurei (Stimps.). Pacific coast of North America.

scolopendra (Zatr.). Brazil ?

eusebia (Risso). Mediterranean.

. latifrons (De Haan). Japan.

. Brazieri, Miers. Australia, Port Jackson.

. acanthocarpus (White, ined.). Australia, Port Essington.

. Spinosa (Wood-Mason). Andamans, New-Zealand Seas.

cal cpl el eal cll al all cal

LEPTOSQUILLA.

. Schmeltzii (4. Milne-Edwards). Samoa Islands.

CHLORIDELLA.

. microphthalma (M.-Edwards). Australian and Indian Seas.

. rotundicauda, Miers. Formosa.

. Latreillei (Eydoux and Souleyet). Singapore.

. decorata (Wood-Mason). Andamans.

Geer

4 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillidee.

SQUILLA.

. Ferussacii, Roux, Mediterranean.

. miles, Hess. Australia.

. scorpio, Latr. Seas of Asia and Australia.

Dufresnii, Leach (ined.). Hab. P

prasino-lineata, Dana. Brazil.

. supplex, Wood-Mason. India, Bombay.

multicarinata, White. Seas of Eastern Asia.

costata, De Haan. Japan.

mantis, Latr. Mediterranean, British Channel.

empusa, Say. Atlantic Region.

neglecta, Gibbes. Charleston Harbour, United States.

dubia, .-Edwards. West Indies, east coast of America.

nepa, Latr. Indo-Pacific Region.

armata, Milne-Edwards. Chili, Auckland Islands.

raphidea, Fabr. Indo-Pacific Region.

Desmarestii, Risso. Mediterranean, British Channel.

fasciata, De Haan. Japan.

TATA TATA TA TATA TA DTA TA TN TA TD TA A ED

PSEUDOSQUILLA.

. ciliata (Fabr.). Indo-Pacific Region ; Cuba (Von Martens).

. oculata (Brullé). Canaries, Madeira.

monodactyla (A. M.-Edwards). Hab.

ornata, Miers. Philippine Islands, Tahiti ?

. stylifera (M.-Edwards). Chili.

empusa (De Haan). Japan.

. Lessonii (Guérin). Chili, California?

. Cerisii (Rows). Mediterranean.

KH AA

GONODACTYLUS.

G. seyllarus (Linn.). Indo-Pacific Region.

G. japonicus, De Haan. Japan, China.

G. cultrifer, White. China.

G.? Bradyi (A. Milne-Edwards), St.-Vincent Bay.

G. Bleekeri, A. Milne-Edwards. Batavia.

G. chiragra (Fabr.). Indo-Pacific Region, Mediterranean, W. Indies, E.

coast of S. America.

G. graphurus, White (ined.), Miers. Indo-Pacific Region.

G. Guérinii, White. Fiji Islands.

G. trispimosus, White (ined.), Dana. Fiji Islands, New Zealand, Aus-

tralia (Swan River and Sharks’ Bay).

G. trispinosus, var. pulchellus, Jers. Ceylon.

G. glyptocercus, Wood-Mason. Nicobars.

G. Folinii, A. M.-Edwards. Cape St. Vincent, Mauritius ?

G. excavatus, Miers. Hab. ——?

G. furcicaudatus, Miers, Hab. ——?

The Squillide, as will be seen from the foregoing list,

inhabit all the warmer temperate and tropical seas of the globe ;

and the geographical range of the various species is often very

extended. As the females deposit their eggs in holes in the

ground, the ova are never seen upon specimens in collections ;

but the females may always be distinguished from the males

My. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 5

by the absence of the long copulatory appendages which arise

from the bases of the last cephalothoracic limbs in the latter sex.

In the present paper it has not been thought necessary to

describe more than one or two typical species of each genus

in detail; of the other species only the principal distinctive

characters are indicated.

LYSLOSQUILLA.

Coronis, Latreille, Fam. naturelles Régne Anim. p. 183 (1825);

Encyel. Méth. Hist. Nat. x. p. 474 (1825) ; Crust. in Cuvier, Régne

Anim. iv. p. 109 (1829); M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 530

(1837) : nom. preoc.

Squilla (§), M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 518 (1837).

Squilla (sect. i. Maculate), De Haan, Faun. Jap. Crust. p. 220 (1849).

Lystosquilla, Dana, Crust. U.S. Expl. Exped. xiii. p. 615 (1852).

Carapace not longitudinally costate, the cervical suture

posteriorly obsolete. Rostral plate reaching to, but usually

not covering, the base of the eye-peduncles. The five exposed

thoracic segments and the segments of the postabdomen loosely

articulated and depressed; the latter are wider than the

thoracic segments, and are not longitudinally carinate ; the

terminal segment is transverse; and the two mobile spines

of the posterior margin are absent or very minute. Dactylus

of the raptorial limbs not dilated at base, and armed on its

inner margin with long and usually numerous spines. The

appendages of the three posterior pairs of thoracic limbs are

slender and styliform, or dilated and compressed.

Sect. 1. Appendages of the antepenultimate joint of the three posterior

pairs of thoracic limbs compressed, but scarcely dilated, almost linear.

(Lysiosquilla, Dana.)

Lysiosquilla maculata. (PI. I. figs. 1, 2.)

Squilla arenaria, Rumph, Amboin. Rarit. p. 6, pl. ii. fig. E (1705).

Squilla maculata, Faby. Ent. Syst. ii. p. 511 (1793), Suppl. p. 415

(1798); Lamarck, Hist. Anim. sans Vert. v. p. 188 (1818) ; Desm.

Consid. Crust. p. 250 (1825); Latr. Encycl. Méth. Hist. Nat. x.

p. 470 (1825); M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 518, pl. xxvi.

fig. 1] (1837); De Haan, Faun. Japon. Cr. p. 221 (1849); White,

List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 83 (1847).

Cancer (Mantis) arenarius, Herbst, Nat. Krabben u. Krebse, ii. p. 96,

pl. xxxili. fig. 2 (1796).

Lysiosquilla maculata, Miers, P. Z. 8. p. 188 (1877) ; Philosoph. Trans.

Roy. Soc. clxvili. p. 494 (1879).

Carapace smooth, oblong-oval, somewhat widening poste-

riorly, and rounded at its antero-lateral and postero-lateral

angles, without longitudinal carine. Rostrum semioval, flat-

tened, and acuminated at its distal end. ‘The exposed thoracic

6 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

segments and the segments of the postabdomen are smooth ;

the three posterior thoracic segments similar to, but narrower

than the postabdominal segments. None of the segments bear

lateral spines. Terminal segment transverse, with a slight

median longitudinal elevation; the posterior margin straight,

with a slight median emargination ; there are, on each side,

three postero-lateral marginal teeth, of which the two outer

only are acute. Eyes large. Antennules and antenne small

and slender; the second, third, and fourth joints of the antennee

bear each a small appendage on their inner or under sides ;

the basal antennal scale is large, lamellate, and ciliated. The

first maxillipedes are slender, elongated, and terminate in a

flattened, dilated, and ovate joint. ‘The large raptorial limbs

(second maxillipedes) are very powerful and greatly elon-

gated; the penultimate joint or propus is very finely denticulated

and armed with four strong mobile spies near its base, and

the terminal joint (in the male) with nine or ten very strong

spines. The penultimate joint of the three following limbs is

considerably enlarged, produced and rounded posteriorly. The

appendage to the antepenultimate joint of the three posterior

thoracic limbs is styliform and slender in the adult. The rami

of the postabdominal appendages are foliaceous and very greatly

enlarged. The distal ends of the basal portions of the appen-

dages of the sixth segment are armed below with two exceed-

ingly strong spines and a single spine above ; and the rami are

ovate, the terminal joint of the inner being slightly the larger.

Length of the largest male upwards of 12 inches.

Hab. Indo-Pacitic Region.

This, which is the largest and perhaps the most strikingly

coloured, is also one of the commonest and most widely dis-

tributed species of the genus. Specimens are in the British-

Museum collection from Rodriguez (H. H. Slater, Esq.),

Indian Ocean (Mus. Leach), Duke-of-York Island (Rev. G.

Brown), Philippine Islands (H. Cuming, Esq.), Fiji Islands

(HLILS. ‘ Herald’), Sandwich Islands (W. A. Pease, Esq.),

Samoa Islands (Rev. S. J. Whitmee), Hastern Seas (Madame

Ida Pfeiffer) *.

The only females I have seen are two collected by Mr.

Whitmee at the Samoa Islands ; and in the only one possessing

the large raptorial limbs, the spines arming the inner margin

of the dactyl, stead of being strong and elongated as in the

* There is in the British Museum a fine male example of this species,

obtained from H.B.M. Consul Petherick, and stated to have come from

the “ White Nile.” It was, in all probability, obtained in the Red Sea,

as I am informed by Dr. J. Murie, who accompanied Consul Petherick,

that the latter gentleman took ship on his return at Suakin, on the Red-

Sea coast,

My. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. t

males, are very short, and toward the base are reduced to little

more than small serratures or teeth (see fig. 2).

Lysiosquilla glabriuscula.

? Squilla glabriuscula, Liam. Hist. Anim. sans Vert. v. p. 188 (1818) ;

Latreille, Encycl. Méth. Hist. Nat. x. p. 470 (1825); M.-Edw. Hist.

Nat. Crust. ii. p. 519 (1837).

Squilla vittata, M-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 519 (1837) ; White,

List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 83 (1847); Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc.

p. 199 (1850).

The principal distinction between this species and Lysto-

squilla maculata consists in the smaller number of the spinules

with which the terminal joint of the large raptorial limbs is

armed. In L. maculata these are, as has been stated, nine or

ten in number; in L. glabriuscula there are only from five to

seven.

Hab. West Indies.

Two specimens, both of them males, are in the British

Museum from the West Indies, St. Vincent (Rev. Lans-

downe Guilding).

Slight as the character separating this species from its

Indo-Pacific congener may appear, it is probably permanent.

The two specimens in the Museum collection are of smaller

size than average-sized examples of L. maculata; but in smaller

examples of this latter species the spines on the dactylus of the

raptorial limbs are not less numerous than in fully-grown indivi-

duals. With regard to the coloration of L. glabriuscula, it may

be observed that the tripartite division of the dark transverse

bands, noted by Milne-Edwards, is observable only in the an-

terior band of each segment in one of the Museum specimens.

The description of L. glabriuscula as given by Lamarck

and Latreille seems to refer to this species, although its iden-

tification must remain uncertain, as the habitat is doubtfully

given as the Indian Ocean by the authors above named. On

the other hand, the habitat of St. Vincent is given by Latreille

tor L. maculata. May there not have been here some confu-

sion of localities ?

Lysiosquilla scabricauda.

Squilla scabricauda, Lam. Hist. Anim. sans Vert. v. p. 188 (1818) ;

Latreille, Eneycl. Méth. Hist. Nat. x. p. 470 (1825), Atlas, pl. exxv.

fig. 1; Desm. Consid. Crust. p. 251, pl. xl. (1825) ; M.-Edw. Hist.

Nat. Crust. ii. p. 519 (1857) ; Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc. p. 199

(1850); S. I. Smith, Trans. Conn. Acad. ii. p. 41 (1869),

Squilla Hoevenr, Herklots, Addit. Faun. carcin. Afric. occident. p. 17,

pl. i. fig. 11 (1851). ,

Lysiosquila inornata, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exped. xiii. (Cr. i.) p. 616,

pl. xli. fig. 1 (1852).

8 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

Mainly distinguished by the sculpture of the last two post-

abdominal segments, which have the dorsal surface finely

granulated. The posterior margin of the antepenultimate seg-

ment, both the anterior and posterior margins of the penultimate

segment, and the anterior margin of the last segment are

armed with a series of small spinules. The terminal segment

is armed on its upper surface with an elevated longitudinal

median shield-like prominence; its three postero-lateral mar-

ginal teeth are very strong and acute ; and its posterior margin,

on either side of the median emargination, is divided into

several small truncated lobules or denticles. The dactyli

of the raptorial limbs bear nine or ten long spmes. The

upper surtace of the basal portion of the uropoda bears several

unequal spinules. The coloration is similar to that of L. ma-

culata; but the bluish or dusky transverse bands are (if one may

judge from dried specimens) narrower than in that species.

Hab. Atlantic Region.

Specimens are in the British Museum from Brazil (Lord

Stuart de Rothsay and John Miers, Esq., FR.S.).

Milne-Edwards records this species from the West Indies,

Gibbes from Charleston Harbour, South Carolina, Latreille

from Cayenne, and Herklots from Boutry, on the west coast

of Africa (as S, Hoevent).

It is probably to this species that a Squzlla noticed by Dr.

A. Ernst (P. Z. 8S. 1870, p. 3), as having been captured at La

Guayra, Venezuela, is to be referred.

In a dried individual which is apparently of the female sex,

the spines of the dactyli of the raptorial limbs are in all re-

spects similar to those of male individuals.

The denticles of the posterior margin of the terminal seg-

ment vary greatly in size andnumber. Dana probably sepa-

rated his Z. ¢nornata on account of the differences presented

in this respect between his specimens and Milne-Edwards’s

description of L. scabricauda ; but they cannot be regarded as

of specific value.

Lysiosquilla Desaussuret.

Squilla scabricauda, De Saussure, Rev. et Mag. Zool. vy. p. 367 (1853) ;

nee Latr.

Squilla Desaussuret, Stimpson, Boston Journ, Nat. Hist. vi. p. 503

(1857).

Stimpson evidently founded this species on the description

of M. de Saussure, who says (/. ¢.) that his specimens differed

from those of L. scabricauda in the Paris Museum in having

the dactyl of the raptorial limbs armed with eleven teeth (the

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 9

terminal included) instead of eight, as in the Paris specimens—

moreover, in having the constricted portion of the arm at its

articulation with the wrist much more elongated, and the anal

shield (terminal segment) more spinous.

Hab. Mazatlan (Pacific coast of Mexico).

Not having seen specimens, I cannot express any definite

opinion with regard to the distinctness of this species from its

Atlantic congener.

Sect. 2. Appendages of the antepenultimate joint of the three posterior pairs of

thoracic limbs compressed and greatly dilated, ovate or orbiculute-ovate*.

(Coronis, Latr.)

Lysiosquilla scolopendra.

Coronis scolopendra, Latr. Encycl. Méth. x. p. 474 (1825); Guérin,

Icon. R. A. Cr. pl. xxxiv. fig. 2; M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii.

p. 531 (1837); M.-Edw. Cr. in Cuv. Régne Anim. pl. ly. fig. 3.

Latreille describes this crustacean as having a narrower

and more depressed form than that of Squdl/a, and shorter

antenne and legs. The carapace is of a deep brown, and

generally smooth, with some small raised lines, in the shape

of fine longitudinal striz, on a depression in the middle of

the dorsal surface of most of the segments. The rostral plate

is nearly triangular, and acute at the end. The terminal post-

abdominal segment is nearly square, a little obliquely trun-

cate at each postero-lateral angle, elsewhere entire, without

teeth or distinct spines. The raptorial limbs are whitish and

spotted with brown. The penultimate joint is oval, greatly

compressed, but somewhat more convex on one of its surfaces,

with the inner margin clothed with very small numerous

spinuliform cilia, and armed at base with three or four mobile

spines; the dactylus is like that of Sguilla, falcate or arcuate,

with a dozen acute teeth on its inner margin, the terminal

spine being the largest.

This crustacean formed part of a collection of Crustacea

made by M. Lalande at Brazil; but as it had great affinity

with the L. eusebia, Risso, it might, in M. Latreille’s opinion,

have been obtained on the coast of the island of Madeira,

where M. Lalande stayed and collected for a few days.

When Milne-Edwards was engaged on the description of this

genus, in the second volume of the ‘ Hist. naturelle des

Crustacés,’ the type was no longer to be found in the collec-

tion of the Paris Museum.

* In L. Braziert, as noted above, the appendages of the last pair of legs

are not dilated.

10 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

Lystosquilla eusebia.

Syuilla eusebia, Risso, Crust. de Nice, p. 113 (1816); Hist. Nat.

Europe Mérid. v. p. 87, pl. iv. fig. 15 (1826); Kessler, Hore Soe.

entom. Rossice, iv. p. 41, pl. 1. fig. 5 (1866-67); Nardo, Annot.

Crostacei, in Mem. Instit. Veneto, p. 528, pl. xiv. fig. 7 (1868).

According to M. Risso, the head terminates in a long

spine (the rostral plate); the carapace is nearly flattened,

oblong, smooth, with brown punctulations; the eyes are

greenish ; the lateral scales (antennal scales?) oval, ciliated ;

the first pair of legs rather long, filiform, armed with ten very

slender pectinately-disposed spines, the other legs short, nacre-

ous; the postabdominal segments smooth, rounded, but little

convex, of a rosy red, punctulated with brown, the first three

less dilated than the median ones, the last armed with six

small spines on each side and eight scarcely discernible ones

on its summit; caudal plates oval, ciliated, the median one

(basal prolongation ?) with two spines, the terminal one very

small.

Hab. Mediterranean.

According to M. Kessler, the rostral plate in this species is

quadrangular, somewhat broader than long, its anterior margin

with a sharp tooth-like median lobe ; the dactylus of the rap-

torial limbs is armed with eleven spines (besides the terminal

spine) in his specimens.

Lysiosquilla (Coronis) latifrons.

Squilla latifrons, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 222, pl. li. fig. 3

(1849).

Carapace longer than broad; posterior margin twice as

broad as the anterior, with the antero-lateral angles obtuse

and the postero-lateral broadly rounded. Rostrum broader

than long, with the antero-lateral angles rounded, and with

a long median spine. A small spine on each side of the

antennal segment. Dactyli of the raptorial limbs with seven

spines. Lateral processes of the exposed thoracic segments

truncate. Appendages of the thoracic limbs ovate, and

broader than in the young L. maculata. Sixth postabdominal

segment obliquely suleated near the lateral margin ; posterior

margin entire, with only a single spine near the postero-lateral

angles. Seventh segment twice as broad as long, convex,

with seven spinules disposed in a transverse series behind the

middle line; the median flat, trigonous, and not produced at

base, the next on each side produced at base on its outer

margin, the third somewhat thickened at base ; postero-lateral

margin with three narrow acute spines (the last mobile), a

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 11

single spinule between the anterior spines, three between the

posterior ; posterior margin with about ten very minute

spinules, separated by a sinus in the middle line; lower sur-

face with a spine behind the anus. Inner spine of the basal

prolongation of the uropoda unispinose at base on its imner

margin.

Hab. Japan.

The above description is modified and considerably abridged

from that of De Haan. I have seen no specimens of this

species.

Lysiosquilla Braziert, sp.n. (Pl. I. figs. 3-6.)

I designate by this name a female specimen, obtained by

John Brazier, Esq., at Port Jackson in three fathoms of

water, on the Sow-and-Pigs Bank. It is evidently closely

allied to L. latifrons, but differs in having the dactyli of the

raptorial limbs six-spined, in the posterior margin of the

terminal segment being without a median sinus, and armed

with more numerous spinules (about fourteen), and particu-

larly in the appendages of the last pair of thoracic limbs

being scarcely dilated, almost linear, whereas those of the

two preceding pairs are ovate and broadly expanded. In this

respect this interesting form establishes a complete transition

between the typical Lystosquille and Coronis. The unique

example was presented by its discoverer to the British Museum;

and I have much pleasure in dedicating the species to him.

Lysiosquilla acanthocarpus. (Pl. I. figs. 7-9.)

Coronis acanthocarpus, Gray (ined.), White, List Crust. Brit. Mus, p. 85

(1847), descript. nulla.

The principal distinctive characters of this species are the

following :—The dilated basal portion of the rostral plate is

nearly quadrate, the antero-lateral angles being right angles

and not produced into spines; the terminal median spine is

rather short and somewhat triangular, broadest at base. The

last postabdominal segment has six small similar spines in a

transverse series on its upper surface ; the lateral spines and

intervening spinules are nearly as in L. tricarinata. The

dactyli of the raptorial limbs are armed with six spines, the

one next the terminal spine being very small. The distal

prolongation of the basal portion of the uropoda ends in two

simple slender spines, the inner being the longer. Length

about 24 inches.

The single specimen collected (a female) was obtained at

Port Essington by Sir J. Richardson, by whom it was pre-

sented to the British Museum.

12 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

Lysiosquilla spinosa. (Pl. I. figs. 10-12.)

Coronis spinosa, Wood-Mason, Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, p, 282

(1875).

? Squilla indefensa, Kirk, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. (ser. 5) ii. p. 466

(1878).

Is described by Mr. Wood-Mason as having three spines

projecting from the telson, just above the level of the marginal

ones, of which there are three pairs ; the median pair movable

and smaller than the rest, and with the interval between them

finely serrated (five or six teeth on each side of the middle

line), between these and each lateral pair two spinules, be-

tween the teeth of each lateral pair one spinule; dactyli of

raptorial limbs 10-toothed.

It inhabits the Andamans and the seas of New Zealand.

I refer the Squdlla indefensa of Kirk, from Chatham Island

and Kapiti, to this species, because his short description agrees

with Mr. Wood-Mason’s diagnosis; but more details are

needed to render the identification certain. Kirk describes

the rostral plate as semioval and acute at its distal extremity,

and the carapace as retracted in front, expanded and rounded

behind, smooth, with the antero-lateral angles rounded and

slightly produced forwards.

It is very probable that the Lystosquilla tricarinata (Coronis

tricarinata, Gray, ined., White, List Cr. Brit. Mus. p. 85,

1847) is identical with this species. The unique example,

a male, was collected in the Antarctic expedition under

Captain Sir J. C. Ross; and the locality has not been pre-

served. Kirk’s description applies very well to this specimen ;

but no mention is made in it of the spinules between the mar-

ginal spines of the terminal postabdominal segment. ‘There

are in L. tricarinata about a dozen minute spinules between

the submedian marginal spines, between the submedian and

second marginal spines two or three spinules on each side,

and between the second and third marginal spines one, as in

C. spinosa; the dactylus of the raptorial limbs is armed with

only nine spines on its inner margin, including the terminal

spine.

LEPTOSQUILLA, gen. nov.

This genus is distinguished from all others of this family

by the form of the ophthalmic segment, which is greatly

elongated and prolonged beyond the rostrum for more than

half its length. The eye-peduncles are very slender, elon-

gated, and compressed, not dilated in the middle as in

Chloridella, or at the distal end as usual in Squilla. The ap-

pendages of the thoracic limbs are almost linear, not dilated.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 13

The carapace is very short ; the two dorsal carine of the first

to fifth postabdominal segments are obsolete. The terminal

segment is well developed. If the figure be correct, the

dactyli of the raptorial limbs are thickened at base, as in

Gonodactylus, and have six spines on their inner margins.

Leptosquilla Schmeltzii.

Squilla Schmeltzii, A. M.-Edwards, J. Mus. Godeflroy, i. (pt.iv.) p. 87,

pl. ii. tig. 7 (1878).

Carapace rather narrow, with the antero-lateral angles

spiniform and not very prominent. Rostral plate small and

obtuse. Postabdominal segments with two prominent carine

on each side, which are produced into spines on the sixth

segment; terminal segment broader than long, armed above

with a median carina and with six acute marginal teeth.

Dactyli of the raptorial limbs with seven spines (including

the terminal spine), margin of the penultimate joint finely den-

ticulated. Uropoda greatly reduced in size; thoracic limbs

very small.

Hab. Upolu, Samoa Islands.

I have seen no specimens of this species. Its colour is a

bright grey.

IT have taken the above description from Milne-Kdwards.

In the figure the penultimate postabdominal segment is six-

spined. The terminal segment is represented as having about

six spinules between the submedian spines of the posterior

margin, and half a dozen more on each side between these

and the next spines.

CHLORIDELLA*.

Chlorida, Eydoux and Souleyet, Voy. de la Bonite, Zool. i. Crust.

. 264 (1841); Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii, Cr. i. p. 615 (1852),

ootnote.

This genus is very nearly allied to Squil/a, and particularly

to the species comprised in Section A in the present revision,

but differs in the form of the eye-peduncles, which are of an

ovoid form, greatly dilated in their middle portion, and con-

stricted at the extremity, the cornea being very small and

terminal. ‘The rostral plate and carapace are very small, the

former not reaching nearly to the base of the eye-peduncles.

The cervical suture is posteriorly distinct. The appendages

of the thoracic limbs (in the specimen of C. microphthalma

in the Museum collection and in C. Latretllet) are somewhat

* The name given to this genus having been preoccupied among the

Coleoptera, I have slightly modified its termination.

14 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

strap-shaped and dilated, but not to so great an extent as in

the typical species of the section Coronis of the genus Lysio-

squilla,

The Sguilla ichneumon of Fabricius, Ent. Syst. Suppl.

p. 416 (1798), may belong either to this genus or to a species

of the first section of the genus Squilla.

The Sguilla phalangium of the same author (/. ¢.) is so

briefly described that it is impossible to say whether it belongs

to this genus, Lysiosquilla, or Pseudosquilla; in the five-

spined dactylus of the raptorial limbs, which has the third and

fifth spine longest, it appears to resemble Lysdosquilla acan-

thocarpus ; and that species may prove to be identical with it.

Chloridella microphthalma. (Pl. I. figs. 1-4.)

ere microphthalma, M.-EKdwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 523

1837).

Corie microphthalma, Eydoux and Souleyet, Voy. Bonite, Cr. p. 266

(1841).

A single specimen, which I refer to this species, is in the

Museum collection. The body is somewhat loosely articulated

and depressed. The carapace is smooth, widening posteriorly,

with a small spine at the antero-lateral and broadly rounded

at the postero-lateral angles. The rostral plate is small,

semioval, and regularly rounded. ‘The fourth thoracic seg-

ment is scarcely at all laterally produced, but is armed on each

side with a very small spinule; the fifth, sixth, and seventh

are broader, but little produced and rounded on the sides ; the

first to fifth postabdominal segments are smooth in the

middle of the dorsal surface, but are faintly marked with two

lateral carinee; the postero-lateral angle of each segment is

acute; on the sixth segment the submedian as well as the

lateral carinee are present, and all terminate in spines. The

terminal segment is broader than long, with a median obtuse

crest, and on either side of it several irregular tubercles, and

with six acute marginal teeth, between which are a number

of smaller spiniform teeth. The antennal scale is very small.

The dactyli of the raptorial limbs are four-spined, the terminal

spine being very long. The uropoda are small; the basal

prolongation is armed on its inner margin with a series of

small spinules (asin C. decorata) ; the inner of its two terminal

spines is the longest, and armed with a blunt tooth on its

outer margin. Length about 15 inch.

The specimen in the Museum collection is a male, and was

obtained at Port Essington by Mr. R. Tilston. Its integu-

ment is remarkably thin and fragile. It differs somewhat in

the form of the rostral plate from Milne-Edwards’s description

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 15

of that part in C. microphthalma. If distinet, I would pro-

pose for it the name of C. depressa.

MM. Eydoux and Souleyet obtained C. microphthalma at

Singapore.

Chlorideila rotundicauda, sp. n. (Pl. II. figs. 5, 6.)

This species is nearly allied to C. microphthalma, but differs

as follows :—The rostrum is somewhat more elongated; there

is no spine at the antero-lateral angles of the carapace. ‘The

carine of the first to fifth postabdominal segments are very

faintly indicated; those of the sixth seement are strongly

defined. The medion carina of the jal segment 1s

thickened and obtuse posteriorly ; the lateral marginal spines

are obsolete, and the intervening denticles are small and not

acute. ‘The eye-peduncles none the imner margins straight,

and are convex only on their outer pace Length

2? inches.

<4 single female is in the collection from Formosa (R.

Swinhoe, Esq.). It is possible that it may prove to be only

an ine state of C. microphthalma.

Chloridella Latreillet.

Chlorida Latreillei, Kydoux and Souleyet, Voy. Bonite, Cr. p. 265,

pl. v. figs. 2-5 (1841).

This species is very nearly allied to C. microphthalma, but

differs in the form of the rostral plate, which is much broader

than long and slightly emarginate at its distal end. The

antennules are described as large and much longer than the

antenne. The inner of the terminal spines of the basal por-

tion of the uropoda is represented in the figure as having two

acute teeth on its outer margin.

The raptorial limbs were wanting in the type, which was

obtained at Singapore.

Chloridella decorata.

Chlorida decorata, WWood-Mason, Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, p. 231

(1875).

This species has, according to Mr. Wood-Mason, eyes as in

C. microphthalma and C. Latreille:. he inner margin of the

sabre-like appendage (basal prolongation) of the uropoda is

‘armed with fine acuminate spines ; and the terminal postabdo-

minal segment is vermiculated above and below with granu-

lated ridges ; the dactyli of the raptoriat limbs are five -toothed.

This species inhabits the Andamans. I have seen no

specimens.

16 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

SQUILLA.

Squilla, Fabr. (part.), Ent. Syst. ii. p. 511 (1798); Latreille (part.),

Hist. Nat. Crust. vi. p. 271 (1803); Encycl. Méth. Hist. Nat. x.

p. 467 (1825); Lamarck (part.), Hist. Anim. sans Vert. v. p. 186

(1818) ; M.-Edwards (part.), Hist. Nat. Cr. ii. p. 517 (1887); De

Haan (part.), Faun. Japon. Cr. p. 220 (1849) ; Dana, Cr. U.S. Expl.

Exp. xii. i. p. 615 (1852),

Carapace usually marked with more or less distinct longi-

tudinal coste. Cervical suture posteriorly distinct. Rostral

plate rarely covering the base of the eye-peduncles. The

four or five posterior exposed thoracic segments and the post-

abdominal segments are compactly articulated, the latter

marked with six or eight longitudinal carine; terminal seg-

ment without or with two very minute mobile spines at its

distal end. Dactylus of the raptorial limbs not dilated at

base, and armed with long spines on its inner margin. The

appendages of the three posterior thoracic limbs are slender

and styliform.

A. The exposed thoracic segments and the first to fifth postabdominal

segments with the dorsal surface marked with submedian carine ;

terminal segment usually without mobile spines at its distal end.

I. Penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs without a serves of

immobile marginal spines.

* Dactyli of the raptorial limbs armed with three spines.

Squilla Ferussacii.

Squilla Ferussacti, Roux, Crust. de la Méditerranée (livr. 6), pl. xxviii.

(1880); M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 525 (1857); Heller,

Cr. stidl. Europa, p. 308 (1863); Haller, Zool. Anzeiger, p. 207

(1879).

Carapace widening posteriorly. Rostrum transverse, appa-

rently covering the ophthalmic segment, and divided by a

slight median emargination into two lobes. The median as

well as the lateral ridges of the postabdominal segments are

very distinctly defined: the terminal segment is armed with

eight strong marginal spines, but is without any intervening

denticles; on its upper surface, on each side of the strong

median, a smaller lateral ridge is shown in Roux’s figure.

The dactylus of the raptorial limbs is armed with only two

slender spines, besides the strong terminal spine. The distal

prolongation of the basal portion of the uropoda is repre-

sented as slender and elongated, with two lateral besides

the long terminal spine. The dominant colour of the body

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 17

is, according to Roux, purple, washed in some parts with

greenish. ‘lhe dactyli of the raptorial limbs, antennules and

antenne, and cilia of the basal antennal scales and uropoda

are red.

Hab. Mediterranean. ,

Having seen no specimens of this rare and beautiful species,

I have taken the above description from the description and

figure of Roux, whose examples were brought from Sicily by

M. Caron. A single example has quite recently been recorded

by Haller from Nice. In many of its characters it is allied to

Pseudosquilla.

** Dactyli of the raptorial limbs armed with four spines,

Squilla miles.

Squilla miles, Hess, Archiv f. Naturgesch. p. 169, pl. vii. fig. 21

(1865).

Carapace elongated and narrowed anteriorly, with the cer-

vical suture strongly defined and deeply sinuated posteriorly ;

on the postero-lateral regions of the carapace are two short

lateral carinz ; the antero-lateral as well as the postero-lateral

angles of the carapace are rounded. Rostrum ovate, smooth,

somewhat longer than broad. The carine on the exposed

thoracic and postabdominal segments are distinctly defined ;

on the fifth postabdominal segment the lateral carine, and on

the sixth all the carine terminate in spines. On the sides of

each segment, between the second and third carine, is a

flattened triangulate prominence; the terminal segment is

armed with five longitudinal median crests, and the inter-

spaces with small irregular prominences ; there are six strong

marginal spines, and in the intervening spaces numerous smaller

denticles. The submedian marginal spines end each in a

small mobile spinule. The dactyli of the raptorial limbs are

small and armed with three spines besides the terminal one.

The distal prolongation of the basal portion of the uropoda

terminates in two strong spines, of which the imnermost is

curved.

The length of this species, as given by Hess, is-17'2 centims.

A male specimen in the Museum is only half the size

(34 inches).

Hab. Australia, Sydney (Mus. Gttingen) ; Victoria (Mus.

Brit.).

In the Museum specimen the ridge between the second and

third carine on the first to fifth postabdominal segments is

linear and oblique.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 2

18 My. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

*** Dactyli of the raptorial limbs armed with five spines.

Squilla scorpio. (Pl. II. fig. 7.)

Squilla scorpio, Latr. Encycl. Méth. x. p. 472 (1825); M.-Edw. Hist.

Nat. Crust. ii. p. 522 (1887); White, List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 84

(1847).

Carapace with three longitudinal carinze, which are inter-

rupted by the distinctly marked cervical suture ; the antero-

lateral angles are armed with a short spine; and the postero-

lateral lobes of the carapace have a slightly raised outer

margin, and ashort carina on the upper surface. The rostrum

is suboblong, and armed with a short median ridge. The

anterior of the exposed thoracic segments is produced laterally

into a somewhat curved and falcate acute lobe, which is ex-

cavated above at base; the two following are but little laterally

produced and rounded ; the first to sixth postabdominal seg-

ments are armed with eight longitudinal carine, but are

without any median carina or tubercle; on the fitth segment

all except the submedian, and on the sixth segment all the

carine terminate in spinules. The terminal segment is smooth

on its upper surface, and is armed with a median carina; four

small rounded lobes between the median, and four to five

between the median and first lateral spines. The distal pro-

longation of the basal part of the uropoda terminates in two

unequal spines. Length about 3 inches.

Hab. Asiatic and Australian seas.

_ Specimens are in the Museum collection from Port Essing-

ton (Earl of Derby and J. Gould, Esq., F.R.S.), North

Australia (Dr. J. R. Elsey), and Shanghai (2. Swinhoe, Hsq.).

It is recorded by Latreille from Pondicherry.

In adult males the carine of the penultimate postabdominal

seement, and the median carina and marginal teeth of the

terminal segment, are considerably thickened. ‘T’his peculi-

arity it not observable in a female (apparently adult) and

two younger individuals in the Museum collection.

T have little hesitation in identifying the Museum specimens

with Latreille’s description, as he particularly mentions the

form of the tooth-like lateral prolongation of the first exposed

thoracic segment, while Milne-Edwards refers to the dila-

tation of the median ridge of the terminal postabdominal

segment.

Squilla Dufresnit. (PI. II. figs. 8, 9.)

Squilla Dufresnii, Leach (MS.), White, List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 83

(1847), sine descr.

The two examples of this species in the Museum collection,

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 19

one of which bears Leach’s MS. label, bear a very great

resemblance to S. scorpio, but differ in the following particu-

lars :—The median longitudinal carina of the carapace is

bipartite posterior to the cervical suture; there is a distinct

median dorsal carinule on each of the exposed thoracic and

first to sixth postabdominal segments, which, however, does

not reach to the anterior or posterior margin of the segment ;

the anterior of the exposed thoracic segments is laterally acute,

but not curved and produced as in S. scorpio; and the two

following segments are laterally truncated. Length about

3 inches.

Hab. Unknown.

One of the specimens (the one bearing Leach’s label) is a

male; but the carine of the penultimate and terminal post-

abdominal segments are not thickened as in S. scorpio.

uilla prasinolineata ?

(Pl. IL. fig. 10.) |

? Squilla prasinolineata, Dana, Crust. U.S. Expl. Exped. xiii. p. 626,

pl. xli. fig. 8 (1852).

To this species I doubtfully refer a female Sguwilla in the

Museum collection that is evidently very closely allied to both

the preceding species. Its chief distinctive characters are as

follows :—The rostrum is proportionally somewhat broader

than in either of the foregoing species. The median longi-

tudinal carina of the carapace is indistinctly furcate only in

its anterior portion; the cervical suture is faintly marked ;

the median carinules of the exposed thoracic and first to

sixth postabdominal segments are obsolete ; the first exposed

thoracic segment is laterally produced into a short acute

process, which is not so much curved as in S, scorpio ; the two

following segments are also shortly laterally produced and acute,

the terminal postabdominal segment is proportionally nar-

rower and more elongated than in either S. scorpio or S.

Dufresnii; there are about six small rounded lobes between

the submedian marginal spines, and between these and the

first lateral marginal spines. The distal prolongation of the

basal portion of the uropoda terminates in two unequal spines,

the inner of which has a small rounded tooth on its inner

margin. Length 2? inches.

Hab. Brazil.

I refer this specimen with some hesitation to S. pras?-

nolineata, as Dana does not mention the acute lateral

prolongations of the posterior thoracic segments, and de-

scribes the upper surface of the terminal postabdominal seg-

20 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

ment as faintly sulcated. His specimens were from Rio

Janeiro.

Squilla supplex.

Squilla suppler, Wood-Mason, Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, p. 282

(1875).

I am only acquainted with this species from Mr. Wood-

Mason’s short diagnosis, according to which each of the post-

abdominal segments is armed with nine carine, arranged

three in the middle and three on each side ; the terminal seg-

ment has three short oblique ridges on each side, between

which and the strong median ridge on each side is a row of

confluent tubercles in the same straight line with the two

median marginal teeth; dactyli of the raptorial limbs with five

teeth.

Hab. Bombay.

Squilla multicarinata.

Squila multicariata, White, List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 84 (1847) ;

Proce. Zool. Soc. p. 144, pl. vi. fig. 1 (1848).

Carapace with the cervical suture scarcely defined, except

in its posterior portion, and with the whole of its upper surface

covered with very numerous closely-placed longitudinal carine,

its antero-lateral angles terminating in a short spine. Ros-

trum oblong, with a median carina; the exposed thoracic and

postabdominal segments are covered, like the carapace, with

numerous longitudinal carinee, which terminate posteriorly in

small spines, the normal carine of each segment being some-

what more prominent than the rest. The fonrth, fifth, and

sixth thoracic segments are laterally bilobate; the termmal

postabdominal segment is carinated as the preceding; the

median carina terminates in a spinule; the interspaces between

the terminal marginal spines contain six tubercles; and be-

tween these and the first lateral spines there are eight. or

nine. ‘The uropoda are carinated above and below, and the

distal prolongation of the basal portion terminates in two

strong spines. Length about 2% inches.

Hab. Seas of Eastern Asia. Specimens from the Philip-

pine Islands (Cuming) and Nangasaki Bay (H.M.S. ‘ Sama-

rang’) are in the Museum collection. The only male, one

from the latter locality, is small and in a badly-preserved

condition.

The dactyli of the raptorial limbs are normally five-spined ;

but the left-hand dactylus of one of the Philippine specimens is

seven-spined.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 21

**** Dactyli of the raptorial limbs armed with six spines.

Squilla costata.

Squilla costata, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 228, pl. li. fig. 5

(1849),

This species is described by De Haan as having the front

truncated at apex. Sides of the thoracic segments bispinose ;

spines of the same form as in S. nepa (3S. oratoria, De H.).

In the median region of the thorax and postabdomen there are

five straight, approximated, continuous, equal carine ; between

these and the three lateral carine the postabdominal surface

is roughened with short curved carinules or raised tubercles ;

in the fifth segment eight, and in the sixth segment six of the

caring terminate in a spine; in the middle of the posterior

segment there are also five carine, of which the inner is less

elevated than the lateral ones, and the outer are short and

oblique. Terminal segment with a continuous curved carina

on each side between the median ridge and lateral margin,

with five oblique carinules, which become obsolete at base,

and with the spines produced into carine. Dactyli of the

raptorial limbs six-spined.

Hab, Japan. .

Of this small species De Haan had several examples. I

have seen no specimens. It evidently presents many affini-

ties with S. multicarinata, but differs not only in the six-

spined dactyli of the raptorial limbs, but also, it would appear,

by the carapace not being marked with carinule or ridges.

Squilla mantis. (Pl. II. fig. 11.)

Squille mante, De Geer, Mém. pour servir a hist. des Insectes, vii.

p. 533, pl. xxxiv. fig. 1 (1778).

Squilla mantis, Latr. Hist. Nat. Crust. vi. p. 278, pl. lv. fig. 1 (1802) ;

Encycl. Méth. Hist. Nat. x. p. 471 (1825); Atlas, pl. ccxev. figs. 1, 7,

and pl. ccexxiv.; Cuv. Régne Anim. iv. p. 108 (1829); Lam. Hist.

Anim. sans Vert. v. p. 187 (1818) ; Risso, Hist. Nat. Eur. mérid. v.

p. 85 (1826) ; M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 520 (1837); Crust.

in Cuy. R.A. (ed. 3), Atlas, pl. lv. fig. 1; White, List Crust. Brit.

Mus. p. 83 (1847); Lucas, Anim. artic. in Expl. Algérie, i. p. 50

(1849); Bell, Brit. Crust. p. 351 (1851); Johnson, Ann. & Mag.

Nat. Hist. iii. p. 56 (1859); Heller, Crust. siidl. Europa, p. 306,

pl. x. figs. 15-19 (1863); B. Capello, J. Acad. Sci. Lisboa, p. 80

(1877).

? Cancer (Mantis) digitalis, Herbst, Naturg. Krabben, &c. p. 93,

pl. xxxiil. fig. 1 (1796).

Carapace narrowed anteriorly, with the cervical suture

strongly defined, with a longitudinal median and two lateral

carine, the inner lateral carima being interrupted for a con-

22 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

siderable distance, and with a short spine at the antero-lateral

angles. Rostrum oblong-oval, rounded at its distal end, and

with a short median longitudinal carina. Exposed thoracic

segments with six, and postabdominal segments with eight

longitudinal carine ; the median carina is obsolete, or very

nearly so. The first exposed thoracic segment is laterally

prolonged into a short straight acute lobe ; the two following

are laterally obliquely truncated, the lateral margins being

entire and the postero-lateral angles acute; the last thoracic

seement is not laterally produced, and is furnished with a

small subacute prominence at its antero-lateral angle. On

the first to fourth postabdominal segments all the carinz,

except the submedian ones, terminate in spinules; on the

sixth segment, and usually on the fifth segment, all the carine

end in spinules. The terminal segment is armed on its upper

surface with a strong longitudinal median crest, which termi-

nates in a spinule, and is covered with numerous shallow pits

symmetrically disposed in curved lines; the spines of the

lateral margin are considerably thickened ; there are from six to

eight denticles between the submedian spines of the posterior

margin, and eight or nine rounded prominences terminating

in spinules between the submedian and each of the first lateral

marginal spines. The basal portion of the antenne is without

tleshy appendages ; the basal scale is elongate-ovate and sub-

acute ; the spines of the dactyli of the raptorial limbs are all

of them well developed; the distal prolongation of the basal

portion of the uropoda terminates in two unequal spines, the

lobe on the outer margin of the inner of these being obsolete

or nearly so. Length rarely exceeds 7 inches.

Hab. Mediterranean (very common); Channel (very rare).

Specimens are in the British-Museum collection from Nice

(Old Collection); Adriatic Sea (G. Cuvier) ; Gibraltar (Mr.

Laughrin) ; Gulf of Aorta (S. Saunders, Esq.) ; Mediter-

ranean, without precise locality (Admiral Spratt, Mr. Laugh-

rin); and others without locality, among them one from

Donovan’s collection, labelled S. vulgaris, by Leach, and one

collected by Surgeon Rayner, of H.M.S. ‘ Herald,’ probably

outside of European seas.

Prof. Bell records the capture of a single female, by Mr.

Couch, on the south-west coast of England; and B. Capello

includes it in his list of Crustacea of the coast of Portugal.

Bianconi (no doubt erroneously) refers specimens obtained

at Mozambique to this species (Mem. Accad. Bologna, ix.

. 210).

: It is probable that Herbst, under the name of S. digitalis,

included more than one species of Squdl/a. His figure, which

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 23

seems intended for S. mantis, nevertheless represents the

dactyli of the raptorial limbs as five-spined. In his descrip-

tion the dactylus is said to be five or six-spined, and the species

to inhabit both the East-Indian and Adriatic seas.

Squilla empusa. (PI. II. fig. 12.)

Squilla empusa, Say, Journ. Ac, Nat. Sci. Philad. i. p. 250 (1818) ;

M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 525 (1887); De Kay, New-

York Fauna, vi. Crust. p. 32, pl. xiii. fig. 54 (1844); White, List

Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 84 (1847); Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc. p. 199

(1850).

This species comes so very near to S. mantis that I was at

first inclined to regard it as merely a variety; the examples

in the Museum, however, may always be distinguished by

the following characters :—The lateral processes of the first

thoracic segment are acute, but, instead of being straight as in

S. mantis, are elongated and curved forward. I may add

that the number of spinules between the submedian and the

first lateral marginal spines of the terminal postabdominal

segment are usually fewer, from five to seven in number.

Hab. Atlantic region.

There are in the Museum collection a young male from

Rhode Island, U.S. (7. Say, Hsq.), and a male and female

from Jamaica (R. S. Redman, Esq.), a young female from

West Africa (Burton), four females from the Gambia (7.

Whitfield, Esq.), two from the Gaboon (fk. b. N. Walker,

Esq., and H. Ansell, Esq.), and a male individual labelled

Squilla caribea ?, without locality, from A. MacLeay, Esq.

It is stated by Gibbes to be frequent in Charleston Habour,

U.S., and by Say to range as far south as Hast Florida.

Squilla neglecta.

Squilla neglecta, Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc. vi. p. 200 (1850).

This species, described by Gibbes from specimens obtained

in Charleston Harbour, South Carolina, is only distinguished

from S. mantis in that the lateral process of the first exposed

thoracic segment is not narrowed gradually to an acutel

pointed termination, but its two edges are parallel and the

extremity is rounded ; so that it is spatuliform, and not spini-

form; the median crest of the last postabdominal segment

terminates posteriorly in an acute spine twice as long as in

the typical S. mantis.

I have seen no specimens. The examination of a sufficient

series might show that both this species and S. empusa are to

be united with S. mantis.

24 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

Squilla dubia.

Squilla mantis, Desm. Consid. Crust. p. 250, pl. xli. fig. 2 (1825), nec

auctorum,

? Squilla dubia, M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 522 (1887);

Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc. vi. p. 200 (1850).

? Squilla rubrolineata, Dana, Crust. U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. p. 618,

pl. xli. fig. 2 (1852); v. Martens, Archiv f. Naturg. xxxviii. p. 144

(1872),

This species is nearly allied to S. mantis; but the rostral

late is narrowed toward and rounded at its distal end and is

without a median keel. The lateral processes of the first exposed

thoracic segment are straight and acute, those of the two fol-

lowing segments obliquely truncated and with the postero-

lateral angles only subacute. The terminal postabdominal

segment has the median carina and the marginal spines and

spinules considerably thickened ; the punctures of the upper

surface are obsolete; but on either side of the median carina

there is a longitudinal series of very small granules or tuber-

cles, between the submedian spines of the posterior margin

there are usually from four to six rounded tubercles or teeth,

and between these and the first lateral marginal spines three

or four on each side; the marginal spines of the dactyli of the

large raptorial limbs are rather small, and the first or proximal

spine is even occasionally obsolete. The distal prolongation

of the base of the uropoda ends in two spines; and the inner

spine bears a well-marked rounded tooth on its outer margin.

Hab, Kast coast of North, Central, and South America.

In the collection of the British Museum there is an adult

male from St. Domingo (collected by Mr. Tweedie), another

from Belize, Honduras (fev. J. Gregg), and three others with-

out special indication of locality (from the Haslar Hospital

collection).

Gibbes’s specimens were from Charleston Harbour, U.5.,

where this species appears to be rare. Von Martens records

numerous specimens collected by Dr. Gundlach at Cuba,

and gives some interesting particulars respecting the varia-

tion in the number of the marginal spines of the dactyli

of the raptorial limbs, and of the marginal spines of the ter-

minal postabdominal segment &c. Dana records it from Rio

de Janeiro.

This is one of the few species of Sgu7lla in which the spines

of the dactyli of the raptorial limbs appear to vary in number.

According to Von Martens, the dactyli are more frequently five-

than six-spined ; in only one of the Museum specimens, how-

ever, are they fewer than six-spined ; and in this example the

dactylus of one side has five, and of the other four spines.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 25

Squilla nepa. (Pl. II. fig. 13.)

Squilla nepa, Latreille, Encycl. Méth. Hist. Nat. x. p. 471 (1825) ;

M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 522 (1887) ; White, List Crust.

Brit. Mus. p. 83 (1847); Gay, Hist. Chili, Zool. iii, p. 224 (1849) ;

Heller, Reise der Novara, Crust. p. 124 (1865); Miers, Cat. New-

Zeal. Crust. p. 89 (1876).

Squilla affinis, Berthold, Abhandl. konigl. Gesellsch. Wissensch. G6t-

tingen, iii. p. 26, pl. iil. figs. 1, 2 (1847).

Squilla oratoria, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Cr. p. 223, pl. li. fig. 2 (1849) ;

Dana, Crust. U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. i. p. 621 (1852); Heller, Reise

der Novara, Crust. p. 124 (1865).

? Squilla Edwardsii, Giebel, Zeitschr. f. d. gesammt. Naturwiss. xviii.

p. 319 (1861).

? Squilla levis, Hess, Archiv f. Naturg p. 170, pl. vii. fig. 22 (1865).

This species may be considered to represent S. mantis in

the Indo-Pacific Region, and may be thus characterized :—The

rostral plate is usually oblong, smooth above, without a median

carina ; the lateral margin of the carapace is not angulated in

front of the postero-lateral lobe; the exposed thoracic seg-

ments and usually two or three of the anterior postabdominal

segments are marked with a longitudinal median impressed

line. The lateral processes of the first three exposed thoracic

segments are bilobate ; the anterior lobe of the first segment

is elongated, curved forward, and acute; in the second and

third segments the posterior lobe is the larger and acute. On

the second to sixth postabdominal segments there usually

exists a small median tubercle, and the first lateral carine are

usually interrupted; the upper surface of the terminal seg-

ment is marked with shallow pits symmetrically disposed in

curved lines on either side of the median keel (asin S. mantis) ;

between the submedian terminal spines there are usually from

six to eight, and between the submedian and first laterai spines

usually seven or eight small denticles or spinules. The distal

prolongation of the base of the uropoda ends in two slender

elongated spines, the inner and longer of which has a small

tooth or lobe on its outer margin. Length of an adult male

about 53 inches.

Hab. Indo-Pacific Region.

The series in the Museum collection includes males and

females from the Indian Ocean (one from General T. Hard-

wicke), China (two from Dr. Leach’s collection), a male and a

female from Amoy, a male and two females from Shanghai

(R. Swinhoe, Esq.), and_a male from Chefoo (2. Swinhoe,

fisq.) ; four males from Yokohama, Japan (2. Batson Joyner,

Esq.), a male from Australia, Port Curtis (HIS. ‘ Rattle-

snake’), males from the Philippines (H. Cuming, Esq., and

H. J. Veitch, Esq.), a female without precise locality (from

26 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

the collection of H.M.S. ‘ Herald’), and a male and female

from Zanzibar (Colonel Playfair).

Besides the above localities, I may note that it has been

recorded by Heller from Ceylon, Madras, Singapore, Java,

Auckland, and Tahiti, as S. nepa, and from Ceylon as S.

oratoria* ; from the island of Banka, by Giebel, as S.

Edwardsii ; from Sydney, by Hess, as S. levis ; and by Milne-

Edwards and Gay from Chili.

The series before me shows that this species varies con-

siderably in the form of the rostrum (which is sometimes more

elongated and narrowed distally), of the lateral processes of the

thoracic segments (which, however, are always bilobate), in

the greater or less rugosity of the postabdominal segments, &c.

It would appear that the specimens referred to by Say and

Gibbes as S. mantis, in their descriptions of S. empusa, belong

to S. nepa.

In a young female from the Philippine Islands, which I at

first separated as a distinct species under the name of S. gracilis,

the dactylus of the raptorial limbs is on one side seven-

and on the other eight-spined, and the lateral lobes of the

bilobate fifth and sixth thoracic segments are rounded. I

may observe that the appendages of the thoracic limbs are

filiform and elongated, not dilated and ovate as (according to

De Haan) they are in the young Lysiosquilla maculata. It

is possible that this is after all the type of a distinct species.

#*#* Dactyli of the raptorial limbs armed with seven or eight spines.

y ip ght sp

Squilla armata.

? Squilla armata, M.-Kdwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 521 (1837) ; Gay,

Hist. de Chile, Zool. iii, Crust. p. 223 (1849).

Tn the specimens in the Museum collection (which I refer to

this species with some hesitation, on account of the brevity

of the descriptions) the carapace is narrowed anteriorly, with

the cervical suture very faintly defined in its posterior portion,

and the lateral longitudinal carine obliterated, except on the

ostero-lateral lobes; the spine at the antero-lateral angles is

small but distinct. The rostral plate is somewhat elongated

and narrowed distally, with a very slight median elevation.

The lateral spines of the antennulary segment are prominent

and curved forward ; and in front of these there are two smaller

spines on the ocular segment. The lateral processes of the

first exposed thoracic segment are narrow, straight, and acute ;

* I do not know on what grounds Dr. Heller separated S. oratoria

from S. nepa.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. Pas

those of the two following segments are broader and rounded

laterally, with a spinule at their postero-lateral angles. There

is a small median carinule or tubercle on the third to fifth post-

abdominal segments; on the fourth and fifth segments the

lateral carine, and on the sixth segment all the carne end in

spinules ; the terminal segment is armed with a few tubercles

near its base, with a longitudinal median carina, on either

side of which is a lateral longitudinal series of very small

tubercles ; there is a rather deep median fissure between the

submedian marginal spines, but no denticles; between these

and the first lateral marginal spines there are on each side ten

or eleven very small denticles or spinules. The distal pro-

longation of the base of the uropoda ends in two very unequal

spines, the inner of which bears a small tooth on its outer

margin. Length of the larger individual about 5} inches.

Hab. Chili; Auckland Islands.

Two females are in the Museum collection, one of which

was taken from a bottle with obliterated label, the contents

of which were believed to have come from the west coast of

North America; the other is from Laurie Harbour, Auckland

Islands (W. Wykeham Perry, Esq.). The former differs from

the Auckland specimen in having the rostral plate more nar-

rowed distally and armed with a terminal spinule, and in the

absence of punctulations on the terminal postabdominal seg-

ment.

Il. Penultimate joint of the large raptorial limbs armed with immobile

spines along its whole length.

Squilla raphidea.

Be eee marina, Seba, Thesaurus, iii. p. 50, pl. xx. fig. 2

( .

Ce Pie Fabr. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 416 (1798); Latreille,

Encycl. x. p. 471 (1825); Atlas (as S. mantis), pl. cxxiv.; M.-

Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 524 (1837); White, List Crust.

Brit. Mus. p. 84 (1847).

Squilla mantis, var. B. major, Lamarck, Hist. Anim. sans Vert. v.

p. 187 (1818).

Squilla harpax, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 222, pl. li. fig. 1

(1849).

Carapace elongated, with a longitudinal median ridge ter-

minating posteriorly immediately in front of the cervical

suture, and with two longitudinal lateral ridges on each side

between the cervical suture and the lateral margins, of

which the innermost is interrupted. There is a spine at the

antero-lateral angles, and at some distance in front of the

postero-lateral angles a strong triangular acute lobe or tooth ;

the rostral plate is elongated, narrowed, and subacute at its

28 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

distal end. Each of the exposed thoracic segments is armed

with six, and the postabdominal segments with eight longitu-

dinal ridges (those of the lateral margins included), all except

the submedian ridges terminating posteriorly in a spinule ; on

the penultimate segment the submedian ridges also terminate in

small spines; the terminal segment is armed with a greatly

thickened convex median dorsal ridge; the lateral and poste-

rior margin is also greatly thickened in the adult. There are

from seven to ten tubercles between each of the spines of the

posterior margin ; the penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs is

armed with numerous immobile marginal spines, of which from

five to eight are larger (besides the mobile spines at base), and

the dactylus with eight very long spines. ‘The basal portion of

the uropoda is greatly produced distally, and armed with two

strong spines. The length of the largest individual (a dried

female, from Borneo) is somewhat over 104 inches.

~ Hab. Indo-Pacific Regione

Specimens are in the Museum collection from the Indian

Ocean (General Hardwicke), Borneo (A. L. Wallace, Esq.),

Philippine Islands (H. J. Vettch, Esq.), and Zanzibar (Dr.

Kirk). The males in the collection are of small size, and do

not present any marked sexual distinctions.

De Haan records this species from the Japanese seas as S.

harpax.

B. The exposed thoracic and the first to fifth postabdominal segments

with the dorsal surface smooth, without median tubercles or sub-

median carine. The submedian spines of the terminal segment

usually furnished with a small mobile spinule at their distal ends.

* Dactyli of the raptorial limbs armed with five marginal spines.

Squilla Desmarestit.

Squilla Desmarestii, Risso, Crust. de Nice, p. 114, pl. ii. fig. 8 (1816) ;

Hist. Nat. Eur. mérid. v. p. 86 (1826); Lamarck, Hist. Anim. sans

Vert. v. p. 188 (1818); Desm. Consid. Crust. p. 251 (1825); Latreille,

Encycl. Wrath. x. p. 472 (1825); Roux, Crust. de la Méditerranée,

livr. viii. pl. xl. (1830) ; Yarrell, Loud. Mag. Nat. Hist. vi. p. 230,

fig. 23 (1833); M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. i. p. 523, pl. i. fig. 1

(1837); White, List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 84 (1847); Bell, Brit.

Crust. p. 354 (1853) ; Heller, Crust. sudl. Europa, p. 807 (1863).

Carapace smooth, without traces of longitudinal carine,

except close to the posterior margin, and with the cervical

suture obsolete in its posterior portion ; no spine at the antero-

lateral angles of the segments. Rostral plate oblong-oval,

smooth above, and rounded at its distal end. Spines of the

antennulary segment small; no spines on the ophthalmic

segment. [First exposed thoracic segment but little laterally

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 29

produced, with the lateral angles blunt and the inferior acute ;

second and third segments truncated laterally, with the

angles rounded. The carine of the fifth and sixth postabdo-

minal segments terminating in spinules. Last postabdominal

segment with a strong median carina, which is interrupted

near its base and ends in a spine; upper surface armed with

series of nearly confluent punctulations, which are obsolete

except toward the lateral margins; there are eight or ten

acuminate spinules between the submedian marginal spines,

and between these and each of the first lateral spines. Inner

and longer of the terminal spines of the basal prolongation of

the uropoda bearing a small rounded lobe on its outer margin.

Length nearly 3 inches.

Hab. Mediterranean (common) ; Channel (rare).

There are in the British-Museum collection two male ex-

amples from Nice, and a smaller male from Sicily ; a male

from Brighton (Dr. Mantell), another from Cornwall (Mr.

Laughlan), also two males without definite locality presented

by J. B. Jukes, Esq.*

It is remarkable that all the specimens in the Museum col-

lection are of the male sex.

** Dactyli of the raptorial limbs armed with six spines.

Squilla fasciata.

Squilla fasciata, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 224, pl. li. fig. 4

(1849).

This species is described by De Haan as having the cara-

pace very convex in the middle, with the sulci distinct and

produced to the posterior margin ; antero-lateral angles acutely

spinose. Rostral plate trigonous, narrower anteriorly. Lateral

process of the first exposed thoracic segment terminating in an

acute spine. Postabdominal segments gradually increasing

in width, the fifth scarcely twice as broad as the first. 'Ter-

minal segment sexcarinulate, the carinules alternately longer

and decurrent from the base, and shorter and decurrent to-

* No locality is given in the register for these specimens ; but most of

the crustaceans collected by Jukes were from the Australian seas, and

that these Sguille were thought to come from the same locality is evi-

dent from the label attached to one of the specimens. If the Sguilla

Desmarestii be indeed an inhabitant of these regions, it will be a fact

hitherto unparalleled in our knowledge of the distribution of the group,

and the more remarkable as there exists a species (S. fasciata) nearly

allied to the S. Desmarestiz in the Japanese region, and which, one would

suppose, would be also its representative in the Australian seas.

These are the specimens referred to by Dr. Woodward (Ann. & Mag.

Nat. Hist. 1879, ser. 5, vol. iv. p. 319) as being the nearest recent allies to

his §. Wetherelli from the London Clay.

30 Mr. W. A. Haswell on the Australian Amphipoda.

wards the posterior margin; the lateral spines not thickened

at base. Outer margin of the dactyli of the raptorial limbs

unarmed at base (not unituberculate, as in S. Desmaresti?).

Appendages of the thoracic limbs membranaceous and broaden-

ing from base to apex. Inner lobe of the base of the uropoda

margined with narrow and very acute spines gradually in-

creasing in length ; inner lateral lamine linear, eight times as

long as broad; outer with the first joint longer than the

second.

Hab. Japan.

A. single specimen was known to De Haan.

[To be continued. |

IL.—Preliminary Report on the Australian Amphipoda *.

By Wiuii1AmM A. Haswe ., M.A., B.Sc. Edinburgh.

A stupy of the Amphipodous Crustacea of Australia during

the last few months has revealed features of special interest in

that department of the southern marine fauna. The field of

research has been almost entirely untouched; for, though

Milne-Edwardst, Danat, Stimpson §, and Spence Bate ||

have described a few Australian forms, the total number of

species hitherto known amounts only to thirteen—these being

chiefly Orchestide, the few Gammaride described not including

any of the forms which must be regarded as peculiarly Aus-

tralian.

Between the amphipodous fauna of Temperate Australia as

exemplified in Port Jackson and that of tropical Queensland

a well-marked dividing-line may be drawn. In temperate

latitudes on the Australian coast littoral and circumlittoral

Algee are extremely abundant and varied in sheltered situa-

tions, giving, with the numerous varieties of sponges and

phytoid Polyzoa, a well-marked facies to the shallow-water

life of these shores, and affording ample feeding-grounds and

lurking-places for myriads of edriophthalmous Crustacea.

It is here that the characteristic Australian forms are to be

found. Within the tropics, on the other hand, Alge are

* Descriptions and figures of the new species will appear in the ‘ Pro-

ceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales’ for the present

ear.

; + ‘Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés,’ tom. iii. (1837).

{ ‘Proceedings of the American Society of Natural Science, Boston,’

vol. ii1.; and ‘Crustacea of the U.S. Exploring Expedition.’

i a : ee of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia

|| ‘Catalogue of Amphipodous Crustacea ’ (1862).

Mr. W. A. Haswell on the Australian Amphipoda. 31

comparatively few; and even where they occur in consi-

derable masses (as is the case on the dead parts of coral

reefs with certain fucoids) their edriophthalmous inhabitants

are not numerous, and belong, so far as at present ascertained,

to cosmopolitan genera—the species being, in many cases,

identical with those of the temperate zone. Amongst living

coral but few Amphipoda or Isopoda are to be found ; and the

use of the dredge at various depths in the neighbourhood of

the coral reefs did not produce a large variety of forms; the

Orchestide, however, are quite as abundant on sandy and

stony beaches in the tropics as in temperate latitudes. The

following is a summarized account of the species observed :—

A species of Yalitrus inhabits damp woods and scrubs in

New South Wales and Tasmania, being found in the former

colony at least thirty miles from the sea; and another occurs

under dead wood and leaves in the mangrove-swamps of

tropical Queensland. Species of Zalorchestia, Orchestoidea,

Orchestia, and Allorchestes are abundant on the shores of

Tasmania, New South Wales, and Queensland.

A species of Stegocephalus (S. latus), broader and higher

than the Arctic species, and distinguished from it in various

other particulars, is found in Tasmania.

A remarkable new form, which I have named Cyproidea,

from its superficial resemblance to a Cyprid, is represented

by two species found in Port Jackson. It is characterized

by the possession of deep lateral shields, formed not, like the

corresponding though much smaller structures in the sub-

family Stegocephalides (Spence Bate), by the coxe of the

second gnathopoda and first and second pereiopoda, but by

those of the first and second pairs of pereiopoda alone, these

being enormously expanded, extending forwards to the sides

of the cephalon and backwards nearly to the level of the

posterior limit of the pereion, concealing the inconspicuous

cox of the gnathopoda, and excavated above and posteriorly

for the reception of the shallow amalgamated coxe of the

third and fourth pairs of pereiopoda, the coxe of the last

pair of pereiopoda remaining rudimentary. These shields

almost conceal the gnathopoda and all but the tips of the

pereiopoda, and are variously ornamented with coloured dots

and lines in the two species. The antenne are simple and

subequal; the mandibles palpigerous; the maxillipedes un-

guiculate and armed with small squamiform plates; the gna-

thopoda subchelate (complealy in one species, simply in the

other); the posterior pleopoda biramous, and the telson

simple.

Another characteristic genus is one which I have named

32 Mr. W. A. Haswell on the Australian Amphipoda.

Amaryllis, represented by a species in Tasmania and another

in Port Jackson. It has the coxe of the second pair of gna-

thopoda and of the first and second pairs of pereiopoda ex-

panded as in Stegocephalus, Pleustes, and allied genera, but

differs from all of them in combining the possession of appen-

diculate superior antennee with palpigerous mandibles and

biramous foliaceous posterior pleopoda.

The genus Lysianassa is represented by several species in

Port Jackson (where it is very abundant in certain situations)

and Port Denison.

Allied to Lystanassa is a new genus (Glycera) represented

by a species common to North Australia (Howick group of

islands) and Port Jackson. It is charactérized by having the

four anterior pairs of coxe very deep, as in Lysianassa,

Anonyx, and other genera of the subfamily Lystanassides of

Spence Bate, but possesses longish slender (appendiculate)

superior antenne ; the mandibles are palpigerous; the maxil-

lipedes possess well-developed squamiform processes, as in

Lysianassa; the gnathopoda are slender and filiform; the

posterior pleopoda are biramous ; and the telson is double.

A species of Ampelisca occurs in Port Jackson and Port

Denison, together with two species of Phowus. A species of

(Hdicerus and one of Urothoé occur on the sandy beach at

Bondi, near Sydney. The genera Pherusa and Atylus are

both represented, the latter by several species. Of the genus

Leucothoé several species from Tasmania, New South Wales,

and Queensland have the gnathopoda formed upon the same

type as the Kuropean JL. articulosa and the American ZL.

grandimana, whilst another approaches more nearly in that

respect to L. furina. These species are almost always found

in the interior of sponges, or in the pharyngeal and atrial

cavities of various ascidians.

Species of the cosmopolitan genera Melia, Megamera,

Mera, and Gammarus occur abundantly—the common species

of the first of these, which I have named Melita australis,

being a very close ally of the North-African M. anisochir.

A species of Husirus, distinguished by the spinous anterior

pleonal segments, occurs in ‘Tasmania.

Probably nearly related to Hustrus and Iduna is a new

generic form which I have named Macleayia. It has the

superior antennee appendiculate, shorter than the inferior

pair; the mandibles are provided with an appendage; the

maxillipedes are exunguiculate, with the squamiform processes

rudimentary ; the gnathopoda are subchelate, the posterior

pair being very large ; the posterior pleopoda have one large

ramus; and the telson is small and undivided,

Mr. W. A. Haswell on the Australian Amphipoda. 33

Another new genus, Polycheria, is represented by two

species found in Port Jackson. It has the pereion broad, the

pleon compressed and carinate; the antenne are of nearly

equal size, with long slender flagella, the superior pair being

devoid of secondary flagellum ; the mandibles are exappendi-

culate; the maxillipedes possess well-developed squamiform

processes ; the gnathopoda are subchelate, small ; the pereio-

poda are slender, and have all preliensile terminal joints ; the

posterior pleopoda are biramous; and the telson is double.

Polycheria would belong to Dana’s subfamily swan, but has

little in common with /swa save the prehensile pereiopoda.

In Chloris (mihi) the antenne are well developed, the

superior pair shorter than the inferior and provided with an

appendage; the mandibles are palpigerous ; the maxillipedes

unguiculate, subpeditorm, provided with a squamiform process

on the basal joint only; the gnathopoda are subchelate, un-

equal, the second pair being very large ; the posterior pleopoda

are biramous, with short, conical rami; and the telson is single

and elongate.

Several species of Microdeuteropus occur in Port Jackson,

one of them having a close relationship to M. Websterra,

another to M. gryllotalpa, and a third to M. anomalus, while

a fourth appears to have no precise homotype among northern

species.

A new form allied to Microdeuteropus I have named Xeno-

cheira. It is distinguished by the remarkable form of the

posterior gnathopoda, the carpus of these organs being broad

and plate-like, projecting anteriorly, and articulating in an

unusual manner with both ischium and meros; the superior

antenne are long and appendiculate, the inferior shorter ; the

mandibles are provided with an appendage ; the maxillipedes

possess squamiform processes; the gnathopoda are non-sub-

chelate, and armed with long, close fringes of hairs; the pos-

terior pleopoda are biramous; and the telson is simple.

Allied to Kroéyer’s genus Protomedeia, but distinguished

from it by the short exappendiculate superior antenna and the

simple anterior gnathopoda, is a new generic form which [

have named Haplocheira, represented by a species found in

Port Jackson.

The genus Amphithoé is common on the Australian coast,

several of the species being found both in Port Jackson and

in Port Denison; Podocerus also occurs in the former locality,

together with three species of Cyrtophium, and one (or perhaps

two) of Dana’s remarkable aberrant genus Jctlius.

Among the Corophiide, a curious form obtained with the

dredge in Port Jackson appears to belong to the genus de-

Ann. & Mag, N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 3

34 ; Mr. A. W. Waters on the

scribed by Grube (Archiv fiir Naturg. Band i. p. 201) under

the name of Colomastix. It has stout, simple, subequal an-

tenn, with rudimentary flagella, like those of Cratippus ; the

anterior gnathopoda are long, filiform, and exunguiculate in

both sexes, while those of the posterior pair are large and sub-

chelate; the posterior pleopoda are biramous with unequal

rami; and the telson 1s single and pointed. This peculiar

form shows an approximation to Cratippus and Siphonecetus

in the structure of the antenne, but differs from both these

genera in the form of the anterior gnathopoda and of the

posterior pleopoda; from the allied genera Podocerus, Coro-

phium, Dryope, and Unciola it is separated by the character

of the antenne and of the anterior gnathopoda.

Ill.—On the Terms Bryozoa and Polyzoa.

By ArtHur WILLIAM Waters, F.G.S.

I HAVE already* given my reasons shortly for calling this

group Bryozoa instead of Polyzoa; but it seems advisable to

call attention to this point again more fully.

The argument upon which those who have adopted the

name Polyzoa have relied has been that Thompson had priority

over Ehrenberg. This does not appear to be disputed, and

seems to have been a side wind which has prevented zoologists

from examining Thompson’s paper, thinking it was a question

of dates; but I have pointed out that Thompson did not in

his paper indicate any group of animals by his term, and that

all he meant by Polyzoa was a single polypide. It is appa-

rent he here made an etymological mistake, as also in using

the plural Polyzoz ; but with this we have nothing to do, and

I do not urge this as any reason against his term, but confine

myself to the meaning he applied.

We do not need to go further than the title, which is, “ On

Polyzoa, a new animal discovered as an inhabitant of some

Zoophytes.” I ask, does this in the least express our present

ideas? Further on (p. 97) he says, ‘the other species of

Sertularia in which the animals have been determined to be

Polyzoz ;” and this same idea of the inhabitants of the zoo-

phytes bemg Polyzoze is expressed every few lines.

I feel the greatest confidence that as soon as zoologists

generally know that this is no bibliographical question of

dates, and themselves tarn to Thompson’s paper, they will see

* “On Bryozoa,” Maneh. Lit. & Phil. Soc., Microsc. & Nat, Hist. Sect.

1878, vol. xvii.

Terms Bryozoa and Polyzoa. 35

they have been induced to use the name Polyzoa under a

misapprehension.

There is another argument which has been brought forward

very recently by Prof. T. Rupert Jones*, who points out

that Ehrenberg included animals under Bryozoa which are

now known not to be correctly so placed. This requires us

to turn and see what Ehrenberg says; but we may first remark

that we suppose Prof. Rupert Jones found the general reason

of priority so insufficient that he saw he must find the poly-

zoists a better reason than they had themselves discovered.

I should like to know if they acknowledge this new argument

or say it need not have been given. If they do not ignore

Prof. Jones’s ‘Geology of Sussex’ and thank him for his sup-

port, this is what, in polite diplomatic language, would be

called a change of front, but which we preter to consider a

retreat.

Did Ehrenberg describe the Bryozoa as a group? In

‘Symbole Physice’ he has “circulus [. Anthozoa,” and,

divided from this, “circulus II. Bryozoa,” which he separates

thus:—“‘ore anoque distinctis, tubo cibario perfecto. (Vibratio

aperta ciliorum ope; an omnibus? Ovipara et gemmipara,

sponte nunquam dividua.)” And in ‘ Die Corallenthiere d.

Rothen Meeres’ he similarly divides them; and the “ doppel-

miindige Corallenthiere”” or Bryozoa he defines ‘“ mit emem

kammerigen, innen nicht strahligen Kérperbaue, besonderem

Mund und After, oft bewimperten wirbelnden Fangarmen.”

And his families are Cristatellina, Haleyonellea, Cornularina,

Escharina, Celleporina, Auloporina, Antipathina, Myriozoina.

Cornularia is, | suppose, a Hydrozoon; and Antipathes

and Aulopora are Actinozoa; but because he did not fully

understand these three, this is no reason for saying he did not

establish the Bryozoa as a group; for in how many groups

animals have been placed in error! Anthozoa has had many

strangers; or, forsooth, Millepora! what has it not included ?

The type of Ehrenberg is Alcyonella; and he says, in

‘Symbole Physice,’ “ Aleyonelle hujus Cireuli typum referre

videntur,” and, further on, “ /lustre enim et Sertularina ex

meis observationibus neque Ascidiis compostis nec Hydra

similia videntur sed Alcyonellis.” He then describes Zoobo-

tryon pellucidus, a clearly marked and easily studied species.

It is true he included in mistake Antipathes; but he does

not seem to have been quite sure, and says (loc. czt.), ‘ Hidem

Circulo Flustras et Sertularina nonnulla, forsan omnia, quin

imo Antipathes genus subjugenda esse censeo.”

* ‘Geology of Sussex,’ Dixon and Jones (Brighton, 1878).

36 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

Prof. Jones alludes to Polythalamia being included; but I

cannot find any case or see any indication of this in ‘ Die

Corallenth. d. R. Meeres ;’ but some of the larger Foraminifera,

as Polytrema, have been taken for Bryozoa quite recently, as

by Risso, Heller, and others. Such mistakes will be made

until our faunas have been more fully investigated; and

it is a matter of surprise that Ehrenberg included so few

extraneous genera among his Bryozoa.

A friend, writing to remonstrate with me for using the term

Bryozoa in a paper I recently wrote, says “ group names are

indications of advancing scientific knowledge; and not to use

the best is to keep science back.” In this I agree, but think

that the comparison of Ehrenberg’s exacter definitions and

Thompson’s imperfect conceptions must leave us fully con-

vinced that in Ehrenberg we have the clearest proof of ad-

vancing knowledge,

If Thompson’s name stood alone, of course, no one would

question it; but as the two names are in use, we have to

decide between them. D’Orbigny, Hagenow, Bronn, Van

Beneden, Reichert, Reuss, Nitsche, Kirchenpauer, Smitt,

Romer, Claparéde, Manzoni, Ehlers, Barrois, Joliet, and

many others have all used Khrenberg’s term, against which

are a few polyzoists, all, except Sars, in England and Ame-

rica, some of whom certainly occupy most leading positions ;

but it should not be forgotten that even in England the use

of the name Polyzoa is comparatively a recent innovation.

The points to be considered are :—(1) that the question is

not one of dates ; (2) that Thompson did not define any group

of animals, and used Polyzoa to indicate only a polypide ;

(3) that Ehrenberg definitely separated the Bryozoa, and, con-

sidering how little attention they had then received, was very

successtul in the indications he gave as to which animals

belonged to this group.

La Stazione Zoologica, Naples,

Noy. 14, 1879.

IV.—On the Genera of Felidae and Canide.

By H. DyCorn=:

Felide.

THE discovery of extinct species from time to time renders it

necessary to reexamine the definitions of the families and

genera into which living forms naturally fall. We thus learn

* From the ‘ Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of

Philadelphia,’ May 1879.

Genera of Felide and Canide. 37

the characters of their primitive types, and the successive steps

through which they passed in attaining their present charac-

teristics. The Felide are known as that family of Carnivora

in which the feet and teeth are most specialized for the func-

tions of seizing and lacerating living prey. The number of

living species enumerated by Dr. Gray is sixty-four, which

he throws into a number of genera. The extinct species yet

known are less numerous, but they present a greater variety

of structure than the former. Two types or series may be

recognized among the genera, namely those represented by

the genera Felis and Macherodus respectively. All of the

latter are extinct.

The greater number of the genera allied to Macherodus are

distinguished by the great development of the superior canine

teeth, whose crowns are generally compressed and trenchant.

The corresponding part of the mandible is expanded down-

wards so as to furnish a protection to the slender crown from

fracture by lateral blows when not in use; but in some of the

genera, e. g. Nimravus, this flange is not developed. The

only definition which can be used to distinguish these sections

of the family is found in the angular separation of the anterior

and lateral planes of the ramus of the mandible; and this

character cannot be expected to remain unaffected by future

discovery. Forms will doubtless be found in which the angle

is obsolete and in which the lateral and anterior faces pass

gradually into each other. Other characters which distinguish

the extinct genera are found in the number of molar teeth,

and, what has been heretofore neglected, the number of lobes

of the molars themselves.

As regards the existing genera, Dr. Gray* has brought

out their characters more fully than any other author. He

points out the fact that in some of the species the orbits are

closed behind, and in others open. He first examined into

the manner of the contraction and closing of the pupil in the

presence of light, and pointed out the fact that in the large

cats 1t is always round and approximates to a point in closing,

while in the smaller forms the pupil closes as a vertical slit.

He shows that the cats of the former group have the smaller

orbits of the cranium, and the latter the larger. Dr. Gray,

however, uses other characteristics in the discrimination of the

genera, which are, in my estimation, quite inadmissible—as

the relative length of the muzzle and of the premaxillary

bones, also of the hair on different parts of the body and tail.

* Catalogue of Carnivorous, Pachydermatous, and Edentate Mammalia

in the British Museum. By John Edward Gray, F.RS., V.P.ZS.,

F.L.S., &e. London, 1869,

38 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

Such features of proportion are essential as characters of

species, but not of genera. In accordance with these views I

have united several of Dr. Gray’s divisions into groups which

I call genera, and which repose on some definite structural

characters. Thus I combine his Uncia, Tigris, Leo, and

Leopardus into a genus for which I employ his name Uncia,

as the least objectionable *, after having confirmed by autopsy

the circular character of the pupil. This [ was enabled to do

through the courtesy of my friend Arthur E. Brown, super-

intendent of the Philadelphia Zoological Garden, who aided

me in examining the eyes of these animals both by sunlight

and the light of a bull’s-eye lanternt. The detailed charac-

ters of the genera will now be given :—

I. The anterior and lateral faces of the mandible separated

by an angle.

a. Inferior sectorial with a heel; no anterior lobe of

superior sectorial ; no posterior lobes of the pre-

molars.

* An inferior tubercular molar.

PROTHOMUTA SS Beye. se Sete went oR teks UR ee Dinictis.

IPAS MOLINS TE Geille poe cedestbeis apotyeeeetas tulad Nimravus.

** No inferior tubercular molar.

premolars? 2s MMCISONS (S24 iors fs ease tome 2 eae FToplophoneus.

iPremolars'4s incisors], (Slee ss steals ie tems Busmilus.

aa. Inferior sectorial without heel; an anterior lobe of

the superior sectorial, and posterior lobes of the

premolars.

Premolars 2, first inferior two-rooted.............. Macherodus.

Premolars 5—, first inferior one-rooted .......... Smiloton.

II. The anterior and lateral faces of the mandible con-

tinuous, convex. (No inferior tubercular molar.)

a. Inferior sectorial tooth with a heel.

Premolars ?, no posterior lobes; second superior

with internal heel (plantigrade)............ Cryptoprocta,

Premolars ?, with posterior lobes; no heel of second

SWDETION) seth’ Ce cect eECheLT erie erin Pseudelurus.

aa. Inferior sectorial without heel; premolars with pos-

terior lobes ; superior sectorial with anterior lobe.

8. Superior sectorial with internal heel.

y- Pupil round.

BBreUTOLATS 2.4. 1c: lato rmynis oie Pe Pascn ge scien Se REIOEN Uneia.

WEPEMLOUANS ae sis eve shetete eae ele istale esse meee ee eae Neofelis.

* T assume that this name is derived from wneus, a hook, which is ap-

propriate to the weapons of these animals. [ Fel’s uncea was the name given

by Gmelin to the Ounce; and no doubt Dr.Gray simply adopted its specific

name for the genus of which he regarded it as the %ype. Its use ina

more extended sense is therefore unfortunate.—Ep. |

+ I add the following notes on some other Carnivora, which do not

come within the scope of this paper :—

Hyena crocuta. Pupil a vertical slit.

Viverridee. Three species of Zchneumonand Viverricula,a horizontal oval.

Nasua. A horizontal oval.

Genera of Felidee and Canide. 39

yy. Pupil vertical.

Orbit closed behind ; premolars 2 .......... Catolynx.

Orbit open ; premolars 2 Petes Se Oriacy com ate Oe Felis.

Orbitjapen; premolars «(his ssa + at Lynceus.

88. Superior sectorial without internal heel.

Pupil round, premolars 3, orbit open posteriorly. Cynelurus.

The following catalogue includes the species of the Felidee,

the names of ine cleat ones being derived from Gray’s Chm

logue and printed in Roman letters. These are probably too

numerous in the genera Felis and Lyncus ; but I do not possess

the means of properly disposing of them.

DinictTis, Leidy. A4lurogale, Filhol. ? Daptophilus, Cope.

D. intermedia, Filhol. Phosphorites, France.

D. squalidens, Cope. White River, Colorado.

D. felina, Leidy. White River, Nebraska.

D. cyclops, Cope. White River, Oregon.

Nimravus, Cope.

N. brachyops, Cope. White. River, Oregon.

HOopLoPHoNnets, Cope.

Ff, primevus, Leidy. White River, Nebraska.

H. occidentalis, Leidy. White River, Nebraska.

EusMiLvs, Gervais.

E. bidentatus, Filhol. Phosphorites, France.

Macu#ropus, Kaup. Agnotherium, Kaup. Drepanodon,

Nesti.

M. palmidens, Bly. Falunian, Sansan.

M. ogygius, Kaup. Ciningian, Eppelsheim.

M. antiquus, Nesti. Pliocene, ‘Italy, France.

M. Falconert, Pomel. Upper Miocene, India.

M. cultridens, Cuv. Pliocene, Europe.

M. latidens, Owen. Pliocene, England.

M. aphanista, Kaup. Céningian, Eppelsheim.

M. maritimus, Gerv. Pliocene, Montpellier.

Smiiopon, Lund.

S. neogeus, Lund. Pliocene, Brazil.

S. necator, Gervais. Buenos Ayres.

Cryproprocra, Bennett.

C. ferox, Bennett. Madagascar.

40 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

PSEUDALURUS, Gervais.

P. hyenoides, Lartet. Falunian, Sansan.

P. intrepidus, Leidy. Loup River, Nebraska.

LP. Edwardst, Filhol. Phosphorites, France.

P.? intermedius, Filhol. Phosphorites, France.

P. sivalensis, Lydekker.

CaTOLYNX, Gray. Viverriceps, Gray.

C. marmoratus, Martin. India, Borneo.

C. Charltoni, Gray. Nepal, Darjeeling (Charlton).

C. viverrina, Bennett. East Indies.

C. planiceps, Vig. d&: Horsf. Malacca, Sumatra, Borneo.

C. Elhoti, Gray. Madras.

. rubiginosa, J. Geoff. India, Madras.

Feuis, Linn. Pardalina, Felis, and Chaus, Gray.

F’. pardalis, Z. America, tropical or subtropical.

F. grisea, Gray. Guatemala.

I’. melanura, Ball. America.

. picta, Gray. Central America.

. pardoides, Gray. Tropical America.

. macroura, Pr. Max. de Wied. Brazil.

. mitis, /. Cuv. Mexico? Paraguay ?

. tigrina, Schreb. South America.

. Geoftroyi, D’Orb. South America. ;

. colocolla, Molina, South America, Chili (Molina), Suri-

nam (7. Smith).

. jaguarondi, Lacép. South America.

. eyra, Desm. ‘Tropical America.

. serval, Schreb. South and West Africa.

. rutila, Waterhouse. Sierra Leone.

. neglecta, Gray. Gambia.

. servalina, Ogilby. Sierra Leone.

. celidogaster, Temm. Guinea.

. senegalensis, Lesson. Senegal.,

. minuta (pars), Zemm. Sumatra.

. javanensis, Horsf. Java.

. nepalensis, Vig. d& Horsf: India. (Perhaps a hybrid or

domesticated.)

chinensis, Gray. China.

pardinoides, Gray. India (Capt. Junes).

. pardochroa, Hodgson. Nepal (Hodgson). Tenasserim

(Packman).

. tenasserimensis, Gray. India, Tenasserim (Packman).

. Jerdoni, Blyth. Indian Peninsula, Madras.

Ff Fatal af Ph Pa Fle Fal Pa FF Pl Pr ry

Fy Pf rr} of a Haj Poet] Ff

Genera of Felide and Canide. 41

. Herscheli, Gray. India, “ Zanzibar”? ?

.wagati, Elliot. India.

.caligata, Temm. Africa, North, South, Central, and

East.

. inconspicua, Gray. India. (Domesticated or perhaps a

variety.)

domestica, Brisson. Syria? (Domesticated in most

countries. )

.manul, Pallas. Thibet.

eatus, Z. Hurope.

. megalotis, Miller. ‘Timor.

. himalayana, Gray. Himalaya (Cross, Warwick).

. Jacquemonti, /. Geoffr. Africa and Asia.

. ornata, Gray. India (Capt. Boys).

. catolynx, Pallas. Nepal (Hodgson).

Lyncvus, Raf. Pajeros, Lynx et Caracal, Gray.

. borealis, Gray. Northern Europe, Sweden.

. canadensis, G’eoffr. North America.

. pardinus, Zemm. Southern Europe, Turkey.

. sabellinus, Blyth. ‘Thibet.

. rufus, Giildenst. North America.

ee.

call eel!

pajeros, Desm. South America. The Pampas.

maculatus, Vig. & Horsf: North America, Mexico, and

California.

earacal, Schreb. Southern Asia and Africa, Persia and

Arabia.

NEOFELIS, Gray.

macrocelis, Temm. Himalaya (Hodgson), Malacca.

brachyurus (Temm.). Siam (Swinhoe), Formosa (Swin-

hoe).

Uncta, Gray, Cope emend. Leo, Tigris et Leopardus, Gray.

Bee ee -dedc

. concolor, Z. North and South America.

. auratus, Temm. Himalaya, Sumatra, Borneo.

onca, L. South America, Mexico, Texas.

. chinensis, Gray. Pekin, mountain-forests of the

west.

. japonensis, Gray. Japan.

. pardus, Z. Southern Asia, North, South, and West

Africa.

atiets, Ly, Asia.

. leo, LZ. Africa, India.

.irbis, Lhr. 'Thibet.

42 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

CynaLurus, Wagler. Gueparda, Gray.

C. jubatus, Z. Africa, Asia, Persia, Cape of Good Hope.

? C. ferox, Leidy (Ailurodon). Loup River, Nebraska.

The successive order of the modifications of structure

which define the above genera is not difficult to perceive ;

and it is interesting to discover that, as in other cases, it

coincides with the succession in geologic time. The typi-

cal genera Uncia, Felis, &c. are characterized by great

specialization; and it is they which now exist. The oldest

found, Dinictis, Nimravus, &c., are the least specialized in

most respects, and they disappeared before the close of

Miocene time.

Since one of the special characters of the Felide is the

reduction in the number of the molar teeth by subtraction

from both ends of the series, an increased number of these

constitutes resemblance to other families. The genus Dz-

niclis, above defined, has been shown by Leidy to possess two

more inferior molars than Felis, or three more than Neofelis

and Lynx, as in the Mustelide. The extinct Pseudelurus

and the living Cryptoprocta have but one molar less than

Dinictis, lacking the posterior tubercular. Nimravus has the

same number of molars as Pseudelurus, but lacks the first

premolar instead of the last true molar. In Hoplophoneus

we first find the number of molars as in the existing genera,

viz. pm. 3,m.+. Other characters of this genus, however,

are of a generalized kind.

There recall the statement that the genera of Felide fall

into two series, which are distinguished by the forms of

the anterior part of the mandibular rami, and generally by

the large size of the canine teeth, to which the former are

adapted. This distinction appeared early in Miocene or

Oligocene time—in fact, in the oldest of the cats of which

we have any knowledge. The genera with large canines,

or Macherodontine line, were then represented by Dinictis,

and the Feline line by Pseudelurus. It is interesting to

observe that these genera differed from their latest prototypes

in the same way, viz.:—(1) in the presence of more nume-

rous inferior molars; (2) in the presence of a heel of the

inferior sectorial; (3) in the absence of an anterior cusp of

the superior sectorial. In the case of Dénictis one other

character of primitive Carnivora may be noticed, viz. the

absence of the cutting-lobes on the posterior edges of the

superior and inferior premolars, so distinct in the existing

eats. ‘The same feature characterizes the superior premolars

ot Pseudelurus; but the inferior premolars have the lobes.

Genera of Felide and Canide. 43

In the existing Cryptdprocta, which Gervais has shown to

be nearly allied in dentition to Psewdelurus, the lobes are

wanting from both jaws; but this genus adds to this primi-

tive character another of modern significance, viz. the presence

of the anterior cusp of the superior sectorial. Moreover

Cryptoprocta has another peculiarity, which recalls the genera

of the Eocene Creodonta, in the well-developed interior

tubercle of the third premolar, a character unknown in Mio-

cene or existing Carnivora. That genus is evidently, like

the Lemuride (also of Madagascar), a remnant of the Eocene

fauna, which once covered most of the earth, and may

be regarded as, on the whole, the most primitive of the

Felide, recent and extinct.

Following the two lines of Felide already indicated we

attain the same conclusion in both, by the same stages.

The primitive form of the Macheerodont line, represented by

Hoplophoneus, has its extreme in Husmilus, where the second

inferior premoiar and an incisor tooth are wanting, giving a

formula of I. 2, C. 1, Pm. 1, M. 1. In Macherodus we

have the modern characters of the molars seen in Felis, viz.

no heel of the inferior sectorial, the superior sectorial with

an anterior lobe, and posterior lobes of the premolars. The

extreme of this line is reached in Smdlodon, where the second

inferior premolar is one-rooted or wanting. This genus, then,

stands related to Macherodus as Husmilus to Hoplophoneus.

In the Feline line proper, on reaching the existing genera, we

have lost the heel of the inferior sectorial and gained the

posterior lobes of the premolars and anterior lobe of the supe-

rior sectorial at once. A further modification of the dentition

of the superior series of the recent forms is seen in the loss

of the first superior premolar in Lyncus and Neofelis. Still

another, which is one step beyond what is known in the

Macheerodont line, is the loss of the interior tubercle of the

superior sectorial, which characterizes the genus Cynelurus.

A superior sectorial tooth having the character of that of this

genus was discovered by Dr. Hayden in the Loup-River

formation of Nebraska, and was referred to a species by Dr.

Leidy under the name of lurodon ferox. It was much

larger than the C. jubatus.

As already remarked, the genera cf the Machzrodont line

are extinct, and this in spite of the fact that they presented

the most perfect weapons of destruction in their canine teeth

from the earliest times. Their other modifications of struc-

ture advanced part passu with those of the Feline series ; and,

among others, the feet presented, in the later forms at least

(e. g. Smilodon necator, Gerv.), the most perfect prehensile

44 On the Genera of Felide and Canide.

power of the lions and tigers of to-day: As nothing but the

characters of the canine teeth distinguishes these from the

typical felines, it 1s to these that we must look for the cause

of their failure to continue. Prof. Flower’s suggestion ap-

pears to be a good one, viz. that the length of these teeth

became an inconvenience and a hindrance to their possessors.

I think there can be no doubt that the huge canines in the

Smilodons must have prevented the biting off of flesh from

large pieces, so as to greatly interfere with feeding and to

keep the animals in poor condition. ‘The size of the canines

is such as to prevent their use as cutting instruments, ex-

cepting with the mouth closed; for the latter could not have

been opened sufficiently to allow any object to enter it from

the front. ven were it opened so far as to allow the man-

dible to pass behind the apices of the canines, there would

appear to be some risk of the latter’s becoming caught on the

point of one or the other canine, and forced to remain open,

causing early starvation. Such may have been the fate of

the fine individual of the S. neogeus, Lund, whose skull was

found in Brazil by Lund, and which is familiar to us through

the figures of De Blainville, &e.

DESCRIPTION OF NEW SPECIES.

Dinictis cyclops.

The species of Dénictis differ in the proportions of their

anterior molar and canine teeth as follows :—

First inferior molar one-rooted ; first superior molar

two-rooted; superior canine short, robust; large. D. intermedia".

First inferior molar one-rooted ; superior canine com-

pressed ; two inferior incisors ...........,.... D. squalidens.

First inferior molar two -rooted; first superior molar

one-rooted ; canine long, compressed .......... D. cyclops.

First molar of both jaws two-rooted ; canine long,

ROHNPROSSEGs 1s oe ous Serie « opts totetnne Pane eke eave D. felina.

In D. cyclops the first superior molar is rudimental, and

will probably be found to be wanting in some specimens.

The second premolar has a distinct anterior tubercle on the

inner side, a character not seen in D. felina; the anterior

angle of the superior sectorial is more produced than in that

species. The crown of the superior tubercular looks partly

inwards, is rather long, and has three roots. ‘The superior

canine is quite long, and has a regularly lenticular sec-

tion, without facets; its anterior and posterior edges are

denticulate. The external incisors are much larger than

the internal, and have subconie crowns. The crowns of the

* Alurogale intermedia, Filhol.

On the Geological Distribution of the habdophora. 45

others are subcuneiform. ‘The inferior canines are consider-

ably larger than the incisors. The latter are regular and do

not overlap each other; the second and third inferior pre-

molars have well-developed basal lobes anteriorly and poste-

riorly. The heel of the sectorial is well developed. The

tubercular is very small.

The form of the skull is short and wide; the zygomata are

much expanded ; and the profile is very convex. The muzzle

is short, and the orbits are rather large. The interorbital

region is wide and convex; and the postorbital processes are

robust, acuminate, and directed downwards. ‘The infraorbital

foramen is very large. ‘The apices of the premaxillary bones

are elongate, but do not reach the frontals. ‘The nasals are

rounded posteriorly. The sagittal crest is prominent, and the

inion elevated. ‘The posttympanic process is short; and the

paroccipital is short and is directed backwards. The cranium

is constricted behind the orbits. ‘The mandibular ramus is

low posteriorly ; and the anterior inferior flange is well deve-

loped, but not large.

Measurements.

metre,

Wenethorskuilen' bases... iif coe ce dels emee wee ‘140

Width of skull, measured below ...............-.. “LIL

Henpity of palate oc oe na. tbcsye ia e tein stay alesse ae dabetrs 060

Width of palate between posterior angles of sectorials ‘062

Width of palate between canines.................. 026

Length of skull to front of orbits (axial) .......... 050

Wertienlidtameter ot orbit 2s. sd. 3.6.2 se Snadae 031

ATILCROT I hele WyadGtls (LORE) yar nna, «cey avatars tyvor cesesnrhes See 045

Elevation of inion from foramen .................. 05

Wength; of inferior molar Series... 6/034. 0+. sci one « ‘050

ienguli Of inferior SeCtorial, “4 /..).syaws els cee eld iets 018

Length of base of inferior first premolar............ 055

Wepth. of ramus ab Seetorial is .a% 2 tajn% bette. Heleye 4 016

Depth/of ramus at first premolar ...............5. ‘021

Danshial tamus at Mange 052s sso sine s ones tees 026

From the Truckee beds of John Day River, Oregon.

[To be continued. ]

V.—On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

By Cuaries Lapworts, F.G.S. &e.

Fark IT, Dara.

[Continued from vol. iv. p. 431.}

SrnuR1An System (Upper Silurian of Murchison).

Of the many suggested modifications of Murchison’s latest

46 My. C. Lapworth on the Geological

scheme of classification of the Lower Paleozoic rocks not one

is perhaps more important, or more certain eventually to be

adopted by geologists in general, than the transference of the

theoretical line of demarcation between his Lower and Upper

Silurian from the’ middle of the Lower Llandovery to the

base of that formation. The immediate adoption of this

new divisional line by those who rely more especially upon

marked physical evidence is hardly to be expected. In the

typical district of Llandovery Murchison’s plan of classifica-

tion appears at first sight the only one possible, as there seems

to be an uninterrupted sequence from the Llandeilo into the

Lower Llandovery. Not only so, but the magnitude of the

stratigraphical discordance below the Pentamerus-Grits and

Limestones of the Upper Llandovery, where Murchison draws

his line of demarcation, is clear and unequivocal from Wen-

lock to Llangadock.

On the other hand, however, the Lower Llandovery grits,

which, in Central Wales, follow immediately upon the dark

shales of the Upper Bala, afford unmistakable evidence of

important and widespread changes in the physical condition

of the sea-bottom at the advent of the Llandovery epoch.

Even in the typical district of Llandovery itself this change,

according to Messrs. Salter and Aveline, is, probably, marked

by an unconformability. Througbout the basin of the Dee

the Lower Llandovery beds, according to the most recent

researches of Professor Hughes and others, retain their coarse

arenaceous character. The relations of the Bala shales to

similar grits at Conway appear to me impossible of interpre-

tation except on the hypothesis of an unconformability or

overlap at the base of the latter. The most convincing argu-

ment, however, in favour of the proposed change is found in the

fact that, if we except the typical district of the higher portion

of the valley of the Towey, the most distinct physical and

paleontological break in the strata that lie between the

Arenig and the Ludlow is that at the summit of the Bala

formation and its extra-British equivalents. In Scotland, for

example, the only paleontological break of any magnitude is

that at the base of the equivalent. of the Lower Llandovery

—the representatives of the Lower Llandovery, Upper

Llandovery, and Tarannon graduating imperceptibly the one

mto the other. In Scandinavia the same rule holds good

generally, though there are beds of passage where the Ordo-

vician and Silurian forms are for a time commingled. I

believe that the same rule obtains in Bohemia and Thuringia;

but our present evidence is too defective to enable us to

bring forward decisive proofs. In America (Anticosti ex-

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 47

cepted) the physical and paleontological changes at the base

of the equivalents of the Lower Llandovery are so marked

and of such systematic importance, that American geologists

have universally drawn the boundary line between their Lower

and Upper Silurian systems along this horizon.

Adopting, then, this line as the base of the true Silurian, we

have next to determine the most natural limits of the compo-

nent formations of that system. Here we have to bear in

mind that in the typical area of Shropshire a few feet only of

the lowest of the Silurian formations are visible, and even

these were not separated by Murchison from the underlying

Bala rocks until he was compelled to distinguish them by the

discoveries of Sedgwick and M‘Coy. And it is now daily

becoming more clearly evident that in the same typical area

there is, in reality, but a very feeble and degenerate represen-

tative of the highest formation of the Silurian rocks of other

countries—the wonderfully prolific étages F and G of Bohe-

mia, and the great Helderberg series of North America.

Of the first of the three grand formations into which the

Silurian may most naturally be divided, all that is exposed in

the typical area of Shropshire are the thin zones of the

Henley conglomerate and the Pentamerus-Limestone, which lie

between the summit of the Bala and the base of the Wenlock

shale. In many parts of Wales, however, as is well known,

we find three distinct groups of strata in this position, separated

from each other by fairly marked unconformabilities. It has

generally been the habit to call the first of these subforma-

tions by the title of the Lower Llandovery, the second May-

hill or Upper Llandovery, and the third the Tarannon shale.

The first is usually believed to be most intimately allied in its

paleontological characters to the Bala formation, and the

last to be hardly separable from the Wenlock shale. My own

researches impel me to the conclusion that these three sub-

formations are far more closely allied to each other than they

are to the beds above or below, and that they should be consi-

dered as the three consecutive members of a single formation.

In the south of Scotland (Valentia) these three subformations

are recognizable, superposed in conformable sequence, with

clear relations to the Bala below and to the Wenlock above,

and unitedly covering an area of several thousands of square

miles. Until geologists are willing to include the Tarannon

in the Llandovery it will therefore be best to speak of this

great Scottish formation and its equivalents as the Valentian

formation, its three divisions, Lower, Middle, and Upper,

representing respectively the Lower Llandovery, Upper Llan-

dovery, and Tarannon of Wales and Siluria.

48 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

The second natural division of the Silurian system is un-

doubtedly Murchison’s Great Mudstone series, which includes

the so-called Wenlock and Lower Ludlow groups, as high as

the horizon of the Aymestry Limestone. In Shropshire this

great mudstone or Salopian formation is by far the most

important physical group in the Silurian. Murchison drew

the line of demarcation between his Wenlock and Ludlow

formations at the Wenlock Limestone. We suspect, how-

ever, that this was done less from a paleontological than from

an esthetic point of view, and mainly for the sake of physical

symmetry. Murchison admits again and again that his Lower

Ludlow is “simply an upward prolongation of the Wenlock

shale.” The natural boundary is therefore at the summit

of this great mudstone group, generally along the line of the

Aymestry Limestone, where new physical conditions set in

and the rocks contain a comparatively new fauna. Although

this improved arrangement destroys the apparent symmetry

of the so-called formations of Siluria, 1 doubt not that its

advantages will in time ensure its general adoption. Under

this scheme difficulties that have hitherto confronted us in our

endeavours to parallel the British and foreign strata of Silu-

rian age would almost wholly disappear ; the arrangement of

the Welsh strata would lose much of its presently acknow-

ledged artificiality, and approximate much more closely to the

order of nature all over the world.

In Shropshire this Salopian or Mudstone formation is over-

lain by the sandy strata of the Upper Ludlow, the Bone-beds

and the Downton Sandstone. For the sake of distinction

these may collectively be termed the Downtonian formation.

Above Llangadock these strata are almost as thick as the Wen-

lock and Ludlow beds united. As a rule, however, they form

but a very insignificant representative of the great limestones

F and G of Bohemia and the Helderbergs of North America,

the Oesel beds of Esthonia, &c. ‘Their relation to the Dingle

beds of Ireland and the fossil-bearing Lower Old Red rocks

of Scotland it is as yet impossible to determine.

Valentian or Llandovery Formation.

Wales.—No Graptolites have hitherto been quoted from the

undisputed Llandovery strata of South Wales; nor was I able

personally to detect a fragment in my hasty examination of

the typical localities during the summer of last year.

I discovered Rhabdophora, however, in abundance in the

shales of the so-called Tarannon of the neighbourhood of Con-

way, North Wales. In the cliffs opposite the picturesque old

castle I detected

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 49

Climacograptus normalis, Lap.

Diplograptus palmeus, Barr.

Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

Monograptus priodon, Bronn.

exiguus, Nich.

Monograptus Becki, Barr.

galaensis, Lapw.

Sedgwicki, Portlock.

—— fimbriatus, Nich.

turriculatus, Barr.

Halli, Barr.

These are possibly the same beds as the strata near Cerrig-y-

druidion, in the basin of the Dee, from which Mr. Marr has

recently procured Graptolites, as his list of species includes

Diplograptus palmeus, Barr.

Climacograptus scalaris, His.

Monograptus lobiferus, IZ‘ Coy.

Lake District.—In the Lake District the Skellgill or Llan-

dovery rocks (Coniston Mudstones) afford Rhabdophora in

great abundance. At the typical locality of Skellgill there

are two distinct zones of Graptolite-bearing beds. In the

lowest (tenuis) zone I have detected

Monograptus Sedgwicki, Portl.

colonus, Barr.

Diplograptus folium, His.

sinuatus, Wich.

confertus, Mich.

tamariscus, Nich.

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw.

Retiolites perlatus, Nich.

Monograptus gregarius, Lapw.

Monograptus argutus, Lapw.

spiralis, Getnitz.

—— Sedewicki, Portl.

tenuis, Portl.

—— cyphus, Lapw.

fimbriatus, Nich.

Rastrites peregrinus, Barr.

The higher (or argenteus) zone has afforded me

Diplograptus Hughesi, Nich.

sinuatus, Nich.

tamariscus, Mich.

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw.

Diplograptus folium, His.

Rastrites peregrinus, Barr.

Monograptus argenteus, Mich.

Monograptus Hisingeri, Carr.

lobiferus, ‘Coy.

attenuatus, Hopk.

—— gregarius, Lapw.

argutus, Lapw.

leptotheca, Lapw.

—— fimbriatus, Mich.

From beds at Knock near Dufton, higher than the typical

argenteus zone, Monograptus exiguus, Nich., and Lastrites

distans, Lapw., were collected by Prof. Nicholson and myself

in 1874. From a thin black seam in the Pale Shales above

we procured a Monograptus allied to M. Halli, Barr.

In addition to many of the foregoing, Prof. Nicholson *

quotes from the Coniston Mudstones the following forms :—

Diplograptus vesiculosus, Nich.

apt ; Diplograptus putillus, Hail.

pristis, His.

angustifolius, Hall.

The first named probably occurs in the lowest zone; the

rest may be new species.

Scotland.—The south of Scotland contains the most prolific

Graptolite-bearing beds of Llandovery age yet discovered in

Britain. These are the well-known Birkhill shales of the

* Nicholson, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1868, p. 523.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v.

50 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

Moffat district.

They break up very naturally into two main

divisions, each with several subordinate zones*.

In the deepest zones of the Lower Birkhill we meet with

Diplograptus acuminatus, Nich.

— vesiculosus, Wich.

modestus, Lapw.

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw.

Climacograptus innotatus, Nich.

Monograptus tenuis, Portl.

attenuatus, Hopk.

Its highest (gregarius) zone is crowded with

Diplograptus modestus, Lapw.

—— physophora, Nich.

folium, His.

tamariscus, Nich.

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw.

—— rectangularis, Jf‘ Coy.

Monograptus tenuis, Porti.

attenuatus, Hopk.

—— spiralis, Gein.

Monograptus argutus, Lapw.

cyphus, Lapw.

Sandersoni, Lapw.

concinnus, Lapw.

lobiferus, M*‘ Coy.

triangulatus, Harkn.

leptotheca, Lapw.

Rastrites peregrinus, Barr.

The Upper Birkhill beds afford

Diplograptus tamariscus, Nich.

— sinuatus, Nich.

—— Hughesi, Mich.

-—— palmeus, Barr.

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw.

——— tectus? Barr.

Retiolites perlatus, Mich.

Monograptus runcinatus, Lapw.

— intermedius, Carr.

concinnus, Lapw.

— Halli, Barr.

Monograptus tenuis, Port.

attenuatus, Hopk.

spiralis, Geznitz.

lobiferus, M‘ Coy.

—— Clingani, Carr.

—— Sedgwicki, Port.

—— gregarius, Lapw.

Hisingeri, Carr.

Rastrites peregrinus, Burr.

fugax, Barr.

—— distans, Lapw.

The Birkhill beds are succeeded by the vast series of grits,

flagstones, and shales which I have denominated the Gala

groupt. ‘To this group properly belong also the Hawick

rocks, which are distinctly inferior to the Riccarton or Wen-

lock strata of Kirkcudbright and Roxburgh. The Rhabdo-

phora I have collected from the Gala rocks of the Eastern

districts include

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw.

Diplograptus palmeus, Barr.

Retiolites obesus, Lapw.

Geinitzianus, Barr.

Rastrites maximus, Carr.

distans, Lapw.

Monograptus runcinatus, Lapw.

—— concinuus, Lapw.

Sedewicki, Portl.

Becki, Barr.

Salteri, Geinetz.

Monograptus Hisingeri, Carr.

Halli, Barr.

— turriculatus, Barr.

—— exiguus, Wich.

galaensis, Lapw.

Barrandei, Swess.

crispus, Lapw.

priodon, Bronn.

spiralis, His.

Cyrtograptus Grayze, Lapw.

* Lapworth, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1878, p. 528 &e.

+ Lapworth, Geological Magazine, 1870, p. 204.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. ol

Girvan.—In the Girvan district, the Penkill group, which

is the representative of the Valentian or Llandovery of Wales,

is composed of the three well-marked consecutive subdivisions

of the Mulloch-Hill beds, Saugh-Hill beds, and Penkill beds.

The Mulloch-Hili beds consist of a mass of highly fossili-

ferous sandstones and shales, with a coarse conglomerate at

the base. Brachiopods are especially abundant ; but Grapto-

lites are excessively rare. The only forms I have collected

are

Climacograptus normalis, Lap. Monograptus tenuis, Port.

Diplograptus acuminatus, Nich.

The Saugh-HMill beds consist of flagstones and grits with

coarse conglomerates and thick zones of grey shales, locally

crowded with well-preserved Rhabdophora. Pentamerus

occurs in millions in the conglomerates and limestones, while

the shales of the group on both sides of the Girvan Water are

crowded with the following Birkhill Graptolites :—

Diplograptus modestus, Lapw. Monograptus intermedius, Carr.

— Hughesi, Nich. gregarius, Lapw.

—— tamariscus, Nich. lobiferus, M‘Coy.

folium, His. attenuatus, Hopk.

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw. leptotheca, Lapw.

Retiolites perlatus, Nich. tenuis, Portl.

Rastrites peregrinus, Barr. —— Hisingeri, Carr.

Monograptus Sedgwicki, Portl. —— fimbriatus, Nich.

cyphus, Lapw. Salteri, Geinetz.

The highest division, or Penkill beds proper, includes the

representatives of the Gala and 'Tarannon groups. The lowest

beds (the Crossopodia-Shales) consist of purple and green

mudstone with a few Graptolites, principally

Monograptus galaensis, Lapw. Monograptus runcinatus, Lapw.

Halli, Barr. —— Sedgwicki, Porti.

exiguus, Nich. spiralis, Geinitz.

—— Hisingeri, Carr. Diplograptus palmeus, Barr.

The highest beds (Priodon Flags and Grrits) aftord

Monograptus galaensis, Lapw. Monograptus priodon, Bronn.

Halli, Barr. concinnus, Lapw.

—— Hisingeri, Carr. ; Cyrtograptns Gray, Lapw.

Sedewicki, Porti. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

Treland.—The only Irish Graptolite-bearing rocks of Llan-

dovery age as yet carefully studied are the Silurian rocks of

County Down. from the Coal-pit Bay beds that follow the

equivalents of the Hartfell shales on the shores of Belfast

Lough Mr. Swanston* has collected the following Birkhill

species :—

* Swanston, Trans. Belfast Nat.-Hist. Field-Club, Appendix, 1876-77.

52 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw. Monograptus Sandersoni, Lapw.

Retiolites perlatus, Nich. argutus, Lapw.

Diplograptus vesiculosus, Nich. -—— gregarius, Lapw.

folium, His. concinnus, Lapw.

—— Hughesi, Nich. leptotheca, Lapw.

tamariscus, Mich. eyphus, Lapw.

sinuatus, Wich. — Hisingeri, Carr.

modestus, Lapw. Sedewicki, Portl.

Dimorphograptus Swanstoni, spiralis, Geinitz.

Lapw. fimbriatus, Wich.

Cephalograptus cometa, Gein. triangulatus, Harkn.

Monograptus attenuatus, Hopk. Rastrites peregrinus, Barr.

fugax ?, Barr.

tenuis, Portl.

Higher strata, equivalent in all probability to the Gala and

Tarannon formations of Britain, occur near Teiveshilly and

other localities on Strangford Lough. From these Mr. Swan-

ston* and the officers of H.M. Geological Survey + have

collected

Monograptus Hisingeri, Cars. Monograptus priodon, Bronn.

M‘Coyii, Lapw. proteus, Barr.

galeensis, Lapw. spiralis, Hs.

riccartonensis, Lapw. turriculatus, Barr.

crispus, Lapw. —— Barrandei, Suess.

From the higher (Llandovery) portions of his Pomeroy

rocks, Portlock fioures i in his well-known work { the following

forms :—

Monograptus Sedgwicki, Portl. Monograptus turriculatus, Barr.

tenuis ?, Portl. Diplograptus folium, His.

together with others itis as yet impossible to identify. I have

myself collected from these beds, in addition,

Monograptus gregarius, Lapw. Monograptus discretus, Nich.

Mr. Swanston has lately forwarded me from the same beds

Monograptus cyphus, Lapw. Monograptus leptotheca, Lapw.

attenuatus, Hopk. intermedius, Carr.

Similar forms are present at Lesbellaw § and other locali-

ties in the west of Ireland.

Sweden.—The Trinucleus (Upper Bala) Schists of Scania

and Westrogothia are followed immediately by the Brachio-

pod- -Schist—strata ver y prolific in Testacea, but as yet appa-

rently barren of Graptolites. They stand approximately in

the place of the British Lower Llandovery and are succeeded

* Swanston, loc. cit. supra.

+ Baily, Explanation of Sheets, Geological Survey of Ireland.

{ Portlock, Geological Report Tyrone, plate xix.

§ Ibid.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 53

by the Lobiferus and Rettolites beds, which together compose

Linnarsson’s Upper Graptolite-Schists *.

The Lobiferus-beds are locally very prolific in Rhabdophora.

In a collection from these strata, as exposed at Hunneberg,

kindly sent me by Dr. Lindstrém, I recognized

Monograptus lobiferus, M‘Coy. Rastrites hybridus, Lapw.

cyphus, Lapw. peregrinus, Barr.

attenuatus, Hopk. Diplograptus folium, Zs.

triangulatus, Harkn. tamariscus, Nich.

Rastrites capillaris ?, Carr. Climacograptus normalis, Lapw.

In a collection from strata of the same age forwarded to

Prof. Nicholsont by Mr. Linnarsson, many of the same forms

occur, together with

Monograptus Sedgwicki, Portl. Monograptus Hisingeri, Carr.

oregarius, Lapw. Retiolites perlatus, Mich.

From the Lod/ferus-beds of Kongslena in Westrogothia

Mr. Linnarsson ¢ has published

Monograptus lobiferus, M‘ Coy. Diplograptus palmeus, Hes.

Hisingeri, Carr. modestus, Lapw.

Sandersoni, Lapw. cometa, Geimits.

Sedgwicki, Portl. tamariscus, Nich.

spiralis, Geinitz. Climacograptus rectangularis,

triangulatus, Harkn. M‘ Coy.

Rastrites peregrinus, Barr,

From loose boulders, probably of corresponding age, he has

subsequently collected

Monograptus runcinatus, Lapw. Rastrites maximus, Carr.

and more recently from grey shales, presently identified with

the highest Lobiferus-beds of Scania, he has obtained the

Gala species$

Monograptus crispus, Lapw. Monograptus lobiferus (JZ‘ Coy).

In Dalecarlia the representatives of the Llandovery strata ||

appear to be the Kallholn Schists, Stygfors Schists, and Lep-

tena-Limestone of the neighbourhood of Lake Siljan. From

the Kallholn schists Dr. Térnquist enumerated the following

species in 1873 :—

Climacograptus teretiusculus, His. | Monograptus sagittarius, Hes.

Diplograptus pristis, His. convolutus, Zits.

palmeus, Barr. tastrites peregrinus, Barr.

Monograptus Becki, Barr.

* Linnarson, Geological Magazine, June 1876.

+ Nicholson, ibid.

{ Linnarsson, Geol. Foren. Férhandl. 1877, p. 404.

§ Ibid. 1879, p. 255.

| Tornquist, Gsfvers. af K. Vetensk. Akad. Forhandl, 1874, p. 26.

54 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

and from the overlying Stygfors Schists

Diplograptus folium, His. Monograptus convolutus, His.

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. turriculatus, Barr.

proteus, Barr. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

In the collection sent me by Dr. Lindstrém I also recog-

nized

Monograptus Halli, Barr. Monograptus leptotheca, Lapw.

from the Stygfors Schists.

The Lobiferus-Schists occur also in the island of Born-

holm, where they afford the same general assemblage of

Rhabdophora.

Thuringia.—Thanks to the industrious researches of Prof.

Geinitz and Dr. B. Richter, the Llandovery strata of Saxony

and Thuringia have long been famous for their numerous

Graptolitide. The true Llandovery age of the containing

beds has been generally admitted from the first. As a whole

the fauna of the so-called Avesel-Schiefer and Alaun-Schiefer

of this region is essentially Birkhillian ; but, judging from

the collective fauna, it is clear that strata of Gala or 'Taran-

non age are also present. ‘The group, as a whole, corresponds,

both in mineral character and fossils, with Barrande’s colonial

zone and the lower portion of his zone Ke 1.

From the Saxon localities Geinitz figures the following

species * :-—

Diplograptus folium, His. — Monograptus Halli, Barr.

palmeus, Barr. lobiferus, I‘ Coy.

physophora?, Meh. (i. fig. 21). Sedgwicki, Porti.

Cephalograptus cometa, Geinitz. spiralis, Geinitz.

Dimorphograptus Swanstoni, Lapw. | —— proteus?, Barr.

(i. 25). involutus, Lapw. (iv. 9).

Climacograptus rectangularis, triangulatus, Harkn. (v. 6).

M‘ Coy. Nilssoni?, Barr, (ii. 18).

Diplograptus vesiculosus, Nich. (i. Rastrites peregrinus, Barr.

22, 26). capillaris, Carr. (iv. 19).

Monograptus Hisingeri, Carr. hybridus, Lapw. (v. 17).

tenuis, Porti. —— Linnei, Barr.

gregarius, Lapw. (ii. 25).

The following Gala-Wenlock forms are also figured by

Geinitz, but do not appear to occur in association with the

foregoing, being found at Grafenwarth and Linda only :—

Monograptus priodon, Bronn, Monograptus colonus, Barr.

bohemicus ?, Barr. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

The whole of the forms enumerated by Geinitz have been

subsequently noticed by Dr. Richter in his most valuable

* Geinitz, Die Graptolithen, pls. i.-vi.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 50

papers * on the Graptolites of Thuringia, together with the

following species :—

Diplograptus birastrites, Richter. Monograptus testis, Barr.

Rastrites urceolus, Richter. nuntius, Barr.

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. turriculatus, Barr.

gemmatus, Barr.

all of which, with the exeption of the first two, are probably

from strata of later age than the Birkhill Shales.

Bohemia.—We now enter upon the interesting region of

Bohemia, made classic to the student of the Proterozoic rocks

by the genius and researches of Barrande. In this area, as

already pointed out by Barrande himself, the single division

EKe1 and the hardly separable zone of the colonies are all that

represent the British strata interposed between the summit of

the Bala and the base of the Upper Ludlow of Murchison.

In other words, the Lower and Upper Llandovery, Tarannon,

Wenlock, and Lower Ludlow of Siluria find their equiva-

lents in a small group of carbonaceous and calcareous strata

not greatly exceeding 300 feet in thickness. At the present

time all the fossils from this diminutive group are united

under a single head, and the collective fauna shows of neces-

sity a combination of the characteristics of several distinct

British subformations. In Bohemia, precisely as in Britain,

the earlier stages of the period of the Third Fauna were

marked by repeated elevations and depressions of the sea-bed.

An additional local complication was introduced through the

prevalence of volcanic action during these early stages, as

shown in the abundance of igneous rocks, both interstratified

and intrusive, with which the fossiliferous strata are associated.

The unconformabilities, overlaps, faults, and folds pointed out

by Barrande in these strata are, in all probability, accompa-

nied by a host of other physical accidents as yet undetected.

When these physical complications shall have been more

perfectly unravelled, and the fossils of the beds classified

zone by zone, I feel assured that the anomalies which now

appear, on a cursory view, to be most naturally accounted

for on the hypothesis of successive interchanges of distinct

faunas will wholly disappear, and that, as our knowledge of

the rocks and fossils of the Proterozoic age increases, the

strata of the symmetrical Bohemian basin will be found to

admit of minute and satisfactory comparison with those of

Britain.

* Richter, Zeitschrift d. deutsch. geol. Gesellschaft, vols, for 1850, 1851,

1853-1871, &e.

56 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

Barrande’s first list of his species of the colonies is ‘as

follows :—

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. Monograptus Reemeri, Barr.*

— bhohemicus, Barr. colonus, Barr.

avery probable association, but one which (as we shall sub-

sequently show) would in Britain be at once set down as

probably existent at the Wenlock period. A fauna distinctly

of far older date is given in the extended Catalogue of the

Colonial Graptolites printed in the fourth part of the ‘ Dé-

fense des Colonies.’ From the Colonie d’Archiac, Barrande T

enumerates the following species (exclusive of undescribed

forms) :—

Rastrites peregrinus, Barr. Monograptus priodon, Bronn.

Diplograptus folium, His. Nilssoni, Barr.

Monograptus spinigerus, Nich. Becki, Barr.

—— Hisingeri, Carr. -—— colonus, Barr.

— nuntius, Barr. bohemicus, Barr.

As a whole this is a group of forms that might be looked for

at the very base of the Gala or Tarannon group. There are,

however, two forms, J. colonus, Barr., and M. bohemicus, Barr.,

which are not met with in Britain or Scandinavia until we

reach the Wenlock shale. They are, however, represented in

the much earlier Gala rocks by the allied forms MW. galaensis,

Lapw., and JZ. concinnus, Lapw.

In the Colonie Haidinger the following forms are pre-

Sent -—

Rastrites peregrinus, Barr. Monograptus colonus, Barr.

Diplograptus palmeus, Barr. Nilssoni, Barr.

Monograptus Becki, Barr. proteus, Barr.

bohemicus, Barr. spiralis, Gei.

an assemblage clearly of the same general geological date as

that in the Colonie d’Archiac.

From the Colonie Krejci the only forms enumerated by

Barrande are

Monograptus bohemicus, Barr. Monograptus priodon, Bronn.

colonus, Bary. Reemeri, Barr.

These are Barrande’s original Colonial forms, and, as already

hinted, suggest a Wenlock age for this special colony.

The shaly zone Ee 1, at the base of the series of strata

containing the Third Fauna of Barrande, affords precisely the

same general group of Graptolites as the typical Colonies

* Barrande, Grapt. de Boheme, p. 18.

+ Barrande, Défense des Colonies, iv. p. 126.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 57

themselves. The whole of the forms hitherto published by

Barrande from this zone are given in the subjoined list * :—

Diplograptus folium, His. Monograptus chimera, Barr.

palmeus, Barr. testis, Barr.

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. spiralis, Geinitz.

bohemicus, Barr. turriculatus, Barr.

—— Remert, Barr. proteus, Barr.

colonus, Barr. Rastrites Linneei, Barr.

nuntius, Barr. fugax, Barr.

— Halh, Barr. gemmatus, Barr.

Becki, Barr. peregrinus, Barr.

Nilssoni, Barr. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

To judge from this catalogue the band E e 1 includes repre-

sentatives of the Upper Birkhill, Gala, and Wenlock beds of

Britain and Scandinavia, where the forms in italics are ex-

clusively Wenlock and Ludlow species.

France.—The only Graptolitic strata of Llandovery age

hitherto detected in France are portions of the Ampelite-beds

of Anjou and Bretagne, &c. They form two consecutive

groups, the Schiste ampéliteuxw and the Calcaire ampé-

liteux, both rightly referred by the French geologists to the

Third Fauna of Barrande. ‘These Ampe/te-beds must in-

clude also strata of Wenlock age.

In the Ampelite-Schists of Maine et Loire M. Farge has

collected T

Monograptus colonus, Barr. Monograptus spiralis, Gezn.

Becki, Barr. Diplograptus folium, His.

—— Nilssoni, Barr.

From the higher zone with nodules ampéliteux, the repre-

sentative of the Ampelite-Limestone of other districts, Messrs.

Tromelin and Lebescontet have obtained

Monograptus bohemicus, Barr. Monograptus priodon, Bonn.

Becki, Barr. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

In their catalogue of the fossils of Anjou and Bretagne |

these authors enumerate from the Ampelite-Schists §

Diplograptus folium, His, Monograptus Nilssoni, Barr.

Monograptus Becki, Barr. spiralis, Gein.

colonus, Barr.

Monograptus testis, Barr., is quoted from the Ampelite-

Schists of the department of the Sarthe. If properly identified,

I suspect this is from higher beds, of true Wenlock age.

* Barrande, Grapt. de Bohéme, p. 18.

+ Tromelin and Lebesconte, Catalogue Silurian Foss. 1875, p. 52.

{ Tidem ibid. § Ibid. Table A.

58 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

Spain.—Rocks of Llandovery age occur also in the southern

districts of the Peninsula. Among the so-called Lower Silu-

rian fossils enumerated by De Verneuil and Barrande as

present in the Lower Paleozoic strata of Almaden and the

Sierra Morena are found *

Monograptus spiralis, Geinitz. Monograptus priodon, Bronn.

Halli, Barr. Diplograptus palmeus, Barr.

America.—Throughout the United States and Canada the

Llandovery strata consist almost wholly of coarse sandy non-

fossiliferous beds or of calcareous rocks abounding in Brachio-

poda, but destitute of Graptolites. The Clinton beds, which

may be roughly paralleled with our Tarannon Shales, afford

the peculiar American forms

Monograptus clintonensis, Hall. Retiolites venosus, Hall.

Salopian (or Wenlock and Lower Ludlow) Formation.

The great Mudstone or Salopian formation of Shropshire

is more or less graptolitiferous throughout. In a few locali-

ties its basal strata afford Rhabdophora in remarkable abun-

dance. As we ascend the succession they gradually diminish

in numbers, as a general rule. ‘To this, however, there are

exceptions. One of the most noticeable is that at the base of

the Lower Ludlow, where, more especially in Hereford and

Radnor, some of the beds are crowded with Graptolites. They

are, however, of but few species, and belong to a single genus

only. About the horizon of the Aymestry Limestone they

vanish altogether ; but whether this is due to the change in

the composition of the strata, which here begins to take on a

coarse sandy character, or whether it is owing to rapid ex-

tinction of the order, it is as yet impossible to determine.

(a) Zone of Cyrtograptus Murchisoni, Carr.

Wales.—The base of the Wenlock or Salopian series of the

neighbourhood of Builth is formed of a few feet of calcareo-

carbonaceous shales, crowded with fairly preserved Rhabdo-

phora, among which the beautiful species Cyrtograptus Mur-

chisont, Carr., is especially conspicuous. It is associated

with

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. Monograptus colonus, Barr.

Halli, Barr. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

vomerinus, Wich.

The same zone is probably present in the shales at the base

of the Wenlock, on the banks of the Onny, near Plowden,

* De Verneuil et Barr. Bull. Géol. Soe. France, 1855, p. 964.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 59

&c., where I have procured fragments of Cyrtograptus Mur-

chisont.

Lake District—Throughout the Westmoreland region the

zone of C. Murchisoni seems to overlie the Pale Slates proper,

and to form the base of the Coniston series. From the lowest

beds of the Coniston Flags near Broughton have been col-

lected, either by Prof. Nicholson or myself*,

Cyrtograptus Murchisoni, Carr. Monograptus riccartonensis P,

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. Lapw.

Halli, Barr. colonus, Barr.

vomerinus, Nich. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

Sweden.—The same zone has been detected by Mr. G.

Linnarsson at the base of the Letzolites-beds of Scania.

From this zone at Rostinga Herr v. Schmalensee has col-

lected +

Cyrtograptus Murchisoni, Ca. Monograptus vomerinus, Wich.

Monograptus priodon, Lronn. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

The same zone is recognizable in many other localities,

always affording its characteristic fossils.

Bohemia.—Mr. Carruthers { recognized Cyrtograptus Mur-

chisont in a collection of Graptolites forwarded by Barrande

to the British Museum, London. Its true horizon in Bohemia

is unknown.

(6) Higher Wenlock Strata.

Wales.—In the main mass of the Wenlock Shales, Grapto-

lites are rarer than in the Murchisont zone. Locally, how-

ever, they are abundant. From the Wenlock Shales, near

Builth-Road Station, Radnorshire, I have collected

Cyrtograptus Linnarssoni, Lapw. Monograptus Halli, Bary.

Monograptus colonus, Barr. —— vomerinus, Nich.

The same forms occur in the Wenlock Shales of the valley

of the Onny, above Horderly, the first named in fragments

only.

Lake District—In the higher Coniston Flags of the Lake

District I have myself collected

Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr. Monograptus vomerinus, Nich.

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. colonus, Barr.

* Professor Hughes enumerates also Monograptus Flemingit, Salt., and

Monograptus latus, M‘Coy, from these beds (Mem. Geol. Survey England

and Wales, Explan. Sheet 98, 8.E., p. 11).

+ Linnarsson, Obs. Grapt. Schists of Scania (Geol. Foren, Foérhandl.

1879, p. 256).

{ Carruthers, Geol, Magazine, vol. v. p. 128.

60 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

and in Prof. Nicholson’s fine collection I recognized, as being

also procured from these beds,

Monograptus Halli, Bary. Monograptus dubius, Swess.

bohemicus, Barr. riccartonensis, Lapw.

Scotland.—F rom the Riccarton Beds of the basin of the

Solway, which stand generally in the place of the Wenlock

of Siluria, the following forms have been collected by Mr.

James Wilson or myself * :—

Retiolites Geinitzianus, Bar? Monograptus vomerinus, Nich.

Cyrtograptus Carruthersi, Lapw. colonus, Barr.

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. — dubius ?, Suess.

riccartonensis, Lapw.

Near Straiton, in the county of Ayrshire, beds probably

belonging to the base of the Riccarton series afford

Monograptus vomerinus, Nich. Cyrtograptus, sp.

From the Wenlock strata of Habbies Howe, in the Pent-

land Hills, Mr. Henderson f has collected

Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr. Monograptus priodon, Bronn.

colonus, Barr. vomerinus, Nich.

Sweden.—According to the most recent communications of

Mr. G. Linnarsson, the Retiolites Skiffer of Scania, which

succeed the zone of Cyrtograptus Murchisont, already referred

to, fall into two main divisions f, viz. :—

(1) Strata with Monograptus testis, Barr.

(2) Strata with Monograptus colonus, Barr.

Near Jerrestad and ‘Tomarp the dark grey schists with

calcareous nodules that compose the ‘ Strata with Mono-

graptus testis” yield

Monograptus testis, Bar. Monograptus colonus, Barr.

priodon, Bronn. Cyrtograptus, sp.

The overlying “ Strata with J/. colonus” are comparatively

barren greenish and grey schists, and have a wide geographical

extension in Scania. ‘They afford principally

Monograptus colonus, Barr. Monograptus Barrandei, Swess.

priodon ?, Bronn.

and they are especially characterized by the presence of Car-

diola interrupta (Brod.), which is unknown in the underlying

Scanian formations.

Norway.—To this general Wenlock horizon probably

* Lapworth, Scottish Monograptide, Geol. Mag. 1876,

+ Lapworth, Trans. Edinburgh Geol. Soc. 1874.

{ Linnarsson, Observations on Graptolitiferous Schists of Scania (Geol.

Foren. Férhandl. 1879, p. 256).

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 61

belong the Graptolitide figured by Prof. Kjerulf from his

étage 8 of the Proterozoic rocks of Christiania*. They

include

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr.

colonus ?, Barr. Cyrtograptus, sp.

Bohemia.—The forms enumerated by Barrande from the

Limestone beds of the étage E have a decidedly Salopian

facies f. They are

Monograptus priodon, Bronn. Monograptus colonus, Barr.

bohemicus, Barr. chimera, Barr.

Reemeri, Barr.

France-—Among the fossils collected by M. de Grasset at

Cabritres, near Neffiez (Hérault), in Languedocf, the following

Salopian group of Rhabdophora is noticed :—

Monograptus bohemicus, Barr. Monograptus Reemeri, Bary.

stap ) 3 ,

priodon, Bronn.

These are found, as usual, in association with Cardiola

interrupta (Broderip).

Wales.—The distribution of the Rhabdophora in the Lower

Ludlow rocks of Siluria was made the subject of special study

by Mr. Hopkinson in 1873; and a brief summary of his con-

clusions was communicated to the British Association in that

year. The results of my own hasty examination of these

rocks during the summer of 1879 were in the direction of

confirming his general conclusions, without adding any new

facts of special importance.

According to Mr. Hopkinson the Lower Ludlow rocks of

Leintwardine and its neighbourhood afford §

Monograptus colonus, Barr. Monograptus Salweyi, Hopk. MS.

leintwardinensis, Hopk. DIS, Reemeri, Barr. Sc.

Of these, Monograptus leintwardinensis is most emphati-

cally the characteristic fossil of the zone. I met with it in

extraordinary abundance not only near Leintwardine, but

also near Barrington, Adferton, and Vinnal, &c., near Ludlow.

I met with it also in swarms, but indifferently preserved, in

the Lower Ludlow of the neighbourhood of Presteign and New

Radnor.

* Kjerulf, Veiviser, 1865, p. 31.

+ Barrande, Graptolites de Bohéme, p. 18.

} Tromelin et Lebesconte, Catalogue Foss. siluriens, 1875, p. 54.

§ Hopkinson, Geological Magazine, 1878, p. 520; ibid. 1875, p, 561.

62 M. Pringsheim on the Action of Light

Downtonian Strata.

Above the horizon of the Aymestry Limestone, which forms

the divisional line between the Lower and Upper Ludlow

groups of Murchison, no distinct species of Graptolite has yet

been identified. Prof. Phillips * notices the presence of

Graptolites in the Upper Ludlow of the Malvern Hills, but

does not attempt their identification. Mr. R. Etheridge t

catalogues a fragment of a Graptolite from the supposed

Lower Old Red Sandstone of Lanarkshire. Mr. G. Linnars-

son informs me that he has recently recognized a Graptolite

in a collection of fossils from the Gothland Sandstone, which

possibly corresponds to the lower part of the British Down-

tonian series.

[To be continued. |

VI.—On the Action of Light and the Function of Chloro-

phyll in Plants. By M. PrincsHer ft.

My purpose in this preliminary communication is to state

some results which I have obtained by a new and peculiar

method of investigation in concentrated sunlight.

I have made use of this method for some years in order to

gather experimental knowledge of the relations of light to the

absorption of gases by growing plants, and of the part played

therein by chlorophyll. Amid the confusion of contradictory

opinions and statements which pervade the literature of the

subject, after many vain endeavours to advance upon the path

usually trodden, I felt myself bidden to proceed to the employ-

ment of intensified light. I hoped thus to be able in a short

time to bring into view, and unequivocally to observe imme-

diately in the cell, and directly under the microscope, the

processes called forth in plants by the action of light.

In fact the experiments which have hitherto been made

have laboured under the serious defect that too inconsiderable

intensities of light were employed. ‘This is especially true of

those experiments in which it was endeavoured to prove that

the different colcurs of the spectrum act differently upon

plants. If plants are grown in diffused daylight, or even in

direct sunshine behind coloured screens or coloured glasses or

* Phillips, Mem. Geolog. Survey, vol. ii.

+ Etheridge, Mem. Geol. Survey Scotland, Explan. Sheet 25, p. 57..

{ Translated from the ‘Monatsbericht der kéniglich preussischen

Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, July 1879, pp. 552-546,

_and the Function of Chlorophyll in Plants. 63

liquids, they evidently grow in relative obscurity in compari-

son with their normal conditions, even in relation to the

colour the action of which is wished to be investigated ; hence

the results thus obtained correspond only to the actions pro-

duced in plants by cnsuffictent intensities of light. Moreover

the function of chlorophyll itself contributes to the weakening

of the result. I mention this because certain conjectures

respecting the function of chlorophyll, which have since been

verified, first induced me to take up these experiments with

higher intensities of light.

So long as I employed only comparatively inconsiderable

augmentations of the intensity, I obtained no decisive results.

Tat last attained satisfactory effects when I ventured to bring

organic forms, vegetable and animal cells and tissues, into

the plane of an image of the sun which I projected in the

focus of an achromatic lens of 60 millims. diameter.

The apprehension which perhaps at first arises, that organic

structures must under these circumstances be forthwith de-

stroyed by the thermal action of the solar image, is, as a

closer consideration and direct experiment show, unfounded.

With proper precautions, the object can be observed undis-

turbed for a considerable time in the sun’s image, as indeed is

approximately shown by the phenomena in the so-called solar

microscope. In this way the influence of the radiation upon

an entire tissue and upon each single cell, nay, even upon the

different form-constituents of a single cell, can be separately -

studied, and with a little attention the thermal and photo-

chemical effects of the radiation can be certainly and sharply

distinguished.

Hence this method of microscopical photochemistry (as I

would call it) is preeminently adapted for investigating whether

any, and what, photochemical actions of light take place in

protoplasm and in the formed constituents of the cell-body ;

and it is equally suitable for determining the relative degree

of diathermasy of the cell-contents and the cell-membrane.

In this way also the effects of higher degrees of heat can be

more conveniently brought into view than by aid of heated

object-tables. Lastly, it is self-evident that the method is

applicable for animals and animal tissues as well as for plants ;

and with it we can at the same time demonstrate the sensa-

tion of heat in the lowest classes of animals (Protozoa and

Coelenterata), and in certain cases ascertain the truth respec-

ting the presence, and the seat, of the perception of light.

The experiments in reference to this which, in the course

of my investigations, I have made on animals I will commu-

nicate subsequently ; I will here preliminarily enter more

64 M. Pringsheim on the Action of Light

minutely only into that part of my researches which has for

its subject the influence of light upon the plant-cell.

If a chlorophyll-bearing tissue, or even a single cell con-

taining chlorophyll (a moss-leaf, a fern-prothallium, a Chara,

a Conferva, or a section of a leaf of any Phanerogamic water-

or land-plant &c.), be placed in the usual manner under the

microscope, while, at the same time, by means of a heliostat

and a lens of about 60 millims. diameter, the image of the sun

is thrown upon the plane of the field of vision at the spot in

which the object is, so that the latter appears formally im-

mersed in the image, in a few minutes (from 3 to 6 and

upwards) very considerable and energetic changes can be seen

to take place in the object.

The first phenomenon seen, more striking than any other,

is the complete destruction of the chlorophyll under the eye of

the observer. The green plant-cell, exposed only a few

minutes to the concentrated sunlight, makes exactly the same

impression as if it had lain for twenty-four hours in strong

alcohol. ‘The green colouring-matter has disappeared, while

the primitive substance of the chlorophyll has for the most

part its forms entirely preserved, and even its nature appa-

rently not essentially altered. But in the experiments in the

light it will be possible to localize the decolorization, and at

leasure to confine it to a single cell or even a portion of a

cell ; for the destruction strikes only the place upon which the

light is directly incident; so that, for instance, in a cell a

single chlorophyll-grain, a single turn of a filament in a

Spirogyra, &c. are decolorized, while the adjacent grains of

chlorophyll and the next preceding and following coils remain

intact in form and colour.

The changes which take place, however, are not limited to

the destruction of the green colouring-matter only; they

gradually attack also the other constituents of the cell, and,

according to the duration of the action of the light, go on to

the complete death of the entire cell. Thus, if its duration

is protracted, the motion of the granules in threads of pro-

toplasm, and the circulation of the protoplasm itself, where

they previously existed (as in the utricles of Nitelle and

Chare, in the leat-cells of Vallisneria, in the hairs of the

staminal filaments of Zadescantia, in the stinging hairs of

Urtica, &c.), are arrested; the threads of protoplasm break ;

the normal arrangement of the cell-contents is destroyed ;

the cytoblast, where it occupies certain positions (as in the

Spirogyre), is dislocated, breaks away from the threads of

protoplasm to which it is suspended; the cuticular layer con-

tracts, loses its impermeability to colouring-matters; the

and the Function of Chlorophyll in Plants. 65

turgescence of the cell is annihilated; in short, the cell

exhibits all the phenomena of rapid and irreparable de-

struction.

These phenomena are not direct effects of a high tempe-

rature produced in the cell by the radiation. By varying

the experiment by means of coloured screens, causing the

rays which delineate the image of the sun to pass through

coloured glasses or vessels containing coloured fluids, this

can be rendered highly probable, as I will show in my de-

tailed presentation of the subject. I will here merely mention

that the destruction of the contents of the cell in the way

above portrayed takes effect in all colours. It matters not

whether the image of the sun is produced as a warm red

image behind a solution of iodine in sulphide of carbon, or

as a green one behind a solution of chloride of copper, or

as a cold blue one behind ammonio-cupric sulphate; the

result is always the same, provided only that the coloured

screens transmit a light of sufficient intensity.

It is, however, easily perceptible, even without photo-

metric measurement, that blwe light exerts a more powerful

action than red. Behind a solution of iodine in sulphide of

carbon so concentrated that, except the red up to the wave-

length 000061 millim., to the human eye it transmits no

portion of the spectrum, especially no blue, even in direct

sunlight, the phenomena described will not be seen to occur

even with long-continued action of the sun’s image, al-

though here at least 80 per cent. of the total heat of the

white image is effective, and although this red image still

possesses a brightness unendurable even for a very short

time by any human eye, and, finally, although the first two

strong absorption-bands of the chlorophyll-spectrum fall in

the red of this image of the sun, and consequently this red

is absorbed in considerable quantity by the chlorophyll.

On the other hand, a rapid and powerful action always takes

place behind even a dark solution of ammonio-cupric sulphate,

which absorbs the entire less-refrangible half of the solar

spectrum to about the wave-length 0:00051 millim., and like-

wise behind a screen of deep-green glass, which is but very

slightly diathermanous.

But, apart from the action being independent of the greater

or less diathermasy of the screen, the most direct proof can be

adduced that the destruction wrought in the cell does not

depend upon the thermal action of the radiation ; for it can be

shown that the occurrence of all the phenomena of destruction

of the cell and its contents in the light is exclusively condi-

tioned by the presence of oxygen in the surrounding atmosphere.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 5

66 M. Pringsheim on the Action of Light

The destruction does not take place in media free from

oxygen.

If the experiments be made in a so-called microscopic gas-

chamber, through which various gases can be passed during

the experiment, the effects above described take place only in

atmospheric air and in media containing oxygen; but they

constantly fail to appear, under otherwise like conditions, even

if the experiment be continued twice or three times as long,

in hydrogen or media containing no oxygen. But both when

atmospheric air passes through the gas-chamber, and when

oxygen is substituted for the air, the absorptions of the chlo-

rophyll remain unaltered, and the thermal actions of the sun’s

image at least equal. If, however, the experiment be exces-

sively prolonged in hydrogen, disturbances, it is true, will be

seen to occur; but these, even in their first stages, are essen-

tially different from those described, and are easily shown to

be thermal effects.

Even in a mixture of pure hydrogen and carbonic acid

cleared as much as possible of free oxygen, under these cireum-

stances neither in any colour nor in white itself does any

photochemical action appear: the green cell remains therein

perfectly green and in every respect underanged.

On the other hand, the abstraction of the carbonic acid has

not the slightest influence upon the occurrence of the action.

In air containing oxygen, from which by all possible means

the carbonic acid is abstracted before it enters the gas-chamber,

the decolorizing of chlorophyll, the destruction and death of

the cell take place as rapidly as in media containing carbonic

acid.

The conclusions to be drawn from these experiments are

clear and simple.

If we in the first place stop at the action of the light upon

the green colouring-matter, we find in the demonstrable de-

pendence of the phenomenon upon the presence of oxygen,

and in its independence of the abstraction of carbonic acid,

proof that the destruction of chlorophyll by light in the living

plant ts an act of combustion influenced and promoted by the

light, and stands in no relation to the decomposition of carbonic

acid by the plant.

By varying the experiment, e. g. shortening its duration by

stopping the action before complete destruction of the colouring-

matter i the chlorophyll-bodies, it can further be shown that

the cell and, in like manner, the individual chlorophyll-grain

are incapable of restoring the destroyed colouring- matter of the

partly decolorized chlorophyll-bodies, although with so brief

a duration of the action of the light the cell behaves in all

and the Function of Chlorophyll in Plants. 67

other respects quite normally, remains living, and may even

continue to grow.

This incapacity of the cell, and of every single chlorophyll-

grain, to regenerate the colouring-matter destroyed by light

holds good for all, even the least, degrees of weakening or de-

struction of colour in the chlorophyll-grain. It hence follows

that the destruction of chlorophyll by light cannot be a normal,

physiological act in the life of the plant, but is a detrimental

and pathological process.

What becomes of the chlorophyll colourmg-matter on its

destruction by light in the cell I could not make out, although

I took much pains for the purpose of doing so. I did not

succeed in a microchemical way in discovering any substance,

in the cell decolorized by light, which could be regarded as

the product of the destruction of the chlorophyll. A possible

simultaneous augmentation of the oil or the starch of the

decolorized cell, or the formation of grape-sugar or dextrine,

cannot be ascertained. Hence I am inclined, so far as my

investigations have yet extended, to assume that herein the

chlorophyll passes direct into the gaseous products of the

respiration of the plant.

With respect to the rest of the above-sketched destruction-

phenomena, which occur with these experiments in intensified

light in the protoplasm and the not green contents of the cell,

and which can be heightened to the death of the cell, there is

no doubt that they too are direct photochemical actions of

light. They are not immediate thermal effects of the sun’s

image ; nor are they secondary phenomena produced, as might

perhaps be thought, by some yet unknown poisonous products

of the destruction of the chlorophyll colouring-matter in light.

This is proved, first, by experiment on cells which are colour-

less and contain no chlorophyll—as, for example, on the hairs

of the filaments of Tradescantia, on the stinging-hairs of

Urtica, &c., in which the arrest of the motion in the threads

of protoplasm and their destruction in light occur in a similar

manner and under the same circumstances as in green cells

and is promoted by the presence of oxygen.

A sufficiently rigorous demonstration can moreover be ob-

tained with green cells and tissues, if, in the way above men-

tioned, we shorten the duration of the experiment, breakin

it off after the destruction of the chlorophyll and Jdefore the

cell-contents beneath this have suffered under the action of

the light. Singularly favourable for experiments of this kind

are the long utricles of Nitedla. If a small fraction of the

length of one of these be exposed to the influence of light,

and the experiment be stopped when the chlorophyll is de-

68 M. Pringsheim on the Action of Light

prived of colour but the motion of the protoplasm in the

utricle is still maintained, this will continue living for days

and weeks and behave quite like a normal, uninjured utricle.

Frequently the decolorized chlorophyll-bodies, if the expe-

riment has been stopped at the right time, then fall down from

the wall of the utricle into the level of the current, are carried

along and circulate with it uninterruptedly, and without being

altered, in the regular path of its flow, and travel the whole

extent of the path through the entire utricle with the same

velocity as the other large formed bodies contained in it (the

mucilaginous and ciliated corpuscles), without further dis-

turbing the course of the current.

The place on which the light has fallen, however, appears

completely bare, and, denuded of chlorophyll-bodies, lets the

underlying cell-contents be directly seen. At the same time

the wall-coating of the green parts of the utricle may remain

quite unaltered and exhibit, for instance, the chlorophyll-

bodies, the arrangement of the chlorophyll series, the indiffe-

rence-streaks, &c. in normal condition quite as usual. ‘These

utricles with a spot denuded of chlorophyll-bodies by light

present a singular appearance.

If this utricle be placed with the same spot (now denuded

of chlorophyll) again exposed to intense light, in it also there

follows the destruction of the contents of the cell, without any

further decolorization of the chlorophyll bodies, just as before

in the green utricles which were submitted to a longer action

of the light, and, in fact, more quickly than in these.

This experiment therefore proves that the destruction of the

contents of the green cells is independent of the chlorophyll

colouring-matter, and shows (since the destruction occurs or

does not occur in the gas-chamber under the same circum-

stances here also as in the green cells) that the destruction of

protoplasm by light is also an act of combustion evoked by

the heightened respiration in the lght—or, in other words,

that with the intensity of the ght the affinity of oxygen

for the combustible elements in the interior of the cell is in-

creased. Lut this experiment also shows that the chlorophyll,

as long as tt lasts, acts as a protective covering, moderating the

injurious influence of light upon the protoplasm.

Hence these experiments, by which is demonstrated the

destructively heightened respiration of plants in intense light,

at the same time bring to light the hitherto unimagined func-

tion of chlorophyll—by its strong absorption of the so-called

chemical rays especially, to limit the intensity of, and thus to

regulate, the respiration.

Now I have further taken the trouble to investigate which

and the Function of Chlorophyll in Plants. 69

constituents of the plant-cell, being consumed in oxygen, are

used up as the proper combustibles in the respiration of the

cell. ‘This question, too, had not yet been attacked. Investi-

gation in intense light gives us the means of approaching it

more closely.

Convincing evidence is easily obtained that all the better-

known formal constituents of the cell-body, even in intense

light, are incombustible and indestructible inside the cell.

This holds true of the cell-wall, of the starch-grains, also ‘of

the amylaceous contents of the chlorophyll-bodies, and of the

fatty matters (7.e. both those enclosed in the chlorophyll-bodies

and the fat-globules occurring independently in thecell). There-

fore none of these substances in the plant is directly utilized

for the respiration. The cytoblast likewise, in the plant in

intense light, appears incombustible ; the changes which it

undergoes I am inclined to regard as secondary effects of the

alterations otherwise originated in the plasma in the light.

On the other hand, in the protoplasm itself it is incontrover-

tible that alterations take place which prove themselves to be

direct attacks of the oxygen-respiration taking place in light.

It is especially remarkable that the granules within the con-

tractile threads of protoplasm grow less and disappear. It

can with equal distinctness be demonstrated that that en-

velope of the cell-body which I have named the cuticular

layer * (Mohl’s “ primordial utricle”’) is diminished in mass,

and that the granules (turned brown by iodine) which are so

frequently imbedded in the cuticular layer become perceptibly

fewer in number, so that, as it appears, hereby the most

essential properties of the cuticular layer are changed.

Hence these bodies (of the chemical constitution of which

we possess no further knowledge) preeminently represent

the combustible material in the cell, which is expended in

respiration. Respecting their nature perhaps an explanation

may be given by the discovery (which I succeeded in making)

of a previously unknown body in the plant-cell, which, of all

the constituents it contains, may be designated as the most

sensitive and the most perishable under the influence of light.

I ascertained, namely, that in the elementary substance of

the chlorophyll-bodies, likewise in the elementary substance

of the so-called amorphous chlorophyll in those plants which

as yet possess no formed chlorophyll-bodies, and in every

chlorophyll-green plant-cell without exception, there is present

and distinguishable a peculiar body, on the preparation of

* ‘Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Bildung der Pflanzenzelle.’

Berlin, 1854,

70 M. Pringsheim on the Action of Light

which on a large scale, and the determination of its chemical

properties, I am still engaged.

This body, which I call hypochlorin or hypochromyl (be-

cause it stands in the closest relation to the chlorophyll and

constantly as it were occurs under it), can be with extreme

facility brought into view by michrochemistry. In order to see

it emerge, we have only to place any chlorophyll-green tissue

(no matter from what section of phanerogams or cryptogams)

for from twelve to twenty-four hours in diluted hydrochloric

acid. ‘The hypochlorin then makes its appearance in the form

of extremely minute viscous drops which grow larger by accu-

mulation, or masses of a semifluid consistence, which gradually

become indistinctly crystalline scales or tufts, and finally grow

out into indistinctly crystalline needles.

This body proves, from all its microchemical characters, to

be an unctuous substance bathing the elementary substance

of the chlorophyll-bodies, soluble in alcohol, ether, oil of tur-

pentine, and benzole, insoluble in water and salt-solutions,

and, after separation from the elementary substance, hardening

in a shorter or longer space of time, perhaps through oxida-

tion, into an obscurely crystalline body possessing all the

properties of a resin or species of wax (in the sense of the

older pharmacological chemistry). In their indistinctly deve-

loped forms, the needles formed by this substance remind one,

in some measure, of the various shapes of bacilli of the bloom

on the surface of the leaves in the Musacee and Gramineee—

for example, in Heliconia farinosa and the sugar-cane. From

all these properties I have come to the opinion (with the reser-

vation of a more exact chemical analysis which I contemplate

making of it) that this body represents an ethereal oil which

becomes resinous, if already in the ground-mass itself it does

not form a mixture of several bodies of that kind (after the

manner of the so-called balsams). But, apart from its more

intimate chemical constitution, so much is certain, that this

body, with its striking and easily demonstrable properties, is

a constant and never-failing companion of the green colouring-

matter in the ground-mass of the chlorophyll-bodies.

It is in fact never absent from any chlorophyll-green plant.

It is more generally distributed in the chlorophyll-bodies than

their starch and oily matters, and appears with them both in

chlorophyll-bodies containing starch and in those which carry

fat, and also in those containing both fat and starch. It is

only those plants which possess no proper green chlorophyll

(Phycochromacee, Diatomese, Fucacee, and Florides) that

appear to exhibit a different behaviour; on this, however, my

investigations are not yet concluded.

and the Function of Chlorophyll in Plants. 71

The universality of the occurrence of this body in all green

chlorophyll-bearing plant-cells, its generation in light, its

relation to oxygen, and its behaviour to the amylaceous con-

tents of chlorophyll-bodies scarcely permit us to doubt that it

is a true primary assimilation-product of green plants, from

which, under the influence of light, are brought forth by

oxidation the starch and oil enclosures of the chlorophyll-

bodies as the reserve-substances destined to supply the elements

for the circulation.

Hypochlorin, further, proves itself to be the most readily

combustible, in ight and oxygen, of all the constituents of

the cell. It is consumed even sooner than chlorophyll by

intense light in the presence of oxygen. Tor the ordinary

intensities of light, under which the plant vegetates, chloro-

phyll affords sutticient protection to hypochlorin. With the

heightened intensities in the experiments, that shelter no

longer suffices, and even the light transmitted by the

chlorophyll is intense enough for its rapid destruction in

oxygen.

That hypochlorin, present in the normal conditions of the

plant in variable amount in every grain of chlorophyll, is sub-

jected to an uninterrupted increase and decrease can easily

be shown ; and all comparative investigations between younger

and older states of development of the chlorophyll-grains de-

cidedly indicate that the accumulation and growth of starch in

the ground-mass of chlorophyll-bodies advances hand in hand

with a diminution of the hypochlorin in them. In darkness

the hypochlorin (which, as it appears at least from my expe-

riments hitherto, does not directly participate in the circulation

of substance) is more stable than the starch—which again

only shows that its transformation into more highly oxidized

substances in the cell is accelerated by the heightened respira-

tion in the light.

The facts here briefly sketched disclose a series of new

points of view for judging of the action of light on plants.

The demonstrable conditions under which the destruction of

chlorophyll in the living plant is effected, the knowledge of

the eminent augmentation of the amount of respiration with

the increase of light-intensity (which may in every colour

grow to such a degree as to destroy the cell), the undeniable

influence exerted by the light-absorptions in the chlorophyll

upon the amount of the respiration, finally the discovery of

hypochlorin with its properties, conditions of origin, and

behaviour in light, permit, if 1 am not mistaken, a more

correct estimate of the hitherto misunderstood oldest and most

72 M. Pringsheim on the Action of Light

general experiences on the relations between the gas-exchange

of plants, light, and the function of chlorophyll.

1 reserve the critical estimation of the bearing of the

results here communicated of my observations upon the older

statements and notions for the full description which is to

appear in one of the next numbers of my ‘Jahrbiicher fiir

wissenschaftliche Botanik,’ where the necessary figures for

illustration will be given. But I will here briefly epitomize

the most important points of view for a preliminary eluci-

dation.

I. As regards chlorophyll, the possibility of its destruction

by light, in the living plant, is unequivocally demonstrated ;

but at the same time it is shown that the destruction is not a

normal, but a pathological process. The plant cannot rege-

nerate the destroyed colouring-matter ; and the destruction

itself is independent of the absorption of CO, ; hence it cannot

play any part in the assimilation of carbon.

This overthrows every chemical theory that would indicate

a genetic origin of the hydrates of carbon from chlorophyll.

It is further made evident that the destruction takes place

in rays of all colours—in the red, yellow, green, and blue;

and it is shown that no definite relation exists between the

maxima of light-absorption in the chlorophyll colouring-

matter and the colour which originates the destruction.

II. As regards respiration, not only is the proof produced

(which, in full rigour, has hitherto been wanting) that the

absorption of oxygen takes place also in direct sunlight—a

proposition which strictly was previously only a theoretical

postulate,—but it is at the same time shown that respiration

is uncommonly heightened when the intensity of the light is

increased. It is therefore a simple consequence, as also the |

directly proved result of my experiments, that the chlorophyll

colouring-matter, by its strong absorption of light, lowers the

amount of respiration, as it suspends the operation of the

photochemically most operative portion of the radiation.

Further the materials are discriminated which are used up in

the respiration of the plant-cell; and a series of well-known

form-constituents of it are shown to have no part in this.

III. For the deeper insight into the process of assimilation,

by the proof of the presence in all chlorophyll-bodies of a

previously unknown body, from which proceeds the starch

enclosed in them, the universal primary product of assimila-

tion of green plants is discovered. It is already, from the

microchemical and morphological properties of this body,

rendered in the highest degree probable that it is either a pure

hydrocarbon, or else belongs to the series of organic plant-

and the Function of Chlorophyll in Plants. 73

constituents which contain less oxygen than the so-called

hydrates of carbon.

This, again, if the most probable hypothesis be admitted,

that plants build up their first carbonaceous material out of

carbonic acid and water, explains in a natural way why, not-

withstanding the exceedingly heightened respiration in light,

the volumes of the air-filled closed spaces in which plants

are cultivated in sunlight may yet remain unaltered in

magnitude.

IV. The function of the green colour of vegetables is reduced,

in a way widely deviating from present notions, to its im-

portance for the respiration of oxygen. It is shown that

chlorophyll, as the regulator of the plant’s respiration in light,

by its strong absorption of the chemically most operative

rays, depresses the amount of the respiration of green plants

below that of their assimilation, and thus renders possible the

accumulation of carbon-containing products and the existence

of the plant in light.

This extinction of the blue rays in chlorophyll at the same

time accounts for the observed greater efficiency of the rays of

medium refrangibility for the evolution of the oxygen of the

plant, as well as for the apparent coincidence of the assimila-

tion-curve of the plant with the brightness-curve of the

human eye. Unquestionably the maximum of assimilation

for different plants lies in different parts of the effective rays

of medium refrangibility, and depends on the amount of ex-

tinction (absolutely different for different plants) of the

chemical rays in the chlorophyll.

Is this function of limiting the respiration the only one

which chlorophyll exercises in the gas-exchange of plants ?

I shall return to this question in subsequent papers. It is

indubitable that at present it is the only one actually demon-

strated ; for the sole support which, since the discovery of the

giving-out of oxygen by plants, has hitherto always again

and again been urged for the direct participation of chlorophyll

in the process of decomposing carbonic acid, namely that only

green parts liberate oxygen, finds in the lowering of the

amount of the respiration by the chlorophyll its sufficient

explanation.

V. In conclusion, it must be mentioned that for a series of

plant-constituents belonging to the class of ethereal oils and

their immediate derivates, and which it has been customary

to explain as exclusively products of a retrograde metamor-

phosis, a universal immediate origin within the elementary

substance of every chlorophyll-grain is demonstrated — a

further following-out of which promises important elucida-

74 Bibliographical Notices.

tions respecting the distribution and occurrence of those

bodies.

There is scarcely any phenomenon in the plant-world under

the influence of light for the judging of which some new or

essentially changed points of view are not gained through the

theory here set up of the action of chlorophyll, and through

the proof of the influence of light upon the respiration of

plants. In the already mentioned memoir (in my ‘ Jahr-

biicher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik ’), with the preparation

of which for the press I am now occupied, and which will

bring into view the various forms of the hypochlorin needles,

I hope to introduce some further details even in this

direction.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

A Manual of Paleontology for the Use of Students. By H. ALLEYNE

Nicuotson, M.D., D.Sc., F.G.S., &e. 2nd Edition. Revised and

greatly enlarged. In two vols. Edinburgh and London: W.

Blackwood and Sons, 1879.

Tue study of fossil remains may be considered under different

aspects—either in their biological relations, or in relation to the

nature and succession of life in time, or as characteristic medals of

different geological periods, or as explaining, from the known habits

of closely-related forms, the conditions under which the various

sedimentary formations were deposited. In whatever way we

may wish to interpret them, a concise account of their nature and

character is essential to the student of the life-history of the globe.

Few special treatises have been devoted to this subject, although

notices of fossils occur in most geological text-books. The earlier

works of Parkinson in 1811 and 1822, useful for their time, were

twenty-two years later superseded by Mantell’s ‘ Medals of Crea-

tion’ (1844-54), which in its turn was followed (1560-61) by the

more special work on Paleontology of Prof. Owen. Based upon the

same principle as the latter work, the first edition of Prof. Nichol-

son’s ‘ Manual of Paleontology’ appeared in 1872, containing about

600 pages and 400 woodcuts.

With the exception of the omission of the last section, devoted

to historical and stratigraphical geology, and which is, to some

extent, embodied in the author’s ‘ Ancient Life-History of the

Earth, in general arrangement the present edition is similar

to the former; but it has been so ‘thoroughly revised, greatly

augmented, and largely rewritten, with the addition of nearly

double the number of woodcuts, that it may be considered almost

a new work, comprising a comprehensive account of the leading

Bibliographical Notices. 75

principles and facts of the vast and ever-increasing science of

Paleontology.

The work is divided into three parts: the first part contains a

general introduction to the study of paleontology, and treats of the

characters, formation, and succession of the aqueous rocks, geolo-

gical continuity and contemporaneous deposits, the conclusions to

be drawn from fossils, the respective value of the vertebrates, inver-

tebrates, and plants as tests of geological age and position of strata,

and the general succession and progression of organic types, with a

tabular arrangement of the leading subdivisions of the animal king -

dom. Some additional matter is distributed in the six chapters

forming this part, as regards fossilization, the condition and mode of

occurrence of fossils (which might have been extended), the re-

placement of organic and other substances by silica and carbonate

of lime. The chemical and organic origin of flint and limestones is

fairly explained, as also that of phosphate of lime, either dissemi-

nated or concretionary in the sedimentary rocks due to organic

agency ; but this does not account for the veins of apatite or phos-

phorite in Spain, Norway, and other places ; and it may be doubted

how far the thick deposits of apatite in the Laurentian of Canada are

directly due to vital agency. The origin of the red clay of the

Atlantic depths (p. 25) has been attributed to other sources than

the disintegration of the tests of Foraminifera. The ‘ colonies” of

Barrande (p. 53), like those stated to occur in the Lake district,

may perhaps be otherwise interpreted than by the explanation

given (p. 54), when the contained fossils or the physical structure

of the district is further investigated.

The second part, comprising the history of the Invertebrata and

Vertebrata, forms by far the larger part of the two volumes

(chaps. vii. to xlviii.); and of these two divisions the former natu-

rally occupy the greater space, on account of their state of preserva-

tion, their comparative abundance and general distribution in the

sedimentary strata, and “especially upon the ground that paleon-

tological students are, as a rule, much more largely interested with

the former than the latter.”

The sixsubkingdoms of the Invertebrata are treated in a somewhat

similar manner, although not upon any absolutely uniform plan, as to

the general diagnostic characters and the characters of their respec-

tive classes and orders, their distribution or range in time, and to

the part which any of them has notably contributed to the forma-

tion of the solid crust of the earth. A short summary is generally

given of the principal fossil groups, the object being to select ‘for

notice and characterization those leading types of each great group

of fossils which may seem to demand mention on the ground of their

being common, or in other respects, geologically or zoologically, of

peculiar importance.”

This object is carried out in the successive chapters, The Brachio-

poda, from their importance, are fully noticed, as also the Lamelli-

branchiata ; the characters of the chief groups and genera and their

geological range are also given. In noticing the peculiar mode of

76 Bibliographical Notices.

attachment of one species of Productus (p. 457), by the twisting of

some of the spines of the ventral valve round the column of a

erinoid, we may mention that Prof. King, in 1850, had shown that

some forms of Strophalosia were attached to other bodies by their

long umbonal spines.

The Gasteropoda, Pteropoda, Heteropoda, and Cephalopoda are

described in the same manner as the preceding orders of Mollusca.

Under the Cephalopoda a classificatory table is given, adopted by

M. Favre, which is primarily based on the presence or absence of

an aptychus, with the new subgeneric names introduced by Waagen,

Suess, and others for the comprehensive genus Ammonites, which

hitherto have not been introduced into text-books. Although now

accepted, “it must be admitted that it is generally impossible to

refer particular specimens to these sections, unless they are in a

state of unusually complete preservation, or the observer be pro-

vided with a very extensive suite of examples of a given form.”

In treating of Hozodn the author speaks with caution, although he

gives fully the characters by which its organic nature has been

recognized. While briefly alluding to the opinions as to its non-

organic origin, Dr. Nicholson does not consider that the arguments

of Mobius are by any means decisive.

Under the Coelenterata the division ‘‘ Tabulata” is still retained.

Although, as stated in this work and the separate memoir on

the same group noticed in this Journal (Nov. 1879), from the

researches of Verrill and Moseley, the ‘‘Tabulate Corals” are a

most diverse group, and have reference to a structure not charac-

teristic of any natural one, still, says Dr. Nicholson, ‘‘there remain

some extinct groups of corals which may, in the meanwhile, be

retained to form the section Zabulata, though their true affinities

and systematic position are matters of great doubt” (p. 199).

Codaster and Codonites, which make a close approach to Pentre-

mites, are placed in the Cystoidea, as advocated by Billings, and

may be regarded as transitional forms between that order and the

Blastoidea, and thus extending the range of the Cystideans to the

Carboniferous. In describing the older fossil Polyzoa, the author

makes some remarks on the position of some fossils referred to Che-

tetes, Monticulipora, &c.; some of the forms described under these

names he considers really Polyzoa, while the tabulate forms of

these genera may be regarded as being Actinozoa. ‘The Secondary

and Tertiary Polyzoa are so numerous and varied that only a brief

and general review of the leading groups is given. The structure

of Heteropora is described at some length, as it is considered to have

an important bearing on the structure and systematic position of

Cheetetes, Fistulipora, &c. |

Under the Mollusca it might have been useful to have given the

sectional divisions of the important genera T’rigonia and /noceramus,

and also of Nerinwa. It may be noticed that Anomia and Cyrena

occur in the Jurassic strata ; and that the subgenus 7’rivza, typified

by Cyprea europea, stated not to occur in a fossil condition (vol. il.

. 22), is found in the Crag deposits.

Bibliographical Notices. , i

The descriptions of the five classes of Vertebrata occupy twenty

chapters; but, from the fragmentary condition in which their

remains frequently occur, a more general account of each class is

given, with definitions of the orders and a brief notice of the

leading forms of each, except in cases of special interest, which are

more fully described.

Under the class of Fishes the author notices the bodies called

“ Conodonts ” from the older Paleozoic rocks, and which have been

variously referred to Mollusca, Crustacea, and Fishes. The latter

affinity, as originally suggested by Pander, is supported by Prof.

Newberry, who is inclined to the view that they are really the

minute teeth of Cyclostomatous fishes allied to the living Lampreys

and Hag fishes. A similar opinion is held by Mr. Hinde (ina paper

to the Geological Society), from the examination of a large number

of specimens from the Cambro-Silurian and Devonian rocks of

Canada and the United States, who considers, notwithstanding the

differences in minute structure, we should not reject altogether

the probability that they may have belonged to a similar low type

of fishes as the existing Myxinoids.

The elevation of the Platysomoid fishes to the “rank of a distinct

division of the Ganoids,” as given at p. 138 on the authority of

Dr. Traquair, does not coincide with the views of that author, as no

such proposition occurs in the unpublished paper referred to by Dr.

Nicholson in the footnote of the same page. On the contrary, Dr.

Traquair (in a letter to the ‘ Annals,’ Dec. 1879) holds “that the

Platysomidve, as a family, are not really allied to the Pyenodontide,

but are, on the other hand, so closely linked to the Paleoniscidee

by ties of structure, that wherever we place the latter family,

thither the Platysomide must follow.”

The remarkable forms of Vertebrata lately described by Professors

Cope and Marsh from the rich fossiliferous localities of the Western

Territories, and which have so largely enriched the museums of

Newhaven and Philadelphia, are noticed. Of these the most

important are the Sauranodontia, Pteranodontia, and Dinosauria

among Reptiles, the Tillodontia, Dinocerata, and Brontotheride of

the Mammals, and the Odontornithes among the Birds—which

latter group will probably receive further elucidation from the

forthcoming memoir of Prof. Marsh.

The third part, containing four chapters, is devoted to Palzo-

botany; but scarcely any thing more is attempted than to give a

brief and elementary sketch of the general distribution of plants in

time, to which is added a short summary of the chief forms of vege-

table life which more particularly characterize each of the great

formations. The subject instead of being botanically is geologically

treated ; so that only the main features of the successive floras from

the Pre-carboniferous to the Tertiary are noticed. But little new

matter has been added to this part; so that the account of the Car-

boniferous, Permian, Triassic, Jurassic, and Eocene plants remains

nearly the same as in the former edition.

The work is well printed; the 722 woodcuts, with a few excep-

78 Bibliographical Notices.

tions, are generally excellent ; and, besides lists of the more impor-

tant works relating to each great division, there is a useful glossary

and copious index.

Notwithstanding every possible care, a text-book embracing so

wide a field as the present one must occasionally present some

shortcomings or omit some details which may be considered neces-

sary ; Still the subjects are placed before the reader in a clear and

concise manner by the author, himself a practical geologist and

experienced teacher, fully conversant with the requirements of the

student; and in this respect we consider he has succeeded in pro-

ducing a very useful and well-arranged Manual of Paleontology.

At the same time we cannot but regret that, even with the increased

size and additional woodcuts, the publishers have so greatly ad-

vanced the price as probably to preclude its acquisition by some of

those for whom it was specially intended.

An Introduction to Animal Morphology and Systematic Zoology.—

Part I. Invertebrata. By Atexanper Macatister, M.B. &c.

8vo. London: Longians, 1876.

An Introduction to the Systematic Zoology and Morphology of Verte-

brate Animals. By AtpxanpeR Macarister, M.B. &c. 8vo.

Dublin, Hodges ; London, Longmans, 1878.

Tusk two books, although published at an interval of two years

and under different titles, really constitute the two volumes of a

single work. The author, no doubt for cogent reasons, having taken

advantage of an offer, on the part of the Board of Trinity College,

to bring out his second part as one of the ‘* Dublin University Press

Series,” was compelled so to modify it and its title as to convert it

into a separate treatise; and although the existence of a first part

without a formal successor is always to be regretted from a libra-

rian’s point of view, we do not know that in the present case the

students for whose use these books are specially intended need be

very loud in their complaints.

The author’s motive in preparing this work was to furnish

students with a text-book of animal morphology, compiled, as he

himself tells us, from the most recent and authoritative writings

upon the various groups of the animal kingdom. Thus he makeg

no pretence to originality, but has brought together from scattered

sources the information that appeared to him necessary to convey a

clear idea of the structure of animals, and the classification founded

upon its peculiarities and differences, in order, as he says himself,

to bridge over, as far as practicable, that gap which he finds not

unnaturally to exist between ordinary manuals of zoology and the

“‘monographic literature” of the subject. That he has done this

with considerable success must be admitted: and the success is well

deserved; for the labour expended in bringing together such a mass

of material must have been immense, even leaying out of conside-

ration the further task of working up the materials when collected

into a compact whole, in the mode of performance of which we see

Bibliographical Notices. . 79

evidence enough that Prof. Macalister has, as he tells us, been

“engaged in the practical study of comparative anatomy” for

many years.

The author commences with some general remarks on the general

structural phenomena of animals, which occupy his first six chap-

ters. In these he describes protoplasm and its derivatives, and the

nature and grouping of organs, treats of the general principles of

histology and tectology, and the phenomena directly or indirectly

pertaining to reproduction. These chapters, in fact, constitute a

general introduction to the more special portion of the treatise, in

which the application of the principles thus laid down to the diffe-

rent groups of animals is explained.

Of course the value of a treatise of this kind depends in great

measure upon the classification adopted; and in this respect Prof.

Macalister’s book offers little at which any one can eavil. In his

general classification he admits eight great subkingdoms—namely,

Protozoa, Porifera, Coelenterata, Echinodermata, Vermes, Mollusca,

Arthropoda, and Vertebrata; and although he places the Porifera

among Metazoa, he recognizes their wide difference from the Coelen-

terata, with which, as is well known, some naturalists are inclined

to associate them very closely, by ranging them in a distinct sub-

series, Polystomata, as opposed to the rest of the Metazoa, which ho

denominates Monostomata. ‘The recognition of the Echinodermata

as a distinct subkingdom is certainly a step in the right direction

from a morphological point of view; but the Vermes, including

the remainder of Prof. Huxley’s Annuloida, with the addition of

the Bryozoa and the Tunicata, is a sufficiently heterogeneous mix-

ture. This subkingdom Vermes in the hands of modern zoologists

takes the place of the Radiata of the older writers as the “ dust-

heap ”’ of the zoological domain ; it is to be hoped that it may ere

long be satisfactorily sifted and sorted.

In the general classification of the Vertebrata the author has

followed Prof. Huxley; that is to say, after adopting Hiickel’s

division of the Vertebrate subkingdom into Acrania (including only

Amphioxvus) and Craniota, he divides the latter great group into

Ichthyopsida, Sauropsida, and Mammalia—the first including fishes

and Amphibia, the second the reptiles and birds.

The subordinate classification, with indications of characters, is

carried in all cases as far as the orders, sometimes to the families,

or the latter are indicated and typical examples cited. As might be

expected in a book which is a reflex of the most recent writings on

zoological matters, there is a tendency to multiply these lower groups;

but as the author does not dwell specially upon them, or discuss

their morphological peculiarities in detail, this is perhaps of the less

consequence. Still we cannot but think that the adoption of four-

teen orders of insects is a mistake, and, still more, the division of

the Carinate birds, after Huxley’s example, into eighteen orders.

Nevertheless to the earnest student such defects as these will be

of little consequence ; perhaps, indeed, it may be even an advantage

to him to have the most recent opinions of English anatomists upon

80 Miscellaneous.

matters of classification brought prominently before him, although,

especially in the case of the birds, it would have been well if the

author had indicated that a very different systematic arrangement

of those animals was adopted by most practical ornithologists.

Prof. Macalister’s descriptions of the anatomical structure of the

different great groups of animals are more precise and detailed than

we are accustomed to see them in English manuals; and to these

he has added particulars as to the modes of development observed

in the different classes and orders, and even, in many cases, short

notes upon the habits and mode of life of the animals composing

these groups. In fact, by the adoption of a very concise and matter-

of-fact style, and by printing details in a smaller type than the main

facts of his work, our author has contrived to compress into his two

volumes an enormous amount of valuable information. Partly for

the sake of brevity, and partly with the view of explaining the

numerous technical terms which have been introduced of late years

into zoological literature, Prof. Macalister has employed these

very freely, and indeed has incurred some small amount of blame at

the hands of some of his critics, on account of the multitude of

“hard words” with which his work literally bristles on every

page. The blame, however, does not seem to us to rest with him,

but rather with the ingenious inventors of these multifarious terms,

who seem to imagine that not only every organ, but almost every

part or modification of an organ must have its distinct name. Our

author has endeavoured, to the best of his power, to furnish his

readers with a guide to these names and their interpretation; and

for this, as for the excellent general statement of morphological

facts which he has produced, we think that students owe him a

debt of gratitude.

MISCELLANEOUS.

The Sea-weeds of Salt Lake. By A. 8. Pacxarp, Jun.

Tue attention of the visitor to the shores of the Great Salt Lake,

Utah, is sometimes attracted by the small masses of Algze which

are seen to be suspended in the brine, and to be cast ashore in little

wind-rows on the sandy shores. Four years ago, while connected

with Hayden’s U.S. Geological. Survey of the Territories, I made

an investigation of the life of the Great Salt Lake, especially of

Artemia fertilis and Ephydra gracilis, and took pains to collect in

alcohol, and also dry, specimens of these Algz, as they had been

unnoticed by botanists and collectors so far as I am aware. It is

probable that these Algz are almost the only source of food for the

brine-shrimp, as they are diffused through the water in nearly

equal abundance with the crustaceans themselves, and in no case,

that I could see, grow attached to any objects in the lake or on the

shore. The most common form (Polycystis) is a rounded, lobulated,

green mass which lives suspended in the water.

Miscellaneous. 81

Specimens of the Algze collected were sent to Prof. W. G. Farlow,

of Harvard University, from whom the following preliminary report

has been received :—

“ The Algze which you collected in Salt Lake are very interesting,

and, as far as | know, are the first which have ever been collected

in that locality. Mr. Sereno Watson, the distinguished botanist of

the King Survey, tells me that he examined a portion of Salt Lake

for Algze, but without success, and thinks it probable that very few

plants will be found in the lake. The specimens you sent comprise

two small packages of dried material and a small bottle of alcoholic

specimens. ‘The alcoholic material is scarcely determinable, as the

specitic characters of Algve, such as would be expected to occur in

Salt Lake, are generally lost by immersion in alcohol. The dried

material I have soaked out and examined.

“Tt consists largely of grains of sand and remains of small

animals, mixed with which are three species of Alge. The most

abundant Alga is one which forms irregular gelatinous masses,

sometimes attaining a diameter of half an inch. The colour, appa-

rently much faded in drying, is brownish with a tinge of bluish

green*. It seems to me to be a species of Polycystis; and I am

unable to refer it to any of the described species, and have called

it provisionally Polycystis Packardi. Its distinguishing characters

are the oblong shape of its cells, which are smaller than in any of

the marine species of the genus which I have examined, and the

firmness and lobulated form of the gelatinous substance in which

they are imbedded. Besides the Polycystis there is a species of Ulva,

using the word in the extended sense adopted by Le Jolis, which is

in fragments, so that one can form no very accurate idea of its

habit. The microscopic characters, however, show that it is, with

scarcely any doubt, Ulva marginata, Ag., found on the coasts of

Europe. The specimens from Salt Lake agree very well with speci-

mens from the French coast which are considered by Le Jolis to be

the species described by Agardh. The third Alga from Salt Lake

is much less abundant than the others in the packages sent, and

is also in poor condition for comparison with herbarium specimens.

It is a species of Rhizoclonium; and it comes very near to 2. sali-

num, Ktz. (R. riparium, Harv.), a common marine species of this

country and also found in Europe near salt springs. The Salt-Lake

plant has smaller cells and approaches 2. Kochianum, a species also

marine and found in saline regions.

«You will see, then, that two of the three species are recognizable

as marine forms, while the third, in my opinion new, is at least not

to be referred to a known marine form. As arule, the Algw found

in saline regions belong to species found in brackish waters on the

coast. One might expect to find a large variety of Ulvez and Con-

fervex in Salt Lake ; and it would be of interest to see how closely

these inland forms approximate to the littoral forms of the eastern

and western coasts.”—Amer. Nat., Nov. 1879.

* The colour in life is an olive-green.—A. S. P.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 6

82 Miscellaneous.

Observations upon the Artificial Fertilization of Oyster-eggs, and on

the Embryology of the American Oyster. By W. K. Brooks,

Associate in Biology, Johns Hopkins University.

All the writers upon the development of the oyster, from Home

(Phil. Trans. 1527) to Mobius (Austern und Austernwirthschaft,

1877), state that the eggs are fertilized inside the shell of the

parent, and that the young are carried inside the mantle-cavity

until they are provided with shells of their own, that they leave

the parent in a somewhat advanced state of development, and that

their free-swimming life is of short duration and lasts only until

they find a suitable place to attach themselves.

Misled by these statements, which do not apply to our species, I

opened a number of oysters during the summer of 1878 and exa-

mined the gills and the contents of the mantle-chambers for young,

but found none, and concluded that the time during which the

young are carried by the parent must be so short that I had missed

it. 1 undertook the same investigation this May, with the deter-

mination to examine adult oysters for young every day during the

breeding-season, and at the same time to try to raise young for

myself by the artificial fertilization of eggs taken from the ovaries.

I had complete success with the second method from the first, and

succeeded in raising countless millions of young oysters, and in

tracing them through all their stages of development up to the

time when they had acquired all the characteristics which Salensky,

Lacaze-Duthiers, Mobius, and others have figured and described in

the young European oyster at the time it leaves its parent. I also

made careful examination of the gills and mantles of more than a

thousand oysters, but never found a single fertilized egg or embryo

inside the mantle-cavity of an adult, although I found females with

the ovaries full of ripe eggs, others with the ovaries half empty,

others with them almost entirely empty, and others at all the inter-

mediate stages ; and I therefore feel sure that my examinations were

made upon spawning oysters.

While this evidence is only for one season and one bed, I think

that, until it is shown to be exceptional, we must conclude that

there is an important difference in the breeding-habits of American

and European oysters, and that the eggs of the American oyster are

fertilized outside the body of the parent—that during the period

which the European oyster passes inside the mantle-cavity of the

parent, the young American oyster swims at large in the open

ocean.

The more important points in the development of the oyster

are :—

1. The oyster is practically unisexual, since at the breeding-

season each individual contains either eggs or spermatozoa exclu-

sively.

> Segmentation takes place very rapidly, and follows substan-

tially the course described for other Lamellibranchs by Lovén and

Fleming.

Miscellaneous. 83.

3. Segmentation is completed in about two hours, and gives rise

to a gastrula, with ectoderm, endoderm, digestive cavity and blas-

topore, and a circlet of cilia or velum. At this stage of develop-

ment the embryos crowd to the surface of the water and form a

dense layer less than } inch thick.

4. The blastopore closes up; the endoderm separates entirely

from the ectoderm; and the two valves of the shell are formed,

separate from each other, at the edges of the furrow formed by the

closure of the blastopore.

5. The digestive cavity enlarges and becomes ciliated; and the

mouth pushes in as an invagination of the ectoderm at a point

directly opposite that which the blastopore had occupied. The

anus makes its appearance close to the mouth.

6. The embryos scatter to various depths, and swim by the action

of the cilia of the velum. The shells grow down over the digestive

tract and velum; and the embryo assumes a form so similar to

various, marine Lamellibranch embryos which are captured by the

dip-net at the surface of the ocean that it is not possible to identify

them as oysters without tracing them from the egg. The oldest

ones which I succeeded in raising in aquaria were almost exactly

like the embryos of Cardium figured by Loven.

7. The ovaries of oysters less than 13 inch in length, and pro-

bably not more than one year old, were fertilized with semen trom

males of the same size, and developed normally.

An illustrated paper on the embryology of the oyster, with a

detailed account of my observations, will be published, shortly, in

the Report of the Maryland Fish Commission for 1879.—Amer.

Journ. Sci. and Arts, December 1879, pp. 425-427.

Observations on the Salivary Glands of the Echidnas.

By M. H. Viartanzs.

From the anatomical arrangement of the different glandular

masses which produce the saliva we may distinguish in the Echidna

the three groups of glands which are met with in most Mammalia,

namely :—l, the parotid glands; 2, the submawillary glands ;

3, the sublingual glands.

The parotid glands, which are so constant in the Mammalia,

escaped the notice of Cuvier and R. Owen ; the latter even formally

denies their existence. I have found the parotids well developed

in the Echidna; but instead of being situated in front of the

auditory passage, they are situated far back, at the middle of the

neck.

in the Echidna there are on each side two submaxillary glands—

one deep-seated, the other superficial. ‘he deep-seated submaxil-

lary gland has been well described by Cuvier and Owen. Its ex-

eretory duct passes directly forward, and pierces the great transverse

muscle which forms the superficial layer of the floor of the mouth.

84 Miscellaneous.

It is at this point that it receives the excretory duct of the super-

ficial submaxillary gland,

The superficial submaxillary gland is a glandular mass of a rose-

colour, and of an oval form, a little larger than the parotid, situated

immediately beneath the skin, and applied against the pectoral

muscle. The excretory duct which it emits is 9 centims. long ; it

runs forward, crossing the sterno-mastoidian, and opens into the

excretory duct of the deep-seated submaxillary at the point already

indicated. The superficial submaxillary gland is the first that

makes its appearance when an Echidna is deprived of its skin; it

has, however, hitherto escaped the notice of anatomists.

The common excretory duct of the deep-seated and superficial

submaxillary glands presents a most remarkable arrangement, which

escaped the notice of Cuvier and Duvernoy. This arrangement has

been partially described by Owen, who regards it as unique in the

class Mammalia.

The excretory duct, after having slightly dilated, passes forward,

describing certain flexuosities and diminishing pretty rapidly in

size. After having skirted the inner margin of the inferior maxil-

lary, it reaches the symphysis of the chin. From its inner side

lateral branches are given off, which, in their turn, divide several

times, and open upon the floor of the mouth by very numerous

orifices arranged in a single longitudinal row stretching from the

base of the tongue to the symphysis of the chin.

I have had the good fortune to be able to examine the fleshy

parts of the head of the New-Guinea Echidna (Acunthoglossus

Bruijnii), a species still so rare that the Museum of Paris alone

possesses the few individuals at present known. In this we find

the arrangement of the terminal part of the excretory duct of the

submaxillary glands vary a little. This duct swells into a fusi-

form reservoir, with very glandular walls, especially behind, extended

from the base of the tongue to the symphysis. From the inner

surface of this reservoir issue four or five secondary ducts, which

open directly upon the floor of the mouth.

With regard to the sublingual glands, I have nothing to add to

the observations of Cuvier, who described them for the first time.

They seem to have escaped the notice of Prof. Owen.—Comptes

Rendus, November 24, 1879, p. 910.

American Jurassic Mammals.

Prof. Marsh has recently described some additional remains of

Mammals from the Jurassic strata of the Rocky Mountains. One

of the most interesting is the Ctenacodon serratus, which agrees in

its main features with the genus Plagiaulaw of Falconer. The

others are Dryolestes arcuatus, Tinodon robustus, and T’. lepidus.

These forms, as well as those already described, show a great re-

semblance to known types from the Purbeck beds of England.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL -HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 26. FEBRUARY 1880.

VII.—On some Blind Amphipoda of the Caspian Sea.

By Dr. Oscar Grimm *,

THE problem of the origin and evolution of blind animals has

occupied the attention of many naturalists of late; and their

investigations have contributed to science many facts of the

greatest importance. The number of these discoveries has

been further increased by the deep-sea investigations, which

have brought to light some extremely interesting forms from

enormous depths. But when we consider the already great

number of blind animals, we cannot help constantly raising

the question of their origin, as even now two opposite opinions

prevail, which exclude each other and cannot be reconciled.

Twenty years ago one might have been contented with the

dogma that the creatures were created blind because they were

intended tc live in dark caves and the abysses of the sea, and

therefore the faculty of sight was unnecessary to them. Now-

adays, however, this notion is supported by few professed

naturalists: the great majority recognizes in the absence of

eyes in certain animals the result of a residence in darkness,

by which means the visual organ must certainly become re-

trograde, as it cannot be and is not made use of. Besides

Fries’s experiment with Gammarus pulex, it is well known

that persons who have been compelled to languish out a long

* Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Archiv fiir Natur-

geschichte,’ 1880, p. 117.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 7

86 Dr. O. Grimm on some Blind

series of years in dark prisons have lost the pigment of their

eyes, and when brought once more into the open could not for

a long time distinguish objects, but rather suffered pain from

the daylight, as also that “‘in many blind people the eyes

have literally disappeared. In the bodies of men who were

perfectly blind when alive we even find that the optic nerve

has disappeared up to the brain, 7. e. transformed into a mass

which contains no visual-nerve fibres” (Stricker, ‘ Studien iiber

das Bewusstsein,’ p. 54). Thus it appears very natural that

animals which live in dark caves, wells, sea-abysses, or in

the earth itself should lose their power of vision, their eyes

being reduced to almost nothing—as, indeed, is indicated by

the fact that eyes are often still present although only rudi-

mentary, such as we find, for example, in Sorew and Talpa.

But we know that in the depths of the sea where some eye-

less animals occur, whose deprivation of eyes is explained by

the darkness prevailing in those abysses, there also exist

forms which have not merely ordinary eyes, but unusually

developed, large, prominent, and strongly pigmented eyes.

Nay, the Gnathophausia of the ‘Challenger’ Expedition,

coming from a depth of from 1830 to 4020 metres, actually

possesses pedunculate eyes, and, besides these, ocelli on the

maxille; the Memda from a depth of 1000-1200 metres

has well-developed and exceedingly sensitive eyes; while

Gammaracanthus caspius, mihi, from a depth of 108 fathoms

in the Caspian, Boeckia spinosa, nasuta, and hystriv, mihi,

from depths of 70-150 fathoms in the Caspian, and various

species of MJysis from the same sea and from depths down to

500 fathoms, all have well-developed, large, prominent, and

black-pigmented eyes. ‘This sufficiently proves that at the

depths indicated the visual organ can be and is made use of,

as here absolute: darkness does not prevail, but only a dark

night. We have only to remember that nocturnal animals,

such as the owls, predacious mammals, &c., possess very large

and well-developed visual organs (in fact, eyes adapted to the

darkness), to explain the established fact that the depths of the

sea are inhabited by crustaceans in which the visual faculty

is enormously increased. But seeing that, as has been said,

forms of animals also exist in the same abysses whose eyes

are but slightly developed or unpigmented, or even appear

completely reduced to a rudimentary condition, it is evident

that the explanation that the retrogression of the eyes is pro-

duced by living in the depths of the sea is not sufficient.

In the Caspian Sea, at 0° 12’ E. long. (from Baku) and

39° 51! N. lat., I obtained in a single cast of the dredge ten

new species of Gammaride (uamely Gammarus pauaxillus, G.

Amphipoda of the Caspian Sea. 87

erassus, G. Gregrokowtt, G. portentosus, G. coronifer, G.

thaumops, Pandora ceca, Iphigeneia abyssorum, Gammaracan-

thus caspius, and Amathilinella cristata), all of which are

furnished with eyes, but in very different degrees of develop-

ment: thus Gammaracanthus caspius has very large round

eyes, Gammarus coronifer and Amathilinella cristata long

but narrow eyes, Gammarus thaumops triangular unpigmented

eyes, and Pandora ceca small unpigmented eyes, which can

hardly be endowed with the faculty of sight. A still better

example is furnished by the following new Amphipoda dis-

covered by me in the Caspian Sea :—

fathoms.

Onesimus caspius from the depth of 75-250

pomposus p ” 180

platyuros i ' 40-48

Pantoporeva microphthalma oy o 80-90

Niphargus caspius o a 35-90

of which the last two species, together with Onesimus caspius,

were also taken in one cast, and, indeed, at a depth of 80-

90 fathoms, at 0° 36’ E. long. and 41° 6! N. lat. Pantoporeta

microphthalma and Niphargus caspius possess pigmented but

small eyes; of the species of Onesimus some possess red, others

(O. caspius) perfectly unpigmented eyes, which, in the last-

mentioned species at least, are deprived of the faculty of sight ;

and with these more or less blind species there live Myside,

the large, convex, and black eyes of which certainly absorb a

sufficiency of light even in the darkness of the depths.

These examples may suffice to show that deep-sea existence

alone does not of necessity cause the retrogression of the

visual organ. Now, however, we will show from our Cas-

pian Amphipoda, how the animals stand related to the sea-

depths, how deep-sea existence acts upon their organization,

by what essentially the disappearance of the eyes is brought

about, and by what the latter are replaced in the event of

their retrogression.

We may accept it as proved that with the increase of the

depth of the sea the quantity of rays of light diminishes, so

that at a certain distance from the surface the strength of the

light is very small, although it never falls to zero. But,

however weak the light may be, the possibility of vision is

not excluded, and the eyes of animals living in the abysses

need only to be adapted to the comparative darkness*. Such

* T think it doubtful that absolute darkness commences at a depth of

100 metres, as found by Forel in the lake of Geneva; for 1 cannot at all

conceive of absolute darkness. I readily admit that at this or the other

depth the daylight no longer reacts upon certain chemicals; but this does

not exclude the possibility of seeing.

88 Dr. O. Grimm on some Blind

appears to be the case with the large, gibbose, dark eyes of

Caspian Myside, of Gammaracanthus casptus, the species of

Boeckia, &c. It is, however, conceivable that in many

animals in the persistent darkness the eyes do not become

developed and are replaced by other organs of sense. In the

latter case the eyes may even become degenerated, and the

more rapidly and completely the less they are used, the less

the service they render or are capable of rendering to their

possessor. We may take as examples Niphargus ‘caspius*

and the above-mentioned species of Onesimus.

In examining these we find highly developed sense-organs,

which probably function not only as organs of touch, but also

(at least in the species of Ones¢mus) as organs of taste +.

Besides small, but dark-pigmented eyes, which can probably

hardly function at depths of 35-90 fathoms, and which must

be regarded as the remains of eyes which formerly functioned,

Niphargus caspius has exceedingly well-developed organs of

smell and touch on the antenne, and especially on the upper

ones. At the same time it is to be remarked that the males,

which have the smaller eyes, possess a greater number of these

sense-organs than the females, which, with respect to other

characters also, e. g. the number of joints in the secondary

* From this species NV. puteanus is probably derived. It is possible

that it is identical with NV. ponticus, Czern.; unfortunately I have been

unable rightly to determine the latter, as the description which M. W.

Czernjewsky has given of it appears to be very defective. (See his

‘Materialia ad monographiam ponticam comparatam.’) It must, how-

ever, be remarked that our WV. caspius differs in many respects from the

other species of Miphargus, and, indeed, from N. puteanus, as in its shorter

antennz, the differently formed hand of the last pair of limbs, &c.; so

that, perhaps, our species may be regarded as the representative of a new

genus between Mphargus and Gammarus. I do not take this course,

however, and recognize in the different organization of M. puteanus the

expression of a further development under the influence of certain condi-

tions, which have superinduced the deficiency of the eyes and, at the

same time, the greater development of the antennee which bear the sense-

organs that take the place of the eyes. In any case, Miphargus caspius

appears to be the older form, which has maintained itself (perhaps some-

what altered) in the Caspian down to the present time, just as other

species of the Tertiary period still continue to exist there, as I have

indicated in my ‘ Kaspischen Fauna,’ Lief. ii., in the case of Dretssena

rostriformis, D. Brardi, D. caspia, Cardium catillus, Planorbis microm-

phalus, &c. Miphargus caspius is very probably the “ extinct Gam-

marid’’ (see Leydig, “‘ Ueber Amphipoden und Isopoden,” Zeitschr. f.

wiss. Zool. xxx. p. 249) which the other species of Niphargus have as

their ancestor.

+ In many cases, no doubt, it is difficult to decide whether a certain

organ is adapted to feeling, tasting, or hearing; nay, it is exceedingly

probable that in many of the lower animals the faculty of touch is not

separated from taste and hearing,

Amphipoda of the Caspian Sea. 89

flagella, more resemble the species of Gammarus, and thus

represent the more conservative element, which, indeed, is the

case with the female sex generally. On the first four joints

of the five-jointed main flagellum of the upper antenne of the

male are very large cylindrical organs, described by Leydig

and others as olfactory organs. At their free extremities these

cylinders present each an aperture, from which perhaps, as

Leydig states, thin hairs may actually be exserted; and from

within a nervous branchlet penetrates into each cylinder, and

forms a cellular inflation (in the cylinder itself) only to

disappear immediately afterwards, as I have observed still

better in living examples of another species, namely Gam-

marus priscus, at Krasnovodsk. On the secondary flagellum

of Niphargus caspius, as also on the last joint of the peduncle

of the inferior antenne, we find peculiar organs, constructed

like the olfactory pencils of N. puteanus, as described by

Alois Humbert: these are large and resistant rods, the some-

what acute extremities of which are beset with a great number

of very thin and long chitinous hairs. In the interior of each

such rod runs a nerve, which, before entering into the rod,

swells into a nerve-cell with a nucleus. But whether this

nervous branchlet breaks up into still finer ones, which pene-

trate into the chitinous hairs, I have been unable to see,

although I have employed a magnitying-power of 1500 dia-

meters and various reagents. From their organization I

should not interpret these pencils as essentially and exclu-

sively auditory organs, but as extremely sensitive organs of

touch, capable of perceiving the very slightest movement of

the surrounding medium.

These olfactory and tactile (or auditory) organs, which are

certainly comparatively very highly developed, may enable

the animal to dispense with eyes in the dark sea-depths inha-

bited by it; and they are thus in course of degeneration,

although they have not yet completely disappeared—in part,

perhaps, because they may still be made use of, for example,

in ascending to depths of 35 fathoms.

Matters are very different with the species of Onestmus, of

which we may take for consideration Onesimus caspius as the

most typical.

The eyes of Onesimus caspius are small, irregularly oval,

widely separated from each other, and completely unpigmented,

so that they are not at once distinguishable even under the

microscope. It is well known that the unpigmented eyes of

many Gammaride living at great depths become reddened

under the action of sunlight; but this does not occur in O.

caspius. We are justified in assuming that even if the species

90 Dr. O. Grimm on some Blind

of Onesimus are not entirely deprived of the faculty of sight,

their eyes do not function in the medium which usually

harbours them, ¢. e. in the submarine mud where they con-

stantly dwell.

But leaving out of consideration the undeveloped eyes, we

find in the species of Onesimus no sense-organs on the antenne

and other external parts of the body, as in Niphargus. Nay,

the antenne are in them even deprived almost entirely of the

usual hairs, which occur only on the lower surface of the

upper, and the upper surface of the inferior antenne, and are

also very minute and present in small number. On close ex-

amination, however, we find very highly developed, although

concealed, sense-organs on the outer lamelle of the maxilli-

- pedes, which have already been described or figured by dif-

ferent authors. These are short thick stumps with rounded

ends, which stand in corresponding cylindrical depressions of

the lamella, from which they usually have only the rounded

portion projecting. Some of them, however, appear much

longer, masmuch as they project more and also have the

extremities more acute ; these are the two cylinders standing

at the apex of the lamella, which present a transition towards

the ordinary sete, and thus also prove that we have to do

with chitinous sete metamorphosed for a particular purpose*.

These taste-cylinders (as I will call them) stand in a row

along the inner margin of the lamella, their number varying

from eight to fourteen in the different species, as also proba-

bly according to the age of the individuals. In the interior

of the lamella, beneath the oval matrix-cells, there runs a

thick nerve-cord which sends off a branch nerve to each taste-

cylinder; these branches are slightly thickened at their

entrance into the cylinder, and are afterwards completely lost ;

but whether they form a cell in the thickened part, I have

been unable to decidet. At any rate the sensitive nature of

* Similar tactile hairs with more or less developed nerves and nerve-

cells occur ordinarily on the parts of the] mouth of the Arthropoda—for

example, among the Diptera, as is universally known. But where Prof.

Wagner has detected a number of buccal apertures (‘ Polystomien ”)

among them is hard to conceive, as is also the case with the “resucking ”

(Wiedersaugung) of the food (analogous to rumination !!) by flies, also

discovered by him. However, as Wagner has found epithelial cells in

the saliva of a materialized spirit, and examined the hair of a Chinese

lady called up from the spirit-world (with a view to the discovery of

the ancestors of the existing Pediculide ?), we may expect any thing from

him (see Wagner's and Bautleron’s spiritualistic writings in the ‘ Rus-

sischer Bothe”’).

+ For the investigation of these cylinders Onesimus platyuros and O.

pomposus, as larger species, are more convenient than O. caspius; but,

unfortunately, I have only a few specimens of those species.

Amphipoda of the Caspian Sea. 91

these cylinders is so distinctly marked, that we are certainly

justified in regarding them as tactile organs, and, from their

position, also as organs of taste.

Thus we see that in the species of Niphargus and Onesimus,

which are either blind or furnished with imperfectly functioning

eyes, the defective faculty of sight is replaced by the augmented

function of other organs, and even brought about thereby, in

so far as these render the eyes not indispensable and their

retrograde metamorphosis therefore possible. The question

now arises how it happens that in the different genera different

organs come to greater development; and this question is

answered by observation of their life-phenomena. During

my dredging investigations | have observed that the species

furnished with sensitive antenne, such as Niphargus caspius,

although living at great depths, live in the water and not in

the mud, which is proved not only by experiment after the

animals have been brought up*, but also by the fact that

all individuals of the Niphargus are greatly infested by

Vorticelle.

The species of Onesimus behave quite differently. They

live constantly in the mud of the sea-bottom, and here, bur-

rowing quickly like moles, seek their nourishment by con-

suming the mud which contains particles of organic matter.

As a matter of course, antenne furnished with sensitive

organs can be of no service to them, since not only such

delicate and fragile structures as the olfactory cylinders

and pencils, but even the coarser bristles have disappeared

from the outer surfaces exposed to friction against the

mud, as we have already stated by indicating that in Ones?-

mus such bristles exist only on the inner surfaces of the

antenne, which protect each other. But as external sense-

organs could not be developed, the more concealed parts of

the body had to be provided with such organs. We have

already seen that in the species of Onesimus the sete of the

outer lamelle of the maxillipedes are developed into sensitive

organs; and although it is not yet decided whether they repre-

sent taste-organs, we cannot avoid regarding them as organs

adapted to the determination of the quality of the food, which,

in the subterranean life of these animals, replace the eyes, and

thus also bring about their retrograde metamorphosis.

We may briefly summarize all that has been said as fol-

* The animals brought up by the dredge were always placed, first of

all, in small basins of water for the purpose of the observations above

indicated: but the relation of the animals to the mud is to be seen even in

the dredge itself; the water-animals (as opposed to the mud-animals) do

not bury themselves deeply in the mud, and are speedily suffocated in it.

92 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

lows :—In the depths of the sea, where a darkness approach-

ing zero, although not absolute, prevails, the animals living

there are either provided with highly developed organs of

sight, or the eyes are replaced by other organs which acquire

a considerable development. These organs, however, are

developed upon different parts of the body in accordance with

the external conditions and the mode of life of the animal,

which must be regarded as the primum movens of the whole

process of the degeneration of the one organ and the develop-

ment of the other.

VIII.—On the Genera of Felide and Canide.

By E. D. Cope.

[Continued from p. 45. ]

Canide.

THE range of variation presented by the species of Canide

includes several generic divisions, recent and extinct. ‘These

genera, however, are as closely intergraded as are those of the

cats; and their definite characters are subject to occasional

failure from abnormal variations. ‘These, however, are not

so frequent as to invalidate the classification to which they

form the exceptions.

The Canidz appeared in the Upper Eocene period; and the

genus Canis was well represented by species in the lowest

Miocene in Europe and the United States. The other genera

are represented by fewer species; and many of them are

extinct. The foxes (Vulpes) are the most numerous of them;

and but few extinct species of them are known. America

presents us with the greatest variety of genera, as Hnhydro-

cyon, Temnocyon, and Palewocyon extinct, and Icticyon, extinct

and recent. Speothus, extinct in America, still exists in

Asia.

The most complete catalogue of the species of Canide is

that of Dr. Gray. In his work the author brings together

observations of various naturalists, and adds a number of his

own. He admits a large number of generic divisions; but

many of these, like those of his Felide, are simply founded

on specific characters. A few good genera, however, exist ;

and a synopsis of their characters is given below. The genus

Megalotis is here excluded from the Canide on account of the

Genera of Felide: and Canidae. 93

unspecialized character of the superior sectorial tooth, as is

done by Dr. Gray.

I. True molars 3.

Premolars 4; inferior sectorial with internal tubercle. Amphicyon.

II. True molars 2.

Premolars 4; inferior sectorial with internal tubercle. Thous.

III. True molars 2.

a. Premolars 4.

8. Inferior sectorial without internal tubercle.

Heel ‘of sectortall ewttiaey \. 2i)< 2+ aie ojos 0 ester Paleocyon.

8B. Inferior sectorial with internal tubercle.

y. Four toes in the manus.

AS BR OU iTOIENESEM Sn aremtevere a ealerereie cards! eco wial acs Lycaon.

yy. Five toes in the manus.

6. Heel of sectorial simply cutting.

A median sagittal crest (? toes) ........0005 Temnocyon.

66. Heel of sectorial concave, with raised borders.

Pupil round; temporal fossa with simple supe-

MOL DGKMELM. . sta areca s sce sale Mee « Canis.

Pupil erect ; temporal fossa with simple supe-

TLOTUDOECER:, © soo ocias Md aoa ove ase) Vulpes.

Pupil erect; temporal fossa bounded above by

a Tib-like crest “i icav ws sees s 308 ce were Urocyon.

aa. Premolars 3.

Inferior sectorial with internal tubercle and cutting

LF(TE) WARS acs a, en A ea RE Enhydrocyon.

Inferior sectorial with internal tubercle and wide

tiupercwlarsheelmer, seas. cee ares sis ae Tomaretus.

IV. True molars 2.

a. Premolars +.

Inferior sectorial with internal tubercle .......... Speothus.

Inferior sectorial without internal tubercle (superior

molar sometimes ONC) 2.2.2... seecerecscuees Synagodus.

aa. Premolars 3.

Inferior sectorial without internal tubercle (incisors

CAAUMEOUS) | eaters cin igh <rs wets ins oe cessccowss, LOysodus

V. True molars i.

Premolars 4; inferior sectorial with internal tubercle. Icticyon.

It is discoverable that the series represented by the above

genera is a part of the greater line of the digitigrade Carni-

vora, embracing the greater part of it, which is less specialized

than, or inferior to, the part covered by the Hyznide and

Felidae. Without entering into the relations of the Canide

with the civets and Mustelide, it may be remarked that the

genera display a successive reduction in the number of pre-

molars and molars from the more ancient to modern geologic

times. It is interesting to note that the genera presenting

the greatest reduction in all respects (Synagodus and Dysodus)

are now only known in a domesticated condition. Another

reduction is seen in the number of tubercles of the inferior

sectorial.

94 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

AmpPuicyon, Lartet.

This genus is better represented in Europe than in North

America, but two species being certainly known from the

latter. No recent species.

Tuous, Gray. Dusicyon, Smith (nomen nudum).

Existing species of South America only.

PaLmocyon, Lund.

Extinct species of South America only.

Lycaon, Brooks.

Existing species of Africa only known as yet.

TEmnNocyon, Cope.

(Proceedings Amer. Philosophical Society, 1878, p. 68.)

In this genus the heel of the inferior sectorial tooth rises

into a single more or less median crest; in Canis the corre-

sponding front is basin-shaped, with tubercles on each side.

The superior molars of the typical species (7. altigenis) are

unknown; but those of a new species, described below, do not

differ from those of the genus Canis. The Cynodictis crassi-

rostris of Filhol, from the French Phosphorites, approaches

this genus.

Temnocyon corypheus, sp. nov.

This is the most abundant dog of the Truckee beds of the

John-Day country. I have identified it heretofore as my

Canis Hartshornianus ; but I find, on examination of the infe-

rior sectorial tooth, that it is a species of Temnocyon. This

genus was characterized by me on evidence furnished by a

mandible of a species which I named 7’ altigenis *, which is

of considerably larger size than the present one, but which

agrees with it in the presence of a cutting-edge instead of a

basin on the heel of the inferior sectorial. The C. Harts-

hornianus, known as yet from few fragments, is intermediate

in dimensions between these two.

Several crania and more or less of the skeleton of the T.

corypheus are present in my collection. A nearly perfect

skull displays the following characters :—The orbits are en-

tirely anterior to the vertical line dividing the skull into

halves; and the muzzle is proportionately shortened. It is

also narrowed anteriorly ; and its median line above is shal-

lowly grooved. The interorbital region is greatly convex to

* Proceedings Amer, Philosoph. Soc. 1878, viii. p. 68.

Genera of Felide and Canide. 95

the supraorbital region, and is grooved mesially. The post-

orbital processes are mere angles, and are flattened from

below. The cranium is much constricted behind the orbits,

where its diameter is not greater than the width of the pre-

maxillary incisive border. ‘The sagittal crest is much ele-

vated, and forms a perfectly straight and gradually rising

outline to its junction with the incisor. The borders of the

latter are very prominent, extending backwards considerably

beyond the brain-case. The zygoma is rather slender, is

elongate, and but little expanded. The otic bulle are very

large ; the paroccipital processes are directed backwards, at

an angle of 45°, and are rather elongate and acute; they cap

the bulle posteriorly. The lateral occipital crests bound a

fossa of the occipital region near the condyles. ‘The occipital

surface is directed horizontally backwards above the foramen

magnum. ‘This part of it, and its superior portion, are

divided by a median keel.

The basioccipital is keeled on the middle line below. The

sphenoid is not keeled, and is concave, its borders descending

on the inner side of the bulle. The pterygoid fossa is rather

narrow, and the hamular process is short. The posterior

border of the palate does not extend anterior to the posterior

edges of the last tubercular molar; and its middle portion

projects backwards in a triangular process. The palatine

fossa for the inferior sectorial is shallow. ‘The superior sur-

face of the postorbital region is roughened.

The foramen infraorbitale exterius is rather large, and issues

above the anterior border of the sectorial tooth. The fi én-

cisiva are short, not extending posterior to the middle of the

canines. ‘The f. palatina are opposite the posterior border of

the sectorial The fi lachrymale is altogether within the

orbital border. The fi opticum is rather large. This species

is peculiar in having the ff spheno-orbitale, rotundum, and

alisphenoidale anterius united into one large external orifice.

The alisphenoid canal is: larger in Canis latrans, and its pos-

terior foramen small. The f. ovale is further removed from

the f. alisphenoidale than in the coyote, and is exterior to and

a little behind the f. carotideum.

The nasal bones extend to above the middles of the orbits,

and contract gradually to their apex. Their combined an-

terior border is a regular concave; and the lateral angles at

this point are produced outwards and forwards. ‘The posterior

apex of the premaxillary bone is separated from the anterior

apex of the frontal by a short space. The maxillo-malar

suture is deeply notched in front below, and it extends upwards

to above the infraorbital foramen. A very narrow surface of

96 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

the lachrymal is exposed on the external surface. The ptery-

goid bone is distinct, and is nearly equally bounded by the

sphenoid and palatine on the outer side. The inferior suture

of the orbito-sphenoid runs in a groove, which is deepest

anteriorly.

The crowns of all the incisor teeth are narrow or compressed,

and, though slightly worn, present no indication of notch.

As usual, the external ones are much the largest in antero-

posterior diameter. ‘The canines have robust fangs and

rapidly tapering crowns, which are but little compressed. The

first superior premolar is one-rooted, and the crown is simple.

The crown of the second is without posterior heel and tubercle,

while the third possesses both. The sectorial is relatively

short, less so than in C. latrans; the blades are low and

obtuse as compared with recent species, and the notch sepa-

rating them is quite open; the anterior external heel is

small; and there is no anterior external tubercle. The first

tubercular molar is large, and the crown is narrower than that

of C. latrans; it has an obtuse external cingulum, two ex-

ternal conical cusps, a V-shaped median ridge, and a wide

internal cingulum; this crown differs from the corresponding

one of C. latrans in having conical instead of compressed

external cusps, and a simple V-shaped crest within instead of

two adjacent cusps. ‘The second tubercular is smaller than in

C. latrans, and its tubercles are less distinct. ‘There are two

outer tubercles, a V-shaped ridge, and an inner cingulum, all

very obscure. ‘The enamel of all these teeth is smooth.

Measurements of Cranium.

metre.

Length along base of skull, including incisive border

and occipital COMG VIS «2 %.2...c:\2 ajietx aetsiale om etainls ‘160

Length of skull to palatal notch ............+.6+., 07

Length of skull to posterior border of pterygoid bone. *102

Teneth to front of orbit axially ..2.5 022.0. 52.2205 ‘046

Width between zygomas (greatest)......e+.eeeeee, ‘094

Width. between orbits (least) J... 2206. se seworn ant 036

Width at postorbital constriction. .........0...eee. 021

Width between bases of canines .........ceeeeeees ‘017

Width between bases of second tuberculars ........ 027

Wraidth between ofic billig see... -razci..tsinyetete onions 009

Width between apices of paroccipitals ............ 042

Width: of foramenimarnum ©.% Jes. ieece ss eee ‘017

Wraidthvol oceiputigbOves <2 c.. once ogee wie oharereaie 032

Six well-preserved crania of this species are embraced in

the collection ; and the mandible remains attached to some of

them. One of these exhibits the following characters :—There

is a well-developed marginal lobe of the posterior cutting-edge

Genera of Felide and Canide. 97

of the third and fourth premolars, as well as a low posterior

heel and a rudiment of an anterior one. The heel of the

sectorial is shorter than the remaining part of the tooth, and

rises to a cutting-edge a little external to the middle line;

there is a small tubercle at its interior base. The anterior

blade-cusp of the sectorial is much lower than the median,

which is conical ; the two diverge, diminishing the shear-like

character and action of the tooth; the internal cusp is well

developed. The first tubercular is of moderate size, and is a

longitudinal oval in outline; the crown supports two low

tubercles anterior to the middle, of which the external is the

larger. The last molar has a single compressed root; and the

crown is a longitudinal oval in outline: its position is on

the ascending base of the coronoid ramus; so that the crown

is slightly oblique. The masseteric fossa is profound and

well defined ; its anterior termination is below the middle of

the second tubercular tooth. The horizontal ramus is not

robust, but is compressed and rather deep.

Measurements of Mandible.

metre

Length along bases of posterior five molars ........ ‘049

ihength of base of fourth premolar 2.151. .kene ce. sc ‘O11

Mey aINOI Of CLOW tara. secre vies -/ates ae, helee one ae ae 008

Ibeneth«ot- base of sectorial: %. ...5.. setae te toe Sake 018

Elevation of crown of sectorial............2.sse00. 012

Length of base of first tubercular .....:.....0090+ 0075

Width of base of firsttubercular’):.....5, ...0ne ae): 005

Length of base of second tubercular .............. 005

While the characters of this dog do not separate it widely

from the genus Canis, many of them are quite different from

those presented by the recent species of the genus with which

T am acquainted. ‘Thus the union of the foramina spheno-

orbitale, rotundum, and alisphenoidale anterius, the anterior

position of the orbits, and the postorbital constriction are not

seen in the wolf, domestic dog, coyote, jackal, or the North-

American and European foxes. The size of the brain was

evidently less than in those species, and the sectorial teeth

quite inferior in the efficiency of their blades. These characters

may be considered in connexion with the low geological posi-

tion of the beds in which the species occurs.

From the Truckee beds of the White-River formation in

Oregon.

Canis, Linn.

The names proposed by Smith, Gray, and others, and

which must be regarded as synonyms of Canis, are Lupus,

Dieba, Simenia, Chrysocyon, and Lycalopex. Many of the

98 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

species referred to by European paleontologists under the

name of Cynodictis, Pomel, appear to me to be undistinguish-

able from Canis. Through the great kindness of M. Filhol,

I possess specimens of the jaws of several of these species.

A mandible with nearly complete dentition of the Cynodon

velaunum of Aymard agrees very nearly with the jaws of

some of the smaller species from the American White-River

beds which I have referred to Canis. Helocyon, Aym., may

be distinct, but may not belong to the Canide.

The dentition of many of the recent species of Canis differs

in very slight characters. The following may be detected in

an examination of the superior molars of the three larger

species most accessible in the United States :—

Last superior tubercular short wide; inner cingulum and

crest nearly confounded.

Inner crest of tub. M. 1 composed of two low tubercles. C, fumiliaris.

Vars. molossus, terrarius, graius.

Last superior tubercular narrower, transverse ; inner cin-

gulum very distinct.

Inner crest of tub. M. 1 a ridge higher anteriorly...... C. lupus.

Inner crest of tub. M. 1 with two sharp cusps ........ C. latrans.

It is worthy of note that the wide oval form of the second

superior molar of the Canis familiaris exists equally in the

extreme races or species, the greyhound and bulldog, as I

observed by examination of several crania of each; this has

also been shown by De Blainville; it is also seen in the

terrier and in various other races: but in some St.-Bernard

erania in the Museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences

this tooth is more elongate, and in some of the specimens of

Canis lupus from Europe its form is quite the same; so this

character, as might have been anticipated, is not of universal

application. Another character is seen in the crania of three

specimens which are supposed to belong to Canis terrardus.

The superior border of the foramen magnum is interrupted by

a deep vertical excavation. ‘This is not seen in the St. Ber-

nard, the bulldog, greyhound, and other races, nor in any of

the feral or extinct species of the genus examined. It ap-

pears to be associated with an increased size of the brain, and

to be an adaptation to.the vermis of the cerebellum. The

expansion of the brain is also indicated by the protuberance

of the frontal region, and the wide separation of the temporal

fossee by a smooth space on each side of the sagittal suture.

This space does not exist in the greyhound; but a narrow one

is found in the bulldog. These characters are important on

various grounds, but are here mentioned in reference to the

species of Synagodus and Dysodus, where they reappear.

Genera of Felide and Canide. og

The absence of the second inferior tubercular molar is also not

uncommon in the “ black-and-tan”’ terrier.

I do not see the propriety of retaining the generic name

Nyctereutes, Temm., for the Canis procyoninus of Japan.

The peculiarity it presents in the form of the first superior

tubercular molar, the only one* on which the genus reposes,

I would regard as specific only.

VULPES.

I would, with Gill, refer to this genus the species men-

tioned by Gray and others under the generic names Pseuda-

lopex, Hennecus, and Leucocyon. The form of the postfrontal

process certainly does not furnish generic characters.

Urocyon, Baird.

The peculiar cranial ridges, in which this genus resembles

one of the extinct genera of Mustelide, appear to me to be

the character which warrants its separation from Vulpes.

ENuyprocyon, Cope.

(Bulletin U.S. Geological Survey Terr. v. 56, 1879.)

Two species from the White-River beds of Oregon are

P g

known.

ToMARCTUS, Cope.

(Ann. Report U.S. Geol. Surv. Terrs. 1873 (74), p. 519;

Paleontological Bulletin, 1873, Aug. 20.)

One species known from the Loup-Fork beds of Colorado.

It is uncertain whether this genus has two or three premolars.

Should it have three, it must be compared with the Brachy-

cyon of Filhol. But the inferior sectorial tooth of that genus

is as yet unknown.

SPEOTHUS, Lund, 1843. Cuon, Hodgs.

One extinct species of this genus was found by Lund in

caves in Brazil. Another species, Speothus primavus, is now

living in the Himalaya region. Several other recent species

have been named, but they are said by some authors to be

varieties only of the S. primevus.

SyNnAGoDus, Cope, gen. nov.

The characters of this genus have been pointed out in the

analytical key. They are evidently as important as those

* According to the figures of Temminck and Schlegel.

100 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

which define the divisions which are regarded as genera by

naturalists. It is not unlikely that the typical species has

been heretofore estimated as a variety of Canis familiaris ;

but it exhibits two trenchant generic dental characters not

found in Canis, and three unique specific characters in the

teeth, besides two characters of the cranium found in but one

or two of the subspecies of Canis familiaris.

The generic characters alluded to are (1) the absence of

the second inferior tubercular molar, and (2) the absence of

the internal tubercle of the inferior sectorial. The absence of

the second inferior tubercular is evidently not one of those

abnormal cases which occur in various species of Cants from

time to time; for the first tubercular molar is smaller than in

any known species of Canis, and has but one root, a character

which some persons might regard as being the third of the

generic category. ‘The premolars are 4—4, and of the usual

form; the first in both jaws is one-rooted.

It is uncertain whether any species of this genus exists in

the wild state. Should such not be the case, we can only

predicate the former existence of such a one entirely different

from the Canis familiaris, and which has given origin to the

existing one below described.

Synagodus mansuetus, sp. nov.

Two crania represent this species in the Museum of the

Academy of Natural Sciences. They agree in all essential

particulars. ‘The incisor and premolar teeth present no pecu-

liarities (the latter are without marginal lobes); and the

superior sectorial is normal. The first tubercular has less

transverse extent than in the Canide generally; and its

median crest and inner cingulum are confounded, a character

which I have not found in any of the other species accessible,

Thus the crown of this tooth consists of an external pair of

tubercles, a basin, and a stout inner marginal prominence.

The second tuberculars are abnormally small in one specimen ;

and in the other they are wanting. ‘The 3rd and 4th inferior

premolars have marginal posterior lobes. The inferior secto-

rial, as already stated, has no inner tubercle; its heel is

peculiar in the great elevation and submedian position of one

of its borders, approaching YTemnocyon in this respect; the

other edge, however, is distinct, thus forming an unsym-

metrical basin. The first inferior tubercular is small, one-

rooted ; and the crown is subround, and with a single median

tubercle. In the other usual species of Canis, Vulpes, and

of many other genera of the family this tooth is elongate,

two-rooted, and supports at least two tubercles.

Genera of Felidee and Canide. 101

In general form the crania resemble those of some of the

terriers. The brain-case is full and convex, the orbits are

lateral, and the muzzle is moderately elongate and narrowed.

The osseous surfaces are generally smooth; and there is no

indication of the ridge bounding the temporal fossa above.

There is a deep sinus of the superior border of the foramen

magnum, a character above noted as occurring in a subspecies

included under Canis familiaris.

I have been unable to ascertain whether the species now

described is one of the forms which have been referred to

Canis familiaris under a subspecific name. One of the speci-

mens was presented to the Academy many years ago by Dr.

Paul Goddard, under the name of lap-dog. The form of the

head shows that it is not one of the forms of Canis extrartus

hispanicus (of Fitzinger’s work on Dogs), which are repre-

sented by the King Charles spaniel and other lap-dogs. As

I can find nothing concerning it in the books, I give it a pro-

visional specific name.

The origin of the characters of this genus is doubtless to be

traced to prehistoric time, if not to an early Tertiary geologic

age. Perhaps some of the species-characters are of later

origin, such as the obliteration of the superior- border ridges

of the temporal fosse and the large sinus of the foramen

magnum. ‘These characters, seen in a lesser degree in a

domesticated true Canis, as above mentioned, are evidently

an adaptation to an enlarged brain—the one to the increased

cerebral hemispheres, the other to the protuberant vermis of

the cerebellum. Whether these characters are due to a pro-

longed domestication, and abnormal nutrition within human

habitations, remains to be ascertained. J remark here that

two crania of dogs found mummied in Egypt by Mr. Gliddon,

and now in the Museum of the Academy, present all the

normal details of structure of Canis familiaris.

The reduction in the number of teeth has been carried fur-

ther, and is probably of more modern origin, in the new genus

to be described below.

DysopUus, gen. nov.

The characters of this genus, already indicated in the

analytical Table, are as follows:—I. 3; C.+; Pm. $;

M. 2; inferior sectorial without internal tubercle. The inci-

sive formula might with propriety read ¢, since these teeth are

shed at an early age ; and for the same reason the tuberculars

might be stated 4, since the last one of the upper Jaw is equally

evanescent. I, however, give the genus the benefit of the

possible future discovery of species in which the teeth in

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 8

102 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

question may not be so early caducous, and rely on the re-

stricted diagnosis. It is thus apparent that the genus Dyso-

dus is distinguished from Synagodus by the absence of two

premolars from each jaw. While the genera agree in other

respects, their typical species are very different.

This genus probably diverged from that now represented

by Synagodus at a comparatively late period. Although it

exhibits a greater degree of dental reduction than that form, I

admit that the possibility of its having come off from Canis

rather than from Synagodus is worthy of consideration. This

is suggested by the fact that the remaining (first) tubercular

molar of the inferior series is, in J). pravus, more like that of

the species of Canis in all respects—among others, in having

two roots.

In D. pravus the superior third premolar is sometimes shed,

like the incisors, leaving the formula, I. $; C.1+; Pm. 3;

M. 4. I have excluded this character from the generic

diagnosis, as in the case of the incisor and superior tubercular

teeth, because they are at the present time wnstable; that is,

the parts in question are in process of metamorphosis. When

characters are thus variable, they cannot be used as the bases

of natural divisions; but when they are stable we are com-

pelled to recognize them. ‘The characters which I have

included in the diagnoses of Synagodus and Dysodus I have

thought to be of this character ; and Iam by no means sure that

the absence of the superior incisor teeth should not be placed

in the same category. But none of these characters, whether

stable or unstable, can be regarded as monstrosities, such as

multiplied digits, fissured palate, &e. They are, on the con-

trary, in the direct line of numerical succession of parts

already represented by the genera of Canide and of all digiti-

grade Carnivora. ‘This, as already stated, consists in the

reduction in the number of the teeth and their tubercles,

forming a series which, commencing with the generalized

extinct type Amphicyon, approaches more and more nearly to

the Felide. In the inferior sectorial, the genus Dysodus

approaches nearest of all Canidz to some of the earliest genera

of cats, as Hoplophoneus (although easily distinguishable) ;

while in the reduction of its premolars it approaches the

modern forms of that family. In the early shedding of the

incisors it reaches a condition not found in any Carnivora, but

one which marks the extreme of development of the ungulate

mammals in various lines, e. g. Ruminantia, Omnivora, and

Amblypoda.

Dysodus pravus, sp. nov.

This species, which is known as the Japanese sleeve-dog,

Genera of Felidae and Canidez. 103

is represented in the Museum of the Academy of Natural

Sciences by a complete skeleton, with the crania of two other

individuals. These all belong to adult animals of a single

litter, which were born in the United States. The parents

of these dogs were procured in Japan by Dr. W.8. W.

Ruschenberger, U. 8. N., now President of the Academy.

Other specimens have been brought to the United States by

officers of the navy. Dr. J. E. Gray figures a skull of the

same dog in the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society of

London’ for 1867.

The crania in the Academy’s collection are almost exactly

alike, and resemble the one figured by Dr. Gray, so far as can

be discovered. But Dr. Gray’s specimen was probably young,

as the incisor teeth and a premolar in each jaw have not yet

been shed, and there are some cranial fontanelles still re-

maining.

The characters displayed by the skulls are as follows :—

The muzzle is excessively abbreviated, and the forehead very

convex. ‘The brain-case is almost globular, and the zygo-

mata proportionally prominent. The superior marginal ridge

of the temporal fossa is prominent; and those of opposite sides

are well separated as far as the posterior parietal region.

Here they approach each other abruptly, forming a wide

sagittal crest. The muscular insertions and other osseous

ridges of the supra-, ex-, and basioccipital regions are strongly

marked. The postorbital process is prominent and decurved.

The vertical sinus of the superior border of the foramen

magnum is deeply excavated. The external surface of the

brain-case and of the zygomata is minutely rugose.

There are no lobes of the posterior border of the anterior

superior premolars, while they are present on the two in-

ferior premolars. The superior sectorial is normal, while the

first superior tubercular is like that of Synagodus mansuetus,

without distinct median crest or tubercle. The heel of the

inferior sectorial is also like that of the species just mentioned ;

one border is much more elevated than the other, and forms

a cutting-edge. The inferior tubercular is small, is longitu-

dinally oval, and supports two low tubercles. This is one

of the most important points of difference between this species

and S. mansuetus. In none of the specimens is there any

trace of the second tubercular.

The skeleton is that of a dog of the size of a rather

small black-and-tan terrier.

Dr. Ruschenberger states that the incisor teeth of the dogs

were shed at the age of about six months. He also informs

me that they did not breed after coming to this country. Dr.

104 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

Gray states that these dogs are fed largely on vegetable food

in Japan, and have an artificial existence in various respects.

They are, according to Dr. Ruschenberger, uncommon and

expensive in Japan.

I have been unable to discover that any name, whether

varietal or specific, has been given to this dog.

Icricyon, Lund.

One existing and one extinct species have been found in

Brazil—the latter in the caves. I describe a species from

Oregon which I cannot separate from them generically.

Icticyon crasstvultus, sp. nov.

This dog is so far represented by a skull which, while it

lacks the parietal and occipital regions, is otherwise nearly

complete, having both mandibular rami. ‘The dental formula

is, 1.3; C.1; Pm. 4; M.4. Thesingle superior tubercular

molar is similar in general to that of other Canidae. The

inferior sectorial has an internal cusp and posterior heel, the

latter with a low cutting-edge on one side. Inferior tuber-

cular well developed.

The dental formula of this animal is that of Jcticyon, Lund,

of which a species has been found in the cave-deposit of

Brazil, and another still lives in that region.

Char. spec. 'The snout is short and robust; and the profile

from the parietal region is straight and descending. The

premaxillary border projects but little beyond the line of the

extremity of the nasal bones. The muzzle is slightly con-

tracted in front of the orbit and above the fundus of the

canine alveoli. The latter cause a swelling on the side. The

infraorbital region is somewhat cracked, but appears to have

been nearly flat mesially ; laterally it descends steeply to the

supraorbital border. The orbit is not large; and the zygo-

matic fossa is short. The nasal bones are narrowed posteri-

orly, a little contracted mesially, and expanded anteriorly,

their lateral portions being produced along the premaxillaries.

Their combined nasal border is concave, and is without the

notches of some forms. The foramen infraorbitale exterius is

of medium size, and issues above the interval between the

sectorial tooth and the one in advance of it. The mandibular

ramus is quite robust, and its inferior border is gently convex.

The masseteric fossa is bounded by elevated borders, especially

inferiorly ; and the angular hook is prominent and robust.

The condyle is situated on the horizontal line of the tubercular

molar, or a little above the others, and has a wide transverse

Genera of Felide and Canide. 105

extent, chiefly inwards. The coronoid process is high and

wide, and is turned backwards so as to vertically overhang

the condyle. Its anterior border is wide below, and becomes

horizontal above.

The teeth partake of the robust character of the skull, with

the exception of the incisors. Of these the crowns of the

external are long and narrow and the median small in the

premaxillaries, while those of the lower jaw are all small.

The canines in both jaws are quite robust; and those of the

lower jaw are rather abruptly recurved. The first premolar

is small, and has a simple crown and single root. The crowns

of the other premolars are wide at the base, and form each a

simple cone, with a short posterior basal heel. The upper

sectorial is relatively not long, but is robust, and with thick

blades. ‘The internal heel is well developed, as in Canis,

while a cingulum represents an anterior lobe. The tubercular

molar is narrower in fore-and-aft diameter than in Temnocyon

corypheus or Canis latrans, although it presents the same

details: these are a wide obtuse external cingulum, two

external tubercles, a median obtuse tubercle, and a wide

internal cingulum. ‘The premolars of the lower jaw are

similar to those of the maxillary bone. The inferior sectorial

is quite robust, and the internal cusp is well developed; the

heel is shorter than the blades of the crown, and is wide and

without tubercles in its somewhat worn condition; its ex-

ternal border rises to an edge. The tubercular is wider than

the corresponding tooth in the contemporary species of Canide,

although not so wide as long; its crown rises in two low

tubercles which stand transversely near the middle.

Measurements.

: metre

Keneta ot slcullto-orbit: (axial) x <.0 ha.vsss.08 0s 0b « 049

Wepthran siulleto,orbib (axial) so... c.sceces esc saaie ‘042

HIMESH OR DNCMIR WAIL <2 sce c's atlas cence ot elas ese see eae 040

IWitclchgaitninrca fri ietae. Gleks DUS Seabee web ees O17

Length of superior molar series ..........c0eeeee 05

Length of bases of three premolars .............06+ ‘O19

Tenet hyor DasesOUSCetOTIAl scr. cans +o acd'a.s ois,0% shin ny 013

Widthtof scetortaitm tron ans icc seis aces wes 5 hes sx ‘009

Width of first tubercular, antero-posterior.......... 006

Width of first tubercular, transverse .......2.-+00- ‘014

Length of mandible to angle .........seeeeeeeses ‘093

IBilewa lon, Ab) COPOMO tes we cra a iein as < 4 ite yeas pain O51

lenlOll At SECUOTIAN eg ayen «4,0 < c.0.8)n1ae aye y eye rr sig aici ‘020

Length of inferior molar series. .........2....0000- 045

Wencth of inferior sectoriali's.\.'s4j. sti). Je eeweene s 014

Length of heel of inferior sectorial .............006. 003

Menem or inferior tubercular’ 22... seas a «6 sn siamals 006

Wradthrotimtertonr tubercular mcs ociste cciae cetisilae ce 005

106 Mr. E. D. Cope on the

Van der Hoeven has given* descriptions and figures of the

skull and dentition of the Icticyon venaticus of Lund, of Brazil.

From these it appears that the present species differs from the

latter in the greater development of the inner part of the

tubercular molar of the superior series; in J. venaticus this

part is much reduced. The tubercular molar of the lower

jaw is also much smaller in the living species, the angular

and coronoid processes less developed, and the condyle less

extended transversely. The cranium of the J. crassivultus

is much more robust, but not much longer than that of L.

venaticus.

Discovered by J. LL. Wortman in the Truckee beds of the

White-River ‘Tertiary of the John-Day River region of

Oregon.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

In both Canide and Felide the reduction of the dental

series is connected with a contraction of the facial part of the

skull, either posteriorly or anteriorly. Hnhydrocyon is an

example of anterior abbreviation and Jcticyon of posterior

contraction among Canide, while Smlodon and Lynx exhibit

the anterior reduction in Felide. I have already pointed out

that this reduction is accompanied by a corresponding increase

in the size of the sectorial teeth. But the reduction in the

number of teeth in geologic time has not been confined to the

Carnivora, but belongs to the Ungulates and Primates as well.

The small number of teeth is generally associated with high

specialization among Mammalia generally. The genera

Synagodus and Dysodus are the most specialized of the

Canide.

I may here refer to the frequently observed reduced denti-

tion of man. Darwin first pointed out the significance of the

absence of the third molars from the standpoint of evolution,

citing American cases; and I have observed the similar

bearing of the absence of the external superior incisors.

These reductions are very frequent in the United States, and

probably elsewhere among civilized nations ; but statistics on

this point are yet wanting. My friend Dr. C. N. Pierce, an

experienced and scientific dentist of this city, informs me that

he knows of twenty-eight families in which the external

superior incisors are absent; to these, four families may be

added which have fallen under my own observation : that the

absence of one or both pairs of the third molars is still more

common, is confirmed by Dr. Pierce’s experience.

* “Over het Geslacht Icticyon,’ Wis. en natuurk. Verh. der Koninkl.

Akademie, Amsterdam, Deel 1.

+ Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1871, p. 234.

Genera of Felide: and Canide. 107

It is evident that we have here characters which, if stable,

would indicate two or three genera of Hominide additional to

Homo. They are unstable at present; that is, they are not

yet invariably found in any race or species of man, or, in other

words, are not so associated with other physical characters as

to form a correlated index of them. But experience in paleeon-

tology and zoology renders it almost certain that these dental

characters will at some future time assume this degree of im-

portance by becoming stable. This is already indicated by

the fact of their being constant in families at the present time.

What races will be thus distinguished generically it is

not easy to indicate; but ail those with prognathous crania

may be safely excluded. It is improbable that Mongolian

races will early participate in such a modification, as they

have a tendency to prognathism and a generally strong dental

development. _

Since the reduction in the number of teeth is intimately

connected with orthognathism, it is easy to suppose that it is

primarily due to the diminished space allowed by the con-

tracted maxillary arcade. This contraction is doubtless due

to a deficiency of building-material, consequent on a transfer

of force to some other part of the structure during the period

of growth. ‘This transfer may be to the superior part of the

cranium, which is extended to contain an enlarged brain. As

the loss of a tooth from each side has so far been sufficient

to accommodate the dentition to the space which it is to

occupy, it is not likely that the absence of both I. 2 and

M. LUI. will become established. The reduction in the inferior

series is less ; and I do not know of any example of the ab-

sence of the external incisors of the lower jaw. The loss of

the third inferior molars is, on the other hand, very common.

It then may be reasonably maintained that two genera of

Hominide will be at some future day added to Homo—that

the latter will include the inferior races of men, and the former

the superior—that, although in specific characters there may

be a want of greater constancy in the species of the new genera

as compared with each other than as compared with the primi-

tive and true Homo, they will present cases of what is else-

where known in zoology, that the same or nearly the same

specific characters may be found in different genera. Under

such circumstances the form referred to a new genus becomes

at the same time a distinct species. The genera of Hominides

will then, if the characters become constant, be as follows :—

1 OO I a Se a (ae ie See Nr FTomo.

eres 2 ge ME eines nimi are dwieiueiite Metanthropos.

Mere bs Tem os Ni Soe sal natesa wis ene eats Epanthropos.

108 Mr, E. J: Miers-on the Squillide.

IX.—On the Squillide. By Epwarp J. Miers, F.LS.,

F.Z.S., Assistant in the Zoological Department, British

Museum.

[Continued from p. 30. ]

PSEUDOSQUILLA.

. Squilles trapues, M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Cr. ii. p. 525 (1837).

Squille (sect. iii.) parallele, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Cr, p. 221 (1849).

Pseudosquilla, Guérin (ined.) *, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. Cr. i. p. 615

(1852). :

Carapace not longitudinally costate ; cervical suture faintly

defined or obsolete posteriorly. Rostral plate reaching to and

covering the base of the eye-peduncles. Four posterior

thoracic segments not covered by the carapace. The exposed

thoracic and postabdominal segments are compactly articu-

lated; and the latter are smooth, not longitudinally costate ;

the terminal segment well developed, and bearing at its distal

end two mobile spines. Dactylus of the raptorial limbs not

dilated at base, unarmed or with few spines on its inner

margin. The appendages of the three posterior thoracic limbs

are slender and styliform.

* Rostrum without a median spine. -Antennules usually small and slender.

Basal prolongation of the uropoda ending in two spines.

Pseudosquilla ciliata. (Pl. III. figs. 7, 8.)

? Squilla ciliata, Fabr. Ent. Syst. ii. p. 512 (1793), Suppl. p. 417

(1798) ; Owen, Zcol. Voy. Blossom, p. 90, pl. xxvii. fig. 5 (1839) ;

White, List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 84 (1847).

Squilla stylifera, Lam. Hist. An. sans Vert. v. p. 189 (1818); Latreille,

Encyel. Méth. x. p. 472 (1825) ; Guérin, Icon. Crust. R. A. pl. xxiv.

fig. 1; M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 526 (1837); Gibbes, Proce. -

Amer. Assoc. p. 200 (1850); Hoffmann, Recherches Faune Mada-

gascar, Cr, p. 43 (1874). y

Pseudosquilla styhfera, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. Cr. i. p. 622, pl. xli.

fic. 4 (1852).

P Pseudosquilla stylifera, y. Martens, Archiv f. Naturg. xxxviii. p. 146

(1872).

Carapace smooth, with the longitudinal sutures straight

and continuous from the anterior to the posterior margin, but

without the transverse cervical suture ; its posterior margin

straight, with the antero-lateral and postero-lateral angles

rounded and not produced. Rostral plate nearly of a trans-

* Eydoux and Souleyet (Voy. Bonite, Zool. i. p. 263) say that this

genus was established by Guérin to include, besides P. ciliata and P.

oculata, two new species, P. cylindrica and leptodactyla, Guérin; but I

cannot discover any published descriptions by him.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillidee. 109

versely-oval shape, smooth above. Exposed thoracic seg-

ments not produced laterally ; the first segment very narrow

and acute on the sides, the second broader and laterally sub-

truncated, the third more rounded laterally. The fifth post-

abdominal segment bears a small tooth or spine at its postero-

lateral angle; the sixth segment is armed with six spines,

the second on each side being placed nearer to the anterior

margin. The terminal segment is armed with two longitu-

dinal carine on each side of the median keel (the inner of the

two being much less strongly marked), and there is a third

cavina on each side close to the lateral margin; there are six

lateral spines, the two mobile and submedian spines being the

longest. ‘The dactyli of the raptorial limbs are armed with

three slender spines (including the terminal spine, which is

longest). The terminal spines of the basal prolongation of

the uropoda are nearly equal; and the inner spine is not

toothed on its outer margin. Length nearly 3 inches.

Hab. Indo-Pacific Region. ;

The series in the Museum collection includes a female from

the Indian Ocean, labelled P. ciliata by Leach, and another

without locality (Old Collection), a male and female from the

Philippine Islands (H. Cuming, Esq.), two males from the

Sooloo Sea (A. Adams, Hsq.), a female from Australia

(7ZLILS. ‘ Rattlesnake,” Macgillivray), a female from Ovalau

in the Fiji Islands (A... ‘ Herald’), two males trom the

Sandwich Islands, Honolulu (Lieut. Strickland), a female

from Florida Island in the Solomon group (J. Brenchley,

Fsq.), and one from the Seychelles (Dr. H. P. Wright).

It is recorded from the Mauritius and Red Sea; Von

Martens also records it from Cuba; hence it would appear

that this species, like Gonodactylus chiragra, is not confined

in its range to the Indo-Pacific Region.

* The male, according to Mr. G. Clark, who had the oppor-

tunity of observing this animal in the living state, is of a

beautiful bluish-green colour, with the jaw-feet, swimmerets,

and branchie, as well as the antenne and fimbrize which

border the different organs, of a cherry-red. The female is

clouded with brown and grey, presenting much the appearance

of tortoise-shell ; and the red about her is much less vivid than

in the male (P. Z. 8. 1869, p. 3).

Squilla quadrispinosa, Kyd. & Souleyet (Voy. Bonite, Zool.

i. Cr. p. 262, pl. v. fig. 1), from the Sandwich Islands, closely

resembles this species, but is described as having the left-

hand mobile spine of the terminal segment bifid. Can this

be an accidental malformation ?

110 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

Pseudosquilla oculata. (Pl. III. figs. 3, 4.)

Squilla oculata, Brullé, in Webb and Berthelot, Iles Canaries, Zool.

Crust. p. 18, fig. 3 (1886-44),

Body smooth. Carapace rounded at its antero-lateral and

postero-lateral angles. ostral plate transverse, smooth and

flat above, ending in avery small median spinule. Lateral

processes of the first exposed thoracic segment very short and

subacute, those of the second and third segments larger and

truncated. First to fifth postabdominal segments smooth and

unarmed, the postero-lateral angles of the fifth segment only

ending in a small spinule. Sixth segment armed with six

spines, which are produced considerably beyond its posterior

margin, with the exception of the spines next the submedian

ones, which are short. Last segment with the median carina

ending in a spine, and with four other carinule on each side

of it (including that of the lateral margin) ; marginal spines

six. Antennules and antenne very small and slender. Rap-

torial limbs with the penultimate joint slender, elongated,

and slightly widening at its distal end; dactyli_ three-

spined. Uropoda with the basal prolongation ending in

two spines, of which the outer is the longer. Length of

the largest individual in the Museum collection (a female)

3+ inches.

Hab. Canaries (Webb and Berthelot) ; Madeira (Coll. Brit.

Mus., Rev. R. Boog Watson).

Besides the small female example from Madeira, there are

two females without locality in the Museum collection.

This species is described in MM. Webb and Berthelot’s

work as being of a green colour, with numerous yellow

rounded spots; there is a large round green spot on each

side, bordered with a yellow ring; penultimate joint of rap-

torial limbs bordered with green and yellow; dactyli rose- |

coloured.

Pseudosquilla monodactyla. (Pl. ILI. figs. 1, 2.)

Squilla monodactyla, A. M.-Edw. Bull. Soc. Philom. Paris (1878).

In the specimen I refer to this species the carapace is

smooth, rounded at its antero-lateral and _postero-lateral

angles, and not ocellated. Rostrum flattened, almost sub-

triangulate, with the sides straight and convergent to the

apex, which is acute. Fourth to seventh thoracic segments

with the lateral processes slightly rounded. Fifth postabdo-

minal segment with a small spinule at its postero-lateral

angles; sixth without carine, but armed with six small

spines on its posterior margin, including those of the postero-

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 111

lateral angles. ‘Terminal segment with an acute median

longitudinal carina (but without lateral carinules or tubercles),

with eight lateral marginal teeth, the one next the submedian

teeth very small ; the submedian teeth are tipped with a small

mobile spine, and between them is a series of numerous, minute,

closely placed and pectinately disposed spinules; between the

lateral marginal teeth are also one or two spinules. The

penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs is slender and armed

witha small spine at its mfero-distal angle ; the dactylus is

slender, arcuate, and without any spines on its inner margin.

The appendages of the thoracic limbs are slender, not dilated.

The uropoda are relatively large, and the spines of their

basal prolongation are simple. Length rather more than

1 inch.

A small male was in a bottle with Pseudosquilla oculata ; but

the locality has unfortunately not been preserved. This ver

distinct species may be recognized at once by the form of the

terminal postabdominal segment and the absence of spinules

on the inner margins of the dactyli of the raptorial limbs—

both characters which are mentioned by Prof. Alph. M.-

Edwards in his brief description.

Pseudosquilla ornata. (Pl. III. figs. 5, 6.)

? Pseudosquilla oculata, Heller, Reise der Novara, Crust. p. 124 (1865),

nec Brullé.

Under this name I separate two specimens in the Museum

collection, one of which was formerly referred to P. ciliata.

They are evidently closely allied to P. oculata, which they

appear to represent in the Indo-Pacific Region ; but they may

be distinguished by the following characters :—The rostrum is

not armed with a small median spinule; the longitudinal

earinule of the terminal postabdominal segment are more

flattened at base; and there are only three on each side of the

median keel, the small carinula next that of the lateral

margins being entirely absent. Length of the largest indi-

vidual (a female) nearly 2 inches.

Hab. Philippine Islands (coll. Brit. Mus., Cuming).

Besides the female from the Philippine Islands there is a

small male individual, from the collection of A.M. ¢ Herald,’

in the Museum collection. As in P. oculata, there is on either

side of the carapace a very distinct circular spot, bordered

with a pale margin. ‘This latter character, the truncated

sides of the exposed thoracic segments, and the more trans-

verse rostrum serve to distinguish both P. oculata and P.

ornata from P. ciliata.

I believe the specimens from Tahiti, referred by Heller

112 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

(1. c.) to P. oculata, belong to this species, as the rostrum is

described as ‘‘ vorn abgerundet;’”’ and of the terminal post-

abdominal segment he observes, “‘ gewahrt man auf der Ober-

fliche mehrere Liingsleistchen, und zwar eine lange mittlere

und zwei seitliche.”

Pseudosquilla stylifera.

Gonodactylus styliferus, M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 530,

pl. xxvii. figs. 9-14 (1837); Gay, Hist. Chili, iii. p. 225, pl. ii. fig. 3

(1849).

Body smooth and somewhat depressed. Carapace some-

what narrowed anteriorly, without a spine at its antero-

lateral angles, and rounded and rather laterally produced at

its postero-lateral angles. Rostral plate smooth, longer than

broad at base, and narrowing ‘distally. First exposed thoracic

segment very short and not laterally produced; second and

third rounded on the sides; first to fifth segments of the

postabdomen with the postero-lateral angles rounded and

without spines; sixth segment armed with eight low obtuse

crests, and without spines. Terminal segment with three

longitudinal parallel obtuse crests, placed at some distance

from one another, with the intervening spaces smooth, with

eight large marginal teeth ; between the submedian teeth of

the posterior margin is a narrow fissure, and between these

teeth and the next on each side a large rounded tubercle.

The antennules are robust, but not so elongated as in the

species of the next section. The dactyli of the raptorial

limbs are smooth and unarmed and acute. The basal pro-

longation of the uropoda terminates in a large flattened lobe,

which is denticulated on its inner margin and ends in a

spine. Length of a male in the Museum collection about

54 inches.

Hab. Chili.

A male individual is in the collection from Chili (Bridges),

and a male and female from Coquimbo Bay (Dr. Cunning-

ham).

This species evidently marks the transition from Pseudo-

squilla to Gonodactylus.

Near to this species perhaps is Gionodactylus ensiger, Owen

(P. Z. 8. 1832, p. 6), from Valparaiso, which is described

as allied to Gonodactylus chiragra, but with the dactylus of

the raptorial limbs not ventricose at base, acute on its inner

margin, with the rostrum trispinose, the median spine obso-

lete. Length 6 inches.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 113

Pseudosquilla ? empusa.

Squilla empusa, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 224, pl. li. fig. 6

(1849), nec Say.

Body smooth, punctated. Carapace narrowed anteriorly,

with the antero-lateral angles obtuse, the posterior margin

rounded. Rostrum almost three times as broad as long, im-

pressed in the middle, with the anterior margin broadly trun-

cated. Thorax and postabdomen of the same form as in

P. ciliata (S. stylifera, Lam.). Lateral processes of the

thoracic segments with the margin rounded. Postabdomen

convex, unarmed; sixth segment indistinctly six-costate,

with the posterior margin unispinose on each side; seventh

segment with the median keel produced, with a smaller keel

on each side placed near to the median one, and another

midway between the median keel and lateral margin ; lateral

margin arcuate before the middle, sinuate beyond the middle,

with short flattened spines. Eyes scarcely broader than the

middle of the peduncles. Antennules robust, with the pedun-

cles shorter than the antenne. JRaptorial limbs with the

penultimate joint narrower at each end, and with the dactyli

and spines compressed. The distal prolongation of the base

of the uropoda is represented as terminating in two unequal

spines, of which the outer is slightly the longer.

Hab. Japanese seas.

De Haan founded this species on a unique example. He

seems to have been unaware of Say having previously

adopted the name of empusa for a species of Squilla. The

above description is taken from his work.

** Rostral plate terminating in a strong spine. Antennules very robust and

elongated. Basal prolongation of the uropoda ending in a single ter-

minal and two lateral spines.

Pseudosquilla Lessonit.

Squilla Cerisii, Guérin, Voy. Coquille, Crust. p. 40, pl. iv. fig. 1 (1830),

S. Lessonit on plate.

Squilla spifrons, Owen, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 6 (1832).

Squilla Lesson, M.-Kdwards, Hist. Nat. Cr. ii. p. 527 (1837); White,

List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 84 (1847).

Squilla monoceros, M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 526 (1837) ;

Gay, Hist. Chile, Zool. iii. Cr. p. 224 (1849).

Pseudosquilla Lessonit, Dana, Cr. U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. 1, p. 622 (1852).

? Pseudosquilla marmorata, Lockington, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. p. 33

(1877).

Carapace narrowed anteriorly, with the antero-lateral angles

rather obtuse, and the postero-lateral lobes broadly rounded.

Rostral plate terminating in a long spine and with the lateral

114 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. Be |

angles acute or even forming short spines. First thoracic

segment not laterally produced; second and third segments

not greatly produced, and rounded on the sides. First to

fourth postabdominal segments with the postero-lateral angles

rounded; in the fifth segment this angle terminates in a

spinule ; sixth segment armed, as usual, with six longitudinal

spines; seventh with five longitudinal carine on each side of

the median longitudinal keel, and with six marginal spines,

between which are some smaller spines (no median spine on

the posterior margin). Antennules very robust and greatly

elongated. Dactyli of the raptorial limbs armed with a small

tooth or tubercle near the base on the outer margin, and with

two spines on the inner margin (besides the terminal spine).

Distal prolongation of the base of the uropoda terminating in

a strong spine, and with two other spines on its inner margin.

Length nearly 53 inches.

Hab. West coast of America.

In the British-Museum collection are two males from Chili

(Rev. Mr. Hennah), another from the same locality (pur-

chased), and another without locality from J. Bell’s collec-

tion. Dana records this species from the Callao Roads.

P. marmorata, Lockington (P. Cal. Ac. Sci. p. 33, 1877),

from San Diego, California, either belongs to this species or is °

very closely allied to it. ‘he description, so far as it goes,

applies very well to it.

Pseudosquilla Cerisit.

Squilla Ceristi, Roux, Crust. de la Mediterranée, pl. v. (1828); M.-~-Edw.

Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 527 (1887) ; Lucas, Anim. Artic, in Explor.

Sci. Algérie, i. p. 50 (1849); Heller, Crust. siidl. Europa, p. 308

(1863) ; Haller, Zool. Anzeiger, p. 207 (1879).

Squilla Broadbenti, Cocco, Giorn. di Scienze di Sicilia, pl. iii. fig, 2

(1833).

The carapace is considerably narrowed anteriorly, and much

wider posteriorly than the segments of the thorax ; its antero-

lateral angles are unarmed. ‘The rostral plate terminates in a

prominent spine, but is without lateral spines ; the sixth post-

abdominal segment is armed with six spines; the terminal .

segment has seven marginal spines (there being a median

spine), and is armed with five longitudinal carine on each side

ot the median keel. The antennules are robust, but less

elongated than in P. Lessonti. The dactyli of the raptorial

limbs are armed with two short spines besides the elongated

curved terminal spine. The distal prolongation of the base

of the uropoda is apparently slender, terminates in a spine,

and is armed with two teeth or spines on its inner margin.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 115

Hab. Mediterranean (Toulon, Corsica, Roux; Messina,

Kessler; Sicily, Cocco; Algiers, Lucas; Morea, Guérin;

Nice, Haller).

I have seen no specimens of this species; and the above

description has been taken from the description and figure of

Roux. According to that author, the general colour of the

body is greenish or yellowish, the antenne and hairs are

rose-coloured, the posterior margin of all the postabdominal

seoments and the last two segments are brick-red.

It is evidently very nearly allied to P. Lessonit, but differs

apparently in the absence of lateral spinules on the rostral

plate, of the small tooth or tubercle at the base of the outer

margin of the dactyli of the raptorial limbs, and in the exist-

ence of the median terminal spine of the last postabdominal

segment.

GONODACTYLUS.

Gonodactylus, Latr. Encycl. Méth. Hist. Nat. x. p. 478 (1825); Cr. in

Cuy. Régne Anim. iv. p. 109 (1829); M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Cr. ii.

p. 528 (1837); De Haan, Faun. Japon. Cr. p. 220 (1849); Dana,

Cr. U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. p. 615 (1852).

In nearly all its characters this genus resembles Pseudo-

squilla; but the penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs is not

armed with minute pectinately-disposed teeth as in that genus,

and the dactylus is considerably dilated at base; the mobile

spines at the distal end of the terminal postabdominal seg-

ment are very small or obsolete.

The Gonodactylus setimanus of De Kay (Zool. New-York

Fauna, Cr. p. 34, pl. viii. fig. 2) does not belong to the Stoma-

topoda, but to the Thalassinidea, and is regarded by Gibbes

as identical with Callianassa major, Say.

* Rostrum not ending in a spine.

Gonodactylus scyllarus.

Sguilla arenaria prona, Seba, Thesaurus, iii. p. 5, pl. xx. fig. 8 (1758).

Cancer scyllarus, Linn, Syst. Nat. (ed. xii.) p. 1054 (1766).

ie scyllarus, Faby. Ent. Syst. ii, p. 512 (1793); Suppl. p. 416

(1798).

Cancer (Mantis) scyllavus, Herbst, Nat. Krabben &c. ii. p. 99, pl. xxxiv.

fig. 1 (1796).

Squilla scyllarus, Lam. Hist. Anim. sans Vert. v. p. 189 (1818).

Gonodactylus scyllarus, Latreille, Encycl. Méth. x. p. 472 (1825) ;

M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p.1529 (1837); Atlas in Cuy. R.

A. Crust. (ed. 3) pl. lv. fig. 2; White (part), List Cr. Brit. Mus.

Fi se (1847) ; Hoffmann, Recherches Faune Madagascar, Cr. p. 438

74). 4

Carapace smooth, nearly oblong, scarcely narrowing ante-

116 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. Ps.

riorly, with the anterior and posterior margins straight, the

antero-lateral and postero-lateral angles rounded. Rostrum

smooth, transverse, and somewhat triangular in form, acute

at its distal end. First exposed thoracic segment not pro-

duced on the side; second and third segments with the lateral

processes rounded. Lateral margins of the first to fifth post-

abdominal segments ridged ; ridges ending in a small spine

on the fourth and fifth segments. There is an oblique shallow

depression on the sides of each of these segments, which in

the fifth segment is margined externally by a distinct ridge ;

the sixth segment is armed with eight longitudinal ridges,

which terminate usually in spinules, and with two smaller

prominences near the base. Median crest of the terminal

postabdominal segment much elevated, interrupted near the

base, and ending in a spinule; on either side of it are three

obtuse crests. ‘I'he marginal teeth are greatly developed, flat-

tened, ridged above, and terminate in spines, those of the two

terminal teeth being mobile. The antennules and antenne are

nearly of equal size. The dactyli of the raptorial limbs are

armed with a cutting-edge on their inner margins, and with

two distant teeth besides the terminal spine. The distal pro-

longation of the base of the uropoda ends in two strong spines ;

and the series of spines on the outer margin of the penulti-

mate joint of the outer ramus are flattened and considerably

elongated. Length of an adult male about 6 inches.

Hab. Indo-Pacific Region.

It is remarkable that all the specimens of this widely

distributed species in the Museum collection are males.

The series includes examples from the Mauritius (General

Hardwicke and Lady F. Cole), Zanzibar (Dr. Kirk), Mada-

gascar (A. Newton, Hsq.), Seychelles (Dr. EL. P. Wright),

Samoa Islands (Rev. S. J. Whitmee), and two or three with-

out particulars respecting locality.

Gonodactylus japonicus.

Gonodactylus Edwardsi, Berthold, Abhandl. kénigl. Gesellsch. Wis-

sensch. Gottingen, ili. p. 30, pl. iii. fig. 6 (1847),

Gonodactylus japonicus, De Haan, Faun. Japon., Crust. p. 225, pl. li.

fic. 7 (1849).

This species is very nearly allied to Gonodactylus scyllarus,

but may be distinguished by the following characters :—

The rostrum is sinuated on the sides, and has the tip more

obtuse and strongly incurved. The sides of the postabdo-

minal segments are without the wide shallow impression of

G. scyllarus. 'Thereis a distinct median carinula between the

submedian keels of the sixth segment. There are from tive to

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 117

s€ven small serratures or teeth on the inner margins of the

dactyli of the raptorial limbs. Length about 52 inches.

Hab. Japan (De Haan) ; Chinese seas (Berthold; coll.

Brit. Mus.).

The two specimens in the Museum collection are males.

Gonodactylus cultrifer.

Gonodactylus cultrifer, White, Proc. Zool. Soe. p. 96, (Annulosa)

pl. xvi. fig. 1 (1850).

Carapace smooth, with the antero-lateral and _postero-

lateral angles rounded and the posterior margin straight. The

rostrum is quadrilateral, smooth, with the sides slightly con-

vergent distally, and the anterior margin straight. The first

thoracic segment is not produced on the sides; second and

third with the lateral processes rounded. First to fifth post-

abdominal segments smooth ; there is a small spinule at the

postero-lateral angles of the fifth segment; sixth segment

armed with six longitudinal care, which terminate in

spines, another carina on each side is represented only by

tubercles near the anterior margin of the segment; terminal

segment with an elevated laminiform median crest, which in

vertical height nearly equals the space between its base and

the lateral margin ; the upper margin of this crest is arcuate

and terminates in a small spine; on either side of the median

crest are two longitudinal carine; the spines of the lateral

margins are not flattened and dilated. The basal portion of

the dactyli of the raptorial limbs is not much thickened; the

terminal portion is elongated and knife-shaped, and its inner

margin is armed with two teeth. The outer spine of the

basal prolongation of the uropoda is much longer than the

inner; and the outer margin of the penultimate joint of the

outer ramus is armed with nine flattened spines (not twelve as

in G. scyllarus). Length nearly 4 inches.

Hab. China.

Two males are in the British-Museum collection. The

integument is remarkably thin and membranous, and, in the

dried state, is of a reddish-pink colour, paler in the middle

line and in other places.

Gonodactylus? Brady?.

Squilla Bradyi, A. Milne-Edwards, in Fonds de Ja Mer, (livr. ix.)

p- 187, pl. xvii. fig. 11 (1869).

Carapace short and broad; rostral plate large, subquadri-

lateral, with an excessively small median tooth. Segments

of the postabdomen depressed, without longitudinal caring ;

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 9

113 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

penultimate and terminal segments uniformly covered with

numerous closely-placed slender spines, which are longest near

the posterior margin. The eyes are scarcely dilated distally ;

the basal scales of the antenne remarkably small; the rapto-

rial limbs large, with the dactylus strongly dilated at base ; it

terminates in a slender arcuate spine, and is armed on the

inner margin of the thickened portion with three spines placed

near to one another. The uropoda are very small.

Hab. Bay of St. Vincent.

On account of the dilated dactylus of the raptorial limbs, it

appears to me that this species must be placed in Gono-

dactylus ; but it presents many affinities with Lystosquilla. I

have seen no specimens.

Gonodactylus Bleekerit.

Gonodactylus Bleekerii, A. M.-Edwards, Nouv. Archiv. Mus. Hist.

Nat. iv. p. 65, footnote (1868).

This species, according to M. A. Milne-Edwards, differs

from G. scyllarus by the form of the rostrum, which, although

enlarged at base, ends in a point, and by the existence of a

lamellate median carina on the terminal postabdominal seg-

ment, which is much less elevated than in G. cultrifer.

Hab. Batavia (Bleeker). I have seen no specimens.

** Rostral plate terminating in a strong spine.

Gonodactylus chiragra.

Mantis marina barbadensis, Petiver, Pterigraph. Americ. pl. xx. fig. 10.

Squilla chiragra, Fabr.. Ent. Syst. ii. p. 513 (1793), Suppl. p. 417

(1798) ; Desmarest, Consid. Crust. p. 251, pl. xliii. (1825).

Cancer (Mantis) chiragra, Herbst, Naturg. Krabben Xe. ii. p. 100,

pl. xxxiv. fig. 2 (1796).

Gonodactylus chiragra, Latreille, Encycl. Méth. x. p. 473 (1825), Atlas,

pl. exxv. fig. 2; M-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 528 (1837) ;

Krauss, Siidafrik. Crust. p. 60 (1843); White, List Crust. Brit.

Mus. p. 84 (1847); Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc. p. 201 (1850) ;

Dana, Cr. U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. 1, p. 623, pl. xli. fig. 5 (1852);

Heller, Cr. siidl. Europa, p. 309 (1863); Reise Novara, Crust. p. 126

(1865); Annesley, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 338 (1866); S. L Smith,

Trans. Connect. Acad. ii. p. 41 (1869); v. Martens, Archiy f.

Naturg. xxxviii. p. 147 (1872); idem in Van der Decken’s Reise,

Crust. p. 103 (1869) ; Hoffmann in Recherches faune Madagascar, Cr.

p- 36 (1874); Miers, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. elxviii. p. 495 (1879).

Carapace smooth, nearly oblong, with the sides parallel,

the antero-lateral and postero-lateral angles unarmed and

rounded. Median spine of rostrum strong and acute; its

lateral lobes but little prominent and rounded. First exposed

thoracic segment not produced; the lateral process of the

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 119

second segment is somewhat rounded, that of the third seg-

ment subtruncate, and that of the fourth segment narrowed

towards the lateral margin. Lateral margins of the first to

fifth postabdominal segments carinated, but on none of the

segments do the carine terminate in spines; the sixth seg-

ment is armed with six equidistant longitudinal prominences,

which are narrowed posteriorly and terminate each in a spine ;

the upper surface of the terminal segment is armed with three

elongated and convex prominences or tubercles, which do not

terminate in spines, and with four triangular marginal teeth,

of which the two posterior are very large, and tipped each

with a small mobile spinule. The antennules and antennz

are small and slender; the dactyli of the raptorial limbs are

without teeth on their inner margins, which are furnished

with two rows of granules in their basal, and with a thin

cutting-edge in their terminal half; the basal part of the

dactylus is considerably thickened externally, and the styliform

terminal portion is acute and usually sinuate. The distal

prolongation of the base of the uropoda ends in the two

rather short strong spines (the outer of which has no tooth

on its inner margin). Length of a full-sized adult male

nearly 4 inches.

This species is the commonest and most widely distributed

of the genus. The series in the British-Museum collection

includes specimens from the following localities :—'T'wo males

from the Red Sea, Dedalus Shoal (Lieut.-Col. Playfair) ;

a female and young male from the Gulf of Suez (2. /‘An-

drew, Esq.) ; three males and a female from Zanzibar (Dr.

Kirk) ; a fine adult male from Rodriguez Island (G'udliver in

Trans. of Venus Exped.) ; a male from India (Gardner) ; three

males from the Philippine Islands (Cuming and H. J. Veitch) ;

a male and two females from Australia (J. Macgillivray, Esq.) ;

a male from the N.E. coast of Australia, and a male and two

females from Sir C. Hardy’s Island (J. B. Jukes, Esq.) ; three

males from Swan River (Mr. Dring); a male from North

Australia (Dr. J. R. Elsey) ; two females from Port Essington

(Karl of Derby); and a series of specimens from the Fiji

Islands, including four females and several young specimens

from Ovalau Reef, a male and two females from Bau, a female

from Conway Reef (H.J2.8. ‘ Herald’), besides several speci-

mens collected in the same expedition without locality. The

only specimens from localities not included in the Indo-Pacific

Region are two from the Mediterranean that have long been

in the collection (but no authority is recorded for this habitat),

a small male brought from Panama by Mr. Bridges, and two

males from a bottle containing Crustacea without definite

120 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

locality, but whose contents were evidently from the west

American coast.’

S. I. Smith had seen specimens he referred with doubt to

this species from the Abrolhos (Hartt), Caravellas, province

of Bahia (Hartt), Aspinwall (2. H. Bradley), Florida Keys

(Gibbes), and Bermuda (J. M. Jones). Milne-Edwards and

Heller record it from the Mediterranean, Krauss from Natal,

Hilgendorf from Mozambique, and Hoffmann from Réunion.

Gonodactylus graphurus. (PI. ILI. fig. 9.)

Gonodactylus graphurus, White, List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 85 (1847) ;

Miers, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (ser. 4) xvi. p. 344 (1875).

This specimen bears a considerable external resemblance to

G. chiragra, but may be distinguished by the following cha-

racters. There is a small median keel between the innermost

or submedian prominences of the penultimate postabdominal

segment ; there are seven closely-placed prominences on the

upper surface of the terminal segment, the median being the

largest, and the others becoming successively smaller; the

median and submedian are usually armed with spines; there

are moreover six marginal spines (the outermost of these are

obsolete in G. chiragra) ; the outer of the two spines of the

basal prolongation of the uropoda has a small tooth on its

inner margin near its base; and these spines are longer and

slenderer than in G. chiragra.

Hab. Indo-Pacitic Region.

This species is scarcely less frequently and widely distri-

buted than G. chiragra. Specimens are in the Museum

collection from the following localities :—One male and two

females from the Red Sea, Hl Tor (Major M‘Donald) ; three

males and six females from the Gulf of Suez (2. MW‘ Andrew,

Esq.) ; two males and a female from the Seychelles (Dr. E.

P. Wright) ; four males and two females from Ceylon (Z. W.

H. Holdsworth, Esq.) ; afemale from North Australia (Dr. J.

R. Elsey) ; a male from Port Essington (Mr. R. Tilston); a

female from Nicol Bay, N.W. Australia (Jf. du Boulay); a

male from Port Curtis, one from Dunk Island, and a female

from near Cumberland Island (J. Macgillivray, Esq.) ; two

females from Sir-C.-Hardy Island (J. B. Jukes, Esq.) ; a male

from Torres Straits (Mrs. Campbell); a female from the

Sooloo sea (M.S. ‘ Samarang’) ; and two males from the

Samoa Islands, Upolu (Rev. S. J. Whitmee) ; besides several

specimens without locality collected in the voyage of HIS.

* Herald,’

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillidee. 121

Gonodactylus Guérinit.

Gonodactylus Guérinii, White, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 43, pl. vii. (1861) ;

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vii. p. 479 (1861).

This species is perhaps the most remarkable among the

Gonodactyli, on account of the armature of the penultimate

and terminal postabdominal segments. In most of its cha-

racters, however, it nearly resembles G. chiragra and G.

graphurus. The antero-lateral lobes of the rostrum are not,

as in those species, rounded, but produced into long spines,

which nearly equal in length the median rostral spine. The

fifth postabdominal segment is smooth at base and armed in

its posterior half with about six transverse rows of numerous

short spines, which increase in length as they approach the

posterior margin of the segment; sixth segment armed with

numerous (about fifty) strong spines, each somewhat blunt

and tipped with a short bristle; these spines are smaller and

more crowded towards the lateral margins of the segment ;

terminal segment armed on its upper surface with twenty-two

long outstanding spines, and toward the lateral margins with

two series of numerous closely-placed similar but shorter

spines, all tipped with a bristle; these series converge along

the outer margin and meet at the extremity of the two outer

long spines of the four which arm the posterior margin of the

terminal segment; these spines are of equal length, and the

two inner, like the outer, are armed along their margins with

smaller spines pectinately disposed. he styliform portion

of the dactylus of the raptorial limbs is very long and slender ;

its inner margin is not armed with teeth or spines, but is very

minutely pectinated. 'The outer of the spines of the basal pro-

longation of the uropoda is larger than the inner, but is not

toothed on its inner margin. Length of the unique specimen

(a female) 22 inches.

Hab. Fiji Islands, Matuka (/1.M.S. ‘ Herald’).

The carapace is marbled as in most of the species of the

genus. In its dry condition it is of a light yellowish brown

varied with darker colour.

Gonodactylus trispinosus. (Pl. ILI. fig. 10.)

Gonodactylus trispinosus, White, List Crust. Brit. Mus, Hi 85 (1847) ;

Dana, U.S. Explor. Exped. xiii. Cr. i. p. 628 (1852); Heller, Reise

der Novara, Crust. p. 126 (1865); Miers, Cat. New-Zeal. Crust.

p. 90 (1876).

The antero-lateral angles of the rostrum are produced into

spines, which are nearly as long as the median spine. The

fifth postabdominal segment is longitudinally corrugated; the

122- Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

penultimate segment is apparently coalescent with the ter-

minal, although the line of union is clearly indicated, and is

armed with six convex tubercles. The terminal segment is

suboblong, with the postero-lateral angles rounded ; its upper

surface is armed with three convex rounded tubercles disposed

in a triangle; behind these the upper surface is marked with

impressed lines, which reach to the posterior margin; the

posterior margin has a median notch, and is divided by

narrow fissures into about six truncated lobes. The styli-

form termination of the dactylus of the raptorial limbs is very

short and unarmed. The outer of the spines of the basal pro-

longation of the uropoda is larger than the inner, and is not

armed with a tooth on its inner margin. Length of the

typical specimen in the Museum collection (a male) about

14 inch.

Hab. Swan River, one male (Coll. Brit. Mus.) ; Sharks’

Bay, West Australia, in holes in coral (H.M/.S. ‘ Herald’),

two males.

This species is recorded by Dana from the Fiji Islands, and

by Heller from Auckland. Hoffmann, in ‘Recherches Faune

Madagascar,’ Cr. p. 43, cites this species from the Mauritius ;

but he may have had specimens of G. Molinit or an allied

form.

Gonodactylus trispinosus, var. pulchellus, nov.

By this name I designate a small male from Ceylon, pre-

sented to the Museum by E. W. H. Holdsworth, Esq., which

may very probably constitute a distinct species; but I await

the examination of a larger series of specimens before deciding

this point. It differs from the typical G. trespinosus in the

absence of corrugations on the median portion of the fifth

postabdominal segment. The median spine of the rostral

plate is absent, but may have been broken off close to the

base. Length about 17 inch.

Gonodactylus glyptocercus.

Gonodactylus glyptocercus, Wood-Mason, Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal,

p- 232 (1875); Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (ser. 4) xvii. p. 263 (1876).

This species is only known to me by Mr. Wood-Mason’s

short notice in the ‘ Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of

Bengal,’ according to which it is allied to G. trispinosus, but

has the terminal postabdominal segment ornamented with two

oval tubercles, bounded by an impressed invected line, and

with a median basal cinquefoil-shaped one, and the two pre-

ceding segments symmetrically engraved with fine lines.

Hao. Nicobars.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 123

Gonodactylus Folinii.

Gonodactylus Folin, A. M.-Edwards, Nouy. Archiv. Mus. Hist. Nat.

iv. p. 65, pl. xviii. figs. 8-11 (1868).

In this species the antero-lateral angles of the rostrum are

prolonged into spines, which are shorter than the median

spine. The first to fifth postabdominal segments are smooth;

the sixth and seventh are coalescent; the anterior portion,

corresponding to the sixth segment, bears four rounded tuber-

cles, the outer of which are three-lobed; the posterior portion,

corresponding to the seventh segment, has on each side a

longitudinal and somewhat reniform prominence, which is

externally convex, besides a less elevated median prominence.

The margin of this segment is notched posteriorly, and is

laterally divided into three obtuse rounded teeth. The dactylus

of the raptorial limbs is greatly dilated at base; and its styli-

form extremity is acute, and without teeth on its inner margin.

Length 0°02 metre (about ? inch).

Hab. St. Vincent (Mus. Paris).

There are in the British-Museum collection a male from

the Mauritius (2. Templeton, Esq.) and two small specimens,

without definite locality, from the ‘ Herald’ collection, which

belong to this or a closely allied form. ‘They differ, however,

in the greater relative length of the antero-lateral spines of the

rostrum, in the less prominence of the two teeth of the pos-

terior margin adjoming the median notch, and the greater

prominence of the basal dilatation of the dactyli of the rap-

torial limbs. Length of the Mauritius specimen rather more

than $ inch.

Gonodactylus excavatus, sp. n. (Pl. III. figs. 11, 12.)

The antero-lateral angles of the carapace are prominent

and almost acute. The antero-lateral spmes of the rostrum

slender, but shorter than the elongated median spine. The

fifth postabdominal segment is smooth and similar to the pre-

ceding ; the sixth is armed with six somewhat irregular longi-

tudinal prominences, which are separated by deep intervening

spaces, and are confluent distally ; the terminal segment is

deeply and widely excavated posteriorly, and is armed above

with five prominent, smooth, longitudinal, obtuse keels, the

two on either side of the median one being longest, and

reaching to the hinder margin of the postero-lateral lobes of

the segment. The basal dilatation of the dactyli of the rap-

torial limbs is very prominent, and the styliform distal portion

slender and without teeth on its inner margin. Length

about ? inch.

124 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

A small male example, without locality, is in the Museum

from the collection of H.M.S. ‘ Herald.’

Gonodactylus furcicaudatus, sp. n.

(Pl. III. figs. 13-16.)

In this most remarkable species the carapace is very small,

nearly oblong, without spines at its antero-lateral and postero-

lateral angles, and the rostrum terminates in a slender median

spine, and its antero-lateral angles are acute, as in so many

Gonodactyli. ‘The exposed thoracic segments and first five

postabdominal segments are of the usual form; the sixth is

armed with six smooth longitudinal prominences, the two

median being somewhat larger than the rest. The basal

portion of the terminal segment is very short and _ trans-

verse, and has the appearance of having been suddenly

. broken off; its distal end is perforated with a series of

pits, about four of which are placed in a transverse series

above the base of the terminal portion of the segment, and

one or two on each side of it; this terminal portion is

composed of two slencer spines, which are in close contact

or partially united at base, and slightly divergent distally.

The eye-peduncles are rather prominent and subcylindrical,

the antennules and antenne slender. The slender dactyli ot

the raptorial limbs are considerably enlarged at base and

without spines on the inner margin. ‘The rami of the uropoda

are iringed with close hairs; and the basal prolongation ends

in a very strong compressed terminal and a small and slender

lateral spine. Length of the largest specimen (a female)

1 inch 2 lines.

fab. ?

Tour females and two males are in the collection, obtained

in the voyage of H.M.S. ‘ Herald ;’ but their habitat has not

been preserved. ‘The appendages of the thoracic limbs are

slender and linear, as in all the Gonodactyli.

On account of the remarkable abbreviation of the terminal

segment, I had at first placed this form in a distinct genus

under the name of Mesacturus; but as in all its other cha-

racters it belongs to Gonodactylus, and as in the Gonodactyli

the form of this segment is subject to considerable variation,

it seems better to include it in this latter genus.

APPENDIX.

Lystosquilla acanthocarpus.—In a series of Crustacea

selected from the collection lately exhibited in the India

Museum, South Kensington, specimens of the following

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide. 125

Squillide oceur—Lysiosquilla acanthocarpus, L. maculata,

Squilla nepa, and S. raphidea, all from Penang, collected by

Dr. Cantor. The first mentioned is of especial interest, as

but a single specimen, from Port Essington, Australia, previ-

ously existed in the collection of the British Museum. A close

examination of the types of L. acanthocarpus and L. spinosa

(ZL. tricarinata), which are dried and not in good condition,

now convinces me that these species approach L. Braziert in

having the appendage of the antepenultimate joint of the last

pair of legs less dilated than those of the two preceding pairs.

As, however, Latreille, Kessler, and De Haan, in their figures

and descriptions of L. scolopendra, L. eusebia, and L. latifrons,

represent the appendages of all the legs as equally dilated,

this character cannot be supposed to be constant in all the

species referable to Latreille’s old genus Coronis (sect. 2 of

my Lystosquilla) ; nor, on the other hand, can it be sexual,

as the type specimen ot L. Brazieri is a female, and the speci-

men of L. spinosa in the Museum collection a male. In L.

acanthocarpus there are five, not six, spines on the upper

surface of the terminal segment.

Lystosquilla spinosa.—I have received from Mr. T. W.

Kirk, of the Colonial Museum, Wellington, New Zealand,

copies of his recently published ‘‘ Additions to the Carcino-

logical Fauna of New Zealand,” and “ Notes on some New-

Zealand Crustaceans.” In the former paper is a figure of his

Squilla indefensa, which leaves me in little doubt that I was

right in regarding this species as identical with Lystosquilla

spinosa, the diagnosis of which Mr. Kirk had probably no

opportunity of referring to. In the second paper the occur-

rence of Sgutlla armata in Wellington Harbour is recorded.

Of special interest, as relating to the distribution of the

marine Crustacea, is the discovery by Mr. Kirk of several

northern and arctic species (Calocaris Macandree, Portunus

pusillus, Ebalia tumefacta, Podocerus cylindricus, Pleustes

panoplus, and Caprella lobata) in the New-Zealand seas.

If these identifications have been made from the descriptions

only, and not from the comparison of actual specimens, I

should hesitate to believe in the coexistence of so many species

not yet recorded from intermediate localities in regions so

widely separated.

The occurrence of closely allied species in the northern and

southern hemisphere is not uncommon ; but with very few ex-

ceptions (Pinnotheres pisum, Lysianassa magellanica) the

species hitherto known to occur at once in the northern and

southern hemispheres are such as have an almost cosmopo-

litan range.

126 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Squillide.

It is right, however, to add (as I have already noted in the

Introduction to my Catalogue of the New-Zealand Crustacea)

that Dr. Giinther (P.Z.S. 1871, pp. 653, 673) mentions

several species of fishes common both to the British and

Antarctic seas; and as our knowledge increases a parallel

distribution of the marine Crustacea may be ascertained.

Squilla mantis.—In the text I have cited Latreille as the

earliest authority for this species, because the Cancer mantis

of Linneeus (Syst. Nat. p. 1054, 1766) and Squilla mantis

of Fabricius (int. Syst. i. p. 511, 1793) are described in

such general terms that their diagnoses might apply to almost

any species of the genus ; and, indeed, it is evident from the

synonymical references and habitats given by them (“in mare

Asiatico, Indico, Mediterraneo’) that they confounded several

distinct species under this name.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PuateE I.

Fig. 1. Dactylus of raptorial limb of male Lystosquilla maculata.

Fig. 2. Dactylus of the raptorial limb of a female.

Fig. 3. Lysiosquilla Braxiert, Miers, adult female, nat. size.

Fxg. 4. Raptorial limb of the same.

Fig. 5. Appendage of one of the penultimate thoracic limbs, magnified.

Fig. 6. Appendage of one of the last pair of thoracic limbs, maguified..

Fig. 7. Lysiosquilla acanthocarpus, Gray, female, nat. size.

. Raptorial limb of the same.

Fig. 9. Terminal segment, magnified.

Fig. 10. Lystosquilla spinosa, Wood-Mason, nat. size.

Fxg. 11. Raptorial limb of the same, magnitied.

Fig. 12. Terminal segment and uropoda, magnified. The specimen

figured is that to which Gray attached the name of Coronis

tricarinata.

PuaTE II.

Fig. 1. Chloridella microphthalma, M.-Edwards, adult male, nat. size.

Fig, 2. Front of cephalic region of the same, showing the form of the

eye-peduncles and of the rostral plate, magnified.

Fig. 3. Raptorial limb, magnified.

Fig. 4, Terminal segment and uropoda, magnified.

Fig. 5. Front of the cephalic region of Chloridella rotundicauda, sp. u.,

showing the form of the rostrum and eye-peduncles, magnified.

Fig. 6. Terminal segment and uropoda of the same, nat. size.

Fig. 7. Lateral process of the fourth thoracic segment in Sguilla scorpio,

Latr.

Fig. 8. Squilla Dufresnit, Leach (ined.), adult male, nat. size.

Fig. 9. Lateral process of the fourth thoracic segment of the same,

magnified.

Fig. 10. Lateral process of the fourth thoracic segment in Squella prasino-

lineata, Dana ?

Fig. 11. Lateral process of the same segment in S. mantis, L.

Fig. 12. Lateral process of the fourth thoracic segment in S. empusa,

Say.

Fig. 13. Lateral process of the same segment in Sguella nepa, Latreille.

Rey. T. Hincks on the Terms Polyzoa and Bryozoa. 127

Puate IIT,

Fig. 1. Pseudosquilla monoductyla, A. M.-Edwards, magnified.

Fig. 2. Dactylus of raptorial limb of the same, further magnified.

Brullé, magnified.

. Terminal segment and uropoda of the same, magnified.

. Front of cephalic region, showing rostral plate of P. ornata,

Miers, magnified.

6. Terminal segment and uropoda of the same, magnified.

7. Front of cephalic region, showing rostral plate of Pseudosquilla

ciliata (Fabr.), magnified.

Fig. 8. Terminal segment and uropoda of the same, magnified.

g. 9. Terminal segment and uropoda of Gonodactylus yraphurus (White,

ined.), Miers (magnified ).

Fig. 10. Terminal segment and uropoda of Gonodactylus trispinosus, White

(ined.), Dana (magnified).

Fig. 11. Gonodactylus excavatus, sp. n., magnified.

Fig. 12. Terminal segment and uropoda of the same, further mag-

nified,

Fig. 13. Gonedactylus furcicaudatus, sp. n., magnified.

Fig. 14. Penultimate and last postabdominal segments, further mag-

nified.

Fig. 15, Terminal segment, viewed from behind, showing the pits in its

posterior surface, magnified.

Fig. 16. Dactylus of one of the raptorial limbs, magnified.

Fig. 3. Front of cephalic region, showing rostral plate of P. oculata,

oy)

X.—On the Terms Polyzoa and Bryozoa.

By the Rev. THomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S.

Ty the last number of the ‘Annals’ Mr. A. W. Waters has

raised afresh the question as to the comparative claims of the

terms Polyzoa and Bryozoa. He decides in favour of the

latter, and urges its adoption, in opposition to the general

practice of English zoologists.

This would be, in my judgment, a retrograde step; it would

involve injustice to a most able and original observer ; and (as

I shall endeavour to show) it is not warranted by the facts of

the case.

Mr. Waters is evidently under the impression that those

who adopt the name Polyzoa do so on the mere ground of its

priority and are wholly unacquainted with the contents of

J. V. Thompson’s paper in which it was first introduced. He

expresses his confidence that, as soon as they are let into the

secret, they will hasten to transter their allegiance to Ehren-

berg!

iz this he is certainly under a misapprehension: some at

least of the strongest advocates for the retention of Thomp-

son’s name have not contented themselves with ascertaining

128 Rev. T. Hincks on the Terms Polyzoa and Bryozoa.

the date of his paper, but have also thoroughly mastered its

contents, and, strange as it may seem to my friend Mr.

Waters, have been much confirmed thereby in their opinion.

As to the question of date there is no room for doubt, and

Mr. Waters does not suggest any. The term Bryozoa first

made its appearance in the ‘Symbole Physica,’ in 1831;

but Thompson’s ‘ Researches,’ in which he proposed the

name Polyzoa for the type of structure which he had demon-

strated in the polypide of the Ascidian zoophytes (for this I

take to be what he intended) were published in 1830. And

it must be remembered that his observations were made as

early as 1820; so that he really anticipated not merely Ehren-

berg’s name, but the discoveries of Grant and Milne-Kdwards,

though the publication of his results was delayed. Those

results are sufficiently remarkable in themselves, and we

shall estimate them the more highly when we take into ac-

count the conditions under which they were obtained.

But Mr. Waters makes very light of “ the bibliographical

question of dates,” and is confident that we have but to

glance at the paper to convince ourselves that we have been

thus far under a delusion. He lays it down that “ Thompson

did not indicate any group of animals by his term, and that

all he meant by Polyzoa was a single polypide;” and he

implies that to make the term a class-designation would

be to give it a totally different sense from that which he

intended. For proof of his position he thinks it unneces-

sary to go further than the title of the paper, “On Poly-

zoa, a new animal discovered as an inhabitant of some Zoo-

phytes.”

This view, it seems to me, rests on a complete misappre-

hension of Thompson’s meaning. He used the term Polyzoa

(in opposition to Hydra) to denote a distinct type of structure,

which he had demonstrated, and not as the mere name of the

single zooid. This is evident from the following, amongst

other passages :—“‘ The Polyzoa will probably be found in

many dissimilar genera of the zoophytes, and even mixed up

with Hydra in some; .. . . and hence this discovery must

be the cause of extensive alterations and dismemberments in

the class with which they have hitherto been associated. . . .

I shall merely indicate here in a general way the whole of the

Flustracee, i many of which I have clearly ascertained the

animals to be Polyzow ;”’ which is equivalent to saying that

they exhibited the new type of structure, and were thus dis-

tinct from the Hydre. In a word, Polyzoa, as he uses it

here, is essentially a class-designation, and not the name of a

mere structural element.

Rey. ‘Il’. Hincks on the Terms Polyzoa and Bryozoa. 129

His Polyzow were polypes exhibiting a molluscan organi-

zation, as distinguished from the Hydre; that is, they were

strictly a CLASS.

The following passages may be added, as showing clearly

the sense in which Thompson used the term Polyzoa :—“ The

other species of Sertularia in which the animals have been

determined to be Polyzow may, ... . perhaps, be referred to

one genus.” ‘The present Memoir has for its object to de-

monstrate another form of animal not hitherto known, and

which, while it must be allowed to belong to a new type of

Mollusca Acephala, resembles exteriorly in some manner the

Hydra; this animal has been designated by the name

Polyzoa.”

In this passage both Hydra and Polyzoa are used to

denote types of structure, and not elements of the compound

organism.

In the prospectus of the whole work, we find the following

as the subject of the tenth memoir :—‘ Animals of some

Cellarie, Tubulipore, and Flustracee proved to be Polyzoe.”’

To substitute polypides (in the mere sense of single zoords)

for Polyzow in this sentence would be to render it perfectly

unmeaning.

As to the mere form of the word, it seems to me to be a

point of the very smallest moment; and Mr. Waters lays no

stress on it. No doubt Polyzow would be the proper reading,

if we must of necessity accept Thompson’s original error in

the construction of the word. But it is surely allowable

to alter the ending, and so bring the term into harmony

with our present usage. In doing so we retain all that is

essential and we leave the honour with him to whom it is

justly due.

Thompson’s name, then, has every title to adoption; and

I venture to think that English zoologists would be little

true to their duty if they were to sacrifice the claim of a

most able and accurate, though isolated and unobtrusive, in-

vestigator, because the majority have thus far failed to recog-

nize it.

I trust that Mr. Waters may find reason to reconsider his

opinion; he must certainly adduce some stronger arguments

before the ‘ Polyzoists”’ will be at all likely to change

theirs.

130 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

XI.—The Sponge-fauna of Norway ; a Report on the hev.

A. M. Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian

Coast. By W. J. Souuas, M.A., F.G.S., &e.

[Plate VI. & VII.]

In the spring of the year (1879) my friend the Rev. A. M.

Norman placed in my hands for description the fine collection

of sponges which he had dredged the previous year from the

coast of Norway.

This rich material placed completely at my disposal, un-

hampered by restrictions, has proved so fertile in interesting

results that, even with the expenditure of the whole of my

leisure time, | have as yet succeeded only in making a

beginning to the work of its investigation. It would be use-

less, however, to defer publication till the investigation is

complete ; by that time many of the new species which occur

in the collection would in all probability have been discovered

and described by others, as, indeed, in one or two instances

has happened already, and a large part of the labour which

has been spent upon them would thus be entirely thrown

away.

As regards the general conditions under which the speci-

mens lived, and the circumstances under which they were

obtained, I cannot do better than quote nearly entire the

graphic description by Mr. Norman himself; he says*, ‘“ The

district embraced was, speaking roughly, for I do not know

the exact mileage, from 15 miles north to 15 miles south of

Bergen—the Fiord chosen to the north being Oster Fiord,

and the dredging in the south terminating at Kors Fiord.

“The weather was remarkably warm for the time of the

year (May), and the circumstances for dredging altogether

most favourable.

“ Dredging in the Norwegian Fiords is a very different

matter from what itis in the ocean round Shetland. In the

latter case great expense must be incurred. Exposed to every

wind which springs up, in the open sea, with an almost constant

heavy Atlantic swell, the employment of a yacht or steamer

is absolutely necessary, at least when dredging 20-40 miles

from land. Atter tossing about in such a vessel for a week

at sea it often happened that hardly twenty hours’ dredging

was practicable; and the greatest depth never exceeded

170 fathoms. Compare with this dredging in Norway. A

small boat with four men will suffice for our purpose, if fur-

* “The Mollusca of the Fiords near Bergen, Norway,” by the Rey.

A. M. Norman, M.A., in the ‘ Journal of Conchology,’ Jan, 1879.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 131

nished with suitable apparatus for lightening the labour of

hauling in the dredge. In this we lie calmly on the lake-like

surface of a narrow Fiord, where we are never more than

about a mile from land, and let down the dredge to find a

fauna unknown at Shetland, and approximating to that of the

deeper parts of the North-Atlantic Ocean. It fairly astounds

us at first, after what we have been accustomed to during

five-and- twenty years’ dredging in our own shallow seas, to

drop the dredge over the boat-side and see 400 fathoms of line

run out before a resting g-place is found at the bottom, and this

so near to shore that, letting out as much line again, it is

actually possible to pull to shore from this great depth ‘while.

the dredge lies still where it was let go, to land and haul it

in from the rocks, and, if it does not catch (which it probably

will do as it mounts the precipice), there to bring it in. It

seems incredible until we have proved it, that in pulling over

those few hundred yards of smooth surface to the shore we

have passed over a precipice of more than 2000 feet, which

lies hidden by the calm water which ripples against our

bows.”

Present condition of the Sponges.—The specimens have

been all excellently preserved, some by drying, some by im-

mersion in spirits—the latter still retaining so many details

of their original histological character that T found it possible

to obtain considerable information with respect to the nature

of their soft parts.

Mode of Preparation.—In preparing specimens for micro-

scopical examination I followed the ordinary methods for

obtaining the spicules in the free state; but in cutting and

mounting ‘ sections” I adopted the processes which have

hitherto, in this country at least, been confined to the exami-

nation of quite soft tissues. A piece was cut from the sponge

large enough to contain a representative of each of its different

tissues ; this was then soaked in distilled water till its con-

tained alcohol was as near ly as possible all extracted ; it was

then transferred to a strong solution of gum, in which it was

allowed to stand for an hour or so; finally it was placed in

the well of a freezing-microtome and frozen in the usual way.

From the frozen specimen slices could be cut of any required

thinness, the razor, strange to say, passing through the soft

tissues and hard spicules with apparently equal case.

The slices so obtained were variously treated : some stained,

and some not, were mounted in glycerine of various degrees

of strength ; others were treated first with absolute alcohol,

then with carbolie acid and turpentine and mounted in Canada

balsam.

132 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

“ Teasing’? was resorted to in the case of some tissues with

success, especially when it was found desirable to observe the

behaviour of the tissue with reagents.

Altogether the various methods pursued have, I believe,

succeeded in eliciting nearly all the information that could be

extracted from the specimens ; and that this is very far from

being so complete as could be wished is toa great extent

owing to the imperfect manner in which histological charac-

ters are exhibited in sponges which have been preserved in

spirits without any previous treatment. Mr. Norman’s speci-

mens are perfect as spirit-specimens ; they were not preserved

with a view to submitting them to detailed histological exami-

nation. And here it may be worth while suggesting that if

in the future it should be desired to preserve sponges with

this object, a preliminary soaking in osmic-acid solution of

‘02 or ‘03 per cent. should be given to them before placing in

spirits; this will effect nearly every thing that may be desired.

With osmic-acid-treated specimens and the help of a freezing-

microtome no difficulty should be experienced in obtaining an

almost complete knowledge of the minute structure of any

sponge.

We may now proceed with the work of determining and

describing species, selecting to begin with the family Tetrac-

tinellide.

Tetractinellide.

Genus STELLETTA, Sdt.

Species Stelletta Norman, nov.

Sponge (Pl. VI. fig. 1) more or less spherical in shape,

becoming depressed cake-like with age, sessile, attached : in

size an ellipsoidal form measured 1,8, inch im length, 15 in

breadth, and 1,1; in height; a cake-like form 2 by 14 by 3 inch.

From the surface of the sponge the distal ends of long acerate

spicules project erectly, rendering it hispid; trifid spicules

accompany the acerates, and, expanding into triradiate heads

with simple or bifurcated rays at about one and the same level,

form a network-like covering concentric with the surface and

about =: inch above it. Hntangled among and adhering to the

ends of these spicules are numerous Foraminifera, Annelids,

and other organisms, as well as mineral particles ; these give

a dark greyish colour to the sponge, while its actual surface is

of a yellowish-white colour. Oscules not apparent. Pores

numerous, dispersed, minute.

Skeleton.—The skeleton consists of long-shafted spicules,

minute hair-like spicules, and stellates. The long-shafted

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 133

spicules may be divided into two groups, the robust and the

slender.

Thick long-shafted Spicules.—(i) a simple fusiform, straight

or slightly curved, sharply pointed acerate, 0°235 inch long,

00025 inch broad (Pl. VI. fig. 4); (ii) trifid spicule with

simple rays, shaft 0°16 inch long, 0:0025 broad, arms 0:03

inch long (Pl. VI. fig. 5); (iii) trifid spicule with bifurcated

arms, shaft 0°11 inch long, 0:00375 broad, arms 0°0375 inch

long (PI. VI. figs. 6, 8).

Thin long-shafted Spicules.—(i) a long, slender, sharp-

pointed acerate, 0°23 inch long (Pl. VI. fig. 11) ; (i) trifid

spicule with forward-directed arms, 0°215 inch long (Pl. VI.

_ fig. 10); (ii) trifid, with arms recurved, anchor-like, 0-216 inch

‘long (Pl. VI. figs. 9, 15) ; (iv) trifid spicule with forward-

directed arms, 0°0625 inch long (Pl. VI. fig. 7). All these

spicules are about 0:00125 inch broad. No. iv is no. ii of

the preceding group in miniature.

Stellates.—These are of two kinds :—one somewhat larger,

00013 inch in diameter, with fine pointed rays (PI. VI.

fig. 13) ; the other smaller, 0°0004 imch in diameter, with

blunt-ended rays and less regular in form (PI. VI. fig. 12).

Bowerbank’s term “ cylindro-stellate’” may be adopted for

the latter.

Hair-like Spicules or Trichites—The “ trichites,” as these

fine, immeasurably thin, hair-like spicules may be termed, are

usually collected together in cylindrical sheaves or bundles,

from 0:0016 to 0:002 inch long, and 0°0008 inch broad

(Pl. VI. figs. 14, 16): each sheaf appears to represent a cell, and

the spicules siliceous rhaphides within it; the unmetamor-

phosed protoplasm of the sheaf is chiefly accumulated in a

layer at each end; one of these layers contains a nucleus

with a spherical nucleolus. With age the trichites appear to

become separate and are freed from their surrounding enve-

lope. ‘Their length is the same as that of the bundle which

they form.

' Hab. Marine.

Loc. Kors fiord, Station 23, depth 180 fathoms.

In transverse section the sponge is seen to consist of an

internal “ mark” (body-substance), separated by a_ layer of

crypt-like cavities from an external well-marked cortex

(PI.VI. fig. 2). The cortex is about ;4 inch thick ; its lower

half consists of a layer of bluish-white translucent tissue of

great toughness and elasticity, and bearing a superficial re-

semblance to cartilage.

The “ mark”? is of a yellowish-grey colour, and traversed

by canals which branch and become smaller towards the sub-

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 10

134 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

cortical crypts. The crypts are separated from each other

by a number of fleshy pillars traversed by the shafts of long

acerate and trifid spicules; they communicate laterally, to

form a subcortical layer of winding passages.

Under the microscope the transverse section shows an

outermost structureless membrane succeeded by a layer of

minute stellates*, the two together having a thickness of

00004 inch (PI. VIL. fig. 18, a). A layer of connective tissue

with scattered stellates and of variable thickness succeeds.

The next layer, 0°03 inch thick, consists chiefly of trichite

sheaves arranged in packets—the spaces around and between

the packets, but not about the separate sheaves, being filled

up with gelatinous connective tissue, the corpuscles of which,

are fusiform (PI. VII. fig. 18, 5).

The cartilaginous-looking layer (Pl. VII. fig. 18, c) before

mentioned next succeeds; it is about 0°03 inch thick, and

consists of long fusiform transparent hyaline fibres with a

more refringent, faintly bluish, axial thread: these appear to

be muscle-fibres, and form variously oriented fasciz lying

chiefly in a plane parallel to the general surface of the sponge

(Pl. VI. fig. 3).

Just within the proximal edge of the preceding or muscular

layer is a discontinuous row of large cells, variable but chiefly

elliptical in form, and provided with a large oval nucleus

containing some fluid and a spherical nucleolus (Pl. VII.

figs. 18, f, & 26).

The inner or proximal face of the muscular layer is

covered by an epithelial membrane bearing round nuclei.

The “ mark” has a very different appearance from that of

the gelatinous connective tissue which forms a large part of

some sponges; it consists of finely granular protoplasm, which

readily stains with reagents: about the borders of the canals

it appears fibrous, owing to the presence of a number of

granular fusiform corpuscles arranged in parallel order; fur-

ther away from the canals nuclei present themselves simjlar

in appearance to those which occur in the cells on the inner-

most face of the muscular layer; and in some cases the outlines

of large elliptical cells can be traced about these nuclei; but

more often the borders of the cells are obscure (Pl. VII.

fig, 24).

The pillars of the crypts are chiefly continuations upwards of

the mark; but they also contain muscular fibres, lying longi-

* Whether the external membrane represents a layer of plate-like

epidermis, or whether it and the stellates together constitute the epider-

mis, is by no means clear. The stellates have much the appearance of

being the contents of epidermal cells.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 135

tudinally, which have found their way down from the mus-

cular layer. Itis through the pillars that the long-shafted

spicules pass on their way to the surface.

The large elliptical cells of the underside of the muscular

layer are continued out of it down the sides of the pillars

and under the floor of the crypts.

The cortex is traversed by the “ intermarginal cavities ” of

Bowerbank, or, as I shall term them, the “ cortical funnels ”

or “chone’’*, They consist essentially of a tube divided by

a sphincter into a shorter proximal and a longer distal part,

the “ectochone”’ and ‘“ endochone”’ respectively (Pl. VII.

fig. 18,e). ‘The ectochone is cylindrical or acutely conical for

the greater part of its length, its proximal end being either

the hemispherical termination of the cylinder or the rounded

apex of the cone; its distal end is greatly expanded beneath

the dermal layer, and produced laterally into canals from

which smaller canals proceed and terminate in the pores of the

surface, either immediately or after once more subdividing into

still smaller canals. ‘The endochone is a more or less hemi-

spherical dome, which may be prolonged downwards as a very

short cylindrical or conical tube, and which opens freely into

the subcortical crypt. Generally each crypt is furnished with

two or more funnels. ‘T’he distal half of the ectochone lies in

the layer of trichite sheaves ; its proximal half and the whole

of the endochone lies in the muscular layer of the cortex.

The funnels are lined by an epithelial layer, outside which is

a layer of concentric muscle-fibres ; but when the ectochone

traverses the layer of trichite-sheaves, the concentric muscles

are replaced by gelatinous connective tissue containing fusi-

form corpuscles with nuclei.

Arrangement of the Spicules——The long-shafted spicules

which occur in the mark are chiefly robust acerates, gathered

together into loose fibres, which exhibit no regular arrange-

ment; on approaching the cortex, however, the fibres arrange

themselves along radii more or less at right angles to it, pass

through the pillars of the crypts, traverse the cortex, and

project beyond it. At the same time trifid spicules put in an

appearance, their distal triradiate ends lying imbedded at all

levels in the cortex, or expanding at some distance outside it.

Where the fibres pass out of the sponge their constituent

spicules have so much diverged from one another that the

fibre-like form is lost; the dermal layer of the sponge is

slightly raised, tent- like, about the fibre where it emerges.

The small trifid spicules (Pl. VI. fig. 7) are almost con-

* xovn, a funnel.

10#

136 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

fined to the upper corners of the crypts, to which they serve as

a kind of groin; the arms of large trifids sometimes occur in

the same position, and where both are absent their place is

sometimes supplied by a projecting spur produced from the

shaft of one of the robust trifids (Pl. VI. fig. 8).

Stellates—The cylindro-stellates are most abundant in the

dermal layer, where the sharp-rayed forms are rare; both

kinds of stellates are thickly strewn around the walls of the

crypts, and both are rare in the interior of the mark. The

sharp-rayed forms preponderate in the mark.

Trichites—The trichite sheaves occur as the chief consti-

tuents of the outer half of the cortex; they accompany the

large spicules through the pillars of the crypts, and are abun-

dantly dispersed throughout the general substance of the marx.

Foreign Bodies.—The mark contains a surprisingly large

number of foreign bodies imbedded in its substance. ‘The nature

of these included bodies is very various; but, for the most

part, they consist of tests of Foraminifera, Radiolaria, and

Diatoms, and the calcareous and siliceous spicules of a variety

of other sponges, including an occasional Geodia globule.

Observations.

1. The Muscular Layer.—Before proceeding to describe this

a little more fully than we have yet done, it may be worth

while giving a short account of observations which have been

already made by others on the occurrence of muscular tissue

in the sponges.

Lieberkiihn * appears to have been the first to draw atten-

tion to the resemblance between certain sponge-tissues and

unstriated muscle-fibre, as in his description of the fibrous

layer of the cortex in Tethya lyncurium, where he says that

the fibres of this layer may be regarded as related to the

so-called organic muscle-fibre of the higher animals.

Oscar Schmidt + follows, quoting Lieberkiihn, confirming

his observations, and extending them to other species, ex. gr.

Ancorina cerebrum, Sdt.

KGlliker { likewise describes the muscular tissue of certain

rind-sponges.

O. Schmidt § again discusses this subject, confirming, by

his own observations on the intermarginal cavities of Geodia

gigas, Sdt., those made by Bowerbank on his Geodia Barett?,

* Leiberkitihn, 1859, Archiv f. Anatomie u. Physiologie, p. 523.

+ O. Schmidt, 1862, Die Spong. d. Adriatischen Meeres, p. 43, pl. iv.

fig. 1, a, 6b.

{ Kélliker, 1864, Icon. Histolog. i. Heft, p. 48.

§ O. Schmidt, 1866, Adriat. Spong. 1. Supplem. p. 3.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 137

from which it appeared that the iris-like diaphragms extending

across these cavities are capable of spontaneous contraction

and expansion, so as to vary at will the size of the central

lumen; and hence he draws the obvious inference that the

fusiform fibres composing these diaphragms are not only mor-

phologically similar to muscle-fibres, but physiologically as

well ; from this he proceeds to the conclusion that the fibres

of Tethya and other rind-sponges are likewise muscle-fibres.

Hiickel* does not deny that the fusiform fibres are both irri-

table and contractile, in the sense of shortening in the long and

broadening in the transverse direction ; but he maintains that

true muscle cannot be evolved without a simultaneous dif-

ferentiation of nerve-tracts ; and since specialized nerve-tracts

do not exist in sponges, he would call the contractile fibres in

question “‘ neuro-muscles.”

Carter t describes the fusiform cells, referring to his figures

in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, vol. x. pl. vii. figs.

9, 10, in illustration. These cells are less specialized than

those to be met with in many other instances (they resemble

fusiform connective-tissue corpuscles) ; but Carter decides to

regard them provisionally as muscular.

Ff. E. Schulze} figures and describes fusiform cells also

from an Aplysina (A. acrophoba); he follows Hiickel in

refusing to designate them as muscle-fibres, preferring the

term “‘ contractile fibre-cells.”

Carter §, in his account of Axos spinispiculum, Carter,

describes some fibrillated fibres which he conjectures may be

muscular, especially as they lie parallel to each other and are

not united as in elastic tissue.

In Stelletta Normani the fibres are the best marked I have

yet met with in any sponge, and they likewise most closely

resemble the organic muscle-fibres of the higher animals ;

they are about 0°0066 inch long and 0-0003 broad, fusiform,

hyaline, colourless, and of sharply marked contour; their

nucleus or axial thread, as it may be more correctly termed,

is fusiform, homogeneous, faintly bluish in colour, highly

refringent, and 0:0035 inch long (Pl. VII. fig. 20). With

polarized light the fibres behave like uniaxal crystals.

Treated with acetic acid or boiled in water they undergo no

appreciable change; but potash and nitric acid produce well-

* Hackel, 1872, Die Kalkschwamme, p. 414.

+ Carter, 1875, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xvi. p. 36.

{ Schulze, 1878, Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool. p. 394, pl. xxii. fig. 13.

§ Carter, 1879, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. iii, pp. 287 and 290,

pl. xxv. figs. 6-8,

138 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

marked effects. Thus on adding a 5 or 10 per cent. solution

of potash to a fragment of the teased-out tissue, the fibres at

once became swollen, those which were previously curved

straightened themselves out, and simultaneously the axial

thread almost completely disappeared; on then adding a

10 per cent. solution of nitric acid the fibres at once con-

tracted, and the axial thread became more visible than it had

been before ; again adding potash the fibre expanded; again

nitric acid, and it contracted; and as often as one or the other

reagent was applied, so often the same results were produced.

With strong acid the outlines of the fibres appeared to vanish,

and a homogeneous substance remained behind, in which the

axial thread remained wonderfully clear and distinct; on adding

magenta, the threads stained deeply, but the matrix was

not affected. The fibres can best be separated from their

tissue by macerating thin slices for a few days in baryta-

water or 1 per cent. chromic-acid solution, and then teasing

out.

The muscular layer passes at its distal margin insensibly

into gelatinqus connective tissue with fusiform corpuscles.

The change seems to be accomplished by the loss of a distinct

border to the muscle-fibres, and the growth of the fusiform

axial thread at the expense of their hyaline portion; at the

same time a distinct but small nucleus and nucleolus become

clearly visible in the axial thread, which has also acquired a

granular character (Pl. VII. fig. 17).

The muscles of the sphincter are darker than those of the

rest of the muscular layer, owing to the increased size and

proximity of their axial threads and to the development of

fine granules in their hyaline exterior.

With carmine or magenta the axial threads of the muscle-

fibres are easily stained, but the hyaline part not at all; hence

when a section of the muscular layer is stained, the sphincters

are made very prominent, since their abundant nuclei lead

them to acquire a very dark colour.

We have applied the term muscle-fibres to the structures

just described, because they are morphologically similar to the

fibres occurring in other animals to which no one hesitates to

apply the term ‘‘ muscular ;”’ and the fact that, slightly modi-

fied, they enter into the composition of the sphincters of the

cortical funnels seems to show that they are functionally

muscles as well. If, then, functionally and morphologically

they resemble the organic muscles of other animals (and

Kolliker, Oscar Schmidt, Hickel, and F. E. Schulze all

seem agreed upon this point), one sees no good reason for

withholding from them the name muscular. The specializa-

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 139

tion which converts an indifferent cell into a muscular fibre

consists simply of a limitation of its contractility to a parti-

cular direction, so that it contracts in a longitudinal and

broadens out in a transverse direction swibs irritability i is by no

means suppressed ; and, as is well known, both striated and

unstriated muscles are capable of responding to thermal,

chemical, and mechanical stimuli, quite independently of any

nervous stimulus. This being so, all muscles, both those

connected and those not connected with a nervous apparatus,

may be regarded as neuro-muscles ; and I, tor my part, do not

see what is to be gained by introducing this term into our

nomenclature ; it seems to imply that in the muscles of the

higher animals something, some property, has been lost

which was present in dhe muscles of such animals as are

without a nervous supply ; 3 while we know this not to be the

case. Of course a nerve is in avery different case ; the tissue

which has been converted into a nerve has not only gained

an enhanced irritability, but has lost all trace of contractility ;

and if we found a nerve possessing contractility we might

begin to think of coining some new term to distinguish it

from the more highly specialized tissue. The inconvenience

which would attend the recognition of muscles and “ neuro-

muscles ”’ as distinctly Mierene tissues may be illustrated by

the observation of Engelmann, who states that the Se,

third of the ureter of the rabbit contains no discoverable ner-

vous nee, and yet exhibits automatic and rhythmical

contractions *. Surely we cannot be expected to call the

muscles of this part of the ureter by a different name

from those otherwise quite similar ones of the rest of that

structure.

Whatever our opinions with regard to nomenclature may

be, the difficulty of explaining on manner in which the mus-

cular layer of our sponge receives its stimuli remains the

same}; it 1s so important a tissue of the sponge, so perfectly

differ entiated, that one can hardly believe associated nerve-

structures to ‘be absent; and yet I have not been able to dis-

cover any trace of the presence of such structures. The large

elliptical cells underlying the muscular layer and surrounding

the subcortical crypts are wonderfully like ganglionic cells;

but though they sometimes are elongated in one or other

direction into a tear- drop shape, yet they are never prolonged

into any distinct thread which might be regarded as a nerve.

They do not seem to be nerve-cells ; and perhaps they may be

“ova;” but without tracing their development it is impossible

* Foster, Text-book of Physiology, 1878, p. 83.

140 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

to say. On the whole I am disposed to regard them as the

ordinary cells of the mark rendered very distinct by their oc-

currence in a tissue of markedly contrasted character. The

spicules which extend beyond the surface of the sponge might

perhaps suffice to convey a mechanical stimulus to the mus-

cular layer, though this view is certainly attended with serious

difficulties.

2. Cortical Funnels or Chone.—As the nomenclature ot

these organs is somewhat varied, one might almost say

“ noikilitic,” a short account of the various terms in use may

not prove superfluous. Most authors have founded their

terminology on their ideas of the homology of these organs

with the intermarginal cavities of Bowerbank ; and while this

plan has its special merits it suffers from the serious draw-

back that ideas as to homology are liable to change with

advancing knowledge, the nomenclature must perforce change

with them, and changes in nomenclature are most undesirable.

Carter * abstains from committing himself and merely terms

these tubes the hourglass-shaped openings or hourglass

cavities. Bowerbank + and Oscar Schmidt} regard them as

corresponding to the intermarginal cavities of other sponges,

such as Chalina and Spongilla, though they do not say why

the “ cortical funnels’? and “ subcortical crypts”’ should not

both together be regarded as representing the intermarginal

cavities. Hiickel$ appears to share the views of Bowerbank

and Schmidt, but is anxious above all things to make it clear

that the intermarginal cavities are nothing more than modi-

fications of the ordinary ‘Astcaniile,” one of the bladders

of the “ blasenformige ” type of ‘ Astcanal”’ which has be-

come specialized; and he prefers to call them “ subdermal

cavities,’ a term synonymous with Bowerbank’s intermar-

ginal cavities. Perhaps J am wrong in thinking that the

homology of these cavities is not quite clear; but, however

this may be, and without wishing “ to ascribe any essential

significance to them whatsoever,” I still thmk they are suf-

ficiently specialized parts of the canal-system and suffici-

ently different from other subdermal cavities to deserve a

distinct name ; and as “ cortical funnel (chone) ”’ is expressive

without involving theoretical considerations, | have ventured

to make use of it. Hiickel compares the sphincters of the

funnels to the transitory sphincters which are formed by the

closing of the dermal pores and gastral ostia of some calca-

* Carter, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1869, ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 18.

+ Bowerbank, Brit. Spong. vol. i. p. 101.

{ O. Schmidt, Adriat. Spong. 11. Suppl. p. 4.

§ Hackel, Kalkschwamme, p. 236.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 141

reous sponges. That an analogy exists is indubitable; but

the sphincters of Geodia and the like are not transitory, any

more than those of the ostia of some sponges, and they are

besides composed of far more highly specialized muscle-fibres,

arranged in a much more complex layer than is the case with

the fusiform contractile cells which serve to close the dermal

pores or ostia of any sponge which I have examined.

The following table gives the equivalent terms used by

different authors, in four columns: the first gives the termi-

nology of Bowerbank, O. Schmidt, and others; the second

that of Carter and partly of Johnston ; the third of Hickel;

and the fourth that adopted here.

dA 2. 3. 4,

Pores. Apertures. Hautporen. Pores.

Distal end of in-

termarginal | Pores.

cavity.

Intermarginal

cavity.

Cortical funnel

Hour-glass cavity. Subdermal cavity. (chone)

3. The Trichites—These spicules form a layer which is

completely homologous with the layer of globates in Geodia

and the like; and we may regard the trichite sheaf itself

as homologous with the globate spicule: in the one the

trichites have a radiate arrangement, and are fused together

in a round ball; in the other they remain separate from each

other and, lying parallel one with another, form a cylindrical

bundle.

Certain structural differences distinguish the trichite-layer

from the globate, independently of differences in the spicular

elements themselves; thus in the G‘eodia-type of rind the

globules are united by ligaments of fine sarcodic (muscular ?)

filaments, while in our Stelletta the trichite sheaves are not

connected with each other by any intermediate tissue, but

simply lie loose in “ pockets” of their layer. In both the

globate and trichite layers, however, certain spherical cells

lie amidst the spicules; in the trichite layer these cells are

very similar to colourless blood-corpuscles, and possess a

nucleus with a round nucleolus ; the corresponding cells in

the globate layer are of a somewhat different character, as

will be noticed in our description of the Geodva rind.

In examining sections of the trichite layer one constantly

meets with examples like that shown in Pl. VI. fig. 16, where

the trichites remaining conjoined at one end have separated

and diverged at the other, and, dividing the sarcode of this

end between them, appear capitate with minute bead-like

particles of it.

42 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

Trichite sheaves are common in a variety of sponges, espe-

cially among the Esperiade. Oscar Schmidt * has described

the structure of those which occur in Lsperia lucifera, Sdt. ;

he, however, represents the nucleus as occurring at the side of

the sheaf, and not at the end, as shown in my drawings.

The enclosing cell-membrane is also more distinct in his

figures than I have yet seen it. Possibly his specimens

represent an earlier stage in the history of the sheaf than

mine, and the nucleus may subsequently become trans-

ferred from the side to the end of the cell. In Schmidt’s

fig. 21, which represents a mature cell, this, however, does

not appear to be the case, and we must probably fall back

on inherent differences in the spicule-sheaves of the two

sponges.

4, Foreign Particles—The congregation of foreign parti-

cles on the exterior of the sponge, and their abundant distri-

bution within it, are very striking facts, though not by any

means confined to this species or genus; as one observes the

numerous remains of organisms imbedded in the sarcode of

the mark one can scarcely refrain from regarding them, like

the wings of flies in a spider’s web, as the remnants of pre-

vious feasts. ‘The cortex is so admirably adapted for pre-

venting the entrance of foreign bodies, especially of the size

of those under consideration, that it is difficult in the extreme

to see how those within the mark can have found their way

there unless through the cooperation of the sponge itself. If

this theoretical view be the true one, then we may further

regard the forked ends of the projecting spicules as serving

not only for a means of defence, but as actual traps for cap-

turing prey and so securing a constant supply of highly pro-

teinaceous food for the sponge.

5. Classification.—Ot all the various species of the genus,

Stelletta Normani is provided with the most complete equip-

ment of spicules; and no difficulty is likely to be encountered

in its identification.

The following list of the already published species of Stel-

letta may prove useful for reference. I have not included

in it those species of Bowerbank’s Hetonema and Tethya

which may probably turn out to be Ste/letta, because I

think this genus cannot last much longer without under-

going modification, and I am anxious not to transfer Bower-

bank’s species to it till both it and they have been subjected

to revision.

* Zoologische Ergebnisse der Nordenfahrt vom 21. Juli bis 9. Sep-

tember 1872, p. 120, pl. 1. figs. 19-21.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 143

Table of the Species of Stelletta.

I. Species possessing ternate spicules with furcate rays.

S. wo Sdt. 1862, Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres, Taf. iv.

fig. 3. Syn. § 3. Wagener, Sdt.

ms Hellert, Sat. 1864, Suppl. Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres,

Taf. iu. fig. 8.

S. aspera, Carter, 1871, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,

vol. vil. pl. iv. figs. 7-13.

S. lactea, Carter, 1871, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,

vol. vii. pl. iv. figs. 17-21.

S. mucronata, Sdt. 1868, ii. Suppl. Spong. d. Adriat.

Meeres, Taf. iv. fig. 2.

S. scabra, Sdt. 1868, ui. Suppl. Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres,

Pateavetic...

S. agariciformis, Sdt., is Thenea (Gray) Wallichii (Per-

ceval Wright).

S. discophora, Sdt., and S. mammitllaris, Sdt., are probably

Geodic.

II. Species without furcated ternates, with ternate

anchor-like spicules.

S. dorsigera, Sat. 1864, Suppl. Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres,

Taf. ii. figs. 6, 7. (Doubtful whether genuine recurved

rays.)

‘S. Grubit, Sdt. 1862, Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres, Taf. iv.

fig. 2. (Rays ‘ ‘naro furcatis’ ’):

S. pachastrelloides, Carter, 1876, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

ser. 4, vol. xvii. pl. xv. fg. "40,

s pumen, Sdt. 1864, Suppl. Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres,

atm. te) 9.

III. Species without either furcate or anchor-like

ternate spicules.

S. Boglictt, Sdt. 1862, Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres, Taf. iv.

fig. 3.

18 pathologica, Sdt. 1868, i. Suppl. Spong. d. Adriat.

Meeres, Taf. ii. figs. 3, 4.

D: anceps, Sdt. 1868, i. Suppl. Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres,

p. 31.

Note.—S. ewastrum, geodina, and intermedia of Schmidt

appear to belong to Geodia. O. Schmidt * would regard as

* III. Suppl. Spong. d. Adriat. Meeres, pp. 20, 21.

144 On the Sponge~Fauna of Norway.

Geodie only those sponges which contain globates, but no

stellates, either in the rind or parenchyma; it is to be feared

that the genus Geodia would be denuded of the majority of

its species if this definition were rigidly carried out.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Puate VI.

Fig. 1. Stelletta Normani, sp.nov. <A very little larger than natural size.

(From a photograph.)

Fig. 2. Transverse section (X 2). From a photograph.

Fig. 3. Tangential section of the muscular layer, showing the arrange-

ment of its fascie : a, sphincter; 6, c, transverse section of

spicules.

Fig. 4. Robust acerate spicule.

Fig. 5. Robust simple ternate spicule.

Fig. 6. Bifurcated ternate spicule.

Fig. 7. Small simple ternate spicule.

Fig. 8. Bifurcated ternate, with a lateral spur.

Fig. 9. Slender anchor-like ternate.

Fig. 10. Slender ternate spicule, a variety with only two rays.

Fig. 11. Slender acerate spicule. Figs. 4-11 are all magnified 20

diameters.

Fig. 12. Cylindro-stellate spicule.

Fig. 13. Sharp-rayed stellate.”

Fig. 14. Trichite sheaf, mounted in Canada balsam. Figs. 12-14 are

multiplied 435 diameters.

Fig. 15. Head of anchor-like ternate (x 140).

Fig. 16, Trichite sheaf, mounted i'n glycerine, showing the divergence of

the trichites, ‘which are tipped with sarcode (x 571).

Priate VII.

Fig. 17. Fusiform corpuscle containing nucleus and nucleolus, from the

connective tissue of the cortex (x 435).

Fig. 18. Transverse section of the cortex : a, epidérmal layer, with stel-

lates; 0, trichite layer; c, muscular layer; d, subcortical erypt ;

e, ectochone ; J, layer of large granular cells Cx oy

Fig. 19, Axial thread of a muscle-fibre from teased-out tissue which

has been treated with strong nitric acid and then stained

(x 485).

Figs. 20, 20 a. Muscle-fibres isolated after treatment with lime-water by

teasing (x 435),

Fig. 21. Trichite sheaf in glycerine: a, terminal layer of sarcode, con-

taining nucleus and nucleolus (Xx 435).

Fig. 22. The frayed end of a teased-out bundle of muscle-fibre which

had been treated with chromic acid (x 435).

Fig. 23. Cells of the mark, surrounding a small canal (x 217).

Fig. 24, Wall of a large canal, showing connective tissue with fusiform

corpuscles and scattered stellates on the exterior, and granular

cells further in (xX 217).

Fig. 25, Transverse section of a bundle of muscle-fibre (x 315).

Fig. 26. Granular ceils, with nucleus and nucleolus, from the lower face

of the muscular layer (x 485).

[To be continued. }

On the Australian Maioid Brachyura. 145

XII.—WNotes on the Australian Maioid Brachyura.

By Witu1AM A. Haswe tt, M.A., B.Sc. Edinb.

I HAVE been recently engaged in the study of the Brachyura

Oxyrhyncha of the Australian coast, and, as a great deal that

is new has been met with, and also a good many facts in-

teresting from the point of view of geographical distribution,

a summary of the results may be of sufficient interest to be

given here.

Taking into account the comparatively unexplored condition

of many parts of the coast of Australia (particularly the western

and north-western coasts and the south coast of Tasmania),

the total number of known species belonging to this group of

Brachyura (nearly sixty in all) is unexpectedly large. Aus-

tralia, however, cannot, as regards its marine zoology, be

regarded as a single region. ‘The affinities borne by the

northern coast of the continent to the southern, as regards

their prevailing types of marine life, are much less close than

those which either of these provinces bears to regions much

more remote, or at least separated from it by deep sea.

Taking those two faunas, the northern and the southern,

separately, we find that there is in each a considerable com-

mingling of the peculiarities exhibited by various other widely

separated zoological provinces. Thus the southern fauna

unites to its own peculiar forms some of the characteristics of

New Zealand, of Japan, and, indirectly, of Europe; while the

northern is very nearly related to that of the Philippines,

Borneo, New Caledonia, and other islands of Melanesia, and,

more remotely, to that of the Indian Ocean and Red Sea.

It is noteworthy that by far the greater number of the

species characteristic of the northern region belong to the

families Periceridee and Parthenopidee, while the southern

species belong almost exclusively to the Inachidez and Maiide.

As regards the species of Inachidee, one of the most striking

facts is the occurrence of three species of Stenorhynchus (S.

eurvirostris, A. Milne-Edwards, S. brevirostris and 9. fissi-

Jrons, mihi), a genus of very wide distribution, though till

quite recently regarded as peculiar to the northern hemisphere:

one of these (S. fissifrons) occurs also in New Zealand; 8.

eurvirostris has only been found in Bass’s Straits; while the

third species (S. brevirostris) ranges from Port Jackson at

least as far north as Port Denison. A peculiar form belong-

ing to this family is Gonaterhynchus tumidus, mihi, found in

Port Jackson. It has the carapace subtriangular, rounded

behind, the surface finely granulated, covered with hooked

hairs, with a few minute spines on the lateral margins, and

146 On the Australian Maioid Brachyura.

various irregular smooth elevations on the dorsal surface; the

rostrum is well developed and slightly deflexed, with tri-

angular-fronted cornua; the eyes are non-retractile; and the

orbit is protected above and behind by two converging spines,

which are separated from one another and from the upper

orbital margin by wide fissures; the epistome is transverse ;

the external maxillipedes have the third joint expanded at its

external angle; the anterior limbs (in the male) resemble

those of Paramithrax; and the ambulatory limbs are of mo-

derate length, covered with slender hairs above, and have the

terminal joint hooked at the apex.

The genus Acheus is represented by at least one species

(A. breviceps, mihi), found in Port Jackson; and a species of

Oncinopus (O. angulatus, mihi) occurs beth in Port Jackson

and in the far north. The genus Halimus is highly charac-

teristic of Australia in its temperate portion, at least four

species occurring on the coast of New South Wales and 'Tas-

mania, viz. H. tumidus, Dana, H. spinosus, Hess (LH. trunca-

tipes, Miers?), H. levis, mihi, and H. (Microhalimus) defleai-

frons, mihi. The last is distinguished from the ordinary

Halimi by its small size and the absence of conspicuous spines

on the lateral borders of the carapace. Other species of

Inachide observed in Australia are Camposcia retusa, Latr.,

Xenocarcinus tuberculatus, White, X. depressus, Miers, Huenia

proteus, De Haan, #. bifurcata, Streets, and Menethius mono-

ceros, Latr.

Among the Maiide one of the most noteworthy forms is a

species from Torres Straits, which I have named Chlorinoides

tenutrostris, distinguished from the genus (Pseudochlorinus ?)

represented by Chlorinus aculeatus, Milne-Kdwards, C. longi-

spina, De Haan, and C. acanthonotus, Adams and White, by

the presence of a spine on the basal joint of the antennz and

the greater relative length and slenderness of the ambulatory

limbs. ‘

Egeria Herbstii, Milne-Edwards, and E. arachnoides,

Rumph., seem to replace, in Torres Straits and on the eastern

coast of Queensland, the Stenorhynchi and Achei of the

temperate zone, and are associated with Chlorolibinia gra-

cilipes, Miers, a species originally obtained by H.M.S.

‘Herald’ from the New-Guinea coast.

The genus Paramithrax (including Leptomithrax) is repre-

sented by five species, all seemingly confined to the temperate

zone; these are P. barbicornis, Latr., P. sternocostulatus,

Milne-Edwards, P. Peronii, Milne-EXdwards, Leptomithrax

australiensis, Miers, and L. spinulosus, mihi.

Among the other species of this family inhabiting the Aus-

On a new Genus of Heteromerous Coleoptera. 147

cralian coast may be mentioned Micippoides longimanus, mihi,

Schizophrys aspera, White, Cyclomaia margaritata, Stimpson,

Hyastenus oryx, A. Milne-Edwards, Mictppa parvirostris,

Miers, M. spatulifrons, A. Milne-Kdwards, M. superciliosa

and AM. ¢nermis, mihi, and Paramicippa spinosa, Stimpson.

Among the Periceride the only genus represented is Tva-

rinia, of which there occur three species, all confined to the

tropics.

The family Parthenopide, on the other hand, is very abun-

dant in genera and species, by far the greater number of

which are confined (so far, at. least, as at present known) to

tropical seas. Of the genus Lambrus (including Parthenope),

there are no fewer than nine species; these are :—L. longi-

manus, Milne-Edwards ; L. turriger, L. hoplonotus, L. harpaz,

and L. calappoides, Adams and White; ZL. nodosus, Lucas ;

L. affinis, A. Milne-Edwards; L. spinifer and L. Sandrockit,

mihi. There are two species of Cryptopodia (C. fornicata,

Fabr., and C. spatulifrons, Miers), one of Zebrida (Z. longi-

spina, mihi), two of Gonatonotus (G. pentagonus, Adams and

White, and G. crassimanus, mihi), and one of Harrovia (H.

tuberculata, mihi).

Sydney, Dec. 3, 1879.

XUI.—Description of a new Genus and Species of Hetero-

merous Coleoptera. By CHARLES O, WATERHOUSE.

On two or three occasions I have had brought to me for de-

termination a small heteromerous beetle which appears to be

always associated with grain of some kind, especially rice. The

species appears to be not uncommon ; but I have been unable

to find any description of it. Specimens of the species have

been in the British-Museum collection for many years, but

without any name; and I have been unwilling to describe it,

from the fact of its being widely distributed and therefore

likely to have been in the hands of continental authors.

Having again made an unsuccessful attempt to determine it,

and being informed by Mr. F. Bates that he has it in his col-

lection noted as a new genus, I now venture to name it as

follows :—

Ulomide2.

LATHETICUS, n. gen.

General form of Zribolium. Mentum transverse, the an-

terior angles rounded, the front margin gently emarginate in

the middle, the ligula not much projecting, transverse, emar-

148 On a new Genus of Heteromerous Coleoptera.

ginate in the middle; the labial palpi short, the apical joint

very large, one third longer than broad, subparallel (but nar-

rowed at the base), truncate at the apex. ‘The inner lobe of

the maxille terminating in a very slender, acute hook, with a

broad fringe within; the outer lobe slender, terminating with

eurved stiff hairs; the palpi stout, the penultimate joint sub-

quadrate, the apical joint about twice and a half as long

as broad, cylindrical, narrowed at the apex. Labrum ex-

tremely short. Hpistoma trapeziform, emarginate anteriorly ;

the ocular canthus not projecting laterally beyond the eyes.

Eyes moderately prominent, very coarsely granular. An-

tenne nearly as long as the head; the two basal joints not

visible from above; the 3rd joint the narrowest, about as

long as broad; the 4th, 5th, and 6th joints transverse, each a

trifle broader than the preceding; the 7th joint distinctly

larger than the 6th; the 8th the largest (still transverse),

the 9th and 10th a little narrower than the 8th; the 11th still

narrower, somewhat flattened, obliquely truncate at its apex.

The rest as in Zribolium.

Latheticus oryz@, n. sp.

Parallelus, depressus, nitidus, piceo-flavus, thorace sat crebre evi-

denter punctato, elytris irregulariter punctato-striatis.

Long. 23-2? millim.

General form of Tribolium ferrugineum, F., but rather nar-

rower, and with the head relatively larger and broader and

more square in general outline. Forehead and middle of the

epistoma gently convex; the former not very thickly but very

distinctly punctured; the epistoma less distinctly punctured,

about twice as broad as long, obliquely (but not much) nar-

rowed anteriorly, declivous in front, impressed at the sides,

emarginate in front; the ocular canthus not much encroach-

ing upon the eyes. Antenne rather short, thickest at the

eighth joint, so that their general outline is somewhat fusi- _

form. ‘Thorax very little broader than the head across the

eyes, a little narrower behind; very distinctly but not very

thickly punctured; the angles obtuse; the sides somewhat

straight, very finely margined. Elytra as wide as the broadest

part of the thorax, parallel, their surface somewhat uneven or

wrinkled; each elytron with four or five scarcely impressed

lines, with somewhat large punctures, the lines somewhat

irregular, or here and there interrupted. Legs rather slender.

Hab. Calcutta, “in rice” (Brit. Mus.); Arabia (Ff. Bates).

Mr. A. Fitch has shown me specimens of this species found

in England. Mr. G. C. Champion has examples found in

rice; but I do not know where they came from.

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 149

XIV.—On new British Graptolites.

By CuHarves Lapworth, F.G.S8. &c.

[Plates IV. & V.j

WITHIN the last few years many new forms of British Grap-

tolites have been added to my collection. In the present

paper [ propose to give brief diagnoses of such of these unde-

scribed forms as I find it necessary to refer to in the conclu-

ding portion of my memoir on the Geological Distribution of

the Rhabdophora*. At the same time it will be advisable to

make such notes and observations upon the less perfectly

understood species among those already described by paleon-

tologists as may serve to bring our knowledge of these

forms up to date. Such species as have mainly a classifica-

tory or zoological value will be here passed over. Those

forms alone will be noticed which are of interest from a strati-

graphical or geological point of view—as indices of recog-

nizable horizons in the vertical series of rock-formations, or

as being remarkable for their extended geographical distri-

bution.

The majority of the forms under review are from my own

collection. One was sent me by Dr. Callaway several years

ago. ‘Iwo were collected by Mr. John Hopkinson, F.G.§.,

in the Lower Ludlow rocks of Siluria, in 1873, and were

named by him at the same timet, but have hitherto remained

unfigured and undescribed. ‘The remaining species have been

collected by myself at various times from the Lower Paleozoic

rocks of Scotland, the Lake District, Wales, and the west of

England.

Family Monograptide.

1, Monograptus leintwardinensis, Hopk. MS.

(PL IV. figs. La-1d.)

Monograptus leintwardinensis, Hopkinson, Geological Magazine, 1873,

p. 520, 1875, p. 561.

Polypary short and stout, never exceeding half an inch in

length, with a maximum diameter of one twelfth of an inch.

Virgula distally prolonged. Hydrothece inclined at an angle of

about 40°, overlapping each other for half their length, short and

tubular; free portion of each short, impressed proximally with a

deep excavation, the upper sinus of which is prolonged into a

* Ann. Mag. & Nat. Hist. 1879, 1880.

+ Hopkinson, Geological Magazine, 1873, pp. 519, 520.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 11

150 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites,

distinct and more or less flexuous horizontal spine ; apertural

margin short, concave, oblique, and destitute of ornamen-

tation.

This peculiar little species is recognizable at a glance by

its form and diminutive size, and more especially by the

remarkable ventral spine, which does not originate from the

denticle of the apertural margin (as is generally the case with

this ornament), but proceeds from the upper angle of a deep

excavation in the ventral margin of the theca, as in Mono-

graptus vomerinus, Nich. ‘This spine, although very slender,

is always conspicuous, proceeding outwards to a distance

occasionally equal to that of the entire width of the poly-

pary itself. It appears to have been somewhat flexible; for

no two consecutive spines lie precisely at the same angle

of inclination. ‘The distal prolongation of the virgula is

general in this species ; it rarely exceeds in length the poly-

pary itself.

Horizon and Locality. Monograptus leintwardinensis oc-

curs in great abundance in the Lower Ludlow rocks of Leint-

wardine (Hopk.), and in the same general horizon near

Presteign, New Radnor, Ludlow, Buttington, &c.

2. Monograptus Salweyi, Hopk. MS.

(Pl. IV. figs. 2 a, 2:6.)

Monograptus Salweyi, Hopkinson, Geol. Magazine, 18738, p. 520.

Polypary straight, rigid, of unknown length, having a

general diameter of one twelfth of an inch, exclusive of the

extension of the apertural spines. Virgula stout, distally

prolonged. Hydrothecz twenty-five to the inch, inclined at

an angle of about 45°, straight, narrow, tubular, overlapping

each other for four fifths of their length; free portion slightly

expanded, with subvertical apertural margin furnished dis-

tally with a stout and rigid horizontal spine.

Only a single and fragmentary example of this form has

been detected; but its characters are so unique that there can

be no hesitation in assigning it a distinct specific title. The

distal portion of the polypary only is preserved to us; and as

there is no appearance of proximal contraction, it is impossible

to speculate upon the total length. The most remarkable

peculiarity of this species is afforded by the anomalous features

of the apertural margin of the theca. The plane of the aper-

ture appears to lie almost parallel with the ventral edge of

the polypary, or but very slightly oblique; its inferior or

proximal sinus is marked by a minute denticle, never very

conspicuous. The edge of the aperture itself is concave and

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 151

somewhat patulous. From a point which, in the profile

view, appears to be a little above the central point of its

lateral aspect the apertural edge is prolonged into a stout

and stiff horizontal spine, about one twelfth of an inch in

length.

Horizon and Locality. Lower Ludlow rocks of Stanner

Hall, near Ludlow (collected by John Hopkinson, Esq.,

EG.S.).

3. Monograptus Remert, Barrande.

(Pl. LV. figs. 5 a-5e.)

Monograptus Remert, Hopkinson, loc. cit. supra.

Polypary short, stout, straight, and rigid, from half an

inch to an inch in length, rapidly expanding from a blunted

proximal extremity to a maximum diameter of one eighth of

aninch. Virgula invisible. Hydrothece thirty to the inch,

inclined at an angle of ‘from 30° to 45°, long narrow tubes,

overlapping each other for about four fifths of their length,

and having a very oblique, slightly contracted and everted

aperture, destitute of visible ornamentation. :

Few examples of this species collected by myself or others

exceed one inch in length; and the vast majority are under

half aninch. The larger examples have their margins parallel

in the distal moiety of their length. In the smaller examples

the polypary is widest near its distal extremity. The proxi-

mal end is bluntly rounded, rarely pointed, and the first formed

thece arespinose. ‘The normal hydrothece are rounded tubes,

about one eighth of an inch in length, overlapping each other

throughout, except in the neighbourhood of the aperture. In

well-preserved examples, and in the true profile view, the

apertural margin is at right angles with the axis of the theca.

It varies much, however, in its degree of obliquity, according

to the slight variations in the direction of compression. There

is a distinct appearance of contraction below the aperture in

specimens in relief. The orifice itself is a little patulous, so

that the lower margin appears denticulate in certain views

(fig. 5).

This is certainly the British representative of Barrande’s

Monograptus Remert of the Bohemian rocks; but whether it

can properly be referred to that species is open to question.

Tt has not hitherto been described from British strata.

Horizon and Locality. Lower Ludlow rocks of Adferton

(Hereford) (Mr. Hopkinson), Lower Ludlow of Builth (Prof.

Nicholson), Lower Ludlow of New Radnor and Presteign.:

152 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

4. Monograptus colonus, Barr.

(Pl. IV. figs. 3 a—3 ¢, and figs. 4a, 46.)

Monograptus colonus, Barr. Graptolites de Bohéme, pl. ii. figs. 1,

2,3; Nicholson, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxiv. pl. xx. figs. 9,

10, 11.

In Plate IV. figs. 3a-3c¢ I figure some examples of a

peculiar species of Graptolite, which is the only British form

known to me which distinctly approximates in its superficial

characteristics to the typical Monograptus colonus of Barrande

(Grapt. de Bohéme, pl. 1. fig. 1). It agrees very closely

with some Bohemian forms referred to Barrande’s species

examined by myself, but rarely exceeds the length given in

the specimens figured. The marginal spines appear to be

merely a mucronate extension of the apertural denticle, as in

the Dichograptide. They are very distinct from the hori-

zontal thecal processes exhibited by such forms as Mono-

graptus leintwardinensis, &c.

Barrande’s young example (loc. c7t. fig. 5) must belong to

a distinct species. It is not unlike the young form of M.

basilicus, Lapw., or, as I have elsewhere suggested *, may be

identical with Suess’s Monograptus dubius.

I know of no example of the present form, either British or

Bohemian, in which the virgula is not greatly prolonged dis-

tally. This invariable feature, together with the characteristics

of the closely-set hydrothece, distinguish it at a glance from

all its congeners.

Horizon and Locality. Not uncommon in the Lower Lud-

low beds of Vinnal and Leintwardine, Herefordshire.

5. Monograptus galaensis, Lapw., var. basilicus, nov.

(PL. IV. figs. 6 a-6 d.)

Monograptus colonus, Lapworth, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1880, vol. v.

pp. 59, 60,

Polypary stout and straight, several inches in length,

slowly augmenting in diameter to a maximum width of one

eighth of an inch. Hydrothece sixteen to twenty to the inch,

inclined at an angle of about 45°, with convex proximal walls

overlapping each other for less than three fourths of their

length ; narrowing rapidly in the direction of the aperture,

the margin of which is concave, very oblique, and destitute

of ornamentation.

The proximal portion of the polypary augments its dia-

meter very slowly, a length of several inches being attained

* Lapworth, “Scottish Monograptide,”’ Geol. Mag. 1876, p. 506.

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 153

before the fossil reaches its normal breadth. The hydrothece

upon this younger portion agree in their general features with

those upon the adult parts of the polypary, except that in

certain views the apertural margin appears to be proportion-

ally wider. When fully developed they are seen to be flat-

tened tubes, which, in the profile view, are more than twice

as wide at their point of origin as at their distal termination.

The proximal wall of each is bent with an elegant convex

curve, and is in contact with the distal wall of the preceding

theca for about two thirds of its longitudinal extent. The

apertural margin is at right angles to the axis of the hydro-

thece; it is sharply denticulate at its outer extremity, but

never appears to be prolonged into a distinct marginal spine.

The cast of the polypary (fig. 6a) is identical with that of

Monograptus vomerinus, Nich. In young forms it is narrower,

and there is a distal prolongation of the virgula, occasionally

equal in extent to that of the polypary itself. The test is

smooth and of remarkable thickness.

This form appears to stand midway between the typical

form of MM. galaensis, Lapw., and M. colonus, Barr. From

the former it is separated by the much greater size and thick-

ness of the polypary, the angle of inclination and amount of

overlap of the theca, and by the prolongation of the virgula

in young examples. From the latter it is distinguished by

the far greater length of the polypary, by the fewer hydro-

theces upon the same longitudinal extent, and by the form

of the apertural portion of the theca and the absence of

ornament.

Horizon and Locality. Common and well preserved in the

zones of Cyrtograptus Murchisont, Carr., and C. Linnarssoni,

Lapw. (Wenlock), at Wellfield, Builth, river Onny, &c.

6. Monograptus crenularis, sp. nov.

(Pl. IV. figs. 10 a-10 e.)

Polypary of great length, rigid, slightly curved throughout

the whole of its extent; average width one sixteenth of an

inch. Hydrothece arranged on the convex margin of the

polypary, twenty to twenty-two to the inch, inclined at an

angle of about 15° to the axis of the polypary, long narrow

tubes, overlapping each other for less than half their length,

slightly diminishing in diameter in the direction of the aper-

ture, the margin of which is somewhat oblique, deeply con-

cave and inornate.

The polypary in this species attains a total length of at

least eight inches. It is almost straight throughout ; the very

154 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

slight convexity of the proximal extremity is precisely similar

to that in the adult portions. The width of the entire poly-

pary, except near its initial extremity, is constant; but the

leneth of the slowly tapering portion is occasionally as much

as three or four inches.

In specimens preserved with their full relief the hydrothece

are seen to be a little wider at their point of origin than near

their outer orifice; and the general aspect of the polypary

under this aspect reminds us somewhat of those of the group

typified by J. colonus, Barr. In casts and compressed ex-

amples the distal portion of the theca appears as a wide perpen-

dicular tube, lying parallel to the axis of the polypary, and

occupying about one third ofits total diameter. In these speci-

mens the apertural margin is deeply concave, is very slightly

oblique, and shows a rudimentary denticle.

This species is allied, on the one hand, to JJonograptus

leptotheca, Lapw., and, on the other, to MZ. galaensis, Lapw.

It differs from the former in the shape and amount of overlap

of the hydrothece. In the proximal portion of M. crenularts

the hydrothece are twice as numerous for the same distance

as in that of JV. leptotheca; in the adult portion of the latter

species they are more than twice as long as in the species

under description. From J. galaensis the present form is

separated by the form of the distal portion of the hydrotheca,

which in the former species is strongly denticulate.

Horizon and Locality. Birkhill Shales. Zone of Cephalo-

graptus cometa at Dobbs Linn, Crosscleuch, &e.

In the Upper Llandovery, Wenlock, and Lower Ludlow

formations of Britain occur at least four doubtfully distinct,

closely allied forms of Monograptus, which seem to repre-

sent the Bohemian species JMonograptus Halli of Barrande.

They all agree in the general shape of the hydrotheca, which

is tubular, of subequal diameter throughout the whole of its

extent, with a more or less expanded and everted aperture,

the outer margin of which is broadly convex and frequently

spinose. ‘They differ from each other mainly in the size of

the polypary, the number and amount of overlap of the hydro-

thece, &c. ‘They are all easily distinguished from the type

form of Barrande’s M. Halli (see Pl. IV. fig. 9a) by the

inclination and form of the hydrothece. The first of these

British forms seems to be peculiar to the Llandovery ; the

second and third are Wenlock forms, while the fourth

doubtfully transgresses the limits of the Lower Ludlow.

Their individual peculiarities are given in the following

diagnoses.

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 155

7. Monograptus crassus, Lapw., sp. nov.

(Pl. IV. fig. 8 6.)

Monograptus Halli, Barr., Carruthers, Geological Magazine, vol. v. ;

_ Lapworth, ibid. vol. iii. (1876), pl. xiii. figs. 1 a-1 d, &e.

Polypary straight, one tenth to one eighth of an inch in

diameter. Hydrothece eighteen to twenty to the inch, short

and stout slightly overlapping tubes, half as long again as

broad, furnished with distinct horizontal spines.

I have hitherto followed Mr. Carruthers in his reference of

this form to Monograptus Halli, Barr.; but there can be no

question of its distinctness from Barrande’s typical form, in

which the hydrothece are very differently formed (comp.

fig. 9 a.)

Horizon and Locality. Common in the highest beds of the

Birkhill shales everywhere in South Scotland.

8. Monograptus riccartonensis, Lapw.

(Pl. IV. fig. 8c.)

Monograptus riccartonensis, Lapworth, Geological Magazine, vol. for

1876, pl. xiii. figs. 2 a-2 e.

Polypary never exceeding one twelfth of an inch in trans-

verse diameter, proximal portion slightly recurved. Hydro-

thecee twenty-four to twenty-eight to the inch, free, with

direct walls, everted aperture, ornamented with a long and

oblique spine.

A narrow species, with distant free hydrothecee. Salter’s

species M. Flemingii was probably founded in part upon this

form, partly upon the following species. They are both pre-

sent in Salter’s original locality of Kirkcudbright, the present

form “in great plenty,” while the next species is compara-

tively rare.

Horizon and Locality. Very numerous in the Wenlock

strata of Riccarton and Kirkcudbright, rare in the Coniston

Flags of Westmoreland, and in the Llandovery strata of Tieve-

shilly, county Down, Ireland.

9. Monograptus Flemingit, Salter.

Monograptus Flemingu, Salter, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. viii.

pl. xxi. figs. 5,6, 7; Lapworth, Geological Magazine, 1876, pl. xx.

fie. 8, a-d,

Polypary straight, one tenth to one eighth of an inch in

diameter. Hydrothece twenty to thirty-six to the inch, over-

lapping each other for more than half their length, from three

to four times as long as wide, with slightly curved separating

walls, and greatly expanded apertural margin, which in com-

156 =Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

pressed specimens originates a long oblique and acuminate

denticle, occasionally prolonged into a short spine.

Compressed examples of this form admit of immediate

identification, as the distal portions of the theca form a series

of broad acutely triangular denticles running down the ven-

tral edge of the polypary, directed towards its proximal extre-

mity and projecting outwards to a distance equal to at least

one third of the diameter of the polypary itself.

Specimens from different localities vary greatly in the

number of hydrothecee upon the same longitudinal extent.

The thecal walls are of the form of those of Monograptus

priodon, Bronn. In young examples the polypary is short

and stout, augmenting its original diameter with great rapidity,

with closely approximated hydrothece.

This form may be distinguished at a glance from M. riccar-

tonensis. It is more intimately allied to M. crassus, from

which it differs principally in the form of the thecal walls,

the greater eversion and denticulation of the apertural margin,

and in the more closely set and overlapping hydrothece.

Horizon and Locality. Rare in the Riccarton beds of Rox-

burgh and Kirkcudbright, and in the Wenlock shales of

Siluria ; common in the Coniston Flags of Westmoreland.

10. Monograptus M‘ Coyt, Lapw.

Monograptus M‘Coyi, Lapworth, Graptolites of County Down, Trans.

Belfast Nat. Field-Club, 1876-7, pl. vi. fig. 2, p. 180,

A diagnosis and figure of this form are given by M‘Coy, in

his ‘ Paleozoic Rocks and Fossils,’ under the title of Graptolites

latus*. Itis not unlikely that it may eventually be shown

to be the species upon which Murchison founded his Grapto-

lites ludensis, in which case the more recent title must be

suppressed. In the adult form of the polypary the hydrothece

are from four to five times as long as wide, and the denticle

is short and destitute of ornamentation.

Horizon and Locality. Kixamples, apparently of this species,

from the Lower Ludlow rocks of Siluria are preserved in the

Ludlow Museum. M‘Coy’s original example was procured

from the Wenlock (?) of Builth Bridge.

11. Monograptus Hisingert, Carr., var. nudus, var. nov.

(PL AY. dig. Tas b.¢,)

Monograptus Hisingert, Lapworth, Geological Magazine, 1876, pl. xii.

figs. 1 a-le, &e.

This form has been already so minutely described (loc. cit.

* M‘Coy, Paleozoic Rocks and Fossils, pl. 1 B. fig. 7.

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 157

supra) as to preclude any extended notice in this place. I

formerly regarded it as the type form of Hisinger’s Graptolithus

sagittarius. 'The Swedish form to which Hisinger erroneously

applied this title proves to be identical with my var. jaculum.

The two forms united by myself under Carruthers’s title are

very distinct, the younger form differing from the older not

only in the angle of inclination and the form and amount of

overlap of the hydrothece, but also in the curvature and the

greater diameter of the polypary. It may eventually be

shown that they are distinct species. Meanwhile the younger

form may conveniently be distinguished as var. nudus.

Horizon and Locality. M. Hisingeri, Carr., var. nudus, is

rare in the Gala group and in the Grieston shales and Riccar-

ton beds of the south of Scotland, the Tieveshilly beds of

county Down, and the highest zone of the Coniston mud-

stones of Westmoreland.

12. Monograptus Salter’, Lapworth (non Geinitz).

Monograptus Saltert (Gein.), Lapworth, Geological Magazine, 1876,

pl. x. fig. 8, a, b.

The fragmentary Graptolites for which Prof. Geinitz sug-

gested this specific title (‘ Die Graptolithen,’ s. 36), were col-

lected by Mr. Salter from the rocks of Piedmont Glen, near

Girvan (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 173), and were

originally referred by him to Monograptus tenuis (Portlock).

I have recently ascertained that the whole of the strata visible

in Piedmont Glen are of Bala age, and therefore of a geolo-

gical date anterior to that of the advent of the family of the

Monograptide. Forms of Leptograptide are rare in the

rocks of the glen; and these, and not true Monograptide,

were almost certainly the enigmatical examples noticed by

Salter. Some well-preserved but fragmentary Leptograptide

from the typical locality of Piedmont Glen, near Girvan,

occur in the Hugh-Miller collection, preserved in the

Museum of Science and Art, Edinburgh. They are labelled

“ Graptolites tenuis, Portlk.,” and may have been the origi-

nal specimens figured by Salter himself. The variation in

the curvature of the figured specimens pointed out by my-

self is thus naturally accounted for—the Leptograptide being

excessively slender and flexuous, varying greatly in the

amount and the direction of their curvature under the most

trivial extraneous influences, while among the Monograptide

the curvature of the polypary is so constant in character

and direction that it may be safely regarded as a specific

peculiarity.

It is thus certain that the Graptolite to which I applied the

158 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

title M. Salteri cannot be identical with that for which the

name was originally proposed by Prof. Geinitz. The name,

however, is a convenient one. I propose, therefore, to retain

it for the form to which it was originally applied by myself.

Horizon and Locality. M. Salteri, Lapw., is a very rare

form, occurring in fragments in the Llandovery strata ot Gala

and Girvan, South Scotland.

13. Cyrtograptus Linnarssont, sp. nov.

(Pl. LV. figs. 12 a, 12 6.)

Polypary unilateral, compound, monoprionidian. Principal

branch long, slender, and elegantly recurved, originating

similar simple (or compound?) secondary branches at very

distant intervals. Hydrothecee twenty to twenty-five to the

inch, adnate in contact only, proximally subtriangular, mucro-

nate; distally tubular, with slightly expanded and more or

less everted denticulate apertural margin.

The branches of this species are about one twentieth of an

inch in transverse diameter, if we include the projection of the

hydrothece ; and they all exhibit the elegant convex curvature

characteristic of the genus. ‘They remain of the same general

diameter of one twentieth of an inch throughout their whole

extent, which, in the longest specimens in my collection, is

about 3 inches.

The first branch is given off invariably between the fifth

and sixth hydrothece, counting from the sicula, the second

branch about half an inch beyond. Both imitate the main

branch in the direction and amount of their curvature.

The hydrothece on the proximal portion of the main branch

remind one at first glance of those significant of the Mono-

graptide typified by Monograptus Sedgwickit (Portlk.). In

reality, however, they are of the same general type as those

in the main body of the fossil; they are tubular and adnate,

but have their expanded distal extremities abnormally everted

and produced.

The hydrothecee on the branches and the distal portion of

the main stem are narrow tubes, inclined at a very steep

angle to the axis of the polypary, and very slightly, if at all,

expanding towards the aperture. Their distal extremity,

however, is very suddenly expanded immediately at the aper-

ture, which is distinctly everted, so that the apertural margin

makes more than a right angle with the axis of the branch. The

resultant denticle is very acute, and is occasionally prolonged

into a minute spine directed obliquely. The sudden distal ex-

pansion of the theca gives an appearance of constriction below

the denticle which is very characteristic.

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 159

Cyrtograptus Linnarssoni differs from C. Murchisoni, Carr.,

in the greater tenuity of the branches, in their much rarer

subdivision, and most especially in the form and proportions

of the adult hydrothecw. Baily’s figure of his Didymo-

graptus (Cyrtograptus) hamatus reminds us of the young of

the present species ; but in his form there are at least eight

proximal hydrothecw, while the distal hydrothece are of the

type of those of M. Nilsson?, Barr., and more like those of

Cyrtograptus Carruthersi, Lapw.

I name this well-marked species after Mr. G. Linnarsson,

the eminent paleontologist to the Swedish survey, to whom

all paleontologists owe a debt of gratitude for his minute and

accurate memoirs on Swedish paleontology.

Horizon and Locality. Cyrtograptus Linnarssont is met

with in some abundance in the Wenlock shales of the neigh-

bourhood of Builth, Radnorshire. I have collected a few

fragments in the Wenlock shales of Presteign and the vale

of the Onny, above Horderly, Shropshire.

Family Leptograptide.

14. Azygograptus celebs, sp. nov.

(Pl. V. figs. 16 a-16c.)

Polypary unilateral, monoprionidian, consisting of a single,

simple and very slender, slightly recurved stem a few inches

in length, proceeding from the major extremity of a well-

marked sicula. Hydrotheces twenty-five to the inch, in

contact only, expanding slightly in the direction of the

aperture, which is acute, straight, and facing slightly in-

wards ; outer margin slightly convex; denticle blunt, a little

everted.

This species is known to me only in the form of afew frag-

ments from the Upper Skiddaw slates of Ellergill, Cumber-

land, where it was collected by myself in 1874. One example

only shows the sicular extremity ; but this is beautifully pre-

served and exhibits the generic and specifie characteristics of

the form most distinctly. The longest fragment is about

two inches in length. In the sicular fragment the hydro-

thecee, which are preserved as casts, distinctly overlap each

other for a very short distance. In the compressed examples

they appear to be wholly free, and have the general character-:

istics of those of Leptograptus and its allies. They expand

more rapidly in the direction of the aperture than in Lepto-

graptus; but this is a feature which Azygograptus shares

with Canograptus and, indeed, all the earlier forms of the:

Leptograptide. ‘here is some evidence of the usual faint

160 = Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

excavation opposite the thecal aperture ; but it is hardly to be

detected under the microscope. The apertural margin wants

the concavity invariably seen in the Dichograptide, and is

either straight or somewhat convex.

Horizon and Locality. Upper Skiddaw slates of Ellergill,

Cumberland.

Family Dicranograptide.

15. Dicellograptus complanatus, sp. nov.

(Pl. V. figs. 17 a-17 c.)

Branches of polypary usually straight, diverging from each

other at a wide angle; proximal portion short and straight,

with a well-marked radicle and a rudimentary axillary spine.

Hydrothece twenty to the inch, about as long as the width of

the polypary, of equal diameter throughout; apertures per-

pendicular to the axis of the theca, slightly concave, opening

within a shallow well-marked excavation.

The branches of the polypary have a width of about one

fortieth of an inch at their origin, and gradually augment

their diameter till a breadth of one twentieth of an inch is

attained. They are of great length and generally straight.

Occasionally, however, they bend slightly outwards through-

out the whole of their extent.

The axillary portion of the polypary is formed by the sicula

and the two primary hydrothece. It is about one twelfth of

an inch in extent, and a little rounded proximally. A well-

marked radicle is invariably present, but no distinct lateral

spines; and the axillary prolongation of the sicula is short

and blunt, and not always visible.

The branches diverge from the axil at an angle of from 90°

to 120°.

The hydrothece are precisely similar to those in the genus

Climacograptus (Hall). They are short rounded tubes, with-

out overlap, placed parallel with the axis of the polypary.

No portion of the length of the theca is isolated ; nor is there

any distinct appearance of the distal introversion so character-

istic of Dicellograptus elegans (Carr.) and its allies. The aper-

ture opens interior to the ventral margin of the branch, perpen-

dicular to its general direction, within a small excavation

in the base of the succeeding hydrotheca.

The nearest ally of the present species is D¢cellograptus

Forchhammert, Geinitz, which differs from it in the character-

istics of its axillary portion, and in the striking introversion of

the distal extremity of the theca.

Mr, C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 161

Dicellograptus complanatus appears to be confined to a

single horizon in the Moffat series. It occurs in extraor-

dinary abundance in a thin seam of dark shales near the base

ot the “ Barren mudstone”’ of the Upper Hartfell shales at

Dobb’s Linn, Moory Syke, &c. It is met with upon the same

horizon near Portpatrick, and swarms abundantly in the cor-

responding zone in the Hartfell shales of county Down

(Swanston), and in the equivalent Myoch-Bay beds of the

Bala rocks of the neighbourhood of Girvan.

16. Dicellograptus intortus, sp. nov.

(Pl. V. figs. 19 a-19 c.)

Branches of polypary slender and gently curved, diverging

from each other at a very small angle. Axil pointed, pro-

vided with a strong radicle, but destitute of both sicular and

lateral spines. Hydrothece twenty-four to twenty-eight to

the inch, free for one third to one half their length ; free por-

tion strongly introverted, opening within a deep and very

oblique excavation.

The branches of the polypary in this species rarely exceed

one fortieth of an inch in average diameter; they diverge

from each other at an original angle of about 30°, and gradu-

ally curve round in such a manner as to become first parallel,

then crossing. The point where they cross each other lies

generally within an inch or an inch and a half from the

initial extremity of the polypary. Many examples, however,

show no tendency to a crossing of the branches, but retain

their original angle of divergence throughout the whole of

their extent, which rarely surpasses three inches.

The axil in this form is narrower than in any other species

of Dicellograptus yet described. There is no trace of a sicular

spine, and very rarely of lateral spurs. A well-marked radicle

is invariably present.

The hydrothece are of the general type of those in Dicello-

graptus elegans (Carr.). They are short and stout, and the

free portion is strongly introverted. ‘I'he excavation is rarely

discernible, being so completely filled by the introverted

theca, that even on the best-preserved examples it is only

visible as a very oblique slit traversing a large fraction of the

width of the polypary.

This species has some little resemblance to Dicellograptus

caduceus, Lapw., in its general appearance. ‘The form of the

axil and its ornaments and the characteristics of the hydro-

thece, however, are very distinctive.

Horizon and Locality. Dicellograptus intortus occurs in

162 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

abundance in the highest zones of the Glenkiln shales at

Glenkiln, Dobb’s Linn, Carnalea (Ireland), and in the higher

Llandeilo rocks of Builth, at Wellfield, and near Builth-road

station,

17. Dicellograptus patulosus, sp. nov.

(Pl. V. figs. 18 a-18 7.)

Branches of polypary stout and slightly curved, diverging

from each other at a wide angle. Axil short, rounded, or

obtusely angular ; axillary spine » stout , oblique, often invisible ;

radicle well marked ; lateral spines rudimentary, rarely visible.

Hydrothec twenty to twenty-two to the inch, free for a small

fraction of their length; distal portion contracted; aperture

very oblique, opening partly within a distinct excavation in

the base of the succeeding hydrotheca.

In the majority of examples of the typical form of this

species the axillary portion is bluntly triangular in form, the

two primary hydrothece being directed slightly backwards.

The proximal extremity is alway s provided with a well-

marked radicle; but the lateral spines are only very rarely

distinguishable, and are always very rudimentary. ‘The

sicular spine varies much in length, and is very frequently

invisible altogether. When present it is generally stout and

pointed; it hardly ever occupies its normal position with

respect to the dorsal angle of the branches, but inclines to one

side and is occasionally united to the nearest branch by a

distinct membranous film.

The hydrothece differ essentially from those characteristie

of the majority of the Dicellograpti in the fact that the distal

portion is not free and protuberant, with introverted extremity,

but is rather narrowed distally, and the aperture alone is ob-

lique and directed inwards. A very small fraction only of

the apertural margin lies outside the line of the ventral edge

of the polypary ; and hence the polypiferous border has a very

smooth appearance. ‘The excavation is somewhat triangular

in form, and occupies from one fourth to one sixth of the

ventral margin.

Dicellograptus patulosus differs from D. Korchhammeri in

the form of the axillary portion of the polypary, in the absence

of freedom and introversion of the distal fraction of the hydro-

thece, &c. From all other species its general habit is suffi-

cient to distinguish it.

Horizon and Locality. Occurs in great numbers in a single

zene in the Glenkiln shales at Glenkiln, Craigmichan, Dobb’s

Linn, &e.

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 163

18. Dicellograptus divaricatus, Hall, var. rigidus, Lapw.

(Pl. V. figs. 20a, 200.)

Dicellograptus moffatensis, var. divaricatus, Hall, Lapworth, Grapto-

lites County Down, Proceedings Belfast Nat. Field-Club, 1876,

pl. vii. fig. 10, &e.

Branches of polypary stout and rigid, divaricating at a

medium angle. Axil narrow and deep, bluntly pointed proxi-

mally, frequently extended distally by a chitinous film uniting

the dorsal surface of the earlier portions of the branches,

Axillary spine, radicle, and lateral spurs rarely visible. Hy-

drothecee twenty-four to the inch, short, free for about one

third of their length; free portion of each so strongly intro-

verted that the ventral margin of the branch appears un-

broken.

The branches in typical examples of this form are tolerably

straight, and are of an equal width of about one sixteenth of

an inch throughout. They diverge at an average angle of

about 60°. In a few examples there is a well-marked out-

ward curve within a short distance of the axil; and this is

occasionally succeeded by a general inward curvature of long

radius.

As a rule the axillary portion of the polypary forms a small

triangle. There is frequently a short radicle; but only in

very young forms is there a trace of either axillary spine or

lateral spurs. A thick web of chitinous matter unites the

dorsal edges of the two branches as far as a point opposite

the aperture of the third hydrotheca.

The vast majority of specimens afford no trace of the

presence of hydrothecee beyond a slight crenulation of the

ventral margin of the branch, both ventra! and dorsal edges

appearing equally smooth and unbroken. This may be called

the characteristic aspect of the species. In the opposite or

obverse aspect the form and position of the thece can often be

made out with certainty. They agree very closely with those

in Dicellograptus intortus, the free portion ofeach being strongly

introverted, while the apertural margin is inclined, and opens

wholly within the ventral margin. It is pressed so closely

against the base of the succeeding theca that the excavation

is only discernible as a faint slit running obliquely across the

body of the polypary. :

This is the form I have generally referred to Hall’s Grapto-

lithus divaricatus (Grapt. Quebec Group, p. 14, fig. 14, upper

figure). Itis the only British form known to myself that can be

even with doubt referred to his species. If his figure is correctly

drawn, however, the British and American forms must be dis-

164 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

tinct. Hall’s second figure belongs clearly to a different

species—one representative, it may be, of Dicellograptus patu-

losus.

Family Dichograptide.

BRYOGRAPTUS, gen. nov.

Polypary bilaterally subsymmetrical, consisting of two

compound monoprionidian branches diverging at a small

angle from a well-marked sicula, and originating similar

compound (or simple?) secondary branches at close but irre-

gular intervals from one margin only. Hydrothece minute,

of the type of those of Dichograptus, Salt.

This genus differs from Dichograptus and Clonograptus

mainly in the fact that the secondary and tertiary branches

are given off at irregular intervals, while the two chief

branches, instead of proceeding outwards in opposite directions,

make but a small angle with each other, composing an irre-

gular polypary of an irregular dendroid form. It is doubtful

if this latter feature is of any great systematic importance, as

both Didymograpti and Tetragrapti of slightly divergent type

are known. Nevertheless the habit of the two Cambrian

species here united under this title is so distinctive that they

may well be provisionally separated from Dichograptus until

they are more perfectly known. Only two forms have yet

been met with. The first is figured in Kjerulf’s ‘ Veiviser,’

published at Christiania in 1865. The second was collected

by Dr. Callaway in the Shineton Shales of Shropshire in

1873. They are here noticed because of their geological

importance, being the oldest forms of Graptolithus hitherto

detected.

19. Bryograptus Kjerulfi, sp. nov.

(Pl. V. figs. 22 a, 22 6.)

Graptolithus tenuis, Portlock, Kjerulf, Veiviser, p. 3, figs. 6, a, b,

A,B.

Polypary consisting of two very slender primary branches

diverging from a well-marked sicula at an angle of about

40°, and giving origin to two (or more) compound secon-

dary branches at close intervals from their inner margin.

Hydrothece eighteen to twenty-four to the inch.

The above description is drawn up from Kjerulf’s figures

(a and 6). If the figures can be depended upon, the habit of

the species is so unique that there can be no doubt of its

distinctness from any species of the Dichograptide hitherto

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 165

described. His figure ¢ may be intended for the same

species. It is less intelligible, however, and points rather in

the direction of Clonograptus.

Horizon and Locality. Etage 2. Alum Slates of Vakkeré,

near Christiania. Named after Professor Kjerulf, of the

University of Christiania, who was the first to figure this

form.

20. Bryograptus Callavet, sp. nov.

(Pl. V. figs. 21 a, 21 0.)

Polypary consisting of two slender primary branches di-

verging from each other at a small angle, and originating

similar (compound ?) secondary branches at irregular but short

distances upon the inner margin. Hydrothecze about twenty to

the inch, long and slender, with acuminate denticle, of the

general type of those of Dichograptus.

I give this title to several fragments of a species of Bryo-

graptus placed in my hands for identification by Dr. C. Cal-

laway, with others collected by himself in the Shineton Shales

(Upper Cambrian) of Salop. Its close resemblance to the

species described from the corresponding Norwegian beds is

apparent at a glance; and the small angle of divergence of

the branchlets in all the fragments known gives colour to the

view of the generic identity of these species and their common

distinctness from Clonograptus, Hall.

I dedicate it to Dr. C. Callaway, whose numerous and

valuable contributions to Proterozoic and Archean geology

are well known.

Horizon and Locality. Shineton Shales of Cound Brook,

Shropshire (Upper Cambrian).

Family Diplograptide.

21. Diplograptus physophora, Nicholson.

(Pl. V. figs. 26 a, 26 6.)

Diplograptus physophora, Nicholson, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. i. ser. 4,

pl. iii. fig. 7.

I give two figures illustrative of this very beautiful species,

the distinctness of which has been doubted by some paleon-

tologists. It occurs in great numbers and in excellent pre-

servation in a single zone in the Birkhill Shales of South

Scotland, always with the same superficial characteristics ; so

that the validity of the species is now beyond question, As

it is mainly of interest from a zoological point of view, I shall

defer its description till a future occasion.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 12

166 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites,

22. Diplograptus socialis, Lapw., sp. nov.

(Pl. IV. figs. 13 a-13 e.)

Polypary short and stout, about one fourth of an inch in

length, with a maximum diameter of one twelfth of an inch ;

roximal spines minute, divergent, conspicuous ; virgula capil-

ie. slightly prolonged distally. Hydrothece thirty to thirty-

two to the inch, inclined at an angle of 45°, tubular in form,

without overlap; outer margin of each convex, with well-

marked proximal excavation ; aperture horizontal or oblique,

concave, unornamented. ‘l'est transversely striated.

The features noted above are characteristic of a highly pro-

lific little Diplograptus which everywhere accompanies Dicel-

lograptus complanatus, Lapw., in its extended geographical

range in Scotland and Ireland. The Irish specimens sent me

by my friend Mr. Swanston, of Belfast, are in an excellent

state of preservation, and show the superficial striation most

distinetly. On the obverse aspect of the polypary there is a

trace of a longitudinal septum, slightly undulating. On the

reverse aspect no trace of a longitudinal seam is perceptible,

the test of the fossil is unbroken and continuous from side to

side. The virgula, as a rule, is just perceptible, projecting

slightly beyond the distal margin of the polypary.

From Diplograptus truncatus, Lapw., its most intimate

ally, this form is easily separated by its diminutive size, the

prolongation of the virgula, and some distinctions in the shape

of the hydrothece.

Horizon and Locality. D. socialis occurs in countless num-

bers in the dark seam at the base of the ‘‘ Barren Mudstone ”’

of the Moffat series at Dobb’s Linn and elsewhere, upon the

same horizon at Coalpit Bay, Ireland, and at Shalloch Mill &e.

in the Girvan district of Ayrshire.

23. Diplograptus (Glyptograptus) euglyphus, sp. nov.

Pl. LV. figs. 14 a-14 ¢.)

Diplograptus dentatus, Brongn. Lapworth, Trans. Belfast Nat. Field-

Club, 1856-7, pl. vi. fig. 18; Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1878; Ann.

& Mag. Nat. Hist. 1879, iv. p. 424,

Polypary diprionidian, with parallel margins, from one to

four inches in length, and with an average diameter of one

twelfth of an inch; proximal end rounded, furnished with a

minute radicle, but dieati¢ute of lateral spines. Virgula con-

spicuous, distally prolonged. Hydrothece eighteen to twenty-

four to the inch, inclined at an angle of about 40°; short, free

tubes, with convex outer edge, and deeply concave apertural

margin.

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 167

Few of the specimens of this form exceed an inch and a half

in extent; but occasionally a group of gigantic examples are

met with three or four inches in length. The margins are

perfectly parallel throughout, except near the proximal ex-

tremity, which is rounded off and provided with a short radicle

only. In the generality of examples the virgula is prolonged

distally to an extent almost equal to that of the polypary

itself. The hydrothece are of the form of those of Diplo-

graptus tamariscus, Nich. (the type of the subgenus Glypto-

graptus). ‘They are rounded tubes, approximately of the same

diameter throughout, and divided from each other by a non-

polypiferous internode equal to their own length. They are

arranged in alternating order on a polypary of concavo-con-

vex (?) section, with no visible septum upon the reverse aspect,

but with a thick continuous test, which is strongly striated

transversely.

This species differs from the Arenig form referred by authors

to Brongniart’s Diplograptus dentatus (to which I formerly

assigned it) in several important points of structure. Jn some

good examples of that form, lately procured by myself from the

Arenig beds of Shelve, the thece overlap for half their length,

their edges are undulating, and the proximal extremity of the

polypary is provided with three spines.

Horizon and Locality. Diplograptus euglyphus is rare in

the Glenkiln Shales of Dobb’s Linn, Craighmichan, Hart-

fell, &c., but very common in the Glenkiln beds of Birnock,

Cai Hill, &c. in the Leadhills district.

24. Diplograptus perexcavatus, Lapw.

Climacograptus perexcavatus, Lapworth, Trans. Belfast Nat. Field-

Club, 1877, pl. vi. figs. 35, a, b.

Diplograptus angustifolius, Hall, Lapworth, ibid. figs. 1, a, 6.

In the Glenkiln and Lower Hartfell Shales of the south

of Scotland one of the commonest fossils is the diprionidian

Graptolite named above. I have hitherto ranged it indifferently

in Climacograptus and Diplograptus, from the circumstance

that it exhibits the distinct characteristics of these genera

combined in one and the same polypary. I have recently

collected several examples of this form in partial relief. The

evidences they afford of its general structure permit us to

remove it from Climacograptus, and to range it definitely

under Diplograptus, from the type forms of which, however,

it differs so greatly that it ought probably to form the type of

a distinct subgenus.

In the obverse aspect (Pl. V. figs. 25 b, 25 c, 25 d) the

hydrotheez show all the characteristic features of those of

12°

168 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

Climacograptus, the subperpendicular margin and deep exca-

vation. In the reverse aspect (figs. 25e, 25) the thece are

those of Déplograptus, with long inclined subparallel walls

and oblique apertural margin; while the central part of the

polypary appears similarly destitute of the longitudinal sep-

tum. In the obverse aspect of the examples presented m

relief, or but slightly compressed, the under wall of each

hydrotheca is continued in a deeply impressed line, which

crosses the face of the polypary obliquely till it meets with a

similar line derived from the corresponding hydrotheca of the

opposite series (figs. 25a, 25 b-25d). Thus the base of each

hydrotheca appears to rest upon the lower half of the upper

wall of its opposite neighbour. A longitudinal septal line

formed by the deep groove between these opposed hydrothece

runs in short zigzag curves down the middle third of the

polypary, as in /diograptus and in the Retiolitide generally.

The American species Diplograptus amplexicaulis, Hall

(Pal. New York, vol. i.), clearly belongs to the same

subgroup. It differs from the present form chiefly in the

greater length and tenuity of the polypary, and in the form

of the distal portions of the hydrothece. (See Hall, 20th

Report State Cabinet, 1867, pl. iii. figs. 6 & 7.)

Diplograptus perexcavatus is a common fossil in the Glen-

kiln beds of Scotland and Ireland, and in the Upper Llandeilo

strata of Llandrindod Wells, Radnorshire.

25. Diplograptus rugosus, Emmons ?

Diplograptus rugosus, Emmons, American Geology, pl. i. fig. 26.

Diplograptus laciniatus, Emmons, ibid. fig. 24.

cies (Graptolithus) pristis, Hall, Pal. New York, vol. i. pl. 72.

g. 1, 0, XC.

Diplograptus hypniformis, White, Geol. Rep. 100th Meridian.

Polypary diprionidian, one to two inches in length, margins

parallel distally, but tapering proximally from an average

diameter of about one eighth of an inch to a blunt initial ex-

tremity, which is invariably provided with a well-marked

radicle and lateral spines. Virgula stout, prolonged distally.

Hydrothece twenty-four to twenty-eight to the inch, short

stout tubes, inclined at an angle of about 40°, slightly over-

lapping, deeply excavated; apertural margin straight or con-

eave, usually greatly inclined; denticle acute. Test striated.

The peculiarities of the hydrothece constitute the most

pronounced characteristic of this species. In the living state

they were probably short stout tubes, slightly overlapping,

and greatly narrowed transversely, but with a broad expanded

aperture. In the profile view they are seen to be flattened

‘Mr. C, Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 169

in their middle portion over the mouth of the preceding theca,

while the apertural portion is wide and patulous. The speci-

mens preserved in partial relief show that the thecal walls

of each series are prolonged in a distinct groove into the

central portion of the polypary, as in the last-mentioned

species ; so that in casts the impressions of the thece present

the imbricated or amplexicaul arrangement so marked in D.

perexcavatus and D. amplexicaulis.

This form is frequently confounded with Diplograptus

foliaceus, Murch., from which it differs (a) in the smaller in-

clination of the hydrothece, (0) their greater distal expansion

and (c) imbricate arrangement, and (d) in the shape and pro-

longation of the apertural margin.

I have provisionally referred it to Diplograptus rugosus,

Emmons, which was the earliest described example of the

American species figured under the references given above.

Of the specific identity of all these forms it is as yet impossible

to speak with certainty ; but those figured can all be paralleled

by Girvan examples of the form under description.

Horizon and Locality. Diplograptus rugosus 1s a very com-

mon form in the Lower Girvan rocks (Bala) of Laggan, Ard-

millan, Penwhapple, Piedmont Glen, &c. Examples doubt-

fully referable to the same species have been collected by

myself from St. Clears and other Welsh localities.

26. Climacograptus confertus, Lapw.

(Pl. LV. figs. 15 a, 15 4, 15.)

Climacograptus confertus, Lapworth, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1875,

pl. xxxiv. figs. 4 af.

This species has been already figured and described; but,

owing to the absence of perfect specimens, the original drawing

and diagnosis were very imperfect. ‘The figures given in the

present plate are drawn from more complete specimens re-

cently collected by myself from the Lower Llandeilo beds of

the neighbourhood of Llan Mill, near Whitland. The lateral

spines characteristic of C. celatus are not present in this

form. There is a distinct distal prolongation of the virgula.

C. confertus is closely allied to the species C. celatus,

Lapw., and ranges apparently from the Upper Arenig to the

summit of the Llandeilo formation.

IDIOGRAPTUS, subgen. nov.

Polypary diprionidian, with concavo-convex section, zigzag

septum, and subcentral, filiform, direct virgula. Hydrothecae

consisting of alternate overlapping flattened prisms, contract-

170 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

ing towards a rectangular aperture, which is furnished with

two distinct thecal spines. Periderm continuous, of great

tenuity, apparently strengthened by an outline skeleton of

strong chitinous threads.

The above title is proposed for a group of spinose diprio-

nidian Graptolitide that differ in several marked respects from

Diplograptus foliaceus (Murch.) and its allies. 'They resemble

Lasiograptus and the Retiolitide in the great tenuity of the

periderm, and in the fact that when the latter is indifferently

preserved, as is frequently the case, all that remains of the

fossil is an outline of chitinous threads, giving it all the ap-

pearance of a skeleton Retiolites. The section of the polypary

appears to have been concavo-convex ; and in the normal view

the two series of hydrothece are seen to have their bases in

contact, as in Fetiolites and Lasivgraptus, a strong separating .

chitinous thread marking the place of the zigzag septum. In

both the species known the aperture is provided with two

spines, which proceed from the sinuses of the quadrangular

orifice, and have a somewhat ascending direction. This sub-

genus points in the direction of Hallograptus, Carruthers,

MS. (of which D¢iplograptus (Hallograptus) bimucronatus,

Nich., may be regarded as the type), but differs from it most

distinctly in the absence of the scopulate reproductive processes

which mark the gonosome in that genus. Hall figures a form,

which he refers to his Diplograptus (Idiograptus) Whitfieldt,

with scopule (Grapt. Quebec Group, pl. v. figs. 6-10); but

this form is clearly distinct from his original D. Whitfieldit

(Pal. New York, vol. iii. fig. 516), and is, I doubt not, a true

Hallograptus.

27. Idiograptus (Diplograptus) aculeatus, sp. nov.

(Pl. VI. figs. 23 a-23 f)

Polypary about one inch in length, gradually augmenting

in diameter, from a triangular proximal extremity to a maxi-

mum width of about one twelfth of an inch. Virgula distally

prolonged. Hydrothece twenty-four to twenty-eight to the

inch, alternately arranged, and provided with well-marked,

slightly ascending, apertural spines.

The bluntly triangular proximal extremity of the polypary

in this species is destitute of any extraneous ornamentation

beyond the normal apertural spines of the primary hydrothece,

which hardly exceed their ordinary length. The distal ex-

tremity of the polypary is formed by the final theca, and

shows four distinct spines projecting from its angles. The

virgula is filiform and straight, and is prolonged for a distance

equal to about half the length of the polypary itself. There

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 171

is usually a gradual increment in width from the initial ex-

tremity of the polypary to its distal termination ; but occa-

sionally the margins in the distal moiety are perfectly

parallel.

The test is of great tenuity, and is frequently invisible; an

outline only of the angles of the fossil is preserved in

strong chitinous threads. The zigzag septal line seems to be

formed of a single thread of this nature, apparently of no

greater thickness than that which outlines the hydrothece.

The apertural spines occasionally attain a length equal to

three fourths of the diameter of the polypary itself, and have

almost invariably an upward direction.

This species is most intimately allied to the Glenkiln form

T have usually referred to Diplograptus (Idiograptus) Whit-

Jfreldit (Hall). In that species, however, the theca are more

distant, and the virgula is greatly prolonged, both proximally

and distally. (Comp. Lapworth, Graptolites County Down,

Proc. Belfast Nat. Field-Club, 1876-7, pl. vi. fig. 21.)

Horizon and Locality. Common in a single zone in the

Middle Bala beds of Girvan at Shalloch Mill &. Rare in

the Hartfell Shales upon the same horizon at Syart Law,

Dobb’s Linn, &e.

28. Diplograptus (Cyrtograptus) tricornis, Carr.

(Pl. V. figs. 27 a—-27 e.)

In 1858 Mr. W. Carruthers, F’.R.S., described and figured

a remarkable diprionidian Graptolite from the Moffat Shales

of Hartfell Spa, under the title of Dzplograpsus tricornis

(Carruthers, Trans. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinb. 1858, p. 468,

fig. 2). he chief feature relied upon by its founder as

affording conclusive evidence of its distinctness from its

frequent associate Diplograptus foliaceus, Murch., was the

presence of three strong spines at the proximal extremity of

the polypary, the central spine being perpendicular, and

the two side spines approximately horizontal. The illustra-

tive figure, however, shows a far more remarkable peculiarity ;

the hydrothece are exhibited as rhomboidal in form, in con-

tact throughout the whole of their extent, their bases resting

upon the septal line, and their apertures (?) forming a con-

tinuous and slightly undulating line along the ventral margin

of the polypary. f

The following year Professor Hall gave a diagnosis and

figure of an American species from the Hudson-River group

under the title of Graptolithus marcidus (Hall, Pal. New

York, iii. p. 515, figs. 1-3). Like Mr. Carruthers’s species,

this new form was provided proximally with two horizontal

172. Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

spurs, visible only in the ventral aspect, while both the

lateral margins were wrinkled or undulated in the profile

view. Professor Hall can hardly be said to have attempted

the description of the shape of the hydrothece in G. marcidus,

but rather to have contented himself with noting the form

and position of the marginal serratures. A glance at one of

his figures (fig. 2) shows some most remarkable features in his

fossil, not only difficult of reconciliation with his description,

but totally at variance with the view generally held of the

structure of the polypary in the genus Diplograptus. The

marginal denticles in the specimen figured, instead of being

directed acutely upwards as in other forms of the diprionidian

Rhabdophora, project obliquely downwards, in the direction

of the proximal extremity of the polypary. If, therefore,

they stand to the individual hydrothece from which they are

derived in corresponding relations to those in the generality

of diprionidian forms, they must be inverted in position—their

apertures, instead of opening towards the distal end of the

polypary, must be turned proximally in the direction of the

initial extremity of the polypary.

In 1868 we find Mr. W. Carruthers claiming the American

form as being identical with his previously described Diplo-

graptus tricornis (Geol. Mag. 1868, p. 131) ; and many grap-

tolithologists have subsequently supported this view.

In 1872 Mr. John Hopkinson described and figured a form

of Diplograptus from the Moffat Shales of Wenlockhead,

under the name of Diplograptus Etheridgit (Geol. Mag. 1872,

p- 504), which appears to possess the essential characteristics

of Diplograptus tricornis, Carr., and to be very doubtfully

separable from that species. At first glance, however, it

would appear that the hydrothecee in the two forms are

strikingly distinct in shape. Instead of being rhomboidal, as

in D. tricornis, the thece in D. Etheridgii are described as

having “the appearance of rounded knobs, their outer margins

forming a continuous curve, at first concave, and then, for

about half their length and round their apertures, convex.”

That these three forms, if not specifically identical, are, at

any rate, most intimately allied, I have long been convinced ;

but I have hitherto been bafiled in my endeavours to show

that appearances so diverse as those noted above can possibly

be presented by one and the same diprionidian form. Fortu-

nately, however, I have very recently collected a large series

of specimens of a dwarf variety of D. tricornis from the

Lower Bala rocks of Girvan, preserved in partial relief. A

careful microscopic study of these specimens has enabled me

to gain a tolerably complete idea of the uncompressed form of

‘Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 173

the polypary, and of the appearances which are naturally

presented by it when compressed in different directions.

In the ventral aspect the appearance of the polypary is (as

shown by Carruthers and Hall) precisely similar to that in

Climacograptus, except that the apertures, instead of being

semicircular in form, are subrectangular. When the fossil is

preserved in partial relief these apertures seem to occupy

about two thirds of the ventral aspect; but a study of nume-

rous examples proves that only the lower half of this vacant

space is formed by the true aperture, the upper half being

oecupied by the fractured matrix filling a distinct “ excava-

tion” (see Pl. V. fig. 27.c). In profile views (figs. 27 6, 27 c)

the characteristic form of the hydrotheca is well shown, and

we see at a glance the cause of the appearance presented by

such forms as Hopkinson’s D. Htheridgii. The hydrothece

have features common to those of both Diplograptus and Cli-

macograptus. ‘Chey are steeply inclined and have an oblique

aperture, as in the former, while their apertural margin opens

wholly within the ventral 1 margin of the polypary, in a distinct

excavation, as in the latter genus. In the obverse (?) aspect

(fig. 27 e) their walls appear to be elegantly curved, and there

is an appearance of distal expansion. In the reverse aspect

the walls are almost ‘straight, and the thece are of equal

width throughout. These diverse appearances are, in all

probability, a result of the original form of the polypary,

which was somewhat concavo-convex previously to com-

pression.

The outer portion of each hydrotheca forming the wrinkled-

looking ventral margin of the polypary is composed of three

divisions. The lowest division is a distinct excavation (visi-

ble directly only in subscalariform views) which overhangs the

aperture of the theca immediately below. The outer sinus of

this “‘ excavation ” is prolonged, as in many species of Climaco-

graptus, into a mucronate extension, oblique, and occasionally

of remarkable length. The middle division is short and

approximately perpendicular, as in Climacograptus. The

final division is formed by the line of the apertural margin.

The latter is very oblique with respect to the axis of the

polypary, but, as in the majority of other Diprionida, is

almost at right angles to the normal direction of the hy-

drotheca. It lies wholly within the ventral boundary of the

polypary, and is visible in very rare cases. As pointed out

by Mr. Hopkinson, the test in these forms is of remarkable

tenuity. It is generally preserved as a mere stain, very dif-

ferent from the stout chitinous film representing the commoner

diprionidian forms with which it is usually associated. In

174 Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

the Girvan examples the test appears to have been more or

less punctate.

We are now in a position to harmonize the apparently con-

flicting appearances presented by the forms noticed at the

commencement of this description, and to show that they

may have all been derived from this single species. In

Pl. V. fig. 27d we see the rhomboidal theca and zigzag

ventral margin presented in Carruthers’s original figure of his

D. tricornis. In the same figure the general aspect of the

hydrothece is very similar to that given in Hopkinson’s

description of his D. Etheridgii; and the explanation of the

rounded knob-like form of their distal extremities may be

gathered from a study of fig. 276. The “ inverted ” denti-

cles in Hall’s D. marcidus are simply the compressed and

prolonged oblique denticles that project from the outer sinus

of the excavations.

The characteristics of this species are so unique that there

can be little doubt that it is worthy of generic rank. In the

general habit of the polypary, in the form of the hydrotheca,

and in the punctate character of the test, it differs both from

Diplograptus and Climacograptus. IL would suggest for it

the generic title of Cryptograptus (Gr. kpumtos, concealed), in

allusion to the intramarginal and usually concealed aperture

of the hydrothece.

CRYPTOGRAPTUS, gen. nov.

Gen. char. Polypary diprionidian, with attenuated punc-

tate test, subparallel margins, and concavo-convex (?) section.

Hydrothece inclined ; lower wall straight or slightly arcuate,

outer third forming a distinct excavation, the upper sinus of

which is mucronate and oblique ; outer wall very short, per-

pendicular ; aperture very oblique, lying wholly within the

ventral margin of the polypary.

Type Diplograptus (Cryptograptus) tricornis, Carr.

Forms belonging to this genus are not uncommon in the

Upper Arenig rocks of Skiddaw ; and examples referred by

myself to D. tricornis have been collected from the Lower

Liandeilo strata of Pembrokeshire. The form figured in

Pl. V. fig. 28 @ occurs in remarkable abundance in the Upper

Llandeilo beds of Radnor. Cryptograptus tricornis is very

numerous in the Glenkiln and Lower Hartfell shales of the

south of Scotland, together with the variety (?) D. Etheridgit,

Hopk., and other forms. I strongly suspect that the Arenig

species Climacograptus antennartus, Hall, and D¢plograptus

Hopkinsont, Nich., belong to the same group. If so, the

genus has already been recognized in America, Britain, and

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites. 175

Scandinavia, and its range must extend at least from the

lowest beds of the Arenig formation to the middle strata ot

the Bala.

Family Lasiograptide.

29. Lastograptus retusus, sp. nov.

(Pl. V. figs. 24 a—-24 d.)

Polypary about one inch in length, with a uniform diameter

of one twelfth of an inch. Virgula capillary, distally pro-

longed. Septum zigzag. Hydrothece thirty-six to the inch,

once and a half as long as broad, arranged alternately, each

in contact with those of the opposite series for two thirds of

its length ; ventral edge very short and devoid of ornamenta-

tion; aperture broad, horizontal, opening within the ventral

margin of the polypary ; excavation triangular in form, occu-

pying one third of the transverse diameter of the polypary

and about two thirds of its ventral margin. ,

The polypary in this very distinct form possesses, in a

marked degree, the essential characteristics of the genus

Lastograptus, with the exception of the marginal meshes

{amentula), which are absent im the specimen figured. The

zigzag septal line formed by the adpressed bases of the two

opposed series of hydrothecz is beautifully exhibited, and its

distinctness in position from the virgula proper is placed

beyond question by the straggling position of the ridge

formed by the latter upon the exposed face of the polypary.

The hydrothece are very similar in form to those in Lasvo-

graptus Harknesst, Nich. sp.; but the excavation is deeper

and more conspicuous. Hach theca is in contact with two of

its nearest neighbours of the series on the opposite margin of

the polypary, the median line of separation forming a very

peculiar zigzag longitudinal seam on the face of the fossil.

Kach is subquadrangular in general form, and is inclined at

an angle of about 45° with respect to the main axis. A deep

excavation occupies at least two thirds of the ventral margin ;

the remaining third is perpendicular and shows a slight trace of

ornamentation at the lower sinus. The aperture is horizontal

or but slightly concave, and opens entirely within the suc-

ceeding excavation.

The species is easily separated from Lastograptus Hark-

nesst, Nich., and L. margaritatus, Lapw., by the general form

of the polypary. Only two specimens have been collected ;

the gonosome or amentulate form is as yet unknown.

Horizon and Locality. Upper Llandeilo shales of the

neighbourhood of Llandrindod Wells, Radnorshire.

176

Fig.

Fug.

Fig.

pad.

16.

IVE

18.

Mr. C. Lapworth on new British Graptolites.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE IV.

. Monograptus leintwardinensis, sp. noy. la, 16, natural size ;

le, proximal portion, magn. 5; 1d, distal portion, magn. 5.

Lower Ludlow, Leintwardine. Collection, Mr. J. Hopkinson,

F.G.S.

. MW, Salweyi, sp. nov. 2a, distal portion, nat. size; 26, ditto,

magn. Lower Ludlow, Elton Lane, Herefordshire. Collection,

Mr. Hopkinson.

. M. colonus, Barrande. 38a, 3b, young examples, nat. size ;

3c, young example, magn.; 3d, adult portion, magnified.

Lower Ludlow, Vinnal Hill, &e.

. Ditto, after Barrande, Grapt. de Bohéme, pl. ii. figs. 2, 3.

. M. Remert, Barr. 5a, 56, nat. size; 5c, proximal portion,

magn. ; 5d, distal portion, magn. Lower Ludlow, Adferton,

and Builth Bridge.

. M. galaensis, var. basilicus, var. nov. 6a, adult portion, nat.

size (the lower portion is an impression only) ; 6 6, ditto, mag-

nified (Wenlock Shales, Wellfield, near Builth); 6¢, proximal

portion (M. serra, Hopk. MS8.), nat. size; Gd, magn. Lower

Ludlow, Elton Lane.

M. Hisingeri, Carr., var. nudus. 7a, 7c, nat. size; 7b, magn.

Grieston Shales, Grieston Quarry, Innerleithen.

.8a. M. Flemingii, Salter, nat. size. Wenlock Shale, Wellfield, near

Builth.

. 8b. M. crassus, sp. nov., nat. size. Upper Birkhill Shales, Dobb’s

Linn, Dumfriesshire.

.8¢. M. riccartonensis, Lapworth, nat. size. Riccarton Beds, El-

liotsfield, near Hawick.

. 9a. M. Haili, Barrande (Graptolites de Bohéme, pl. ii. fig. 12).

aL,

M. crenularis, sp.nov. 10a, distal portion, nat. size; 100, ditto,

magn.; 10c, distal portion (cast of), nat. size; 10d, ditto,

magn. Birkhill Shales, Dobb’s Linn.

M. crenularis, var. a. 11a, nat. size; 116, lle, magn. Saugh-

Hill beds, Girvan, Ayrshire.

2. Cyrtograptus Linnarssoni, sp.nov. 12a, nat. size; 120, magn.

Wenlock Shale, Builth Road, Radnorshire.

. Diplograptus socialis, sp. nov. 18 a, 13 6, nat. size; 13¢, magn.

Upper Hartfell Shales, Dobb’s Linn.

. D. euglyphus, sp.nov. 14a, nat. size; 146, magn.; 14¢, distal

portion, nat. size; 14d, proximal portion; 14e, magn. Glen-

kiln Shales of Wanlockhead and Dobb’s Linn.

. Climacograptus confertus, Lapworth. 154, proximal portion,

magn.; 156, distal portion, profile view, magn.; 15e, ditto,

ventral aspect, magn. Lower Llandeilo of Llan Mill, near

Narberth.

Pate V.

Azygograptus celebs, sp.nov. 16a, proximal portion; 166,

ditto, magn.; 16c, distal portion, nat. size. Upper Skiddaw

Slates, Ellergill, Westmoreland.

Dicellograptus complanatus, sp. noy. 17 a, 17}, nat. size; 17 ¢,

axillary portion, magn.; 17d, 17 e, distal portion, magn. Upper

Hartfell Shales, Dobb’s Linn.

D. patulosus, sp.nov. 18a, 186, 18c, natural size; 18d, 18 e,

proximal portion, magn.; 18 f, distal portion, magn, Upper

Glenkiln Shales, Craigmichan and Glenlaln Burn.

Prof. R. Owen on rare Extinct Vertebrates. EVE

Fig. 19. D. intortus, sp.nov. 19a, 196, nat. size; 19d, proximal por-

tion, magn. Glenkiln Shales, Glenkiln Burn and Wanlockhead.

Fig. 20. D. divar icatus, Hall, sp., var. rigidus, 20a, nat. size; 200, magn.

Glenkiln Shales, Bimnock Water, Leadhills district.

Fig. 21. Bryograptus Callavei, sp.nov. 2la, nat. size; 216, magn;

21 c, branch, magn. Shineton Shales, Shineton, Salop. Col-

lection, Dr: Callaway.

Fig. 22. B. Kjerulfi, sp. nov. 22a, nat. ee 22b, magn, After Prof.

Kjerulf ( Veiviser, fig. 6, a, &e. p. 3).

Fig. 23. Diplograptus (Idiograptus) Teh ase 8p. nov. 23a, normal

aspect, nat. size; 23d, ditto, magn.; 236, 25, deprived of

test, lateral views, nat. size; 25 e, 38 fF ditto, magn. Lower

Girvan Rocks, Myoch Bay, Girvan, Ayrshire.

Fig. 24. Lasiograptus retusus, sp.nov. 24a, nat. size; 246, magn. 2;

24 c, distal portion, magn. 5; 24d, proximal portion, magn. 5.

Upper Llandeilo, Llandrindod Wells, Radnorshire.

Fig. 25. Diplograptus perexcavatus, Lapworth. 25a, complete, partly

restored, nat. size; 256, 25c, fragments in relief, nat. size ;

25 e, proximal portion, magn. ; 25 d, distal portion, magn.,

showing overlapping bases “of the hydrothecse ; 25 f, ditto,

magn. ” Lower Hartfell Shale (Wilson zone), Dobb’s Linn.

Fig. 26. D. physophor a, Nicholson. 26a, complete specimen, nat.. size ;

26 b, proximal portion, magn., showing form and mode of at-

tachment of proximal “‘ vesicle.”

Fig. 27. Cryptograptus tricornis, Carr., sp. 27a, complete UE ee, show-

ing normal appearance of polypary (Hartfell Spa); 27 ¢, ventral

aspect, magn. (the lower portion is ae impression only); 27,

reverse aspect, magn.; 27 d, ditto; 27 e, profile, partly restored,

magn. Balcletchie beds, Laggan, ‘near Girvan, Ayrshire.

Fig. 28a. C. tricornis, var. Schaferi : a, nat. size; 6, proximal portion

magn. Upper Llandeilo, Llandrindod Wells, Radnorshire.

XV.—On the Occurrence in North America of rare Extinct

Vertebrates found fragmentarily in England.—No. 3. By

Prof. R. OwEN, C.B., F.R.S., d&c.

[Plate VIIL.]

{Continued from ser. 5, vol. iv. p. 61. }

Part IV. SUPPLEMENTS TO RESTORATION OF Lzropon ancuPs.

I HAVE been favoured by Prof. O. C. Marsh, of Yale College,

New Haven, Mass., with a copy of his paper “On the new

Characters Of Mduaenuncrd Reptiles,” based on an examination

of “remains of not less than 1400 distinct individuals’’*.

Knowing the riches of the Professor’s collection, | have looked

with much interest for the results of his examination as bear-

ing upon and probably dissipating any remaining doubts as

to the affinities and place in the Reptilian series of the huge

* From the ‘American Journal of Science,’ vol. xix. (January 1880).

p. 83.

178 Prof. R. Owen on the Occurrence

extinct marine cold-blooded air-breathers typified by the Mo-

sasaurus Hoffmanni of Conybeare and Cuvier.

At the date of the last two papers, quoted below*, no evi-

dence had been obtained, or been noticed in Prof, Cope’s

extensive illustrations of American Cretaceous Mosasauroidst,

of a sternal bone or apparatus. This most important element

in the question, as between the Ophidian and Lacertian nature

of those reptiles, has been fully and satisfactorily demonstrated

by the collection at Prof. Marsh’s command; and as he

thereby feels himself justified in inferring “ the presence of a

sternum in the entire group” f, I do not hesitate in accepting

this welcome addition to the complete restoration of our Leio-

dont modification of the Mosasaurian type; and I beg leave

to offer such addition, with a few supplementary observations,

to the paper admitted into ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural

History’ for July 1879.

The following is Prof. Marsh’s description of these long-

missing parts of the skeleton :—

“THe STERNUM.

“The absence of a sternum has been asserted by Cope

to be one of the important characters of the Mosasauroid

Reptiles$; and this statement has been accepted by some

authors||. Several specimens, however, in the Yale Museum,

one of which is figured in plate 1. fig. 1, prove the contrary.”

..“ The most perfect specimens of the Mosasauroid sternum

preserved pertain to the genus Edestosawrus, and are of the

true Lacertian type. The sternum in this genus is narrow

and elongate in form, nearly or quite symmetrical, as shown in

plate i. fig. 1 [st]. [This figure is given in Pl. VIII. fig. 1

of the present paper.| It is thin, slightly concave above and

convex below. Its antero-lateral margins are short and

rounded, and have distinct grooves for the coracoids. The

costal margins are much longer and converge posteriorly.

Each has facets for five sternal ribs; and, behind these, false

ribs were supported by a partially ossified pedicle, which

joined the end of the sternum. In the other genera of Mosa-

* Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. of London for November 1877, p. 682, and

for August 1878, p. 748.

+ ‘The Vertebrata of the Cretaceous Formations of the West,’ 4to,

1875. t Mem. cit. p. 83.

§ ‘Vertebrata of the Cretaceous,’ p. 114 (1875); also ‘Bulletin of

Survey of Territories,’ p. 309 (1878).

|| As the allegation rested on the somewhat treacherous basis of “ non-

finding” in commonly fragmentary and more or less incomplete skeletons

represented by fossil remains, I limited myself to stating :—“Sternal or

episternal elements of the scapular arch seem not to have been recognized

in the American series of fossils” (doc, cit. p. 710, 1877).

in North America of rare Extinct Vertebrates. 179

sauroid reptiles the sternum has not yet been found so well

preserved as in Hdestosaurus ; but there can be no reasonable

doubt of its presence. In Holosaurus there appears to have

been a partially ossified mesosternum’”’ *,

Thus to the restoration of Letodon anceps in plate viil.

of vol. iv. 5th series of the Annals and Magazine Nat. Hist.,

there may now be added not only the sternum, but also some

pairs of sternal ribs.

A bone is described and figured as belonging to the hyoid

arch, of proportions rather Cetacean than Lacertian ; it is still

more remote, in form, from any hyoid element of the Ophidian

type.

e clensite plates “like those in IJchthyosaurus and a few

birds,” forming a ring ‘ composed of only a single row of

plates, which, in position, overlapped each other” }, further

attest Saurian as against Ophidian affinities. I have accord-

ingly added such circle of ossicles to the orbit in the restora-

tion of Levodon above cited.

When I prepared the paper on the affinities of the Mosasau-

roids (1877), the homologue of the ectopterygoid in Ophidia was

not present in the specimens at my command, and had not

been noticed in any of Prof. Cope’s examples. I could only

contrast with the palatal view of a Python’s skull (ib. fig. 17)

the mutilated portion of the same surface of the skull in Mo-

sasaurus Hoffmanni (ib. fig. 16). The ectopterygoid has

now been recognized by Prof. Marsh in three American

genera of Mosasauroids (Tylosaurus, Lestosaurus, and Edesto-

saurus)§. In Python the ectopterygoid is a long, slender,

narrow bone, having an oblique overlapping junction with the

otherwise free Mind end of the maxillary, and a similar but

more extended junction with the outer surface of the middle

expanded part of the pterygoid. In the Mosasauroids, as ex-

emplified by Tylosaurus, the ectopterygoid ‘is an L-shaped

bone, thin and somewhat twisted. One ramus unites by

suture with the corresponding process of the pterygoid ; and

the other extends forward, nearly at a right angle, to join the

maxillary ”’||.

In the paper on the affinities of the Mosasauroids, it was

inferred from Prof. Cope’s figures that the dentigerous palatal

bones, which he determined to be the true “ palatines,” were

the homologues of the bones described by Cuvier as the ptery-

goids in Mosasaurus{]. Prof. Marsh confirms this homology

and consequent affinity to the Iguanide. Various specimens

* Marsh, wt supra, p. 83. + Ibid. p. 85, fig. 1.

t Ibid. figs. 2, 3, 4 (Lestosaurus simus, Marsh).

§ Ibid. p. 86. || Lbed.

4] Owen, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1877, p. 698,

180 Prof. R. Owen on rare Extinct Vertebrates.

in the Yale Museum show conclusively that the dentigerous

bones of the palate in various genera of Mosasauroids were

attached posteriorly to the tympanics and to the pterapophyses

by ligament, to the maxillaries by the medium of the ecto-

terygoids, and to the true palatines by suture. ‘Cope has

called these dentigerous bones ‘ palatines,’ and has stated that

they were separated from the quadrates by intervening bones* ;

but on both points he was in error. ‘The true palatines are

small edentulous bones in front and outside of the ptery-

goids”’ T.

In regard to the vertebrae in Mosasauroids, the rich collec-

tion in “‘ Yale Museum”’ does not appear to affect or add to

the characters of the several divisions of the backbone, as

defined by Cuvier and his successors, and as summarized in

the ‘Annals’ for July 1879, p. 57, pl. viii. The best-pre-

served specimen of the vertebral column appears to be of an

individual of the proportionally shortest form of Mosasauroid

(Holosaurus abruptus, Marsh). This skeleton shows 98 ver-

tebree ; but the tail is incomplete, and the preserved caudals

are of the tenth type in the above “ summary.”

With the important additions to a knowledge of the frame-

work of the pectoral arch and its appendages, Prof. Marsh has

materials for the restoration of the bones of the fore fin in

both Edestosaurus (Pl. VIII. fig. 1) and Lestosaurus (fig. 2).

Neither of these genera supports the restoration figured by Prof.

Snow in the Letodon of the Kansas chalk f. They correspond

more closely with that of a Lestosaur described and figured

by Marsh in the ‘ American Journal of Science and Arts’ for

June 1872§. The digital formula in Hdestosaurus dispar is

1. 3, 0. 5, ut. 5, iv. 4, v. 3 (Pl. VIII. fig. f)l. The same

formula is repeated in the pectoral fin of Lestosaurus simus ].

The fin is relatively broader in Ldestosawrus ; and in the spe-

cimen figured of /. dispar seven carpal bones (four in the

proximal, three in the distal row) intervene between the five

metacarpals and the two antibrachial bones. In the figured

specimen of Lestosaurus (Pl. VIII. fig. 2) two carpals are

shown at the ulnar end of the disial row, and the same

number at the same part of the proximal row.

With regard to the antibrachial bones, I may observe that

in the Crocodilia**, the Lacertilia tt, the Chelonia ff, and the

* ‘Vertebrata of the Cretaceous,’ p. 118. + Marsh, Joc. cit. p. 86.

{ Copied in plate viii. fig. 18, of Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for July 1879.

§ See also Owen “On the Affinities of the Mosasauride, as exemplified

by the Bony Structure of the Fore Fin,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., August

1878.

|| Marsh, oc. cit. pl. 1. fig. 1. q Ibid. fig. 2.

** Cuvier, Ossem. Foss. 4to, t. v. 2° partie, p. 111, pl. iv. fig. 18.

t+ Ibid. pl. xvii. fig. 45. Tt IZbed. pl. xii. figs. 11-15.

Geological Society. 181

Sauropterygia*, the ulna, ss, is broader than the radius, 54

(Pl. VILL. tig. 1) ; and I would submit whether the antibrachial

bones have not been transposed in Prof. Marsh’s figures, and

the ulaa (marked 7) placed at the radial side of the forearm.

In the copy of his fig. 1, in Pl. VIII. fig. 1, I have indicated

the several bones and digits by the symbols used in my

‘ Archetype of the Vertebrate Skeleton,’ pl. i., as also in the

figures 1-4 of the fore fin in the Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. for

August 1878, p. 749. In the copy of Prof. Marsh’s fig. 2 in

iny Pl. VIL. | have transposed the position of the radius

and ulna, agreeably with the analogies above referred to. To

the restoration of the pelvic arch and appendages (Pl. VIII.

fig. 3) [ have nothing to object.

The sum of Prof. Marsh’s observations on his rich series of

American generic or subgeneric forms of Mosasaurians is

as follows:—“ The new characters above presented are all

Lacertian rather than Ophidian. The important characters of

the Mosasaurians now known indicate that they form a sub-

order of the Lacertilia, which should be called Mosasauria’’}.

In this conclusion I entirely concur: it is that to which |

was led after comparison of the evidences of the extinct group

at my command in 1877 f.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII.

Fig. 1. Sternum, scapular arch, and bones of the pectoral fins. (desto-

saurus. )

Fig. 2. Bones of the pectoral fin, with Marsh’s position of the antibra-

chial bones reversed. (Lestosaurws. )

Fig. 3. Pelvic arch and bones of the pelvic tins, (Lestosavwus.)

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

‘November 19, 1879.—Henry Clifton Sorby, Esq., F.R.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

‘Supplementary Note on the Vertebre of Ornithopsis, Seeley

(= Eucamerotus, Hulke).” By J. W. Hulke, Esq., F.R.S., F.G.S.

The author in this communication describes several cervical and

trunk vertebrae of this remarkable Dinosaur. The former are cha-

* “Monograph on the Fossil Reptilia of the Liassic Formations.’ 4to.

In the Palzontographical volume, issued 1865, pl. i. Plestosaurus doli-

chodeirus ; pl. ix. P. rostratus ; pl. xiv. fig. 4. P. macrocephalus, fig. 6. P.

Hawkinsii.

+ Op. cit. p. 87 (1880). { Loc. cit.

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol, iv. 13

182 Geological Society.

racterized by great length ; the anterior articular surface is strongly

convex, and the posterior correspondingly hollow. In place of the

side chamber characterizing the trunk-vertebral centra, is a long

shallow pit. An upper and a lower transverse process are given off

from an upper and a lower plate, which project from the side of the

centrum above the pit; and these are. connected by a short forked

cervical riblet. The neural arch is dwarfed; and there is no spinous

process, and no zygosphenal and zygantral mechanism. The struc-

ture of these vertebre indicates a long, mobile, and light neck. In

the trunk the convexity of the anterior articular surface lessens in °

passing from the neck to the loins, the anterior ball gradually sub-

siding till the great articular surface becomes plane, the posterior

surface retaining, however, a slight hollowness. The trunk-vertebrae

have superadded to the ordinary articular processes a mechanism

comparable to zygosphene and zygantrum, which must have given

great fixity to this part of the vertebral column, contrasting

strongly with the flexibility of the neck. The longitudinal side

chambers reach their greatest development in the vertebre refer-

able to the fore part of the trunk; they lessen toward the loins, and

are absent from the neck—which is regarded as conclusive of their

pneumaticity, and against their having been occupied by cartila-

ginous and fatty tissues, which might have equally occurred through

the whole length of the vertebral column, and not been limited to a

particular region in close vicinity to the lungs. The whole con-

struction affords a notable illustration of immense bulk attained

with the use of the smallest quantity of bony tissue, which occurs

in the form of very thin sheets or plates. The transverse and

spinous processes are strengthened by flying buttresses. The vault

of the neural canal is beautifully groined, whence the original name

Ewcamerotus. The author then pointed out the family resemblances

between this Isle-of-Wight Wealden form and the new Colorado

Dinosaurs, which have many points in common, but the latter are

both generically and specifically distinct from Ornithopsis.

December 3, 1879.—Henry Clifton Sorby, Esq., F.R.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

“On some undescribed Comatule from the British Secondary

Rocks.” By P. Herbert Carpenter, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton

College.

This communication contains descriptions of seven new Comatulze

from the Cretaceous and Oolitic series of Southern England, together

with some new facts respecting the Glenotremites paradoxus of

Goldfuss, from the Upper Chalk. This species is remarkable for

the presence of certain characters which are very conspicuous in the

recent Antedon Eschrichtii, ana also in a new species dredged by the

‘Challenger’ at Heard Island in the South Atlantic—namely, the

presence of strong ribs on the inner wall of the centrodorsal, five of

Geological Society. 183

which, interradial in position, are much more prominent than the

rest. So far as is yet known, these features occur in no other

recent Comatula, with the exception of one species from the South

Pacific, in which there is a faint indication of such ribs, but they

are all equal. Another Antedon-species is described from the Chalk

of Sussex. It differs from Antedon paradoxa in the absence of these

ribs, and in the shallowness of the centrodorsal cavity.

Tro species are described from the gault of Folkestone. One is

an Antedon with no special relations to any recent forms. It might

have lived as well at 20 as at 500 fathoms. But the other species

is an Actinometra, possessing certain characters only known to

occur in species from quite shallow water, 20 fathoms or less, in the

Philippine Islands and Malay archipelago. The centrodorsal is a

flat plate, nearly on a level with the surface of the radials, or some-

times even below them, separated from them by clefts at its sides,

and entirely devoid, not only of cirri, but also of cirrus-sockets.

This condition is only an extreme stage of the metamorphosis of the

centrodorsal piece, which bears cirri for a time after its liberation

from the larval stem; but these cirri eventually disappear, and

their sockets become obliterated. The ‘Challenger’ collection

contains a series of specimens of Act. Jukesvi from Torres Straits,

which illustrate this point very completely; and it is therefore of

no small interest to find a fossil Comatula which shows one of the

extreme stages of the metamorphosis.

The large size of the three Antedon-species from the Chalk and

Gault is very remarkable. Ant. paradowa has a centrodorsal half

as wide again as that of any recent form; while Ant. Eschrichtir

is the only recent species with a centrodorsal approaching the size

of those of the other Chalk Antedon and of that from the Gault.

Act. Lovéni from the Gault, however, and the older Comatule, all

had small calices like most recent species. An elegant centro-

dorsal (Ant. rotunda) is described from the Haldon Greensand, and

also two species from the Bradford Clay. One is an Antedon, the

oldest known, with no special characters; the other is an Actino-

metra, with a centrodorsal essentially like those of species now

living in shallow water in the Philippines and Malay archipelago.

The oldest known Comatula, an Actinometra from the Bath Oolite,

has similar relations.

December 17, 1879.—Henry Clifton Sorby, Esq., LL.D., F.R.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “A Contribution to the Physical History of the Cretaceous

Flints.” By Surgeon-Major G. C. Wallich, M.D.

The author described the origin, the mode of formation, and the

cause of the stratification of the Chalk flints. Taking as the basis

of his conclusions the fact brought to notice by him in 1860, namely

that the whole of the Protozoan life at the sea-bed is strictly limited

13*

184 Geological Society.

to the immediate surface-layer of the muddy deposits, he pointed

out in detail the successive stages of the flint-formation, from the

period when the chief portion of the silica of which they are com-

posed was climinated from the ocean-water by the deep-sea sponges,

to the period when it became consolidated in layers or sheets con-

forming to the stratification of the Chalk. In relation to this

subject the author claimed to have sustained the following conclu-

sions :—1. That the silica of the flints is derived mainly fron? the

sponge-beds and sponge-fields, which exist in immense profusion over

the areas occupied by the Globigerine or calcareous *‘ ooze.” 2. That

the deep-sea sponges, with their environment of protoplasmic

matter, constitute by far the most important and _, essential factors

in the production and stratification of the flints. 35. That, whereas

nearly the whole of the carbonate of lime, derived partly from

Foraminifera and other organisms that have lived and died at the

bottom, and partly from such as have subsided to the bottom only

after death, goes to build up the calcareous stratum, nearly the

whole of the silica, whether derived from the deep-sea sponges or

from surface Protozoa, goes to form the flints. 4. That the sponges

are the only really important contributors to the flint-formation

that live and die at the sea-bed. 5. That the flints are just as

much an organic product as the Chalk itself. 6. That the stratifi-

cation of the flint is the immediate result of all sessile Protozoan

life being confined to the superticial layer of the muddy deposits.

7. That the substance which received the name of ‘“* Bathybius,”

and was declared to be an independent living Moneron, is, in reality,

sponge-protoplasm. 8. That no valid lithological distinction exists

between the Chalk and the caleareous mud of the Atlantic; and,

pro tanto, therefore the calcareous mud may be, and in all proba-

bility is, “a continuation of the Chalk-formation.”

2 « Undesecribed Fossil Carnivora from the Sivalik Hills, in the

Collection of the British Museum.” By P. N. Bose, Esq., B.Sc.

This communication contained descriptions of nine species of

Carnivora from the ossiferous Sivaliks, together with an introduc-

tion, in which the age of the Sivalik fauna, and several matters of

general interest, were briefly discussed. The species described

were :—Macherodus sivalensis, M. palewindicus, Felis grandicris-

tata, Hyena sivalensis, H. felina, Viverra Bakerii, Lutra paleindica,

Canis curvipalatus, and C. Cautleyt.

Canis curvipalatus is so named on account of the curvation of the

palate. C. Cautleyi is closely allied to the Wolf, as is, Viverra

Bakerii to the Civet. The form of the forehead is peculiar in

Lutra paleindica, In the form of the skull, the dimensions of the

upper tubercular, &c., Hyana sivalensis approximates to the living

Indian Hyzna (H. striata); but in the absence or extremely rudi-

mentary character of the postero-internal cusp in the lower car-

nassial, as well as in the entire absence of the anterior accessory

cusps in the upper and the first two lower premolars, the Sivalik

Miscellaneous. 185

species comes closer to H. crocuta. H. felina differs from all other

species of Hyvena, living or extinct, in the absence of the upper

premolar 1. Felis grandicristata, which was of about the same

size as some of the larger varieties of the Royal Tiger, had the

sagittal crest even more prominent than the F. cristata of Falconer

& Cautley. Macherodus sivalensis was of about the same size as the

Jaguar. One of the specimens, on which this species is based,

shows two molars in the deciduous dentition instead of three (as in

the genus Felis). M. paleindicus was considerably larger than M.

sivalensis. Both differ from all other known species of Macherodus

in the form of the lower jaw &c.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On Archeopteryx macroura. By Prof. Cari Voer.

Pror. Voer read before the last meeting of the ‘ Socicté Helvétique

des Sciences Naturelles,” held at St. Gall in August 1879, a com-

munication on Archeopteryx macroura. He remarked, first, that

in 1861 Hermann von Meyer described a bird’s feather found in the

lithographic stone of Solenhofen in Bavaria, belonging to the Upper

Jurassic deposits. The German paleontologist gave the name of

Archeopteryx lithographica to the bird reveuled by this feather.

In 1863 Prof. Owen described, under the name of Archeopteryx

macroura, a much more important specimen from the same beds,

and found by M. Hiiberlein, a doctor at Pappenheim. This was a

slab showing with the greatest distinctness the hinder part of a

bird, and also the feathers of the wings in disorder, as well as a

few bones belonging to the anterior limbs.

M. Hiiberlein’s son has discovered a new slab containing a second

example of Archwopteryx, which Prof. Vogt has been able to examine.

This new specimen is complete; and its wings are unfolded as if in

flight.

The head is small; with the lens two small conical poinied teeth

may be observed implanted in the upper jaw.

M. Vogt counted eight cylindrical cervical vertebra, furnished

with very fine, backwardly directed ribs. The dorsal vertebrae

appear to be ten in number; they are thick and short, and bear no

spinous apophyses. ‘The ribs attached to them are very fine, slender,

curved and pointed at the end; they show neither any flattening

nor any traces of the uncinate apophyses which occur in birds.

There are very fine sternal ribs, which appear to be attached to a

linear abdominal sternum.

The pelvis is still involved in the matrix. The tail, which is very

long, is preserved throughout its whole extent. However, it teaches

nothing more than was known from Prof. Owen’s specimen.

The posterior limbs, which are not, on the whole, so well preserved

as in the first example, show nevertheless with perfect certainty

186 Miscellaneous.

that the fibula is completely united with the tibia, and only dis-

tinguished by the presence of a not very strongly marked longi-

tudinal furrow.

On the other hand the anterior limb furnishes new and very in-

teresting information.

The structure of the thoracic girdle is very difficult to understand.

M. Vogt thinks that two scapule are recognizable, and that

there is no bone representing the fureula. According to him the

two coracoids are in contact in the median line, and the sternum is

reduced to zero.

The humerus, the uina, and the radius, already well described by

Owen, present no features peculiar to reptiles or to birds. The

manus, which was very imperfect in the specimen described by

Owen, is, on the contrary, very remarkably preserved in the new

slab. ‘The carpus shows only a single small globular bone. The

digits, which are very well preserved in both limbs, enable us to

rectify certain errors of Owen’s, which, however, are very excusable,

as the learned English paleontologist only knew a few scattered

bones from this region.

The manus of Archwopteryw can be compared neither to that of a

bird, nor to that of a Pterosaurian, but only to that of a tridactyle

Lizard.

In each manus there are three long slender digits, armed with

euryed and sharp-edged claws. The thumb is the shortest; it is

composed of a short metacarpal, a rather long phalange, and the

ungual phalange. The other two digits have, besides the meta-

carpal, three normal phalanges.

The remiges were attached to the cubital margin of the forearm

and manus, although no special adaptation of the skeleton to this

end can be observed. The thumb was free like the other two digits,

and did not bear a winglet. If the feathers had not been preserved,

no one could ever have suspected, from the examination of the

skeleton alone of Archawopteryx, that this animal was furnished with

wings when alive; for its manus, unlike that of birds, presents no

trace of adaptation to the support of the remiges.

The following is a summary of what we know of the organization

of Archaeopteryx :—

The head, the neck, the thorax with the ribs, the tail, the thoracic

girdle and the whole anterior member are clearly constructed as in

reptiles ; the pelvis has probably more relation to that of reptiles

than to that of birds; the posterior limb, on the contrary, is that of

a bird. In all respects the reptilian homologies predominate in the

skeleton.

There remain the feathers. Here there is no doubt; they are

bird’s feathers with a central rhachis and with perfectly formed

barbules. The horny substance of the feathers has disappeared ; but

the model in the fine paste of the lithographic stone is so complete

that we may study the smallest details with the lens. ‘The new

slab shows all the feathers in their place.

The remiges are attached to the cubital margin of the arm and

Miscellaneous. . 187

hand ; they are covered for about half their length with a fine

filiform down; none of the remiges projects beyond the others ; the

wing is rounded in its outline like that of a fowl.

It is possible that there was at the base of the neck a collar

similar to that of the condor; at least it has been thought that indi-

cations of such a thing could be seen.

The tibia was covered with feathers throughout its whole length.

The Archwopteryx therefore had breeches, like our falcons, with

which, according to Prof. Owen, it has the most resemblance in the

leg.

Each caudal vertebra bore a pair of lateral rectrices, all the rest

of the body, head, neck, and trunk were evidently destitute of feathers

and naked; we should certainly otherwise have found traces of

feathers upon a slab which has preserved even the smallest details

of a fine down. Hence the restorations of the animal hitherto

attempted are quite erroneous.

According to M. Vogt it is quite unnecessary to discuss the

question whether Archwopteryx is to be classed among reptiles or

among birds. It is neither one nor the other; it constitutes an

intermediate type of the most strongly marked description, and con-

firms in a brilliant manner the opinions of Prof. Huxley, who has

united the reptiles and birds, under the name of Sauropsida, to form

a single great section of Vertebrata. Archwopteryx is undoubtedly

one of the most important sign-posts on the road which has been

followed by the class of birds in differentiating itself more and more

from the reptiles from which it originated. A bird by its integument

and hinder limbs, the Archewopteryx is a reptile by all the rest of its

organization ; its conformation can only be understood by accepting

this evolution of the birds by a progressive development from certain

types of reptiles. The Cretaceous birds, so well described by Prof.

Marsh, constitute a later finger-post on this road, as they still

retain teeth while almost the whole of their organism is already

conformable to the type of birds.

M. Vogt then discusses the stages by which Archaeopteryx passed

to arrive at the form under which we know it, and the mode in

which adaptation to flight has acted upon the different parts of the

body. He shows, in the first place, that this adaptation is by no

means necessarily combined in the Vertebrata with that of a vertical

position. We haye the proof of this in Pterosauria and the Bats.

The conformation of the hind feet, such as we see in the Dinosauria,

the Archeopteryx, and birds, is therefore independent of the faculty

of flight, and is only in relation to the possibility of sustaining the

body upon the posterior feet alone. The relation found from this

point of view between the Dinosauria and birds by no means in-

dicates real affinities. At the utmost we might suppose a genetic

connexion between the Dinosauria and the Ratit. But if we adopted

this filiation, it would be necessary to assume a polyphyletic origin

for birds.

Finally, M. Vogt inquires whether there are to be found, in deposits

older than the Upper Jura, reptiles which may be related to Arche-

188 Miscellaneous.

opteryx. At present it is impossible to answer this question,

because the fossils that we possess are destitute of their integuments,

and it is very difficult tosay a priort with what cutaneous structures

these creatures were covered. There is complete homology between

the scales or the spines of reptiles on the one hand, and the feathers

of birds on the other. The reptilian structures differ in no respect

from the wart-like stumps which appear in the embryo bird as the

first traces of plumage; the feather of the bird is only a reptile’s

scale further developed ; and the reptile’s scale is only a feather

which has remained in the embryonic condition, There can conse-

quently be no doubt that the feathers of Archwopteryx, which are so

perfectly developed, must have been preceded in other preexisting

reptiles by cutaneous structures representing in a persistent fashion

the different stages of the embryonic development of the feather.

We must therefore imagine the ancestors of the Archwopteryx as

lizard-like terrestrial reptiles, having feet with five, hooked, free

digits, showing no modification in their skeleton, but having the skin

furnished at different points with elongated warts, downy plumes,

and rudimentary feathers, not yet fitted for flight, but susceptible

of further development in the course of generations.— Bibliotheque

Universelle, Archives des Sciences, December 15, 1879, pp. 702-708.

Note on the Genus Brahmea of Walker.

By Arruur G. Burier, F.LS., F.Z.8., &e.

The first figure of a species in this genus is that by Petiver

(Gazoph. tab. 18. fig. 3), a perfectly recognizable illustration of a

species recorded as coming from the island of Chusan, and, as I

have noted (P. Z. 8. 1866, p. 458), identical with B. lunulata and

undulata of Bremer, a good figure of which is given in Ménétriés’s

Catalogue of the Lepidoptera in the St.-Petersburg Museum (pt. iii.

pl. 15. fig. 5).

The first description of an Oriental species is that of B. certhia

given by Fabricius in the ‘Entomologia Systematica,’ iii. 1, p. 412.

n. 16 (1797); and as this description does not seem to have been

looked at by living Lepidopterists, at any rate in recent years, it

will perhaps astonish them not a little if I quote it verbatim :—

“Certhia. 16. B. alis patulis rotundatis fuscis apice cinereo albo

fuscoque undatis.

“* Petiv. Gazoph. tab. 18. fig. 3.

‘“‘ Habitat in Chusan. Mus. Brit.

“Magna. Corpus fuscum collari abdominisque lateribus cinereis.

Ale omnes concolores, basi fusce, apice cinerese, albo fuscoque

undate.”

Therefore there cannot be a question that the B. lunulata (and

undulata) of Bremer is the typical B. certhia of Fabricius. The

B. certhia of Walker, figured by myself (P. Z. 8. 1866, p. 119,

fig. 1), may consequently be named B. conchifera, on account of the

beautifully shaded shell-like submarginal spots upon the wings.

Miscellaneous. : 189

Another point in the synonymy of this genus has also been

cleared up through the transfer of the types of Lepidoptera in the

India Museum. Among these we received a Nepal species bearing

the type-labels of B. Wallichit, Gray, and B. spectabilis, Hope, and

agreeing perfectly with both descriptions and the figure. The spe-

cimen is from the collection of General Hardwicke, as stated by

Hope, and differs strikingly, both in coloration and pattern, on both

surfaces from the better-known B. conchifera of Darjeeling and

Silhet.

The true B. certhia of Fabricius, which 83 years ago was quoted

as in the British Museum, is now also not to be found.

Two examples of B. Wallichii in Mr. Dana’s collection agree in

all important characters with the type.

New Classification of the Crustacea.

By A. 8. Packarp, Jun.

The recent studies on the embryology of the king crab (Limulus

polyphemus) have shown that there are some unexpected resem-

blances to the mode of development of the Arachnida; and while

in our essay * on the development of this crustacean we attempted

to show that the arachnidan features were also to be found in

certain crabs and shrimps whose development was exceptional, one

or two naturalists (as E. Van Beneden and Dohrn) claim that

Limulus is not a true crustacean, but belongs next to or with the

Arachnida. ‘This seems to us an extreme view. Then followed

the beautiful anatomical researches of Alphonse Milne-Edwards on

Limulus polyphemus, in which he showed the singular relation

between the vascular and nervous systems, the latter being enve-

loped by the ventral system of the arteries. The differences be-

tween the nervous system of the king crab and Arachnida has

been already indicated+. It has not been, we think, sufficiently

taken into account that Limu/us is a generalized or synthetic type,

combining with features of its own certain resemblances to the

Arachnida and to the normal Crustacea. In its mode of respiration,

its external gills, and in its circulatory organs it is, as we have

previously stated t, essentially a crustacean, but should be placed

apart from the normal Crustacea, and form the living representative

of a subclass, equivalent to all the other living Crustacea. To

Limulus are closely allied the fossil Merostomata ; and we regard,

for reasons already stated, the Trilobites as closely allied to the

Merostomata.

‘For this subclass we have proposed the name Palzocarida ; and

for the normal Crustacea we have proposed the term Neocarida.

* “The Development of Limulus polyphemus,” by A. S. Packard, Jun.

(Memoirs of the Boston Soc. of Nat. Hist., published March 1872).

+ ‘American Naturalist,’ vol. ix. pp. 422, 423, July 1875.

{ ‘Further Observations on the Embryology of Limulus, with notes

on its Affinities,” American Naturalist, Noy. 1873, vol. vii. p. 675.

190 Miscellaneous.

In order to express the relations of the two subclasses of Crus-

tacea, we have published * the following table, showing the mode of

grouping of the different orders of the two subclasses of the class

of Crustacea :—

Classification of the Subclasses and Orders of Crustacea.

Ss : S l=

7S it Ss o

Ss 3 S 3

Se Ss :

S = S 'S Si =

D = S ‘= 3S A

eS = S| : 5

Shae Sates poker eat 3S )

> a S ()

B $ S 7S 5 : oO

S S a = . 8 A

= S oat < 3 SS ont

= ~ iS 3 ~~ Se

Ry 3 S s Ss S—

Re cs Pisa

ee Seis

iS 3

SS =

| | | |

So ~; oe ———_

NEOCARIDA. PALOCARIDA.

CRUSTACEA.

While the Neocarida are characterized by the well-known fea-

tures peculiar to all living Crustacea except Limulus, the Paleo-

carida have, among others, the following characters :—A ppendages

of the cephalothorax in the form of legs rather than jaws; no an-

tenn ; brain on the same plane as the cephalothoracic ganglionic

ring, and supplying nerves to the eyes alone; nerves to the

cephalothoracic appendages sent off from an cesophageal ring;

neryous system ensheathed by a ventral system of arteries ; meta-

morphosis slight. Sexes distinct.

Order 1. Merostomata.—No distinct thoracic segments and ap-

pendages. (Limulus, Hurypterus, &c.)

Order 2. Trilobita.—Numerous free thoracic segments and jointed

appendages. (Agnostus, Paradoxides, Calymene, Trinucleus, Asa-

phus, &e. ; all extinct.)

A further elaboration of this classification, with full references

to the labours of others, is to be given in a second memoir on the

anatomy and development of Limulus polyphemus, in course of

preparation.— American Naturalist, December 1879.

* Zoology for Students and General Readers. American Science

Series. By A.S. Packard, Jun. H. Holt & Co., New York. Published

in December 1879, 8vo, pp. 703.

Miscellaneous. 191

On two new Species of Cephalopods.

By A. E. Verriz.

Among the numerous additions recently made to the marine

fauna of our coast by the fishermen of Gloucester, Mass., are two

new species of Cephalopods. They both belong to the eight-armed

division. One is a true Octopus. The other and more interesting

one is the second known representative of the remarkable family of

Cirroteuthide, characterized by the presence of a pair of fins, one

on each side of the body, supported by a transverse cartilage—by

the presence of a great web, surrounding and uniting all the arms

nearly to their tips—and by the presence of two slender cirri between

the suckers along the greater part of the length of the arms.

Our species differs so widely from Cirroteuthis Miilleri, Esch.,

the only representative of the family hitherto described, that it is

necessary to constitute for it a new genus.

STAUROTEUTHIS, gen. Nov.

Allied to Cirroteuthis, but with the mantle united to the head all

around, and to the dorsal side of the slender siphon, which it sur-

rounds like a close collar, leaving only a very narrow opening

around the base of the siphon, laterally and ventrally. Fins trian-

gular, in advance of the middle of the body. Dorsal cartilage

forming a median angle directed backward. Body flattened, soft,

bordered by a membrane. Eyes covered by the integument. Web

not reaching the tips of the arms, the edge concave in the intervals.

Suckers in one row. Cirri absent between the basal and terminal

suckers. Right arm of second pair altered, in the male, at the

tip.

Stauroteuthis syrtensis, sp. nov.

3. Head broad, depressed, not very distinct from the body.

Eyes large. Body elongated, flattened, soft or gelatinous, widest

in the middle, narrowed but little forward, but decidedly tapered,

back of the fins, to the flat, obtuse, or subtruncate tail. The sides

of the head and of the body, forward of the fins, are bordered by a

thin soft membrane, about half an inch wide. ‘The fins are elon-

gated, triangular, obtusely pointed, placed in advance of the middle

of the body. Siphon elongated, slender, round, with a small ter-

minal opening. Mantle-edge so contracted and thickened around

its base as to show scarcely any opening, and united to it dorsally.

Arms long, slender, subequal, each united to the great web by a

broad membrane developed on its outer side, widest (about 1:5

inch) in the middle of the arm, while the edge of the web unites

directly to the sides of the arms and runs along the free portion

toward the very slender tip, as a border. This arrangement gives

a swollen or campanulate form to the extended web. Edges of the

web incurved between the arms, widest between the two lateral

pairs of arms. The arms bear each fifty-five or more suckers, in a

single row. Those in the middle region are wide apart (‘5 inch or

182 Miscellaneous.

more) with a pair of slender thread-like cirri, about 1 inch long,

midway between them. The cirrl commence, in a rudimentary

form, between the 5th and 6th suckers on the dorsal arms, and be-

tween the 7th and &th on the ventral ones. They cease before the

93rd sucker on the dorsal and lateral arms, and before the 22nd on

the ventral ones. Near the mouth and beyond the last cirri on the

free portion of the arms the suckers are more closely arranged.

They are small, with a deep cavity. Colour (in alcohol) vénerally

pale, with irregular mottlings and streaks of dull brownish ; inner

surface of arms and web toward the base, and membrane around

the mouth, deep purplish brown. Length from end of body to base

of arms 6°30 inches, length to posterior base of fins 2°50, to ante-

rior base 4; width across fins 5, in advance of fins 2°70 (not in-

cluding lateral membrane), across eyes 1:75, across end of tail 1°20;

diameter of eye 1; width of fins at base 1°20, their length 1°75;

length of arms 13 to l4, portion beyond web 2°5 to 3; edge of

extended web, between upper arms, about 4, between lateral arms

about 8; entire circumference of web about 48.

Taken by Capt. Melvin Gilpatrick and crew, schooner ‘ Polar

Wave,’ N. lat. 43° 54’, W. long. 58° 44’, on Banquereau, about 30

miles east of Sable Island, in 250 fathoms. Presented to the U.S.

Fish Commission, Sept. 1879.

Octopus piscatorum, Sp. nov.

Body of female smooth, depressed, about as broad as long,

obtusely rounded posteriorly, not showing any lateral ridges, nor

dorsal papille. No cirrus above the eyes. Arms long, rather

slender, tapering to long, slender, acute tips, the upper ones a little

(-1 of an inch) shorter than those of the second pair, which are the

longest ; the third pair are about 4 inch shorter than the second ;

the ventral pair about } inch shorter than the third. In our speci-

men all the arms on the right side are somewhat shorter than those

on the left, and the web between the Ist and 2nd arms is narrower,

due perhaps to recovery from an injury. The suckers are mode-

rately large, alternating in two regular rows, except close to the

mouth, where a few stand nearly in a single line; about fourteen

to sixteen are situated on the part of the arms included within the

interbrachial web. The whole number of suckers on one arm is

upwards of seventy. The web between the arms, except ventrally,

is white; end of siphon brown. Lower side of head and arms

lighter than the dorsal side. Total length from posterior end of

body to tip of arms, of Ist pair 6°20 inches, 2nd pair 6°30, 3rd. pair

5:75, 4th pair 5:25, to web between dorsal arms 3°25, between

Miscellaneous. 193

ventral arms 2°50, to edge of mantle beneath 1:20, to centre of eye

1:55; breadth of body 1-2 25, of head across eyes 1:20, of arms at

base *22; diameter of largest suckers ‘10; length of arms beyond

web (Ist pair) 3:00, 2nd pair. 3°25, 3rd pair 2°80, 4th pair 2°75.

Takeu by Capt. John McInnis and crew of the schooner ‘ M. H.

Perkins, from the western part of Le Have Bank, off Nova Scotia,

in 120 fathoms. Presented to the U.S. Fish Commission, Oct.

1879. .*

This species is easily distinguished from O. Bairdi, by its more

elongated body, its much longer and more tapered arms, with

shorter web, by the absence of the large, rough, pointed papilla or

cirrus above the eyes, and by its general smoothness. The white

colour of the underside of the neck, siphon, and mantle-border also

appears to be characteristic.—Amer. Journ. Sct. and Arts, December

1879.

On Amoeba Blattee.

Prof. Leidy remarked that while perusing the communication of

Prof. Butschli on ’lagellata and other related organisms (‘“ Bei-

triige aur Kenntniss der Flagellaten und einiger verwandten Orga-

nismen”) in the Zeitschrift, fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, 187 8,

p. 205, his attention was especially attracted by the description of

a parasitic amoeboid living in the intestine of the cockroach (Blatta

orientalis. It recalled to mind that he had observed the same

creature a number of years ago, in association with the ciliated

infusorian he had described as Nyctotherus ovalis. At that time he

had viewed it as a young form of a Gregarina, and had intended

giving it and other parasites of the cockroach more critical exami-

nation, but failed to do so. The parasitic amoeboid which Prof.

Butschli describes under the name of Amoeba Blatte is particularly

interesting on account of its habits and its somewhat peculiar cha-

racter. Prof. Leidy had recently examined some cockroaches, and

found abundance of the amceboid in association with Nyctotherus

ovalis, Lophomonas blattaram, Oxvyurus gracilis, and O. appendicu-

latus, and an algoid plant.

The amceboid, he thought, was worthy of generic distinction

from the true Ameba, holding a position between this and Prota-

mocba. From the former it differed in the absence of a contractile

vesicle and commonly also of vacuoles, and in the want of differen-

tiation of endosare and ectosare ; and from the latter in the posses-

sion of a well-defined nucleus. He proposed for it the following

name with distinctive characters :—

ENDAM@BA.

General character and habit of Amcaba; composed of colourless,

homogeneous, granular protoplasm, in the ordinary normal active

condition without distinction of ectosarec and endosare; with a

distinct nucleolated nucleus, but ordinarily with neither contractile

vesicle nor vacuoles.

194 Miscellaneous.

Indameba blatte.

Eine Art Proteus, Seibold, Beitr. z. Naturges. d. wirb. Thiere, 18389,

Jide Stein.

Amoébenform, Stein, Organismus d. Infusionsthiere, 1867, ii. p. 845.

Ameba Blatte, Biitschli, Zeitsch. f. wiss. Zoologie, 1878, xxx. p. 273,

Taf. xv. fig. 26.

Initial form globular, passing into spheroidal, oval, or variously

lobate forms, mostly clavate, and moving with the broader" pole in

advance. Protoplasm finely granular, and when in motion more

or less distinctly striate. Nucleus spherical, granular, with a large

nucleolus. Distinct food particles commonly few or none. Size

of globular forms 0-054 millim. to 0°075 in diameter; elongated

forms 0:075 by 0:06 to 0°15 by 0:09 millim. Parasitic in the

large intestine of Blatta orientalis.

The Endameba blatte affords a good example of a primitive

active nucleated organic corpuscle, or a so-called organic cell with-

out a cell-wall. In the encysted condition it would be a complete

nucleated organic cell. Hndameba may be recommended as a

convenient illustration of a primitive form of the organic cell, on

account of its comparatively ready accessibility.—Proc. Acad. Nat.

Sc. Philad., October 7, 1879.

On the Habits and Parthenogenesis of the Halicti.

By M. J. H. Fasrzs.

Two species have chiefly furnished the materials for the prepa-

ration of this paper, namely Halictus lineolatus, Lep., and H. sea-

cinctus, Latr. The investigation of the former was made under the

most favourable conditions; every day, at whatever moment he

chose, and from one end of the year to the other, the observer had

under his eyes the object of his inquiries in its natural state of

being. The place of observation was in front of his door, in the

open country, in the midst of meadows. It was among the osier-

beds of the alluvial deposits of the Aygues, a torrent to the north of

Orange, that the second species (/7. sewcinctus) was observed, in a

colony sufficiently populous to lend itself to detailed observations.

Followed up for a whole year, the study of these Hymenoptera has

furnished the following results.

Among the Halicti there is no society in the entomological sense

of the word: the family is not common ; and the cares of all have

not in view the interests of all. ach mother is only preoccupied

with her own oviposition, and constructs cells and collects pollen

only for her own larve, without interfering at all with the rearing

of the larvee of others ; but there is nevertheless cooperation between

them for general work, of which several may take advantage with-

out hampering each other. This common work is the gallery, which,

ramifying in the depths of the soil, gives access to various groups

of cells, each of which groups is the property of a single Halictus,

Miscellaneous. 195

A single entrance-gate and a single passage thus correspond to

several distinct domiciles.

It is especially at night that these digging labours for the exeava-

tion of the cells and the boring of new galleries are performed. A

cone of fresh earth raised on the threshold of the orifice of the

passage bears witness every morning to the nocturnal activity, and

by its size proves that several Hymenoptera have participated in the

work.

The cells of the Halicti consist of oval excavations, narrowed into

a neck at the upper part. Their walls are varnished with a water-

proof coating, which adds to the delicate polish of the chamber and

protects the interior from the invasion of damp. This varnish is of

the same nature as the goldbeater’s-skin-like substance with which

the Collet line their galleries and construct their little honey-bags.

Every thing tends to prove that this product of the two types of

Hymenoptera is of salivary origin, and may be compared to the

mucosity which certain birds, such as the swift and the salangane,

introduce into the construction of their nests.

For the Halicti September is solely the month of amours. Then

the males, whose number exceeds that of the females, dance inces-

santly over the burrows and make their way into the passages. The

females remain in retirement in their cells or in the galleries, and

the copulation takes place underground. When the first chills of

November arrive all the males have disappeared ; and the females,

which are then fertilized, pass the winter enclosed in their cells.

Towards the month of May the females, fertilized in the autumn,

issue from their burrows and work at the nest in the absence of all

mules, whose assistance, however, is none theless real because it has

preceded the oviposition by six months.

In July a second generation is produced, without the presence of

any males; but this time the want of cooperation of one of the

sexes is no longer an appearance, but a reality placed beyond doubt

by the continuity of the observations.

Two months later males and females are produced from this

generation of a single sex. Fecundation takes place underground ;

the males perish ; the females hibernate; and the same order of

things recommences.

Thus the Halictz have two generations yearly :—one in the spring,

sexual, proceeding from mothers which, having been fertilized in

the autumn, have passed the winter in their cells ; the other, zstival,

due to parthenogenesis. From the concourse of the two sexes

females alone are produced; from parthenogensis originate both

males and females.

From this it seems probable that other insects with several ovi-

positions in the year may possess the double mode of reproduction

of the Halcti ; but, with the exception of the Aphides, the partheno-

genesis of which has so long been known, what are these insects ?

and if there are such, do they confirm the suspicions to which the

Halicti give rise? This the author proposes to investigate.

196 Miscellaneous.

Halictus sexcinctus has Myodites subdipterus as a parasite. The

larva of this curious fly-like beetle devours the larva of the Hymeno-

pteron when the latter has finished its provision of honey. The

author does not yet know how the parasitic worm-like creature,

which is incapable of progression, is introduced into the cell of the

Halictus. Perhaps there may be here an initial transfiguration, and

habits having some analogy to those of the Meloides.—Comptes

Rendus, Dec. 22, 1879, p. 1079.

On the Locomotion of Insects and Arachnida.

By M. G. Canter.

The mode of locomotion of insects and Arachnida is much more

regular than is usually supposed. The only rule laid down by

authors is that the two legs of the same pair never move simul-

taneously. By examining insects the movements of which are slow

and the legs equidistant, such as Oryctes nasicornis and Timarcha

tenebricosa, we see that the limbs move as indicated in the

following table, in which the legs are arranged in their natural

position, and the numbers indicate the order in which they are

raised :—

Whilst the legs 1, 2, 3 are raised almost simultaneously, the legs

4, 5, 6 remain in support, to be raised in their turn when the

former have come to rest. In other words, the insect rests upon a

triangle of sustentation formed by the two extreme feet of the same

side and the middle foot of the other side, while it moves forward

the other three feet. I have ascertained that this mode of locomo-

tion is equally characteristic of the other orders of insects.

Arachnida.—l have been able to follow very clearly the order of

movement of the legs in the female of Hpeira diadema. It is

almost impossible to catch this order in male spiders, in consequence

of the rapidity of their progression. In the females the voluminous

abdomen forms a burden which retards movement and enables the

following table to be traced :—

Here the polygon of sustentation is a quadrangle formed on the

one side by the feet of even numbers, and on the other by those of

odd numbers.— Comptes Rendus, December 29, 1879, p. 1124.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. |

No. 27. MARCH 1880.

XVI.—Investigations on the Development of the Spiders.

By Dr. J. Barros *.

[Plate IX. ]

My researches upon the development of the Spiders have been

directed to various species—TZegenaria domestica, several

undetermined species of Lycosa, and especially Kpetra diadema,

already studied by Herold. The object that I particularly

proposed to myself was to trace by means of sections the

arrangement of the lamellae and the phenomena of internal

development, which have never been investigated in this

group of animals. My studies have led me to modify some of

the opinions hitherto accepted upon the external development ;

and I shall give these results together with tne others. My

process of research has been the observation either of fresh or

slightly heated ova, or of ova coloured by bichromate of potash

and osmic acid, hardened by alcohol, and cleared by essential

oil of cloves; by means of the last we succeed much better in

seeing the different parts. In making the sections, I employed

especially Leyser’s microtome, now used almost everywhere in

Germany, and which I owe to the kindness of Professor

Leuckart, to whom I am glad to have the opportunity of

offering my thanks.

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from a separate copy, furnished

by the author, of the memoir published in the ‘ Journal de l’Anatomie et

de la Physiologie,’ tome xiv. pp. 529-547,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 14

198 Dr. J. Barrois on the

Before approaching the special subject of my memoir I will

say a few words as to the formation of the blastoderm.

Since Balbiani’s memoir, Ludwig has published a very

complete treatise upon this subject: I adopt most of the

results of this author; but there are some observations which

I must offer. Ludwig has asserted that the granular layer

placed by Balbiani at the surface of the vitellus (couche plas-

teque of Balbiani) really belonged to the vitelline membrane ;

I must declare myself against this assertion. I have, in fact,

found over the vitelline membrane a special layer not de-

scribed by Balbiani, to which, as Ludwig says, is due the net-

work that we observe at the surface of the ovum: it is not

formed by a continuous layer of juxtaposed globules, but only

of globules arranged in lines which intercross to form a kind

of net, in the meshes of which the vitelline membrane is un-

covered; the whole appears most distinctly in the ova of

Epeira diadema treated with nitrate of silver. Independently

ot this reticulated layer, I further distinguish, like Balbiani,

the formative globules of the cells of the blastoderm. These

sometimes acquire large dimensions, and present great regu-

larity ; one cannot mistake their identity with the elements

described by Balbiani when one observes the ova of Tege-

naria domestica,

I therefore regard the description given by Balbiani of the

granules of the plastic layer as pertectly correct, and am of

opinion that this observer has done good service by drawing

attention to the strongly granular character of the protoplasm

in the Spiders ; but I adhere rather to Ludwig as regards the

distribution of these protoplasmic elements. I have never

seen them form a continuous layer at the surface of the ovum,

nor divide up into germinative areas; but I see them con-

stantly appear in the form of trains or series between the

vitelline globules of the surface. Ludwig’s deutoplasm-

columns (Deutoplasmasdulen) are generally to be recognized

without difficulty ; but I have not been able to see them in

all the species—which, without invalidating the description

given by Ludwig, leads me to doubt the absolute necessity of

a regular arrangement of the masses of deutoplasm. ‘There

may be a greater condensation of the embryogeny in cer-

tain species, so as to arrive at such a distribution of the pro-

toplasm, but without such a complete fusion of the masses

of deutoplasm into deutoplasm-columns—which would carry

back the essential characters of the formation of the blasto-

derm to the strongly granulated character of the protoplasm,

and to its first appearance between the vitelline globules of

the surface.

Development of the Spiders. 199

This being stated, we may pass to the formation of the

embryo. y

The first observer who occupied himself seriously with this

subject did not go so far as to the formation of the ventral

embryonic band; he only described the thickening of the

blastoderm, and then passed without any transition to the stage

of the young spider rolled up in the egg, leaving an enormous

hiatus.

This gap was in part filled up by Claparéde, who greatly

added to our knowledge on this subject by describing. the

development of the embryonic band, its subsequent division

into ventral pads, and its segmentation into zonites of three

kinds—thoracic, abdominal, and postabdominal. Neverthe~

less even he saw only half the phenomena; his description

omits, between the last stage of the embryonic bands and the

young spider, a second series of important phenomena which

have hitherto remained unknown.

In what follows I shall divide the subject into three parts :—

1. The stage of the embryonic bands, described by Claparéde,

as to which I have only a few supplementary notes to add ;

2. The Limuloid stage, hitherto unknown, and which I shall

have to describe completely; 3. The stage of the young

spider rolled up in the egg, already weil investigated by

Herold, but which we shall have to reconsider from the point

of view of the lamelle.

I. Embryonic Band.

If we make a section of the egg at this stage, we see that

Claparéde’s ventral pads are really composed of two lamellee :

—1, the external simple one, which extends over the whole

surface of the egg; and 2, the intermediate one, arranged in

two cords, formed of several rows of embryonic cells: these

cords exactly correspond to the ventral pads ; and I reserve to

them the name of germinative bands. ‘Vhese germinative

bands exist throughout the whole length of the egg. They are

derived from the scission of an originally continuous meso-

dermic band, but do not present the same arrangement through-

out: in the abdominal region they are thin and of but small

extent; in the future thoracic region, on the contrary, they

are much larger, and begin to show a division into a central

part (the nervous bands) still adherent to the external lamella,

and a peripheral part, which is purely mesodermic. In front

the two germinative bands pass to two projections of a

circular form, direct prolongations of their nervous portion,

which will form the cerebral lobes ; these are the representa-

tives of the procephalic lobes of Claparéde and Huxley

200 Dr. J. Barrois on the

(Schettelplatten of German authors). These lobes are bounded

within and above by a groove bordered on all sides by a pro-

jecting crest due to a thickening of the cells of the blastoderm.

This crest forms between the lobes a projecting tongue, no

doubt the representative of the labrum (Vorderkopf of the Ger-

mans), and is afterwards produced on each side into two semi-

circular thickenings which surround the cephalic lobes on the

outside. The base of the tongue, which represents the labrum,

presents a deepening of its median furrow, which indicates the

commencement of the invagination of the cesophagus and

constitutes the mouth. We see that the structure of the

cephalic region is much more complex than Claparéde sup-

posed, and that we can recognize in it all the constituent parts

of the head of the Arthropoda; its aspect presents striking

analogies with what Metschnikoff has desetibad in the Scor-

pions: the labium does not appear to be formed until a little

later, and independently of the cephalic portion, at the expense

of a median thickening of the mesoderm, placed between the

first union of the two nervous bands below the cesophagus

(seer bl! TX. fies.)2,'3, 0).

As regards the number of zonites of the embryonic band, I

have found it, at least in Hpetira diadema, greater than that

given by Claparéde. ‘The number of segments following the

six thoracic ones appears to me in general to amount to ten

(including the anal hood); the first four are more developed

and constantly bear rudiments of limbs; all the others have

always seemed to me destitute of appendages.

Besides the rudiment of a limb, or the vacant space which

takes its place and forms the median part directly superim-

posed upon the germinative band of each of the segments, all

the zonites of the abdomen always present, towards the last

periods of the stage of the embryonic band, two lateral por-

tions, a sternal and a tergal plate, formed by thickened cells

of the blastoderm, beneath which the mesoderm of the germi-

native bands has begun to spread out in a thin layer. The

tergals are always perfectly visible, and are wider in the four

anterior abdominal segments; the sternals in the posterior

segments appear under the form of perfectly distinct, thin,

elongated plates, which may easily be mistaken for rudi-

ments of limbs (as no doubt has been done by Claparéde) if

one does not pay particular attention to their position. In

reality the six posterior segments have always seemed to me

to be destitute of appendages; their median portion, superim-

posed upon the germinative band, being only occupied by a

paler line.

This appearance of the sternal and tergal arcs shows us that

Development of the Spiders. 201

at this stage the ventral pads do not tend to become effaced,

as Claparéde says, but that, on the contrary, they are in a

progressive course ; we see, moreover, that the formation of

appendages is not irregular and variable according to the

species, but that it is constantly limited to the first four

zonites.

Il. Limuloid Stage.

According to Claparéde, the whole passage from the state of

embryonic band to that of the young spider rolled up in the

egg is reduced to a translation of the ventral pads towards the

dorsal region ; this displacement in its turn causes an approxi-

mation towards the ventral region of the two extremities of

the embryo, and thus produces its rolling up in proportion as

the ‘ventral pads .separate from each other. The nutritive

vitellus protrudes through the fissure which these pads have

left between them (fente sternale, Clap.), and finally passes

entirely through this fissure, so as to become completely ven-

tral: the position of the embryo is thus entirely changed ; and

it becomes rolled in the opposite direction to its former one.

This process is completed at the period when the ventral

pads have come to occupy the lateral epimeral region, of which,

according to Claparede, they are the representatives (we have

seen that this interpretation is erroneous, and that they repre-

sent in addition the sternal and tergal arcs, the part occupied

by the limb alone really forming the lateral region). Their

presence at this point keeps the two faces of the embryo dis-

tinct for a moment; but they soon finally disappear, so that

we no longer distinguish one face from the other, and the

posterior part of the body assumes the globular form so cha-

racteristic of the abdomen in the adult.

The passage of the vitellus through the sternal fissure is a

unique fact in the group Arthropoda; and the interpretation of

it given by Claparéde makes something quite peculiar out of

the embryogeny of the Spiders. Ingenious as this conception

may be, however, it is far from sufficing to explain the passage

from the embryonic band to the state of the young spider

rolled up in the egg, and one feels the necessity of a less

theoretical description. »

In order to trace this passage in all its details, we shall take

up again the last stage of the germinative band and examine

its changes step by step; the phenomena differ according as

we examine the anterior, middle, or posterior portion of the

body.

1. Anterior portion—The buccal depression becomes in-

vaginated, and gives origin to a tube ; the latter, which grows

202 Dr. J. Barrois on the

rapidly inwards, is destined to form the cesophagus, the suck-

ing-stomach, and the portion of the intestine which immedi-

ately follows—in one word, all the median tubular portion of

the digestive canal contained in the thorax: it is quite com-

pleted at the commencement of the third period, in the young

spider rolled up in the egg.

As this invagination penetrates inwards it gives rise to con-

comitant modifications, which are of great importance in

understanding the structure of the thorax. If we make a

transverse section in the middle of the thorax of a spider, we

see that the musculature is constituted as follows (see fig. 6) :-—

1, a central part formed by three muscular bundles (m)

attached to the cesophagus; the first, which is unpaired, is

vertical, and is attached to the vertex of the body; the other

two, paired, form a horizontal plane, and, covering the ventral

ganglionic masses, pass to attach themselves to the bases of

the legs; 2, of a peripheral part (m!') composed of fibres which

skirt the wall, and which constantly go from the bases of the

feet to the vertex of the body. This second part of the mus-

culature is of comparatively late formation ; it does not make

its appearance until rather late, and only acquires its full

growth during the postembryonic development : the first, on the

contrary, appears early and proceeds pari passu with the invagi-

nation of theanterior part of the digestive tube. It would seem,

in fact, that this invagination carries with it in its movement

towards the posterior part (see figs. 4, 5) the peripheral por-

tions of the germinative bands, in such a way as to form three

cellular laminee—a median one detached from the cephalic

portion, the other two lateral ones from the two germinative

bands. ‘These three lamine represent the three muscular

planes marked m in fig. 6: the first, which directly surrounds

the cesophagus (fig. 4, m), represents a longitudinal partition

which will divide the cavity of the thorax into two parts ; the

two others, two transverse partitions which will soon unite

into a single plane directly covering the ventral ganglia. Soon

after the last stages of the embryonic band the cephalic portion

is rounded behind, and, as Claparéde has already stated, sepa-

rated from the vitellus by a deep emargination ; but after the

period when the three cellular plates (m, fig. 4) begin to form,

we see it produced into an elongated point, which is already

figured by Claparéde, and represents the vertical partition

(m, fig. 6) which gradually elongates simultaneously with the

cesophagus.

Figs. 4 and 5 show the three planes at the moment when

they begin to detach themselves from the germinative bands.

In proportion as the invagination of the cesophagus progresses

Development of the Spiders. 203

it carries them with it towards the posterior part: the vertical

partition is thus carried to the end of the thorax, which it

completely divides into two symmetrical halves (fig. 6, cc), at

first filled with nutritive vitellus; the transverse partitions

are simply spread out and brought nearer to each other, so as

to form a continuous muscular plane, situated at first in the

fore part of the thorax. In thus approaching each other these

two planes carry with them the two nervous bands, which

they always immediately cover; and thus is effected the ap-

proximation of these latter to form a central mass, which

directly afterwards divides into ganglia. This union of the

nervous bands is therefore itself only a consequence of the

growth of the invagination of the cesophagus; and all the

phenomena which give origin to the thorax may be referred

to this single cause.

When once these processes are completely terminated, the

thorax is formed in all its more essential features. One of

the chief effects of its formation is to restrict the cavity of

the whole anterior part of the embryo; the vitellus is driven

back towards the posterior part; and there only remains in

the thorax the portion which will give origin to the ceca of

the stomach.

2. Median portion.—In this portion we see each of the

tergal and sternal pieces increase to unite with that of the

opposite side, so as to form a complete arch. The tergal arcs

grow rapidly ; and we are soon able to distinguish perfectly

distinct hemizonites formed by their union in the dorsal

region. Of these we always distinguish four much wider than

the others, formed by the first four abdominal segments ; with

the other narrower ones which follow them they constitute a

dorsal plate, to which we shall refer again. ‘The sternal ares

likewise increase, but more slowly ; and, moreover, their union

is prevented by the projection of the nutritive vitellus, which,

pushed backward by the contraction of the thoracic region and

by the formation of the complete tergal arches, protrudes

through the sternal fissure, passing between the two hemi-

sternals. At the same time that the thickening of the cells of

the external lamella, which constitutes the sternal and tergal

plates, advances more and more towards the median lines of

the back and belly, the thin mesodermic layer subjacent to it

likewise increases. At the period when the tergals have

united to form complete arches, we also find a complete meso-

dermic layer, which extends beneath the whole of the tergal

plate, and which from the first begins to thicken upon the

median line, to give origin to the dorsal vessel ; at the edges,

between the sternals and the lateral region, there is always a

204. _ Dr. J. Barrois on the

thickening, the still persistent remains of the germinative

bands.

3. Posterior extremity.—At the period of the last stage of

the embryonic band this latter runs completely round the egg,

and its posterior extremity comes nearly into contact with the

cephalic region ; lastly the germinative bands, in running to

unite in the anal hood (placed high up on the dorsal surface) ,

form between them a very acute angle. In the subsequent

stages we see the anal segment gradually increase its distance

from the cephalic region, and pass more and more towards

the ventral region ; this displacement of the anal segment in

its turn causes a modification in the separation of the germina-

tive bands, the angle formed by their union tending to become

more and more obtuse. The same processes continue regu-

larly until the anal segment has come to occupy the extremity

opposite to the cephalic region, at which period the two ger-

minative bands have come into the same plane, the progres-

sive separation of the two sides of the obtuse angle finally

producing a straight line. If we imagine a continuation of

the same phenomena, we shall see the anal segment come to

occupy a position upon the ventral surface, and the germina-

tive bands approach each other again, but in the inverse

sense, so as to form an angle opposed to that which they

formed at the commencement; this state concludes the pro-

cess by which the posterior extremity of the embryonic bands,

at first directed towards the dorsal side, becomes recurved

towards the ventral region.

If we attempt to trace the same phenomena in Arthropods

with a projecting caudal part (e. g. the Phryganide), in which

the recurvation of the caudal part is regarded as the cause and

origin of the whole inversion of the embryo in the egg, we

shall find exactly the same phenomena (1, retractation of the

caudal region and separation of the germinative bands; 2,

arrival of the anal segment at the posterior pole of the egg,

and arrival: of the embryonic bands in the same plane ;

3, arrival of the anal segment upon the ventral surface, and

approximation of the embryonic bands in the inverse direc-

tion). The only difference consists in that the same pheno-

mena will take place in the depth instead of at the surface of

the egg: and this difference is not at all essential ; for we may

still recognize in the Spiders a remnant of a tendency of the

caudal portion to detach itself from the rest of the vitellus ;

the anal segment almost always forms at first a strong pro-

jection, which indicates the commencement of this process.

We shall therefore arrive at the conclusion that in the Spiders,

as in the other Arthropoda, the cause and origin of the pheno-

Development of the Spiders. 205

menon of inversion resides essentially in the caudal region ;

the protrusion of the nutritive vitellus through the sternal

fissure is a purely passive feature of development, and deter-

mined by the pushing back of the vitellus towards the poste-

rior region—a movement resulting from the three processes

just indicated, all three of which produce, in different degrees,

the effect of restricting the capacity of the embryo.

Limuloid Stage-—The three series of modifications that we

have just indicated are not all produced with the same

rapidity ; the last two are more rapid, and are seen com-

pletely finished at a period when the union of the two

nervous bands has only commenced under the cephalic region.

At this period, in consequence of these changes, the embryo

presents a very remarkable aspect (see fig. 1). It is divided

into two distinct parts, answering to the thoracic and abdo-

minal segments, and which seem to me to correspond in a

very striking manner to the two divisions of the body in the

Xiphosura: the posterior portion, or tergal plate, is formed by

the amalgamation of all the tergal arcs; we can recognize

in it each of the segments which formed the abdomen in

the embryonic band; but here this abdomen is divided into

two parts—a preabdomen composed of six segments, and a

narrow postabdomen formed of four segments. ‘The pre-

abdomen is itself subdivided into four broad zonites bearing

appendages already indicated in the embryonic band, and

two much narrower ones following the former. The anal

segment at first appears simple; and in Hpeitra diadema it is

impossible to discover in it any trace of division. Never-

theless, by examining the sternal arcs we ascertain that

the one corresponding to the anal segment is divided into

three distinct pieces, which shows that this anal segment

is here equivalent to three segments soldered together. This

interpretation of the anal segment is not without interest, if

we collate it with the fact, observed in Pholcus by Claparede,

of the early division of the anal segment into three distinct

segments. ‘The fact observed in Epeira diadema shows that

this is perhaps general, and that this division, although rarely

so early, none the less virtually exists.

This multiple value of the anal segment brings the number

of segments of the entire abdomen to twelve, and that of the

postabdomen to six; and this agrees within a segment with

the exact number of zonites in the abdomen of the Scorpions,

and corresponds exactly for the postabdomen. ‘The stage

fig. 1, so like the king-crabs in the division of the body into

two portions, would thus prove to come very near the Scor-

pions in the number of zonites in the different divisions.

206 Dr. J. Barrois on the

This fact teaches us to compare this stage with the fossil

forms of the Merostomata, which so often resemble passage-

types between the Scorpions and the Xiphosura. Among the

latter there is even a form (Hemiaspis limuloides) which

seems to me to recall in a striking manner the stage which

I have indicated in the Spiders: in it the body is in like

manner separated into two divisions, of which the posterior

contains ten segments, which are divided in the same way

into six preabdominal and four postabdominal, the last of

which is elongated into a style; it may also be noted that

the first four preabdominals in this species present traces

of an organization somewhat superior to that of the two

following ones. ‘This predominance of the first four pre-

abdominals moreover appears to me to be a very constant

fact, not only among the Spiders, but in the whole group

Arachnida.

Metschnikoff has already shown that in the Scorpions they

appear at the same time and before all the others, and that

the formation of the ventral ganglia in their interior also

greatly precedes that of all the others. Unfortunately we do

not possess, with regard to the Limuli, data sufficiently com-

plete to enable us to judge whether this is the case in the

Xiphosura. Fig. 1 shows that at this period these segments

in the spider occupy a considerable space and form more than

half the tergal plate.

Besides the embryo proper (fig. 1), we have still to consider

in this stage the vitelline part (figs. 2, 3), bounded all round

by the nervous bands and the sternal plates (fig. 3). This

now represents only an annex of the embryo, and on all

accounts merits the name of vitelline vesicle; in fact, as in

the fishes, it forms a sac surrounded by a delicate blastoderm,

projecting from the ventral surface ; it is bounded on all sides

by the embryonic parts, and, in like manner, owes its origin

to a displacement towards the ventral part of a nutritive

vitellus too abundant to be entirely contained within the

embryo. Thus this hernia of the nutritive vitellus through

the sternal fissure, regarded by Claparéde as constituting a

mode of reversal (retournement) of a special nature differen-

tiating the development of the Spiders from that of the other

Arthropods, is due, according to me, solely to the presence in

the Spiders of a vitelline vesicle exactly like that of fishes: it

is, I believe, the first instance to which attention has been

called in the Invertebrata *.

Leaving out of consideration this presence of the vitelline

* Except perhaps in the Salpe.

Development of the Spiders. 207

vesicle, the entire evolution agrees absolutely with the deve-

lopment of the other Arthropoda, and consists essentially in

the followmg phenomena:—1, formation of a continuous

mesodermic band, and appearance of the sternal fissure di-

viding this band into germinative bands; 2, appearance of

the nervous portion within the latter; 3, growth of the ger-

minative bands towards the tergal region, then towards the

sternal ; 4, recurvation of the tail, and reversal &c.

Vig. 5 represents the boundaries of the vitelline vesicle. It

commences immediately below the point of union of the two

nervous bands—that is to say, a little behind the mouth in the

Limuloid stage; but it nevertheless already presents a sen-

sible flattening over all the rest of the thoracic region, and

only becomes greatly inflated beneath the abdominal region,

where it presents a thick projection : fig. 6 will assist in ren-

dering this arrangement intelligible.

Passage to the young spider.—lt we imagine exclusion to

take place at this period, the thorax will be completed by the

completion of the invagination of the cesophagus and the con-

comitant phenomena: the abdomen will close up by the growth

of the sternal bands; and the sternal vesicle, which they

compress on all sides, will be absorbed by degrees, and enter

gradually within the embryo in proportion as the sternal

plates grow over it so as to complete the zonites of the

abdomen. ‘There will thus be formed an organism analogous

to Hemiaspis limuloides, while the vitelline vesicle will follow

the ordinary course of absorption.

In the Spiders this is not the case. The new phenomena

which rapidly intervene confuse this normal course; the

sternal vesicle does not disappear by. absorption, but it is

covered up by the exaggerated development of the tergal

plate, and is entirely enclosed within the embryo. For

this purpose we see all the tergal plate, but especially the four

large anterior segments, increase both in length and breadth ;

the tergal plate, at first confined to the dorsal surface, thus

gradually encroaches upon the vitelline vesicle, which it

finally surrounds completely, leaving free only a small oval

space indicated in fig. 2 by the line 6v, which will be covered

up by the development of the sternal plates. At the period

when this envelopment is effected, the invagination of the

cesophagus and the constriction of the nervous bands have

been completed, and the thorax is finally constituted ; further,

at the boundary of each of the first four zonites of the abdo-

men there is formed a double fold of the mesoderm, com-

posed of flat cells, which advances into the mass of the

nutritive vitellus so as to constitute a true diaphragmatic

208 Dr. J. Barrois on the

partition, like those which keep the digestive tube of the

Annelids in place.

We have already seen that at this epoch these four zonites

had arrived at their maximum development, and played the

principal part in the envelopment of the vitelline vesicle by

the tergal plate; at the period when this envelopment is

completed, the segments of the postabdomen still occupy

only a small space in the posterior part, and the abdomen 1s

almost entirely formed by the first four preabdominals, the

diaphragmatic partitions of which divide the vitellus into four

large digitate masses, recognized and well figured by Herold

and especially by Claparéde, but of which they did not under-

stand the signification. ‘The abdomen of nearly all spiders is

thus almost entirely composed of these four extraordinarily

developed segments, which at last shows us their signification.

At the same time that these various phenomena take place,

the space left free (fig. 2, bv) by the tergal plate is covered

up by the sternal plates. It is at this period that the hmb-

rudiments of the first four abdominal segments disappear, and

that the boundary between the dorsal and ventral halves of

the body seems to disappear, to give place to an abdomen of

globular form, in which the limit between the sternals and the

tergals is no longer precisely indicated. We see that at the

period of this disappearance the ventral pads (in consequence

of the growth of the tergal plate) occupy a very different posi-

tion (bv, fig. 2) than was assigned to them by Claparéde at

the same epoch: the distinction between tergal and sternal

arches persists to the last inf the Spiders; but finally, as we

have seen, there is no proportion between the two pieces, the

tergal pieces having grown out of all proportion, and the

sternals forming only an insignificant part. The complete

disappearance of the lateral pads is caused by a displacement

of the last vestiges of the germinative bands. We have seen

that these last continued hitherto to form a slight thickening

on the edges of the tergal plate; at the period when the

sternals increase to cover up the portion left free by the tergal

plate (fig. 2, bv), this thickening quits the lateral region and

unites with that of the opposite side to form a compact meso-

dermic mass of oval form, upon the median line and imme-

diately within the space covered up by the sternals. From

this thickening will be formed later on the whole of the

straight abdominal part of the digestive tube, the excretory

organ, the spinning-glands, and the genital organs. The

spinnerets themselves originate at this period, in the form of

pretty large elevations of the skin, situated at the posterior

limit of the sternal plates: at first they only appear in

Development of the Spiders. 209

two pairs; the third smaller pair is not formed until later.

The spinnerets at first occupy a much larger space than

they afterwards do; subsequently they become more concen-

trated and rise into small and more definitely circumscribed

mamille.

Ill. The young Spider.

The passage from the embryonic band to the young spider

rolled up in the egg is therefore much more complex than as

described by Claparéde. It is during its progress that all the

most essential phenomena of the internal development take

place ; and it consists, as we have seen, of two great periods—

the passage from the embryonic band to the Limuloid stage,

and the passage from the Limuloid stage to the young spider.

When this last stage is arrived at, the spider is constituted

in all its most essential points, and already presents its defini-

tive form. We can obtain a sufficiently good idea of the sub-

sequent developmental aspects by consulting the figures given

by Herold, who carefully studied this period. The most

important phenomenon which occurs during it is the formation

of the inner lamella, which is produced at the expense of the

nutritive vitellus. Up to this time the vitelline masses retain

an irregular arrangement. ‘This irregularity persists in the

masses of the centre, but ceases in those of the surface, which

acquire a very regular arrangement at the period of the

extension of the tergal plate. At the same time there appear

between their boundaries trains of opaque granules; these

trains rapidly increase in thickness, and soon present from

place to place white spots recognizable as nuclei. These

nuclei increase simultaneously with the granules. The latter

represent the protoplasm, and speedily collect around the

nuclei to form cells, which then begin rapidly to multiply and

soon clothe the whole surface of the vitellus.

This appearance of the inner lamella is not without analogy

with that of the blastoderm; and it would appear that, as

Bobretzky has already indicated in Palemon and Oniscus, the

vitelline mass is twice active—once to form the outer lamella,

and a second time to form the inner lamella. I do not think

that we have here an immigration of blastodermic cells into the

interior of the mass of the nutritive vitellus: I have never

seen any thing that would justify such an assumption; and I

rather incline to believe that the productive activity of the

vitelline mass is not exhausted by the formation of the

blastoderm, and that there remains in it sufficient to pro-

duce the nuclei which we see reappear in the trains of pro-

toplasm.

210 Dr. J. Barrois on the

The inner lamella thus produced is destined to form in the

thorax the two pairs of ceca of the stomach, and in the abdo-

men the whole of the hepatic mass. The wall of the czeca of

the stomach is formed at once by the simple fact of the

appearance of a layer of cells at the surface of the two masses

of nutritive vitellus (ce, fig. 6) ; the vitellus which fills them

is gradually absorbed. As regards the liver, the cells of the

inner lamella begin by penetrating into the vitelline mass, at

first skirting the diaphragmatic partitions and then the

internal organs formed at the expense of the ventral meso-

dermic mass of the abdomen. In consequence of this pene-

tration of the cells into the interior, the nutritive vitellus

becomes divided into isolated fragments ; and these are gradu-

ally absorbed in proportion as the surrounding endodermic

cells multiply and take their place.

The liver and the two pairs of ceca of the stomach are

therefore all developed at the expense of the inner lamella,

while the straight tubular portion of the digestive canal, com-

prising the cesophagus, the sucking-stomach, the intestine,

and the rectum, is developed at the expense of the two other

lamella. The first two alone represent the endoderm ; and it is

evident that they only form a single part divided into two by

the constriction of the thorax; in the Arachnida with an

unpedunculated abdomen (Chelifer, Scorpions) they are not

separated from each other.

Beyond this formation of the inner lamella I have nothing

to describe, except some phenomena of detail which it would

be tedious to enumerate here (differentiation of the ventral

mesodermic mass of the abdomen, formation of the eyes, esta-

blishment of the circulation, &c.). The most important

phenomena consist in the strong development of the peripheral

musculature (m', fig. 6), especially in front of the cerebral

ganglia. At the commencement the internal organs, nervous

masses, stomach, &c., are closely applied to the skin, from

which they are separated only by a thin layer of mesodermic

cells; the chelicere are then still immediately anterior to the

cerebral ganglia; and the anterior triangular plate of the

thorax, which may still be distinguished even in the adult,

evidently corresponds to the cerebral ganglia. Subsequently,

when the thin mesodermic layer which clothes these organs

has become developed into a powerful musculature, the inter-

nal organs are displaced inwards, and become greatly sepa-

rated from the skin, which renders the relations of the divi-

sions of the body to the internal organs more difficult of

recognition. he chelicere depart far from the ganglionic

masses; and an entire long anterior portion seems to be added

Development of the Spiders. 211

to the cephalic portion: further, the muscular thickening at

this point is such that the correspondence of the anterior

thoracic plate and the cerebral ganglia is entirely masked.

In the abdomen the peripheral musculature is represented by

three groups of muscles (dorsal, ventral, and lateral)—the first

formed at the expense of the mesoderm which surrounds the

dorsal vessel, the other two at that of the ventral mesodermic

mass.

_A last fact which deserves to be mentioned is the consider-

able number of ganglionic masses of the thoracic region.

The nervous bands, in dividing, form, not only the five pairs

of large ganglia which persist in the adult, but also three or

four smaller pairs applied to the lower surface of the peduncle

and which are very visible shortly after exclusion ; these are,

no doubt, ganglia of abdominal segments which have concen-

trated themselves towards the thoracic region.

In conclusion, | may notice some interesting retrogressions

which take place towards the close of the passage to the adult,

such as the degeneration of the four diaphragmatic parti-

tions, of the dorsal portion of the peripheral musculature

of the abdomen, and of a considerable part of the nervous

system.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX.

Fig. 1. Limuloid stage, seen from the back.

Fig. 2, The same, seen in profile. J, labium; Je, cephalic lobe; 4,

mouth; vo, sternal vesicle; dv, limit of the extension of the

tergal plate.

Fig. 3. The same, seen on the ventral surface, and showing the distri-

bution of the mesoderm, as well as the limits of the vitel-

line vesicle. /, labium; o 6, labrum and mouth; 6, nervous

band.

Fig. 4. Section a little beiow the mouth. ch, cheliceree ; @, cesophagus ;

mmm, the three superficial parts of the germinative bands

carried on in the movement of the cesophagus; gn, cerebral

ganglia.

Section at the level of the labium; the nervous bands, bn, are

still adherent to the blastoderm. ch, chelicerze; /, labium; gn,

cerebral ganglia; m, as in fig. 4; bm, nervous bands.

Fig. 6. Diagram of the musculature in the thoracic region (theoretical).

m, central musculature; m’, peripheral musculature ; ¢ d, diges-

tive tube ; gn, ventral ganglia; ea, space in which the stomachal

ceeca will be formed.

Fig.

212 On the Spiral Character of Colenterate Development.

XVII.—The Spiral Character of Celenterate Development.

By Prof. Joun Youn, University of Glasgow.

In the Anthozoa fundamental numbers have been recognized—

four for the Cerianthus group, six for the Stone Corals,

eight for the Alcyonarians. _Mereschkowsky considers the

fundamental number for the Hydrozoa to be two (Ann. &

Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xx. p. 220). Gegenbaur speaks

of the tentacles as varying so that ‘we cannot suppose that

the secondary axes are definitely differentiated.” Hickel

refers the Coelenterate type to an imaginary six-sided pyra-

mid. Metschnikoff and Mereschkowsky have stated the mode

of development of the tentacles among the Hydroida in such

fashion as to give support to the view that the partition of the

Ccelenterates may be explained by analogy of the floral axis

in phenogamous plants. ‘The septa of the Anthozoa are de-

veloped in successive cycles, and symmetrically with reference

to the bilateral symmetry, of which the young and even the

adult stage give evidence. Huxley, following Lacaze-Duthiers,

gives (‘Manual of the Invertebrates,’ p. 158) the following

formula for the chambers of the hexamerous Anthozoon :—

aCE.FDB

CE*FDB

Mereschkowsky shows that the partition of the reproductive

sacs in the gonophore of Monobrachium takes place similarly

in paired fashion, the bilateral symmetry being there also

not lost sight of. As the later septa are successively shorter

than those immediately preceding, it appears as if the radiate

appearance of the Ccelenterata were due, not to the production

of equivalent antimeres round a common centre, but to the

shortening of an axis which had given off successive pairs of

buds, the last pairs being represented on the shortened axis by

the septa of least development.. Whether the shortened axis

is raceme or corymb depends on the development of the repro-

ductive organs, on the order in which they reach maturity on

the free margin of the mesenteries. The formula quoted

above seems to be the expression of the spiral development.

Any one who follows the development of the tentacles of a

well-fed Hydra may see that the order of their appearance

is not irregular, but that it follows a definite rule. No doubt

the view here proposed has occurred to other anatomists ; but

as it has not, to my knowledge, been published, I now seek to

put it on record as a protest, were it nothing more, against

the geometric method of classifying animal forms.

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Species of Coleoptera. 213

XVIII.—New Species of Coleoptera belonging to the Families

Lycide, Zophosine, Lepturine, and Glaucitine. By

CHARLES O. WATERHOUSE.

THE species here described are in the British-Museum collec-

tion, with the exception of-the Nosoderma, which is in Colonel

Shelley’s possession. It is with great reluctance that I place

this last insect from Hast Africa in the genus Nosoderma,

which has hitherto been considered to be properly American.

I do not, however, find sufficient characters upon which to

found a new genus.

Lycide.

Lyropeus biguttatus, n. sp.

Fulvo-ochraceus, opacus, dense brevissime pilosus; corpore subtus

antennarumque articulis apicalibus nigris, singulis elytris gutta

fusca notatis.

Long. 54 lin.

Differs from L. fallax, Walker (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

1858, i. p. 281; Waterhouse, [llustr. Typ. Coleopt. Brit.

Mus., pt. 1. p. 78, pl. xviii. fig. 4), in being of a more sandy

yellow, and in having the legs and the antenne (except the

two or three apical joints) also sandy yellow. Lach elytron,

moreover, instead of having an apical black band, has only a

small dusky spot at some distance from the apex.

Hab. Malabar.

The genus Lyropeus was proposed by myself (Trans. Ent.

Soc. 1878, p. 105) for Lycus fallax, Walker. The present

species, although differing chiefly in colour, is, | think, un-

doubtedly to be considered distinct. The sides of the thorax

are a little sinuous, which makes the posterior angles appear

more diverging ; but it is not safe to give this as a specific

character without having aseries of specimens. Mr. F’. Moore

has kindly presented the British Museum with one of the

specimens from his collection.

Ditoneces obscurus, n. sp.

Fusco-niger; thoracis limbo elytrisque ferrugincis, his fortiter pune-

tato-striatis. @Q.

Long. 4 lin.

Relatively rather broader than any described species. It

most nearly approaches D. pubicornis, Walker (see Water-

house, Illustr. Typ.-Coleopt. Brit. Mus., pt. i. p. 32, pl. vii.

fig. 9), but is rather broader, and the colour of the margins

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 15

214 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Species of Coleoptera.

of the thorax and the elytra is a dull rusty brown. The

antenne are less strongly dentate than in the female of that

species. The thorax is shining, rather strongly punctured

within the incrassated margins, more transverse than in D.

pubicornis, less rounded in front; and the posterior angles are

not directed outwards. The elytra are parallel, strongly

striated, the strie rather distinctly and very strongly punc-

tured; the interstices are very narrow; the pubescence is very

dense and fine, but not so long as in D. pubicornis.

Hab. Malabar.

A single example recently received from the East-India

Museum.

Zophosine.

Nosoderma cordicolle, n. sp.

Nigrum, dense sabulosum ; thorace cordato, lateribus obtuse quadri-

dentatis ; elytris infra humeros thorace latioribus, postice angus-

tatis, fortiter subseriatim punctatis, tuberculis obtusis sex in-

structis, marginibus obtuse dentatis.

Long. 7 lin.

This species somewhat resembles N. furcatum, Kirsch.

Densely covered with dirty brown sand-like scales. ‘Thorax

a little longer than broad, somewhat rounded in front, nar-

rowed towards the base, with four obtuse teeth on the margin;

the surface is uneven, impressed on the disk before and behind

the middle, and with a slight double prominence in the middle

of the front margin. The elytra are broadest a little way

from the base, narrowed posteriorly, with several obtuse teeth

or projections on the margin, arranged, four small ones around

the shoulder, two (close together) about the middle, another

just behind these, a large one some way from the apex, another

smaller one near the apex, and a small one close to the suture;

each elytron has several round, obtuse nodules, the largest

of which is just before the posterior declivity, The pro-

sternum is very broad, with a transverse impression in front,

declivous posteriorly. ‘The mesosternum is moderately broad,

sloping. ‘The intercoxal process of the abdomen is very broad

and quadrate.

Hab. Usambala Hills, Kast Africa.

The general appearance of this interesting species is some-

what that of N. furcatum; but the form of the sterna and the

broad intercoxal abdominal process are more like those of N,

diabolicum. The antenne are nearly those of furcatum; but

the eleventh joint appears to be lost in the apex of the tenth.

The tarsi are cylindrical, as in furcatum; but the pubescence

below is not so long; they are not channelled as in déaboli-

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Speeves of Coleoptera. 215

eum. 'The thorax has on each side below a broad oblique

impression for the reception of the antennz.

[have only seen a single specimen of this species, in Colonel

Shelley’s collection.

Lepturine.

Sagridola quinguemaculata, Waterh.

This species was described by myself from a female exam-

ple*. A male in very impertect condition has lately come

into my hands. It differs from the female in having the

posterior femora much incrassated and furnished beneath near

the apex with a tooth; the anterior tibie are much stouter

than in the female, and are densely clothed beneath with

golden pubescence. Nearly the whole basal portion of the

elytra is yellowish, clothed with bright yellow pubescence,

but having a black spot on the shoulder, a second behind the

shoulder, and one common to both elytra below the scuteilum.

This coloration is more probably a variation than a sexual

character.

The specimen is from Antananarivo.

Glaucitine.

Tresioides sericeovittata, n. sp.

Picea, nitida ; thorace vittis quatuor aureo-sericeis notato; elytris

ad apicem singulatim rotundatis, sutura, vitta mediana margine-

que laterali aureo-sericeis.

Long. 113 lin.

This species differs from all the species known to me in

having the elytra separately rounded at the apex and not

truncated ; the antenne are, moreover, less slender; but these

differences being less pronounced when compared with the

smaller species of the genus, I think it best at present to

associate this species with them. Head with a raised median

line above ; this and the front of the head coarsely punctured,

the rest clothed with yellow pubescence; the antennal tubercle

incrassated round the base of the antennz in front, a little

elevated on the inner side. Antenne rather stout, one fourth

longer than the whole insect in the male, reaching a little

beyond the middle of the elytra in the female, reddish pitchy,

the apices of the joints nearly black ; the basal joint strongly

punctured. Thorax scarcely as broad as long, a very little

narrower in front than before the base, slightly constricted

before the front and before the base, coarsely punctured, and

with some transverse ruge, with four impressed longitudinal

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., 1875, xv. p. 414.

216 On the Occurrence of Pedicellaster in the Far North.

_ stripes, which are filled with yellow silky pubescence. Elytra

at the base a little broader than the thorax, and nearly three

and a half times as long, regularly attenuated posteriorly ;

each elytron with three yellow silky stripes, the middle one

impressed at the base, not quite extending to the apex of the

elytron.

Hab. Madagascar, Fianarantsoa.

XIX.—WNote on the Occurrence of Pedicellaster (Sars) in the

Far North. By W. Percy SuAvDEN, F.L.S., F.G.S.

In the “ Report on the Echinodermata collected during the

Ayctic Expedition, 1875-76” (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,

vol. xx. p. 449), a starfish obtained in Discovery Bay (lat.

81° 41! N., 25 fathoms) and off Cape Frazer (lat. 79° 44’ N.,

80 fathoms) was described under the name of Asteracanthion

paleocrystallus (1. c. p. 455).

Owing to the very marked characters presented by this

form, it was not without considerable hesitation that the species

was classed as an Asteracanthion, and then only on account

of extreme unwillingness to burden the nomenclature of Aste-

roids with an additional generic term. Subsequent study,

however, of Captain Feilden’s specimens and also of Sars’s

original description and figures of Ledicellaster typicus*

(which the writer had not previously seen) leaves no doubt

that the form above mentioned ought to be referred to Sars’s

genus.

Pedicellaster is characterized by the true biserial arrange-

ment of ambulacral sucker-feet, the more or less regularly

quadrate arrangement of the ossicles composing the abactinal

network, the isolated spinelets borne mainly at the decussa-

tions, the general character of the spinulation together with

the fact that every appendage of the body is invested with a

thick semitransparent cuticular membrane, and, above all, by

the presence of pedicellarae forcipiformes (“ pédicellaires

croisés,” Perrier) without the usual accompaniment of p.

forfictformes—an occurrence unknown in any other genus. ‘The

pedicellaria also are of extraordinary size, being but little

less than the dorsal spinelets, and stand isolated upon the

membrane that stretches over the intermediate spaces of the

calcareous network of the body-frame, their form at the same

time being undoubtedly characteristic.

* Oversigt af Norges Echinodermer, pp. 77-84, pl. ix. figs. 7-17, pl. x.

figs. 1-10.

Ona Spine from the Coal-measures of Northumberland. 217

In each of the above particulars the specimens in question

accord exactly with the diagnosis given by the eminent Nor-

wegian naturalist. Specitically, however, Pedicellaster palco-

erystallus, nobis (for such it should accordingly be written),

differs unequivocally from P. typicus, Sars (the only repre-

sentative of the genus hitherto known), in the general size,

proportions, and habitus of the starfish, as well as in the form

of the pedicellarize and spinelets. P. palwocrystallus is of

larger size; and the length of the arm-radius in proportion to

that of the disk (about 5:1) is less than in P. typicus, in

which it is 64 or 6: 1; the contour of the arms is also diffe-

rent in our form, being more tumid on the inner third and

much more attenuated on the remaining outward portion of

the ray; the dorsal spinelets are decidedly radio-laminate and

somewhat expanded at the tip, instead of being conical as

described in P. typicus ; and the shaft of the ambulacral spine-

let is denticulate ; whilst the pedicellariz in the present species

differ in being of even larger size and having the contour of

the jaws considerably swollen out about the outer third and

then tapering rapidly towards the extremity, which is some-

what truncate.

Other minor differences occur; and these, together with

figures, will be recorded in the memoir on Arctic Echino-

dermata, in course of preparation by Prof. P. Martin Duncan

and the writer.

The great rarity of the genus Pedicellaster and the interest

attaching to its occurrence in such high latitudes may be urged

in justification of the present advance-note upon the subject.

XX.—On a Spine (Lophacanthus Taylori, mihi, nov. gen.

et spec.) from the Coal-measures of Northumberland. By

THomMAS Srock, of the Natural-History Department,

Museum of Science and Art, Edinburgh”. .

Amoncst a parcel of fish-remains sent me a few months ago

by Mr. Joseph Taylor of Shire Moor, Northumberland, was

a spine which Mr. Taylor said he believed was new. After

a careful study of the specimen, and after consulting all the

literature of the subject accessible to me, I came to the conclu-

sion that the spine was not only specifically new, but must

be regarded as the type of a new genus.

Description. The spine, as I received it, was in three frag-

ments: the two upper were partially imbedded in the matrix ;

* Read before the Edinburgh Geological Society, December 1879.

218 Mr. T. Stock on a Spine from the

the lower was free. A small piece

of about 7 millims. had been re-

moved by Mr. Taylor, with the im-

tention of preparing a microscopic

section from it. The length of the

spine as it exists is 18°4 centims. ;

in its perfect condition it was consi-

derably longer. ‘The base is broken

short off at what must have been an

appreciable distance above the point

at which the spine entered the body

of the fish, as no trace of the inserted

portion remains. Its greatest dia-

meter, which is at the base, is 9

millims. It curves gently back-

wards ; the curvature is greater

towards the point than towards the

base. The apex itself is rather

finely pointed and enamelled with

ganoine. The ornament consists of

numerous fine, longitudinal, slightly

irregular strie ; it covers the whole

of the existing surface with the ex-

ception of the tip. ‘The grooves

are narrower than the ridges, and

smooth. Fracture shows that the

pulp-cavity occupies the greater

length of the spine. It is circular

in shape, and, as is usually the case,

is placed a little posterior to the

median line. Its walls are thick.

The anterior aspect is very convex

throughout. On the posterior aspect

is a prominent ridge, sloping to the

left lateral margin at an average

inclination of 35°. Between the

summit of the ridge and the right

lateral margin there is a groove,

extending from the tip to the base.

The middle third of the ridge is

very gently undulated. In the

groove are a few irregular pits;

two of them may be seen about

halfway between the point and the

base, four near the apex. At first

I supposed that these pits were the

lori, mihi; ? nat. size. In

Taylor.

Fig. 2. Ditto; } nat. size,

cross section.

Coal-measures of Northumberland. 219

scars of denticles that had become detached; but the most

careful examination of the counterpart of two of the largest of

them failed to reveal the slightest trace of tubercular or denti-

cular structure.

Comments. The base of the spine is unfortunately wanting,

so that it is impossible to say at what angle it was inserted in

the body of the fish. From its great length and slenderness

it may be conjectured that it was set at a very low angle, or

that it was supported for the greater part of its length by a

strong cartilaginous structure; it seems weak as a defensive

weapon, compared with what was probably the large size of

the fish.

Relations and Differences. In discussing its relations to

genera previously described, it will be enough to notice at

length two only, viz. Leptacanthus and Orthacanthus, both

established by Agassiz. Agassiz’s Leptacanthus was founded

upon Jurassic specimens. L. longissimus from Caen was

doubtfully put by him in the genus. He says “ Je le signale

plutét 4 Vattention des paléontologistes que je n’espére en

donner une description satisfaisante.’’ He is doubtful as to

the serration and as to the ornament. Until the spine is

better known it would be unwise to say much about it. If

Agassiz’s account of it is correct, Mr. Taylor’s specimen differs

from it by important characters. L. longissimus is finely

serrated on the posterior margin, compressed, and shows in

cross section a concave posterior area. ‘Two spines from

Carboniferous rocks have been referred to Leptacanthus by

M‘Coy (Brit. Pal. Fossils, p. 633) ; both, however, differ by

important characters from Mr. 'Taylor’s specimen.

Curved spines have been referred to Orthacanthus by J. 8.

Newberry (Pal. Ohio, vol. 1. p. 332). He believes the

straightening is due to pressure. Orthacanthus appears to be

rare in the British Coal-measures, but is usually, when re-

ferred to, described as straight. Whether curved or straight,

the generic distinctness of the specimen I am describing will

not, I think, be affected. The structure of the posterior area,

the absence (?) or, if it may be said to exist, the peculiar

nature of the denticulation, and the general facies of the

spine separate it from that genus. ‘The same assemblage of

characters separates it also from Phricacanthus, a spine de-

scribed by Mr. J. W. Davis, F.G.8. (Q. J.G.S., May

1879).

I have no data by which to connect it with teeth or other

remains of diagnostic value. ‘The specimen appears to be

unique. Until discovery throws light upon its true affinities

it must remain as the type of a new genus, which I propose

220 Prof. T. R. Jones on the Nomenclature of Polyzoa.

to call Lophacanthus* ; and to it I add the specific name of

Taylort, in honour of the discoverer.

Horizon and Locality. Shale above the Low Main Seam,

Newsham, Northumberland.

XXI.— On the Nomenclature of Polyzoa, Busk.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,—My friend Mr. A. W. Waters, F.G.S., has

lately referred (in your Number for January 1880) to my use

of the word * Polyzoa” (in Dixon’s ‘ Geology of Sussex,’

new edition, pp. 200 and 311) for the group as determined by

Mr. Busk, F.R.S., instead of for the zooid as applied by

Thompson. I am sorry that I did not write as accurately

and clearly as might have been. Instead of “ PoLyzoa,

Thompson,” I should have written “ Potyzoa, Busk ;” and

T ought not to have stated that “the Polyzoa were first de-

fed by Dr. J. V. Thompson,” &c., but that, following up

Thompson's researches, Mr. Busk completed the determination

of the group. In my own words, I repeat that “‘ group-names

are indications of advancing scientific knowledge, and not to

use the best is to keep science back.” Further, ‘‘ the published

name of a species is (or ought to be) not only the established

appellation of a distinct form in nature, but also the registered

evidence of the successful labour and acumen of its discoverer

and describer,” whilst the complete mastery of such natural

groups as genera &c. comes with time.

On another point,—if your readers please to refer back to

the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. vi. no. 44, June 1841,

pp- 801 et seg., they will find a transcript of Hhrenberg’s

finished classification from the Trans. Berlin Acad. for 1838,

when his ‘‘ Bryozoa” comprised four orders, the first of

which consists of the ‘‘ Polythalamia ;” and all of these, except

Lunulites, Cupularia, and Flustrella, are FORAMINIFERA.

Consequently Mr. Waters has to take this matter into his

further consideration. for my part I am quite willing to

accept Mr. Busk’s determination of the group (see Ann. &

Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. x. p. 852, 1852; Cat. Polyzoa

Brit. Mus.; and Monogr. Pal. Soc., Polyzoa of the Crag, &c.)

as the latest and the best; and I shall not trouble :you with

any further correspondence on the subject.

Your obedient Servant,

Camberley, Surrey, T. Rupert JONES,

Feb. 10, 1880.

* Ados =a ridge.

On a Collection of Lepidoptera. 221

XXIT.—On a small Collection of Lepidoptera from, Western

India and Beloochistan. By Artuur G. BUTLER, F.L.8.,

Ev Aee.,, OC.

THE series of Lepidoptera of which the following is a list

was obtained by Major Charles Swinhoe, for the most part

from the Neilgherries and from Kurrachee*, but a few

from Belgaum (Bombay Pres.), and three or four from

Beloochistan.

With the exception of Pyrgus evanidus, the species from

the last-mentioned locality do not differ from specimens pre-

viously obtained in North-western India.

Nymphalide.

DaAnAInz.

1. Danais dorippus, Klug.

One example. . Kurrachee ; September 1879.

SaTYRINz.

2. Hipparchia parisatis, Kollar.

Three examples. ‘‘ Much,” Bolan Pass, Beloochistan ;

August.

NYMPHALINE.

3. Charaxes fabius, Fabricius.

One specimen. Neilgherries.

AcCRHINE.

A, Telchinia vesta, Fabricius.

One specimen. Neilgherries.

Lycenide.

Lycamnin2z.

5. Anops phedrus 3, Fabricius.

One specimen. Belgaum (1879).

6. Lycena karsandra, Moore.

Kurrachee, July. '

Major Swinhoe sent thirty-three examples of this species

* Where Major Swinhoe is at present stationed,

222 Mr. A. G. Butler on a Collection of Lepidoptera

in a small pill-box; but unfortunately they were attacked by

two specimens of a little beetle (Zribolium ferruginewm), which,

by the time they arrived, had destroyed or damaged every

specimen ; only three retained the thorax intact so as to render

it possible to set them out.

7. Lyceenesthes ubaldus, Cramer.

Three specimens. Kurrachee, August.

Papilionide.

Prrrin#.

8. Teracolus protractus, Butler.

Two specimens. Hubb River, Beloochistan, August.

9. Teracolus puellaris, Butler.

One specimen (¢). Hubb River, Beloochistan; August.

This prettly little species was evidently taken for a small

example of the following, from which, however, it may readily

be distinguished by the much broader black border of the

secondaries. Mr. Moore received a long series of 7’. puedlaris

in a collection from Kutch (but 7. vestalis did not come with

it) ; it occurs also in the Punjab.

10. Teracolus vestalis, Butler.

Three specimens. Hubb River, Beloochistan and Kur-

rachee ; August.

One male example is labelled “ Muggin Peer.” Is this

Magar Pir, Kurrachee? ‘The female is from Kurrachee.

The male of 7. vestal’s was described from a Scinde ex-

ample, and the female from one taken at Agra, N.W. Punjab:

the capture of it in Beloochistan therefore slightly extends its

known range.

11. Teracolus dirus, Butler.

This species was described and figured from an albino

female in Mr. Moore’s collection; the ordinary form has the

apical area of the primaries above broadly carmine, being,

in fact, very similar to 7. dulcis, but larger, the male with

broader black internal border to the apical area; the basal

area of the wings darker in both sexes, and with distinct

blackish spots at the outer extremities of the first and second

median branches on the under surface.

Four pairs. Kurrachee, July 1879.

Judging from an example of J. dulcis 9 recently received

from Western India and Beloochistan. 223

from the India Museum, and which closely agrees in general

characters (in the size of the marginal spots of secondaries,

for instance, as well as in expanse) with the male which I

figured, I have little doubt that the female figured by me

is an ordinary 7. dirus, and not 7. dulcis at all ; it agrees well

with Major Swinhoe’s female specimens. Both species occur

at Scinde.

12. Belenotis mesentina, Cramer.

One pair. ‘ Much,” Bolan Pass, Beloochistan ; October.

PaPILionIn2é.

13. Papilio doson, Felder.

One example, probably from the Neilgherries ; locality not

noted.

Hesperiide.

14. Pyrgus evanidus, n. sp.

Above extremely like P. galba, Fabr. (P. superna, Moore),

but distinctly greyer in colour, the ground-colour being black

instead of brown; below greyer and paler, the secondaries

being very faintly tinted with yellowish, the central white

belt broken up into three spots, of which the two lower ones

are contiguous, instead of forming one continuous band across

the wings; other markings similar. Hxpanse of wings

11 lines.

Two specimens. Sao, Hubb River, Beloochistan ; No-

vember.

15. Plesioneura ambareesa, Moore.

One male. Matheran.

Chalcosiide.

16. Chalcosia affinis, Guérin.

Two specimens from Belgaum, and two from the Neilgher-

ries.

Lithosiide.

Hypsinz.

17. Damalis strigivenata, Butler.

Belgaum.

Ennomide.

18. Hyperythra Swinhoet, n. sp.

Above ochreous buff, minutely and sparsely speckled with

224 Mr. A. G. Butler on a Collection of Lepidoptera

brown; primaries with traces of two parallel slightly arched

discal brown lines, the outer one limited externally by two

diffused brown patches, the larger one extending from costa

to lower radial, the lower one on second median interspace ;

a minute indistinct brown discocellular spot: secondaries with

traces of two closely approximated blackish abbreviated discal

lines from costa to second median branch, the outer line inter-

rupted near costa by two large rounded blackish spots: body

yellow, sericeous. Wings below bright yellow, sparsely

sprinkled with fine abbreviated purplish-brown striz ; external

area tinted with saffron-yellow and limited internally by a

slightly sinuated purplish-brown line; discocellular dots and

an ill-defined line just beyond the cell of secondaries purplish

brown: body below bright yellow in the centre, tinted with

saffron-yellow at the sides. Expanse of wings 1 inch 4 lines.

One male. Kurrachee, October 1879.

Geometride.

19. Nemoria pruinosa, n. sp.

Sea-green, densely irrorated with silvery white ; body pale

yellow, antennz testaceous. Wings below silvery white,

slightly tinted in front with green; body below cream-

coloured. Hxpanse of wings 74 lines.

One male. Kurrachee, September 1879.

Macariide.

20. Tephrina strenuataria.

Macaria strenuataria, Walker.

Three examples. Kurrachee, May and September.

Noctuide.

21. Graphiphora c-nigrum.

Phalena-Noctua c-nigrum, Linn.

T'wo specimens. Neilgherries.

Orthosiide.

22. Orthosia erubescens, n. sp.

Primaries above shining pinky brown; base crossed by

small black dots ; discoidal spots imperfectly represented by

interrupted black outlines; discal lines barely indicated by

indistinct greyish curved stripes ; costa towards apex suffused

with blackish : secondaries pale sericeous greyish brown,

from Western India and Beloochistan. 225

slightly cupreous upon the margin, fringe whitish at base :

thorax pinky brown, vertex of head and front of palpi white ;

abdomen greyish brown, with testaceous lateral and anal tufts.

Wings below shining chalky white, with pinky-brownish

costal borders ; discocellular stigma and an abbreviated discal

line grey; primaries with the discoidal area greyish: body

below testaceous, washed at the sides with dull reddish. Ex-

panse of wings | inch 3 lines.

One male. Neilgherries.

Hadenide.

23. Huplexia albovittata, Moore.

One specimen. Neilgherries.

Ommatophoride.

24. Nyctipao letitia, Butler.

One example. Belgaum, 1879.

Ophiuside.

25. Grammodes stolida, Faby. -

Two specimens. Kurrachee, July and October.

Remigiide.

26. Remigia frugalis, Fabr.

Three specimens. Kurrachee, October.

Thermesiide.

27. Azazia rubricans, Boisd.

Four examples. Kurrachee, October.

One specimen is considerably darker than the three others.

Hypenide.

28. Hypena laceratalis, Walker.

Mulleer near Kurrachee, November.

29. Docela affinis, n. sp.

Closely allied to D. vetustalis, from which it principally

differs in the darker central band of primaries and the broader

yellow band of secondaries: grey; wings crossed by an irre-

cular blackish band, interrupted upon the secondaries, which it

traverses at basal third, angulated and central upon primaries ;

226 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

a yellow discal band with blackish external margin, very

slender upon primaries, but widened into an elongated trian-

gular patch upon the secondaries, bounded outwardly upon the

primaries by three dark brown spots and towards apex of

secondaries by a large dark brown patch; external border

bronzy, fringe varied with white ; primaries with a small red-

brown reniform spot with pale border. Under surface sordid

white; wings with blackish apical patches, fringe snow-white

at apex. Expanse of wings 11 lines.

One example. Kurrachee, October.

There are also two specimens in Mr. Moore’s collection.

This genus much resembles in marking the Noctuid group

Microphysa, but differs in its much longer and thicker palpi.

Asopiide.

30. Hymenia fascialis, Cramer.

Three specimens. Kurrachee, June and October.

Botydide.

31. Botys iopasalis, Walker.

Three specimens. Kurrachee, September and October.

52. Godara comalis, Guénée.

Two specimens. Kurrachee, October.

Tineide.

33. Alavona barbarella?, Walker.

Matheran, May 1879.

I cannot be perfectly certain of the identification of this

species, owing to the rubbed condition of the type and the

difficulty of tracing the markings in any but very good speci-

mens of this genus.

XXIII.—On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian

Region.—Part I. Crustacea Oxyr'yncha and Cyclometopa,

except Telphusideae By Epwarp J. Miers, F.L.S.,

044.) 00

[Plate XIII. ]

THE present paper, which will be continued in succeeding

numbers of the ‘ Annals,’ will contain a complete enumera-

tion, with notes and descriptions (where needed), of the Crus-

—

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. rap ai!

tacea recently selected from the collection of the late Dr. P.

Bleeker, the eminent ichthyologist, for the British Museum.

This collection is of much interest, not merely on account of

the new and undescribed species included in it, which, as was

to be expected in a collection from a region so thoroughly

worked, are not very numerous, but also on account of the

many species it contains which have been hitherto destderata

to the Museum collection. Amongst these are several of the

Maioidea, and fourteen out of sixteen species of Isopoda

(Cymothoidea) parasitic on fishes, described by Dr. Bleeker in

his two memoirs, entitled “ Sur les Décapodes Oxyrhinques

et les Isopodes Cymothoadiens de l’archipel Indien” *.

To avoid needless repetition I have seldom given references

to the literature, except in those not unfrequent cases where I

have been enabled to correct the synonyma or bring together

species which appear to have been based on characters of in-

sufficient value.

The exact localities were unfortunately not marked on all

the bottles in Dr. Bleeker’s collection; but those which were

not more particularly labelled were marked as containing

“ Crustacea Indo-Archipelagica ;”” and therefore no doubt can

be entertained of the Malaysian habitat of all the species.

OXYRHYNCHA vel MAIOIDEA.

Doclea brachyrhynchus.

Doclea brachyrhynchus, Bleeker, Act. Soc. Indo-Néerl. 11. p. 14 (1857).

Doclea sebe, Bleeker, l. e. p. 13 (1857), junior.

An adult male, agreeing well with Bleeker’s description, is

in the collection, without special locality. A second male

example agrees with the description of Doclea sebe; and

a comparison of the two specimens leaves little doubt in

my mind that this latter species must be united with D.

brachyrhynchus as having been established upon younger

examples. The only character by which D. sebe is distin-

guished, viz. the somewhat shorter, slenderer chelipedes, with

fingers meeting along their inner margins, cannot be considered

of specific value.

Doclea macracantha.

Doclea macracanthus, Bleeker, Act. Soc. Indo-néerl. ii. p. 10 (1857).

? Doclea microchir, Bleeker, 1. c. p. 11 (1857), junior ?

A small male example, without special indication of locality,

agrees very well with Bleeker’s description. As far as can

be judged from the description, D. microchir, Bleeker, which °

* Acta Soe. Sci. Indo-Néerlandice, Deel ii (1857).

228 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

is mainly distinguished by the relatively longer spines of the

carapace and shorter legs of the second pair, is not specifi-

cally distinct. Amboina is mentioned by Bleeker as the

habitat of the first, and W. Sumatra (Padang) as the habitat

of the second species.

Micippa cristata (Linn.).

Java,.a fine adult male.

Tiarinta cornigera?

? Pisa cornigera, Latr. Encycl. Méth. x. p. 141 (1825).

? Pericera cornigera, M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. 1. p. 355 (1834).

Tiarinia cornigera, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. Cr. i. p. 110, pl. iii. fig. 5

(1852).

Carapace broadly pyriform, narrowing rapidly from the

middle of the branchial region (where it attains its greatest

width) to the orbits, covered with more or less conical and

acute irregularly-disposed unequal tubercles ; three more pro-

minent and rounded tubercles are placed in the middle of the

cardiac region, and three in a transverse series on the posterior

margin. The rostrum is imperfect; but from the single

spine remaining it is probable that the rostral spines were

parallel to their apices, straight and shorter than the width of

the interorbital part of the carapace. There is a small supra-

ocular spine; the anterior legs are robust ; the arm irregularly

tuberculated ; wrist nearly smooth ; palm smooth, enlarged,

compressed, longer than broad; fingers arcuate and meeting

only at the apices; on the inner margin of the upper finger

near the base is a small tubercle; the first ambulatory legs

are considerably elongated. Length to base of rostrum 1 inch

3 lines, breadth 1 inch 23 lines.

Java, Karangbollong (one adult male).

The descriptions of Latreille’s and Milne-Edwards’s P. cor-

nigera are not sufficiently detailed for me to be certain that I

am right in referring the example described above to it ; it is,

however, probably identical with the specimen described and

figured by Dana as 7. cornigera (Cr. U.S. Expl. Exp. xii.

p- 110, pl. iii. fig. 5, 1852), although the tubercles of the

carapace are apparently more numerous.

CYCLOCGLOMA, gen. nov.

Carapace suboblong, somewhat elongated, rounded behind

and slightly constricted behind the orbits, which are tubular,

projecting laterally, without spines, and with a small circular

‘ opening as in many Periceridee. Spines of rostrum very small.

Basal joint of antenne very greatly enlarged, as in Othonia,

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 229

the next joint enlarged but more elongated and less dilated

than in that genus. Ischium-joint of outer maxillipedes small

and narrow ; merus-joint somewhat produced at its antero-

external angle, as in Othonia. Anterior legs (in the male)

small and slender; palm smooth and not dilated, twice as long

as the fingers, which are excavated on their inner margins

towards the apices, which, however, are acute. Ambulatory

legs of moderate length. Postabdomen (of male) with all the

segments distinct.

This interesting transitional form must be placed in the sub-

family Othoniine (as characterized in my recent revision of

the Maioidea, a group hitherto restricted to the single West-

Indian genus Othonia). From that genus it is distinguished

by the more elongated carapace, which is not armed with

lateral spines, the more distinct rostral spines, less dilated

third antennal joints, and non-dilated anterior legs of the

male. Itis very distinctly related to Criocarcinus and Pseu-

domicippe in the family Maiide; the inferior hiatus of the

tubular orbits in Criocarcinus, however, is closed in Othonia

and Cycloceloma.

Cycloceloma tuberculatum, sp. n.

(Pl. XIII. figs. 1, 2.)

Carapace armed with tubercles disposed as follows :—five

tubercles, of which the median is the largest, on the front of

the gastric region, and posterior to these four large rounded

elevations in a median series, viz. one on the gastric, one on

the cardiac, one on the intestinal region, and one on the pos-

terior margin; there is a prominent rounded tubercle on each

hepatic region, and about four on each branchial region, of

which one is much larger than the rest. The spines of the

rostrum are subacute and separated by a narrow median

fissure. The slender palm or penultimate joint of the anterior

legs about equals the arm in length, and is smooth, not com-

pressed or dilated ; the fingers are shorter than the palm. The

small terminal claw of the ambulatory legs is but slightly

incurved. Length 1? inch, breadth 1 inch.

Amboina (an adult male).

The single example has a short series of stiff curled

hairs on the front of the gastric and cardiac regions and

on the sides of the branchial regions. The first free an-

tennal joint is narrowest at base and dilated toward the distal

end, where it is about half as broad as long; thus it differs

markedly from the slender form of certain species of Macro-

celoma in the Periceride, to which this genus bears some ex-

ternal resemblance. In Macrocewloma, moreover, the rostrum

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 16

230 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

is always much more considerably developed, and there is a

distinct spine at the end of the basal antennal joint.

Lambrus contrartus (Herbst).

A male and female are retained for the Museum. No defi-

nite locality was preserved ; but Bleeker states that this species

is not uncommon at the Moluccas. A comparison of the

Malaysian examples with specimens from the Mauritius con-

vinces me of the correctness of Bleeker’s determination.

Lambrus lamelliger.

Lambrus lamelliger, White, P. Z.S. p. 58 (1847).

Lambrus lamellifrons, Adams and White, Zool. Samarang, Crust. p. 26,

pl. v. fig. 1 (1848).

Lambrus Rumphii, Bleeker, Act. Soc. Indo-Néerl. 11. p. 18 (1857), nee

C. longimanus, Rumph.

An adult male without definite locality is in the collection,

which I refer to this species. ‘The gastric, cardiac, and bran-

chial regions are very much elevated and indistinctly tubercu-

lated ; on the branchial regions one of the tubercles is much

more prominent and obtuse. The rostrum is very prominent

on its upper surface; and the interorbital space is deeply con-

cave ; the anterior legs are very robust, and the anterior and

posterior margins of the arm and hand are armed with promi-

ment, rounded, obtuse tubercles, of which there are only two

or three on the posterior (or outer) margin of the hand. The

ambulatory legs are smooth.

The specimen from the Philippine Islands designated ZL.

lamelliger in the Museum collection is of small size, and the

tubercles of the carapace and anterior legs are more acute and

spine-like.

Bleeker’s description of LZ. Rumphii also applies to this

species ; but the figure of Rumph (Amboin. Rariteit. p. 16,

pl. viii. fig. 3), copied by Herbst (Nat. Krabben, 1. p. 252,

pl. xix. fig. 106), cited by Bleeker agrees far better with

specimens from the Philippines in the Museum collection,

named, perhaps wrongly, Lambrus turriger, Ad. & White.

This latter species is distinguished from the foregoing by

having a long prominent spine on each of the regions of the

carapace, and the subcylindrical anterior legs covered with

small nearly uniform tubercles.

Lambrus laciniatus ?

? Lambrus laciniatus, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 91, pl. xxii.

figs. 2, 3 (1839).

A male, without definite locality, is in the collection. It

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 231

differs from De Haan’s figure in having the spines of the pos-

terior (or outer) margin of the palm somewhat fewer in num-

ber and broader at base, where they are almost in contact with

one another; but I do not regard it as belonging to a distinct

species.

CYCLOMETOPA vel CANCROIDEA.

Atergatis floridus (Linn.).

Java, Karangbollong (male and female) ; Amboina (young

female).

Atergatis integerrimus (Lamarck).

Java (an adult female). Another specimen without locality

is in the collection.

Lophozozymus epheliticus (Linn.).

Java (an adult male).

Liomera Rodgerstt. (Pl. XIII. fig. 3.)

Lachnopodus Rodgersw, Stimpson, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 82

(1858) ; A. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. i. p. 233

(1865).

Carapace transverse, about once and a half as broad as

long, smooth, glabrous, and shining, with the interregional

sutures almost obsolete ; the two posterior teeth of the antero-

lateral margins are the only ones developed, and are very

obscurely marked and obtuse. The front is somewhat pro-

duced, and is divided by a median and two lateral incisions

into four lobes, of which the two median are broad and trun-

cated, and the lateral (or inner orbital lobes) are small and

dentiform. On the upper orbital margin are three small obtuse

teeth (including that of the outer orbital angle) ; the tooth at

the inner and lower orbital angle is rather prominent. The

merus-joint of the outer maxillipedes is rather small and

transverse; and this joint has a shallow pit on its outer sur-

face. The anterior legs (in the male) are robust, smooth ; arm

or merus-joint with a series of spinules on its upper margin ;

carpus smooth, with an antero-internal tooth; penultimate

joint or palm slightly rugose externally, and with two longi-

tudinal and parallel grooves on its outer surface ; fingers short,

robust, toothed on their inner margins and with the apices

not excavated. The ambulatory legs are somewhat com-

pressed and clothed with long fulvous hairs; their merus-

joints are spinulose on the upper margins. The postab-

domen of the male is five-jointed, the third to fifth joints

16*

232 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

being coalescent. Length 84 lines, breadth nearly 1 inch

1 line.

This species has been hitherto known only from the very

short generic definition of Dr. Stimpson, which, however,

embraces all the characteristic peculiarities of the species, and

which agrees exactly with the example before me, except in

one point. Stimpson says (/.c.), “ Antenne ut in Carpilio.”

In the specimen now before me the antenne are of the same

structure as in Liomera, the basal joint being very short and

united at its summit to an inferior prolongation of the front,

and not, as in Carpilius, joined to the front along its inner

margin. I have little doubt that Stimpson erroneously wrote

Carpilius for Liomera, as he does not say that Lachnopodus

is distinguished from Liomera by any peculiarity in the struc-

ture of the antenne.

I do not think that Lachnopodus is generically distinct, as

Milne-Edwards has described a Liomera (L. longimana) with

hairy ambulatory legs.

Actea Riippellir.

figle Riippella, Krauss, Sudafrik. Crust. p. 28, pl. 1. fig. 1 (1848).

? Aigle rugata, Adams and White, Zool. Samarang, Cr, p. 43, pl. viii.

fig. 5 (1848).

Actea Riippellii, A. M.-Edwards, N. A. Mus. Hist. Nat. i. p. 270

ae78) ; Hilgendorf, Monatsb. Akad. Wissensch. Berlin, p. 787

pene rugata, A. M.-Edwards, /. c. p. 269 (1869).

An adult male is in the collection, without definite locality,

agreeing exactly with the figure of Krauss, and also with

specimens in the Museum collection from the Mauritius. It

is extremely probable that the digle rugata of White is, as

noted by Hilgendorf, not specifically distinct, although the

type specimen from the Philippines in the Museum collection

has the lobules of the carapace covered with more numerous

and smaller granules, and the chelipedes and legs are more

densely hairy. But I see some reason to doubt the correctness

of Hilgendorf’s identification of Heller’s A. Krauss¢i with the

foregoing.

In specimens from Egypt in the Museum collection, which

I refer to A. Kraussii, the carapace is wider in proportion to its

length and less distinctly granulated. Both carapace and legs

are much more densely pilose.

Menippe (Myomenippe) panope.

Cancer panope, Herbst, Nat. Krabben, iii. p. 40, pl. liv. fig. 5 (1801).

Cancer Hardwickii, Gray, Zool. Miscell. p. 40 (1831).

Menippe granulosa, Strahl, Arch. f. Nat. xxvii. p. 105 (1861); A. M.-

Edwards, Ann. Soc. Entom. France, vii. p. 275 (1867) ?

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 233

Menippe panope, v. Martens, Arch. f. Nat. xxxviii. p. 87 (1872).

Miomenippe duplicidens, Hilgendorf, Monatsh, Akad. Wissensch. Berlin,

p. 796 (1878), footnote.

Java (an adult female of large size); Amboina (a male of

smaller size).

The type of Gray’s C. Hardwickii is from the Indian

Ocean.

It is not without considerable hesitation that I have united

the several species cited above under the heading of C. panope.

The identification of Strahl’s Menippe granulosa with Herbst’s

C. panope was made by Von Martens, after examination of

the typical specimens; and the diagnosis of the latter author,

as also the description by Hilgendorf of MZ. duplicidens, apply

very well to the type of Gray’s C. Hardwickii and the other

specimens of this species in the Museum collection. The

granulation of the sides of the carapace and bases of the fingers

is somewhat less distinct in the specimens from Java and

Amboina than in Gray’s type; and it is possible that a larger

series of specimens might establish a complete transition to

the following species.

Menippe (Myomenippe) Legouillout.

Menippe Legouillowi, A. M.-Edwards, Ann. Soc. Entom. France, vii.

p. 274 (1867).

A male individual, without definite locality, is in the collec-

tion. It is distinguished mainly by the lesser prominence of

the tubercles of the carapace and the absence of granulations

on the upper surface of the wrist, palm, and base of mobile

finger.

There is also a specimen from Swan River in the Museum

collection.

Myomenippe Fornasini?, Hilgendorf (Monatsb. Ak. Wis-

sensch. Berlin, p. 795, 1878), from Mozambique, is evidently

very nearly allied to this species; but I should hesitate to

unite the two without comparison of specimens.

Epixanthus dentatus.

Panopeus dentatus, White, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 226 (1847) ; Adams and

White, Zool. Samarang, Crust. p. 41, pl. xi. fig. 1 (1848).

Epixanthus dilatatus, Man, Notes from the Leyden Museum (no. xix.),

p. 58 (1879).

Java (an adult male and female).

These specimens agree very well with Mr. Man’s descrip-

tion of EL. dilatatus (also founded on specimens from Java),

and with the types of Panopeus dentatus, excepting only that

they present no trace of the variegated coloration of the

234 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

carapace, which is excellently preserved in White’s specimen.

The figure given by White, although very characteristic, repre-

sents the chelipedes in such a position as to conceal the

characteristic tuberculation of the mobile finger of the larger

hand and the slenderness of the fingers of the smaller one, on

which account, perhaps, Mr. Man did not suspect their iden-

tity with his species.

Carpilodes cinctimanus.

Carpilius cinctimanus, White, Append. Juke’s Voy. Fly, Crust. p. 336,

pl. ii. fig. 8 (1847) ; Adams and White, Zool. Samarang, Cr. p. 37,

pl. vii. fig. 4 (1848).

Liomera cinctimana, A. M.-Edw. Nouv. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. i. p, 219

(1865), ix. p. 176, pl. v. fig. 4 (1875).

? Liomera latu, Dana, Cr. U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. p. 161, pl. vii. fig. 6

(1852).

A young male is in the collection, without definite locality.

As has been already noted by Prof. A. Milne-Edwards, in the

young of this species the hand is without the black cincture,

and the fingers are whitish.

Actcodes tomentosus (M.-Edwards).

A male example is in the collection, without definite

locality.

Zozymus ceneus (Linn.).

Java (a young male).

Chlorodius niger (Forskal).

New Guinea (one female).

Leptodius exaratus, var. sanguineus (M.-Edw.).

Java (an adult male).

The remarks made by me upon this species in Proc. Zool.

Soc. 1877, p. 184, on specimens from Duke-of-York Island,

apply equally well to the Javan example.

Pilumnus vespertilio.

Cancer vespertilio, Fabr. Ent. Syst. ii. p. 463 (1793), Suppl. p. 338

(1798).

Pouney vespertilio, Leach, Trans. Linn, Soc. xi. p. 321 (1815); M.-

Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. i. p. 418 (1834); Cr. in R. A. de Cuvier,

Atlas, pl. xiv. fig. 3; Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. Cr. i. p. 236

(1852); A. M.-Edw. N. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. ix. p. 242 (1873) ;

Hilgendorf, Monatsh. Akad. Berlin, p. 793 (1878).

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 235

Pilumnus ursulus, Adams and White, Zool. Samarang, Cr. p. 45, pl. 1x.

fig. 6 (1848); Hess, Arch. f. Nat. p. 187, pl. vi. fig. 2 (1865).

Pilumnus mus, Dana, Pr. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 82 (1852) ; U.S. Expl.

Exp. xiii. Cr. i. p. 240 (1852).

Java (a female).

The hairs covering the body of this species vary from a

deep brown to a fulvous or cinereous hue. The small tooth

of the antero-lateral margins, situated anterior to and on a

lower level than the first of the proper antero-lateral marginal

teeth, and which is mentioned both by Milne-Edwards (in P.

vespertilio) and Dana (in P. mus), is not invariably developed.

This is a very common and generally distributed inhabitant

of the Australian, Malaysian, and Pacific seas,

Kossmann (Zool. Ergebn. des rothen Meeres, Brachyura,

p- 38,1877) has recently subdivided the genus Pilumnus into

three subgenera, based on characters derived from the presence

or absence of fissures in the upper orbital margin. P. ves-

pertilio belongs to the subgenus Pilumnus as restricted by him,

as there are usually indications of two fissures in the upper

orbital margin. I doubt, however, the constancy of these

characters, or their validity as a means of separating the

species, much as the genus Pilumnus requires subdivision into

smaller groups.

Pilumnus Bleekert, sp. n.

Carapace convex, with the antero-lateral margins shorter

than the postero-lateral, and armed with five rather long spines

(including the extraorbital spine) ; the spime next to this is

placed on the subhepatic region. The body and legs are

rather thinly clothed with long fulvous hairs; the front is

divided by a rather wide and deep fissure into two truncated

lobes. The orbits are armed with a series of prominent spinu-

liform teeth on their lower margins ; but the upper margin is

only minutely granulated, and is without fissures. The ante-

rior legs are robust; the arm has three teeth on its upper

margin; the wrist and palm are hairy; the palm is covered

with rather irregularly-disposed granules on its outer surface,

which toward the upper margin tend to become spinuliform ;

toward the lower margin the surface is smooth; but there is a

line of granules on the lower margin of the hand. The fingers

are short and thick, denticulated on their inner margins; the

upper is granulated above at its base ; the lower margin of the

immobile finger forms a straight line with the inferior margin

of the palm. Length 9 lines, breadth 11 lines.

New Guinea. ‘lwo males are in the collection. In the

236 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

larger, the fingers are of a chocolate-brown colour; in the

smaller they are nearly colourless.

The truncated frontal lobes, with the armature of the cara-

pace and chelipedes, apparently suffice to distinguish this

species from its very numerous congeners. Many of the

species of Pilumnus, however, are insufficiently known, and

the genus is one which greatly needs a thorough revision. P.

Bleekeri somewhat resembles P. actumnoides, A. Edw., which

is represented as having the antero-lateral margins armed with

more numerous teeth, and the hands more granulated on their

external surface.

Pilumnopeus granulosus, sp. n.

(Pl. XIII figs. 4, 5, 6.)

Carapace transverse, about once and a half as broad as

long, and covered with small regularly disposed granules,

which tend to become obsolete toward the posterior margin.

Front rather prominent, divided by a small triangular median

sinus into two lobes, the anterior margins of which are

straight and rather oblique. Posterior to the frontal lobes,

and occupying the interorbital space, are two small promi-

nences. ‘The antero-lateral margins are armed with five

teeth (including the outer orbital tooth, which is very small) ;

the orbital margins are without fissures, and the internal

orbital hiatus is occupied by the outer antenne, the basal

joint of which is small and does not nearly reach the front.

The anterior legs (in the female) are robust, the arm very

short and smooth; the wrist regularly and evenly granulated

on its outer surface, but without a spine at its antero-internal

angle; paim covered on its outer surface with numerous

granules ; dactylus also granulated to within a short distance of

its extremity; both this and the lower joint are strongly

denticulated on their inner margins. Ambulatory legs

slightly compressed and nearly smooth. Abdomen of female

7-jointed.

Indo-Malayan Region. One specimen of this very pretty

little crab is in the collection ; but the precise locality has not

been preserved.

It must, I think, be included in Pilumnopeus of A. Milne-

Edwards, a genus which, to judge from the descriptions, can

scarcely be distinct from Hurycarcinus of the same author.

From Spherozius, Stimpson, this species is distinguished by

its much broader carapace; from Actwmnus, Dana, by the

same character, and by the brevity of the basal antennal

joint.

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 237

Eriphia levimana.

Eriphia levimana, Laty. (ined.), Guérin, Icon, Cr. pl. iii. fic. Ls

Edwards, Hist. Nat. Cr. i. p. 427 (1834); Dana, Cr. U.S. Explor.

Exp. xiii. i. p. 249, pl. xiv. fig. 7 (1852) ; Hilgendorf, Cr. in V. der

Decken’s Reise in Ost-Afrika, iii. p. 75 (1869); Monatsh. Ak. Berlin,

p- 797 (1878); A. M.-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. ix.

p. 255 (1373),

Eriphia trapexiformis, Hess, Arch. f. Naturg. p. 135, pl. vi. fig 4

(1865).

A male and female specimen of this species, presenting all

the characteristics of the typical form, are in the collection.

I unite with L. levimana the Hriphia trapeziformis of

Hess, because there is nothing in the description and figure

of the latter form to distinguish it specifically.

Eriphia levimana, var. Smithit.

Eriphia Smithii, M‘Leay, Annulosa, in Smith’s Ilustr. Zool. 8. Africa,

p. 60 (1838); Krauss, Sudl. Afrik. Crust. p. 36, pl. ii. fig. 3 (1843),

Eriphia Fordu, M‘Leay, J. c. p. 60 (1838).

Eriphia levimana, var. Snuthi, Hilgendorf, Monatsb. Akad. Berlin,

p. 797 (1878).

New Guinea (an adult male).

The tuberculation of the chelipedes is subject to much

variation according to Hilgendorf (/.c.), whom I follow in

considering L. Smithit merely a variety of levimana, the

series in the Museum collection not being large enough to

show whether the differences between the two forms are

constant.

I may note, however, that in two specimens (young male

and adult female) from Natal, which I regard as typical con-

ditions of H. Smithit, the surface of the larger chela is

strongly granulated between the tubercles, which are rounded

and not crowded, and occupy only the upper part of the outer

surface; and the tubercles of the smaller hand are crowded

and acute, and cover the whole of the outer surface of the

hand. In the specimens from New Guinea, also a male from

Zanzibar, a female from Dukhun (Deccan ?), India, and in a

young female received from the Paris Museum under the

name of /. rugosa, M.-Edwards*, the surface of the larger

hand, between the tubercles (which are very faintly marked

or obsolete), is smooth, and the tubercles of the smaller hand

are less numerous and acute, and show a tendency to disposi-

tion in longitudinal series.

Of this form I have also seen a fine male from Pulo Sambu,

Singapore, in a collection made by Surgeon-Major Samuel

* I do not know that this name has ever been published.

" 938 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

Archer, A.M.D., and which is in process of determination by

Mr. A. O. Walker, F.L.S. Were it not for its occurrence

also at Zanzibar, I should have had little doubt of the distinct-

ness of this variety from the Smithii of Natal.

Trapezia cymodoce (Herbst).

A male example from Amboina belongs to this species as

I have characterized it (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, 11.

p. 408, 1878).

Neptunus pelagicus (Linn.).

Celebes, Badjoa (an adult male); Borneo, Bandjermasin

(a smaller female). }

Neptunus trituberculatus, Miers.

An adult male is in the collection, without special indication

of locality.

Neptunus sanguinolentus (Herbst).

W. Borneo (a female); Bali (another female).

Scylla serrata (Forskal).

Bali (a male example); W. Borneo (a young male, showing

the rudimental condition of the rostral teeth characteristic of

the young of this species).

Podophthalmus vigil (Fabr.).

Ayroe Islands (an adult male in fine condition).

Thalamita prymna (Herbst).

A male is in the collection, without special indication of

locality.

Thalamita Stimpsoni, A. M.-Edwards.

New Guinea (an adult female). A smaller individual,

apparently not specifically distinct, is in the collection, from

Ambpina, in which the fourth lateral tooth is very nearly as

large as the rest. It is very probable that Kossmann is right

in uniting many species of this genus that, when fewer

materials were available for comparison, were considered

distinct.

Goniosoma annulatum (Fabr.).

Two females are in the Museum, without definite locality.

I am not sure that G. sexdentatum is specifically distinct from

On a Pterobranchiate Polyzoon from Canada. 239

this; at least I have seen specimens, apparently belonging

to G. annulatum, in which the hand is slightly granulated

above.

Goniosoma anisodon, De Haan.

A female specimen laden with ova is in the collection, also

without definite locality.

[To be continued. |

XXIV.—On a supposed Pterobranchiate Polyzoon from

Canada. By the Rev. THomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S.

SoME years since, I received from my father, the late Professor

Hincks, of University College, Toronto, a short notice of a

Polyzoon which he had obtained in the neighbourhood of that

city, but was unable to identify with any described form.

Some of its characters were so remarkable and, at that time,

so entirely without parallel, that I could not venture (in the

absence of specimens) to publish an account of it or to give

any opinion upon it. He had no further opportunity of

investigating its history; and, so far as I know, it has not

been noticed since by any other observer.

Later discoveries, however, have supplied a clue to the

interpretation of this aberrant type, in some particulars at

least ; and reading my father’s brief and popular diagnosis by

their light, we may find in it the indication of a form which,

though unique in some respects, has now its allies and its

definite place in our system.

Under these circumstances I think it may be interesting

and useful to publish some account of it (however imperfect),

accompanied by my father’s rough sketch of the polypide : it

may stimulate those who have the opportunity to search for

it, and possibly lead to its rediscovery.

The description given of it, so far as it goes, may, I have no

doubt, be relied upon. Professor Hincks was not, indeed, in any

special way a student of the Polyzoa; but his knowledge of

animal forms was extensive and accurate, and he was a prac-

tised and careful observer.

In a letter bearing date December 20, 1868, he writes :—

“1 want your assistance in respect to a freshwater Polyzoon

found in this neighbourhood, which I must attempt to describe

to you. It was found attached to a sunken boat in the river

Humber, which falls into Lake Ontario two or three miles

west of ‘Toronto.

240 On a Pterobranchiate Polyzoon from Canada.

‘The common substance of the colony, resembling sarcode,

is in masses of some extent, 14 inch deep, and has the little

animals protruded all over it. The ciliated tentacles, about

100 in number, in four rows on two finger-like extensions,

the distinct anal canal, and the nervous ganglion leave no

doubt of the creature being a Polyzoon of the order Hippo-

crepia. The ova (statoblasts) are also abundant, with their

marginal anchor-like hooklets; but it does not

seem to me to agree with any of the genera Fig. 1.

which I can find described; much less can I

determine the species. .... The two branches

of the lophophore do not form a horseshoe figure,

but are more entirely separated, thus (fig. 1).

ee ae I add a faithful though rude sketch of

the Polyzoon (fig. 2), seen in one direction ; it

does not show the flexure of the alimentary canal, but it

shows the lophophore well; and if you plant the animal as

one of a multitude on a gelatinous or

sarcode mass (polyzoartum) common to Fig. 2*.

them all, you will have a right idea of

its life.”

The remarkable feature of this Cana-

dian Polyzoon is the tentacular corona,

the peculiarity of which is insisted on

in the description, and clearly shown in

the accompanying sketch. ‘The tenta-

cles, instead of being disposed in a horse-

shoe figure and forming a continuous

series, as in the ordinary freshwater (or

Phylactolematous) species, are borne on

two distinct erect lobes, which are sepa-

rated at the base. ‘They constitute,

therefore, two series, which are ranged

along the edge of the finger-like processes.

The structure of the corona, in fact, ex-

actly resembles that which we find in the

genus Rhabdopleura, Allman, and which

is characteristic of the Pterobranchiate

group of Polyzoa. In what other points the Canadian species

may differ from the typical form of the Phylactoleemata, or how

far it may agree with it in general character, we have not at pre-

sent the means of judging; but we have, I think, sufficient

ground for believing that there exists in the fresh waters of

Canada a Pterobranchiate polyzoon which is separated from

* This figure, though not a facsimile of the original drawing, accu-

rately represents its essential points.

On the Sponge-fauna of Norway. 241

Rhabdopleura by differences probably ordinal in value, and

which in some of its characters and in general appearance

resembles the ordinary Phylactolemata.

It is unnecessary to insist on the interest that must attach

to such a form should it exist. I trust that this notice may

meet the eye of some one who may have the opportunity of

searching the locality from which my father’s specimen was

obtained, and to whom the point to be solved may appear of

sufficient importance to warrant a thorough investigation.

XXV.—The Sponge-fauna of Norway ; a Report on the Rev.

A. M. Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian

Coast. By W. J. Souuas, M.A., F.G.S., &e.

[Continued from p. 144. ]

[Plates X., XI., XI]

Order TETRACTINELLIDA, Marshall.

Tribe PACHYTRAGIDA, Carter.

Group Gxopiwa, Carter (Family Geodiide, O. Schmidt).

Genus 1. Grop1a, Lmk. Type @. gibberosa, Lmk.

(Pyxitis, Sdt.)

2. Cyponium, Fleming. Type C. zetlandicum, Johnst.

(Geodia, auct.)

3. PacuymaTIsMA, Bwk. Type P. Johnstoni, Bwk.

4, Caminus, Sdt. Type C. Vuleand, Sdt.

5. PLACOSPONGIA, Gray. Type P. melobesioides, Gray.

The sponges belonging to the group Geodina have been

known to naturalists for nearly two centuries, though for the

greater part of this time they were lost in that chaotic assem-

blage which formed the genus Aleyonium. It was in 1815

that Lamarck* defined, under the name of Geodia, the first

genus of the Geodine group; but so powerful a hold had the

imaginary Alcyonian character of these sponges upon the

minds of the zoologists of those days, that even after the

generic distinctness of Geodia was perceived it was still retained,

* Mém. du Mus. d’Hist. Nat. i. p. 385, 1816.

242 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

even by Lamarck himself, in close connexion with Alcyonium,

and was regarded as a member of the same family. Lamarck’s

description of his genus is as follows :—“ Polyparium liberum

carnosum tuberiforme inttiis cavum et vacuum, in sicco du-

rum; externa superficie undiqué porosé. Foramina_poris

majora, in area unica orbiculari et laterali acervata.” On

page 334 (loc. cit.) he concludes his observations with the

remark, “.... la forme d’une géode close et la facette

orbiculaire, et en crible que l’on observe sur les Géodies,

constituent leur caractére générique.” A single species,

Geodia gibberosa, Lamk., is given as the type.

In 1828 Fleming * took from the Alcyonza another Geodine

genus, and gave it the name of Cydontwm. His definition is

thus given :—‘ A coriaceous skin, internally carneous, with

numerous straight-ridged spicula perpendicular to the surface ;

polypi with a central opening, and an orifice at the base of

each of the eight pinnated tentacles.’’ His type is given as

Cydonium Miilleri (A. cydonium, Mill. Zool. Dan. t. 31.

f. 3, 4, 5, a, and Jameson, Wern. Mem. i. p. 563). In his

observations he states that the skin consists of animal matter

cementing innumerable siliceous grains, and that the spicules,

which are collected in bundles and radiate from the centre,

become in many cases trifid or tricuspidate immediately under

the skin.

Nothing could be clearer from this description than the fact

that Fleming had before him a genus of genuine Geodine

sponge. There can be no doubt about this; but if there were it

would be immediately dispelled by a reference to the figure

given by Bowerbank f of Fleming’s original type, which is a

typical Geodia zetlandica, Johnston.

It is remarkable that Fleming should have attached to this

sponge the characters of an Alcyonian polype; nor can it be

explained by easily-made references to the vigorous imagina-

tions of the early naturalists; it seems more likely that the

explanation may be of the following nature. The spicular

characters of Cydoniwm Fleming had observed for himself; the

Alecyonian characters he could not have observed, because they

did not exist; but he identified his sponge with Alcyonium

cydonium in Miiller’s Zool. Dan. (loc. cit.), which, from

Miiller’s clear and apparently faithful drawings, is evidently a

true Alcyonium. Fleming next proceeded to add the charac-

ters of Miiller’s specimen to those of his own, and thus pro-

duced the curious hybrid we find in Cydoniwm Miillert. Such

cases of mistaken identification are not, I believe, altogether

* British Animals, p. 516,

+ Bowerbank, ‘ British Sponges,’ iii.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 243

unknown at the present day. Nor was Fleming wholly to

blame for this blunder; for his type specimen was handed to

him by Prof. Jameson*, who had previously erroneously

identified it with Miiller’s Alcyonium cydonium. Miiller fur-

ther contributed his share to the confusion, as appears from

the following remarks by Montagu t:—“ Miiller has also

figured what he considers the Linnean Alcyontum cydonium

(Zool. Dan. iii. tab. 81); but this is clearly an Alcyonium

bearing innumerable polypi; and we cannot, therefore, think it

is the same as the Aleyoniwm cotoneum of Pallas, which may

be the Linnean Cydonium, and is probably a Spongia”’ ft.

But, apart from this curious mistake of Fleming’s, one

fact stands out in the clearest manner; and that is, the

marked distinction which separates Fleming’s genus Cydo-

nium from Lamarck’s genus Greodia. Both were regarded by

their authors as allied to Alcyoniwm; but while Lamarck’s

was characterized by a depressed cribriform area and a hollow

cavity within, Fleming’s was carneous internally and with

a few congregated oscules on the exterior. Had Flem-

ing’s genus possessed the same characters as Lamarck’s,

the name Cydonium might have been cancelled; as it is,

the two genera are independent of each other, and the

names Geodia and Cydonium must be equally retained.

Fleming’s specific description is altogether madequate, and

the appellation MJiller¢ has no more value than a MS. name;

it must therefore yield to that attached to the first adequate

description; and this certainly is zetlandica, Johnston.

In 1834 Blainville$ adopted with hesitation Fleming’s

genus Cydonium, though, with his usual inaccuracy, he as-

signed it to Jameson. He placed it, as its describer’s defi-

nition necessitated, close to Alcyonium. Blainville also

adopted Lamarck’s genus Geodia; but this he placed with the

sponges (Amorphozoa), as Deshayes and Milne-Edwards like-

* Mem. Wern. Soc. i. p. 563, 1811. t Ibid. ii. p. 117, 1818.

{t [The clear-sighted Montagu was quite right ; the Alcyontum cotoneum

of Pallas and the Alcyoniwm cydonium of Linné are names given to the

Geodine sponge so admirably figured by Donati, on whom Linné con-

ferred the well-deserved epithet “ ocuLatus Donati.” Of this sponge

Donati figures, 1750 (!), the external facies, exhibiting the hollow in which

would lie the great cribriform oscule (an admirable section), and the

spicula in their proper position and separately. The crust of globates,

the dermal porrected spicula, the porrecto- and patento-ternates which

support the crust, and the acerates of the body of the sponge are all ex-

cellently drawn. The minute stellates the microscope of those days

would not reveal; but there cannot be a doubt that Donati’s sponge, which

is Linné’s Alcyonium cydonium, is most closely related to Cydonium

zetlandicum.—Rev. A. M. Norman. |

§ Man. d’Act. pp. 525, 534.

244 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

wise did in a note to the genus in their edition of the Anim.

s. Vert. of 1836.

In 1842 Johnston* redescribed Fleming’s specimen of Cy-

donium Miillert, and, not recognizing the distinction between

Cydonium and Greodia, placed it in the’latter genus with the

specific name zetlandica.

In 1862 Bowerbank + reconstructed the genus Geodia,

taking as the basis for his characterization Geodia Barretti,

Bwk., which, as it happens, possesses the specially Lamarckian

character of numerous oscules congregated in a deeply de-

pressed area, though Bowerbank makes no mention of this

fact in his generic definition. Through this omission, and the

fact that G. Barrett’, Bwk., is solid and not hollow within, there

is nothing in the character of Bowerbank’s G'eodia to distin-

guish it from COydonium, if we choose to disregard, as we

must, the fictitious Aleyonian characters which Fleming erro-

neously added to his definition of Cydontum.

In the same year (1862) Oscar Schmidt } also defined afresh

the Lamarckian genus Geodia, and, by leaving out the charac-

ters which Lamarck expressly stated were typical of his genus,

caused it to include the Cydonium of Fleming. Schmidt de-

scribed four new species, all of which appear to be true Cydo-

nia. He also described (p. 43 loc. cit.) a new genus of

Geodiide under the name of Caminus. It differs from Cydo-

nium (Geodia, Sdt.) in the absence of trifid spicules, and of a

needle-down covering the rind, and also by the presence of a

single large osculum.

In 1864 Duchassaing de Fonbressin and Gio. Michelotti §

published a description with admirable illustrations of the type

species of Lamarck, Geodia gibberosa; they also described

and figured an allied species, Geodia cariboa, D. & M.

In 1866 Bowerbank||, having examined Fleming’s type

specimens, enters into a long discussion respecting the con-

flicting claims of the names Cydonium and Geodia. I

quote his summing up :—“ The history of this sponge (Geodva

zetlandica) presents a singular sequence of errors. In the

first place, Miiller is distinctly wrong in the designation of his

species, which undoubtedly is Aleyonium of Ray and Linneus.

Prof. Jameson, perhaps misled by the stellate mantlings on

the surface, believed the sponge from ‘ Fullah and Unst” to

be the same as Miiller’s specimen and an Aleyonium. Dr.

* Hist. of Brit. Sponges, p. 195.

+ Phil. Trans. p. 1098.

{ D. Spongien d. Adriat. Meeres, p. 49.

§ Spongiaires de la Mer Caraibe, p. 104, pl. xxv. figs. 2, 8.

|| Monograph Brit. Sponges, ii. p. 40.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 245

Fleming, at the time of the publication of his ‘ British Animals,’

appears to believe it to be not an Alcyondum, but still iden-

tical with Miiller’s specimen, and accordingly gives it both a

new generic and specific name. At last Johnston, seeing that

it is not the type of a new genus, sinks both Dr. Fleming’s

generic and specific names, and, correctly assigning the speci-

men to Geodva, renames it zetlandica.”

In 1866 * Oscar Schmidt, in discussing the synonymy of

Bowerbank’s genera, expressed his doubts as to the position

of Geodia M‘Andrewt, Bwk., and stated that it might per-

haps be a Caminus. He adopts Bowerbank’s genus Pachy-

matisma, and suggests that Geodia, Bwk., is equivalent to

Geodia, Sdt., plus (with a query) Caminus, Sdt.

In 1867 Dr. Gray {, for the first time since its institution,

asserted the claims of Fleming’s genus to an independent

existence. Larlier in the year Dr. Gray had described and

figured a new and curious Geodine sponge in which the

cortex is divided into a number of distinct plates, and which

possesses a central axis of globate spicules. This he made

the basis of a new genus, Placospongia, and, indeed, of a

whole new family, the Placospongiade. Dy. Gray’s arrange-

ment of the Geodine sponges is as follows :—

Fam. 1. Geodiade.

Genus 1. PacnuymatisMA, Bwk. P. Johnstoni, Bwk.

2. GropiA, Lmk. G. gibberosa, Lmk.

. CyponiuM, Fleming. C. Barretti, Bwk.

. Erytus, Gray. 2. mammillaris, Sdt.

. Triave, Gray. TZ. discophora, Sdt.

. Camrnus, Sdt. C. Vuleani, Sdt.

oO TO PE

Fam. 2. Placospongiade.

Genus 1. PLacosponetA, Gray. P. melobesioides, Gray.

In 1868 Bowerbank { commented on Dr. Gray’s reinstate-

ment of Fleming’s genus as follows:—‘‘ Dr. Fleming de-

scribes his genus as having polypi with a central opening and

an orifice at the base of each of the eight pimnated tentacles,

showing either that he had greatly mistaken the nature of

* Zweites Suppl. d. Spong. d. adriat. Meeres, p. 11.

+ Proc. Zool. Soe; 1867, pp. 127, 492.

t Proce. Zool. Soc. 1868, p. 151.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 17

246 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

G. zetlandica, Johnst., or that he had described the orange-

coloured variety of A. digitatum, Johnst. (Brit. Zooph. ed. 2,

vol. i. p. 174). The latter appears the most probable.” The

italics are mine; and itis scarcely conceivable that Bowerbank

can have written this after what he said in 1866, and after an

examination of Fleming’s type specimens, which he then

stated were Geodia zetlundica. It will be observed also that

Bowerbank says nothing here of the presence of the trifid

spicules and globates, which Fleming mentions as occurring

in his Cydoniwm, and which by themselves are sufficient to

prove that Fleming can have had no other than a Geodine

sponge before him.

In 1869 Carter * described a new species of Cydontum as

Geodia (Cydonium, Gray) arabica; and he added afterwards

that his G. arabica, being closely allied to G. zetlandica,

appears under Dr. Gray’s third genus, viz. that termed

Cydonium.”

In 1870 ©. Schmidt + gave an account of the characters of

the Geodinide, added some remarks on the genus Geodia,

Sdt., and established a new genus, Pyaxitis. This new genus

is characterized by the occurrence in most of its members of a

large body-cavity, and in all by the localization of a pore-area

for the outflowing water-currents—the very characters seized

upon by Lamarck as typical of his Geodia! But, worse than

this, Lamarck’s type Geodia gibberosa is appropriated by

Schmidt as the type of his genus Pyxztis. It is certain that

this kind of nomenclature will never be tolerated by impartial

naturalists. A genus may be subdivided any number of

times that may be necessary ; but it is always understood that

that subdivision which retains the type species shall also

retain the original name f. If Schmidt thought it necessary

to distinguish those Geodine sponges in which ‘durch Locali-

sirung eines Porenfeldes fiir die Ausstrémung so bestimmt

&e.,” from others in which such is not the case, he might,

with some show of justice, have given a new name to the

latter, but certainly not to the former, which belong inalien-

ably to Lamarck’s genus Geodia. This distinction, made by

Schmidt in 1870, existed, however, in our nomenclature as

early as the year 1828, the date of Fleming’s genus, and was

again distinctly enforced by Gray in 1867, three years prior

to Schmidt’s publication of it. Yet Schmidt, who, when

Nardo is in question, is such a champion of priority, calmly

ignores the observations of both his predecessors and pro-

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 4, pl. i. figs. 9-16,

+ Spong. Fauna d. atlantischen Gebietes, p. 68.

t{ See Rule § 4 of the Stricklandian Code,

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 247

-ceeds, without altering the essential characters of Lamarck’s

genus, to give it a new name. No wonder that complaints of

an overburdened nomenclature are becoming chronic!

In the years 1872-74 numerous descriptions of new species

belonging to the genera Cydoniwm, Geodia, and Pachyma-

tisma, accompanied by beautiful drawings, were published by

Bowerbank *,

In 1874 likewise appeared the 3rd vol. of Bowerbank’s

‘British Sponges,’ containing a fine figure of that typical

specimen of Geodia zetlandica which had previously been ex-

amined and described by Fleming and Johnston.

In 1873 Grubet described and figured a specimen of

Pachymatisma Johnstont, Bwk., under the name of Caminus

osculosus. It came from the coast of St. Malo.

In 1876} Carter described, with many interesting observa-

tions, two new species of Geodia—one with cribriform depres-

sions (G. nodastrella), and the other with a single vent

(G. megastrella).

The table given at the commencement of this paper repre-

sents the classification as it at present stands. The genera

appear to me to require fresh examination and revision; but

this is a subject to which I hope on a future occasion to recur.

Geodia Barrett’, Bwk. §

The specimen under description differs only in trifling de-

tails from Geodia Barretti, and must necessarily be included

in that species.

In form it is almost spherical, 1 inch in diameter, free, with

a small Halichondroid sponge attached to it, the surface of

attachment measuring + inch square. It possesses a single

circular oscule (Pl. X. fig. 8) 745 inch in diameter, situated in

the centre of a low dome-shaped elevation, 0°15 inch in dia-

meter, which rises from a shallow annular depression. ‘The

surface is smooth except for the protrusion of a few long fusi-

form acerate spicules at one or two particular spots, and of a

large number of minute acerates generally, which render it

finely hispid. :

The spicules (see figures on Pl. XI.) do not differ in charac-

ter from those already described by Bowerbank ; but it may

be as well to call attention to the great length of the shafts of

* Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872-74.

+ Mittheil. ii. St. Malo u. Roscoff &e. p. 152, Taf. 2. figs. 3, 3 a-e.

{ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xviii. p. 597, pl. xvi. figs, 45-47.

§ Phil. Trans. 1€62, pl. xxxii. fig. 2 ; Hist. Brit. Sponges, 1. 1864, p. 167,

pl. xxviii. fig. 864; and Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 198, pl. xi.

Li?

248 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

the slender porrecto- and recurvo-ternate spicules (Pl. XI.

figs. 8, 9, and 16), as these are not completely represented

in Bowerbank’s illustrations. In addition to the cylindro-

stellates mentioned by Bowerbank there are also present in

the mark a number of sharp-rayed forms, of which an instance

is represented in Pl. XI. fig. 20. The cylindro-stellates of the

mark often attain a much larger size than those of the cortex,

which are exceedingly minute.

The arrangement of the spicules has also been excellently

described by Bowerbank, so that I need now only call atten-

tion to the distribution of the stellates. The cylindro-stellates

are confined to the rind and the mark immediately surround-

ing the crypts, the sharp-pointed forms commence immediately

below the crypts, and are found throughout the rest of the

mark, They never occur in the rind. This distribution is

identical with that existing in Stelletta Norman, and probably

in most Pachytragous sponges possessing two varieties of

stellates.

The Canal-system.—The single oscule opens into a cylin-

drical tube with a rounded termination (Pl. X. fig. 1); it is

0°15 inch long and 0:1 inch wide; its walls are smooth, but

rendered finely hispid by the projecting ends of small acerate

spicules, which cannot be seen with the naked eye. Hnding

against the apparently imperforate walls of this tube, two canals

are seen in a transverse section of the sponge; they are

0-1 inch wide, and descend from the oscular tube in a curved

direction more or less concentric with the outer surface of the

sponge. Although only these two tubes are shown in a single

transverse section, there can be no doubt that others exist and

would be revealed by fresh sections taken in different direc-

tions. The interior of these large excurrent tubes or main

trunks of the excurrent system (for such they are) has a smooth

glistening surface, which is concentrically striated by fine

circular ridges and furrows, reminding one in general appear-

ance of the ‘ valvule conniventes” of the small intestine,

though of course they are of very diminutive size (Pl. X.

fig. 2,7). Similar folds, but possibly not quite so regular,

exist in Mr. Carter’s sponge Awos spinipoculum, and have

suggested the same comparison to him (Ann. & Mag. Nat.

Hist. ser. 5, vol. iii. pl. xxv. figs. 4,5, p. 287). A number

of sharply defined circular openings are seen in the walls of

the excurrent trunks, the commencement of secondary canals

which proceed from them and branch repeatedly in the sub-

stance of the sponge.

Under a low-power magnification and by reflected light the

oscular tube exhibits two or three small circular openings,

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 249

which place it in free communication with the excurrent

trunks. These visible openings, however, are but one or two

out of a great number unseen, and which are not seen because

they are closed by sphincters ; they can readily be made out,

however, in sections by transmitted light.

We shall recur to them in describing the histology of the

sponge in detail; it is sufficient to state now that the excurrent

trunks, which break up into small canals in the interior of the

sponge, communicate with the oscular tube by means of sphinc-

ters, and thus can be shut off from or put into communication

with the exterior as circumstances may determine. The in-

current canals can best be studied in thin sections (Pl. X.

fic. 6, and Pl. XII. fig. 34) ; the pores of the dermis lead into

chones, which open each by a sphincter into the subcortical

er ypts; from the floor of each crypt a cylindrical tube of sharply

defined outline (Pl. X. fig. 6,2, and Pl. XII. fig. 34) extends

downwards for a variable distance into the mark, and, branch-

ing below like a bronchus, ends in fine canaliculi. Its walls

are more or less finely perforated by openings from which

minute canaliculi proceed. Lying parallel with these incur-

rent tubes and between them are others of a different character ;

they are generally wider, less regular in form, with more

widely perforated walls, and are occasionally traversed by

an irregular trabecular network (Pl. X. fig. 6,e, and Pl. XII.

fig. 34). From the perforations in their walls canals proceed,

which, after branching once or twice, and sometimes anasto-

mosing, end in fine canaliculi. The position of these excur-

rent tubes with respect to the incurrent tubes is inverse ; 7. é.

their open extremity is turned towards the centre of the sponge,

their more or less closed end towards the rind, while the

incurrent tubes lie with the closed end towards the centre and

the open end towards and in free communication with the

erypts. The floors of the crypts open into narrow short canali-

culi like those proceeding from the incurrent canals ; and in

both cases these fine canaliculi open, somewhat abruptly, into

ciliated chambers, the outflow-canals from which constitute the

canaliculi of the excurrent tubes. These excurrent tubes, the

primary twigs of the branched excurrent system, communicate

with larger canals, which run ee with the exterior

surface of the sponge (Pl. X. fig. 6, ¢). From these concen-

tric canals other canals with trabecular walls proceed and

extend deeper into the mark (Pl. X. fig. 6, e’), branching till

they end in fine canaliculi. ‘These canaliculi end in ciliated

chambers, which are connected by shorter canaliculi with other

tubes resembling in general character the primary incurrent

canals. At first sight the representation of the canal-system

250 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

shown in figure 6 gives one the idea that the canals marked e!

are distributive and not collective in function, in which case

the water, which had already passed from the incurrent into

the excurrent canals, would be again distributed through a

fresh set of ciliated chambers, and thus be used twice over.

This does not appear probable. The tubes e’ have all the

characters of excurrent tubes—widely perforated trabecular

walls with dichotomous canals opening into them; while the

tubes ¢’ are equally incurrent in character and give off

canaliculi, which enter the ciliated chambers in the abrupt

fashion so characteristic of incurrent canaliculi. ‘T’o complete

our representation of the canal-system we must therefore sup-

pose that the incurrent canals ¢’ are connected in a round-

about way by concealed canals with the subcortical crypts.

By this supposition a double using of the incurrent water is

avoided. In the centre of the sponge one observes sections of

canals cut across in every possible direction; but even here

the distinctive characters of the excurrent and incurrent canals,

as described above, appear to be maintained.

The general course of the water-circulation of the sponge

would appear to be as follows:—The water finds access

through the dermal pores or ostia to the chones, whence

it finds it way into the subcortical crypts and the incurrent

canals ; from these it is distributed by multitudinous little

canals to the ciliated chambers, the seat of the energy on which

the working of the water-circulation depends. From these

chambers it passes out by fine canaliculi, which, after uniting

together once or twice or oftener, empty themselves into the

trabecular excurrent tubes ; from these the water flows unob-

structed into the large excurrent vessels, which deliver it

through sphinctral apertures into the oscular tube, whence it

passes freely to the exterior.

Histology.

1. The Cortex.—The exterior of the sponge is covered by a

thin membranous film, immediately beneath which is a single

layer of minute cells (Pl. XII. fig. 26), each containing a

minute cylindro-stellate spicule, and having an average dia-

meter of from (0002 to 0:0003 inch. The superficial mem-

brane appears to be a mere secretion of the underlying cells,

and with them forms the epidermis of the sponge (Pl. XII.

fig. 26, e).

The epidermis is succeeded by a layer of curious tissue

(Pl. XII. fig. 26,¢), which presents a striking but superficial

resemblance to the parenchymatous tissue of plants. It con-

sists of an irregular network of very refringent, faintly bluish,

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 251

transparent, narrow trabecule, enclosing clear transparent

cavities, each of which is provided with a round nucleus and

nucleolus lying on the side of one of the trabecule (Pl. XII.

fig. 24). This is its character in its most completely special-

ized state; when less specialized its constituent cells can be

easily made out (Pl. XII. fig. 25,a toe). They are 0-001

inch in diameter, of a round, oval, or irregularly polygonal

form, and consist of an outer thick hyaline thread-like border

or cell-wall, enclosmg a large clear vacuole, and a small

quantity of finely granular colourless sarcode, in which is im-

bedded a round nucléus with its nucleolus. They appear to

be produced by the metamorphosis of the ordinary protoplas-

mic cells of the mark, and, by the fusion of their outer borders

where these touch one another, give rise to the parenchyma-

like tissue just described, to which the name of “ vacuo-

lated connective tissue’? may be applied. The layer which

this tissue forms beneath the epidermis is of variable thickness,

on an average from 0:002 to 0:003 inch; it is distinguished

by the entire absence of cylindro-stellate or other spicules,

the only spicules which occur in it being the small fusiform

acerates, which penetrate at one end the subjacent globate

layer, and project at the other beyond the surface of the sponge.

It may be as well to give this layer of tissue a distinct name ;

and though the term “dermis” is not gltogether free from

objection in its application here, it has, at least, the merit of

convenience.

The next layer of the cortex, 0°01 inch thick, is that of the

globate spicules (Pl. XI. fig. 7,c). The characters of these

have most of them been already described by other observers.

It is a fact, however, worthy of special mention, that some of

these spicules contain within a well-marked pit-like hilum a

distinct oval nucleus with aspherical nucleolus.

The globates do not lie loosely aggregated together, but

are regularly conjoined by short thick fibrillated ligaments.

The ligaments pass directly from the side of one globate to

the opposed face of its nearest neighbour; and since in the

plane of a single transverse section one globate may be seen

surrounded by five or six others, so there will also be seen

five or six ligaments proceeding from it, like the spokes of a

wheel, one for each of its surrounding fellows. As the sur-

rounding globates are also joined to each other by ligaments,

so a number of triangles are produced, having the ligaments

for their sides anda globate lying on each angle. The centre

of the triangle, which is left vacant by the ligaments, is occu-

pied by a cell or cells, which, with their nuclei and nucleoli,

exactly resemble one of the vacuolated cells of the dermal

252 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

layer. The attachment of the fibres of the ligament is pro-

vided by the tubercles of the globate; and when a globate is

torn out from the cortex it carries its ligaments with it, as a

hair-like coating of radiating fibres.

The fibres are exceeding fine threads, mere lines in thick-

ness, and consist of altered protoplasm, which stains but very

slightly with carmine. Small refringent granules occur

amongst them; and in places they appear to pass into the

fibres of the succeeding cortical layer (Pl. XI. fig. 7, f). This,

which in describing Stelletta Normant (Sollas) we called the

muscular layer, is comparatively thin, varying from 0:0015 to

0-0035 inch in thickness. It consists of fibres similar to those

of S. Normani, arranged in variously oriented fascie, in a

layer which is closely opposed to the inferior face of the globate

layer ; intermingled with the fibres are a considerable number

of vacuolated connective-tissne cells, which are frequently

ageregated together in groups, and sometimes form a distinct

stratum on the lower face of the muscular layer, which,

most exteriorly, is always covered by an epithelial mem-

brane with associated cylindro-stellates. The trifid heads of

the ternate spicules which appear to support the cortex are

also imbedded in the muscular layer, the fusiform fibres gene-

rally surrounding the spicular rays concentrically. This

arrangement is shown on the left-hand side of the endochone

moses rd XT).

2. The Chones.—The ectochone of the cortical layer has

generally the form of an inverted bell, covered by a thin

dermal layer above and closed by a muscular sphincter below.

From its upper and outer angle canals extend themselves

horizontally into the dermis, and, widening out, give rise to a

shallow dermal cavity, the roof of which is united to the floor

by small columns of connective tissue. The layer of tissue

covering the ectochone and that above the dermal cavities are

perforated by a number of very short tubes or ostia, which

place the cavity of the chone in communication with the

external medium. The endochone is a shallow dome-shaped

cavity which communicates freely with the subcortical crypt.

The surface of the chone and its canals is continuously lined

throughout with an epithelial membrane containing numerous

cylindro-stellate spicules. The roof of the chone consists of

fine fibrous tissue lined below with the stellate-bearing epi-

thelium, which is continued over the sides of the ostia into the

layer of epidermis which covers the roof of the chone above

(Pl. XII. fig. 33). The fibres of the chonal roof surround the

ostia sphinctrally. The ectochone, when it lies in the globate

layer, is surrounded by vesicular connective tissue, while the

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 253

walls of the endochone consist almost entirely of muscular

tissue. From the various states in which the endochone

occurs in different cases, sometimes almost entirely obliterated

by the closure of its muscular walls, sometimes continuous in

one and the same straight line by the widely open state of

the intervening sphincter, one may infer that it behaves as a

part of the sphinctral muscle : when the upper portion alone

of this muscle contracts we have the condition of things

represented in Pl. XI. fig. 7; when the whole contracts, that

represented in Pl. XII. fig. 30, where the endochone has

become constricted to a mere narrow tube; while, should the

sphincter remain altogether relaxed, we have the form shown

im Pl. XI. fig. 23

The muscular fibres of this sphincter have here, as in Ste/-

letta Normant, a character very different from that of the other

fusiform fibres of the cortex; the axial threads are much thicker,

the hyaline exterior is reduced in quantity, and the whole muscle

has a less transparent and much greyer appearance than in

the other case. Moreover the fibres of the lower face of the

cortex do not stain deeply with carmine, while those of the

sphincters acquire an intense colour with this tinction-reagent.

Finally, the latter are so arranged that they can and evidently

do contract, and thus are true muscles both by function and

structure ; while the former occur in such places and arranged

in such a manner that it is difficult to understand how, in

this sponge at least, they could contract, or what purpose 1

would serve if they did. Thus, altogether, I begin to doubt

how far it is justifiable to extend our ideas as to the nature of

the sphinctral fibres to those of the lower cortex, and am

much more inclined to regard the latter as forming a kind

of fibrous connective tissue, and the former alone as true

muscles.

Before leaving the subject of the chones it would be but

fair to the memory of Bowerbank to bear our testimony to the

striking fidelity which characterizes his representation of the

structure of these or gans—a fidelity which is the more striking

when we consider the comparatively small size which they

possess in this species, and recollect the imperfect methods

which this much-abused observer had at his disposal.

3. The Subcortical Crypts—Compared with those of Stel-

letta Normant, the crypts beneath the general surface of the

sponge are of very trifling dimensions ; but beneath the sur-

face which gives attachment to an adhering foreign sponge

they become abnormally large, attaining a length four or five

times that of the average. This probably is a pathological

peculiarity due to the disturbance of the normal water-circula-

254 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

tion, produced by the probably commensal parasite. The

crypts are lined by an epithelial membrane containing nume-

rous cylindro-stellate spicules. The pillars of the crypts are

traversed by the long-shafted spicules, and consist partly of

mark-substance, and partly of vacuolated connective-tissue

cells, which sometimes form a distinct layer beneath the epi-

thelium (Pl. XII. fig. 27). Sometimes the mark-cells of the

pillars are elongated into spindle-shaped fibres, which do not

generally differ, except in shape, from ordinary mark-cells, but

sometimes become hyaline and vacuolated (Pl. XI. fig. 15, g

and v).

4. The Incurrent Tubes.—The tubes are simple excavations

in the mark, lined by epithelium, which consists of a single

layer of flattened cells, furnished with a round nucleus and

nucleolus, but with indistinct or invisible cell-borders.

5. The Excurrent Tubes—The smaller canals (Pl. XII.

fig. 32) of the excurrent system do not differ from the corre-

sponding incurrent tubes in structure; but the larger tubes

have walls of a much more complex character. ‘he large

vessels, for instance, which open into the oscular tube are

first lined by an epithelial membrane containing fine fibrils

and round or oval nuclei with their nucleoli; beneath this

follows a colourless transparent layer, which scarcely stains

with carmine, and attains a thickness of 0°0007 inch. It

consists of fine fibres (Pl. XI. fig. 15, f) of considerable

length, with a swollen middle part, in which a central round

granule or small nucleus may sometimes be discerned, and of

vacuolated connective-tissue cells, which, when they le imme-

diately under the epithelium, sometimes contain a sharp-

rayed stellate spicule. The ruge of these vessels consist of

an extension of the fine fibrillar layer covered by the epithe-

lium. Globate and small acerate spicules occur in the walls

of these vessels.

6. The Oscule and Oscular Tube-—The wall of the oscular

tube below the cortex (Pl. X. fig. 2) is 0°02 inch thick, and

consists for the most part of fibrous tissue, which does not

stain with carmine, and is traversed by a number of small

acerate spicules, which project from it erectly, and thus pro-

duce the hispid appearance of its surface previously mentioned.

Vacuolated connective-tissue cells occur intermingled with

fibres on both the inner and outer face of the wall; and the

outermost layer consists of epithelial membrane. On the

inside of the wall the epithelium is associated with minute

cylindro-stellates like those of the epidermis, on the outside

with larger sharp-rayed stellates like those of the mark, In

places the fibrous tissue of the wall passes into true muscular

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 255

fibres, which form the sphincters already mentioned. These

sphincters are well exposed by a tangential section of the

oscular tube-wall; in such a section (Pl. X. fig. 4) the wall

is seen to be divided into a number of polygonal areas, the

boundaries of which are marked by a few globate and acerate

spicules, while the greater part of the area of the polygon is

occupied by one of the sphinctral muscles, which, in carmine-

stained sections, have a deep red colour, strongly contrasting

with the uncoloured tissue of the polygonal boundary.

In the cortex (Pl. X. fig. 5) the oscular tube is lined by

epithelium bearing stellates, and overlying first a finely fibrous

layer, and then a thin stratum of vacuolated connective tissue,

which covers the globate-layer, here very much increased in

thickness, as also is the underlying cortical fibrous layer.

The roof of the oscular tube consists of a thin fibrous

layer, without globates, but traversed by acerate spicules and

covered by a layer of cylindro-stellates above and below.

7. The Ciliated Chambers.—The spherical outline of these

chambers, which measure 0:001 inch in diameter, bears upon

its inner surface a number of small, round, highly refringent

nuclei with minute nucleoli, set at regular intervals from each

other ; but the outlines of complete cells cannot be made out,

any more than can the cilia. A sharply marked circular

aperture furnishes an abrupt passage from the interior of the

chamber to the incurrent canal, on which the chambers are

set, while the opening into the excurrent canal, on the other

hand, appears to be much more gradual and prolonged (PI. X.

fig. 6 A, and Pl. XII. fig. 36).

8. The Mark.—The substance of the mark, independent of

the tissues which enter into the composition of the canal-

system, consists of finely granular sarcode, with large oval

nuclei, containing nucleoli (Pl. XII. fig. 31) scattered through-

out it. It stains with carmine, but not so intensely as its

imbedded nuclei. The nuclei (Pl. XII. fig. 29), which are

sometimes round as well as oval, have a well-marked double

contour, 0°0002 to 00003 inch in diameter, and contain a

clear unstained space, within which is the deeply stained

round nucleolus 0°0001 inch in diameter. The mark-tissue

might be taken for a “syncytium,” were it not that in some

cases distinct cells can be made out in it, having nuclei of

precisely the same characters as those just described, and

consisting of granular sarcode just like the ground-mass of the

mark. ‘These cells (Pi. XII. figs. 28, 32), 0:0008 inch in

diameter, have a very faint external contour; and one can

readily understand how, in a sponge not specially prepared

for histological examination, the borders of such cells would

256 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

become altogether undistinguishable in the majority of cases,

and so, by a deceitful appearance of confluence, give rise to

the notion of a syncytium. Connective tissue like that of the

medusoid disk is not discoverable in this sponge; in Thenea

Wallichii, Wright, however, the greater mass of the mark

consists of it.

9. The Spicules—The long-shafted spicules are enveloped

in a sheath which somewhat resembles the epithelial mem-

brane, and are accompanied by longitudinally arranged fibres

like those of the cortex ; they are also frequently closely sur-

rounded by concentric fibres of a very simple appearance,

consisting merely of thin flat fusiform hyaline strips with a

small round central granule or nucleus.

The globates of the cortex are all full-grown forms; but

those dispersed through the mark are to be met with in all

stages of development. In their earliest state they consist of

minute trichites, radiately arranged to form a sphere, the centre

of which is either empty or occupied by some transparent

substance like that of the axial thread of a long-shafted spicule.

The outer ends of the trichites penetrate a thick double-con-

toured cell-wall, which is at first transparent and almost

colourless (Pl. XII. fig. 37). On one side of this cell-wall is

imbedded an oval nucleus, which strikingly resembles the

nuclei of the mark-cells. With growth a deposit of silica is

formed about the inner ends of the trichites, cementing them

together into a transparent siliceous globule; the outer diver-

ging ends remain unenveloped, and are easily detached from the

central sphere. A hilum is for some time absent; but pre-

sently the growth of the trichites beneath the nucleus becomes

slow compared with that outside it (Pl. XI. fig. 18), and

as a result a conical cavity is left under the nucleus and

forms the hilum of the adult spicule. The nucleus, when

viewed face on, appears to rest, like a biconvex lens, over

the upper end of the hilum; but a lateral view presents it

as completely filling the cavity of the hilum. ‘The cell-

wall enlarges with the growth of the globate, and very early

acquires a very oranular appearance and a deep grey colour ;

it then stains ‘deeply with carmine. Probably the preceding

statement should in one point be reversed, and we should say

that the trichites increase in length with the growth of the

cell-wall. Finally the trichites become thicker and acquire

rounded conical ends, which at length assume the character-

istic adult form.

It is singular that no immature forms are met with in the

cortex ; and this leads one to infer that the fully-grown globate

travels in some manner unknown from the mark to the lower

Sponge-fauuna of Norway. 257

face of the cortex, where its dense sarcodic coating becomes

metamorphosed into fibrous ligaments; only in some such

manner as this can the additional globates needed for the

increased area of the cortex, consequent on the growth of the

sponge, be explained. It is, moreover, suggested by the fact

that in embryonic G’eodie the globates are at first absent in

the cortex, and make their earliest appearance within the

mark,

The stellate spicules, as we have already stated, are pro-

duced within the interior of cells; they may frequently be

observed within a cell resembling one of the vacuolated con-

nective cells, with transparent sarcode filling up the angles

between their rays (Pl. XI. fig. 22).

Classification.— It may be thought singular to refer to

Geodia a sponge which apparently possesses neither the

cribriform oscular area nor the large body-cavity which

characterize that genus. But it is to be recollected that we

have been describing a young specimen, the structure of which

is in all respects so similar to that of Geodia Barretti that no

one could refuse to refer it to that species, and, next, that, ac-

cording to Bowerbank’s descriptions, Geodia Barretti clearly

belongs to the genus to which we have assigned it; for,

setting aside the absence of a large body-cavity, which is not

really essential to Geodia, we have the genuine G'eodia cha-

racter displayed by Bowerbank’s specimens in the possession

of a large cribriform oscular area. In our sponge this area is

represented by the walls of the oscular tube, which may, with

growth, become a mere shallow depression, or may enlarge, as

Bowerbank’s descriptions show, into a cavity as much as two

inches in depth.

Locality. Kors Fiord, Station No. 23. Depth 180 fathoms,

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE X.

Fig. 1. The cut face of a young specimen of Geodia Barrett: divided lon-

gitudinally through the oscular tube (nat. size).

Fig. 2. Transverse section through the wall of the oscular tube below the

cortex: s, sphincters; e, excurrent vessel, cut across obliquely ;

r, rugee of its walls (x 11).

Fig. 3. Upper surface of the sponge, showing the single oscule at the

summit (nat. size).

Fig. 4, Tangential section through the wall of the oscular tube, showing

sphincters, s, in the middle of polygonal areas (x 11).

Fig. 5, Transverse section, showing one side of the oscular tube in the

cortex, the greatly thickened globate-layer, and the thin dermal

roof (X 11).

Fig. 6. Transverse section through the mark and cortex, showing the

arangement of the water-canals: ch, ch, chones; er, crypts;

258

Fig. 6A.

On the Sponge-~Fauna of Norway.

2, incurrent tube; e, excurrent tube; c, concentric canals;

e', a deeper-seated excurrent tube ; 2', a deeper-seated incurrent

tube (X 24).

Ciliated chambers in longitudinal optical section and from a

view face on (X 435),

PLATE XI.

Fig. 7. Section through the cortex, showing the structure of the chone

and the ligamentous connexions of the globates (c): jf, the

fibrous layer (x 104).

Figs. 8,9. Porrecto- and recurvo-ternate spicules with long slender

Fig.

Fug.

Fig.

177] %

Fig.

Fig. 3

Fig.

Fxg.

Fig.

Fxg. :

Fg. :

10.

1h.

12.

15.

14.

15.

shafts.

Fusiform acerate spicule.

Bifurcated ternate spicule.

Globate spicule.

Small acerate from the cortex.

Small ternate from the upper angle of one of the crypts.

Figs. 8-14 all magnified 21 diameters.

Fusiform fibres of different kinds: g, granular mark-cell from

pillar of a crypt; v, vacuolated cell from same place; s, axial

thread of a muscle-fibre from a sphincter; f, fibres from the

wall of one of the large excurrent tubes (X 455).

. Porrecto-ternate spicule (x 21).

. Cylindro-stellate from the mark (x 315).

. Globate spicule, showing the nucleus at one side (xX 435).

. Young globate as seen in Canada balsam (xX 435).

. Stellate with sharp-pointed rays, from the mark (X 315).

. Cylindro-stellate from the epidermis (x 435).

. Stellate-cell with its contained spicule (xX 435).

. Section of a chone with widely opened sphincter (x 30).

PLATE XII.

. Vacuolate connective tissue from the dermis (X 485).

. An unaltered mark-cell occurring associated with vacuolated

connective-tissue cells: a-e, various stagesin the development

of these cells (X 455).

. Section across the outer part of the cortex, showing—e, epidermis

and c, dermis, resting upon the globate-layer.

. Wall of a crypt, taken from one of its upper corners, showing

epithelium overlying a layer of vacuolate connective-tissue cells

(X 217).

. A typical mark-cell, showing nucleus and nucleolus imbedded

in fine granular sarcode (Xx 435),

. Nuclei which occur dispersed through the granular substance of

the mark (x 455),

. Section of a chone, showing obliteration of endochone through

the contraction of its muscular walls (x 26).

. A trabecula of one of the excurrent canals, to show the general

character of its constituent mark-substance (x 425),

. A transverse section through a small canal in the mark; the

surrounding mark-cells are distinguished by faintly defined out-

lines (x 485),

. A transverse section through a dermal ostium, showing stellate-

bearing external layer and central fibrous layer (X 217).

. Section through cortex and mark, in which the incurrent canals

Geological Society. 259

are ne characteristically represented than in Pl. X. fig. 6

(x 30

Fig. 35. One af the fusiform fibres that are sometimes found lying longi-

tudinally upon the side of a small acerate spicule (Xx 439).

Fg. 36. Section along an incurrent canal lying in the middle of the

mark, showing ciliated chambers and the small outflow-tubes

leading towards an excurrent canal (x 140).

Fig. 37. A very early form of globate spicule, from a preparation in

elycerine (X 435).

[To be continued. ]

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

January 21, 1880.—Henry Clifton Sorby, Esq., LL.D., F.R.S.,

President, in the Chair,

The following communications were read :—

1. “On the Genus Plewracanthus, Agass., including the Genera

Orthacanthus, Agass. & Goldf., Diplodus, Agass., and Xenacanthus,

Beyr.” By J. W. Davis, Esq., F.G.S.

The author commenced with an historical account of the supposed

genera of fishes founded on remains occurring in Carboniferous and

Permian strata, mentioned in the title of his paper. The teeth

described by Agassiz under the name of Diplodus have been already

shown by Sir Philip Egerton to be associated with spines of the

Pleuracanthus type ; and this identification was accepted by the

author, who also showed that Xenacanthus, Beyrich, is identical with

Pleuracanthus, and that, on the ground of priority, which there is

no reason for disregarding, the latter name ought to be retained.

With regard to Orthacanthus, he indicated that in the type described

by Agassiz the two rows of denticles are placed close together along

the posterior face of the spine, while in his Plewracanthus the

denticles are situated as far as possible apart on the sides of the

spine. In the new Carboniferous species described in the present

paper, and in those described and figured by the officers of the

United-States Survey, the denticles occupy almost every intermediate

position between these two extremes; and hence the author was

inclined to unite Orthacanthus with Pleuracanthus. Compsacanthus,

Newb., is also probably nearly related to Plewracanthus. The

author described in some detail the characters of the genus Plewra-

canthus, and discussed its scientific position, with regard to which

he inclined to the adoption of Dr. Rudolph Kner’s opinion that the

Pleuracanths constitute a type of fish intermediate between the

Elasmobranch and Teleostean fishes, but more nearly gs

the latter, probably through the Siluroids.

260 Miscellaneous.

Ten species of the genus Plewracanthus, modified as above, were

described by the author from the Coal-measures, principally of York-

shire. Eight of these were described as new.

2. “On Mammalian Remains and Tree-trunks in Quaternary

Sands at Reading.” By E. B. Poulton, Esq., F.G.S.

The author described in detail a pit opened on the south slope of

the Thames valley on the Redland Estate at Reading, about 36 feet

above the river-level. The north face shows gravels and alluvia

containing chalk-flints and fossils, fragments of Oolitic limestone

and fossils, and scattered materials of the high-level gravel, over-

lying reconstructed beds (sands and clays) composed chiefly of the

débris of the Woolwich and Reading beds, and in part of the base-

ment bed of the London Clay. The author noticed especially the

traces of fluviatile action displayed in these reconstructed Tertiary

materials, and the fossil remains found in the sands and gravels,

which included traces of Hlephas primigenius, Bos primigenius,

Equus fossilis, and ? Rhinoceros tichorhinus, besides numerous por-

tions of trunks of trees, in some parts of which traces of coni-

ferous structure had been recognized. The characters presented by

this pit were of interest, as adding another to the scattered evidences

of the existence in postglacial time in the valley of the Thames of

a larger river occupying that valley, and flowing at from 20 to

30 feet higher than the present river.

MISCELLANEOUS.

The Cave-Bear of California. By E. D. Corn.

In exploring a cavern in the Carboniferous Limestone of Shasta

County, Cal., James D. Richardson discovered the skull of a bear

beneath several inches of cave-earth and stalagmite. The speci-

men is in a good state of preservation, and demonstrates that the

cave-bear of that region was a species distinct alike from the cave-

bear of the East (Ursus pristinus) and from any of the existing

species. In dimensions the skull equals that of the grizzly bear,

but it is very differently proportioned. The muzzle is much shorter

and is wide, and descends obliquely downward from the very con-

vex frontal region. It wants the large postorbital processes of the

grizzly, but has the tuberosities of the polar bear (U. maritimus),

which it also resembles in the convexity of the front. Sagittal

crest well developed. Three (one median and posterior) incisive

foramina; three external infraorbital foramina. ‘The teeth are

large ; and the series presents the peculiarity of being without dias-

tema. The crowns of the premolars are not preserved ; but if there

were not three premolars, the second tooth has two well-developed

roots. First true molar with but two external and one internal

tubercle. The absence of diastema renders it necessary to separate

Miscellaneous. 261

this bear from the true Ursi; and I propose to regard it, provision-

ally, as a species of Arctotherium, Gerv. The canine teeth are large,

and compressed at the base. Length of cranium, along base from

below apex of union to premaxillary border, 0°387 metre, length

to posterior nares 202, elevation of forehead vertically above the

posterior extremity of the last molar -141, width between inner

border of posterior molars 076. The species may be called Arecto-

therium semum.— American Naturalist, December 1879.

On the Systematic Position of some little-known Asiatic Mantodea,

with Descriptions of two new Species belonging to the Genus Hestias.

(Abstract.) By J. Woop-Mason,

Genus Hestras, Saussure.

The genus Hestias, proposed in 1871 by De Saussure for the re-

ception of a remarkable insect from Sylhet, is referred to the sub-

family Harpagide, wherein it must take its place next after, or in

the immediate neighbourhood of, Acromantis and its allies, from

which it is readily distinguishable by the form of the prothorax, by

the structure and by the peculiar style of colouring of the insides

of the fore legs, &&. The author recognizes five species (of which

two are now for the, first time described), viz. :—

1. Hestias Brunneriana, Saussure.

Hestias Brunneriana, Saussure, Mél. Orthopt. i. 1871, 3"° fasc. p. 454,

2; Wood-Mason, Proc. As, Soc. Beng. August 1876, 5 °.

Hab. Sythet and Calcutta in Northern India, and Mysore in

Southern India.

2. Hestias Rogenhoferr.

Pachymantis Rogenkhoferi, Saussure, Mél. Orthopt. ii. 1872, p. 77, pl. ix.

figs 2.2.

Hab. Moluccas ?

3. Hestias pictipes, n. sp.

Male and Female. Head with a minute horn shaped like that of

H. Brunneriana g. Organs of flight of female not reaching, of

male extending beyond, extremity of abdomen. ‘Tegmina of female

with the marginal field opaque light yellowish green, the rest deli-

cately hyaline ; wings with marginal field subopaque orange-yellow,

the venation of the rest of the organ of the same colour narrowly

lined with hyaline, and the meshes pale smoky. Fore coxe red-

violet, especially internally, femora inside on the lower half jet-

black, with three distinct white spots in a longitudinal row, and

with a narrow black stripe extending from the base along fully three

fourths of the length of the margin of the foliaceous expansion, the

rest of the surface being rich red-violet.

Length of female about 19 millims., of male 17 millims.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 18

262 Miscellaneous.

The specimen of the male is somewhat bleached from long resi-

dence in spirit.

Hab, Female, Marble Rocks, near Jabalpur in the Central Pro-

vinces of India; male, precise locality unknown.

4. Hestias inermis, n. sp.

Female. Head without a vestige of a horn, with the postocular

tubercles by correlation reduced to low, smooth, and rounded eleva-

tions, behind the ocelli longitudinally deeply 4-sulcate. Organs of

flight not reaching extremity of body; tegmina with the light opaque

umber-brown marginal field pubescent, and with the posterior

field rich dark umber-brown, mottled in places with lighter and

with hyaline, and crossed beyond the middle by a band half hyaline

and half opaque cream-coloured; wings opaque lemon-yellow, very

broadly margined with dark brown, with the transverse veinlets

lined with hyaline.

Fore coxze jet-black inside; femora jet-black at base, whence this

colour is continued for some distance as a marginal band onto the

foliaceous expansion.

Length about 34 millims.

Hab. Naga Hills (Captain J, Butler). Very nearly allied to the

following. }

5. Hestias phyllopus.

Mantis (Oxypilus) phyllopus, De Haan, Bijdr. &e. p. 84, pl. xvi.

fie.7, 3.

The fore femora of male and female have two black stripes in the

lower half (primitive femur).

The author has seen a specimen of the female either at Oxford or

in the British Museum.

Hab. Java.

Genus Oxypitvs, Serville.

The author considers that this genus should be transferred from

the Mantidz to the Harpagide, and therein placed between the

genera Hestias and Sigerpes. Ceratomantis Saussuru, W.-M., and

Mantis (Oxypilus) bicingulata, De Haan, are shown to be closely

allied Asiatic species of it, having the same relation to one another,

as regards degree of development of the cephalic horn, as have

Hestias Brunneriana and Hestias pictipes. Oxypilus has in common

with Sigerpes the two posterior ocelli placed at the bases of spines.

The author has only been able to study immature specimens of one

African species; and if the perfect winged insects of these should

hereafter be found to differ sufficiently from those of the Asiatic

species to warrant their separation from them generically, the latter

must take the name of Pachymantis proposed for the reception of

De Haan’s Mantis bicingulata by De Saussure.— Proc. As. Soc. Beng.

November 1879.

Miscellaneous. 263

Description of Sigerpes occidentalis, the Type of a new Genus of

Mantodea from West Africa. By J. Woop-Mason, °

In this short paper a new species of Mantodea closely related to

the East-African Sibylla tridens, Saussure, is described and made

the type of a new genus, Sigerpes, which must be placed in the sub-

family Harpagide next to the genera Ovypilus and Hestias.

The cephalic horn, as was suspected by the author (P. A.S. B.

1876), turns out to be rudimentary in the males.

The new species, described from a fine dried female specimen in

the British Museum from the neighbourhood of Sierra Leone, differs

from Sigerpes (olim Sibylla) tridens 2 in haying the cephalic

horn somewhat longer and without lateral lobes and teeth, the base

of the wings greenish yellow, the fore tibia more numerously

toothed, the fore femora on the inside red tipped with black, and the

extremities of the organs of flight not so obviously truncate.— Proc.

As. Soc. Beng. November 1879.

The Cecilie. By Prof. W. Prrrns.

Professor Peters has published an important paper on this curious

group of Amphibians, in which, after discussing certain critical

points, he gives a new division of the known forms into genera, and

describes several new species. He finds that his Gymnopis multi-

plicata (Monatsber. Berl. Akad. 1874) is generically identical with

Dumeril’s Rhinatrema unicolor, and that the characters given by

the latter author for his genus Rhinatrema are erroneous as applied

to this species; while the Cecilia bivittata of Cuvier, which was

referred by Duméril to the genus Rhinatrema, is founded upon

immature examples of the Linnean Cecilia glutinosa. Accordingly

he sinks the genus Rhinatrema altogether, and retains his own

name G'ymnopis for the genus including his and Duméril’s species.

For the division of the Cecilie into genera he considers that the

position of the tentacular pore alone leads to very unsatisfactory

and unnatural results, as, independent of the structure of the skull

and viscera, the structure or absence of the dermal scales, the denti-

tion, especially of the lower jaw, and the differences in the form of

the tentacle, seem to him to be of much greater importance. The

tentacle occurs under three different forms, namely :—dagger-

shaped (cultratum), which occurs in IJchthyophis (Epicrium), lies

freely in the sheath and can be pushed out like the point of a

trocar; valve-like (valvatum), placed at the orifice of the sheath and

united to its hinder margin, so that it moves round upon this fixed

basal part lke a flap upon its hinge, although when protruded it

appears somewhat spindle-shaped, as in Cecilia tentaculata; and

globular (globosum), which occurs in Gymnopis, and in which the

thin basal part is situated in the bottom of the sheath. An inter-

mediate form occurs in Cecilia (Herpele) squalostoma ; it appears

globular externally, but is attached by its extremity to the wall of

264 Miscellaneous.

the sheath, like the second form, but at a greater distance from the

orifice.

With regard to the habits of the species, it appears that Chtho-

nerpeton indistinctum and Hypographis rostratus have been found

living in society at considerable depths in the earth ; whilst other

species were observed in the East Indies by Colonel Beddome under

stones, and Z'yphlonectes compressicaudus and natans have been found

swimming in fresh water. The branchiferous young of Jchthyophis

glutinosus has also been taken in the water.

Prof. Peters gives the following Table of the genera :—

I, Lepipocmceri1H.—Skin with tilelhke scales,

at least on the margins of the folds; man-

dibular teeth in two rows.

A. Extremity of the body pointed; tentacle

cultrate.

a. Body depressed ; body-rings forming an

angle in the middle of the belly; ten-

tacular pit near the buccal margin, be-

tween eye and nostril .............. 1. Ichthyophis.

b. Body cylindrical; tentacular pit under

the nostril

Ses SURae doy sans oo 2. Ureotyphlus, g. n.

B. Extremity of the body rounded off.

a. Tentacular pit horseshoe-shaped ; tentacle

valvate.

* Tentacle under the nostril _......... 3. Cecilia.

+ Tentacle behind and under the nostril . 4

b. Tentacular pit circular; tentacle globate.

* Hyes visible, in an orbit

. Hypogeophis, g. 0.

Paro titcie eet me 5. Dermophis, g. n.

+ Eyes invisible, under the cranial bones.

a. Tentacular pit nearer the angle of

the mouth than the nostril ...... 6. Gymnopis.

8. Tentacular pit nearer the nostril than

the angle of the mouth.......... 7. Herpele, g. n.

Il. Gymnocmcem1m.—Skin naked, without tile-

like scales ; tentacle valvate ; tentacular pit

horseshoe-shaped.

A. Extremity of the body rounded off.

a. Mandibular teeth biserial ; tentacular pit

midway between nostril and eye...... 8. Chthonerpeton, g.n.

6. Mandibular teeth uniserial; tentacular

pit much nearer the eye than the nos-

Tl PON Snape Ae =, Sen aes SNe 7 9. Stphonops.

B. Extremity of the body compressed ; man-

dibular teeth biserial; tentacular pit close

behine*the nostrils ie sas. Se ee 10. Typhlonectes, g. n.

The genus Ichthyophis, Fitzinger (= Epicrium, Wagler), includes

three eastern species—namely, J. glutinosus, Linn., J. monochrous,

Bleek., and J. Beddomei, sp. n. Beddome’s Epicrium carnosum,

Gegenes carnosus, Ginth., is regarded by Prof. Peters as founded

upon very young, immature animals, which, from their cylindrical

form and the position of the nostrils, seem to approach Cecilia rather

than Ichthyophis. As the generic name Gegenes has long been pre-

Miscellaneous. 265

occupied, the author suggests Gegeneophis for the genus in the

event of its proving to be well founded. Uraeotyphlus has the ten-

tacular pit circular and the base of the cultrate tentacle at the

bottom of the tentacular tube. Itincludes two Kast-Indian species—

Cecilia oxyura, Dum. & Bibr., and C. malabarica, Beddome. The

genus Cecilia, as restricted, includes seven American species—

namely, C. tentaculata, Linn., isthmica, Cope, gracilis, Shaw, pachy-

nema, Giinth., ochrocephala, Cope, polyzona, Fisch. (sp. n.), and Gun-

theri, sp. n. (=C. rostrata, Gunth. non Cuy.). Hypogeophis has the

eye visible; the species referred to it are Cecilia rostrata, Cuv., from

the Seychelles, and C. Seraphini, Dum., from Gaboon and the Cama-

roons. Dermophis includes scaled species, which have been referred

by previous authors to Wagler’s genus Siphonops, founded upon the

scaleless Cecilia annulata, Mikan. Prof. Peters refers to Dermophis

the American species Siphonops meaicanus, Dum. & Bibr., S. brasili-

ensts, Litken, S. proaimus, Cope, and S. stimus, Cope, and the West-

African S. brevirostris, Pet., and S. thomensis, Bocage. Gymnopis

closely approaches Stphonops in the structure of the skull. To this

-genus three American species are referred—namely, G. multiplicata,

Pet., Rhinatrema unicolor, Dum., and Siphonops oligozona, Cope.

Herpele, which approaches Cecilia in cranial structure, includes only

one species, the West-African Cecilia squalostoma, Stutchbury. In

Chthonerpeton the tentacular pit is placed midway between eye and

nostril, but considerably below the line joining those organs; the

only known species is Stphonops indistinetus, Reinh. & Litk., from

South America. The sole representative of the restricted genus

Siphonops is Wagler’s type species C. annulata, Mikan, from Brazil,

Guiana, and Peru. Lastly, in Typhlonectes the eyes are distinct,

and the anal aperture surrounded by a sort of sucking-disk. The

species are all from South America—namely, Cecilia compressicauda,

Dum. & Bibr., C. dorsalis, Pet., C. natans, Fisch., and ? Siphonops

syntremus, Cope. The foetal form has vesicular branchie. Prof.

Peters’s paper is illustrated with a plate elucidating the characters

of the genera.—Monatsbh. Akad. Wiss. Berl., November 1879,

p- 924.

Histology, Development, and Origin of the Testis and Ovary in Cam-

panularia angulata (Hincks). By M. J. Fratponr.

The histological study of the three layers, ectoderm, intermediate

lamella, and entoderm, of the body in Hydroids, leads to some new

and important facts, of which a summary is here given.

The small nematocysts of the ectoderm of the tentacles are sur-

rounded by a slight protoplasmic layer, often nucleolated and indi-

vidualized, to which a palpocil corresponds. ‘This relation is im-

portant from the physiological point of view, and that of the mode

of action of the urticant organs.

The endoderm of the stolons in the vicinity of the pedicles of

female gonangia (Campanularia angulata), and especially in the

branches (C. flewuosa), contains larger cells, having, on the one hand,

266 Miscellancous.

the characters of egg-cells, and passing, on the other, into the endo-

dermic cells. Our master, E. van Beneden, has long since made

analogous observations (in Campanularia dichotoma), which are

still unpublished.

The free extremity of the appendicular organ terminated in a

hook is characterized by the development of the ectoderm, by the

accumulation in that tissue of corpuscles of special structure, and by

the considerable attenuation of the perisarc. These data may

perhaps serve to settle the nature of this organ.

In the body and tentacles the intermediate lamella, which else-

where is amorphous, presents fasciculated fibrils, which insert

themselves at definite points, and which I believe to be muscular.

A gonangeum is formed by a gonotheca, a central system of canals,

and some gonophores. The axial canal or blastostyle spreads out

into a hammer-head at the upper extremity of the yonangiwm, and

furnishes laterally those czeca at the level of which the gonophores

are formed. In C. angulata and C. flexuosa the latter do not

become either Medusze or semi-Meduse, as in the other Campanu-

larie ; they remain in the condition of diverticula of the wall of the

body, and certain of their cellular elements become ovary or testis.

The spermatozoids seem to be formed by a small nucleus, or

fragment of a small nucleus, surrounded by a little of the proto-

plasm of the mother cell, of which the rest serves to form the tail.

The female gonophore contains only one ovum, the germinal

vesicle of which, when not fecundated, is analogous to that described

by W. Flemming, E. van Beneden, Kleinenberg, O. Hertwig, and

Bergh in various animals. It contains a small clear corpuscle of

irregular form (Schrén’s corpuscle), from which start from three to

six filaments which appear to terminate at the inner surface of the

germinal spot; carmine colours it strongly. Segmentation by

transverse furrows of unilateral direction produces a ciliated planula

showing a cellular ectoderm and an endoderm.

Four opinions are current as to the origin of the sexual organs:

Huxley, Keferstein and Ehlers, Claus, Kleinenberg, Schulze, O. and

R. Hertwig think that the sexual organs originate from the eeto-

derm. On the other hand, Kolker, Hackel, Allman, Claus, and

Korotneff maintain their endodermic origin. E. van Beneden sup-

ports a third opinion, namely the ectodermic origin of the sperma-

tozoids and the endodermic origin of the ova. Van Koch and Bergh

confirmed Van Beneden’s views. Lastly, Ciamician has maintained

the ectodermic origin of the ova and the endodermic origin of the

spermatozoids in Hudendrium raimosum.

In Campanularia angulata and C. fleauosa the whole develop-

ment of the sexual organs may be traced by studying a gonangium

from its base of insertion to its apex.

In the pedicle of the male gonangium, the ccenosarc is constituted

as in the stolons and the branches ; but at one or two points the

ectoderm is more thickened and its cells better detined. Higher up,

at a certain point, the ccenosarc is inflated into a small tubercle,

into the interior of which penetrates a cecal diverticulum of the

Miscellaneous. 267

central cavity, bounded by a few endodermic cells. Beyond the

latter we see the intermediate lamella, then some well individual-

ized ectodermic cells, larger than the others (these are the mother

cells of the testis); and finally the whole is covered by the ordinary

ectodermic cells. In the cavity of the gonangium, at its base, are

young gonophores, in which we find, from within outwards, a diver-

ticulum of the cavity of the blastostyle, epithelial endodermic cells,

the intermediate lamella, a small cellular mass of a horseshoe shape,

originating from a few differentiated ectodermic cells, and, lastly, a

layer of ectodermic cells. The little mass is the young testicular

tissue. The different gonophores have the same constitution, with

the exception of the development of the tissue, which gradually

acquires a larger and larger volume. In the uppermost gonophores

all the elements which surround the mature testis are in process of

atrophy. The conclusion is that the spermatozoids originate from

the ectoderm.

In the pedicle of a female gonangium we find at the base one or

two large endodermic cells projecting into the gastrovascular cavity,

having a large nucleus and no vibratile flagellum, in fact presenting

all the characters of young ova of the gonophores. At the upper

extremity of the pedicle we see one or two differentiated endodermic

cells, but with no direct connexion with the gastrovascular cavity,

as two or three small endodermic cells cover them. Further up,

towards the base of the cavity of the gonangium, the ccenosare gives

origin to lateral diverticula. One of them presents in its interior

a small cavity, the cavity of the cecum of the blastostyle, bounded

by a series of endodermic cells. To the cuter surface of this layer

is attached a young ovum. The intermediate lamella passes above

this ovum ; and further out is the ectodermic lamella. In the upper

gonophores the same conditions exist, but the ova become more and

more voluminous. When the ovumis mature the tissues surround-

ing it are in process of atrophy. The endodermic origin of the ova

is therefore evident.

Bringing together these observations and those of E. van Beneden

and Bergh, I conclude that in the family Campanularide the sper-

mitozoids are developed at the cost of the ectoderm, and the ova at the

expense of the endoderm.—Comptes Rendus, Jan. 5, 1880, p. 43.

On the Plants which serve as the Basis of various Curares.

By M. G. Prancnon.

From the data now acquired it may be regarded as established

that the plants which serve as the basis of the curare poison all

belong to the genus Strychnos. ‘The species of other families which

enter into its composition only play a secondary part.

We know of four distinct regions which are centres of the pre-

paration of curare; and for each of them we may indicate a principal

plant which of itself explains the effects of the poison. These are,

in the order of the dates at which they became known :—

1. British Guiana, furnishing the curare of the Macusis Indians,

268 Miscellaneous.

Schomburgk ascertained that the important species of this region is

Strychnos toxifera, Schomb., accompanied by S. Schomburgki,

Klotsch, and S. cogens, Benth.

2. The very extensive region of the Upper Amazons, giving the

curare of the Pebas Indians, the Javari, the Yapura, &c. The plant

forming the basis of this curare was found during the expedition of

M. de Castelnau, and described by Weddell under the name of S.

Castelneana. Itis usually associated with a menispermaceous plant,

probably the Abuta; it is the Coceulus towrcoferus, Wedd. MM.

Jobert and Crévaux have recently brought home these species, and

confirmed the statements of M. Weddell.

3. The region of the Rio Negro. The roots, stems, and leaves of

the important species of this region were communicated to the

author during the Exposition of 1878; and he has described them

in the ‘Journal de Thérapeutique.’ The venation of the leaves and

the structure of the stem and roots prove this plant to be a Strych-

nos which does not answer to any known species; and for it the

author has proposed the name of S. Gudlert.

4. Upper French Guiana, furnishing the curare of the Roucou-

yenne and Trios Indians. The important species of this region is

a plant indicated by the author in a communication to the Academy

of Sciences on December 22, 1879. It is the most interesting of the

two new species of Strychnos brought back by M. Crévaux from his

recent explorations ; and the author here describes it under the name

of Strychnos Crévauwii. On the banks of the river Parou, an

affluent of the Lower Amazons, it bears the name of ourari or urart;

but it is perfectly distinct from the plants so designated in other

regions.— Comptes Rendus, Jan. 19, 1880, p. 133.

On the Systematic Position of the Sponges.

By Dr. Conrad KE.ier.

At the Meeting of the Société Helvétique des Sciences Naturelles

in August last, Dr. Conrad Keller communicated some observations

upon the systematic position of the sponges, which he regarded as

forming a third natural division (Spongozoa) of the Coelenterata.

He stated that in the spring of 1879 he had the opportunity at

Naples of thoroughly observing the development of a new siliceous

sponge, which he names Chalinula fertilis. In this species he

ascertained that the sexes are separate, and that, during the period

of reproduction, the female actually presents a nuptial dress, which

varies from carmine-red to lilac. The ovum undergoes a complete

but irregular segmentation, which results in the formation of a

larva consisting first of two and afterwards of three lamelle. The

transformation of this into a young sponge could be traced with

certainty ; it gave origin to a form which, with the exception of

the tentacles, agrees in all essential points with a young polype.

Dr. Keller exhibited drawings illustrative of the details of these

transformations, which he regarded as leaving no doubt that the

true position of the sponges is among Celentcrata.— Bibl. Univ.,

Arch. des Sci. December 15, 1879, p. 713.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 28. APRIL 1880.

XXVI.—On some Points in the Structure of a Species of the

“ Willemoesia Group of Crustacea.” By 8. I. Smiru,

Prof. Comp. Anat., Yale Coll.

AmonG the interesting collections of marine animals made

during the past two years by the fishermen of Gloucester,

Massachusetts, and presented to the United-States Fish Com-

mission for the National Museum at Washington, there are

two species of Podophthalmous Crustacea of peculiar interest.

One of these is a remarkable hermit-crab (Parapagurus pilosi-

manus), which I have already described* ; the other is the

subject of this note, and belongs to the ‘‘ Willemoesia group

of Crustacea,” which has recently been discussed by Messrs.

Bate and Norman in the ‘ Annals.’ Of the latter species I

have seen a single male only, which was taken in 250 fathoms,

off the coast of Nova Scotia, north latitude 43° 10’, west lon-

gitude 61° 20!, by Capt. Thomas Olsen, of the schooner ‘ Epes

Tarr.’ This specimen is not in very good condition, having

been dried (probably after having been taken from the

stomach of some fish, though there is very little evidence of

digestion having begun) and the internal organs consequently

destroyed; but it is still sufficient to throw considerable light

upon the structural peculiarities of the group to which it

belongs.

* “The Stalk-eyed Crustaceans of the Atlantic Coast of North America

north of Cape Cod,” Trans. Connecticut Acad. vy. pp. 27-188 (1879).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 19

270 Prof. S. I. Smith on the

Of the three genera into which Bate has separated the forms

of the “ Willemoesia group,” our species should be referred to

Pentacheles; but, on account of the at present uncertain tenure

of these genera, I have referred it provisionally to Heller’s

Polycheles. It is apparently very distinct from any of the

Atlantic species described by Heller, Willemoes-Suhm, or

Bate ; but, judging from the very short descriptions given by

the last author, it appears to be closely allied to his Penta-

cheles auriculatus, obtained by the ‘ Challenger’ expedition off

the Fijis. Our specimen is a male, 92 millims. long. It is

described in detail in the ‘ Proceedings of the National Mu-

seum, Washington,’ for 1879, as Polycheles sculptus; and wish

here to call attention to a few points in its structure only.

The anterior margin of the carapax, as seen from above, is

concave in outline, so that the lateral angles are much in ad-

vance of the rostrum. Abouta third of the space between the

median line and the lateral angle on each side is occupied by

a very deep orbital sinus completely

filled by a large ophthalmic lobe

(fig. 1). Just behind the orbital

sinus there is a smooth and evenly

curved depression in the surface of

the carapax, exposing a small area

on the posterior part of the ophthal-

mic lobe.

The ventral region of the carapax

on each side is divided longitudinally

into three approximately equal parts

by two carine: the outer (marking

the pleuro-tergal suture?) extends

from the anterior margin at the base

of the antenna toward the postero-. , Dorsal view of the ante-

lateral margin; the inner extends "07 portion of the right side

along the branchial region from near ° ‘Be car@pax: a, antennal

5 er, scale; 6, proximal segment

the base of the first pereiopod to the of antennula; c, ophthalmic

postero-lateral angle of the carapax. lobe.

The outer of the three longitudinal

regions thus marked out is divided transversely by the

cervical suture; and the anterior portion (subhepatic region)

is divided transversely into an anterior and a posterior lobe

by a groove nearly or quite as conspicuous as the cer-

vical. In the frontal margin of this anterior lobe and near

its inner side there is a deep sinus corresponding to the orbital

sinus of the dorsal surface, but not quite as wide, and open

nearly to the dorsal surface, except where it is crossed by a

protuberance from the ophthalmic lobe (fig. 2).

Structure of Polycheles sculptus. 271

The dorsal surface of the ophthalmic lobe is smooth, calca-

reous, and opaque, and on a level with the adjacent surface of

the carapax, except posteriorly, where a small oval area of the

extremity of the lobe is exposed by the depression in the

carapax. This oval area is thin, semitranslucent, and not

calcareous, and has every appearance of being a true corneal

area, although I am unable to de-

tect any evidence of facets. The Fig. 2.

carapax along the margins of the :

sinus is in close contact with the wen Hf

ophthalmic lobe, but is not really é H.

connected with it. From the Hy

lower portion of each ophthalmic

lobe there is an elongated, cylin-

drical and somewhat conical, but

obtuse and pointed, protuberance,

of which the base rests in a trans-

verse groove in the base of the

antenna, while the terminal por- «¢:

tion extends well across the open

ventral side of the orbital sinus.

Upon the obtuse extremity of this

protuberance there is a nearly cir-

SS Gest

cular area, similar to the cornea- vor Nokes thowanieticy

ike ar jor extremi portion of the right side of the

like area at the posterior extremity Pax a. laden

of the dorsal part of the lobe. containing the canal from the

Unfortunately the specimen is green gland; 6, process of the

not in sufficiently good condition to ophthalmic lobe; ¢, base of

enable me to determine positively the first pereiopod.

in regard to the structure of these ,

comnea-like areas ; but that they are connected with the optic

nerves and are sensitive to light, there is, I think, no chance

for reasonable doubt. While it seems probable that all four

of these areas are really faceted like the eyes of ordinary

Podophthalmia, it is possible that they may be large, simple

or nearly simple eyes, like the eyes of some Amphipoda and

Cumacea. The division of the ophthalmic lobe on each side into

two or more “eyes” has not, I think, before been noticed

among the Decapoda, and is certainly an interesting fact in

morphology; but it is apparently not a character of much

systematic or phylogenetic value. Among the Schizopoda,

the lamellar expansion of the ophthalmic lobes in Amblyops,

and their broad expansion and partial union in Psewdomma,

are quite as remarkable and apparently somewhat similar

modifications ; and Ampelisca and Biblys, among the Amphi-

poda, are cases in which there are two simple eyes on each side,

19*

272 On the Structure of Polycheles sculptus.

while in the closely allied Haploops the number apparently

varies in the different species.

The openings of the green glands are arranged very diffe-

rently from what they are in any other group of Crustaceans

known to me. Willemoes-Suhm says, of Willemoesia lepte-

dactyla, that “there is no distinct opening for the so-called

green glands;” but he probably overlooked it from its being

in an unusual position: it is, with very little doubt, situated in

a similar manner in all the allied species. The proximal seg-

ment of the antenna, in our specimen, is loosely articulated

with the sternum of the antennal segment, so as to be freely

movable upon it. It is very short upon the outside, but ex-

pands somewhat on the inner side, which terminates distally

in a thin tubular process arising from the oral side of the seg-

ment and directed upward to a level with the dorsal side, so

that, in the ordinary position of the appendages, its orifice is

closed by contact with the proximal segment of the antennula.

This tubular process (a, fig. 2) readily admits a large bristle,

which can be pushed through it, round into the cavity of the

scement itself. A similar process is apparently shown in one

of Bate’s figures of Pentacheles enthrix (‘ Annals,’ vol. u.

pl. xiii. fig. 2, 1878), though I find no reference to it in

the accompanying text. Bate subsequently, however, appears

to allude to this same process as “ the olfactory tubercle of

the second or outer antenne,” though I cannot find that he

anywhere alludes to Willemoes-Suhm’s inability to discover

the openings of the green glands.

The branchiostegites extend forward quite over the sternum

of the antennary somite; and their anterior extremities are

applied to the basal segments of the antenne. The epistome

is short, not extending at all in front of the bases of the an-

tenn, is nearly on a level with the dorsal wall of the efferent

branchial passages, and on a plane above the bases of the

antenne; so that the efferent passages terminate in the space

between the upturned edges of the squamiform processes of

the inner sides of the basal segments of the antennule and just

beneath the short two-spined rostrum. The anterior part of

the endostome is on a plane somewhat above the plane of the

epistome; but the space below is filled by the soft and

fleshy labrum, which projects considerably below the raised

posterior edge of the epistome, and does not differ essen-

tially from the labrum in Astacide or Scyllaride. The other

oral appendages are nearly as figured by Willemoes-Suhm

for Wallemoesia leptodactyla; one of the lobes of the first

maxillipeds, however, appears to assume a function not before

noticed. The inner, or endognathal, lobes of these appendages

On the Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 273

are small and rudimentary ; but there is a very large and ter-

minally bilobed lamella, apparently representing the exognath,

which extends forward considerably

in front of the epistome, where its

terminal lobes are somewhat upturned

and serve as the lower wall of a tube -

from the efferent branchial opening. Terminal portion of the

This lamella is continuous posteriorly Second, pereiopod of the

with the very large epignath, which Tight aides

extends far back into the branchial chamber.

The fifth, or last, pair of pereiopods are considerably shorter

and more slender than the fourth, and subchelate (fig. 4).

The first pleopods have an

imperfect articulation about a

third of the way from the base sg eae

to the tip; the basal portion is as CZ

somewhat triquetral; and the Terminal portion of the fifth

terminal portion expands into pereiopod of the left side.

a smooth, naked, and thin

lanceolate lamella slightly concave posteriorly. ‘The second

pleopoas are similar to the succeeding pairs, not greatly modi-

fied as in Astacus and its near allies. The lamelle are nar-

row, lanceolate, and nearly equal in size; and the inner

lamella bears the two small styliform processes usually cha-

racteristic of males among Macrura. The three succeeding

pairs of pleopods are similar to those of the second pair; but,

as usual, they all want the outer of the two styliform processes

on the inner margin of the inner lamelle.

New Haven, Conn., U.S. A.,

Feb. 11, 1880,

XXVII.—On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

By Cuaries Lapwortu, F.G.S. &e.

Part III. Resutrs.

[Continued from p. 62. ]

(4) GrotogicaL.—The conclusions which may be drawn from

the data now before us, as detailed in the preceding pages,

arrange themselves very naturally under two distinct heads.

In the first place, we shall consider the various forms of

Rhabdophora there enumerated from the geological or strati-

graphical point of view, treating of the several groups and

individuals as possible indices of the systematic place of their

274 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

containing beds. In the second place we shall look upon them

from the zoological or paleontological side, noting the geolo-

gical date of the advent, culmination, and gradual extinction of

the known families, genera, and species, and fixing approxi-

mately their individual range in Paleozoic time.

Upper Cambrian Rocks.

TABLE IJ. Showing Range of Upper Cambrian

Rhabdophora.

2/3 alee

rt Pe: Oe ean ee ace

| | o}e.| Ss] 88

q oh] MO &§

| # 5 4S | mt] 8m

Were 2 | DE) 2) §

o » me

& q | 8°] 8a|/2

S| cele) Eee ele

| a | @|/4 | SEIA

——<—$/_ ——

DICHOGRAPTIDA.

Bryograptus Callavei, Lapw..... Pil

Geri, Lia! oe see ass [wate attics at tite

Clonograptus rigidus, Hall...... Ae a Bae Mam aD! |!

Dichograptus tenellus, Zinn. ....) 6. | 2. | ee | og

The oldest Rhabdophora hitherto detected are probably the

forms discovered by Mr. Linnarsson in the Olenus-beds of

Westrogothia, Sweden. These strata are possibly of a some-

what higher antiquity than the Shineton shales of Shrop-

shire, in which Dr. Callaway has discovered corresponding

forms.

The only family of Rhabdophora as yet represented in these

Upper Cambrian graptolitiferous rocks is that of the Dicho-

graptide, to which the vast majority of the forms belong

which mark the succeeding Arenig period. Indeed this frag-

mentary Cambrian graptolitic fauna appears at first sight to be

essentially ofan Arenig type. One prime distinction, however,

can hardly be overlooked. In the Arenig formations the

more simple forms, such as Didymograptus and Tetragraptus,

greatly preponderate, the highly complex forms like Dzcho-

graptus and Olonograptus being comparatively rare. In this

small Upper Cambrian assemblage, on the other hand, the

only forms recognized belong to some of the most highly

complex genera known—the British, Norwegian, and Swedish

faunas agreeing precisely in this respect.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 275

Orpovician System (Lower Silurian of Murchison).

(a) Arentg Formation. |

+Tasie III. Showing the Range of the Arenig

Rhabdophora.

E F g

- : = E - 3

wee} eis] 2 [33 4

Poa | ess |e |ze| | 2] <

4a ]4 a] [a” ra Z

| ene

. 2 ee

é 2 +)4) 8/3

Sid elie A ee

| S| of | Pads} ef s1O| G14) 3 Sis

O|mo| Of Oo] |g o/| @ BY aa) 5=7 GS) fe:

AG Mee ee ee eeelaeee

S| a/b] a/4l Efe apa epala) alae) als

LEPTOGRAPTID&.

Azygograptus Lapworthi, Mich...}..|.. Gulp Ds

coelebs, Lapw......eees Ball le : Ales

DicRANOGRAPTID,

Dicellograptus divaricatus, Hall. .|,.|..|x.

DIcHOGRAPTIDZ.

: ae a as

Didymograptus affinis, Nich. ....}..|..| x]. xlel ls

arcuatus, Hall .........+ bse AP eesilin ay asltalaadlg sialeks An

aes bifidus, SEL UU Ve ove Gis tgs 018i j | ASIP ¥ * 1x

= oninataey JEG 6 ea dec Sa0e cites ler Analg Ae x |e

extensus, Hall 22.36% = oe + +l |. AY lx |e Lae

extenuatus, Hall .......+.- Sy at 0 eh val ote

—— fasciculatus, Nich. ......--|.. belie teealies Se

—— gibberulus, Nich........+++].. Moller (ste %

—— indentus, Hall ..........++|.. BAN eal Oe os sofae

—— Murchisoni, Beck .......-]..|..|..[- -

— Nicholsoni, Lapw. ......+.|.. ‘

ee ,] . eel & *%

pa TOUS, ALOE 14s cle. v's ohaniesfs alle :

. ole efeclesle * |. oole of]. |x

patulus, Hal] ........0+++1,. fe te ole Vx a ello! be

—— pennatulus, Hall.......... Flere eel el CA is uf? %

Birniihial \ Palit. cote ou cas sesh: AES at i) hepatelig

strictulus, Zimnrs. ......+-|.. ls wx

sparsus, Hopk........+2+++ &

Panponit, Al Cowyi.v. 05 aitis'aier sles levala he «ls ote ts Ar

WAERCLUS,, OGIMEMI tars ern sist ells alls aha A x |. de de

Tetragraptus alatus, Hall ...... ae vole ede

approximatus, Wich. Be) RARE Reo pol eed Gels By: Lx

——Bigsbyi, Hall ....cecccerc|s ole cle of wre % ae

—— bryonoides, Hall 4a

ryonol Ss, Worsrader les Klee cle cle -]x]- *Kl+ de]. *

Cruener, WLANs sists be delse elhoteallc la « aie Pane Oe oe

+ These tables include all the forms of Rhabdophora published to this

date (Jan. 1880) the geological horizons of which are approximately known.

Several species recently described are added to those already enumerated

in the Epeerdpe portions of this paper. A few are omitted altogether,

either because their geological age is uncertain, or because they are of

very doubtful specific identification,

276 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

Tas_e III. (continued).

Tetragraptus denticulatus, Hall..)..|.

fruticosus, Hall ........ ae

—— Halli, Hopk. ........ aie

BP rie(e). sHopk, (oof .ce eee

Talepyeli, 72 (LR S's tad Risen oc Pallac

quadribrachiatus, Hall ...

Dichograptus Sedgwicki, Salt.

Clonograptus flexilis, Hall......|.

IC HATOSONI LLG | rie eles « «|e

rigidus, Hall ...... AO

Clematograptus implicatus, Hopk. it

Trichograptus fragilis, Nich.

Temnograptus multiplex, Nich. ..|..|. |.

Schizograptus reticulatus, Nich...

Goniograptus Thureaui, M‘Coy....|.

PHYLLOGRAPTIDZ.

Phyllograptus angustifolius, Hall... .|..

PAU, LAI oo ss oop eh sn. nisin s' «| 0°'|e

iliciformis, Hall ..........|:

— stella, Hopk. ....0.00000% Ps)

—— typus, Hall oc cece eeeeeeelee|s

DIPLOGRAPTIDZ.

Diplograptus dentatus, Brongn...|..|..

AMMUUELIIS, PELOULS ye) eletelojetelarerei+"=\|

Climacograptus confertus, Lapw..)..

Scharenbergi, Lapw. ......|.

Cryptograptus tricornis, Carr. ..|.

LASIOGRAPTID&.

Glossograptus ciliatus, Emmons ..|..|..

BLIIAUUS, LVCCH sok a10 nyoro itr = fl

Retiograptus tentaculatus, Hall. .|..|.

Hallograptus bimucronatus, Wich...

RETIOLITIDZA.

Trigonograptus ensiformis, Hall. .| x |.

Tanceolatus, SVECA. © 6 o%.s ss 10|> oll if

truncatus, Lapw........+..|%|--

| Lower

octobrachiatus, Hall ...... steil(ntel|

octonarius, Hall. ...:.. 2.66% poe (aes ae | Pach os feos, al

Loganograptus Logani, Hall ....)..).+|.-J-+).+

MATIUUINUS, PETAL. where siren laters) + \l\¥\ ls

? antennarius, Hall........|..|.

——? Hopkinsoni, Nich.........)..

N. Wales.

| Scania,

| Upper.

| Tyobry.

Yr.

Pont Seiont.

| Lower.

foe

| Low. Grapt. Sch.

| Mid. Grapt. Sch.

es | Point Levis.

KR KRERSK

| Riv. St. Anne &e. | N. America.

| Newfoundland.

Australia

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 277

The grand characteristic of the graptolitic fauna of the

Arenig rocks is the extraordinary predominance of those forms

of Rhabdophora which compose the family of the Dicho-

graptide. In every region where these Arenig strata have

been fully investigated they have been found to be locally

crowded with the feathery forms of this special group, from

the simplest to the most highly complex species. Of the

sixty-three forms of Graptolites enumerated in the foregoing

Table, forty-five, or nearly three fourths of the entire fauna,

belong to this single family; and if we unite with it the

dubiously distinct family of the Phyllograptidee, it will be

found to outnumber the representatives of all the remaining

families in the proportion of nearly five to one. This marked

peculiarity, which gives to our Arenig fauna a special cha-

racter unique among those of the Lower Paleeozoic forma-

tions, is not confined to Britain alone, but is fully as charac-

teristic of the Arenig of Scandinavia, and of North America,

as well as of the antipodal regions of Australia.

Within the generally accepted provisional limits of the

Arenig formation there is some evidence of a progressive

change in the relative preponderance of the various genera of

the Dichograptide in proportion as we ascend in the vertical

series. As we have already pointed out, the more complex

genera seem to have been the first to appear ; and in the lowest

Arenig beds they are still abundant, but they are intermixed

with simple forms. In the Middle Arenig strata the highly

complex and beautifully regular genera like Clonograptus and

Dichograptus appear to have died out, and the prevalent com-

plex genus in these beds is the four-armed Tetragraptus. In

the true Upper Arenig the bifid genus Didymograptus is

supreme. ‘The monotonous character of the fauna of these

higher beds, due to the presence of multitudes of examples of

this single genus, is but slightly affected by the presence ot

scattered examples of irregularly compound genera, very

different in their structural features from the regularly dicho-

tomizing forms of the earlier beds.

All the regularly dividing forms of Dichograptide with

more than four branches appear to have vanished before the

close of the so-called Middle Arenig. There the four-armed

Tetragraptus is most characteristic. The bifid genus Didy-

mograptus is rare in the lowest beds; but its individuals increase

rapidly in numbers as we ascend the succession, filling the

places left vacant by the disappearing complex genera, till

finally in the Upper Arenig it becomes the most prevalent and

characteristic form. The rarer and irregularly branching

complex genera which there accompany it seem to point to-

278 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

wards Canograptus, one of the most striking forms of the

distinct family of the Leptograptide.

From the base to the summit of the Arenig formation the

Dichograptide are accompanied by the rarer forms of the most

intimately allied family of the Phyllograptide. The single

genus of which this family is at present composed has not

hitherto been met with in true Cambrian rocks, and is un-

known above the lower limit of the Llandeilo formation. Like

the Dichograptide, its species are typical of the Arenig rocks

from Scandinavia to the Antipodes. We know too little of

the beautiful forms of this family to note any general change

in their superficial features during this extended period. As

yet, indeed, we have not collected sufficient material for the

complete study of a single British species.

As a general rule, species belonging to the remaining

families of the Diprionida are, in the Arenig, the rarest of

fossils. Locally, however, an occasional stratum is met with

in which they are tolerably abundant. Three distinct families,

however, are already recognizable, all making their first

known appearance almost simultaneously near the boundary

line between the Lower and Middle Arenig rocks. The

Diplograptide are represented by the whole of the three com-

ponent genera ; but the species are all somewhat generalized

in character, and the most generalized genus, Cryptograptus,

claims, as might have been expected, the majority of the

known forms. The intermediary and provisional family of

the Lasiograptide is represented by the bizarre genera Gilosso-

graptus and etiograptus of Hall. The latter, which is as

yet confined to the Lower Arenig of Canada and Australia, is

also the most generalized genus of its family, combining

structural features subsequently found separate in G‘losso-

graptus and Lasiograptus. The Retiolitide are represented by

a single genus only, Tetragraptus of Nicholson, which seems

likewise of a transitional character, leading through the later

genus Gymnograptus of ‘Tullberg into the family of the

Lasiograptidee.

Of the Monoprionida outside the dominant family of the

Dichograptide few forms are known, a single British ex-

ample of the Dicranograptide from the Upper Arenig of

Abereiddy Bay and two species of the family of the Lepto-

graptide from the corresponding strata of the Upper Skiddaw

group are all that have hitherto been published from these

Arenig rocks.

Lower Arentg (of Hicks).—The only locality where grap-

tolitiferous strata near the base of the Arenig formation

have been carefully examined in Britain is at Whitesand

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. — 279

Bay, near St. Davids, where the few forms that have

hitherto been collected are chiefly Diplograpti and Clado-

phora. I suspect, however, that the oldest strata of Point

Levis, with highly complex Dichograptide, will be found to be

on or near this horizon, as well as some of the lowest Skiddaw

beds. They may eventually have to be placed at the summit

of the Cambrian.

Middle Arenig.—To this provisional horizon the more

typical Arenig beds of Skiddaw and the Lower Graptolite

schists of Sweden undoubtedly belong. They appear to be

marked generally by the prevalence of the genera Tetragraptus

and Didymograptus, in combination with an admixture of

recular and irregular complex genera of Dichograptide.

The limits of this subformation areas yet undefined either above

or below; but if we regard the Skiddaw and Scanian beds as

provisionally typical, we find in this division few Diprionida,

and those which are present rise upwards into the succeeding

subformation.

Upper Arenig.—Liverywhere in Britain these beds are com-

posed of shaly strata varying in tint from light green to

black. The Upper Skiddaw of the Lake District possibly

includes some horizons not embraced in the more typical and

Upper Arenig beds of South Wales, or in the corresponding

Scanian strata that overlie the Swedish Orthoceras-Limestone ;

but in all these beds the salient character of the Graptolite

fauna is the predominance of individuals of Didymograptus,

among which the “ geminiform”’ species D. bifidus, Hall, is

especially common. No regularly compound genera of the

Dichograptidee have as yet been procured from this horizon ;

but the irregularly branched forms of the type of Z’richograptus

fragilis, Nich., are occasionally met with. Diprionida of the

families noted above are present, and apparently in greater

numbers than in the underlying zone. Phyllograptide

are locally abundant, appearing on this horizon for the last

time.

Our knowledge of the range of the Graptolites within the

Arenig formation is as yet too defective to allow us to fix

even the approximate range of the species of Dichograptide.

Of the less-understood forms of Diprionida we know hardly

any thing with certainty; and the few recognized zoological

facts are deprived of the geological value they would other-

wise possess in our catalogue by the undoubted intermixture

of species derived from several distinct stratigraphical zones.

280 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

(b) Llandeilo Formation.

Taste LV. Showing Range of Llandeilo Rhabdophora.

AS) 3 E A

i) o

Be = | 3 3

oa 2 412 E

= <=) = m

Si lene les

= o

| al eel ES

Ela) s|N|N] 3s

Pl eee Bs

Zé Als} s/s) E44

alto SECS Miss [esi]. eft voll eaillle SSeS

8] s/s] 8] 8|s| 8] 3|s| | Bi 5] =| S| e128

eed Fol ied ae Bee el i SSS

fad acd aed Wind fend acd ced ad fad cad and ind sl cd fa

LEPTOGRAPTIDZ.

Leptograptus flaccidus, Hall ....)..| ?

Coenograptus gracilis, Hall......|..|. J.-J. fe.) 2). fe -]e fe PP

DIcRANOGRAPTIDZ.

Dicellograptus divaricatus, Hall. .| ? | ?

MCOTEOS, LAW.) eee Aer Fr eel as) Heh

—— patulosus, Lapw.......++. Ee

ROKGAOS, PIA csr, )5'0\2 och. ae % x

Dicranograptus ramosus, Hall *

formosus, Hopk. ....++++ x

DicHOGRAPTID&.

Didymograptus euodus, Lapw. #

Murchisoni, Beck coe reo | K( PEEK EK | Ke PK] ele de KES

Nicholsoni, Lapw. ......- xtel |

Goniograptus?, sp. ..--eeeeeeeeles|e Px

DIPLoGRAPTID&.

Diplograptus amplexicaulis, U2 67150 aes ee) es) Ps ee Pe) A PRP) el (ee) oeslie md Sm

angustifolius, Hall........ ee fee (ee es (een (P ER (eterna, (oS

dentatus, Brongn. ........)++|.- Pads A

rugosus, Emmons .......- 0) fost (G8) Bec (See) = le) Gtoliarolionn [tal so] olla Alle:

perexcavatus, Lapw. ...... Baa be pea Sriaaite

Whitfieldii, Hall.... ..... stall Geet ee eve Boel ove decile eae Reed ae

Climacograptus czelatus, Lapw...) |. .). Ped.

brcornis, ALA on ein eiesse wie. |=, =| ova be afew dwels el niab eye lalicial ae

confertus, Lapw.......... ax xdee|x| «]--|- fel x

Scharenbergi, Lapw. Siete ine \o [onl oaile afte coflotel tel ae Batol es] ech Se Nl. Site diem ie

Cryptograptus Scheeferi, Lapw. ..)..|..]..J. J. .|- «| #

aqmicommis; Carr. .j...x/ siete fo] Lalieio fsa BT Qe Store] oelleael at | onal oral CE ee Ts

LASIOGRAPTID&.

Lasiograptus retusus, Lapw. ....|..|..J. J.J... ./. fee fe le

1 - ee Pry Py ;

Glossograptus Hincksi, Hopk. ..)..|..].-Pafe.|--{--fe-]-- |. Pe

RETIOLITIDH.

Gymnograptus Linnarssoni, Tullb.

a . Ce OD ele efe ofa ade ele ele ete ele ele eto ode ete | KH

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 281

The collective Graptolite fauna of the typical Llandeilo

beds is essentially of a transitional character. In the true

Arenig strata, as we have already shown, the feathery Dicho-

graptide and Phyllograptide preponderate to such an extent

that the species of the few additional families represented

occur only as sparsely scattered specimens among the hosts

of individuals of Didymograptus and its allies. In the typical

Bala or Caradoc formation, as will be shown in the sequel,

these old Arenig families have utterly vanished, and the faces

of the graptolitiferous laminz are now crowded with multi-

tudes of Dicranograptide and Diplograptide. The Llandeilo

formation, as geologists provisionally define it at present,

combines in its collective fauna both the Arenig and Bala

types, and shows the gradual passage of the one into the

other. Phyllograptus is absent throughout ; but in the Lower

Llandeilo Didymograptus is as densely abundant as in the

Upper Arenig ; while Diplograptide and Dicranograptide are

very rare or only locally prolific. In the Upper-Llandeilo

and the transitional Llandeilo-Bala or Glenkiln strata, on the

other hand, a Dichograptid is the rarest of fossils, while the

Dicranograptide and Diplograptidee occur in countless multi-

tudes.

Lower Llandeilo.—An occasional example of an irregularly

compound genus of the Dichograptide has been met with in

the lowest zone of the Llandeilo, as near Llan Mill &c., where

I detected forms allied to Tetragraptus and Goniograptus,

M‘Coy; but, as in the immediately underlying beds of the

Upper Arenig, the most prolific genus in the Lower Llandeilo

is emphatically Didymograptus, M‘Coy. Species with parallel

and with widely divergent arms are present; but both in

Britain and Scandinavia the ‘ geminiform” species of the

type of Didymograptus Murchison, Beck, occur in abundance

everywhere, while the “ patuliform” species of the type of

D. patulus, Hall, are only locally present.

The black-shale beds composing the so-called Lower Llan-

deilo of Hicks may almost be denominated the “ Zone of

Didymograptus Murchisont, Beck.” This beautiful fossil

abounds in the dark schists of the Lowest Division of the

Llandeilo of Abereiddy Bay, near Whitland and Llan Mill, at

Llandeilo, at Builth, and in the mining area of Shelve. It

reappears in like abundance in the ‘‘ Didymograptus geminus

beds”’ of Scania, in Southern Sweden. In all these localities

it is accompanied by many of the Upper Arenig species enu-

merated in the previous section, or by very closely allied forms,

including representatives of Diplograptus dentatus ?, Brongn.,

Climacograptus celatus, Lapw., and C. confertus, Lapw.,

282 On the Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

together with new and very remarkable forms of Cryptograptus

and Glossograptus. In many respects this black-shale zone

is most naturally regarded as the upward extension of the

deep-water sediments of the Upper Arenig ; and we may even-

tually be forced to unite it more closely with that subforma-

tion in our improved schemes of geological classification.

Middle Llandetio.—In the coarse grits, sandstones, and

felspathic ashes that together make up the greater part of the

succeeding Middle Llandeilo subformation, Didymograptus

Murchisoni and some of its varieties are still present, but are

excessively rare. Of other forms few are known ; Dzplo-

graptus foliaceus, Murch., and Climacograptus Scharenbergt,

Lapw., are all that have been actually recognized in Britain ;

but if the Glossograptus zone of the Scanian Middle Grap-

tolite schists admits of approximate parallelism with this

subformation, there fall to be added many additional species,

of which the commonest Swedish forms are allies of the pro-

lific Glossograptus Hincksi, Hopk., and Diplograptus rugosus

of the later Scottish Glenkiln formation.

Upper Llandetlo.—The strata that lie between the typical

Llandeilo Limestone of South Wales and the Bala Limestone

of the North are not yet sufficiently studied to allow us to fix

the line of demarcation between the two formations to which

these calcareous zones give their titles. As we have already

pointed out, the lower strata are undoubtedly of Llandeilo age ;

but the larger mass of the beds lies well within the limits of

Sedewick’s Bala formation. Before we reach the limestones

and calcareous shales with Ogygia Buchi that lead up into the

Upper Llandeilo formation, all the geminiform Didymograpti

so characteristic of the underlying beds have totally disap-

peared ; and I know as yet of no forms of Didymograptus

that have hitherto been collected in the Upper Llandeilo of

Wales. They must, however, be locally present; for patuli-

form species occur in the higher Glenkiln shales. Dzplo-

grapti, however, are abundant, especially forms of the type of

Oryptograptus tricornis, Carr., and Climacograptus Scharen-

bergt, Lapw. Here also we meet for the first time with the

elegantly symmetrical genus Cenograptus of Hall, so charac-

teristic of the Glenkiln shales, and its constant and highly

prolificthough somewhat diminutive associate the species Decel-

lograptus sextans of Hall, which in the Glenkiln period is as

numerically abundant as Didymograptus Murchisont in the

Upper Arenig.

Oar: V. Showing Range of Glenkiln or Llandeilo-Bala

Rhabdophora.

= ro By ost

sea Ireland, | ¢] N. America.

a 18

ml pp o <0) : .

a a = fel B [SN a E ®

Hale! 8] 2/41 s)\4| 9 §

<1 4] 8] €/ 2] B| 212] 8) slal Els

&) 3/5] Es) oS) 8) 8) 8) a\ sis

5 =H =| Sl] 1 812] $1 si41e

S| >) 5] 3| &| 3| XPS] ,o] 8/5] 3] 6

ALO | aAIAS|Alalalalal bi ale

LEPTOGRAPTIDE.

Leptograptus flaccidus, Hall .. Jalafala| Plepe-p?

Amphigraptus radiatus, Lapw. ..|+-|#*|+-]*

Coenograptus gracilis, Hall...... a og be ae De

surcularis, Hall ..........)¢ [| + Pe |e *

pertenuis, Lapw....... ere ee

—— explanatus, Lapw. ........)+-[#

DICELLOGRAPTIDZ.

Dicellograptus divaricatus, Hall. .|..]%| |x

intortus, Lapw. .....e. ee ale Pele Pe

patulosus, Lapw....... eee fe Pee fee le elect Pe epae]- #

sextans, Hall .......-.> ee ed ee ee ed

Dicranograptus formosus, Hopk.. .| % | #% | *|*

furcatus, Hall... ; episrac vefe ele ede clacton “|

— Nicholsoni, Hopk. ........)+-|#|+-}*

ramosus, Hall .........005(0 1%) * PH) | ele de cP le lal ae] &

ziczac, Lapw. ......e.e eee [e Pele Pe

DicHoGRAPTIDm&.

Didymograptus serratulus, Hall. . PEP vafeete Pe Pe | x | xe

superstes, Lapw...........|+-fal- fal?) P] Pp pe

Clematograptus multifasciatus,

DIPLOGRAPTIDE.

Diplograptus angustifolius, Hall. .|..}..|.. é *

euglyphus, Lapw. ......../ePe] epee ole e|- be

foliaceus, Murch......... wole Pela dala leclade dale ell al x

—— ? mucronatus, age ena cc) ES (ke seed) a

perexcavatus, Lapw. ......|-- x | ep x

rugosus, Emmons ...... allan) teal oe od

—— Whitfieldii, Hail. . pale dael- | |

Cryptograptus tricornis, Curr.....|+ Ja) apa] <|--fe fe Pa

Climacograptus bicornis, Hall. alapalaelP lal. del.. *| *

celatus, Lap... cise... sole ebe | ede

— Scharenbergi, Lapw. ......|--fx| epaleeleele fe

LASIOGRAPTIDZ.

Glossograptus ciliatus, Emmons. .|. .}. : PA)

—— fimbriatus, Hopk. ........ nl es

—— Hincksi, El oples 4, itteeet ole fel aed aed. te |

spinulosus, Hall .......... cake alatbiste dl |

Lasiograptus Harknessi, Mich. ..|..} | x]

Hallograptus bimucronatus, Wich.|..}%!|.. ae

RETIOLITIDA.

Clathrograptus cuneiformis, Lapw.). .| x). .} x

Geinitzianus, Hall ........ ne ae Se ae Bel (Pe

284 On the Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

Llandeilo-Bala or Glenkiln Shales.—In these unplaced

beds, which possibly include parts of the higher Llandeilo and

Lower Bala, as these formations are defined at present, the col-

lective fauna is essentially of the Bala type. A single patuli-

form species of Didymograptus (perhaps two) is all that

remains to represent the hosts of Dichograptide of the Arenig

age; and this becomes extinct before we reach the highest beds

of the subformation. The characteristic fossil of the Glenkiln

shales is Cwnograptus gracilis, Hall, of which it may be re-

garded as the special zone. ‘This well-marked fossil occurs

upon the Glenkiln horizon in Britain, Scandinavia, America,

and Australia; it is accompanied by some few allied species

of the same genus, and more markedly by crowds of Dicrano-

graptide. Dicranograptus ramosus, a fossil of the overlying

Bala, accompanies Cenograptus in its range from Britain to

the Antipodes, with some closely allied transitional forms of

the type of Dicranograptus formosus, Hopk. One of the most

conspicuous fossils of the zone is Dicellograptus sextans, which

occurs in extraordinary abundance in the lower beds, and

probably equals Canograptus in its extended geographical

range. In Scotland and Wales, and in the Norman’s-Kiln

beds of North-east America, it is also associated with some

closely allied forms, representative of Dicellograptus divaricatus,

Hall.

Diplograptide are everywhere abundant. Dzplograptus

rugosus, EKmm., is one of the commonest species; and the

beautiful form D. euglyphus (?.D. putillus, Hall) is locally

prolific. D. foliaceus, Murch., is always present, but is less

abundant than in the succeeding Bala-Caradoc beds. Crypto-

graptus tricornis, Carr., is frequently seen in several varie-

ties, and the peculiar form D. perexcavatus, Lapw. But the

species most commonly met with are undoubtedly those of the

genus Climacograptus. C. celatus, Lapw., C. Scharenbergt,

Lapw., and C. bicornis, Hall, are all present, the latter in

many peculiar subspecific forms.

Of the Lasiograptide there are several species; and the

members of this family are more abundant in this zone than

upon any other horizon hitherto detected in Britain. Laszo-

graptus cosiatus, Lapw., a possible variety of L. Harknesst,

Nich., is abundant in the south of Scotland and in the north

of Ireland. The provisional genus Hallograpius of Carru-

thers, with its scopulate reproductive appendages, is as yet

wholly confined to this zone, where it has been met with in

Scotland, Ireland, and North America. Glossograptus, Emm.,

here presents us with some of its latest species; their highly

On new South-American Coleoptera. 285

spinose polyparies are not uncommon even in the highest

Glenkiln.

The Retiolitidee are among the rarest of the Glenkiln fossils

in Britain and America, where the lattice-like genus Clathro-

graptus, Lapw., is all that represents the family upon this

horizon. In Sweden, however, the extraordinary genus Gym-

nograptus of 'Tullberg, which points in the direction of the

ancient 7rigonograptus, Nich., is so abundant in strata hardly,

if at all, inferior to the lowest Glenkin beds as to give its name

to the containing zone.

The zoological features of this British Glenkiln zone and

its Irish and American representatives are so unique, and at

the same time are so invariable throughout its extraordinary

range, that the Australian strata with Canograptus gracilis,

Hall, &c., may be assigned with tolerable certainty to this

zone, which, like the older Arenig and Lower Llandeilo

zones, will probably be proved to have had a geographical

extension that was worldwide.

[To be continued. }

XXVIII.—New South-American Coleoptera, chiefly from

Ecuador. By Cuaries O. WATERHOUSE.

THE species described in this paper were, with a few excep-

tions, collected by Mr. Buckley in Ecuador, chiefly in the

neighbourhood of Chiguinda and Sarayacu. The specimens

are all in the British-Museum collection.

Cicindelida.

Oxychila glabra, n. sp.

Nigra, nitidissima, palpis antennisque testaceis, his’ basi nigris, sin-

‘ gulis elytris V flavo nodtatis, femoribus rufis apice nigris, tibiis

_ tarsisque testaceis.

¢. Long. 9 lin.

A glabrous species resembling O. nigro-enea, Bates, but

with shorter elytra and narrow labrum. Head lightly trans-

versely impressed behind the eyes, with numerous, short,

longitudinal wrinkles forming a band between the eyes. La-

brum narrowed and acuminate anteriorly, with no distinct

denticulations laterally. Palpi pale testaceous. Thorax

rather shorter than in O. nigro-enea, rather more constricted in

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 20

286 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new

front, more narrowed behind; the disk more convex, almost

swollen into a tubercle laterally. Elytra very strongly punc-

tured at the base, sparingly and more obscurely punctured

beyond the middle, scarcely sinuous at the apex, the sutural

angle very slightly obtusely dentiform; each elytron has a

slightly raised yellow y-shaped spot, the side nearest the

suture the shorter; there is a distinct impression within the

shoulder, another near the suture, a slight one before the

yellow spot; and the posterior declivity is also much impressed.

The antenne are testaceous, with the four basal joints black,

the extreme base of the fourth is yellowish.

Hab. Macas.

Carabide.

Calophena alboquttata, n. sp.

Nigra, nitida ; elytris eyaneis, fortiter striatis, ad apicem truncatis,

Vix spinosis, guttis quatuor albis notatis.

Long. 63 lin,

Completely resembles C. aculeata, Chaud., in colour, size,

and form, but has the sutural angle of the elytra not prolonged

into an acute spine. The elytra appear to be a little longer ;

the strie are very deep, the intervals very convex; the spots

are small; the apex of each elytron is truncate; the truncature

is not straight, but slightly sinuous; its outer angle acute, the

sutural angle acute but scarcely produced.

Hab. Copataza River.

Cucujide.

Palestes nigriceps, n. sp.

Niger, nitidus, thorace femoribusque ochraceis, elytris dimidio basali

flavis.

Long. 53-73 lin.

This species resembles P. dicolor in form, but differs in

having the head and scutellum black. Besides this difference

of colour itis distinguished by having the thorax more angular

in the middle of the front margin, and the sides have not the

deep incision immediately before the posterior angles as in P.

bicolor. 'The scutellum is a little less transverse. The im-

pressed line on the metasternum is continued to the front; in

P. bicolor it appears to be always abbreviated. The femora

have the extreme base and apex black.

I have only seen the male of this species, which has the

mandible developed in the same way as in P, bicolor.

Hab, Chiguinda.

South-American Coleoptera. 287.

“ Paleestes tenuicornis, n. sp.

Flavus, nitidus ; antennis gracilibus nigris, apice fuscis ; elytris plaga

communi, tibiis tarsisque nigris.

3. Long. 44 lin.

This species is very close to P. bicolor, and is similarly

coloured, except that, instead of having the apical half of the

elytra black, there is only a large spot common to both elytra,

leaving the margins yellow; the mandibles and clypeus are

also yellow. Besides the coloration, this species differs in

having the antennz decidedly more slender and relatively

longer ; this is the more apparent when comparing the apical

joints. The thorax is similar in form, but is merely sinuous

at the sides, without denticulations.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Rutelide.

Spodochlamys mirabilis, n. sp.

Oblonga, brunnea, eneo tincta, supra dense fortiter punctata,

subtus nitida ; pygidio dense asperato, fulvo hirsuto.

6. Thorace medio tuberoso, lateribus explanatis; humeris dente

acuto armatis ; femoribus anticis subtus ante apicem dente magno

apice hamato ; tibiis anticis elongatis, ante medium curvatis.

©. Thorace simplici, fortius punctato; humeris obtusis; tibiis an-

ticis brevibus obtuse tridentatis.

Long. 20 lin., lat. 11 lin.

3. Head, thorax, and scutellum very densely and strongly

punctured, the narrow interspaces or rugule on the thorax

with fine punctures ; clypeus not quite twice as broad as long,

rounded in front, the margin finely reflexed. Thorax twice

as broad as long, semicircularly emarginate in front, bisinuate

at the base; the anterior angles acute and a little porrect;

the disk raised near the base; the sides impressed above and

expanded, strongly angular rather behind the middle. Elytra

light brown, more or less tinted with green in the punctuation,

which is close, strong, and irregular, coarser at the base, fine

at the margins. Body beneath and legs pitchy, tinted with

eneous; the metasternum densely punctured; the abdomen

sparingly punctured. Anterior femora with a strong flattened

tooth near the apex, the apex of the tooth acute and hooked:

anterior tibie very long, narrow at the base, curved inwards

rather before the middle, the apical portion flattened and

broader, with three teeth on the outer edge, the upper one

obtuse.

?. More convex than the male, and presenting nothing

remarkable in form ; broadest behind the middle of the elytra,

20*

288 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new

gradually narrower anteriorly. The thorax broadest at the

base, gradually narrower anteriorly, obliquely narrowed just

before the anterior angles, which are acute; the posterior

angles obtuse; the whole surface very strongly and densely

punctured. Elytra more yellow-brown than in the male, the

punctuation rather more distinct.

Hab. Chiguinda.

Dynastide.

Lycomedes Buckleyt, n. sp.

Nigro-piceus, supra fulyo-furfurosus.

g. Capite cornu erecto apice tridentato, thorace disco lamina erecta

antice concaya instructo.

@. Capite simplici, thorace crebre punctato.

Long. 16 lin.

This species has the broad form of LZ. Burmeistert, Waterh.

(Cist. Ent., ii. 1879, p. 422, pl. ix, f. 1), but the floury

clothing is of a paler colour.

$. Ocular canthus simple next to the eye (not projecting

laterally as in L. Burmeister’), but furnished in front with a

small sharp tooth, which is directed forwards. The cephalic

horn is erect, very slightly curved, expanded at the base on

each side into a triangular flat tooth ; the horn itself is some-

what enlarged at the apex, where it is divided into three

sharp teeth, two in front and one behind them. The thorax

is distinctly more angular at the sides than in L. Burmeister? ;

the discoidal lamina is erect, flattened, subparallel, obtuse at

its apex, slightly concave in front.

9. More depressed than the male, with the head and thorax

unarmed, the latter shining, coarsely and thickly punctured,

the punctures filled with the floury substance. It scarcely

differs from the female of L. Burmezster7; but the sides of the

thorax are a little more angular, and the posterior angles more

obtuse. The only tangible difference, however, is in the form

of the ocular canthus, which in LZ. Burmeister has its front

margin straight, its side making with it an angle less than a

right angle. In L. Buckleyi it is narrower, entirely oblique,

a little projecting where it joins the angle of the clypeus,

slightly sinuate in the middle, and rounded off posteriorly.

Hab. Chiguinda.

Prionide.

PROTORMA, n. gen.

General appearance of Navosoma, but with the thorax

South-American Coleoptera. 289

approaching that of Strongylaspis. It differs from the latter

in the following points :—LHyes with scarcely a trace of emar-

gination in front. Antenne reaching to about the middle of

the elytra; the apex of the third joint and the following joints

longitudinally rugulose, opaque. ‘Thorax trisinuate in front.

Scutellum not convex, rounded posteriorly. Elytra each

with four coste. Abdomen shining. Prosternal process

scarcely arched, produced posteriorly.

The specimen from which these characters are taken is a

female.

Protorma scabrosa, n. sp.

Ferrugineo-fusca, rugosa; thorace transyerso, antice oblique an-

gustato, lateribus crenulatis, ante basin dente valido armatis,

dein oblique sinuatis, et juxta basin dente parvo acuto; elytris

rugosis, singulis costis quatuor.

Long. 17 lin.

Dull rusty brown, the head and thorax rather darker; the

body beneath pitchy black. Head, thorax, and basal joint

of the antenne densely and strongly rugose. ‘Thorax not

quite twice as broad as long, not very convex, very obliquely

narrowed anteriorly, the side crenulate, the little teeth having

a tendency to arrange themselves in pairs; the strong tooth

before the posterior emargination not so sharp as in Navosoma

scobinatum, the emargination deeper, with a small tooth just

before the base; the base sinuate on each side, rather di-

stinctly lobed in the middle. Scutellum finely rugose, gently

impressed in the middle. lytra at the base as wide as the

widest part of the thorax, gradually becoming broader to the

posterior two thirds, then arcuately narrowed towards the

apex ; the sutural angle with a very small tooth, densely and

rugosely punctured, the base rugose; each elytron with four

coste, the first and second not extending to the apex, the

third not so conspicuous, shorter than the others; the fourth

sublateral, commencing below the shoulder and extending

nearer to the apex than the others; epipleural fold with

about the basal half channelled. Metasternum and _para-

pleura densely and rather finely punctured, finely pilose.

Abdomen shining, rather finely and not very closely punc-

tured; the two basal segments somewhat opaque and more

closely punctured towards the sides. The legs very rugose,

the posterior femora above rather less so. ‘Tarsi with the

basal joint about one third longer than broad, much shorter

than in N. scobinatum.

Hab. Sarayacu.

290 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new

Mallaspis Buckleyt, n. sp.

Obscure olivacea; antennis lete violaceis, articulationibus arti-

culisque apicalibus rufo-flavis, thorace fortiter punctato, lateribus

dentatis ; elytris rugosis, ferrugineis, basi olivaceo tinctis.

é. Long. 26-33 lin.

@. Long. 30-32 lin.

This species closely resembles J. scutellaris in form, colour,

and appearance, but differs in the following particulars :—

Thorax in both sexes more strongly punctured, the lateral

denticulations less numerous and more prominent. The trans-

verse ridges of the prosternum are very strong; and all the

punctuation on the underside is much stronger, especially on

the sides of the metasternum. The abdomen is olivaceous

and densely punctured; in M. scutellaris it is tinged with

pitchy, is less punctured, more shining, and in the female is

almost smooth. Besides these differences, the female differs

in having the antenne longer, and the third to eighth joints

are nearly parallel instead of being elongate-elliptical as in

M. scutellaris.

Hab. Savayacu.

Udeterus elegans, n. sp.

Flavus; capite, thorace, scutello, epipleuris elytrorumque apice

piceis, antennis corpore longioribus.

Q@. Long. 7} lin.

General appearance of a Myzomorphus scutellatus, Sallé, 2 ,

but with the antennz longer than the whole insect, and with

more acuminate elytra, &c. Head, thorax, and scutellum

very densely and rather finely granulose punctate. Antenne

pale pitchy, shining; the second joint small but well deve-

loped, the third, fourth, and fifth long and slender, the sixth

to tenth joints having their apical angle produced into a

rather long sharp process, that of the sixth joimt smaller than

the others, the ninth, tenth, and eleventh joints longitudinally

impressed on their outer side above. Thorax not quite so

strongly transverse as in J. scutellatus, the surface more

uneven, the lateral spine rather more forward, rather more

prominent and very acute at its apex; the base sinuate on

each side and with a rather broad arcuate lobe in the middle,

over the base of the scutellum. LElytra coarsely and very

closely punctured, nearly as long as the abdomen, rapidly

narrowed from below the shoulders, narrowed from the inner

side as well as the outer; the apical angle rather acute,

infuscate. Prosternal process longer and more parallel than

in M. scutellatus, alittle narrowed at the apex. Metathoracic

South-American Coleoptera. 291

episterna nearly as in that species, narrowed posteriorly.

Metasternum very closely and delicately punctured, finely

pilose. Abdomen not very thickly punctured. Legs shining,

sparingly punctured.

Hab. Chiguinda.

There is a little doubt to which genus this species should

be referred. Udeterus, Thoms., is founded on a male exam-

ple; and the present species may be a female of an allied

species ; Thomson’s figure, however, does not represent any

lobe at the base of the thorax—a character almost of generic

importance in this case. Themnesthes, Bates (Ent. Mo. Mag.

xu. p. 51), has the thorax of my species, agreeing in the

lateral spine and basal lobe ; but the metathoracic episterna do

not differ from those of Myzomorphus, and cannot certainly be

said to be “ parallelogrammical” as in Themnesthes. ‘The

second joint of the antennee is distinct in all three insects.

EPISACUS, n. gen.

General form of Calloctenus, but broader. Antenne of

Male scarcely reaching beyond the apex of the elytra; the

third to tenth joints with the anterior angle produced into a

moderately long acuminate process; the eleventh joint very

long, very narrow at the base, and gradually becoming wider

to a little before the apex, where it is suddenly smaller,

giving the appearance of a twelfth jot. Thorax strongly

transverse, obliquely narrowed anteriorly; the posterior angles

acute, slightly prominent. Scutellum transverse, rounded

posteriorly. Elytra a little wider than the thorax, moderately

narrowed to the apex, which is obtuse, the outer angle

rounded, the sutural angle acute. Prosternal process conical,

scarcely produced beyond the coxe, meeting a nearly similar

process of the mesosternum. Metasternum with a deep lon-

gitudinal impression. pisterna very broad, but narrower

posteriorly. The head, thorax, and body beneath with long

pile.

The form of the sterna and the transverse scutellum at

once separate this from Calloctenus.

Episacus pilosicollis, n. sp.

Olivaceo-seneus ; capite thoraceque fulvo-pilosis; elytris nigris,

purpurascentibus, dense fortiter punctatis, postice velutinis, lineis

nonnullis elevatis nitidis.

Long. 8} lin.

Thorax twice as broad as long, obliquely narrowed from

the posterior angles to the front, impressed on the disk, rather

292 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new

finely and very closely punctured, gently emarginate in the

middle of the front margin, the posterior angles moderately

acute and slightly prominent; the base oblique on each side,

gently lobed in the middle. Scutellum transverse, rounded

behind, impressed, finely punctured. Elytra at the base one

sixth wider than the thorax, about 23 times as long as broad,

narrowed posteriorly, obtuse at the apex, black with a purple

tint, velvety (except at the base), very closely and strongly

punctured ; each elytron with several fine shining lines, two

of which on the disk unite posteriorly and are continued to

the apex as asingle one. Metasternum very thickly and deli-

cately punctured. Abdomen shining, rather strongly and

not very thickly punctured.

flab, Chiguinda.

Cerambycide.

Coccoderus sexguttatus, n. sp.

Elongatus, parallelus, pallide rufo-brunneus; elytris (basi ipsa

excepta) testaceis, maculis eburneis utrinque tribus ; capite tho-

raceque rugoso-punctatis, hoc tuberculis nigris nitidis, duobus

dorsalibus, alteris marginalibus ; antennis inermibus.

Long. 18 lin.

Antenne nearly reaching to the apex of the elytra; the

third and four or five following joints angular at their apex,

but not spined. Head and thorax densely rugose, the latter

more strongly so, with a black tubercle on each side of the

disk anteriorly, and two black tubercles at the side; the

thorax is obliquely narrowed in front of the anterior lateral

tubercle, strongly constricted at the base. The elytra are

pale testaceous, except at the extreme base (where they are

tinted with brown), shining; each with an ovate yellowish

ivory spot in the middle of the base, a second rather before

the middle, with a brown dot joming above, and a third

rather longer spot some distance from the apex, this has a

brown dot joining it above and below; the apex has two

sharp spines, of which the outer one is the stronger.

Hab. Chiguinda.

Criodion pictum, un. sp.

Nigrum, nitidum; elytris levibus, apice quadrispinosis, flavo-tes-

taceo variegatis.

Long. 17 lin.

Shining black. The elytra scarcely tinged with pitchy,

with some very fine, delicate, rather distant punctures ; each

elytron has a broad zigzag pale yellow stripe occupying the

South-American Coleoptera. 293

greater part of the elytron, but leaving a triangular spot at

the scutellum united to a spot under the shoulder, a spot on

the margin about the middle, a large spot on the suture be-

hind the middle, and a semicircular patch on the margin

at the apex, nearly black ; at the apex are two acute spines.

The head is clothed with deep-yellow silky pubescence,

with a smooth lanceolate ridge between the eyes; the an-

tennal tubercles are very depressed. Antenne reaching

a little beyond the apex of the elytra; the basal joint very

strongly but not thickly punctured ; the third joint has a few

smaller punctures, the basal joints have some long pale hairs ;

the grooving of the joints is very slight, and commences at

the apex of the sixth joint. Thorax with an ovate, smooth,

raised spot in middle, two round ones in front of this, and

three irregular smooth places on each side; the intervals

clothed with deep-yellow silky pubescence, in which are

scattered large deep punctures. Outer angle of the intermediate

tibiee shghtly dentitorm.

Hab. Gualaquisa.

Criodion plagiatum, n. sp.

Nigrum, nitidum ; capite thoraceque rugosis ; elytris piceo-nigris,

subtilissime punctulatis, plagis quatuor sordide flavis, angulo

suturali spina minuta.

Long. 18 lin.

Head very strongly, closely, and rugosely punctured ;

antennal tubercles well developed, divided by a deeply im-

pressed line, their internal angle elevated and acute. Thorax

one sixth broader than long, subcylindrical, constricted at the

base, very strongly and closely rugose. Scutellum clothed

with grey pile. Elytra not quite so shining as in the pre-

ceding species, very delicately punctured, the sutural angle

only with a very small spine ; each elytron has an irregular-

shaped, oblique, yellow patch before the middle, touching the

margin but not the suture, and a second elongate par allel. spot

or stripe near the margin, reaching from a little behind the

middle to the apex. “The antennz are considerably longer

than the whole insect ; the basal joint is closely and strongly

punctured ; the third and fourth joints are very finely, closely,

but distinctly punctured, with a few large punctures here and

there. ‘The outer apical angle of the “intermediate tibie 1s

obtuse.

Hab. Gualaquisa.

Allied to C. dorsale, Thoms., but with longer antenna,

more cylindrical thorax, more pointed antennal tubercles, &e.

294 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new

Haruspex levifemoratus, 1. sp.

Piceo-fuscus, subopacus ; thorace confertim rugoso-punctato, sin-

gulis elytris vitta mediana lata nigra, costaque flava (postice

abbreviata) et in costa macula nigra; femoribus posticis intus

levibus, ad apicem solum punctis impressis.

Long. 7 lin.

Very close to H. brevipes, White, and only differs as

follows :—Thorax a trifle longer, more evenly convex, more

evenly arcuate at the sides. Elytra coloured in the same

way; but the yellow costa is more distinct, the yellow colour

is not suffused on the inner side, except a spot at its apex ;

the spines at the apex (both the sutural and outer ones) are

more developed. ‘The femora are more swallen, and the pos-

terior ones are smooth on the inner side, except a few punc-

tures at the apex.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Polyschisis rufitarsalis, n. sp.

Nigra, subvelutina, opaca; antennarum dimidio apicali, tarsis

elytrisque rufo-ochraceis, his ad humeros nigris.

Long. 12 lin.

This species so closely resembles P. hirtipes that it might

easily be mistaken for it. It differs, however, in having the

tarsi yellowish red. The lateral projection of the thorax is,

moreover, a little more prominent ; and the angle at this part

is less obtuse, ¢.e. the side behind the tubercle makes with

the side before the tubercle a less obtuse angle than in P,

hirtipes.

Hab. Sarayacu.

PANCHYLISSUS, n. gen.

Muzzle moderately prolonged. Head with a very small

tooth-like projection behind the eye. Antenne as long as

the whole insect ; the first joint elongate obconic; the third

joint distinctly longer than the fourth ; the apical joints flat-.

tened but scarcely widened. Thorax evenly convex, rounded

at the sides, margined at the base, impressed above at the

scutellum. Scutellum very long and narrow, acuminate.

Elytra elongate, subparallel, obtusely rounded at the apex.

Prosternal process moderately broad, a little raised poste-

riorly, obtuse, concave behind. Mesosternal process mode-

rately broad, thick, lamelliform, obtuse, concave below in

front. Four anterior femora considerably swollen before

their apex. Tarsi of Zssonotus, but the posterior pair rather

more elongate.

South-American Coleoptera. 295

Evidently allied to Lissonotus, but with more linear an-

tenn, longer muzzle, elongate scutellum, longer and more

parallel elytra. The general form calls to mind some Spheno-

thecus ; but the structure of the antenne and the characteristic

tubercle behind the eyes show its affinity with Lissonotus.

Panchylissus cyaneipennis, n. sp.

Niger, politus, nitidissimus; thorace sanguineo, medio macula

rotundata nigra; elytris cyaneis, pectore abdomineque san-

guineis.

Long. 93 lin.

Forehead with a rather deep longitudinal impression be-

tween the antenne. Thorax a little broader than long,

convex, evenly rounded at the sides, narrowed in front, a

little narrowed before the base, with a few clear punctures

scattered over the disk. Hlytra deep purplish blue, with

close but extremely obscure punctuation; the apex obtuse,

finely fringed with black pile.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Distenia humeralis, n. sp.

Supra eneo-viridis, subtus «nea; thorace rugoso, lateribus spina

acuta instructis; elytris fortiter, dense, irregulariter punctatis,

postice subtiliter dense punctatis, humeris vitta brevi coccinea,

sutura, marginibus strigaque obliqua post medium griseo-pube-

scentibus; antennis nigris, articulis basi griseo-pilosis.

Long. 63 lin.

Head rugose above. Antenne much longer than the whole

insect, slender, blackish ; the basal joint tinted with eneous,

subcylindrical, densely rugose ; the other joints grey at the

base, black at the apex. Thorax densely rugose, strongly

constricted in front and before the base, angular in the

middle of the side and furnished with a short spine. Scu-

tellum clothed with whitish pubescence. Elytra wider than

the thorax at their base, much narrowed posteriorly, bluish

green, very strongly, densely, and irregularly punctured for

nearly two thirds their length, at which poimt there is an

oblique narrow streak of white pubescence; the surface be-

yond this is finely punctured ; each elytron has an elongate

red spot near the shoulder ; the outer apical angle has a strong

tooth. Femora unarmed.

Hab. Chiguinda.

The apical joint of the palpi is securiform, the prosternal

process is less narrow than is usual, the claw-joint of the

tarsi is very short, and the femora are unarmed at their apex.

296 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new

These characters may hereafter prove to be of generic im-

portance.

Cometes apicalis, n. sp.

Ceruleus ; elytris eneo-viridibus, dense fortiter punctatis, apicibus

extus sanguineis.

Long. 63 lin.

Antenne a little longer than the whole insect ; the basal

joint (for the genus) rather slender, very elongate, narrowed

and bent at the base, rugosely punctured; the following

joints slender, of equal thickness throughout, with no long

pubescence. Head moderately thickly punctured. ‘Thorax

shining, obscurely punctured, with four shining, very slightly

raised tumours on the disk, two on each side, strongly con-

stricted at the base, more so in front, the sides with a conical

projection in the middle. lytra green, very slightly nar-

rowed posteriorly, densely, very strongly, and irregularly punc-

tured ; the suture blue ; the apex margined with orange-red,

with no spine. Femora nearly linear ; tarsi slender.

Hab. Medellin.

This species is doubtfully referred to Cometes ; it differs in

having the antenne more slender than is usual, and without

long pubescence. The femora are nearly linear, very long;

and the tarsi are slender. On the other hand, the elytra are

not acuminate as in Distenia, and the antenne do not dimi-

nish in thickness towards the apex.

Lamiide.

CALLIPHENGES, n. gen.

Metallic. General form of Colobothea, but with the thorax

rather narrowed posteriorly, and with an acute, small, lateral

spine rather behind the middle. Elytra elongate, regularly

narrowed posteriorly, without any lateral carina; the apex

truncate, with its outer angle produced into a strong diverging

spine. Femora a little thicker im the middle, not peduncu-

late. Prosternal process very narrow, arched. Mesosternal

process a little broader, not nearly so broad as in Colobothea,

more perpendicular in front.

This genus should follow Colobothea.

Calliphenges cuprascens, n. sp.

Leete cupreus, viridi-micans, nitidissimus; antennis corpore lon-

gioribus, apicem versus nigrescentibus ; thorace subcylindrico,

post medium paulo angustiore, parce fortiter punctato, lateribus

spina acuta; elytris thorace latioribus, postice angustatis, cupreis,

South-American Coleoptera. 297

parce fortiter punctatis, guttis nonnullis albis notatis, sutura

virescente, apice truncato, angulo externo spina, acuta valida

armato, singulis elytris costa sat elevata basi haud attingente.

Long. 5 lin.

Bright coppery, the middle of the elytra and the sterna

shining with bright green. The basal joint of the antenn

is stout, subcylindrical, narrowed only at the extreme base,

not reaching to the base of the thorax; the third joint is one

quarter longer than the first, slender; the fourth is about the

same length as the first ; the following joints gradually become

shorter. The head is smooth in front, with a line of white

pubescence on each side; there are some strong punctures

behind the eyes. The thorax is as long as broad, subcylin-

drical, scarcely constricted before the middle, a little narrower

behind the small sharp lateral spine, with strong punctures

scattered over the surface; near the base there is a strongly

impressed transverse line, terminating at each end in a deep

fovea. The elytra are one third broader than the thorax,

regularly narrowed posteriorly, with no lateral carina, but

with a strong one commencing near the base and terminating

in the apical spine ; each elytron has five small white pubes-

cent spots within the carina, and two or three oblique white

streaks about the middle of the elytron. The metasternum

is green, smooth, with some large punctures at the side.

The abdomen is bright coppery, smooth.

Hab. Chiguinda.

ITES, n. gen.

Antenne reaching a little beyond the middle of the elytra;

the basal joint robust, elongate ; the second joint much more

slender, two thirds the length of the first, sparingly pilose ;

the third a little shorter than the second; the following joints

gradually diminishing in length. Eyes almost completely

divided. Thorax transverse, a little constricted before and

behind the middle. Elytra expanded from the shoulders,

arcuately narrowed posteriorly to the apex; resembling in

general outline some species of Dolichotoma (Cassidide),

without coste, but with shoulders obtusely raised, velvety.

Prosternal process extremely narrow ; the mesosternal mode-

rately narrow, declivous in front. Tarsi broad; the claws

fissile.

This remarkable insect, although clearly allied to the Am-

phionychi, differs in having the second joint of the antenne

elongate and a little longer than the third. To suppose that

the second joint is imbedded in the apex of the first, and that

what I have termed the second joint is really the third, would

298 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new

involve nearly as much difficulty, as there would then be

twelve joints.

I propose to place it before Clythraschema.

Ites plagiatus, n. sp.

Niger, velutinus; macula post oculos, thorace vitta laterali, plaga-

que in singulis elytris coccineis.

Long. 8 lin., lat. elytr. 5 lin.

Black, velvety, with a dense short fringe round the margin

of the elytra; the antenne, face, abdomen, tibiz, and tarsi

clothed with silvery-grey silky pubescence. Head with an

impressed line on the vertex. Thorax transverse, a little

more constricted behind than in front of the middle, convex,

smooth on the disk, with a few punctures atthe base. LElytra

with the shoulders obtuse and raised; with a fringe of dense

black pile on the suture near the scutellum; the expansion

commences at the base of the elytra, and nearly attains its

greatest width within the basal sixth; thence it becomes a

trifle wider, and from the middle to the apex is gradually

narrowed ; each elytron has a scarlet patch, somewhat semi-

circular in form, extending from below the shoulder to near

the apex, leaving the margin narrowly black.

Hab, Gualaquisa.

Lycidola flavofasciata, n. sp.

Nigra, nitida; thoracis lateribus, coxis, femorumque basi flavis;

elytris cyaneis, humeris fasciaque lata flavis.

Long. 54 lin., lat. elytr. 32 lin.

This species is close to L. s¢mulatrix, Bates, which it re-

sembles in its flat semicircularly dilated elytra. Thorax

moderately thickly and rather strongly punctured, a little nar-

rowed in front, impressed above at the base. Llytra at their

base only a little wider than the thorax, expanded immedi-

ately below the shoulders, rather thickly and distinctly punc-

tured at the base ; each with four coste, the second and third

uniting before the apex, the fourth on the lateral expansion ;

with a triangular humeral spot and broad fascia behind the

middle yellow, the fascia somewhat dentate above and below.

Hab. Cuenga, Ecuador (Fraser).

Lycidola felix, n. sp.

Nigra; elytris cyaneo-purpurascentibus, latissimis, fascia media

dentata guttisque nonnullis ante medium flayis.

Long. 83 lin.

Antenne with the fourth joint distinctly thicker than the

South-American Coleoptera. 299

third, densely hirsute. Thorax with rather long fine hairs,

strongly and rather thickly punctured, distinctly broader at

the base than in front, with a swelling at the side rather be-.

hind the middle. Elytra purple steel-blue, at the base dis-

tinctly wider than the thorax, suddenly expanded immediately

below the shoulders, much rounded at the sides, rather thickly

and finely punctured near the base, towards the apex and the

lateral expanded portion finely frosted; with an undulating

deep-yellow median fascia; each elytron has four well-marked

coste (the fourth being on the expanded portion, entire), the

second and third are united before the apex, but are continued

to the apex by a single one; there is a yellow spot on the

margin just above (and united with) the fascia; and there are

two or three small yellow spots on the coste on a level with

the lateral spot.

This species has the elytra much more suddenly expanded

below the shoulders, and more rounded at the sides than any

species of the genus known to me.

Hab. Chiguinda.

Lycidola retifera, n. sp.

Nigra, subtilissime pubescens; thorace lincis quatuor fulvis; elytris

postice bene ampliatis, depressis, fulvis, triente apicali guttisque

numerosis nigris.

Long. 7 lin., lat. elytr. 4 lin.

Third and fourth joints of the antenne equal, and scarcely

longer than the first, thickened and finely pilose, the following

joints together as long as the first four taken together, sparingly

pilose. Clypeus and base of the mandibles fulvous. Thorax

a little broader than long, slightly narrowed in front, straight

at the sides, rather thickly punctured, with a fulvous line on

each side, and sometimes with two fulvous lines above. Elytra

at the base a little broader than the thorax, evenly but very

slightly convex, enlarged immediately below the shoulders,

attaining their greatest width at the middle, evenly rounded

at the sides (rather less so in the male) ; the basal two thirds

fulvous with black spots; each elytron has four lines, repre-

senting the usual coste, but which are only raised at the

apex; the intervals have numerous transverse lines, so that

the elytron presents five lines of round or ovate black spots,

the ground-colour being black; all the surface is rather

closely and strongly punctured.

Hab. Chiguinda,

In general appearance this species much resembles T’hemi-

stonoé reticulata, below described. A species of Calopteron in

the same collection reproduces the same coloration.

300 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new

Lycaneptia antiqua, n. sp.

Nigra; capite fulvo, macula pone oculos nigra; thorace fulvo, late-

ribus vittis duabus fuscis ; elytris fulvis, ante medium plus minusve

infuscatis, apice late cyaneo-nigro.

Long. 9 lin., lat. elytr. 5 lin.

Third joint of the antenne a little more than twice as long

as the first, thick and densely fringed; the fourth joint the

same length as the first, thick and densely fringed ; the fol-

lowing seven joints together scarcely longer than the first and

second together. Head with a fine impressed line on the

vertex. Thorax a little narrowed anteriorly, subcylindrical,

the pubescence forming a fine mesial ridge, on each side of

which, at the base, there is a dusky spot; at the sides there

are two blackish stripes, almost confluent. Elytra with pro-

minent rectangular shoulders ; the expansion is at first gradual,

but more rapid towards the apex, much rounded externally,

the sutural angle rounded; the basal two thirds are fulvous

yellow, with dusky brown in the intervals, leaving a narrow

fulvous band before the apical third, which is nearly black ;

each elytron has two very fine, partially incomplete dorsal

cost ; the humeral costa is very strong and complete ; and

there is a very strong complete costa on the lateral expansion.

The coxe and the extreme base of the femora are yellow.

Hab. Brazil.

Nearly allied to Z. togata, Klug, but rather differently

coloured and with the seven apical joints of the antenne

together not equalling a quarter of the total length of the

antenne.

Themistonoé reticulata, un. sp.

Nigra; thorace dorsaliter fulvo-fiavo, linea mediana nigra; elytris

postice bene ampliatis, fulvo-flavis, ad apicem late purpureo-

nigris, reticulatis, singulis costis tribus.

Long. 7j lin., lat. elytr. 43 lin.

Antenne finely pilose, the third joint thickened (especially

at the apex), with more dense pilosity at the apex. The

pper part of the forehead and a line behind each eye are

obscurely tinted with dirty yellow; there is a fine impressed

line on the vertex. The thorax is a little broader than long,

a very little narrower in front than behind, very shghtly con-

stricted before and behind the middle; rusty yellow above,

with a mesial black stripe, and a dusky spot on each side of

it. Elytra at the base one quarter broader than the thorax,

widened immediately below the shoulders, gradually becoming

South-American Coleoptera. 301

broader to near the apex, where they are two and a half times

as broad as at the base, rather flattened posteriorly, where

they are much rounded, not detlexed at the sides; fulvous

yellow except the apical fourth, which is purple-black ; each

elytron has three costa, the second and third of which both

arise from the shoulder, between the first and second an inter-

rupted costa may be traced at the base; the intervals, and

especially the lateral expanded portion, are strongly reticulate,

the ground-colour being more or less grey, making the yellow

reticulations very conspicuous; in the apical portion the reti-

culations are concolorous with the ground.

Hab. Chiguinda.

This insect closely resembles Lycidola retifera above de-

scribed.

Themistonoé humeralis, n. sp.

Nigra; capite fulvo-flavo, macula yerticis strigaque pone oculos

nigris ; thorace fulvo-flavo, vittis tribus latis nigris; elytris ad

apicem sat ampliatis, ad latera deflexis, macula humerali fascia-

que lata post medium fulvo-flavis ; coxis, femoribus quatuor anti-

cis pectoreque fulvo-flavis.

Long. 9 lin., lat. elytr. 4 lin.

First joint of the antenne thick and cylindrical, the third

joint twice as long as the first, thick, clothed with dense black

pile; the following joints short, not quite black. Head and

thorax rusty yellow, with a spot on the vertex of the head and

a broad stripe behind each eye black; these black marks are

continued on the thorax. The thorax is subcylindrical,

slightly constricted before and behind the middle, with some

strong punctures on each side of the mesial black stripe and

along the base. Elytra with prominent angular shoulders,

gradually and moderately dilated towards the apex, where

they are two thirds broader than at their base, flat on the back

(except at the apex), strongly deflexed at the sides (almost

perpendicularly so near the base), strongly and closely punc-

tured at the base, more finely posteriorly; the humeral keel is

very strong, there is also a strong costa on the expanded por-

tion, arising at shoulder and extending to the apex; there is

a rusty yellow stripe on the shoulder, turned posteriorly

towards (but not reaching) the suture; there is also a thin

rusty yellow stripe on the margin below the shoulder, and a

broad band behind the middle, which is dentate on both its

margins; the apex of each elytron is completely rounded.

The middle of the sterna and the middle of the basal portion

of the abdomen are dirty yellow. 9¢.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 21

302 Mr. W. A. Haswell on two new

A second specimen (<3), with precisely the same colora-

tion, differs from the type in having the third joint of the an-

tenne less densely fringed, and the joints following it are

more elongate; in the type the third joint nearly equals all

the following joints taken together; whereas in the second

example the third joint only equals the three following joints

together. The scutellar region of the elytra is less strongly

punctured. ‘These are probably sexes of the same species.

Themistonoé delectabilis, n. sp.

This species is extremely close to 7. humeralis; but I think

the difference of colour &c. indicates more than a variety. It

differs in having the yellow of a more ochreous colour; the

elytra entirely of this colour, except a mark in the middle in

the form of an inverted T, which (as well as the apical third

of the elytra) is deep violet. The apical violet portion has a

number of irregular oblique ridges which are not visible in 7.

humeralis. ‘The underside of the insect is black, except the

middle of the prosternum and the cox, which are dusky

yellow.

fab. Bogota (H. Chesterton),

XXITX.— On two new Species of the Genus Paratymolus, Miers

(Crustacea Brachyura), from Australia. By WILLIAM

A. Haswewu, M.A., B.Sc., Curator of the Queensland

Museum, Brisbane.

[Plate XVI.]

Unper the name of Paratymolus pubescens, Mr. E. J. Miers

has recently described (P. Z.S. 1879, p. 45, pl. ii. fig. 6) a

curious new podophthalmous crustacean from Japan, which

he refers, though with some doubt, to the family Homolide.

Paratymolus differs from Homola (1) in not having the last

pair of legs elevated on the back, (2) in the possession of dis-

tinct cavities excavated under the front for the lodgment of

the antennules, (3) in having the external maxillipedes oper-

culiform. It approximates in some of its characters to the

Corystide ; and probably its nearest ally is Te/messus of White,

together with which genus it might be regarded as forming

a distinct family, having affinities, on the one hand, with the

Homolide, and on the other with the Corystide.

During a recent dredging-excursion I obtained at Port

Spectes of the Genus Paratymolus, Miers. 303

Denison, in Queensland, two species which are referable to

this remarkable genus; and one of these I have since observed

in Port Jackson. One of them is a very near ally of the

Japanese species described by Mr. Miers; the other is rather

widely separated from it, but shows suflicient agreement in

essential characters to justify its inclusion in the same genus.

Paratymolus bituberculatus, sp. nov.

(Pl. XVI. figs. 1, 2.)

Carapace and limbs covered with a close pubescence. os-

tral spines short, blunt ; a short spine or tooth above the eye,

and two others on the lateral border behind it, the hinder-

most the largest and placed at the angle of junction of the

antero-lateral and postero-lateral borders; a small conical

tooth situated about the middle of the postero-lateral border ;

gastric region with two prominent conical tubercles. Arm

with four small teeth on its posterior border; wrist armed

with a long slender spine; hand subtriangular, the upper

border produced into a prominent tooth above the insertion of

the dactylos, outer surface ornamented with two fasciculi of

short stiff sete. Ambulatory legs slender, terminal joint

longer than the penultimate. Length of carapace 2 lines,

breadth 2 lines.

Hab. Gloucester Passage, Port Denison, about 5 fathoms.

Paratymolus latipes, sp. nov.

(Pl. XVI. figs. 3-5.)

Carapace and limbs closely pubescent. Rostrum of two

broadish lobes, each armed externally with a short acute spine

directed forwards and slightly inwards; antero-lateral border

with four acute spines, the first (the shortest) placed in front

of the eye, the second behind it, and the third (the longest)

about halfway between the second and the fourth, which

occupies the lateral angle; dorsal surface smooth. Anterior

limbs stout ; arm provided with a few small slender spines on

its internal and inferior borders; wrist armed at its internal

and distal angle with a short stout spine; hand compressed,

its outer surface ornamented with numerous granulations and

a few minute spinules, upper border with a row of minute

spinules, inner surface smooth. Ambulatory limbs laterally

compressed, last joint longer than the penultimate. Length

and breadth of carapace 4 lines.

Hab. Port Denison, Queensland; Port Jackson.

The Port-Jackson specimen has the carapace rather more

convex than that from Port Denison, and the first pair of limbs

304 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

smaller; but the differences are scarcely sufficient to necessi-

tate the bestowal of a separate specific name.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI.

Fig. 1. Paratymolus bituberculatus, magnified about 4 diameters.

Fig. 2. First pair of legs of the same, magnified 7 diameters.

Fig. 8. Paratymolus latipes, magnified 4 diameters.

Fig. 4. Abdomen of the same.

Fig. 5. Under view of the anterior portion of the body of the same, mag~-

nified 8 diameters.

XXX.—On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian

Region.—Part II. Telphusidea, Catometopa, aud Oxysto-

mata. By Epwarp J. Miers, F.L.S§., F.Z.8.

[Plate XIV.]

[Continued from p. 259. ]

TELPHUSIDEA.

Telphusa Larnaudii, A. M.-Eidwards.

Indo-Malayan seas. A male is in the collection without

special indication of locality. Both this form and 7. denticu-

lata are so nearly allied to 7. fluviatilis that I think it is pro-

bable that the examination of a sufficiently large series of

specimens would show their identity.

Telphusa sumatrensis, sp. 0.

(Pl ATV. fies. 03'2).

Carapace broader than long, rather convex in its anterior

portion, and uearly smooth. Front more than one third the

greatest width of the carapace, with the anterior margin

straight ; its upper surface is punctulated, but not granulated

or rugose. Some faintly indicated rugosities are visible on

the carapace toward the epibranchial tooth, which is very

small—scarcely distinguishable from the granulated line which

defines the antero-lateral margins. The postfrontal crest is

nearly obsolete, but, although scarcely distinguishable, is

interrupted and divided into two median and two lateral

portions, nearly as in 7. Larnaudii. The chelipedes are

smooth, not granulated or rugose, but slightly punctulated ;

the carpus is armed with two spines on its inner margin, of

which the anterior is the largest; the fingers of the larger

hand (in the male) are slightly arcuated, leaving an hiatus

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 305

when closed, and minutely toothed. Ambulatory legs and

male postabdomen as in 7. Larnaudit. Length of largest

male 7 lines, breadth 9 lines.

W. Sumatra, Agam (two males and two females).

This species differs from 7. Larnaudit in the not granu-

lated or rugose carapace and chelipedes and the obsolescence

of the postfrontal ridge and lateral epibranchial tooth. If it

should prove to be merely a young state, it would throw

doubt on the distinctness not only of 7. Larnaudiz, but of

several other species of this very difficult genus. TT. philip-

pina, v. Martens, differs in possessing an epibranchial tooth

and in the form of the postabdomen of the male; 7. picta of

the same author, in the form of the spines on the inner margin

of the wrist and the denticulation of the fingers.

Telphusa sinuatifrons, M.-Edwards ?

Carapace very much flattened, much wider at the branchial

regions than in its posterior portion, transversely rugose near

the antero-lateral margins; lateral epibranchial tooth distinct

but not very prominent, the extraorbital angle or tooth not

at all prominent and not projecting beyond the level of the

front, which is not at all deflexed, about two fifths the greatest

breadth of the carapace, with a very slight median and two

lateral sinuses in its anterior margin. ‘The postfrontal ridge

is interrupted, the two median portions being more advanced

than the lateral, which are continued in a nearly straight line

to the epibranchial tooth. Length of carapace 1 inch 3 lines,

breadth 1 inch 7 lines.

W. Borneo (an adult female).

The anterior legs are unfortunately wanting. Although

this species resembles M.-Edwards’s figure of 7. stnuatifrons

in the sinuated anterior margin of its front, a character pecu-

liar to that species, the front appears to be relatively broader

and the postfrontal line straighter; so that it may after all

prove to be distinct.

Besides the foregoing there are two specimens (male and

female) of a species belonging to that section of the genus

which Stimpson designated G'eotelphusa, which, on account

of their mutilated condition, and the difficulty of determining

the specific characters of the species of this section without

large series for comparison, I will not designate by a distinct

name. ‘The carapace is considerably broader than long, and

much inflated over the branchial regions; the postfrontal

crest is indicated only by two well-marked prominences on

either side of the middle line. The extraorbital angle is

much depressed, so that there is no extraorbital tooth; the

306 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

epibranchial tooth is very small; and the antero-lateral margins

of the carapace are detined by a distinct line. The front is

less than one third the greatest width of the carapace; and its

anterior margin is marked with a shallow median sinus. One

(probably the larger) chelipede is absent in each specimen ;

the remaining one is slender; the carpus is armed with two

strong spines, of which the anterior is the larger, on its

inner margin; hand nearly smooth; fingers slender, straight,

and minutely denticulated. Postabdomen of male somewhat

constricted in the middle; the terminal joint longer than

broad.

This species is apparently allied to 7. picta, v. Martens,

but differs in the spines of the wrist and probably in the form

of the postabdomen of the male. No locality was preserved

with the specimens.

Paratelphusa tridentata.

Paratelphusa tridentata, M.-Edwards, Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér. 8) Zool. xx.

p. 213 (1853); Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. vii. p. 171, pl. xiii. fig. 1

(1854); De Man, Notes from Leyden Museum, no. xix. p. 62

(1879).

Bali (an adult female); Java (a young male with P. con-

vexa). An adult male and female are in the collection with-

out definite locality.

This species, as Mr. de Man has pointed out, may always be

distinguished by the form of the posterior epibranchial tooth

and the absence of spines on the meropodal joints of the legs.

Paratelphusa convexa.

Paratelphusa convexa, De Haan (ined.), De Man, Notes from Leyden

Museum, no. xix. p. 65 (1879).

Java (six specimens, including males, females, and young).

In three of these specimens the body and legs are spotted or

variegated with dark red. Nias (an adult female); Borneo

(a young female).

In the young individuals the angular excavation of the

inferior wall of the orbit is less marked than in the adult; and

I think it possible that the examination of a sufficiently large

series might show that P. maculata is not specifically dis-

tinct.

CATOMETOPA vel GRAPSOIDEA.

Macrophthalmus carinimanus, M.-Edw.

A male and female, of which the exact locality has not

been preserved, are in the Museum collection, which agree

Mr. K. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 307

very well with Milne-Edwards’s short diagnosis of this species.

The eyes, in these specimens, do not reach quite to the antero-

lateral angles of the carapace. The arm of the anterior legs

has one or two spinules at the distal end of its inner margin ;

the wrist has a spinule on its inner surface; the hand is

slender, granulated on its upper, and slightly on its outer

surface; the lower finger is bent downward, so as to form a

distinct angle with the inferior margin of the hand ; the upper

finger (when closed) meets the lower at its apex only; and the

two enclose a large triangular space. The inner margin of

the hand and arm is clothed with dense hair.

Specimens in the British-Museum collection from Singa-

pore, the Mauritius, Penang, and Australia, which have

been referred to MW. carinimanus, belong to the following

species.

Macrophthalmus convexus.

Macrophthalmus convexus, Stm. Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 97

(1858).

The specimen I refer to this species belongs to Milne-

Edwards’s second section, having the carapace less than twice

as broad as long, and the inner surface of the hand unarmed.

The carapace is coarsely granulated on the sides; and the

branchial regions are sometimes armed with two small granu-

lated prominences, with the antero-lateral angles spiniform

and prominent; posterior to these, on the lateral margins, is a

second tooth ; the front is spatulate ; the eye-peduncles do not

quite reach to the end of the antero-lateral teeth ; the anterior

legs (in the male) have the inner margins of the arm and

wrist granulated, the hand rounded and finely granulated on

its upper margin, with a longitudinal granulated line (not a

ridge) on its outer surface close to the lower margin; the

lower (immobile) finger is deflexed, but does not form so de-

cided an angle with the lower margin of the hand as in the

preceding species; the distal end of the palm and the fingers

are hairy on their inner surface; the fingers (when closed)

include a much narrower space than in M. carinimanus ; the

ambulatory legs are smooth, not pectinated, scantily fringed

with hair, and with a very small spine (which is sometimes

obsolete) near the distal end of the upper margin of the

merus. Length 7 lines, breadth at second marginal tooth

13 lines.

Indo-Malayan seas (a male).

This species is evidently allied to MW. simplicipes and M.

afinis, Guérin, from Bombay, which, however, are repre-

sented as having two teeth behind the antero-lateral or extra-

308 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

orbital tooth. MM. setosus, M.-Edw., and M. japonicus, De

Haan, have the antero-lateral angles much less prominent

and acute. Md. inermis, A. M.-Edwards, which may be

identical with this species, is represented as having the upper

margin of the hands sharp-edged, not rounded.

Ocypode ceratophthalma (Pallas).

Celebes, Macassar (an adult male); Batjan (an adult

male).

Ocypode cordimana (Latyr.).

Celebes, Macassar (a female).

GELASIMUS.

There can be little doubt that many of the numerous

species of this large and difficult group have been founded on

insufficient characters, and will be reduced to synonyma when-

ever the comparison of sufficiently large series of specimens

of different ages and sexes shall have demonstrated the varia-

bility of the denticulation of the inner margins of the fingers

of the larger chelipede and of other characters that have been

employed in distinguishing the species.

* Front narrow between the eyes.

Gelasimus vocans (Linn.).

Three males are in the collection, without definite indication

of locality. There is a strong triangular tooth near the distal

end of the upper margin of the arm in this species; the

hand is strongly granulated externally, and has two very

strong granulated ridges on its inner surface ; the fingers are

robust and laterally compressed; there is always a strong

triangular lobe or tooth near the distal extremity of the lower

finger, and usually, but not invariably, a second between this

and the base.

Gelasimus Marionis.

Gelasimus Marionis, Desm. Consid. Crust. p. 124, pl. xiii. fig. 1 (1825);

M.-Edw. Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xviii. p. 145, pl. iii. fig. 5

(1852); Hoffmann in Recherches faune Madagascar, Cr. p. 15, pl. 111,

figs. 16-18 (1874); nec M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 53 (1837).

Gelasimus cultrimanus, White, P. Z.S. p. 84 (1847); Adams and

White, Zool. Samarang, Cr. p. 49 (1848) ; M.-Edw. Ann. Sci. Nat.

lc. p. 145 (1852).

Batjan (two males).

The principal character that distinguishes this species from

G. vocans is the absence of prominent lobes on the lower im-

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. | = 809

mobile finger; and I regard it as very probable that it is merely

a variety of that species. There is, as in G. vocans, a strong

triangular tooth at the distal end of the upper margin of the

arm; the palm is strongly granulated in the middle of its

outer surface, and there is a well-marked concavity on the

outer surface at base of the lower finger in both forms.

The relative length of the fingers as compared with that of

the palm is clearly a character that varies with the age of the

individual, the fingers being always shortest in the smallest

examples. The upper finger is never longitudinally sulcated,

either in G. vocans or G. Marionis.

Gelasimus arcuatus.

Gelasimus arcuatus, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. pp. 53, 261, pl. vil.

fig. 2 (1835).

Gelasimus tenuimanus, White, List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 35 (1847),

sine descr.

Borneo (an adult male).

In what I regard as the typical condition of this species,

the fingers of the larger hand are greatly elongated and with-

out prominent lobes on their inner margins. ‘They are often

nearly three times the length of the hand.

Gelasimus arcuatus, var. forcipatus.

Gelasimus forcipatus, Ad. & White, Zool. Samarang, Crust. p. 50

(1848) ; M.-Edw. Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xviii. p. 147 (1852).

? Gelasimus brevipes, M.-Edw. l.c. p. 146, pl. ii. fig. 7 (1852).

? Gelasimus rubripes, M.-Edw. J.c. p. 148 (1852); Jacq. & Lucas, Voy.

Pole Sud, Zool, iii. Cr. p. 66, pl. vi. fig. 2 (1853).

Batjan (seven males, of different sizes).

In all the specimens I refer to this variety the fingers are

shorter, not exceeding twice the length of the palm, and nearly

always lobed or toothed on their inner margins. In the

smaller examples the length of the fingers is relatively less ;

and in the smallest they are not half the length of the palm.

In the largest of the specimens from Batjan there is (besides

the granulations with which the inner margins of the fingers

are always armed) a single tooth on the lower finger; in three

others, one on the upper and none on the lower; in two others,

two on the upper and one on the lower; while in the smallest

the teeth are obsolete. The width of the merus of the

ambulatory legs also appears to vary somewhat in this

species.

G. arcuatus may always be distinguished from G. vocans

by the absence of the strong triangular tooth at the distal end

of the arm, its place being taken by a series of granules ; the

310 | Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

hand, moreover, is very coarsely granulated on the whole of its

outer surface, and is of a reddish tinge in its lower half, which

is not so markedly concave as in G. vocans; and the upper

finger is sulcated on its outer surface.

** Front broad between the eyes.

Gelasimus annulipes, M.-Edw.

A male from Batjan and two specimens without definite

locality are in the collection. Although the denticulations of

the fingers vary considerably in this species, there is nearly

always a strong triangular subterminal tooth on the lower

immobile finger.

Three small examples of a Gelasimus allied to the above

are in the collection (one from Batjan), which I will not ven-

ture to designate by a distinct specific name. ‘The lateral

margins of the carapace converge more rapidly to the posterior

margin; and the antero-lateral angles are more produced and

acute. The larger chelipede is nearly smooth externally, as

in G. annulipes; but the upper finger is slenderer toward its

distal end, and the lower finger (although denticulated on its

inner margin) is without a subterminal tooth. In two of the

specimens there is no granulated ridge on the inner surface of

the hand near the base of the fingers ; in the third specimen

this ridge is present; the prominent granulated ridge on the

inner surface of the palm, near its infero-proximal angle, is

equally developed in all of the specimens. Whether this be

the variety designated albimana by Kossmann, who founded

his description on specimens from the Red Sea, could scarcely

be decided without comparison of the types.

Grapsus pictus (Latr.).

Amboina (an adult female).

A very constant character distinguishing this species from

G. strigosus is to be found in the form of the front, which is

relatively narrow, with the anterior margin arcuated, in G.

pictus, whereas in G. strigosus it is broader with the anterior

margin straight.

Varuna litterata (Fabr.).

Bali (two males).

Pseudogravsus penicilliger (Latr.).

Batjan (two adult males in fine condition).

The genus Heterograpsus of Lucas is so very nearly allied

Mr. E. J. Miers on Maylasian Crustacea. 311

to Pseudograpsus in all structural characters, that I do not

know whether it can be maintained as distinct. | Pseudo-

grapsus penicilliger is merely a more robust, thicker Hetero-

grapsus with greatly developed chelipedes.

There are also three adult males of this species from the

New Hebrides (Aneiteum) in the Museum collection.

I refer here with doubt a female in mutilated condition in

the collection of Dr. Bleeker from Celebes (Macassar).

It resembles the male P. penicilliger in all particulars

except that the carpus of the anterior leg is armed with a

distinct lobe or tooth on its inner margin, and the outer

surface of the penultimate joint, which is somewhat rugose,

is marked with a longitudinal raised line, which is continued

along the outer surface of the lower finger. Further material

is needed to show whether these characters are sexual or indi-

cative of a distinct species. As is usual in the females of

some allied forms, the chelipedes are entirely devoid of hair.

If distinct, this form may be designated Pseudograpsus den-~

tatus.

Ptychognathus pilipes ?

? Gnathograpsus pilipes, A. M.Edw. Nouy. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. iv.

p. 184, pl. xxvii. figs. 6-10 (1868).

I refer to this species with some hesitation a small female

example from Batjan. It agrees very well with males and

females in the Museum collection from the Philippines (Gui-

maras). The close affinity of Gnathograpsus to Ptycho-

gnathus was recognized by Prof. A. Milne-Edwards; and I

can see no sufficient reason for regarding them as distinct

genera. It is worthy of note that neither A. Milne-Edwards,

Stimpson, nor Man have noted the common occurrence in the

females of this genus of a small tuft or patch of hair near the

distal end of the lower (immobile) finger of the chelipedes.

This hairy patch exists in the females I refer to P. pilipes.

It is possible that none of the authors above cited had females

before them.

Metopograpsus messor (Forskal),

var. frontalis, nov.

Celebes, Macassar. An adult male.

In its coloration this example appears to approach very

near to what may be regarded as the typical form of the

species, represented by specimens from the Red Sea in the

Museum collection.

The front is relatively wider than in most of the specimens

of this species in the Museum collection—about three and a

812 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

half times the length of the- upper orbital margin; and its

anterior margin is straight, not at all sinuated in the middle.

I have observed, however, some variation in the width of the

front in this species.

There is a second male, without definite locality, in the

collection, that agrees in every particular with the Celebes

example, except that on one side of the carapace there is a

distinct tooth behind the extraorbital tooth, and on the other

side an indication of a similar tooth, the margin of the cara-

pace being slightly sinuated. ‘This variety appears to mark

a transition to Metopograpsus quadridentatus, Stimpson, and

M. oceanicus.

From JM. latifrons, White, this variety is distinguished

by the much less coarsely denticulated front and less accen-

tuated frontal lobes.

SESARMA.

* Lateral margins of the carapace without any tooth behind the

extraorbital tooth.

Sesarma affinis, De Haan.

Two specimens (males) are in the collection, without special

indication of locality. ‘They agree with De Haan’s figure in

having two minutely pectinated oblique ridges on the upper

surface of the hand, a character which, curiously enough, is

mentioned neither by De Haan nor by Mr. de Man in his

remarks upon this species (Notes Leyden Museum, i. (v.)

p- 22, 1879). The tubercles of the upper mobile finger are

somewhat more numerous than in De Haan’s type.

Sesarma aspera of Heller, from Ceylon, Madras, and the

Nicobars, is either identical with or very nearly allied to this

species; the sides of the carapace, however, are represented

as nearly parallel, not convergent distally.

Sesarma granosimana, sp. 0.

(Pl. XIV. fig. 3.)

Carapace nearly quadrate, with the surface punctulated,

but not granulated or rugose ; antero-lateral margins without

any tooth except the extraorbital tooth. The anterior margin

of the carapace is divided into four nearly equal and not very

prominent lobes; the front, although nearly vertically de-

flexed, does not form a marked angle with the anterior margin

of the carapace ; it is about two thirds the width of the cara-

pace; and its anterior margin is nearly straight, but slightly

reflexed on each side of the middle line. The anterior legs

(in the male) are short; the arm has a very small tooth at

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 313

the distal end of its upper margin; the whole of the outer

surface of the wrist is covered with short transverse ridges,

which pass into the form of granules on the outer surface of

the palm; on the inner surface of the wrist is a spiniform

tooth ; there are no pectinated crests on the upper surface of

the palm ; the mobile finger is granulated above at base, and

both fingers are denticulated on their inner margins. The

merus of the ambulatory legs is considerably dilated, and

armed with a small spine near the distal end of its upper

margin; the two following joints are marked with longi-

tudinal raised lines; the dactyli are slender. The post-

abdomen of the male is rather broad ; its terminal joint consi-

derably narrower than the penultimate joint. Length 7 lines,

breadth 8 lines.

Indo-Malayan seas (no definite locality). A male and

female are in the collection.

S. granosimana is nearly allied to S. Dehaanii, M.-Edw.,

but is distinguished by the existence of a tooth on the inner

margin of the wrist, the more dilated merus of the ambu-

latory legs, &c. The legs, in the two specimens I have

examined, are not clothed with long hairs as in S. Dehaanii.

S. trapezium, Dana, which is also apparently allied to this

species, is described as having the carapace much narrowed

behind, the abdomen of the male narrow, and as having a

dense patch of hair near the base of the mobile finger *.

** Carapace with a second (epibranchial) tooth behind the

extraorbital tooth.

Sesarma bidens (De Haan).

Indo-Malayan seas (one adult male without definite

locality).

Sesarma teniolata, White (ined.), Miers.

Borneo (an adult male). In this specimen and in the

others in the Museum there exist but few traces of the tufts

of hair with which, according to Mr. de Man (Notes Leyden

Museum, ii. (v.) p. 26), the carapace is usually covered.

Sesarma Bocourt’, A. M.-Edwards.

Borneo (two males and a female). The males agree very

well with the diagnosis of A. M.-Edwards, and the longer

* T have not been able to compare S. granosimana with the description

of Sesarma chirogona, Targioni-Tozzetti, ‘‘Crostacei Brachiuri ed Ano-

muri,” in ‘Zoologia della R. pirocorvetta Magenta,’ Firenze, 1877, 8vo,

as I have not yet had an opportunity of consulting this important work.

514 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

and more detailed description of Mr. de Man (/. c. p. 28). In

the female (which has not as yet been observed) the hand is

slender, not dilated and compressed as in the male, and its

external surface, although flattened, is less coarsely granu-

lated towards the fingers, which are nearly smooth.

Sesarma intermedia (De Haan).

Indo-Malayan seas (a male and female without definite

locality).

Metagrapsus punctatus, A. M.-Edw.

| Indo-Malayan seas (two males).

Leiolophus abbreviatus (Dana).

Indo-Malayan seas (one male).

Pinnotheres obesus, Dana? (Pl. XIV. fig. 4.)

? Pinnothera obesa, Dana, Cr. U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. p. 380, pl. xxiv.

fie. 3 (1852).

I thus designate three specimens of a Pinnotheres without

locality in the collection. ‘The carapace is subglobose, with

the antero-lateral margins regularly rounded and entire, and

is nearly naked ; the front is very small, and projects slightly;

its anterior margin is rounded or subtruncated. The merus

of the outer maxillipedes is but little longer than broad, regu-

larly rounded at its distal end (where it is most dilated) ; its

outer margin also is arcuated, and its inner margin straight ;

its surface near the inner margin is somewhat thinly setose ;

the antepenultimate and penultimate joints are robust; the

latter is fringed with hairs along its outer margin and at its

distal end, which is obliquely subtruncated ; the slender dac-

tylus is articulated with the penultimate joint at a little before

the middle of its inner margin, and does not project beyond

itsapex. The anterior legs are small and smooth, and present

nothing remarkable; the ambulatory legs also are very slender

and naked.

All the specimens are females.

This species, in the form of the broadly dilated merus of

the outer maxillipedes, appears to differ from all the species

figured by Milne-Edwards in his revision of the group in

1858, and others since described. A specimen from Borneo

is in the Museum collection. A figure is given of the outer

maxillipede, because it is not quite of the form figured by

Dana; but I do not think the difference is sufficient to war-

rant the specific separation of the two forms.

My. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 315

OXYSTOMATA vel LEUCOSOIDEA.

Camara calappa (Linn.).

New Guinea (an adult female); Aroe Islands (an adult

female).

Calappa lophos (Fabr.).

Celebes, Macassar (a male).

No trace of the characteristic coloration exists in this speci-

men. ‘The carapace is somewhat more tuberculated, and the

denticulation of the antero-lateral margins near the extra-

orbital tooth is less marked than in a specimen in the Museum

collection from the Indian Ocean, which I refer to the typical

C. lophos. Itis possible that these characters indicate the

existence of distinct varieties or species.

Matuta victrix, Fabr.

Celebes, Macassar (two males and a female) ; Bali (an adult

female). A female from Batjan also perhaps belongs to this

species, in which all trace of the spots or markings have

disappeared.

Matuta circulifera, sp.n. (Pl. XIV. fig. 5.)

Carapace everywhere rather finely granulated; the granu-

lations rather coarser on the more elevated parts ; the tubercles

all distinct, but not very prominent. The rostrum is small,

obtuse, and subentire, with only a very obscure indication of

a median notch. Lateral marginal spine long, acute, and

straight. Hand of male nearly as in M. lunaris (M. rubro-

lineata, Miers) and M. lineifera. Lines of the carapace

forming complete and distinct circles, arranged in three

transverse series, 7. e. a transverse series of three circles on

the anterior portion, of four on the median portion, and of

three on the posterior portion of the carapace.

Indo-Malayan seas. An adult male is in the collection of

this interesting form, which belongs to section A of the

genus, and is distinguished from both M. lunaris and M.

lineifera by the strikingly symmetrical coloration and the

form of the front.

The coloration has unfortunately much faded in the unique

example (preserved in spirit), and, it is to be feared, will soon

altogether disappear.

Matuta Banksti, Leach.

Celebes (a male) ; Amboina (a female) ; New Guinea (an

adult male); Bali (a female).

316 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

In a fine adult male without locality the granulations of

the carapace are somewhat less distinct.

Matuta obtustfrons, Miers.

Bali (a female).

This species is easily distinguished by the strongly-marked

tubercles and obtuse front from MW. levidactyla*.

Leucosia pallida, var. obscura.

sere obscura, Bell, Trans. Linn. Soc, xxi. p. 285, pl. xxx. fig. 3

855).

eee, moresbiensis, Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc. New 8S. Wales, iv.

p- 49 (1879), var.

Indo-Malayan seas (two females without definite locality).

Mr. Haswell, in his excellent description of L. moresbiensis,

acknowledges its aftinity to L. obscura. This description,

moreover, agrees better than that of Bell with the specimens

designated LZ. obscura in the Museum collection. In these

specimens there is a distinct row of granules on the inner

margin of the hand, and the granulation of the posterior and

postero-lateral margins of the carapace and the armature of

the fingers are precisely those of L. moresbiensis. The only

difference that I note is that in L. obscura (and L. pallida)

there are four, not three, large tubercles on the lower margin

of the thoracic sinus; but this alone would probably not

suffice to distinguish Z. obscura from L. moresbiensis. It is

certain, therefore, either that Bell’s description and figure are

inaccurate, or were based on specimens belonging to a distinct

species from the examples labelled L. obscura in the Museum

collection.

Leucosia pallida, Bell, in all structural characteristics is

identical with ZL. obscura; it differs only in the lighter colo-

ration, which may possibly be due to the bleaching of the

specimens. Among the specimens in the Museum collection

are some on which the granulation of the inner margin of the

hands is obsolete.

Myra carinata, Bell.

Celebes, Macassar (a male).

* I propose this name for the specimens that I, in my revision of the

genus, referred to M. lwnarts (Herbst). Hilgendorf, who had before him

Herbst’s typical example, has shown (Monatsb. Ak. Berlin, p. 810, 1878)

that the species designated M. rubrolineata is really the dinars of Herbst ;

consequently the specimens I referred to duwnaris must receive a new ap-

pellation. It was impossible, in the case of such nearly allied species, to

say, from the figure and description alone, what species Herbst had

designated Junaris.

On Hypochlorin and tts Production in the Plant. 317

It appears to me not improbable that the comparative ex-

amination of a sufficient series of specimens would demonstrate

that this species and M. elegans are founded on half-grown

specimens.

Iphis septemspinosa (Fabricius).

Celebes, Macassar (a female).

Arcania novemspinosa (White), var. aspera, n.

A specimen (adult female) without definite locality differs

from White’s type of novemspinosa in the British Museum

in the broader and much more closely granulated carapace,

and the relatively shorter spines of the posterior and postero-

lateral margins. White’s specimen is a male. Although the

characters distinguishing the genera Jphis and Arcania are

scarcely of generic value, it may be convenient to retain the

former name for the Fabrician septemspinosa, to which it has

long been applied, and which differs somewhat more markedly

pen the species of Arcania than these do among them-

selves.

Dorippe sima, M.-Eidw.

Borneo (an adult female).

|'To be continued. |

XXXI.— On Hypochlorin and the Conditions of its Produc-

tion in the Plant. By Prof. PRINGSHEIM*.

In a previous communication} I called attention to the exist-

ence in green vegetable cells of a body to which I gave the

name of “hypochlorin,” on account of its close relationship

to chlorophyll. I now give some more detailed statements as

to its occurrence and microchemical characters, and append

thereto some further remarks upon the constitution of the

chlorophyll-bodies.

So far as they regard hypochlorin, these statements relate

essentially to the behaviour of this body at high temperatures

and to the conditions of its production in the seedling plant.

With regard to the chlorophyll-bodies, they will at the same

* Translated by W. 8S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Monatsbericht der

Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin,’ November 1879, p. 860.

+ Monatsb. Berl. Akad. July 1879; translated in this Journal for

January 1880.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 22

318 Prof. Pringsheim on Hypochlorin and the

time indicate a noteworthy structure of those bodies which

has hitherto not been noticed by anatomists, and demonstrate

the wide diffusion of fatty oil in them.

I. Structure and Composition of the Chlorophyll-bodies.

In the direct observation of the fresh plant the hypochlorin

cannot be distinguished in the apparently homogeneous chloro-

phyll-bodies ; for it is only in rare instances that traces of its

presence can be detected in them under normal conditions.

Its presence betrays itself at once, however, when the green

cells are treated with hydrochloric acid.

Under the influence of this acid, as I have already briefly

stated in my former memoir, dark, deep-reddish-brown or

rust-coloured, irregularly bounded forms are separated in

a few hours in the chlorophyll-bodies, especially at their

periphery, and also between neighbouring chlorophyll-bodies.

These are not perfectly spherical drops, but rather semifluid

masses of irregular form, with sometimes spherical, sometimes

plane limiting surfaces, which sometimes push forth angular

or pointed processes, and thus become indistinct crystalline

scales or nests. From these, after a longer or shorter time,

shoot forth long, pointed, straight or curved needles, and ex-

tremely thin twisted filaments, or even shorter and thicker

rods,

These extremely remarkable effects, which occur without

exception in all chlorophyll-plants after treatment with hydro-

chloric acid, constitute a characteristic and infallible reaction

for hypochlorin. Without any further examination, they de-

monstrate directly by their external appearance the presence

of a hitherto unnoticed substance in the chlorophyll-bodies of

plants. But the circumstances under which they occur pre-

sent many difficulties in the way of the right conception of

the relation here brought to light, and therefore require a more

thoroughgoing examination and investigation.

As has already been stated, even direct observation leaves no

doubt that the substance which afterwards (perhaps modified

by the process of its production) becomes converted into the

crystalline needles outside the chlorophyll-bodies was previ-

ously present in their fundamental substance. It is evidently

drops of an oleaginous consistency which first separate from

the fundamental substance, gradually increase or coalesce into

larger masses, and form the foundation of the future needles

and filaments. No distinct structure is recognizable in these

needles and filaments; and one may often be in doubt, when

the formations are thicker and shorter, whether they possess

an organic structure or a crystalline texture.

Conditions of its Production in the Plant. 319

Of all known histological formations they remind us most

(and, again, especially the thicker and twisted forms) of the

bacillar forms of many so-called wax coatings of leaves, which,

as is well known, consist of diverse mixtures of substances

poor in oxygen. And as from their conditions of occurrence

and solubility they are evidently organic formations which

appear to belong to a group of proximate constituents of the

plant allied to these wax bacilli, and also visibly proceed from

a common oleaginous parent substance, one may easily sup-

pose that they consist of a mixture of resin and essential oil,

such as occurs not unfrequently in vegetable tissues. The

consistency, the limitation, the solubility, and difficult mobility

of the separating drops more nearly resemble essential than

fatty oils.

- _ By the absence of the pure drop-form, and still more by the

directly recognizable processes of conversion of the surface

into multifarious structures of indistinctly crystalline texture,

these imperfectly fluid products of separation produce of them-

selves the impression of a mixture of solid and fluid sub-

stances, or rather of a kind of mother liquor of a separating

solid compound, whilst, at the same time, they give rise to the

idea of an essential oil in process of resinization. Further,

this microscopical character agrees with the behaviour to all

known solvents of resins and oils.

All the forms under which these segregations make their

appearance, the irregularly limited drops, the crystalline scales,

needles, filaments, &c., are insoluble in water, in saline solu-

tions, and in dilute mineral and organic acids; but they dis-

solve readily and completely in ether, benzole, sulphide of

carbon, and essential oils, and also in absolute or even in

moderately dilute alcohol, although frequently only after a

considerable time, and with more or less difficulty.

The constituents of which this hypochlorin mixture con-

sists have not previously been distinguished in the funda-

mental substance of the chlorophyll-bodies, with the exception

of the colouring-matter which they contain. Nothing espe-

cially has ever yet been known of a body with the properties

of hypochlorin and its peculiar forms. ‘The deep coloration,

however, of the drops and needles might lead many to sus-

pect (as I have found during the demonstration of these for-

mations) that the separated drops in their whole mass consist

only of the colouring-matter of the chlorophyll, which, being

separated from the fundamental substance by the hydrochloric

acid, becomes solidified or crystallizes in the form of needles

and filaments.

But this is not the case. That the colour of the separated

22*

320 Prof. Pringsheim on Hypochlorin and the

masses is due to the colouring-matter of the chlorophyll is

undoubtedly correct: but this colouring-matter does not form

any fluid of itself ; and as it is insoluble in dilute and even in

concentrated hydrochloric acid, as is shown by direct observa-

tion if we treat the chlorophyll-bodies in the unopened cell

with hydrochloric acid, a special menstruum must exist in the

separated masses, which serves as the bearer of the colouring-

matter that tinges the drops and needles. This, indeed,

becomes directly perceptible; for the needles, filaments, and

rods often lose their colour when they have become older and

been for a considerable time exposed to the light, completely

retaining their form, however; and in many cases the rigid

structures are colourless even at their production. ‘Their

colour is therefore due solely to a contamination with co-

louring-matter which has been carried over.

‘The drops separating under the action of hydrochloric acid

consist, therefore, of an oleaginous fluid tinged with dissolved

chlorophyll-colouring-matter, which is either itself crystal-

lizable or contains a crystallizable substance, ‘‘ hypochlorin ; ”

and therefore, as will be seen from this statement, I under-

stand under the name “‘ hypochlorin”’ not the entire mixture

of which the masses separable by hydrochloric acid from the

chlorophyll-bodies consist (which, indeed, includes the colour-

ing-matter tinging them), but only the body contained in them

which afterwards solidifies in an indistinctly crystalline form,

or (which is the same thing) the foundation of this crystal-

lizable body originally present in the chlorophyll-grain. For

it may still appear questionable whether the body which sub-

sequently acquires a crystalline texture outside the chloro-

phyll-body was present with the same properties in the

fundamental substance, or undergoes, during its passage

out, a change which causes its solidification and crystalli-

zation.

Moreover, I will remark, we may regard the hypochlorin

reaction, 7.¢. the formation of the dark secretions from the

chlorophyll-bodies, as not a specific action of hydrochloric

acid; for it is produced also by other agents.

Picronitric acid, for example, in various degrees of dilution,

produces in most cases precisely the same effect as hydro-

chloric acid, but does not furnish such clear images, as it

attacks the fundamental substance of the chlorophyll-bodies

more strongly, by which means the forms become more

indistinct.

In all preparations of green tissues which have lain for

months or years in glycerine or chloride of calcium, the dark

indefinitely bounded hypochlorin-masses also appear here

Conditions of its Production in the Plant. 321

and there, separated spontaneously, as it were, from the chlo-

rophyll-bodies.

It is therefore certain, even from our present experience,

that the oleaginous substance which is a constituent of every

chlorophyll-grain can be separated therefrom by various

means. It would almost appear that this can be effected

purely mechanically by displacement and disturbed adhesion.

One of the simplest means of separation is the application

of moist heat. If green tissues be heated with water, or dis-

tilled with aqueous vapour, drops of an oleaginous substance

separate from the fundamental substance of the chlorophyll-

bodies. The phenomenon is analogous to that which Briosi

produced in the chlorophyll-bodies of the Musacez by treat-

ment with cold water. In his fine memoir on this subject *

_ he assumes (and in this later observers have followed him)

that the normal occurrence of oil in the chlorophyll-bodies of

the Musacez is an exceptional case, forming as it were a sub-

stitute for deficient starch. But, as I shall here show, the

occurrence of oil in the chlorophyll-bodies of plants is quite a

general phenomenon and certainly not directly dependent on

the presence or absence of starch-enclosures ; only, it would

appear, the escape of the oil from the chlorophyll-bodies does

not take place in most plants except by treatment with water

of higher temperature.

In many plants a heat of 50° C. (=122° F-.) suffices; and

at this temperature any starch-enclosures that may be present

do not swell up. Other plants require higher temperatures,

when, in consequence of the swelling of the starch-enclosures

or the bursting of the whole chlorophyll-grain, the compre-

hension of the process may be rendered more difficult by

collateral circumstances. The phenomenon is also easily

called forth if the tissues are exposed for from ten to fifteen

minutes or longer to the vapours of boiling water.

In all cases there are, after this treatment, as already indi-

cated, at the periphery of the chlorophyll-bodies, some smaller

or larger oil-drops, which clearly have issued from the chloro-

phyll-bodies under the action of the warm water or of the hot

vapour.

The chlorophyll-bodies themselves at the same time acquire

the nature of hollow bodies, which may put on a different

appearance in different plants according to the temperature

employed and the duration of the action. They either con-

stitute spongy porous masses, or form hollow trabecular

networks, or, lastly (especially when strong swelling with

* Bot. Zeitung, 1873, p. 529.

322 Prof. Pringsheim on Hypochlorin and the

bursting of the whole grain has taken place), they consist

only of the torn fragments of the envelope of the ruptured

grain. All these solid residues are formed of the so-called

protoplasmatic foundation of the chlorophyll-body and its

inflated starch-enclosures, and are more or less strongly tinged

with green by nearly unaltered chlorophyll-colouring-matter.

The oil-drops separated from these solid residues by the

warm water or hot vapour, and escaped from the chlorophyll-

bodies, which always dissolve readily and completely in alcohol

or ether, are also tinged more or less with chlorophyll-

colouring-matter, most of them in different tints of green and

blue; but the darker ones even appear reddish brown, and

then, leaving out of consideration the smaller size, produce

the same external impression as the first-mentioned drops of

the hypochlorin-mixture separated by hydrochloric acid.

Nevertheless I do not think that they are identical with the

latter. They are distinguished not only by the less degree

and generally greater purity of their chlorophyll-green colora-

tion, but also by their readier solubility in alcohol, and, lastly,

by their more regular drop-like shape and especially by their

permanence in heat. I therefore (as I may here state in

anticipation) hold that these oil-drops represent a second non-

volatile and uncrystallizable oil present in the chlorophyll-

body, which exists in it side by side with the volatile and

erystallizable hypochlorin, and in association with the latter

forms those irregular masses which issue from the chlorophyll-

bodies under the influence of hydrochloric acid.

My reasons for this opinion are as follows :—

It is, in the first place, exceedingly striking that the oil-

drops extractible from the chlorophyll-bodies by heat are very

much inferior in their mass to the masses of oleaginous sub-

stance which can be separated from the same chlorophyll-

bodies by hydrochloric acid. Of those large, irregularly

bounded, diversely pointed and angular masses which appear

under the influence of hydrochloric acid, nothing is to be seen

under the action of moist heat. The drops which issue in

this case are smaller and more or less exactly spherical; and

they do not solidify, but remain fluid. They contain none, or

mere traces, of that crystallizable substance which, in the

masses separated by hydrochloric acid, calls forth those sin-

gular changes of form which I have already described.

We cannot, however, assume that this substance is still

present in the solid residues of the heated chlorophyll-bodies

and was merely not separated by the action of heat; for by

subsequent treatment with hydrochloric acid no further in-

creased or fresh separation of oil can be effected. With

Conditions of its Production in the Plant. 325

respect to the oil separated, hydrochloric acid calls forth no

further change in the behaviour of the chlorophyll-bodies ;

and the great difference herein shown in the action of hydro-

chloric acid upon chlorophyll-bodies, according as the latter

have or have not previously been heated, appears the more

noteworthy, as the chlorophyll-colouring-matter in itself un-

dergoes no essential alteration by heating, especially when

the application of heat is of short duration and the tempera-

tures are not high. For the modification that chlorophyll

undergoes spectroscopically when heated in water appears to

be chemically of no great consequence; so that, as is well

known, for many reasons it might even be advisable, in

order to render the solution of chlorophyll more persistent,

to boil the green tissues with water before the extraction.

The fact remains established:—The remarkable reaction

that hydrochloric acid produces in unheated chlorophyll-bodies

does not occur in those which have been heated ; and the cause

of its non-occurrence cannot be sought in any alteration of

the colouring-matter.

As the interruption of the hydrochloric-acid reaction for

hypochlorin by previous heating of the tissues is fitted to give

us a closer insight into the properties of that body, it may

be here specially elucidated by a few examples.

If filaments of Cladophora in the fresh state are treated

directly with hydrochloric acid, the larger hypochlorin-masses

(already repeatedly described) make their appearance in every

cell without exception. In strongly vegetating filaments with

abundant cell-contents, the latter are, as it were, overcrowded

with the masses formed by the hypochlorin-mixture. But if

the filaments of Cladophora are previously heated only from

five minutes to a quarter of an hour in water of 50° C.

(=122° F.), under which treatment the cell-contents remain

essentially unaltered in colour and form, and even appear

more transparent than before, and starch-grains and amylum-

foci do not swell up, nothing of the hypochlorin-mixture is to

be detected in them after the same treatment with hydrochloric

acid. All those numerous larger drops, scales, &c. which the

hydrochloric acid brings forth in the fresh are wanting in the

heated filaments.

A similar behaviour is presented by filaments of Cdogo-

nium, Mesocarpus, and Spirogyra, and, in general, in Alge

with so-called amorphous chlorophyll. In these a still

shorter exposure to heat and a lower temperature will often

suffice.

Even in the well-limited chlorophyll-bodies of the Nitella .

and Chare, and many higher plants with delicate leaves, e. ¢.

324 Prof. Pringsheim on Hypochlorin and the

in Elodia, Callitriche, &c., the heating of the whole plant in

water of 50° C. for from a quarter to half an hour is sufficient

for the complete suppression of the hypochlorin reaction.

Other plants require that the action should be of longer dura-

tion or the temperature higher. A brief boiling of the tissue

in water or treatment of the plant with the vapour of boiling

water leads, however, to the same result in all of them.

After such treatment as has been stated, the hypochlorin

reaction with hydrochloric acid no longer makes its appear-

ance in the tissues, or at any rate not to the same extent as in

the fresh tissues.

There is especially a regular absence of all those larger

crystalline scales which the hypochlorin-mixture produces in

the fresh plant under the influence of hydrochloric acid. In

the tissues heated to a considerable temperature with water,

or boiled, or subjected to distillation with water (even when

they are subsequently treated with hydrochloric acid) there

are now at the periphery of the chlorophyll-bodies only those

few and isolated small oil-drops which, as I have already

described, separate from the fundamental substance by the

action of heat alone, and which, without undergoing any

further alteration by hydrochloric acid, obstinately retain the

fluid state even under a continued application of heat.

It consequently appears the simplest course to refer the

interruption of the hypochlorin reaction by heat, and the non-

appearance of the crystallizable segregations when the green

tissues are merely heated, to the fact that the peculiar matter

in the hypochlorin-mixture which causes its crystalline soli-

dification is destroyed in the chlorophyll-bodies or dissolved

by warm water, or becomes volatilized with the hot aqueous

vapours.

The latter is my opinion. This microscopic behaviour of

the chlorophyll-bodies when heated and the above concep-

tion are in agreement with certain attempts which, under the

supposition that hypochlorin is a volatile substance, I have

made with the view of preparing it on the large scale for

chemical analysis, by the distillation of green tissues with

superheated steam.

In this way, in fact, we may obtain from the green tissues

of very different plants (even of such as possess in the tissues

in question no known specific essential oil) a small quantity

of a homogeneous essential oil, which separates from its solu-

tion in ether in colourless microscropic crystals, assuming the

form of small, cwrved, isolated, dendritically-branched needles,

_ which are remarkably similar to the hypochlorin-needles

such as separate under microchemical treatment from the hy-

Conditions of tts Production in the Plant. 325

pochlorin-mixture in the cells. The agreement is especially

striking in those cases in which the hypochlorin-needles occur

in the interior of the cells csolated and perfectly colourless, or

form small dendritic aggregates.

I must, however, report hereafter upon these experiments in

distillation on the large scale and the products obtained in

them ; I chiefly refer to them here only for the purpose of

indicating the probable connexion of their results with the

changes which the chlorophyll-bodies undergo anatomically

when they have been heated in water or exposed to hot aque-

ous vapour.

In favour of the assumption that hypochlorin is a volatile

substance, and that a second non-volatile oil is present with

it in the hypochlorin-mixture that may be prepared by hydro-

chloric acid, we have further the behaviour under heat of the

formed hypochlorin-masses. Thus when green vegetable

tissues, in which the hypochlorin-mixture has been separated

by hydrochloric acid, and in which it has already acquired

the forms of crystalline masses, scales, or nests, are subse-

quently boiled with water, or exposed to aqueous vapour, these

segregations gradually lose their crystalline character and, if

the action be continued long enough, become converted into

clearly spherical oil-drops, which are then unalterable and per-

sistent in heat, and, instead of the previous rust-coloured tint

of the hypochlorin-masses, acquire more or less of a chloro-

phyll-green colour, becoming changed first into olive-green

and then to bluish- or grass-green drops. But if long needles

and filaments have already separated from the hypochlorin-

mixture, the volatilization appears to be more difficult, al-

though even these forms are attacked by the hot aqueous

vapours if the distillation be continued for a considerable

time.

From the anatomical facts here stated, therefore, the com-

position of the chlorophyll-bodies is more complex than it

appeared to be from previous representations. The existence

of oil in them is no exceptional case (here a substitute for

deficient starch) confined to a few plants, or, as some people

would have it, a pathological condition ; but it is generally

diffused and in essential connexion with the function of the

chlorophyll-bodies. At the same time, the hypochlorin is

contained in this oil—that colourless volatile substance, crys-

tallizable on separation from the chlorophyll-bodies, which is

present as a constant associate of chlorophyll in all chloro-

phyll-bodies which have been produced in the light.

Further, the phenomena which accompany the separation of

the oil from the fundamental substance also furnish us with

326 Prof. Pringsheim on Hypochlorin and the

information as to the éntimate structure of the chlorophyll-

grain, hitherto not noticed by anatomists, and as to the local

distribution of the oil among the solid constituents of its

fundamental substance.

With the exception of some still but imperfectly investi-

gated cases (such, for example, as the generally known one

of Bryopis), and leaving out of consideration the sporadic or

temporary occurrence of isolated and limited starch-inclusions,

the chlorophyll-bodies of the uninjured cell usually produce

the impression of homogeneous bodies, apparently consisting

of homogeneous green substance. But when the hypochlorin

and the oil are extracted from them by evaporation and

hydrochloric acid, they are found to be hollow bodies, the

cavities of which are filled with oil.

The framework of the solid substance exhibited by the

chlorophyll-bodies when deprived of oil may, indeed, show

subordinate modifications in its forms, according to the species

of plant and the age of the tissue, especially when its shape

has been influenced at high temperatures by the swelling of

starch-enclosures ; but, at the same time, the general struc-

ture of the chlorophyll-grain is always unmistakably mani-

fested, as that of a porous body, in the pores of which the oil

has accumulated. Its solid residues, if the grain has.not been

broken up into separate shell-like fragments by complete

disruption, always represent more or less distinct and often

exceedingly elegant hollow bodies with perforated envelopes,

which latter may assume all possible forms of a retiform

trabecular framework. These forms show themselves most

distinctly, perfectly regular, characteristic, and always homo-

geneous when the extreme action of heat is avoided, and the

process of removal of the oil is carefully conducted.

The right mode of proceeding must here be specially ascer-

tained for each case, as it is influenced by the actual condition

of development of the chlorophyll-body, and especially by the

grade of development of its starch-enclosures. It is, however,

always easily attainable, if the temperature and the duration

of its action are suited to the given conditions. The tissues

must be, according to their constitution, exposed for from a

quarter to half an hour to the vapour of boiling water, or

heated for about half an hour in water of 50°-80° C. (=122°

—176° F.), and then left for at least one or two days lying in

dilute hydrochloric acid. A good strength of the acid solu-

tion is one volume of hydrochloric acid to four volumes of,

water. The tissues may, however, remain for weeks or even

months in the dilute hydrochloric acid without any alteration ;

and the structure of the chlorophyll-bodies thus gains, or at

Conditions of tts Production in the Plant. 327

any rate does not lose, in sharpness. If the chlorophyll-

bodies contain but little starch or none at all, the tissues may

without injury or even with advantage be boiled for a short

time (about half an hour) in water before their treatment

with hydrochloric acid. In many cases the reverse process

(treatment first with hydrochloric acid and then the action of

aqueous vapour) is more efficacious.

While by this mode of treatment the oil issues from the

chlorophyll-grains, the latter appear in all plants as if dif-

ferentiated into a denser and a softer mass, and acquire a

sponge-like aspect. The places of the soft substance which

form the meshes of a net of which the denser substance con-

sists, soon appear as true cavities from which the oil has

escaped. In this way the whole grain finally appears to be

perforated like a steve, producing nearly the characteristic

impression of a regular sieve-plate; or in those cases in

which the sieve-like perforation does not appear very sharply,

it shows a spongy-porous texture which reminds one of the

differentiations of substance which occur in many states of

cell-nuclei.

The constancy and uniformity with which this spongy-

porous structure is displayed by careful treatment in all

chlorophyll-bodies proves it to be their normal structure.

The solid constituents form the framework ; the oil and the

chlorophyll-colouring-matter dissolved therein saturate it and

fill up its pores.

It is impossible that this concordant structure and this defi-

nite form of the solid constituents should always occur uni-

formly in all chlorophyll-bodies, if this differentiation and

distribution of the solid and fluid constituents were not nor-

mally expressed in the chlorophyll-grain. It is only complete

saturation with oil that causes the latter to appear homogene-

ous in the normal state; and the solution of the chlorophyll-

colouring-matter in the oil is at the same time the cause of the

absorption-spectrum of the chlorophyll-bodies and of green

leaves appearing displaced towards the red end, in opposition to

the absorption-spectum of alcoholic and ethereal solutions of

chlorophyll. For the oil and the hypochlorin, as is shown

by every observation under the microscope, are powerful sol-

vents of the chlorophyll-colouring-matter, and jat the same

time (like other solvents also) determine the tone of colour

and the absorption-spectrum of the solution of chlorophyll;

and upon this also depend the different colour-phenomena

which may be observed under the microscope during the sepa-

ration of the constituents of the chlorophyll-grain, in the

escaping drops and the residuary solid framework.

328 Prof. Pringsheim on Hypochlorin and the

During these separations, moreover, it is always easily per-

ceived that the chlorophyll- -colouring-matter is a simple and

not a composite colouring-matter ; but even here such pheno-

mena may occur as in Fremy’s so-called splitting of the

chlorophy!1-colouring-matter into its component parts. I have

already exposed in detail what is erroneous in this notion in

my first memoir* on chlorophyll. Here it will be sufticient,

in order to exclude beforehand the same misconceptions of the

colour-phenomena in the hypochlorin reaction, to call atten-

tion briefly to the fact that the chlorophyll-bodies in the

tissues, like solutions of chlorophyll, when treated with hydro-

chloric acid, undergo a change of their tone of colour before

any separation of the solid and fluid constituents, and acquire

a golden-yellow tint. During the subsequent displacement

of the hypochlorin and oil the greater part of the colouring-

matter is carried away by these solvents, which thus, by its

strong concentration in the separating drops, acquire the deep

reddish-brown colour which renders the reaction so easily

recognizable, whilst the solid frameworks remain more or less

tinged with the grass-green or more bluish shades of the

chlorophyll, and finally may appear but faintly tinted or even

quite colourless.

II. Lormation of Hypochlorin in the Seedling.

The demonstration here given of the general diffusion of

hypochlorin and oil in the chlorophyll-bodies, necessarily

raises the presumption of a close relation between these

bodies, which are so rich in carbon, and the most important

physiological function, the assimilatory activity of the green

tissues.

Starch no longer appears to be the most widely diffused,

predominant, or even sole formed product, rich in carbon, of

the chlorophyll- apparatus ; | and this circumstance increases

the doubts which & prior? exist against the view that the

starch-enclosures separated in the solid form constitute the

primary product of assimilation. Unquestionably, & priord,

the properties of a fluid or volatile oleaginous substance

are much more in accordance with this : and even the

extant observations upon the relative magnitudes of the ex-

change of gases during assimilation render it extremely pro-

bable that its primary product is not a hydrate of carbon, but

a body poorer in oxygen. Moreover, a periodical escape of

oleaginous drops from the chlorophyll-bodies into the sur-

* Monatsh. Berl. Akad. der Wiss., October 1874.

Conditions of its Production in the Plant. 329

rounding protoplasm may in many cases be directly ob-

served.

In this connexion the hypochlorin is especially worthy of

notice, not only because it is never wanting in the fundamental

substance of the chlorophyll-bodies, so far as these (as I shall

show immediately) have been produced in the light, but also

because it is apparently the only known substance which the

seedling of the Angiospermia is unable to form from its

reserve-materials without light. I have made a series of ex-

tended investigations on phanerogamous plants germinating in

the dark in order to test whether a direct influence of light

upon the formation of hypochlorin manifests itself.

I reared the seedlings from seeds in the dark until their

reserve-materials were completely exhausted, and thus ob-

tained the noteworthy result that the yellow etiolated seed-

lings at no stage of their development furnish indications of

hypochlorin by the hydrochloric-acid reaction. This applies

to all Angiospermia without exception; and although when

we have to do with traces of a body in extensive tissues the

demonstration of a negative result is a troublesome and tedious

affair, and | have therefore hitherto been able to investigate

only a moderate number of etiolated seedlings (insterkeim-

linge) of various species, I can nevertheless, from the con-

cordant results that I have obtained, assert with perfect cer-

tainty that not the least trace of hypochlorin occurs in the

seedlings so long as they are not exposed to the light. This

body originates in them only under the influence of light,

after a longer or shorter action of the light upon the tissues

which become green, and indeed at any age at which the

etiolated young plant is exposed to the light, provided it is

still capable of development. The rapidity of the virides-

cence of etiolated seedlings in the light depends, as is well

known, upon the temperature and the intensity of light; and

therefore, if one does not wish to employ artificial illumina-

tion and warmth, it is not a matter of indifference in what

months the experiments are made. ‘This applies also to the

formation of hypochlorin in them.

I made my experiments in the summer months of July and

August, with an average temperature of about 20°-23° C.

(68°-75°°4 F’.) in the place where they were carried on. At

this high temperature of the air the etiolated seedlings become

distinctly green in two or three hours when exposed to bright

daylight, and in from 6 to 8 or, at the utmost, 10 hours they

become quite a strong or even deep green.

On the investigation of the green tissues with hydrochloric

330 Prof. Pringsheim on Hypochlorin and the

acid it then seemed that the formation of chlorophyll ap-

parently long precedes that of the hypochlorm. To give an

idea of the course of the phenomenon, I here append a few

comparative data for etiolated seedlings of peas, hemp, cucum-

bers, and flax.

Ktiolated seedlings 8-13 days old of these species of a deep

yellow colour (the cotyledons of the cucumbers, as is often the

case with these plants in spite of their having lived in the

dark, having already a suspicion of green) show no trace of

hypochlorin in their tissues when tested with hydrochloric

acid.

Etiolated seedlings 8 days old, of the same plants and the

same sowing, are rendered distinctly or even dark green by six

hours exposure to light; but their tissues show no trace of

hypochlorin.

Ktiolated seedlings 8 days old, of the same sowing, exposed

for 18-16 hours uninterruptedly to clear diffused daylight,

behave similarly, although already dark green. No hypo-

chlorin is yet to be found in their tissues.

Etiolated seedlings 8 days old, of the same sowing, placed

in the light for 19-20 hours, show the first traces of hypo-

chlorin, although on the whole sparingly.

Etiolated seedlings 8 days old, of the same sowing, exposed

for 30-31 hours to full daylight, are full of hypochlorin.

The plumules of the peas and hemp, the green tissue of the

cotyledons of the cucumbers and flax, even the young scarcely

coloured cells of their viridescent tissue, are now rich in hypo-

chlorin.

' From these investigations, therefore, it undoubtedly appears

that in the Angiosperms the hypochlorin originates under the

influence of light, and at the same time that it only becomes

perceptible in them at a later period than the chlorophyll-

colouring-matter,

There is undeniably a relation between the two substances.

Does one of them proceed from the other? I cannot here go

into this question, but will only point out that, from these

experiments, as well as from the previous demonstration of

its volatilization without destruction of the colouring-matter,

the independent existence of the hypochlorin side by side

with the chlorophyll-colouring-matter in the plant may be

deduced with certainty. The green tissues, although they

already contain the colouring-matter, nevertheless, when

treated with hydrochloric acid, show no hypochlorin when they

have not been exposed to the light for a considerable time.

The hypochlorin therefore cannot originate only in the pre-

paration from the colouring-matter, but must exist in the

Conditions of its Production in the Plant. gon

plant together with the latter. This becomes still more

distinct, and the connexion of assimilation with the formation

of hypochlorin is rendered still clearer, when the above-de-

scribed experiments on seedlings are slightly varied.

The viridescence of plants takes place, according to present

notions, under a less intensity of light than assimilation. In

half-obscurity, ¢.e. in strongly darkened places, therefore,

seedlings become perfectly green, without, however, being

able to keep themselves alive. ‘They perish, not much later

than when they vegetate in complete darkness. Although I

regard the assumption that assimilation is entirely suppressed

under small intensities of light as an error, the process is

undoubtedly prejudiced; and therefore the accumulation of

products rich in carbon, which the seedling requires after

the consumption of its reserve-materials, is impossible under

light of small intensity.

I have accordingly repeated the experiments on the pro-

duction of hypochlorin with seedlings which I reared, not in

the dark, but from the time of their germination in half-

obscurity. In these, even in such as had lived from eight to

fourteen days in half-obscurity, I likewise foufid no trace of

hypochlorin, although the cotyledons, plumules, and primor-

dial leaves of these little plants were well developed, and,

especially, although these organs were as deeply and perfectly

greened in the half-obscurity as is the case in seedlings

which have been able to develop themselves quite freely and in

full light for several days.

As a matter of course the result depends upon the light

under which the plants grow ; for even under moderate day-

light in the place of experiment hypochlorin is present in the

viridescent seedlings, and its quantity visibly increases with

the increase of the light.

It is nevertheless not difficult to rear beautifully green

seedlings without any trace of hypochlorin. This may be

done, for example, by growing the plants in the experimental

room at a great distance from the window and under bell-

glasses covered with grey paper.

The just-demonstrated dependence of the formation of hypo-

chlorin upon the influence of light would not per se prove a

direct close relation to assimilation, but only indicate (as in

the case of starch, fat, cellulose, and sugar) that it belongs to

the series of those materials the storing up of which, as nearer

or more remote products of assimilation, must necessarily be

dependent upon the accumulation of carbon in the plant

caused by light. This would certainly be the case if, in the

instance of hypochlorin, as with the above-mentioned sub-

332 On Hypochlorin and tts Production in the Plant.

stances, we had to do only with an increase of the existing

quantity in the light. But this is not the case; not merely

have we to do here with an increase of the existing quantity,

but hypochlorin, out of the whole series of materials which

can come under consideration here, and especially of those

which demonstrably occur together with it in the chlorophyll-

apparatus, is the only one which cannot without light form

itself in the seedling from the reserve-materials. Starch,

oil, cellulose, and sugar, as is well known, reciprocally pro-

ceed from one another in the exchange of materials in the

etiolated seedling, even without light. The green modifica-

tion of the chlorophyll-colouring-matter alone has, in most

Angiosperms, this property, in common with hypochlorin, of

being unable to originate without light from the reserve-

materials of the seedling; and this agreement of the two

substances in such a decisive physiological point is certainly

a noteworthy indication of common relations to the processes

of assimilation, and of a direct interdependency.

The striking analogy shown by chlorophyll and hypo-

chlorin in their relation to light in the Angiosperms extends

very remarkably to the exceptional conditions of chlorophyll-

formation in the Gymnosperms. As the Gymnosperms are

the only Phanerogams whose seedlings can, in some unex-

plained fashion, form chlorophyll-colouring-matter in the

dark, so also, singularly, the Gymnosperms are also the only

ones in whose seedlings hypochlorin makes its appearance

even in darkness.

I have paid particular attention to this peculiarity of the

seedlings of Gymnosperms, and tested it in a geat number

of comparative investigations on seedlings of Pinus picea,

montana, maritima, and Larix grown in the dark.

Without going into a detailed description of the results and

of the relation of the quantity of hypochlorin present to the

age of the seedlings examined, I may here sum up the general

result of this series of investigations as follows :—In the

Conifer just mentioned hypochlorin occurs even in seedlings

grown in the dark; and it may be indubitably ascertained

that the viridescence of these seedlings in the dark precedes

the presence of hypochlorin in them.

It is true that frequently, especially in Pinus picea and

montana, there are scarcely any traces of hypochlorin in the

viridescent cotyledons even in seedlings several weeks old

(almost as late as the third week of germination); but, on the

other hand, other examples of the same species already show

noteworthy quantities of it; and if the little plants grow older

in the dark, say about four or five weeks, it may be easily

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 333

detected in every cell of the green tissue, especially in Pinus

maritima.

From the facts here communicated I believe that I have, in

the first place, established anatomically and microchemically

the individuality of the hypochlorin in the chlorophyll-bodies,

and proved the necessity of light for its formation in the

Angiosperms. With regard to the physiological relations

of chlorophyll to hypochlorin I have already given some

intimations, and expressed the opinion that chlorophyll, by

means of its absorption of light, protects the hypochlorin from

combustion in intense light. Upon the presumable genetic

relations of chlorophyll to hypochlorin my investigations are

- not yet completed.

XXXII.—On a Collection of Lepidoptera from Madagascar,

with Descriptions of new Genera and Species. By ARTHUR

G2 burer, F..5.5 E.Z.8.,, ce:

Tue following species have been selected from a large

collection made at Fianarantsoa by the Rev. W. Deans

Cowan.

RHOPALOCERA.

Nymphalide.

SAaryRInz.

1. Gnophodes betsimena ¢ .

Cyllo betsimena, Boisduyal, Faune Mad. p. 58. n. 1 (1883).

A fine specimen. | :

In my Catalogue of Fabrician Lepidoptera I erroneously

sunk this species as a synonym of G. pythia; now that we

possess both I find the Madagascar species much nearer to the

G. parmeno of Trimen from Natal, which is of the same size

and form, but instead of a broad oblique white belt on the

primaries has a rather narrow angulated ochreous one. As

the G. parmeno of Trimen is not identical with the West-

African form, I propose to call it G. diversa.

2. Pseudonympha subsimilis.

Pseudonympha subsimilis, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. iv.

p. 228. n. 3 (1879).

The type was also taken at Fianarantsoa.

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v 23

334 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

3. Pseudonympha Cowant, sp. n.

Allied to the preceding, but considerably larger; above

with a white subapical spot replacing the ordinary subapical

ocellus, and the secondaries with two ocelli as in P. ankova;

the large ocellus of primaries and the dark submarginal lines

as in the allied species. Under surface of primaries similar

to P. ankova, but with the outer border creamy white, with

dark brown submarginal and marginal lines, a cream-

coloured subapical patch followed by two or three snow-white

dots: secondaries cream-coloured, the central belt broadly

zigzag ; both it, the basal, and abdominal areas mottled with

brown; three large ocelli, one at costa near apex, the others

on the median interspaces; two slightly undulated submar- *

ginal lines and the fringe brown. Expanse of wings 1 inch

8-9 lines.

4, Pseudonympha ankova.

Mycalesis ankova, Ward, Ent. Month. Mag. vii. p. 31 (1870); Afr.

Lep. p. 15, pl. 12. figs. 3, 4 (1874).

5. Pseudonympha ibitina.

Mycalesis ibitina, Ward, Ent. Month. Mag. x. p. 60 (1873).

A slight variety with unusually distinct markings on the

under surface.

6. Pseudonympha turbata, sp. n.

Wings above fuliginous brown: primaries with two large

white-pupilled and red-zoned black ocelli upon the disk, the

lower one twice the size of the upper; fringe grey: secon-

daries with three ocelli, two of medium size on the median

interspaces, and the third very small upon the radial inter-

spaces; a feebly indicated submarginal dusky line; fringe

grey. Wings below olivaceous brown, indistinctly mottled

with darker lines: primaries with four abbreviated ferrugi- .

nous streaks across the discoidal cell, the second of these

streaks extending slightly below the cell; a ferruginous an-

gulated stripe beyond the cell, its lower portion broadly arched,

so as to bound the inner edge of the large inferior ocellus ; the

latter also has a ferruginous external border; the subapical

ocellus extremely small, with scarcely a trace of the red zone

of the upper surface ; a subapical dusky patch upon the outer

margin: secondaries with the disk slightly lilacine; the mar-

gins of the ordinary belt irregularly angulated somewhat as

in P. ankova, the external border dark brown at apex; a

discal series of six minute spots, the first punctiform and

black, the three following punctiform but white, the last two

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 335

slightly larger, black with white pupils. Expanse of wings

1 inch 7 lines.

CALLYPHTHIMA, gen. nov.

Allied to Pseudonympha and Ypthima, but the male with

more prolonged subangulated primaries, the female with

broader and consequently less evidently subangulated prima-

ries than in the male: the secondaries distinctly longer than

in the above-mentioned genera, with a distinct abdominal

angle forming a feebly pronounced anal lobe; palpi larger

and much more hairy. ‘Type C. Wardii.

7. Callyphthima Wardit.

Q. Pseudonympha Wardii, Butler, Cist, Ent. ii. p. 890 (1879).

3. Smaller than the female, and altogether darker on both

surfaces. Hxpanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.

This species appears to be not uncommon.

8. Ypthima rakoto.

Erebia rakoto, Ward, Ent. Month. Mag. vii. p. 30 (1870).

This species is extremely close to Y. Vinsoni?, but smaller

and with the disk of primaries below less distinctly greyish

white ; the ocelli on the under surface of secondaries are placed

one on the first median interspace and the other on the supe-

rior subcostal interspace in both of our examples.

9. Ypthima Batesi.

Ypthima Batesii, Felder, Reise der Noy. Lep. iii. tab. 68. figs. 10, 11

(1867).

A female example, thus placing the distinctness of Y.

niveata beyond a doubt.

10. Mycalesis perdita.

Mycalesis perdita, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. ii. p. 283,

n. 2 (1878).

11. Mycalesis bicristata ?

Mycalesis bicristata, Mabille, Bull. Soc. Zool. France, vol. iii, p. 81

(1878).

I have to thank Mr. Moore for lending me a copy of the

memoir in which this species is described.

NymMpyaLinz.

12. Charaxes cinadon.

Charaxes cinadon, Hewitson, Ent. Month. Mag. vi. p. 177 (1870).

A pair of this fine species, somewhat damaged.

23*

336 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

This species was originally described from a Natal male

example in Mr. Ward’s collection ; it was subsequently sunk

asa synonym of my C. Druceanus from the West Coast; it is

intermediate in character between the latter species and C.

phraortes, being the size of the latter.

13. Charaxes Cowant.

3. Charaxes Cowani, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. ii.

p. 285. n. 6 (1878).

?. Similar in pattern to the male, but with the ground-

colour of the basal area above ochraceous. Expanse of wings

3 inches 10 lines.

The male seems to be not uncommon.

14. Panopea apaturoides.

Panopea apaturoides, Felder, Reise der Noy. Lep. iii. p. 416. n. 643

(1867).

Pseudacrea drusilla, Saalmiiller, Bericht iiber die Senckenbergische

naturforschende Gesellschaft, 1878, p. 81. n. 25.

This species varies somewhat in size and in the distinctness

of the submarginal white dots on the upper surface of the

wings.

15. Panopea diffusa, sp. n.

Allied to P. dubia and P. Bewsheri, nearest to the former,

but differing as follows :—Primaries with the oblique sub-

apical series of spots forming a single trifid band, which

externally is diffused and lilacine greyish, almost as in P.

anthedon; the large white patch across the median inter-

spaces continued downwards in the form of a diffused greyish

nebula to the submedian vein ; the abdominal area of secon-

daries dark brown (as in P. Bewshert and P. Drucet) instead

of broadly testaceous; five prominent rounded submarginal

white spots on these wings. LExpanse of wings 3 inches.

16. Hypanartia hippomenes.

Hypanartia hippomenes, Hiibner, Samml. exot. Schmett. (1816-24).

This species occurs also in Natal, as does the H. hippomenes

of Boisduval. The latter is a perfectly distinct species, much

larger, longer in wing and tail, with duller coloration on the

cys surface and very different pattern for this species I

propose the name of H. commixta.

Lycenide.

Lyvc#yin 2.

17. Castalius auratus, sp. n.

Golden cupreous above, with the veins, internervular folds,

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 337

ywo blue-centred anal spots in the secondaries, and the body

above black; wings below snow-white, with brown-edged

markings similar in form and position to those in C. Pogget

(Dewitz in Nova Acta Acad. Leop.-Carol. Nat. Scr. p. 33,

pl. xxvi. fig. 7), but not filled in with black as in that species.

Expanse of wings | inch 1 line.

This species may be readily distinguished from the West-

African C. Pogget by the metallic golden coloration of the

upper surface, and the slenderness and length of the interner-

vular black streaks, in which last character it agrees with C.

jubag, Fabr. (Plebeius Falkensteinii, Dewitz), figured in my

Fabrician Catalogue, pl. u. fig. 9. *

18. Castalius leucon.

Lycena leucon, Mabille in litt.

This species having only at present appeared in an adver-

tisement-sheet (Pet. Nouv. i. p. 289, 1879), I cannot regard

it as a published species; it may, however, be the female of

my Castalius azureus, trom which it differs on the under

surface in the absence of the discal series of black spots on

the primaries.

Papilionide.

Prrrinz.

19. Nychitona sylwvicola.

Leucophasia sylvicola, Boisduval, Faun. Madag. p. 20 (1833).

The black apical patch is strongly marked in this example

precisely as in our NV. medusa.

The pure white species is apparently referable to N.

nupta.

20. Terias aliena, sp. n.

Above bright sulphur-yellow, paler upon external border ;

primaries with a pale brown regular apical border: secondaries

subangulated. Wings below uniform sulphur-yellow : prima-

ries with a squamose dark brown dot in the cell; two dots

on the discocellulars, a large quadrate apical patch, and the

greater part of the outer margin pale orange: secondaries

with two widely separated dots near the base, two lunate

markings below the first and second median branches, and

two small annular markings on the discocellulars brown; a

subcostal dash, a broad oblique subapical streak, and a lunate

marking on the second median interspace orange; veins

terminating in extremely minute black points ; fringe saffron-

yellow. Expanse of wings 1 inch 5 lines.

338 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

Unfortunately only one example of this singular Terias

has been received.

21. Catopsilia decipiens, sp. n.

3. Above white, tinted with sulphur-yellow, which. be-

comes more intense towards the middle of the wing ; prima-

ries with the costal border and basal third bright gamboge-

yellow, outer edge of the basal area trisinuate and oblique:

secondaries with the basal half, excepting on abdominal

border, bright gamboge-yellow ; the usual pinky-white sub-

costal elongated mgaly patch: head pale greyish flesh-colour ;

collar of the same colour in front, but greenish behind ; thorax

and base of abdomen greenish sulphur, remainder of abdomen

white ; antenne above grey, with orange-tipped blackish club,

below pale buff. Primaries below with the lower half of the

cell and interno-median area bright sulphur-yellow, diffused

externally ; the usual thick sulphur-yellow scent-fan on

internal border; disk white; costal, apical, and external areas

cream-coloured: secondaries and pectus cream-coloured, venter

white. Expanse of wings 2 inches 8-11 lines.

9. Wings above white : primaries with the basal two fifths

bright sulphur-yellow ; a large black spot at the end of the

cell; costal border testaceous at base, otherwise dark brown ;

apical and external borders rather narrowly dark brown, the

latter broken up into spots towards the external angle; an

angulated series of four widely separated but nearly equi-

distant dark brown spots across the disk: secondaries with

the lower part of the cell and interno-median area tinted with

sulphur-yellow ; an indistinct irregular discal series of spots,

and a still less distinct marginal series brown: head and collar

pale purplish brown; tegule the same colour at the base, but

tipped and fringed with whitish ; thorax blackish, clothed with

ereenish-white hairs; abdomen white. Primaries below with

an orange streak at the base of the cell, and a greyish annulus

on the discocellulars, otherwise as in the male; secondaries

and body as in the male. Expanse of wings 2 inches

8 lines.

Of this interesting species Mr. Cowan sent two males and

one female; it takes the place of C. crocale in Madagascar,

just as C. thauruma does that of C. catilla.

22. Belenots coniata.

Belenois coniata, Butler, Cist. Ent. ii. p. 391 (1879).

The present example measures only 2 inches 1 line in ex-

panse of wing. ‘The species seems not to be uncommon.

Mr, A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 339

Hesperiidae.

23. Hesperia ratek.

Thymele ratek, Boisduval, Faun. Madag. p. 61, pl. ix. fig. 1 1833).

The figure of this species is barely recognizable ; but, fortu-

nately, the description enables one to determine it satis-

factorily.

24. Hesperia fervida, sp. n.

Primaries above fuligmous brown : secondaries deep orange,

with the costal border, the external border to just beyond the

first median branch, and a triangular spot at the extremity of

the submedian vein fuliginous brown; abdominal border

yellowish; fringe black at anal angle and at extremity of

submedian and first median branch: head above green, spotted

~ with white; palpi black and white; thorax testaceous, sprinkled

with dark green hairs; abdomen brown, banded with ochra-

ceous. Primaries below brown: secondaries silvery white,

with the abdominal area broadly brown ; anal angle ochreous,

external border to submedian vein rather broadly brown: head

below white: body brown, clothed with ochreous hairs; legs

ferruginous ; anterior coxe orange, anterior tibize with a white

stripe above. Expanse of wings 2 inches.

One example.

Nearest to H. pisistratus from West Africa.

25. Cyclopides pardalina.

Cyclopides pardalina, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5. vol. iv.

p. 233, n. 15 (1879).

HETEROCERA.

Sphingide.

26. Hemaris apus.

Macroglossa apus, Boisduval, Faun. Madag. p. 79, pl. x. fig. 4 (1883).

Dr. Boisduval’s figure is by no means characteristic.

27. Nephele malgassica.

Zonilia malgassica, Felder, Reise der Nov. Lep. iv. tab. Ixxvi. fig. 2.

Felder’s representation of this species is altogether too

green.

Agaristide.

28. Husemia metagrius, sp. n. (no. 58).

Above deep chocolate-brown: primaries crossed just beyond

the middle by a pale yellow band, as in LH. agrius; base of

340 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

costal border black, with two yellow dots and a metallic

plumbaginous spot: secondaries with a broad, irregular, pale

yellow patch from the origin of the subcostal branches to the

submedian vein; basal area of a rather paler brown than the

external area; head and collar black, spotted with yellow ;

abdomen black, banded with dull orange. Primaries below

with the base bright ochreous, otherwise as above: secon-

daries with the basi-abdominal area occupied by a broad sub-

quadrate pale yellow patch, washed at base with ochreous ;

three submarginal white dots: body below dull ochraceous.

Expanse of wings 2 inches 2 lines.

In coloration this species is not unlike Rothia Westwoodit

(Husemia virguncula?, Mab.) ; but the form is quite different.

29. Husemia tranquilla, sp. n.

Allied to the preceding species, but darker, the belt of

primaries of double the width and less oblique: secondaries

with the base purplish black ; a broad patch of pale green

sprinkled along its inner,margin, with orange scales which

form a distinct spot upon it just within the extremity of the

discoidal cell: the body less distinctly banded. Primaries

below with the band even wider than above, the base bright

orange: secondaries bright orange, with the outer two thirds

of costal border, the apex, and external border deep brown.

Body ochreous, venter banded with black. Expanse of wings

2 inches 1 line.

This is of the same form as EZ. metagrius.

(Zygenoid) Arctiide,

Mypropoxa, gen. nov.

Body and legs very robust, wings broad. Primaries with

straight costal and convex inner margin, outer margin slightly

convex ; costal vein extending to second third of costa; sub-

costal six-branched, first branch emitted before the end of the

cell, united by a cross spur with the second, which is emitted

from the end of the cell, and from below which the remaining

four are thrown off; the sixth branch is in reality the upper

radial; upper discocellular strongly angulated, lower ex-

tremely short, so that the lower radial almost looks like a

fourth median branch. Secondaries subtriangular; neuration

normal—that is, the costal vein extending to apex, the sub-

costal two-branched (although the branches are emitted from

a short footstalk), discocellular angulated, median three-

branched, submedian and internal veins as usual. ‘Type

M. splendens.

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 341

30. Mydrodoxa splendens, sp. n.

Primaries above with the basal two thirds fiery cupreous,

gradually shading off into golden green at the margins and

crossed by a broad, velvety, greenish-black belt; external

third dark shining blue-green; base of inner margin shining

dark green: secondaries shining steel-blue, greenish in certain

lights, with the base and costal border blackish: frons, collar,

pro-, and mesothorax velvety black ; three basal segments of

abdomen and body below steel-blue, varying to dark green ;

vertex of head, metathorax, the four posterior segments of

abdomen, and anal tuft carmine-red. Wings below golden

green, changing to blue-green towards the internal borders ;

internal border of primaries purple. Expanse of wings

1 inch 9 lines.

This magnificent moth reminds one, in the size, form, and

coloration of its wings, of the New-World genus Eupyra; in

its shorter head and shorter and more slender palpi, and in its

neuration, it approaches more nearly to the typical Arctiide.

(Typical) Arctiidae.

31. Daphenura fasciata.

Daphenura fasciata, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. ii.

p. 457 (1878).

The specimen now received exhibits a structural character

not visible in the typical examples, but first pomted out to

me by Mr. Druce in specimens in his collection: the male

possesses an enormously developed pair of scent-fans in the

form of broag compressed curved brushes, apparently jointed

at the base, and capable of retraction behind the hairy

clothing of the posterior coxee. In my typical male these fans

are completely concealed; but in the specimen now obtained

they are fully exserted, are of a sandy yellow or testaceous

colour, and are 4 lines in length.

EPICAUSIS, gen. nov.

Body broad, long, robust, hairy, with enormous anal tuft ;

antenn thick, very feebly pectinated ; palpi moderately long,

distinctly visible in front of the head. Primaries very long,

subtriangular, with straight costal and slightly convex ex-

ternal and inner margins; costal vein extending to fourth

fifth of costa; subcostal five-branched, first branch emitted

from third fourth of anterior margin of cell, other veins

exactly as in Acronycta (see Trans. Ent. Soc. 1879, pl. xi.

fig.1). Secondaries short, about half the length of primaries,

342 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

with slightly convex costa and outer margin and straight

abdominal margin ; costal vein extending to apex; discoidal

cell extending to the middle of the wing; subcostal with two

branches emitted from a long footstalk beyond the cell;

discocellular long and angled; lower discocellular short and

slightly elbowed; median vein three-branched, the second

and third branches emitted from a very short footstalk ; sub-

median and internal veins as usual. Type Epicausis lani-

gera.

32. Epicausis lanigera, sp. n.

Wings bright orange, with black external borders: pri-

maries with four transverse black abbreviated dashes upon

the basal area; two broader black dashes upon the apical half

of costa; two black dashes on basal half of internal border,

and two more near the external angle; external border di-

stinctly dentated on its inner margin: secondaries with the

basal two fifths black, clothed at the base with ochreous

hair; outer border regularly and rather broadly black : head,

thorax, and anal tuft carmine; abdomen velvety black.

Wings below paler orange than above, with black external

border, that of primaries emitting a subapical curved band

(at lower radial vein), which runs inwards to the costa; a

black spot near the base of costa, and a black patch at base

of interno-median area: secondaries with the interno-basal

area black: body below black, with the subanal segment

broadly fringed with carmine ; anus black, anal tuft carmine

as above. Lxpanse of wings 2 inches 5 lines.

Three examples, two of which are in moderately good

condition, were sent home. ;

Lithosiide.

ISORROPUS, gen. nov.

Allied to Dyphlebia, but with broader wings. Primaries

with the costal vein terminating at second third of costa;

subcostal five-branched, the first two branches emitted before

the end of the cell and united by an oblique spur or veinlet to

the third branch, which is emitted from the end of the cell

and is trifurcate ; only one radial emitted from the end of the

cell, at the same point with the third subcostal branch; disco-

cellular angulated ; median vein three-branched, the last two

branches emitted from a long footstalk. Secondaries with the

costal vein reaching to apex; subcostal forking from the

costal at basal fourth, emitting its two branches from a long

footstalk beyond the end of the cell; cell reaching to the

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 3438

middle of the wing, discocellular strongly angulated ; median

vein emitting its second and third branches from a very long

footstalk. Body similar to Dyphlebia. Type J. tricolor.

33. Lsorropus tricolor, sp. n.

Wines bright orange, with broad black-brown outer borders,

widest upon the costal margin; primaries with a broad black-

brown central belt, both border and belt on these wings shot

with dark green: body carmine-red. Expanse of wings

1 inch 5 lines.

Two examples of this species were sent home; but one of

these is so much worn and broken as to be valueless; the

type is in fairly good condition.

34, Sommeria extensa, sp. un. (no. 15).

Primaries chalky white; five black dots at the base fol-

lowed by a short dark brown costal dash, two black dots in

the cell and two near the base of interno-median area; a

zigzag central olive-brown stripe from costa to inner margin,

an oblique series of fusiform olive-brown spots from the end

of the cell to the costa, and an indistinct irregularly angulated

discal series from apex to external angle: secondaries cream-

coloured: thorax white, black-spotted; abdomen ochreous,

with dorsal and lateral series of black spots; antenne black.

Primaries below paler than above ; costal borders testaceous ;

black dots obsolete, brown markings indistinct: secondaries

sordid white, with testaceous costal border and veins; body

below white, pectus black-spotted. EZxpanse of wings 1 inch

10 lines.

One example only ; it is most nearly allied to S. privata,

but is considerably larger, with much longer wings.

Hypsinz.

35. Aganais borbonica.

Aganais borbonica, Boisduval, Faun. Madag. p. 96, pl. xv. fig. 1

(1883).

I cannot believe that this is the male of the following, the

sexes of all the other species being extremely similar, and the

supposed female being of the same form and coloration as the

species of Damalis.

836. Damalis insularis.

Aganais insularis, Boisduval, Faun. Madag. p. 97, pl. xy. fig. 2 (1833).

Nearly allied to D. egens.

344 Miscellaneous.

Nyctemeridez.

37. Nyctemera biformis 3.

Nichthemera (sic) biformis, Mabille, Bull. Soc. Zool. France, vol. iii.

p. 88 (1878).

38. Hylemera fragilis.

Hylemera fragilis, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. iv.

p- 236. n. 24 (1879).

Previously received from Antananarivo.

[To be continued. |

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Resistance of Aphides to Severe Cold.

By M. J. Licwrensrer.

Tur author remarks that he has endeavoured to show that, just as

a plant can reproduce itself by seeds and by buds, the vine-Phyl-

loxera (P. vastatrix) is also able to reproduce both by fecundated

eggs and by subterranean budding colonies—the duration of which

latter may be as indefinite as that of the plant, given the necessary

nourishment and warmth. This last condition seems indispensable

for the agamic reproduction, but not for the existence of the insect.

During December last, when temperatures of —11° or —12° C.

(=+12°2 or 10°-4 F.) prevailed, the author found not only that the

underground Phyllowera did not suffer at all, but that he could

collect upon trees and plants in his garden numerous Aphides (he

mentions Aphis persice, euonymi, hedere, brassice, and capselle,

and Rhopalosiphon berberidis), all stupefied by the great cold and

often covered with snow or hoar-frost, but perfectly alive. The

Aphides were all in the budding phase; but close by them, upon

the same plants, there were eggs laid in the autumn by the fecun-

dated females, which had long before disappeared.

The Aphides were carried into a room at a temperature of 8°—10°

C. (=46°-4-50° F.), and the twigs to which they adhered planted

in damp sand. In two or three days they all began to breed,

bringing forth living young. Suspended by the cold, the faculty of

gemmation was by no means extinct.

As there are perennial and annual plants, so among the Aphides

there are species which die out every year, except the eggs, and

others with indefinite reproduction by gemmation. All the above

species are perennial; and it is curious that while warmth imme-

diately causes the false females, or budding pseudogynes, to recom-

mence their gemmation, the true egg does not hatch, and seems to

await the shooting of the plants upon which it is fixed.

M. Lichtenstein believes that the annual species are much more

numerous than those of unlimited duration. Thus the Phylloxere

of the oak (P. quercus, coccinea, and corticalis), the Aphides of the

Miscellaneous. 345

elms (Tetranewra and Schizoneura), and those of the poplar and

pistachio (Pemphigus and Aploneura), or, at least, some of them,

have a period during which the egg alone exists. From the Ist to

the 6th January, however, the author found great numbers of

Vacuna dryoptrica, male and female, in copulation under the leaves

of an oak (Quercus pubescens)—Comptes Rendus, Jan. 12, 1880,

p- 80.

Experimental Researches on the Phosphorescence of the Glowworm.

By M. Jovsser DE BrLiesme.

Electricity, the nervous fluid, insolation, and the vital forces

have been invoked by turns as causes of phosphorescence. Finally

we have rested upon the existence of a phosphorescent matter

emitted by luminous animals, which appeared more probable. I

have thought it necessary to examine afresh this phenomenon in

the glowworm, because the investigations made by Matteucci, the

principal experimenter who has paid attention to the matter, were

by no means irreproachably conducted. In fact, neither this author

nor others have, in their experiments, taken into account the will

of the animal, or endeavoured to eliminate that cause of uncertainty ;

so that when they placed a glowworm in carbonic acid, for example,

they could not exactly determine whether the phosphorescence

ceased because the medium did not allow of its being produced, or

because the animal voluntarily refused to shine. It was necessary,

in the first place, to become master of the phenomenon, and for that

purpose to prevent the animal from shining at its own pleasure,

and force it to become luminous at that of the experimenter. With

this view, I remove the cephalic ganglia, which abolishes all sponta-

neous phosphorescence ; then I replace the voluntary excitation by

the passage of a moderate electrical current in the trunk or in the

luminous organ. This excitation causes, with certainty, a brilliant

phosphorescence.

Possessed of this process, I proved, as Matteucci had done, that

the presence of oxygen is in fact absolutely necessary in order

that the luminous apparatus should perform its function. The

insect, prepared as just described, and immersed in carbonic acid or

inert gases, such as nitrogen and hydrogen, and electrically excited

in those gases, never becomes luminous.

We may therefore regard it as certain that the large cells with

granular protoplasm forming the parenchyma of the phosphorescent

apparatus produce a substance which becomes luminous by contact

with the air conveyed by the numerous trachez with which this

apparatus is furrowed.

In order to know what this matter is, it was necessary to be able

to isolate it and analyze it. This has already been attempted. The

resemblance of the luminosity to that of phosphorus has led several

chemists to seek for that substance in the luminous apparatus; but

their researches have been in vain, so that naturalists have found

themselves in presence of two contradictory assertions. The present

memoir shows that this contradiction is only apparent, and that it

346 Miscellaneous.

arises from a bad interpretation of a well-known fact. When we

crush a glowworm we most commonly see luminous traces persisting

on the ground; from this it has been concluded that the case of its

apparatus was the same as that of matches, and that these traces

were nothing but a phosphorescent material accumulated in the

apparatus for the ulterior needs of the insect. The experiment thus

made is very defective; let us repeat it more methodically. If we

confine ourselves to tearing up, with needles, a phosphorescent glow-

worm, the fragments remain luminous, at least for some hours, ' On

the other hand, if we rapidly crush one of these insects in a mortar,

so as to destroy the cells themselves, the phosphorescence immedi-

ately disappears; and the pulp, if collected, exposed to contact

with pure oxygen, and subjected to the influence of electrical exci-

tation, remains absolutely dark. Thus a partial crushing allows the

phosphorescence still to be produced; complete crushing abolishes

it. Upon the hypothesis of a store of phosphorescent matter, crush-

ing carried very far would evidently be favourable to the production

of light by spreading this matter over a large surface in contact with

air; but the reverse of this takes place; the phosphorescence does

not persist unless the apparatus is only reduced to fragments. This

is due to the fact that groups of cells remaining intact continue to

live and perform their functions. Tearing and the abnormal con-

tact of the air excite them; and their protoplasm, reacting under

these influences, produces the phosphorescent matter at the ex-

pense of the materials which it contains. If we kill these cells

by crushing them, life no longer intervenes to set these materials

at work and give them the chemical form under which phosphores-

cence can manifest itself.

We are therefore here in presence of a chemical phenomenon,

but of one which is not produced in the glowworm, except under

biological conditions. We can, moreover, prove this in another

manner. Besides crushing, certain toxical agents have the power of

destroying the cells. If we submit a glowworm to the action of

sulphuretted hydrogen it is killed immediately. If we then take it

and excite it electrically we obtain no light. The cells are intact

as to their form, but physiologically destroyed ; they no longer func-

tion. We may then tear the organ, and apply the action of oxygen

and of electricity without provoking phosphorescence. It is certain,

nevertheless, that this protoplasm contains all the materials chemi-

cally necessary for the production of the phosphorescent substance ;

but this substance is not ready made. It is only produced in

proportion to the waste, under the influence of the will and

by the intermediation of the nervous system, which excites the

cells and causes them to enter into action. Phosphorescence is

consequently a phenomenon of the same order as muscular move-

ment, or the evolution of electricity in the apparatus of the torpedo,

which are undoubtedly the result of chemical combinations taking

place in the protoplasmic matter.

It is very probable that this phosphorescent substance is a

gaseous product; for the structure of the gland, well investigated by

Owsianikow, does not give us the idea of an organ with a liquid

Miscellaneous. 347

secretion. Now the chemical products which are phosphorescent

at ordinary temperatures are not numerous ; and the one of which

one is led to think is phosphuretted hydrogen. It is for the

chemists to elucidate this poimt; but, in consequence of the pecu-

liarities just indicated, they must not attempt to ascertain its pre-

sence directly, but rather to see whether there are, in the cellular

protoplasm of the apparatus, the materials necessary for the produc-

tion of this gas.

What inclines me in favour of this hypothesis is the extreme

resemblance that we observe between the phosphorescence of sub-

stances in decomposition, which is due to an evolution of phos-

phuretted hydrogen, and that of luminous animals. They present

the same physical characters, the same affinity for oxygen, and

only differ in this particular, that the cadaveric phosphorescence is

continuous, like the decomposition of the substances which produce

it, whilst the phosphorescence of the animals is intermittent. The

latter is due to the fact that the cellular decomposition which sets

free the luminous product, takes place in animals of high organi-

zation only under excitation of the nervous system, and in the lower

animals (Noctilucw) only by means of external excitants.

My investigations upon the glowworm and the experiments that

I have made upon the Noctiluce lead me to regard phosphorescence

as a general property of protoplasm, consisting in an evolution of

phosphuretted hydrogen. This mode of looking at it easily explains

how many of the loweranimals, although destitute of a nervous sys-

tem, are phosphorescent. Further it presents the advantage of en-

abling us to connect the phenomena of phosphorescence observed in

living creatures with those which are observed in organic matters in

course of decomposition. It is another example of a biological

phenomenon very clearly reduced to an exclusively chemical cause.

—Comptes Rendus, February 16, 1880, p. 318.

On the French Jurassic Cidaride.

By M. G. Corrzav.

M. Cotteau, having completed the revision of the Jurassic Cida-

ridx in the ‘ Paléontologie Francaise,’ has communicated to the

Geological Society of France an interesting summary of his results.

Of French fossil urchins he refers to this family 121 species, of

which 87 belong to the old genus Cidaris, 25 to Rhabdocidaris, and

9 to Diplocidaris. The 121 species all belong to the Jurassic

epoch : none of them existed before it; and none occur in the Creta-

ceous deposits. Most of them are also limited to a single stage

of the Jurassic.

The Rheetic stage contains a single peculiar species. The Sine-

murian (Infra-Lias) has 7 peculiar species, mostly represented by

detached spines. The Liassic stage possesses 10 species, 9 of which

are confined to it, while the tenth extends up into the next stage,

the Toarcian (Upper Lias shale), which, however, contains only 3

species in all. The species just referred to (habdocidaris horrida)

also passes into the Bajocian (Inferior Oolite) stage, in which the

348 Miscellaneous.

number of Cidaride is very considerable, 24 French species being

recorded by M. Cotteau. Of these, 19 are peculiar to the stage ;

1, as already stated, is of older date; 4 pass into the next stage ;

and one of these (Rhabdocidaris copeoides) extends up through the

two subsequent stages.

In the Bathonian (Great Oolite) we have 20 species, 13 of which

are peculiar, 4 had previously appeared, and 5 extend up into

higher deposits; 3 of them, however, do not occur in the next

following stage, but only in the one above it. The Callovian con-

tains only 6 species, 4 of which are peculiar, and 2 extend up into

the succeeding stage, 1 of them belonging also to that below. The

Oxfordian, including therein the zone of Ammonites tenuilobatus,

has 24 species, 4 of which had already made their appearance in

the Bathonian, while 7 others extend up into the Corallian, and

one of them even into the Kimmeridgian stage.

The family attains its maximum in the Corallian stage, from

which M. Cotteau records 38 species, 29 of which are peculiar to

this series of deposits. Seven species, as already stated, come up

from the Oxfordian, while 3 recur in the next stage, the Kim-

meridgian, which, however, has altogether only 9 species. The

Portlandian has only a single peculiar species.

M. Cotteau sums up his results as follows :—‘ Of 121 species of

Cidaridse which were developed in France during the period of the

Jurassic formation, 104 are, as at present known, peculiar to the

stages in which they are found, and only 17 occur in more than one

stage.

«The three genera Cidaris, Rhabdocidaris, and Diplocidaris have

each a different origin and destiny.

“The genus Cidaris, including the greatest number of species, is

of all genera of Echinida the one that has persisted longest. It

makes its appearance in the deposits of the Carboniferous forma-

tion; from this period it multiplies its species in all the stages of

the Jurassic, Cretaceous, and Tertiary formations; and at the

present day it still possesses representatives in most of our seas.

Notwithstanding this long duration, from its first appearance to the

present epoch it has undergone in its general characters only un-

important modifications, which often render it difficult to distin-

guish the species.

“The genera Rhabdocidaris and Diplocidaris have been separated

from Cidaris. 'The former began to appear in the Liassic stage, and

attains its maximum of development during the Jurassic epoch ; it

likewise exists in the Cretaceous and Tertiary formations and at the

present epoch, but is much rarer. The second genus, Diplocidaris,

is peculiar to the Jurassic formation, and indeed does not exist even

in its last stages.

‘Over and above the 121 species of Jurassic Cidaride described

and figured in the ‘ Paléontologie Francaise,’ the genus Cidaris has

furnished us with 47 species, 44 of which are foreign to our country ;

the genus Rhabdocidaris with 10, and Diplocidaris with 3 species

foreign to France ; which raises the number of species of Jurassic

Cidaridz that we know at present to 181.”—Bull. Soc. Géol. France,

Sme sér, tom. vil. p. 246.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 29. MAY 1880.

XXXIII.—On the Teleostean Affinities of the Genus

Pleuracanthus. By James W. Davis, F.G.S. &c.

I purpose in the following remarks to consider certain cha-

racteristics in a group of fishes now extinct, but whose fossil

remains are found imbedded in the shales and coals of the

Carboniferous series of rocks and in the marl slate of Permian

age occurring in some parts of Germany. In the latter the

fishes are found well preserved and more or less perfect. The

anatomy of the fish and the relations of its various parts to

each other are clearly defined. In the English Coal-measures,

however, the fish has not been preserved so perfectly, and, as

a rule, the spines and teeth are found generally distributed

where fish-remains have been discovered to exist, but the

remaining parts of the skeleton are wanting. ‘The cannel

coal between Bradford and Waketield has yielded some spe-

cimens of the bones of the fish, in addition to a large and

varied collection of spines and teeth. Prof. Agassiz described

the spines of these fishes, and named them Plewracanthus and

Orthacanthus ; and the teeth he also described, and designated

Diplodus. The continental specimens were first described in

1847 by Dr. Goldfuss of Bonn, as Orthacanthus Dechenii.

A year later Prof. Beyrich wrote a treatise on the same fish,

naming it, however, Xenacanthus Dechenit. In 1855 Sir

Philip Egerton pointed out that the spine Pleuwracanthus and

the Diplodus-teeth belonged to the same genus of fish,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 24

350 Mr. J. W. Davis on the Teleostean

and that the Xenacanthus of Beyrich was evidently the same ;

and, further, that Orthacanthus, from the great difference in

the position of the denticles which extend along its dorsal

margin, might constitute the only additional genus to Pleura-

canthus. Since then a number of intermediate species have

been discovered, which conduce towards proving that there

can be no real division between Pleuracanthus and Ortha-

canthus, and that, consequently, the latter must be absorbed

in the former.

The Bohemian specimens of Plewracanthus appear to have

been about 18 inches in Jength. They had a broad flat head,

which contracted somewhat towards the body, the latter

being narrower laterally, but of greater thickness from the

dorsal to the ventral surfaces, and gradually tapering towards

the tail. ‘There were two pectoral and two ventral fins; and

a dorsal fin extended along the back ; beginning immediately

behind the head, it encircled the tail and extended along the

ventral aspect, nearly or quite to the position of the ventral

fins. In front of the dorsal fin there was a straight fin-ray

or spine about 5 or 6 inches long in a fish of the size men-

tioned ; it was inserted in the neck, and appears to have

been supported by muscles or cartilage, there being no process

for articulation to a bony support. The spine in some in-

stances possesses a row of denticles along each lateral sur-

face ; and in others the two rows of denticles are placed on the

back of the spine and approximate closely to each other. It

is composed of very close-grained, dense, bony substance,

and, to all appearances, was not immediately connected with

the dorsal fin. Besides these two varieties of the spines,

which are found attached to the fossil fishes of the Continent,

and which were originally described by Agassiz, in the ‘ Pois-

sons Fossiles,’ from detached spines found in the Coal-mea-

sures of Britain, others have been discovered in America, and

described by Dr. Newberry in the Geological Survey of Ohio,

also from the Coal-measures; and during the last year or two

I have been fortunate in finding, in the cannel coal of West

Yorkshire, other specimens with the denticles in various inter-

mediate positions between the lateral (or Pleuracanthus type)

and the dorsal (or Orthacanthus type), which go far to prove

that this difference in the position of the rows of denticles is

not of generic importance, and that the two must be united in

the genus Pleuracanthus. I have expressed these views more

fully in a paper recently read before the Geological Society of

London.

The body of the fishes in some of the specimens was covered

—

Affinities of the Genus Pleuracanthus. 351

by minute rhomboidal plates of enamel ; in the majority, how-

ever, this is not preserved and does not appear to have been

present, the skin being naked. The head, much depressed,

was very broad, and terminated in a rounded snout. The

position of the eyes is not indicated in any of the fossils. A

pair of orifices, placed a little distance behind the snout,

appear to indicate, in the opinion of Dr. Goldfuss, that they

may have been connected with the nostrils. The mouth

extended in a semicircular form round the anterior portion

of the head, the lower jaw projecting somewhat beyond the

upper and being of very massive construction. The mouth

was armed with several rows of closely-set, three-pronged,

sharp teeth, extending one behind the other along each

jaw, in a similar manner to those of the Sharks and Rays of

existing species. ‘These, found separately in England, were

described by Prof. Agassiz, under the generic name of

Diplodus.

The skeleton of the fish was, for the most part, carti-

laginous. ‘The vertebrae were wholly so; but attached to

them were bony ribs, short and slender. Connecting the

spinal column and the dorsal fin were hollow (?) spinous and

interspinous bones, which are preserved and were similar in

character to the other hard parts of the skeleton, being com-

posed of cartilage with innumerable osseous centres, the chon-

droid bone of Prof. Williamson.

Dr. Kner says it is certain that four or five gill-arches, set

with a few long rake-like teeth, were present, the larger ends

of which were surrounded by many slender gill-rays ; they

were attached to the horny substance of the bones supporting

the tongue. ‘The connexion of the gill-supports with the

shoulder-girdle resembled that of the Squalide. The

shoulder-girdle does not join immediately up to the bones of

the head, and is not united with the vertebral column, but, as

in the cartilaginous fishes, it is situated so far back that

several of the vertebree are in front of it. Kner discovered

three separate bones composing the shoulder-girdle, viz. the

clavicle, scapula, and suprascapula; whilst attached to these

is a large, broad, bony plate composed of a single piece,

which, in the hinder third part, is bent on its outer edge at

right angles in the form of a knee; from this springs an arti-

culated straight ray, which extends the whole length of the

pectoral fin. From the outer side of the articulated ray

spring many fin-rays; and on the inner side there are also

a number of weaker rays. Altogether they form a very

large and expanded pair of pectoral fins. In an example of

Q4%

B52 Mr. J. W. Davis on the Teleostean

the pectoral fin from the shale above the West-Riding cannel

coal the fin-rays are very strong, and placed near together.

They present the characteristic chondroid structure ; and each

ray 1s composed of a number of separate segments, which do

not appear to have been joined together except by the in-

vesting cartilage of the fin; the ends of the segments present

no articulating surface. ‘he structure of the pectoral fins of

Pleuracanthus may be advantageously compared with the fin

of the mud-fish (Lepidosiren).

The posterior or ventral fins are built up from the pelvic

girdle in a manner similar to the pectoral. There is a pair of

peculiar ventral shields, studded over with hook-lke appen-

dages, whose use has not been clearly defined. In some of

the examples the ventral fins are much nearer together than

in others ; and where this is the case the bony appendages are

absent. It was suggested by Prof. Geinitz, in his great

work ‘Der Dyas,’ that the ventral shield might have been a

sucker; and he believed the genus to have been allied to

Cyclopterus. Dr. Kner, after examining all the specimens

then accessible, came to the decision that the ventral appen-

dages were hooking-organs, similar to the claspers found in

sharks and in the sheat-fishes or Siluroids of the present

day—this explanation being rendered probable from the

fact that some of the fossil fishes are provided with appen-

dages, whilst others are devoid of them, leading to the sup-

position that where the appendages were present the fishes

were males, whilst the females would be the fishes without

them.

The vertebral column was continued from the pelvis to the

extremity of the caudal fin in a straight line. The vertebrae

were cartilaginous and are not preserved. The rays sup-

porting the fin were to some extent osseous, and are distinctly

shown in some of the specimens.

The systematic position of Pleuracanthus is one very diffi-

cult to define. The thick cartilaginous ventral appendages

incline to a resemblance to the Sharks; but in the structure of

the skeleton, and especially in that of the fins, it does not in

any way resemble the Sharks. The osseous rays and interrays -

which support the dorsal fin (the latter also being supported

by bony fin-rays), the bony ribs with expanded bases for

attachment to the vertebra, and the possibility, indicated in

some specimens, that some of the vertebre themselves had

osseous centres, all remind us of a strong resemblance to the

type of bony fishes. The identification of the gill-arches

bearing teeth, the projection of the gill-rays, and the presence

Affinities of the Genus Pleuracanthus. 353

of teeth attached to the bones of the throat also characterize

bony fishes. Against these Teleostean resemblances may be

placed others which are again closely related with cartila-

ginous fishes, for example, the mosaic-like structure of the

integument—though some of the Siluroid fishes are possessed

of a rough skin almost like the shagreen of the sharks, and

one very curious genus (Sisor) has the whole length of its

back mailed*with enamelled scales. The position of the

shoulder-girdle, the suspensory jaw, and the attachment of the

upper to the under jaw are similar to those of the Plagiostomous

fishes. The spine, situated immediately behind the head,

solid and circular or flattened in form, without the fin-

investing hollow of the commoner Ctenacanthus or Gyra-

canthus, does not resemble the fin-spine of any existing

shark ; but, as was pointed out by Dr. Goldfuss, and after-

wards insisted on by Prof. Beyrich, it appears to be closely

related to the Rays (Squatina) both in form and method of

attachment.

Many of the Siluroid fishes have spines very closely ap-

proaching those of Pleuracanthus ; and it may be well to notice

one or twoexamples. Lita Buchanani, Cuv. & Val., is about

75 inches in length. The head, covered with strong dermal

plates, is 1°75 inch across, and very broad and depressed in com-

parison with its depth. The mouth is at the termination of the

snout; it is large and has a wide gape ; its jaws are armed with

a large number of minute teeth; and others cover the palatal

region of the mouth. The eyesaresmall. From the head the

body of the fish tapers rapidly towards the tail. The skin is

scaleless. ‘There are two dorsal fins: the anterior one, situated

2°5 inches from the termination of the snout, is armed with a

strong articulated spine; the posterior one is an adipose fin

without rays. ‘here are two pectoral, a pair of ventral, an

anal, and the caudal fins. ‘The pectoral fins are protected by

strong bony spines. ‘The features of peculiar interest lie in

the spines attached to the anterior dorsal fin and the two pec-

torals. The latter are 1°6 inch in length and ‘2 of an inch

broad; they are somewhat flattened, slightly curved, and

end in a point. The upper and lower faces are very finely

striated ; and the two lateral extremities are armed with rows

of recurved, long, sharp denticles, extending the whole length

of the spine, but becoming smaller near the base. The dorsal

spine is 2 inches in length, and of about the same diameter as

the pectorals ; it is much rounder than the pectorals, and

tapers rapidly to a point. It curves slightly backwards, and

on its posterior median surface has a single row of denticles

354 Mr. J. W. Davis on the Teleostean

extending *6 of an inch towards the base; the anterior sur-

face is produced so as to form a median keel, which extends

all the length of the spime; towards the base this keel is cor-

rugated, forming a line of rough granulations. The sides of

the spine are slightly striated. All the spines have an internal

pulp-cavity, but show no trace of the posterior hollow seen

in the Elasmobranchs.

In numerous species there is a dorsal-fm spime, but no

spines to the pectorals.

In a small specimen of Macrones from one of the Indian

rivers there are two pectoral and one dorsal fins which have

spines attached. They present a close resemblance to some

of the spines of the fossil Compsacanthus. The pectoral fins

are armed with a strong spine ‘5 inch in length. The spine

tapers to a point. Its posterior face is straight, the anterior

very slightly curved. It is somewhat flattened laterally, and

ornamented with longitudinal striz. Onthe median posterior

surface is a row of denticles, which extend along the whole

length of the spine exposed; the denticles are equal in length

to the breadth of the spine, sharply pointed and slightly re-

curved towards the base. Attached to the spine is the pectoral

fin, composed of seven or eight bifureating fin-rays. The

dorsal spine is about two thirds the size of the pectoral ; it is

straight, pointed, striated longitudinally, and has on its pos-

terior surface a single row of short straight denticles, which

point towards the base of the spine at an angle of 45°. It

is not connected with the dorsal fin, but stands detached.

It is implanted in a triangular bone formed by a pro-

longation of the bones composing the occipital region of

the head.

As already explained, the spines of the Siluroids are at-

tached by an articulation of greater or less complexity; but I

must confess there does not appear to be any thing extraordi-

nary in this difference. In Plewracanthus the spine is adapted

in the best way to the cartilaginous skeleton of the fish, whilst

in the Siluroids, having a bony and firm base, nothing appears

more reasonable than that, during the period of this develop-

ment or change in the character of the skeleton of the fish, the

spine should have been adapted to its support, and have ac-

quired its present method of attachment. There is also the

important consideration that the spines of the rays are all

similar in character, with two rows of denticles situated on

the lateral surfaces of the spime as widely separated as is

possible ; whilst those of the Siluroids exhibit every gradation

from spines with the two rows of denticles placed laterally, as

Affinities of the Genus Pleuracanthus. 355

in the Rays, through many intermediate stages, to those having

two rows placed very near together along the posterior sur-

face; in others there is only a single row of denticles along

the posterior surface; and, again, there are many examples

without any denticles. These variations offer a curious

parallelism to the fossil examples; and if, as I have else-

where hinted, the genus Compsacanthus of Newberry, with

only one row of denticles, should turn out to be a closely

related genus to Pleuracanthus, it will be still more so. I

have also recently acquired some spines with the same dense

structure as the Plewracanthus, and similar in form, but devoid

of any denticles so far as I have ascertained, though I have

not been able to get one quite clear of the matrix.

In the peculiar group of fishes [schyodus the spine in some

respects very much resembles the Pleuracanths; it is situated

immediately behind the head, is nearly straight, and has two

rows of denticles situated laterally on its upper part. A large

proportion of its length is without a fin-groove. Nearer its

base, however, there is a cavity for the fin which extended

behind the spine. Its base is expanded into a rounded articu-

lating surface, and fits into a socket composed of a strong

cartilage springing from the vertebre—an arrangement which

allows of very considerable motion, and enables the fish to

elevate and depress its spine at will. The joint is similar in

the main to that of the Siluroids, but is less complex and de-

void of the interlocking apparatus characteristic of that group.

The Jschyodus occurs in the Lias and Chalk formations; and

though the Chimeroids offer few resemblances to either the

Pleuracanths or Siluroids, its spine appears to occupy, in

some respects, an intermediate place between the two.

As already observed, the position of the eyes in Plewracan-

thus has not been identified. ‘This may be due in great mea-

sure to the parts surrounding the orbit being of a soft carti-

laginous nature, and filling up the orifice previous to its fossi-

lization ; but it may also be well to remember that the eye

in the Siluroid fish is very small compared with that of the

Sharks or Rays, and for this reason it would be more likely

to become obliterated.

There are, then, the following conspicuous points of rela-

tionship with the Siluroids :—the long tapering figure of the

fish ; its broad depressed head with rounded snout and termi-

nally situated wide mouth ; the naked skin, or more rarely

covered with minute enamelled, rhomboidal, detached plates ;

the absence of scales ; the peculiarities of the spine ; the long

unpaired fin extending along the back, encircling the straight

356 Mr. J. W. Davis on the Teleostean

slender tail, and extending along the ventral surface of the

body ; the spinous and interspinous bones of the body, and the

osseous rays of the fin; the presence of a clavicle in the

shoulder-girdle; and the fact of there bemg branchiostegal

rays with teeth attached supporting the gills. In the speci-

men described by Dr. Goldtuss the two anteriorly-pointing

conical cavities are considered, apparently with much reason,

to be the nasal cavities ; and if this be so, they are of decidedly

teleostean character, the nasal orifices of the Plagiostomous

fishes being in all cases situated beneath the snout and in the

Chimera and Rays close to the angles of the mouth, the mouth

and nasal orifice in some instances being connected by a

groove.

From a consideration of the peculiarities existing in the

fishes composing the genus Pleuracanthus we are led to the

conclusion that it claims a nearer relationship with the bony

fishes than with the Elasmobranchs, though there is equal

reason to believe that it possesses many characters in common

with the Sharks and Rays. We are therefore further led to

place the genus in an intermediate position between the two.

The distinguishing characters used in modern classification to

distinguish the Sharks and Ganoids, viz. the many-valved

muscularly-contracting bulbus arteriosus, the spiral valve of

the intestine, and the chiasma of the optic nerves, are of such

a perishable nature that they are not likely to be found in

fossil fishes. In the absence of these we are driven to select

such characters for classification as may be preserved, and to

collate them as best we may with those of existing forms.

Prof. Huxley, in the tenth decade of the Geological Survey,

has pointed out the seeming relationship between some of

the Ganoid fishes (so called) of the Old Red Sandstone and

the modern Siluroids. In the structure of the head of Coc-

costeus the general arrangement of the bony exoskeleton much

resembles that of the tropical fish Clartas ; whilst the peculiar

form of the mandibles, and the expansion of the bony elements

usually considered to be homologous with the coracoid and

radius of other fishes so as to form a large ventral shield,

offer many points of resemblance to the Siluroid Loricarta.

The Devonian Ptertchthys is also in several ways closely

related to the modern Siluroids; its osseous envelope can

only be compared to the box-like cincture of the modern

Ostracion; and the fossil fish Cephalaspis has also certain re-

semblances to Callichthys and Lortcaria. Prof. Huxley

remarks, ‘At any rate, I think the primé facie case in

favour of the T'eleostean nature of Coccosteus is so strong that

Affinities of the Genus Pleuracanthus. BT 4

it can no longer be justifiable to rank it among the Ganoids

‘ sans phrase,’ but that even those who will not allow it to be a

Teleostean must attach to it the warning adjunct of ctncerte

sedis.” And further, ‘‘ Why should not a few Teleosteans

have represented their order among the predominant Ganoids

of the Devonian epoch, just as a few Ganoids remain among

the predominant Teleosteans of the present day? When it

is considered that an ichthyologist might be acquainted with

every freshwater and marine fish of Europe, Asia, South

Africa, South America, the Indian Archipelago, Polynesia,

and Australia, and yet ‘know of only one Ganoid, the stur-

geon (a fish ‘so unlike the majority of its congeners that a

naturalist might be well acquainted with almost all the

fossil Ganoids and yet not recognize a sturgeon as a member

of the group), it will not seem difficult to admit the existence

of a Teleostean among the Devonian Ganoids, even though

that Teleostean should in some, even important, points differ

from those with which we are familiar.”

The relationship of the peculiar fishes of the Old Red Sand-

stone to the Siluroids of the present time, so clearly enun-

ciated by Prof. Huxley, and, so faras can be defined with our

present ‘limited knowledge, with every appearance of proba-

bility and truth, carries back the advent of Teleostean fishes

to the earliest geological periods during which fishes are known

to have existed. “Along with the Ganoids they have the

greatest claim to antiquity of all the fishes whose remains

have been identified. It is possible that the two groups may

have had much in common, and that a common ancestry in

some intermediate form may "be discovered in still older rocks.

In the fishes from the Coal-measures, which form the subject

of this communication, there seems to be something very like

a bridge, a transitional form between the then predominant

Elasmobranchs and the Siluroid Teleosteans. Its affinities

appear to be decidedly on the side of the Siluroids ; and it may

best be considered as a forerunner of that great group of fishes.

In geological time Pleuracanthus is known to extend from the

Lower Coal-measures, through the Middle and Upper Coal-

measures, of England and America, occurring in the gas-

coals of Bohemia (regarded as intermediate or passage-beds

between the Carboniferous and Permian rocks), and up into

marl slates of the latter group. It remains to be seen what

were the successive steps in development which have resulted

in the completely ossified and highly organized Siluroids now

existing.

358 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

XXXIV.—On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

By Cuaries LapwortH, F.G.S. &e.

Part III. Resurs.

[Continued from p. 285. |

TaBLE VI. Showing the Range of the Bala-Caradoc

Rhabdophora.

Wales Hartfell ; Scania N.E.

&e. Shale. Girvan. &e. America.

| Lower. | Up. |

| 3 3|

| 18 wel aL

31 S| es ‘| a N] 3] of. os

| | [gil el's| sfal |S] 2) si gle] sl 4) é

SIN] S! 3) Sia! 3) AP ep si S| ais] 2] 2] 8

hese ai N | LSPs! 3 | Sisal | 5

oS) §]-2/.8| of e/ 9) SP ai s)| 8] s]2/oiea

| SS] 2) StS S133] Bl Es] SS] elalcla

} B) S| 3/88] 5) | €] 2) 4) S721) 8) 212) oll

1 LE 2 Pes | | & Oe pes tae = ~ .

5) a) S1S|/A/ APA) Afal a A[S]s| so) StS] 4S) a] a

LEPTOGRAPTIDZ. |

Leptograptus flaccidus, Hall ....).. xl |e Pa ae 0 *

cnpilarie, Carr, s....5./5% F rede tellee

Amphigraptus radiatus, Lapw. ..)..).-)..J.-) #| #

divergens, Hall ..........|.. |e]. Hx

Pleurograptus linearis, Carr. ... .| lbs | x

DicRANOGRAPTID®.

Dicellograptus anceps, Nich. ....|..|../..J..{.-[--[e-fafe-[e +l ape Pee]

caduceus, Lapw. .......... foci sails wile ofp heils ates b| bled wen ae

complanatus, Lapw. ...... tol seed befall alleatis (calle a (sel e

elegans, Carr. ...... pete bs selects Decl l ae]. fe afae]e eo]. Parge |

Forchhammeri, Geinitz ....)..|..| || |- Pale -|- Dade [x

MOHMORAIS NOG, .s!i/ceeleld tie ol oe[ ante «fig Steel E: lte'| Sve ae

—— Morrisi, Hopk. ..........|..]. well al. ole ode Le] x

PH GAM. vos 1s 'sicpun se baie ia'si ig Miers 5,6 b ae \iclb)| seers fem aterm patie

Dicranograptus Clingani, Carr. ..)% )..| PJ. ela ]--|.efe fe -feele Pape |e

Nicholsoni, Hopk. ..... Byer pelle cell Cees sels sal 5 SEAR alte alls | x

ramosus, Hall ........ reba |svell vel |otsif eget nage folie * Le

DIPLOGRAPTID®.

Climacograptus bicornis, Hall. ..|..|..| ?]elalale| «etal. a lalele Pele ele

CaudatIS, LOM. 25s. sos: su] sellin ss of cael oi | ata] scl all rel ee Be cre

-— Scharenbergi, Dapw. ..... lg}. Pl |. steal. lecfs ols olo fede

tubuliferus, Zapw. ........ Brat teal aed (eat Ses eel (eal cits) (2bl [o alle:

—— typicalis, Hall, ........4. aise cron cts cope ell onalte ail ete! ie is :

Wilsoni, Lapw. ....... Pe I Pal (ed

Diplograptus aculeatus, Zapw. ..|..|..|..)..]..Ja]..l. Dae =

5 / |

euglyphus, Lapw. ........ Pil oie oilige |e 5] 2 cacll oe ul netted ee

| Cincinnati Group.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

TABLE VI. (continued).

359

| Wales

Hartfell : Scania N.E.

&e. Shale. Girvan. &e. America,

Lower. | Up.

periies 3

| \8 38] ¢ |<

Schltr a| | a SSH) CH) a5) || S| 8/6

#| 8\ 81s] sl4|] sl Zt slsl Si s18) .| 3s] Bl 2

SIN] Oo] S$] BIO] Sl aio] Sin] Sisl a] ol al =

PN] -s|N] 8] Q]A) 2 aI S FAIS S| 8) 616

Sls] §) 2 8) cp 2/8) SP57 2] S| sf] Sialsi.

; EL S| S| S/S] &f ol as} SP ed 2] S| Spo] .] -| as

b of 2| Ss] S| & Shsi |] sf 2) 8] sist als “| 3

@| -| afi] ss] 8] =] S]e] o al s| S| S]-5|2|S).5| 8

EF) 2 sre | S|] 8] §} Sia] SP ais! §| S12] ol al sls

Sia] Eb Sle| SSP el S| ep at e| &| Sie) a) oes

OC) BlOPOIA| NIA; ApS} Bl ApOoPS| SO Ri 4aj Al wes

Diplograptus foliaceus, Murch. ..)# | #]#|#| * #&|*]--PaDae lal. Paleo]: la

quadrimucronatus, Hall... .|..|..|..J.-}.-| Pe Ae ee a) ees Fo) fol

perexcavatus, Lapw. ...... : Be PaerPeaailia « |bro | aisle» «lx

Bocas, Lap, . We. « si66 55 < Oe al ere| (ie |e -Palec|. De

rugosus, Emmons ......+- Spa ieedis ol (F Pe ee |e Pade AIF

—— putillus, Hall ............ Bieter s[ataifls «fe cel aceon os eller ioe Mel's Vat lee flere tae ete fe a

truncatus, Lapw alse seiS ae Rar (es eee) ee ee en a Vg eb %

PSS EO chins a.m vie bl oferg ls paver oe rd Seo eet orate) bee x

hudsonicus, Nich. ........ esas ltd ali oil Be ieee

Cryptograptus tricornis, Carr. Je |x|. %

LASIOGRAPTID.

Lasiograptus Harknessi, Nich. .. Pala|- |. st be

margaritatus, Lapw. ...... oeiiet sifte AN =tl ges licge | oreo ag

Glossograptus Hincksi, Hop. Lx

RETIOLITIDA.

Retiolites fibratus, Zapw. ...... Pre re Bie atte yes

Peuchams, HAW 5 ives vee fa eae cl eee Ae

A cursory examination of the Table given above is sufficient

to convince those who accept the data already brought forward

of the total distinctness in paleontological features between

the Graptolite faunas of the Bala and the Arenig. In the

true Bala beds here cited not a single example of the families

of the Dichograptide or Phyllograptide has hitherto been

detected. So far as our present information enables us to

judge, they appear to have become wholly extinct; and their

place is occupied by the very distinct families of the Diplo-

graptide and Dicranograptide. The Diplograptide, so

teebly represented in the Arenig and Lower-Llandeilo rocks,

are now the dominant forms. In every zone they occur in

swarms, and of the two genera Diplograptus and Climaco-

graptus it is doubtful which is the more prolific. The old

‘genus Cryptograptus, however, which is by no means rare in

the highest Arenig, and the individuals of which teem in the

360 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

Llandeilo-Glenkiln beds, here suddenly expires, almost upon

the threshold of the Caradoc formation. The Dicranograptidee

and the allied group of the Leptograptide have here their

point of culmination and extinction. In point of numerical

abundance these two families almost divide the palm with the

Diplograptide on several horizons in this formation ; but, un-

like the members of that family, not a single example of either

seems to have outlived its highest zones.

Lower Caradoc (Hartfell)—The typical graptclitiferous

deposit of this age is undoubtedly the Hartfell shales of the

south of Scotland; and to the physical and paleontological

scale there exhibited the extra-Scottish Graptolite-bearing

Bala deposits must in the meantime be referred.

In the lower division of the Hartfell shales we recognize

three successive zones, of which the lowest may be regarded

as intermediate in its paleontological characters between the

typical Glenkiln and Hartfell groups. To this transitional

zone the majority of the forms common to the Glenkiln and

Caradoc strata are as yet restricted. The zone has not yet

been certainly detected outside the range of the Moffat shales,

except perhaps in Girvan, where it is imbedded in strata full

of Bala-Caradoc Crustacea.

The central (Dicranograptus-Clingant) zone of the Lower

Hartfell is the most characteristic band, and is recognizable:

not only in the Moffat region, but also in Wales, Ireland, and

Sweden, and it is, I suspect, no great distance below the

typical Bala Limestone itself.

The highest (Pleurograptus-linearis) zone is remarkable for

the extraordinary number of Leptograptide which it contains.

This little family culminates upon this horizon, members of

its dubiously distinct genera Leptograptus, Amphigraptus, and

Pleurograptus occurring in crowds.

The genus Dicranograptus, Hall, is by no means uncom-

mon in the Lower Hartfell beds generally ; but it hardly ap-

pears to survive into the highest zone, above which it is

wholly unknown. The well-known species Dicranograptus

ramosus is almost worldwide in its geographical range ; and

so, in all probability, is the intimately allied D. Nicholsoni,

Hopk.

The genus Dicellograptus, however, is the most predomi-

nant bifid form. Few of its species have a long range within

the formation ; and only three, viz. Dicellograptus Horchham-

mert, Gein., D. elegans, Carr., and D. Morrist, Hopk., are as

yet known outside the limits of the south of Scotland.

Leptograptus flaccidus, Hall, ranges from the Glenkiln into

the top of the Lower Hartfell, where it seems to expire with

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 361

the inconstant pseudo-genera that complete its special division

of the family. .

The numerous Diplograptide present are generally of long

range ; but Climacograptus Scharenbergt, Lapw., Diplograptus

euglyphus, Lapw., D. rugosus, Emmons, and D. perexcavatus,

Lapw., belong to the lower zones only, and D. quadrimucro-

natus, Hall, and Climacograptus tubuliferus, Lapw., are re-

stricted to the upper beds.

Of the Lasiograptidee we here seem to meet with the last

survivors. Lasiograptus Harknessi is found in the lower

strata, and L. margaritatus, Lapw., in the middle. ‘The

former is accompanied by the latest known forms of Gtlosso-

graptus. Of new forms the most remarkable are the fore-

runners of the true fetzol’tes with its superficial network,

here represented by the strange forms fetdolites jibratus,

Lapw., and £&.? eucharis of Hall.

Upper Caradoc (Hartfell)—In the Moffat area these strata

are comparatively barren, and the known fossils are restricted

as yet to two zones, one near the base of their subformation,

the other at its summit. ‘The former, which is seen as a

narrow black seam in the “ Barren Mudstones”’ of the shales,

is crowded with a peculiar species of Dicellograptus (D. com-

planatus, Lapw.) and a few forms of Diplograptide. Scanty

as are the fossils of this zone, its beds are easily identified

thereby in Girvan, in Ireland, and even in Scandinavia,

where they aid us in fixing the Tr¢nucleus-shales of Southern

Sweden as being of true Upper Bala age.

The second zone, that of Dicellograptus anceps, has even a

scantier fauna, consisting as yet merely of the forms D. anceps,

Nich., Diplograptus truncatus, Lapw., Climacograptus bicor-

nis, Hall, and C. scalaris, His., var. ; which, however, reappear

unmodified in the Drummuck beds at the summit of the Bala

of Girvan, and are also present in the Zrinucleus-beds of

Sweden.

The mortality in families, genera, and species of Rhabdo-

phora. in the Upper Caradoc beds is extraordinary. The

entire families of the Dicranograptide, Leptograptide, and

Lasiograptidee disappear from sight altogether. The only

families that survive into the Llandovery are those of the

Diplograptide and Retiolitide, and these only in a very

degenerate form. With the exception of a doubtful variety

of the conventional species Climacograptus scalarisof Hisinger,

not a single form found in the Bala rocks has hitherto been

met with in strata of Llandovery age; so that, as far as the

Rhabdophora are concerned, the paleontological break between

the Ordovician and Silurian systems seems to be complete.

362 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

SriLuRIAN System (Upper Silurian of Murchison).

Valentian or Llandovery-Tarannon Formation.

TapLE VII. Showing the Range of the Lower (and Middle)

Valentian Rhabdophora.

| ine

3 |2el a3 2 | 8 3

i] =o >

e | 84 ee ae z

Orato a) S a a

| ty.

| S|] od

| 3|3| &

mio) 5 Ss .

: els] heal ol’ .| S/F) aie

o o| 2] o sJo| 2 5| fo * - Q =

slot?) S| 8) sla sl sl a sl el ela

Pei SPSININIS Slo] SINS] S| -2I &

;| oo es} S| e/-s | m ois

a) 2 o) S78/ 818) 1s bm] S]e| =| ofS

S| ayN)| S81 8)-S/-8] Sig) a] a] 8] =] 3s] a

2) Elel Sts 8/8| epeisialcls| si Zial .

a] SVS] 818) S18) E13) esisis\ spay 4

Bm) Ops) SS) 2) SE] S45] 4) a] aps] S| Sts g

a oS Q | ~ Sl ots] S| Ghea

gee) SPS) RS) SPS] Bal ats siSpar Ss

| @ , b 3 . | eats S156] al! 2] 3

SOPRA SRS alsiolsisi lel sg

mA aia oi ~

O[M|O1SO)] [ols

m~\ ALA D1 a1 alata! cf al | «lal af it =

oO} 0} Of) 8) 0] Of | Ala\ aia) al aia ie)

MoNnoGRAPTID&.

Rastrites capillaris, Carr. ......|.. ee cer * * *

—— distans, Lapw........ ern es |. la]. | * dolls Say a *

PAN EMIT, | 3:5 p,3> +018 sae “ili 1. toe | axe x |e |> ole x] Eel.

geemmatus, Barr........ b Wie lord eae eile | : -Lx| Eel.

LASS 2) 7 ees Be a Glee Ge AF bg De

ANE RAINUIS COMTI, sls evelels 6 x |- feel ae -| «| ay P

peregrinus, Barr...........|% % | x x le | x x] x|e]«| «| «]«] Col.

Eel.

urceolus, Fichfer,.......+./+> Sala 5 ae An

Monograptus argenteus, Nich. | x

argutus, Lapw. Shick) d..dhenire tite cole oh | | * -le)x *%

attenuatus, Hopk. ........ a, lac lala lax | x x fx | eda | x

Becki, Barr. ............ yl 3 loge ew | ovof.s wil ately io | ehicgy |e Bp ny aie | ge ie mes

—— Clingani, Carr. .......... i .| a

— concinnus, Lapw. ........ eile arses ooo e:

erassin, Lape, fo. ces Ss sehen éfe ele o| ae

crenularis, Lapw. ........ allgeha |e Leela lade ele

—= cyphus, Lapw. eee ecw e sees os| Se) es ee ee) eee ee oe

—— fimbriatus, Nich........... sells SAS lag bbl riba Pa a

galaensis, Lapw........... isa ae |. .| x

—— gregarius, TGGw. ioe ee cel ae fe | x x |e wll ad |e

== Hisingeri, Carn i.cbeeues | * oe) He ole oe] HK] & x1 x *\ xl x Tx Col

+ The Rhabdophora enumerated in the first two columns of this table

have been identified by myself in a collection of fossils recently obtained

from the comparatively barren Silurian strata of Cardiganshire (the

Lower Llandovery of the Survey publications) by Professor Keeping,

who has generously permitted me to anticipate here the publication of

this most important discovery. To the Graptolithologist this list is,

indeed, most valuable; for no Rhabdophora have hitherto been quoted

from the undisputed Llandovery strata of Wales.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora.

TaBLE VII. (continued).

ead ee ;

on “4 @ . :

& Peg] 24 ans &

=e | 24] ta Els 2

Oo Fo a oS I 4 D

| | | | 3

S| El ¢

g/al|¢

a, Sic] 3

: ; S12/ Els

| o :| o -—2la -| 69 “i A

| 2{3/ 81 8] e13/S]3| + 8) S|

| ePSsiSP si S| Si sf2) s]a] eis|s| 2

Sl Mio} of S| @] S| of s/n DE a! a

~ |) oO SY LS) See a fe: ml 1 oat

lays) 88/2) 8] S15/S] a) S] | 2/2

eB) BPs] S18] S| S Ss] EPs Ars) si) &

Bl mis! so} 8S] oO] S| SPS] Abe] ads] ss] eo

s/f 3/818] 5 2] sfs| ars) 21s) 8) s

2) See] rel el el eis! abs! ap |S

Sidisisials Seis slsisisisi

ES Waite fan |

i m|alaAalA OTRlg =i i)

2) LIL) Sp S/S) Sc) Sp s/s} s| Spa) sie

Monograptus intermedius, Carr. .|..| x]. .|. J. -|- «|| x x]. | x

leptotheca, Byes Ps otek Salers fees se *% wfe hae |

— lobiferus, M‘Coy........../ | f+ | *| eI. * oo

PROHCUS! arT uP. ae bis sie, ae of Sante Ha ellles HN oilten A aewteeapNete

runcinatus, Lapw. ........|--|% - «+(e led | x *

Sandersoni, Lapw. ........|++{+-Je+|+ +] *% Je ePae le Dae | a

Sedgwicki, Portl........... Paes ae x) |. -l adel a tel x

spiralis, His. COCR aOR tic Ut am lis 2a) Ne 3 oe Se ee ee Kleedee

Saltert, apr. .stc.2. oes (el. ny ae |. -| x

—— turriculatus, Barr. ........{++|%]--| |. Sah ailers lease Fal olla

——— EOMUIS, LOVE sods sce viene cles{e Pel *|%* |e) ede l ede] epel--

triangulatus, Harkn. ......|+-|.-f. |. of xe]. | x lade] xl.

DrIpLoGRAPTID&.

Diplograptus (Dimorphograptus)

elongatus, Lapw. .......iseasleele an

E ) Swanstoni, Lapw. ..\.. endl Proll cijelic a Medes eu heute a hee

acuminatus, Nich. ........|..|.. * | fae |. De

-—— confertus, Nich. ..........).0/../

folium, His....0...00000. Jeol efel dl lel alalels allel x

— Hughesi, Mich. cece eee eee RI RE. el HK ool 1 * *

—— insectiformis, Nich........-1--|.-[..|.-[. -l

—— modestus, Lapw.........0[.-]. Dae |e Dae ae | ae ¥ ale |x

palinens, Bary... ieests shiene«| i iat Paes beslleg ellis] a oler oli.

—— physophora, Mich. ........|. Aer eal al ea

—— sinuatus, Nich............./.-/ ada! &f- el a Pe ola Ds te hie

vesiculosus, Wich. . occ... sls -|- fae l>- lel ele: wos ot ag Ae ae ae

Cephalograptus cometa, Gein. ..|..|..]. * ; als

Climacograptus normalis, Lapw., |

var. eR os er mth ae eae be eed | ee ae

tectus, Bart, Var.) 9. --\s.|5: a ae eis Gels .

—— rectangularis, ies VAs oie ore Bars hove Oral) opel Be ml ees |

innotatus, Nich. EP REPEMIAP) Ears as cA aR ft 7

RETIOLITID®.

Retiolites perlatus, Mich. ......]..J..J..|..J--]. a feel ade lade

—— Daironi?, var., Lapw....... ny el aed ane

| (A-C) Thuringia, Germany.

Kel.

Col.

Eel.

Kel.

Col.,

Eel.

Col.

364 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

This fauna reminds us at once of that of the Arenig for-

mation in the extraordinary predominance of a single family

of the Rhabdophora. The Monograptide, of which a few

scattered examples are found for the first time in some of the

lowest Llandovery beds, multiply so rapidly that long before

we reach the middle beds of the Valentian formation they have

become the dominant family. For a time the Diplograptide

hold their own, as if contesting every horizon; but at the

very commencement of the ‘Tarannon period the issue is prac-

tically decided. One by one the species of the Diplograptide

sink out of sight; and when the true Wenlock is reached the

last has vanished. A Retiolite form occurs alone for some

time longer; but in the Lower Ludlow the Monograptus

reigns unchallenged, the solitary survivor of its race.

As in the case of the Glenkiln and Caradoc formations, we

turn to the south of Scotland for our typical Graptolite-bearing

rocks of Valentian age, where they compose the Birkhill

shales and the overlying Gala group. These strata have been

so minutely searched for Rhabdophora that there seems to be

an uninterrupted zoological gradation from the base to the

summit of the formation. In the entire series we seem at

present to recognize five subgroups of tolerably equal syste-

matic importance—the (1) Lower, (2) Middle, and (8) Upper

Birkhill shales, and (4) (5) the Gala and Grieston groups. Of

these, nos. 1, 2, and 3 are possibly included in the so-called

Lower Llandovery formation of South Wales, while the fourth

and fifth correspond to the Upper Llandovery and Tarannon.

(A) Lower Birkhill.—This includes the so-called zones of

Diplograptus acuminatus, Nich., and D. vesiculosus of Dobbs

Linn &c., and contains but few Graptolites in addition to

those which give their names to the zones. JM. tenuis, Port-

lock, and M. attenwatus, Hopk., are its only Monograptide,

and are the first species of this family hitherto detected. The

remaining fossils are Diplograptide of extended range.

(B) Middle Birkhill_—Vhis division, which embraces the

thick zone of Monograptus gregarius, Lapw., is most prolific

in Rhabdophora, and is recognizable not only in the Moffat

area, but also in Girvan, Ireland, and Sweden. In this zone

the Diplograptide and Monograptide are tolerably equal in

species and individuals. The species D. vesiculosus, Nich.,

and D. physophora, Nich., make kere their final appearance.

The genus Lastrites (Barr.) occurs for the first time; and the

single species Rastrites peregrinus is remarkably prolific. Of

the genus Monograptus species are abundant, but few are

peculiar. Among the latter is the transitional form MW. trian-

gulatus, Harkn.

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 365

mineralogical character and its included species, has also the

widest geographical extension. To it belong the graptoliti-

ferous shales of the so-called Lower Llandovery of Cardigan,

recently examined by Prof. Keeping, and also the disputed

graptolitic mudstones of the Coniston area of Westmoreland.

Klsewhere its representatives are recognizable in Girvan,

County Down, in the typical Lodiferus-beds of Scania, in the

Alaunschiefer of Germany, and in the Colonies and the band

Ke 1 of Bohemia.

In all these widely separated regions the fauna is most dis-

tinctly of the type of that of the Upper Birkhill shales. In

this group, in the typical localities near Moffat, we recognize

three fairly distinct zones, the lowest characterized by Cepha-

lograptus cometa, Geinitz, and some survivals from the under-

lying M.-gregarius zone—and the upper distinguished by

Rastrites maximus, Carr., and by a few species which become

much more abundant in the overlying Gala beds.

Generally speaking, these Upper Birkhill beds, in the whole

of their range from Cardigan through Northern and Central

Kurope, are particularized by the preponderance of Monograp-

tide of the genera Rastrites and Monograptus (both of which

probably attain their specific maximum upon this horizon), and

by the exclusive presence of such forms as Vonograptus Hisin-

gert, Carr. (jaculum), M. intermedius, Carr., M. crenularis,

Lapw., and Diplograptidee of the type of Diplograptus

Hughes, Nich., Cephalograptus cometa, Geinitz, &c.

A few of the commonest forms pass onwards into the strata

of the succeeding Upper Valentian or Tarannon group. Of

these the chief are Climacograptus normalis, Lapw., Diplo-

graptus palmeus, Barr., D. folium, His., aud some forms of

Monograptus Sedgqwicki, Portl.

Gala or Tarannon Group.

Mineralogically the distinction between the Gala group 4nd

the underlying Birkhill series is most marked ; but paleonto-

logically there is an insensible gradation from the one into

the other. The Birkhill beds consist of black shales of no

great vertical extent, while the Gala series is formed of grey

conglomerates, flagstones, and shales of enormous collective

thickness. It is more than doubtful, however, if the Gala

group at all approaches the Birkhill beds in systematic im-

portance. It must be looked upon at present as a transitional!

formation—its lower beds graduating zooloyically into the

inferior Birkhill beds, and its higher zones passing insensibly

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 25

Taste VIII. Showing the Range of the Gala~Tarannon

| Priodon-Flags (B).

| Tieveshilly (A), Ireland.

Sweden.

| M.-pricdon Schists (B).

| Stygfor’s Schists (A, B).

BS j

a sts

=| Silex

=| | 12l5

E Bre

o =| aj

a £2) (hese

al | LaF

<| | J 24

aly 2

Ela] es} 31h

cl-<| Ais] s

EL S| cp Sts

E\s| el e|3

BLO|alx[o

* * * *

Rhabdophora.

Webi fats aes icine al $e eee eee

[ez]

a L+~

FIGS) &£

Al @ ie)

ee)

* 2 (Ok.

DR Wels

“<2 al<| 2

&|3| 2[| 3

lel e(5) =

| A ce

Bi o|pya|s

MonoGRAPTID&.

Rastrites distans, Lapw......... aL Ee

—— Linnwxi, Barr. .......6..... é j

fugax, Barr... .cccececeeeele feu.

—— maximus, Barr. ..... ..... BS ates

Monograptus Becki, Barv. ...... PS Pe

Barrandei, Suess? ..... BAe Bhs eA

bohemicus}, Barr........- ee ve

— clintonensis, Hall ........ Jal:

POMEO, MDREE ns a aisiass Mine 's,¢ |" AG

concinunus, Lapw. ........|.-[e|.-J..

Crassus, Lap. ......0+.5--| ele: 2

— crispus, Lapw.......---+--lalyl.-fe-

exiguus, Nich. ............ «ls whe

—— Flemingii, Salt. ........ OP es

galaensis, Lapw. ...... vale haae Pac we Nese

—— Hisingerl, Carr. ........ oe {e ofa ae gels

leptotheca, Lapw. ........|..J..|. [x

lopsterts, AE Coy.: 2s. cect oh.3iral «

—— Milssoni, Barr......... x hacen liepalls eel ‘

ULLECn 28217 gee ne eee Cc

priodon, Bronn .........-/%] x] #].-| x

proteus, Barr, .........«.. ee hae

riccartonensis, Lapw.......| %

runcinatus, Lapw. ........|...%|- *

ALGO, Liag. |.\s sic wae o> seals cl oe hime ae

Sedgwicki, Portl. ........ alelelels«

—— spiralis, Geenttz .........-\. Jel. fe|--

—— turriculatus, Barr. ........) #] «|. *

—— Remeri, Barr..... “oh eae lo) 6 o-

vomerinus, Nich........... t #4.

Cyrtograptus Gray, Lapw. |: leila ihe a

DIPLOGRAPTID&.

Diplograptus folium, His. ......) x]}x|..[%

palmeus, Barr. ........../. fel. -dae le

tamariscus, Nich........... ole |- Lael

Climacograptus normalis, Zpw.,var.| «|x|. -| | x

COCUUSS RATT, VATA trate tere eps cocil easiliauel s

Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr. ..| ae

obesus, Lapw., var......... A

VONOSIISHPALCLL eran Renae eee (Ps) Li /s

+ The species printed in italics in this table do not occur upon these

horizons in Britain, and are possibly erroneously identified from the

corresponding European zones.

On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 367

upwards into the Riccarton Flags, which are the South-Scot-

tish equivalents of the Wenlock beds of Siluria.

This also appears to be the general zoological character of

the Tarannon shale of Wales and the north of England,

which occupies the systematic place of the Gala group, to

which, however, it is vastly inferior in vertical thickness and

in the richness and variety of its Graptolite fauna.

In the Gala beds of the south of Scotland we recognize at

present two main divisions. In the Lower Gala alone do we

meet with the survivals from the Birkhill fauna; but these

are here associated with the typical Gala species, Mono-

graptus exiguus, Nich., MV. galaensis, Lapw.—together with

M. priodon, Bronn, which ranges upwards from this horizon

into the Wenlock shale. In the Upper Gala the fauna gives

many indications of the gradual change into that of the Salo-

pian type—Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr., Monograptus ric-

cartonensis, and other Wenlock forms being frequently met

with. Here we meet for the first time with the genus Cyrto-

graptus of Carruthers. The genus Lastrites, however, is

already extinct; and all the Diplograptide have disappeared,

with the exception of an occasional form in the basal beds,

minute and hardly capable of specific identification.

The graptolititerous Tarannon shales of Conway yield a

fauna corresponding to that of the earlier portion of the Gala

beds; and the few forms hitherto collected from the Gala

shales (Knock beds) of Westmoreland and the Tieveshilly

shales of North-eastern Ireland afford unmistakable indications

of the presence in these localities of a corresponding assemblage

of forms.

The predominant and characteristic fossil of the Lower

Gala subformation is Monograptus exiguus, Nich., which is

as yet unknown outside the limits of the Lower Gala-

Tarannon series.

Salopian or Wenlock-Ludlow Formation.

In the Valentian or Llandovery-Tarannon formation, as we

have seen, the Diplograptide, so prevalent in its earlier strata,

succumb before the swift increase of the Monograptide,

till finally in the highest Tarannon beds they have dwindled

away to an occasional diminutive form of D¢plograptus only.

In the overlying Salopian beds even these degenerate forms

appear to be wanting; and in the lower divisions of the Wenlock

shales of Britain the numerous Monograptide are accompanied

only by the single diprionidian species Retiolites Geinitzianus,

Barr. This, again, is unknown in the highest beds of the

368 Mr. C. Lapworth on the Geological

TABLE LX. Showing the Range of the Salopian

Rhabdophora.

Zone of

Lower

Cyrtograplus Wenlock Shales.

Murchisoni. Ludlow.

F ie 4

‘S Al = g S

b=] a 3 ic wm ol

ml r= & ° ey &

Fa at = wn 3 g

a} % 2

a ola 2 ol s ¢

|% e/2l2) |S) be] ois

=| ‘2 || -| #] 8] $|'S

e ! | & S mH

a! | 8 a\s| alo] .| =| ep s| 3] 3

2 | ais 2] -4| O| S| ble) -LS| oe] &

| s8|/AlsS 3/Al=£| 8) s| | S}F) ES

S/E| 2|S)S/E) 2| 8) 3) £| sl als|ss| &

= ° . =| 2 | o .

ala S| Sale| Ss) ele als| ala als

MoNOGRAPTIDZ.

Monograptus bohemicus, Barr. ..|, .', ® ae hela

chimera, Barr. ........-. belies hee Ai am

mes ale 468 ee # |e) ee ie

—— colonus, (ha Seal (3) ) ovoiaieaeorin Pi Pl... xl ae ||| ex ol ee

basilicus, Lapw. ......... ge ilcatiptine ?

leintwardinensis, Hopk.....

( we e@eleele nue . *

—— M‘Coyii, Lapw. ......+... ?

x eeleevlte *% . . .

Se NIIGSONL, BOTT. 2... sj0->0: oa ie Seiuaate ‘give

—— nudus, Lapw., var......... ba SE ue 2

——— minor, M‘Coy ............ Ay Ne Pa soe Sale

priodon, EB RONT' Vycteiete wise fe Ss laele wlale lel alae lable

——— Romer, Barr. ....e0ss be

< eele . . * ae *

— Salweyi, Hopk. .......... el ee sale aes

—— scanicus, Zullb. .......++. ne bat Ald: ul aie

vomerinus, Nich Piet iat ae ee lak ele ioe lee

—— riccartonensis, Lapw....... eae Bid es DIR

POSS, BATT ns us os > oe See ee |p ae ie

‘ . ‘ » rQy 4

Cyrtograptus Carruthersi, SBT es Wen a fa) elas

Linnarssoni, Lapw......... Nes Vc ae

. } ; Vaya

=== Murehisomi, Carr. >. ..'..0. |e |e

RETIOLITIDZ.

Retiolites Geinitzianus, Barr. ..| 4! y | x LP |e |

Wenlock, or in the so-called Lower Ludlow shales, where

Monograptide alone have hitherto been detected. The mem-

bers of this family are tolerably abundant in the lower zones

of the Wenlock ; but specifically they are far less numerous

than in the populous Birkhill shales of the Lower-Valentian

era. In the Lower Ludlow, Monograptide are not uncommon

upon certain horizons; but the species are few and of few

types. Above this subformation the sandy strata of the

Downtonian formation suddenly set in; and beyond the occa-

Distribution of the Rhabdophora. 369

sional recognition of a fragmentary specimen of Rhabdophora

in these deposits incapable of specific identification, nothing is

known of their further existence.

In the great mudstone series of the Salopian of Siluria,

at least two fairly distinct zones are at present recognizable.

The base of the Wenlock from Llangadock to Bala and Glyn

Ceriog, as well as in the Lake district itself, is formed by a

series of dark shales and flags marked by the presence of

Cyrtograptus Murchisont, Carr. It is accompanied by the

other forms enumerated under this head in the accompanying

Table, some being survivals from the T’'arannon fauna, and

others strictly peculiar to the Wenlock shales. The same zone

is recognizable in Scania, occupying a similar stratigraphical

place and yielding a corresponding Graptolite fauna.

In the main mass of the Wenlock shales Cyrtograptus

Linnarssoni, Lapw., is the most conspicuous form near

Builth. Of the fossils peculiar to higher horizons we as yet

know little; but it may be expected that we shall in the

future meet here with the zone of M. testis, Barrande, which

has hitherto remained undiscovered in Britain, but has a wide

geographical range on the European continent.

The most abundant forms of Wenlock age in Britain are :—

M. vomerinus, Nich., which is ubiquitous in its distribution ;

M. riccartonensis, a most prolific Scotch species; and M.

priodon, Bronn, which does not appear to survive into the

later strata of the Lower Ludlow.

Lower Ludlow Beds.

It is certain that we have yet much to learn with respect to

the Rhabdophora of the Upper Wenlock beds ; for none of the

forms enumerated above appear to survive into the Lower

Ludlow formation. In certain localities, however, these

Lower Ludlow beds are prolific in Graptolites, especially M.

Salweyt, Hopk., M. leintwardinensis, Hopk., M. Nilssonz,

Barr., M. bohemicus, Barr., M. scanicus, 'Tullberg, many of

which are present also in the highest zones of the graptoliti-

ferous rocks of Scania and in corresponding strata in Bohemia

and France.

[To be continued. |

370 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

XXXV.—On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian

Region.—Part II. Crustacea Anomura and Macrura (ex-

cept Penzidea). By Epwarp J. Mirrs, F.L.S., F.Z.S.

{Continued from p. 317.]

ANOMURA.

Dromirpea.

Dromia vulgaris, M.-Edw.

A fine adult male is in the collection (without definite loca-

lity) which does not seem to differ specifically from the Medi-

terranean D. vulgaris. The tubercle or accessory tooth at

the base of the second antero-lateral marginal tooth, how-

ever, is more developed than is usually the case in D. vulgaris.

A specimen undoubtedly belonging to D. vulgaris is in the

Museum collection from Gen. Hardwicke, and therefore pre-

sumably from the Indian Ocean.

Dromia Rumphit, Fabr., junior ?

I refer, with some hesitation, to this species a female

Dromia which differs from adult examples of D. Rumphwi in

the proportionally narrower, more elongated carapace, the

front and sides of which slope much more steeply (almost

vertically) to the rostrum and antero-lateral margins. The

carapace is much more convex anteriorly and is covered with

a much shorter, more scanty pubescence. ‘The median tooth

of the rostrum is nearly obsolete; and the fifth pair of legs is

relatively more elongated. The exact locality of this speci-

men has not been preserved. Length 1 inch 7 lines, breadth

nearly 1 inch 9 lines.

I have observed very similar differences between adult

D. vulgaris and a series of young Dromie from Sardinia in

the Museum collection.

Dromia (Dromidia) orientalis, sp. n.

(Pl. XV. figs. 1, 2.)

Carapace convex, but little broader than long, and covered

with a close velvety pubescence, which (probably through

abrasion) is thin or absent on the gastric and cardiac regions ;

the sides slope very steeply, almost perpendicularly, to the

antero-lateral margins. No sutures are visible on the upper

surface. Front quinquedentate (the supraocular tooth in-

cluded), the median tooth smallest, the others rather promi-

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 371

nent and tuberculiform; extraorbital tooth obsolete, infra-

ocular similar to the supraocular tooth. Antero-lateral mar-

gins 6-toothed; the teeth rather small and tuberculiform ;

the two anterior somewhat approximated and placed at some

distance behind the orbits; the two next teeth are similarly

approximated, and placed near the fifth tooth. No spines on

the subhepatic and pterygostomian regions; a low tubercle at

the antero-lateral angles of the buccal cavity. The legs are

closely pubescent; the anterior legs (in the female) rather

robust, there are two tubercles on the outer surface of the

carpus, and the calcareous dactyli are regularly and evenly

toothed on their inner margins. The antepenultimate joints

of the second and third legs are somewhat dilated distally ; the

fourth and fifth legs present nothing remarkable. The sternal

sulci (in the female) are approximated, and terminate in a

strong tubercle situated in the space between the first and

second legs. The ridge on the endostome or palate is

partially interrupted. Length 2 inches 4 lines, breadth 2

inches 6 lines.

Indo-Malayan Seas (a female without definite locality).

From the Dromia Rumphii of Fabricius, to which it has

much external resemblance, this species is distinguished by

the form of the sternal sulci in the female, and by the disposi-

tion of the teeth of the antero-lateral margins ; the latter cha-

racter also serves to distinguish it from all the species referred

by Stimpson to the genus (or subgenus) Dromidia.

PAGURIDEA.

Birgus latro (Linn.).

Malaysia (an adult male of large size).

Canobita clypeata (Fabr.).

Amboina (an adult male). The larger hand is nearly of

the form figured by Dana as characteristic of the variety he

designates brevimana, but is tuberculate externally, as in the

form he considers to be the typical clypeata.

Cenobita compressa ?

Cenobita compressa, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 241 (1837);

? De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 218 (1849).

Cenobita Olivieri, Owen, Zool. Voy. ‘Blossom,’ Crust. p. 84 (1839) ;

? Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. Cr. 1. ee (1852).

Cenobita cavipes, Stimpson, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p, 245 (1858).

?Cenobita violascens, Heller, Reise der Novara, Cr. p. 82, pl. vii. fig. 1

(1865).

372 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

Java (an adult male, in shell of Pyrula) ; Borneo, Bandjer-

masin (adult and two young, in shells of Awricula and

Purpura) ; Batjan (adult and two smaller females, in shells of

Auricula, Pyrazus, and Murex).

Whether these specimens belong to the C. compressa of

Milne-Edwards is difficult to determine from his very short

description ; but they appear to be referable to that species as

characterized by De Haan, to the C. Oliviert of Owen as

described by Dana, and to C. cavipes of Stimpson, although

each of the above-cited authors lays especial stress upon dif-

ferent characters. Stimpson says that C. cavipes differs from

C. compressa in not having the branchial regions laterally

inflated ; but this is a relative distinction, and I have observed

a more considerable inflation of the branchial regions in some

specimens than in others. he principal characteristics of

this species appear to consist in the compressed eyes, which

are granulated above, in the larger hand being smooth on

the lower part of its outer surface, granulated on the upper

part, but without the series of oblique crests of C. rugosa,

in the penultimate joint of the left third leg being convex on

its outer surface at its upper and distal end, the terminal joint

scarcely longer than the preceding, naked, and flattened on

its outer surface, with corneous-tipped tubercles only on its

upper and inner surface (both terminal and penultimate joint

being granulated on their inferior margin) ; the tarsal joint of

the third right leg is subcylindrical, and the coxe of the fifth

legs not greatly produced, in the male. ,

This would appear to be a very common and widely

ranging species.

It is of interest to note that the Auricula and Pyrazus

inhabited by this hermit-crab are brackish-water shells.

Cenobita perlata ?, var. affinis (sp. n. ?).

(PL VS fie. 8.)

A young male inhabiting the shell of a species of Nerita is

in the collection from Batjan, which is nearly allied to C.

perlata as described by De Haan, and to C. purpurea, Stimp-

son. ‘The carapace is very roughly but uniformly granulated

above in front of the cervical suture; the branchial regions,

which have the anterior margin nearly straight, are punctu-

lated. The larger chelipede is tuberculated on its outer sur-

face ; the tubercles white, with dark corneous tips; no trace

of larger tubercles disposed in oblique series. The penulti-

mate joint of the third left leg is granulated on its outer and

more distinctly on its upper surface, and very distinctly granu-

lated on its lower margin. The tarsal joint is somewhat

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 373

longer than the preceding, nearly smooth on its outer, and

densely granulated and hairy on its upper and inner surfaces.

The coxe of the fifth legs in the male are greatly produced

and subacute, and nearly of equal length; the left coxa has a

slight rounded prominence on its outer margin. It differs

principally in the form of the coxe of the fifth legs of the

male, and may prove to be a distinct species. Length of

carapace nearly ? inch.

Diogenes miles (Fabr.).

A specimen is in the collection (without definite locality)

which belongs, I believe, to this species. It very nearly re-

sembles a specimen from the Philippine Islands, which was de-

signated by White (but never described) as Pagurus subpilosus,

but which cannot be regarded as specifically distinct. In

these specimens the penultimate and antepenultimate joints

of the legs and the outer surface of the larger hand are simply

granulated (in the Philippine example the granules of the

hand are less numerous and crowded). In what I regard as

the adult D. miles, the granules of the hand and penultimate

and antepenultimate joints of the legs are replaced by spinules.

There are in the Museum two small specimens from Dukhun

(Col. Sykes) which probably belong to D. miles*.

* Of the genus Deogenes there are in the British Museum examples

from Ceylon (Holdsworth) and Pondicherry of the species figured by

Herbst as Cancer miles, but which is certainly not the miles of Fabricius,

Milne-Edwards, and Dana, and which is at once distinguished by the

form of the larger hand, which is granulated on its upper and lower

margins and smooth on its outer surface, by the existence of a strong

blunt lobe or tubercle on the inner margin of the wrist, and by the

smooth non-granulated or spinulose tarsal joints of the second and third

pairs of legs. This may be the Diogenes custos (Pagurus custos, Fabr.),

or may require a new specific name. There is also a specimen from

Sharks Bay, W. Australia, in which the short, acute, non-spinulose

rostrum does not project beyond the level of the ophthalmic scales,

which are subtriangulate and entire; the arm and wrist of the larger

(left) chelipede are robust and coarsely granulated on their upper and

external surface ; the hand somewhat less coarsely granulated, except on

its upper margin, very convex on its outer surface, particularly near its

articulation with the wrist; lower (immobile) finger bent downward, and

forming an obtuse angle with the lower margin of the palm. The dac-

tyli of the second and third legs on the left-hand side are rather short,

and scarcely exceed the penultimate joint in length; on the right-hand

side they are relatively longer and curved. This species may be desig-

nated D. granulatus.

It is evidently nearly allied to D. avarus of Heller from the Nicobars,

in which species, however, the left hand is externally costate, and this

chelipede on the whole represented as much slenderer, and the dactyli of

the second and third (left) limbs are relatively longer.

In a specimen from the “ Eastern Seas” in the Museum collection,

374 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

Pagurus punctulatus, Olivier.

Celebes, Badjoa (a female). A larger male is in the collec-

tion, without locality, in which the coloration has disappeared.

Pagurus pedunculatus (Herbst).

Batjan (an adult male). A larger male, without special

locality, is in the collection.

The specimens I refer here agree very well with examples

named P. pedunculatus by White in the Museum collection.

As, however, I have not had an opportunity of referring to

Herbst’s figure (the Museum copy of his work being imper-

fect), and as some recent remarks of Hilgendorf tend to throw

doubt upon the correctness of White’s identification, I will

add that the specimens referred to P. pedunculatus in the

Museum collection closely resemble in external appearance

P. deformis, M.-Edwards, but may be distinguished by the

hand of the larger chelipede being somewhat more closely

granulated between the larger tubercles, which, as in P. de-

Jormis, are disposed in longitudinal series on the upper and

outer surface of the palm; the mobile finger is granulated (but

not carinated) on its upper and outer surface, the granules

being disposed in longitudinal series; the penultimate joint of

the third left leg is smooth, not carinated as in P. deformis ;

the terminal joint, however, is nearly of the same form as in

that species. ‘The dried specimens in the Museum collection

from Port Jackson and Australia have the eye-peduncles

marked with a very distinct white cincture, which is not

visible in the Malaysian specimens, which have been long

immersed in spirits. I will add that the external genital

orifices of the female are very distinct in the males of P.

deformis in the Museum collection (as noted by Hilgendorf),

but not in the males of specimens of P. pedunculatus.

which I will designate D. spinulimanus, the rostrum is acute, but does not

nearly reach to the apices of the ophthalmic scales, which are arcuate

externally, but not denticulated ; the merus and carpus of the larger (left)

chelipede are granulated externally, the carpus armed on its upper margin

with about a dozen spinules; palm armed on its outer surface and upper

and lower margins with spinuliform granules; mobile finger with similar

spinules on its upper margin, lower deflexed but less abruptly than in

D. granulatus ; smaller chelipede with the palm covered with long fulvous

hairs, tarsal joints of the second and third legs on the right side (the left

are wanting) long, hairy, and smooth.

This species may be compared to D. penicillatus, Stimpson, but differs

in the non-denticulated ophthalmic scales, shorter rostrum, the armature

of the chelipedes, &c.

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 375

Pagurus gemmatus, M.-Edwards.

Two specimens, males, in the collection, without special

indication of locality, agree almost exactly with M.-Edwards’s

short description ; the tubercles on the crest of the tarsus of

the third lett leg, however, are scarcely to be described as

“‘tubercules arrondis,”’ but in the larger specimen resemble

small bluntish spines ; the larger hand, which is very broad

and short, is covered externally with unequal irregularly-

disposed tubercles, and its inner surface with scattered tufts

of hair; the tarsal joint of the third left leg is longer than the

penultimate joint, which is not canaliculated, cristate, or

flattened on its outer surface.

M.-Edwards’s specimens were from the “ Marquesas,” by

which, I presume, the Oriental group otherwise designated

the Mendaiia Islands is intended.

Aniculus typicus, Dana.

Malaysia (an adult male of large size, without locality).

Clibanarius vulgaris, Dana.

Borneo (an adult male, in shell of Voluta). A smaller male,

without locality, is in the collection.

These specimens agree excellently with M.-Edwards’s

description, except that he says “ tarse court,” whereas in

the Museum specimens the tarsus is longer than the preceding

joint. It is to be noted that in Herbst’s figure of his Cancer

clibanarius there are no indications of the longitudinal mark-

ings of the legs described by Milne-Edwards.

Eupagurus japonicus? (Pl. XIV. figs. 6, 7.)

fk hirtimanus, White, List Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 60 (1847), sine

esc?

Eupagurus japonicus, Stimpson, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 250

(1858).

Carapace nearly naked, with the cervical suture strongly

defined. Rostrum prominent, triangular and acute; frontal

margin with a minute spinule on either side of the rostrum,

and further from it than from the antero-lateral margins. Hye-

peduncles slender, and shorter than the width of the frontal

margin ; ophthalmic scales narrow-linear, concave above, and

rounded at the distal ends. Antennal scale very short. The

larger (right) chelipede with the merus unarmed, smooth, and

clothed with scanty hairs ; carpus with short granulated lines

on its outer surface, and armed above with four spinules on

the upper and inner margin and two on the upper surface ;

376 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

hand ovate, densely hairy on its outer surface, with the upper

and lower margins, both of palm and fingers, granulated, and

with a few prominent granules near the base of the palm;

the inner margins of the fingers regularly toothed near the

distal ends; upper finger with a large rounded tubercle near

the base. Left chelipede with the carpus biseriately spinulose

above, and the hand and fingers hairy. Ambulatory legs

smooth, the penultimate and antepenultimate joints unarmed

and not externally compressed, and the tarsal joints shorter

than the penultimate joint. The first postabdominal seg-

ment (in the male) with a small lobe or projection in its pos-

terior margin on either side of the middle line, and with a

slender filitorm appendage on the left side only. Length of

carapace about 2 inch (8 lines).

A male is in the collection without definite locality. White’s

specimen was from the Philippines, and is also a male. There

is also a small female example from the Fiji Islands (Ovalau)

in the collection, in which the ambulatory legs are prettily

mottled with red.

The specimens before me differ from the description of Z.

japonicus in the form of the ophthalmic scales; and there is

no median series of spinules on the palm; but a line of granules

with difficulty discernible amid the close pubescence exists in

White’s typical example. If they should be distinct, White’s

name of hertiémanus will have to be adopted for them; but a

comparison of the description and figure now given with

Stimpson’s type is needed before the question can be certainly

decided.

Hirpripra.

Remipes testudinarius, Laty.

Celebes, Macassar (three females, one of large size) ; Bat-

jan (a male and female; one of the variety denticulatifrons) ;

Bali (two males) ; New Guinea (two males of var. denticu-

latifrons).

RANINIDEA.

Ranina serrata, Lam.

Bali (a young male).

MACRURA.

T'HALASSINIDEA.

Thalassina anomala.

Cancer anomalus, Herbst, Naturg. Krabben &e. iii. (Heft 4) p. 46,

pl. lxii. (1803).

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 377

Thalassina scorpionides, Latr. Gen. Crust. & Ins. i. p. 51 (1807), nec

Guérin et Milne-Kdwards; Steenstrup & Liitken, Videnskabelige

Meddelelser, p. 257 (1861).

Thalassina gracilis, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii, Cr. i. p. 15, pl. xxxii.

fie. 5 (1852), young?

Samangkabaai, Tandjong (an adult male) ; Borneo, Band-

jermassin (an adult female).

In an old male from W. Borneo, which I am not inclined

to regard as specifically distinct, the spines of the branchial

and hepatic regions are much more prominent, and there are a

few spines on the cardiac region. ‘The hands are less unequal,

and the larger hand is more distinctly granulated and pro-

portionally longer ; its length is more than once and a half

its breadth.

Specimens presenting the characteristics of the adult are in

the Museum collection from the Indian Ocean, Philippines,

and Fijis. In what I consider to be the young of this species

the branchial and hepatic regions and the sides of the hands

are nearly smooth, and there is sometimes but a single spine

on the upper margin of the arm. Specimens are in the

Museum collection from Borneo, Penang, Singapore, the

Indian Ocean, Philippines (designated by White 7. talpa),

and Fiji Islands.

The reference to Herbst’s C. anomalus, given by White, I

have not been able to verify, as the plate is wanting in the

copy of his work in the British Museum.

In the synonymical references I have followed Steenstrup

and Liitken, according to whom the Thalassina scorpionides of

Latreille is not identical with the Chilian species referred to

under the same name by Guérin and Milne-Edwards, and

which Steenstrup and Liitken designate 7. chilensis.

ASTACIDEA.

Scyllarus Haant.

Scyllarus Haani, v. Siebold in De Haan, Faun, Japon. Cr. p. 162,

pl. xxxviii. fig. 1 (1849).

Aroe (Aru ?) Islands (a fine adult male).

This form is distinguished from all the other Scyllar¢ with

which I am acquainted by the remarkable prominence of the

tubercles or elevations on the gastric, cardiac, and intestinal

regions, and second, third, and especially on the fourth post-

abdominal segments; the Aroe-Island specimen agrees very

closely with De Haan’s figure in this and in all other respects.

But slighter prominences occupying similar positions are ob-

servable in S. eguinoctialis, S. squamosus, and S. Steboldii ;

378 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

yet in the adult males in the Museum collection these are

never so prominent as in 8. Haant. 8. Haani is also distin-

guished from the majority of specimens of S. equinoctialis by

the form of the antepenultimate joint of the antenne, which is

arcuate and dentated on its outer margin, and by the ex-

istence of strong spines on the inner margin of this and the

penultimate joint; but there is a specimen from Madeira in

the Museum collection which remarkably approaches 8S.

Haani in these respects ; and it is possible that the examination

of a sufficiently large series would show that the four forms

above cited are but varying conditions of one species ranging

widely through both the Atlantic and Indo-Pacific regions.

The bicarination of the antepenultimate joint of the second

pair of legs in S. Steboldit is not, I believe, a character of

specific value.

From S. latus this species is distinguished not only by

the prominent tubercles on the thorax and postabdomen, but

by the different form of the terminal joint of the antenne, the

absence of distinct serrations on the outer margin of the ante-

penultimate joint, the more distinctly carinated legs, and the

truncated form of the lateral prolongations of the second, third,

and fourth postabdominal segments.

Parribacus antarcticus (Lund).

New Guinea (two young females).

Thenus orientalis, Rumph.

W. Borneo (a female).

Palinurus (Panulirus) fasciatus (Fabr.).

W. Borneo (a female and young male). A larger female

is in the collection, without locality.

Palinurus (Panulirus) ornatus (Fabr.).

Indo-Malayan seas (a female, without locality).

A male and two very young individuals from Amboina

perhaps belong to this species, although in them the original

coloration has entirely disappeared; also a young individual,

probably male, from New Guinea. In the younger indivi-

duals the external genital openings are not distinguishable ;

and I consider the New-Guinea specimen to be a male only on

account of the uniramose appendages of the postabdominal

segments. In young specimens, also, the rudimentary median

spines of the rostral plate are absent. In an adult male of

large size from the Pipon Islands (Cape Melville) in the

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 379

Museum collection, the greenish or bluish rings on the ambu-

latory legs are much interrupted, so that the legs appear to

be irregularly spotted or marbled rather than annulated.

Palinurus (Panulirus) penicillatus (Olivier).

Indo- Malayan seas (a female of small size, without locality).

Palinurus (Panulirus) versicolor (Latr.).

Aroe (Aru?) Islands (a young male, in which the colora-

tion is excellently preserved). A young male from Samang-

kabaai, and two others without definite locality, in the collec-

tion, probably belong to this species. When the character-

istic coloration has disappeared, it is extremely difficult to

distinguish young examples of this species from P. ornatus.

In the adult P. ornatus the spines of the carapace, especially

on the branchial regions, appear to be more numerous than in

P. versicolor.

Palinurus* (Panulirus) longipes, A. M.-Edwards.

As the specimen before me differs in some particulars from

M.-Edwards’s description, I subjoin the following :—Carapace

covered with spines interspersed with numerous smaller

spinules or spinuliform tubercles; none but the smaller

spinules on the sides of the branchial regions of the carapace.

Upper surface of the antennal segment covered with spines

disposed as follows :—two long spines placed somewhat in

front of the middle of the segment; anterior to these, four

small median spinules in a transverse series ; and posterior to

them, six disposed in a semicircle. There are usually indi-

cations of several yet smaller spinuliform tubercles on the

posterior part of the segment; of those above mentioned, all

are not always equally developed.

The dorsal surface of the postabdominal segments is marked

with a transverse uninterrupted sulcus ; their lateral prolonga-

tions terminate each in a long spine; the lateral spines of the

* The British Museum has recently obtained by purchase a specimen

of Palinurus from Sydney Harbour, New 8. Wales, that I refer to the rare

P. Hiigeli, Heller, which is covered by numerous examples of a species

of pedunculated Cirripede which I refer to the species long ago figured

by Quoy and Gaimard (Voy. Astrolabe, pl. xciii. fig. 5, 1854), and desig-

nated by Darwin (from the figure only) as Alepas tubulosa, So far as I

am aware, this species has never been observed since the time of its dis-

covery. As Darwin supposes, it may be distinguished from its congeners

by the smooth, entire, carinated edge of the capitulum. The orifice,

although tubular, is less protuberant than in the specimen figured by

Quoy and Gaimard.

380 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

first postabdominal segment are straight ; in the four following

segments they are curved backwards, and are surmounted by

a second smaller spine, situated at the postero-lateral angles

of the segment ; in the sixth segment there are no postero-

lateral spines. The distal end of the merus of the ambu-

latory legs is armed with two spines. The colour (of

specimens dried and in spirits) is bluish purple or reddish ;

the carapace, larger spines, antenne, and segments of the

postabdomen are covered with numerous pale yellow spots ;

and the legs are marked with longitudinal lines of the same

colour, which are sometimes broken into iregular spots or

blotches.

Indo-Malayan seas (an adult male without locality).

Of this beautifully marked species there are also in the

Museum collection two adult males from Aneiteum (New

Hebrides), and a smaller female from the Mauritius. A,

M.-Edwards also records it from Zanzibar.

In the female the spines on the sternum, between the bases

of the fifth ambulatory legs, which are prominent and well-

developed in the males, are present, although of much smaller

size. The carapace in all the specimens is more or less

covered with short stiff hairs, arranged in short lines in front

of the bases of the spines.

The pale yellow spots on the postabdominal segments are

of unequal size; about four on each segment are larger; and

of these the largest is situated on each side above the base of

the lateral spines.

Enoplometopus pictus, A. Milne-Edwards.

Amboina (an adult male).

The example before me of this very rare and interesting

species, which was previously unrepresented in the Museum

collection, agrees in every particular with the description and

excellent figure of M. A. Milne-Edwards (‘ Faune Carcinolo-

gique,” in Maillard’s ‘ Notes sur l’ile de la Réunion,’ Annexe

F, p. 14, pl. xix. fig. 1), except only that the chele of the

anterior legs are represented as somewhat broader in propor-

tion to their length, with the tubercles of the upper surtace

more developed—characters on which it would certainly not

be safe in any case to separate the two as distinct.

Perhaps the nearest ally of the genus Hnoplometopus is to be

found in LHutrichocheles modestus—a Malaysian form onl

known to me from Herbst’s original figure and description

(Naturg. Krabben u. Krebse, 11. p. 173, pl. xlii. fig. 2, 1794),

and from the few remarks of Prof. Wood-Mason (Proc. Asiatic

Soc. Bengal, p. 231, 1875), by whom the species has lately

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 381

been rediscovered, and the genus Hutrichocheles constituted

for its reception. If, however, the figure be correct (and Mr.

Wood-Mason says it is an accurate representation of the

species), the first pair of legs has a much shorter hand, with

proportionally longer and more strongly toothed fingers; the

second pair of legs terminate in perfectly formed chele,

whereas the third and following pairs are simple. In Eno-

plometopus pictus the penultimate joint of the four posterior

pairs of legs terminates in a mobile spine, against which the

spinuliferous dactylus is partially reflexible.

As the specimen of Hnoplometopus pictus is unique, I have

not been able to dissect the branchiz, so as to make a com-

plete examination of their arrangement. I may observe,

however, that Hnoplometopus is a Homarine form, belonging

to the family Homaride as defined by Prof. Huxley in his

recent classification of the Astacina, by their branchial charac-

ters (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1878, p. 781). As in the genera

Homarus and Nephrops, the podobranchie are completely

divided into a branchial and epipoditic portion ; but the fol-

lowing remarkable peculiarity appears to exist in the structure

of the podobranchia of the second maxillipede. In Homarus

(as Prof. Huxley has pointed out) this gill is completely

differentiated, in the usual way, into a branchia and epipo-

dite ; but in Nephrops the branchial plume is absent or rudi-

mentary. In Enoplometopus, however, so far as can be judged

from the examination of a single specimen and without actual

dissection, the epipoditic portion is absent, the branchial plume

being developed and of the normal structure ; in other words,

the modification of the typical branchia is the exact reverse

of that observed by Prof. Huxley in Nephrops.

There is in the British Museum a specimen, unfortunately

mutilated and in bad condition, of a species of Hnoplometopus

from St. Helena (J. C. Melliss, Hsq.), which is distinguishable

from the Indo-Pacific HL. pictus by the slenderer chelipedes,

which are smooth above, and by the existence of a distinct

tooth on the lateral margin of the second to fifth postabdo-

minal segments (see Pl. XV. fig. 7). This I will designate

LE. dentatus. The rostrum is broken off near the base; and the

branchiz are so rotten, from long immersion in weak spirit,

that unfortunately nothing can be said of their structure with

certainty ; or it would have been interesting to know whether

this Atlantic species assimilates in its branchial characters to

its Indo-Pacitic congener, or to the Mediterranean and North-

European Nephrops, to which Hnoplometopus bears so much

external resemblance. It is of course possible, although it

does not seem probable, that the epipodite, in the single speci-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 26

382 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

men I have examinad, has been broken off, and that the

genus, although presenting greater affinities in its external

characters to Nephrops, is in reality more nearly allied to Ho-

marus.

CARIDEA.

Atya moluccensis. (Pl. XV. figs. 3, 4.)

? Atya moluccensis, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Cr. p. 186 (1849).

Atya armata, A. M.-Edwards, Ann. Soc. Entom. France (ser. 4), iv.

p- 149, pl. iii. fig. 8 (1864).

Java (an adult male); Batjan (an imperfect example) ;

Bali (two females with ova); Celebes, Macassar (an adult

female with ova).

In these specimens the rostrum is slender, acute, and nar-

rowing to its distalend. Inthe adult male from Java (which

agrees excellently with A. M.-Edwards’s description and

figure of A. armata) the third legs are considerably dilated,

and the merus is armed below with a strong spine placed

at some distance from the distal end of the joint. In adult

males from the Samoa Islands of a closely allied species (pro-

bably A. spinipes of Newport), the rostrum is less acuminate,

and appears in a lateral view more rounded toward the distal

end, and the strong spine of the merus of the third legs

is placed quite close to the distal end of the joint (see the

figure, Pl. XV. figs. 5,6). The types both of A. spinipes

and of A. pilipes, Newport, are small and in bad condition ;

and it is probable that they are not specifically distinct. It is

remarkable that the New-Caledonian A. armata should be

identical with (or, at all events, much more nearly allied to)

the Malaysian rather than the Samoan species. ‘Two other

forms described by A. M.-Edwards from New Caledonia, A.

robusta and A. margaritacea, are distinguished by the form

of the rostrum, which is armed at base with two ridges ending

in short spines.

The true habitat of A. pilipes (as I have elsewhere noted)

is Upolu, in the Samoa Islands, not New Zealand (Cat. New-

Zeal. Crust. p. 79, 1876).

Palemon carcinus, Fabr.

Java (an adult and full-grown male) ; Bali (an adult and a

much smaller male).

In the smaller example the rostrum, although nearly of the

same form, is less strongly sinuated, and the teeth are some-

what less numerous (3). In the larger examples the rostra

are respectively 13- and 12-toothed. In these examples the ter-

minal postabdominal segment is less narrowed and acute at

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 383

its distal end than is usual in P. carcinus, and seems to

approach the form of this segment in P. Rosenbergit, a species

recently described by Mr. de Man, and founded on a unique

example. Possibly a larger series would show that the latter

is not specifically distinct.

Palemon ornatus.

Palemon ornatus, Olivier, Encycl. Méth. Hist. Nat. viii. p. 660 (1811);

Latr. Encycl. Méth. Atlas, pl. ecexviii. fig. 1; M.-Edw. Hist. Nat.

Crust. ii. p. 396 (1837); v. Martens, Arch. f. Nat. xxxiv. (i.) p. 36

(1868); Miers, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soe. elxviii. p. 493 (1879).

Palemon vagus, Heller, Sitzb. Ak. Wien, xlv. i. p. 417, pl. ii. figs. 42,

43 (1862).

P. equidens, Heller, t. c. p. 418, pl. il. fig. 44 (1862).

Palemon reunionensis, Hoffmann, Crust. in Recherches faune Mada-

gascar, p. 39, pl. ix. figs. 66, 67 (1874).

Palemon mayottensis, Hoffmann, ¢. c. p. 32, pl. ix. figs. 61, 62 (1874).

Palemon longimanus, Hottmann, t. c. p. 34, pl. ix. figs. 68, 69 (1874).

Celebes, Macassar (an adult male) ; Bali (an adult male).

The identity of P. vagus, Heller, and of P. longimanus,

Hoffmann, with the very common and widely-spread P. orna-

tus is confirmed by Mr. de Man, by whom also P. mayottensis,

Hoffm., is shown to be at most only a local variety of the

same species. On the other hand, Mr. de Man (who had Hoff-

mann’s types before him) regards P. rewnionensis (which 1

have considered identical with P. ornatus) as synonymous

with P. eguidens of Heller, and the latter as distinct from P.

ornatus. P. equidens was originally founded by Dana on an

example in which the second legs were wanting and which is

thus insufficiently known. But I can see no reason for

regarding P. reunionensis or P. equidens as described by

Heller, as distinct from P. ornatus, nor does Mr. de Man

mention any character by which they may be separated with

certainty. Both Heller’s and Hoffmann’s figures of the

second legs show that they resemble those of P. ornatus, both

in the proportions of the joints and characteristic tuberculation

of the fingers.

Palemon dispar.

Palemon dispar, v. Martens, Arch. f. Nat. xxxiv. p. 41 (1868); Miers,

Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. elxviii. p. 493 (1879).

Palemon Alphonsianus, Hoffmann, Rech. faune Madagascar, Cr. p. 35,

pl. ix. figs. 63-65 (1874).

Samangkabaai, Tandjong (an adult male).

In this example the rostrum (which is broken off at the

tip) is Y-toothed. The smaller leg of the second pair is

wanting; but I do not doubt its identity with v. Martens’s

species. The teeth on the inner margins of the fingers are

largest at base, and become smaller or obsolete toward the

26*

384 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

distal end of the fingers in the three specimens in the

Museum collection, which are males. The upper finger (or

dactylus) is, in all three, more curved and a little shorter

than the lower. Besides the specimen from Samangkabaai,

the examples in the Museum are from Rodriguez and the

Samoa Islands.

Palemon lepidactylus, Hilgendorf.

A small male in the collection, without definite locality,

I refer, with some hesitation, to this species. The ros-

tral formula (7) and the form and proportional length of the

joints of the larger leg of the second pair agree exactly with

the description and figure of Hilgendorf (Monatsber. Akad.

Berlin, p. 838, pl. iv. figs. 14-16, 1878). The hairs on the

inner margins of the fingers of the smaller hand, however, are

few and scanty, like those of the larger hand. The granules

with which the surface of the joints of both limbs are covered

are small, and only on the inner margin of each limb are

developed into small spines.

The specimen is of small size, and probably does not pre-

sent the fully adult characteristics.

Besides the above, there are in the collection three examples

of Palemon from Java, which may belong to a new and

distinct species. In all, however, one or other of the large

limbs of the second pair are wanting; and none, probably, of

the specimens present the characters of the fully adult. I

will therefore leave them undescribed for the present. ‘They

differ from P. grandimanus, Randall, in the form of the larger

chela (which is not so greatly dilated and compressed, with

the fingers meeting along their inner edges when closed), from

P. javanicus, Heller, in the much shorter carpus of the second

legs (which is much shorter than the palm), and from P. /ati-

manus, Von Martens, in the more numerous teeth of the

rostrum.

[To be continued. |

XXXVI—On a Collection of Lepidoptera from Madagascar,

with Descriptions of new Genera and Species. By ARTHUR

G. Butter, F.L.8., F.Z.8., &e.

| Continued from p. 344. ]

Liparide.

XANTHODURA, gen. nov.

Form of the eastern genus Dura, but more nearly allied to

Orgyia. The antennz very small; body very short. Prima-

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 385

ries with the costal vein extending to second third of costa ;

discoidal cell extremely short, not extending to the middle of

wing ; subcostal four-branched, all the branches emitted at

some distance beyond the cell, the last, moreover, from below

the main vein ; both radials emitted close together from the

upper extremity of the cell; discocellular marched, second

and third branches emitted near together. Secondaries much

elongated and sublobate in the middle of outer margin be-

tween second and third median branches; cell very short, as

in primaries; costal and subcostal veins emitted from a curved

basal pedicle ; subcostal emitting its two branches from a

short footstalk just beyond the cell, radial emitted trom the

superior extremity of the cell; discocellular slightly marched,

second and third median branches emitted close together from

the inferior extremity of the cell. Type X. tructdata.

39. Xanthodura trucidata, sp. n.

Orange; primaries with the apical third, including the

external border, chocolate-brown, its inner margin, termi-

nating in a patch at external angle, dark blood-red: secon-

daries with a blood-red apical patch; fringe at apex dark

brown; head and collar ferruginous, with white borders;

antenne black. Wings below orange; primaries with the

apical third chocolate-brown ; secondaries with a chocolate-

brown apical patch: body below cream-coloured. Expanse

of wings 1 inch.

LECHRIOLEPIS, gen. nov.

2. Aspect of Cherotriche, but the antenne serrate instead

of pectinate, the anal tuft enormously developed, consi-

derably more so even than in Anaphe; neuration entirely

different. Primaries with the subcostal area partially bare in

the middle, the scales upon it being placed edgeways and

transversely ; these scales are very thick, corneous, and

curved, some of them being considerably more elongated

than the others, and all of them being fringed or finely

serrate at the distal extremity ; costal vein nearly extending:

to apex; subcostal six-branched, the first four branches

being emitted before the end of the cell, the second and

third from a long footstalk, the fifth and sixth branches from

a short footstalk at the superior angle of the cell, the sixth

branch representing the upper radial; discocellular extremely

fine, very oblique, and distinctly angulated; median vein

four-branched, the fourth branch being in reality the lower

radial, but emitted with the third median from a. short

footstalk. Secondaries rather small for the family, and

386 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

with strongly convex costal margin (so that when at rest it

appears in front of the primaries as in Gastropacha), densely

fringed with hair; costal vein bifurcate from base, the supe-

rior furca terminating at the middle of the margin, and the

inferior one a little before apex; subcostal simple, emitted

close to the costal vein, which it almost touches just beyond

the furcation; no discocellular; median vein four-branched.

Type L. anomala.

40. Lechriolepis anomala, sp. n.

Ochreous: primaries traversed by three tawny stripes, the

first of which is slightly irregular and crosses the wing at basal

fourth, the second zigzag and central, the third discal, macular,

and zigzag; a large ferruginous spot in the cell: secondaries

pale towards the base; a central costal brownish dash: abdo-

men pale, with testaceous anal tuft, having dull golden reflec-

tions in fresh females, in which it has not been disturbed for

the purpose of oviposition. Under surface uniformly ochraceous,

excepting the anal tuft; costal area of primaries on each side

of the singularly modified subcostal streak clothed with long

appressed hairs mixed with ordinary scales. Mxpanse of

wings 2 inches 4 lines.

Evidently not a rare species.

This genus is aberrant in almost every character, its

neuration being, in fact, unlike that of any characterized genus

of moths; the arrangement of the scales upon the partially

bare patch on the primaries is, moreover, so abnormal that,

but for the large anal tuft which the female evidently cuts off,

like the genera Huproctis and Porthesia, to cover its eggs with,

I should feel obliged to found a new family for its reception.

As it is, I am satisfied that this and two other genera which I

must characterize here are sufficiently aberrant to be regarded

as a distinet subfamily, for which I therefore propose the name

of Lechriolepidine.

The two following genera were received in previous collec-

tions; but, from their similarity to known genera, their struc-

tural differences were unfortunately overlooked.

RAPHIPEZA, gen. nov.

Allied to Lechriolepis, but with the aspect of Glogane; in

neuration it differs from Lechriolepis as follows :—primaries

with the lower radial emitted from the superior angle of the

cell instead of as a fourth median branch ; discocellular trans-

verse and slightly angulated ; costal vein of secondaries with

its superior furea extremely short, so as to answer the Boch

of a precostal veinlet, subcostal with two branches. In other

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera, — 387

respects it is similar ; the inner margin of the primaries has a

central projecting pateh of scales, amongst which are several

long needle-like steel-blue scales. Antenna with short pecti-

nations. ‘ype &. turbata (Gogane turbata, Butl.) from

Madagascar.

I have again examined the species originally described by

me as Gogane ochrea, and can confirm my statement that it

agrees in structure with Cherotriche, the neuration, antenne,

and other characters of the male being the same as in C. vitel-

lina. The principal difference between Cherotriche and Go-

gane lies in the projecting patch of scales on the inner margin

of the primaries possessed by the latter genus.

CHRYSOPSYCHE, gen. nov.

This genus differs from the preceding (just as Cherotriche

does from Gogane) in the absence of any patch of projecting

scales on the inner margin of the primaries; in all other

characters, including the remarkable patch of transverse horny

scales, it is extremely similar ; the thorax, as in Cherotriche,

is armed with long radiating clavate scales. T ype C. mirifica

(Cherotriche mirifica, Butl.) from Old Calabar.

Neither this genus nor Raphipeza possess the large anal

tuft of Lechriolepis.

Lasiocampide.

41. Lebeda tamatave ?

Lasiocampa tamatave, Guénée in Vinson’s Voyage & Madagascar, Ap-

pendix F, p, 44, n. 28 (1865),

The Lebeda badia of Saalmiiller seems to be a nearly allied

but paler species.

Saturniide.

42. Copawxa subocellata, sp. n.

Wings above primrose-yellow, crossed at basal fourth by an

ill-defined ferruginous stripe, beyond which the ground. colour

to the middle of the wing is washed with reddish ; a diffused

dull ferruginous central stripe limiting ea a broad

aler ferruginous discal belt, the outer margin of which is

dusky, slightly multisinuate on the primaries and zigzag on

the secondaries ; a submarginal series of large subocellate ‘pale

lilac spots, which on the primaries are confluent, their margins

tinted with ferruginous ; outer border, particularly on the

primaries, w ashed with ferruginous ; primaries with a small

ale-zoned black-edged hyaline white semicircular spot at the

end of the cell, base of costa dull rose-coloured: body dull

388 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

rose-coloured, thorax in front and collar ochraceous ; palpi and

head deep rose-coloured ; antenne ochreous ; margins of ab-

dominal segments ochreous. Under surface nearly as above,

but the markings less distinct. Zxpanse of wings 4 inches

4 lines.

Limacodide.

CROTH.MA, gen. nov.

@. Aspect of Hdibessa, but apparently nearer to Alpis.

Primaries trigonate, the costal margin nearly straight, outer

margin very slightly convex, inner margin distinctly convex ;

under surface of primaries deeply hollowed out behind the

costal border, which consequently stands up like a wall in

front of the cell; costal vein extending to second third of costa,

discoidal cell very wide ; subcostal vein five-branched, the first

three branches emitted before the end of the cell, the fourth and

fifth from the same point at the anterior extremity of the cell ;

upper discocellular transverse, emitting the upper radial from its

centre; lower discocellular oblique, so that the lower radial looks

like a fourth median branch ; two convergent recurrent veins

from the discocellulars to beyond the middle of the cell, median

veins emitted at equal distances towards the end of the cell.

Secondaries ovoid ; costal vein extending to apex ; subcostal

two-branched, both emitted from the end of the cell, but not

from the same point; discocellulars zigzag, emitting the radial

from the middle and sending back two convergent recurrent

veins into the cell as in the primaries; median vein three-

branched. Body rather slender for the family; antennze thick

and compressed, but not pectinate; legs rather long, tibie

with long spurs. Type C. sericea.

43. Crothema sericea, sp. n. (no. 56).

Primaries above silky pink; a patch at base of costa, a

broad, irregular, interrupted, oblique central patch and an

oblique apical patch bronzy greenish, with whitish borders :

secondaries salmon-coloured,sericeous: thorax bronzy greenish,

abdomen bright rose-red. Under surface rose-coloured, costal

margins and apices of wings and legs yellowish. Expanse of

wings 1 inch 7 lines.

Cosside.

44, Hypopta breviculus.

ossus breviculus, Mabille, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1880, p. 344.

3. Primaries snow-white, clouded with grey and trans-

versely reticulated with grey and black; a quadrate reddish-

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 389

brown spot on the lower radial interspace between two

divergent black lines, and a second just beyond the middle of

the interno-median area: secondaries sordid white, with pure

white fringe: body pale silky brownish, with the head and

collar slightly darker. Primaries below with the markings °

very indistinct: secondaries rather whiter than above, with

the base of the fringe and two or three subapical striz grey :

body below whitish; legs banded with blackish. Expanse

of wings 1 inch.

Some examples are rather smaller than the type.

Notodontidz.

45. Rigema ornata.

Rigema ornata, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. Suppl. 2, p. 437 (1865).

Previously known only from Natal.

Erebide.

46. Sypna complicata, sp. n.

Greyish fuliginous: primaries very dark, blackish upon basal

half excepting upon the costa; two slender twisted white lines

across the basal area; an oblique zigzag white line from costa

to inner margin across the middle of the cell; a white-edged

pentagonal black patch over the end of the cell, two or three

very irregular twisted white lines crossing the wing trans-

versely just beyond the cell; a deeply sinuated white line

limiting the external border, which is pale ; a marginal series

of white-edged black spots ; fringe white, tipped with blackish :

secondaries with a diffused blackish discal belt, which becomes

quite black, and is bordered externally by an angulated white

line at anal angle; fringe as in primaries; an indistinct

oblique apical white line: head and collar testaceous, remain-

der of body above densely clothed with pale brown and whitish

scales. Wings below greyish, speckled with white: primaries

with a spot in the cell, an arched belt just beyond the middle,

the external border from near apex almost to the first median

branch, and an oblique dash at external angle whitish ; the

marginal spots and fringe nearly as above: secondaries with

a dusky-bordered, whitish-speckled, arched postmedian belt ;

outer border whitish; a blackish spot at the end of the cell:

body below greyish fuliginous. Expanse of wings 2 inches

1 line.

Hitherto the described species of this genus have all come

from the Indian region.

390 =Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

Ophiuside.

47. Ophiodes tirrhea 8.

Phalena Noctua Tirrhea, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. p. 116, pl. 172, fig. E

(1779).

The secondaries of the male are spotless. Unless all the

species of this type are to be regarded as varieties of one type,

the European form will have to be kept separate under the

name OQ. vesta of Esper.

Ennomide.

48. Marcala? modesta, sp. n.

Dull clay-coloured, sericeous ; wings crossed from apex of

primaries to abdominal margin of secondaries by a straight

oblique brown line ; a black discocellular spot on all the wings,

as well as three more or less defined abbreviated series of

pearly-bordered black spots across the inner half of the disk ;

fringe reddish clay-coloured : body pale, the head, collar, and

front of thorax yellowish. Under surface pale buff, reddish

towards coste and outer margin of primaries, the internal

border of the same wings white; oblique line less distinct

than above; discocellular spots smaller. Hxpanse of wings

1 inch 2 lines.

The known species of Marcala are Indian; the genus is

allied to Drepanodes and Crocinis.

Geometride.

49. Comibena stibolepida.

Comibena stibolepida, Butler, Cist. Ent. ii. p. 694 (1879).

The example now received measures 2 lines more than the

type in expanse of wings.

50. Thalera Cowant, sp. n.

Wings above sap-green, with chocolate-brown discocellular

dots and outer margin ; a dentate-sinuate dark sap-green dis-

cal line, oblique in primaries, angulated irregularly in secon-

daries ; fringe snow-white ; primaries with the costal margin

brown: thorax greenish ; head and base of antenne snow-

white, pectinations of antenne yellowish, the greater part of

the main stem ferruginous. Under surface pale creamy

yellow ; wings with laky-brown outer margin and white

fringe ; primaries with the costal area washed with reddish,

costal margin brown; femora and tibie reddish in front. Ex-

panse of wings | inch 3 lines.

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 391

51. Thalassodes glacialis, sp. n.

Wings above glistening white, semihyaline; primaries

crossed by two zigzag series of white-edged sap-green spots ;

the outer one upon the disk continued across the secondaries ;

costal margin of primaries yellowish : body white, palpi ferru-

ginous, antenne testaceous. Wings below tinted with pale

buff, especially the primaries, in which the costal margin is

also bright golden yellow: body below pale buff. Expanse

of wings 10 lines.

The secondaries of this species are very slightly angulated ;

so that possibly it may eventually have to be placed with

other described species in a distinct genus.

Acidaliide.

52. Zanclopteryx puella, sp. n.

Snow-white ; wings semitransparent, with opaline reflec-

tions: primaries very acuminate at apex, costal margin

golden buff; all the wings with a black dot at the end of the

cell, a series of black dots on the veins across the disk, a

greyish submarginal stripe, and a marginal series of black dots :

antenne, tips of palpi, and an elongated triangular spot at the

base of each of the first three segments of the abdomen golden

buff; proboscis yellow: upper surface of tibie of front legs

golden buff. Wings below with a small dot at the end of the

cell; primaries with golden costal border, otherwise immacu-

late: body below white. Hxpanse of wings 1 inch 8 lines.

In form and general appearance this species comes nearest

to Z. aculeataria.

I have very little doubt that the genera Argyris and Auzata

will prove by breeding to be closely allied to Ciliv and refe-

rable to the Drepanulide ; they are, however, always placed

close to Zanclopteryx.

Fidoniide.

53. Panagra rachicera, sp. n.

Pale shining whity brown, with the centre of primaries and

the basal third of secondaries semihyaline white, limited exter-

nally by a dusky line from apex of primaries to abdominal

margin of secondaries ; the whole surface indistinctly striated

with pale brown and sparsely speckled with black: secondaries

with an irregular discal series of six black spots in pairs, the

two central ones largest. Below, secondaries washed with

sandy yellowish, the veins, costa of primaries, and the oblique

line (which is diffused) distinctly golden yellow: body below

creamy whitish. Expanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.

392 ~=Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera,

In this species the pectinations of the antenne exhibit the

branching peculiar to this genus more prominently than in

any species which I have seen.

Zerenidez.

RHODOPHTHITUS, gen. nov.

Nearly allied to Icterodes and Vindasura, but with the pri-

maries more elongated, the secondaries considerably shorter,

and the palpi longer. ‘Type &. formosus.

54. Rhodophthitus formosus, sp. Nn.

Primaries above flesh-coloured, with yellow costal border

speckled with dull black, an oblique costal dash at basal

third, a spot at the end of the cell, a very irregular subapical

costal spot, and an oblique patch on inner margin near the

external angle dull black ; a grey streak at external angle; a

faint indication of a brownish stripe connecting the subapical

costal spot with the internal patch: secondaries rosy pink,

with the outer half of abdominal area whitish, crossed by a

black patch ; several black spots in the cell; a transverse

discocellular black spot: head black, antenne dark brown ;

collar saffron-yellow ; thorax flesh-coloured ; abdomen yellow,

irregularly spotted with black. Under surface rosy pink,

costa of primaries bright yellow; spots as above ; pectus deep

rose-red ; knees of legs blackish, tibiz and tarsi greyish ; ven-

ter yellow at the sides, with lateral black spots. Expanse of

wings 2 inches.

In general coloration this insect is extremely unlike other

Zerenide ; but in neuration it scarcely differs from Jcterodes.

Larentiide.

55. Emielesia sublutea, sp. n.

Wings above shining sordid white, the basal area crossed

by three irregular arched slaty-grey stripes, prominent black

discocellular spots : primaries with the external third dark

grey, spotted with black ; a marginal series of black spots;

fringe brown, whitish in the centre, spotted with black: se-

condaries with a lunulated ferruginous stripe just beyond the’

middle; external area snow-white, with the apex and an inter-

rupted submarginal series of spots black; an almost marginal

series of ferruginous spots and a marginal series of black

spots connected by a slender undulating line; fringe whity

brown, becoming dark brown at apex: body brownish, with

lateral black spots. Under surface straw-yellow : primaries

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 393

with the costa black-spotted, basal area specked with blackish,

the cell terminating in a large black spot; a dark grey spot

on each of the median branches ; external third black-brown,

with a costal spot, an apical spot, a spot on outer margin, and

a dot at external angle yellow: secondaries with a small lunule

at the end of the cell and a large apical spot black, several

scattered greyish dots and lines. Expanse of wings 11 lines.

The general appearance of this species is very similar to

that of Sandava scitisignata (Cidaria scitisignata= Sandava

melaleucata= Istarba varialis of Walker) from Australia.

Hypenide.

56. Agamana insignis, sp. n.

3d. Primaries above dull pink, changing to flesh-colour

internally, the costal margin reddish ferruginous ; a sinuous

white-edged blackish-olive band, widest towards the base of

inner margin, where it commences, compressed in the middle,

then angulated externally, and tapering to the apex; a black

dot at the end of the cell: secondaries pale fuliginous brown,

with darker outer border; costal area whity brown; fringe

rosy greyish: thorax reddish olivaceous, barred with pink ;

abdomen pale fuliginous brown; palpi red internally. Under

surface pale brown ; primaries with the central area greyish,

the inner margin whitish; secondaries with whitish basal

area: body below whity brown, legs reddish. Expanse of

wings 1 inch 6 lines. :

The palpi of this species differ from those of the typical

species in being porrect instead of depressed: the specimen of

that species, however, is a female; and in the sexes of the

Deltoids there is frequently a considerable difference in the

palpi. The neuration appears to be identical.

Cledeobiide.

57. Actenia? signata, sp. n.

Most like A. brunnealis: primaries flesh-tinted, black-

speckled, with diffused olive-brown borders; a broad, exter-

nally diffused, dark brown oblique stripe across the basal

fourth, and an internally diffused similar but angulated stripe

across the disk; a large, whitish-bordered, black spot at the

end of the cell: secondaries stramineous: head and thorax

flesh-tinted ; abdomen stramineous. Under surface strami-

neous: wings crossed by a greyish discai stripe and with

sordid external border, blackish discocellular spots ; prima-

ries with the base of the cell greyish. Expanse of wings

1 inch.

394 Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera.

Gelechiide.

58. Gelechia insularis, sp. n.

Dark fuliginous brown: primaries crossed before the middle

by a broad, pale-edged, golden-ochreous belt, which does not

quite reach the costal margin; a small, ocelloid, black-brown

spot, margined with stramineous, beyond the cell, followed

immediately by an externally blackish-bordered, curved,

golden-ochreous discal band; apex and outer margin whity

brown; marginal line black; fringe ochreous at apex and

for a short distance along the costa: secondaries paler than

primaries, without markings: head golden opaline; an-

tenn banded with whitish; palpi with a central band and

the apical joint whitish. Under surface paler than above

and more sericeous: primaries with the apical costal fringe

ochreous, inner border whitish, markings of the upper sur-

face obsolete; secondaries with the apical area apparently

speckled with dark grey and whitish. Expanse of wings

6 lines.

59. Cryptolechia argillacea, sp. n.

Primaries above reddish ochraceous, with darker punctiform

orbicular and reniform spots, base of inner margin ferru-

ginous; secondaries very pale stramineous; thorax reddish

ochraceous; head whitish; palpi brown, with white apical

joint ; abdomen pale stramineous. Under surface pale stra-

mineous ; wings washed with ochreous along the costal bor-

ders, primaries also along the external border, and secondaries

from apex to about the second median branch. Expanse of

wings 1 inch 23 lines.

The following undescribed butterflies are in the collection of

the late W. C. Hewitson.

Charaxes relatus, sp. 0.

g. Nearly allied to C. zoolina, but the primaries above

much less obscured with brown at the base, and with the

abbreviated band arrested at the second instead of at the first

median branch; the spots on the apical area smaller, the one

just above the third median branch reduced to a mere point:

secondaries much more elongated, the border with sharply

cut straight inner edge, the transverse black line across the

subcostal branches wanting, the submarginal spots reduced

to points, the deep orange border replaced by a much shorter

greenish-yellow border. Wings below with all the bands

considerably darker and margined with black, the silvery spot

Mr. A. G. Butler on Madagascar Lepidoptera. 395

on the posterior extremity of the third band of primaries

transferred to the costa of secondaries ; submarginal spots of

primaries considerably enlarged: secondaries with the inner

series of silvery spots on the outer border reduced to one or

two squamose lines, the submarginal spots five in number, and

' the ocelloid anal spots consequently reduced to three in

number; the anal area and border dull greenish instead of

orange. HExpanse of wings 2 inches 6 lines.

This species is referred to as an unknown form at p. 100

of the Catalogue of the Collection.

Tolaus argentarius 3, Butler.

The male of this species is of a beautiful steel-blue colour

with azure reflections : primaries above with the costa brown,

the apical half brown with zigzag inner edge; secondaries

with the costal border brown, the abdominal area rather

broadly pale greyish brown, two large, internally whitish-

edged and externally blue-edged black spots above the tails,

and two or three small linear spots connecting these with the

costal border. Wings below greyish brown, with white-

bordered black lines and spots arranged as in the female, and

with the same orange-bordered black spot and black-centred

emerald-green anal spot. LExpanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.

The female which accompanies this male is not of the same

pure colour as the type on the under surface, the ground-colour

being distinctly grey, and the white borders of the black lines

almost as distinctly visible as in the male.

Catopsilia rufosparsa, sp. Nn.

Q?. Above like the Indian C. gnoma, but below of a dull

dark ochraceous colour, with the cross reticulations much more

numerous and orange instead of greenish grey, and mixed

with blood-red speckling ; the discal spots indistinct and con-

fused, only represented by subconfluent groups of reddish

scales as in C. florella; silver spots smaller. Expanse of

wings 2 inches 6 lines.

The type also differs from C. gnoma on the upper surface

in the confluence of the apical marginal red spots and the

absence of any trace of a discal series, in the absence of a

white vein across the discoidal black stigma, in the pink tint

of the secondaries, and the presence of a marginal series of

red spots upon the yellow border; but all these characters

may vary, whereas tlie denser reticulation and confused spec-

kling of the under surface is characteristic of African and not

of Indian species. (See p. 33 of Catalogue of Hewitson’s

Collection.)

396 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

XXXVII.—The Sponge-fauna of Norway ; a Report on the

Rev. A. M. Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Nor-

wegian Coast. By W. J. Sonuas, M.A., F.R.S.E.,

F.G.S., &e.

{Continued from p. 259. ]

[Plate XVII. ]

Group Groprwa, Carter (continued).

Genus Isops*, nov. Type J. Phlegrei, sp. nov.

(Geodia auct.)

Diagnosis.—Excurrent and incurrent apertures similar, be-

ing the freely open ends of simple cylindrical tubes, which sink

directly into the rind of the sponge and end at its inner sur-

face in sphinctral muscles.

Observations.—The ostia of the canal-system are of very

various sizes, forming a series in which the largest pass into

the smallest by almost insensible gradations. The larger

apertures serve as excurrent and the smaller as incurrent

ostia.

The simple nature of the ostia and the identity in structure

of the incurrent and excurrent ostia and ostial tubes con-

stitute a good distinction between this genus and its allies—

Geodia, Cydonium, and Pachymatisma. |

The incurrent ostial tubes of Jsops may be regarded as

equivalent to the chones of the preceding genera deprived of

their perforate (poriferous) roof.

The excurrent ostial tubes differ from those of Geodia in

being simple and dispersed, the cribriform area or ostial tube

with many sphincters of Geodia being possibly due to the

integration or coalescence of a number of simple tubes

similar to those of Lsops, thus :—

1. Ostial tubes of Zsops, closely congregated.

2. Excurrent tube of Geodia, formed by the coalescence of similar

ostial tubes.

* loos, equal; dy, an eye (hence a hole).

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 397

How far other distinctive characters will be found con-

stantly associated with those given as diagnostic of the genus

Lsops, one cannot at present say. As yet only a single repre-

sentative of the genus (/. Phlegre?) is known to me; between

itand Geodia Barrett’, however, very characteristic differences

exist. Thus the former does not possess any of the small

acerate spicules, which, projecting erectly from its surface,

form the fine superficial down of G. Barrett’; they appear to

be entirely replaced by the large long-shafted spicules which

form the externally projecting fascicular ends of the internal

spicular fibres. The trifid heads of the long-shafted spicules,

moreover, do not, as in G. Barrettd, apply themselves with

horizontally extended rays to the inner surface of the globate

layer, but, projecting forwards, penetrate and terminate within

the globate layer. At present, however, it is uncertain whe-

ther these characteristic differences are generic or specific

merely,

Isops Phlegrai*, n. sp.

Sponge more or less spherical, about 1 inch in diameter ;

surface hispid (when unworn) by the protrusion of long-shafted

spicules for about 0°15 inch beyond it; when the spicules are

worn away the surface is smooth and of a faint greyish colour.

Excurrent and incurrent ostia simple, numerous, scattered.

Each ostium a small round or oval opening, situated on the

summit of a conical elevation, which is very variable in size,

but always minute, the largest measuring 0°125 inch in

diameter at the base, and 0-025 inch at the summit; in some

cases the elevation may be almost entirely absent, the ostium

then lying flush with the general surface of the sponge.

Over some parts of the surface small white spots occur, some

of which are really and some only apparently imperforate, the

latter showing a minute central aperture on magnification.

These are the smallest ostia present ; between them and those

of the largest perforate monticule we have others of every

intermediate size.

Skeleton.—The skeleton consists of long-shafted spicules,

globates, and stellates.

Thick long-shafted Spicules.—(i) a simple, sharp-pointed,

fusiform acerate, 0°24 inch long by 0:0025 inch broad

(Pl. XVII. fig. 5); (ii) a trifid spicule with simple, forward-

projecting rays, shaft 0°16 inch long, 0:0017 inch broad, rays

0°025 inch long (Pl. XVII. fig. 7); (iii) a trifid spicule, with

* In reference to the ostial elevations of its surface, reminding one of

the Campi Phlegreei.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 27

398 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

irregular bifurcated rays, shaft 0°13 inch long, rays 0°034 inch

long (Pl. XVII. fig. 9).

Slender long-shafied Spicules.—(i) a simple sharp-pointed

acerate, 0°0004 inch thick; (ii) a trifid spicule with rays

recurved anchor-like, 0°0008 inch thick (PI. XVII. fig. 6) ;

(iii) a trifid spicule with rays directed forwards, 0:0008 inch

thick (Pl. XVII. fig. 8).

Stellates.—(i) a sphero-stellate with a large body and nu-

merous short conical rays, 0°0005 inch in diameter (Pl. XVII.

fig. 12); (ii) a stellate with small body and a few long rays,

usually about 0°0008 inch in diameter (PI. XVII. fig. 13),

but often becoming exceptionally large, as much as 0°0015

(Pl. XVII. fig. 10), or rarely even 0-0027 inch in diameter.

Globates.—Oblate and prolate ellipsoids, the latter with one

minor axis shorter than the other; covered superficially by erect

tubercles, having a more or less flattened polygonal summit,

from the corners of which minute short slightly recurved spines

are produced. Diameter 0°0036 inch (Pl. XVII. fig. 14).

Locality. Kors Fiord, Station No. 23: 180 fathoms.

Observations.—A section across the sponge shows a thin

rind (0°025 inch thick) enclosing a greyish-yellow mark,

which is traversed by numerous canals of various sizes. Those

large enough to be plainly visible to the naked eye have

smooth glistening walls, concentrically striated by fine ruge :

some take a concentric, others a radiate course, the same canal

being concentric in one part of its course and radiate at

another. ‘The crypts are very irregular in size, some being

markedly larger than others; they have lost the characters

which distinguish them in Stelletta Normant, and appear to

be the cut ends of concentric canals, precisely similar to those

occurring in the mark, and only differmg in being situated

immediately beneath the rind; indeed it occurs to one to

suggest that both in this instance and in Geodia Barretti the

concentric canals are merely the cryptal canals left behind in

the progressive increase of the sponge.

Histology.

1. The Cortex.—The epidermis consists of a very distinct

transparent, colourless, and apparently structureless cuticle,

lying quite separate from the succeeding dermal layer; no

nuclei nor cell-borders are observable in it (Pl. X VIL. fig. 11, c).

The dermal layer consists of very definite colourless, granular,

oval cells, lying quite separate from one another, and forming

a layer of variable thickness ; sometimes it thins out altogether

and lets down the epidermis into immediate contact with the

globate layer ; sometimes, on the other hand, it thickens ont

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 399

so as to become three or four cells deep; but usually it con-

sists of a single layer of cells only. Just below the epidermis

sphero-stellates occur between the dermal cells, their rays pro-

jecting against the epidermal membrane (PI. XVII. fig. 11, d).

No vesicular nor gelatinous connective tissue is observable

in the dermis.

The Globate Layer.—The structure of this does not differ

from that described as existing in Geodia Barrett’, except by

the absence of vesicular connective-tissue cells from the trian-

gular spaces left between the fibrillar ligaments ; these cells are

replaced here, as elsewhere in Jsops Phlegrez, by gelatinous

connective tissue. The most exterior, and therefore oldest, of

the globates of the rind are very often hollow within, the

small central cavity which exists in the ordinary adult globate

having become enlarged to a great but variable extent. This

occurs as the result of an absorption which begins at the inner

ends of the trichites, and, extending radiately outwards, repro-

duces the early form of the young globate as a hollow cast

within the old one; the same result is broughtabout by exposing

the solid mature globates to the action of boiling caustic

potash, as described by me in a previous communication to

this Magazine (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xx.

p- 292).

Subcortical Layer (Pl. XVII. fig. 4).—The purely fibrous

part of this (fig. 4, /), which lies immediately beneath the

globate layer, is very thin, and passes below into gelatinous

connective tissue (fig. 4, c), in which fibres like those of the

fibrous layer lie loose and more or less apart from each

other, and being consequently well defined are easily studied

tn situ. They are hyaline and fusiform, with attenuated ends,

sometimes greatly prolonged ; a central axis is rarely visible ;

more usually the interior is occupied by an axial cavity ; gene-

rally it would appear empty, but sometimes contains a small

refringent spherule, which I take to be a nucleolus, and is some-

times filled with colourless granular material. The axial cavity

may be relatively very small, a mere slit in the centre of the

fibre ; or it may be large, perforating the whole length of the

fibre, and converting it into a genuine tube. The tube so

formed is liable to split open at one end; when this happens

the slit wall uncurves and spreads out into a thin lamina.

The hyaline wall of the fibre frequently also becomes fibril-

lated and sometimes apparently laminated ; it then becomes

liable to exfoliation or defibrillation, as the case may be.

The gelatinous connective tissue consists of a colourless,

structureless, soft matrix, containing numerous dispersed oval

nuclei surrounded by a small quantity of granular colourless

21"

400 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

protoplasm, from which in many cases very fine fibrils are

prolonged irregularly in various directions. Here and there

greyish granular oval cells (Pl. XVII. fig. 16), which have a

very distinct outline, and stain deeply with carmine, occur in

the matrix. Each one generally occupies a corresponding

cavity in the matrix, from which it is completely separated

except at one or two points of contact; this separation is

probably the result of contraction after placing in spirit.

These cells are often pointed at one end, which differs from

the rest of the cell in being hyaline and more refringent.

The pointed end is sometimes produced into a fine structure-

less fibre (Pl. XVII. fig. 15).

2. The Mark.—The substance of the mark consists of

minute granules abundantly dispersed throughout a struc-

tureless colourless matrix, forming a greyish tissue, in which

small oval nuclei occur at intervals. It stains generally with

carmine, but not so deeply as the corresponding tissue of

Stelletta Normand and Geodia Barretti.

It never presents any appearance which might suggest that

it consists of a number of separate but closely apposed cells,

although, from the remarkably perfect manner in which other

delicate histological features of the sponge are preserved, one

would expect evident signs of such a constitution if it existed ;

and as, on the other hand, it is not a mere gelatinous connec-

tive tissue like the mark of Thenea Wallichit and many other

sponges, we may at least provisionally regard it as a genuine

syncytium.

' 8. The Skeleton. Long-shafted Spicules—The long ace-

rates lie longitudinally side by side, forming spicular fibres,

which take chiefly a radiate direction from the centre of the

sponge towards the rind. On approaching the rind the con-

stituent spicules of each fibre diverge from each other and

pass out of the sponge in the form of a fascicle; at the same

time trifid spicules put in an appearance, the coarser forms

having their heads within, below, and outside the rind, the

finer, grapnel-like and slender fork-like forms bearing their

heads exclusively outside and at some distance from the rind.

In Geodia Barretti, it will be recollected, all forms of trifid

spicules were exclusively confined to the interior of the sponge,

their heads occurring just beneath the rind. The frequent

irregularity in the form of the bifurcated ternate spicule of

Zsops is caused by the obstruction of the globates in which

it is imbedded, these obstacles hindering its free growth.

With each spicular bundle or fibre is associated a tract of

tissue very similar to, and, indeed, almost identical with,

that of the subcortical layer; it consists ef (i) finely granu-

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 401

lar cells, which do not differ in general characters from

the isolated definite oval cells which have already been

mentioned as occurring here and there in the mark and sub-

cortical layer: many of them, indeed, are identical with these

in all respects; but most differ in form, becoming much elon-

gated in the direction of the spicular bundle, and thus acqui-

ring a more or less fusiform outline. The nucleus is involved

in this change of form, becoming also elongated and fusiform;

but the nucleolus is unaffected and retains its spherical form.

These fusiform cells, by becoming gradually hyaline, afford

an easy passage into (ii) ordinary hyaline fibres of precisely

the same nature as those of the subcortical layer; they lie

parallel to the spicules of the spicular bundle, to which they

form an enclosure. Sometimes a surrounding band of con-

centric fibres occurs around the bundle. Finally, (111) a small

quantity of gelatinous connective tissue is in places associated

with the spicular bundles.

Where the spicular bundles enter the cortex the fusiform

hyaline fibres can be easily followed, diverging from the spi-

cules in a gentle outward curve and entering the subcortical

layer, which therefore may be regarded as an extension of the

tissue of the spicular tract, modified by increase of growth

and change of direction. ‘The change of direction is in ac-

cordance with that of the long-shafted spicules, the trifid ends

or distal rays of which tend, on reaching the rind, to become

more concentric and less radiate in direction. Just below the

place where the fibre curves from the spicules to the cortex a

number of granular cells, like those described in the same

position in S. Normant, are often found accumulated. ;

In addition to a tissue of the bundle there is the tissue of

each individual spicule, each being invested in an excessively

thin structureless membrane containing small round nuclei

surrounded by fine granules and very thin structureless fibrils

(Pl. XVII fig. 2,s). Now and then one finds isolated hyaline

fibres encircling a spicule like a girdle (Pl. XVII. fig. 2, 2) ;

the meaning of this feature, which is to be found in other

related sponges, is not apparent.

Globates.—The structure and development of these spicules

can be studied with great facility in this sponge. ‘The earliest

form consists of a cell (Pl. XVII. fig. 21, s) of the same size as

the common, isolated, oval, granular cell of the mark (Pl. X VIL.

fiz. 21, m) ; it contains the little sphere of radiate trichites,

which are united together at their inner ends about a small,

central, spherical space ; externally they terminate in a layer

of hyaline sareode or cell-wall. On one side of the cell is

imbedded a round or, more commonly, oval nucleus with its

402 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

contained spherical nucleolus. By treating with a 5-per-cent.

solution of caustic potash, the cell-wall expands and separates

from the contained globates completely (Pl. XVII. fig. 19).

With age a hilum is formed, as previously described in the

case of G. Barretti; but the nucleus merely occupies and does

not completely fill the hilum (Pl. XVII. fig. 18), as errone-

ously stated in the previous description (Ann. & Mag. Nat.

Hist. ser. 5, vol. v. p. 256). The external ends of the trichites

grow much thicker with age, and assume a sharp conical

form; the sharp ends of the conical spines then become

rounded off and pass into rounded conical tubercles ; these

finally become flattened and spined round the summit, and

the globate is complete. Absorption next ensues. The adult

globate always exhibits in section a small central cavity

with fine radiate canals proceeding from it; the effect of

absorption is to enlarge this cavity and its radiate canals, so

that the globate becomes eventually a mere thick-walled shell,

its walls being perforated by radiate canals of wide diameter

which extend along the axes of the exterior tubercles, and

almost but not quite open to the exterior (Pl. XVII. fig. 24).

It appears that the layer of tubercles is liable to separate as

a thin shell from the rest of the globate spicule.

Stellates——The same kind of distribution of the stellates

occurs here as in G. Barretti and S. Normani; none but the

sphero-stellates occur immediately beneath the epidermis ;

elsewhere the second kind of stellates (Pl. XVII. fig. 13) are

chiefly found ; the sphero-stellates occur in the mark imme-

diately beneath the rind, but less abundantly than the other

forms. ‘The small-bodied stellates occur lining the interior of

the sphinctral canal, in the subcortical layer, and generally

through the mark, but especially in the wall of the water-

canals.

4, The Water-canal System.—The characters of the incur-

rent and excurrent ostial tubes have already been referred to ;

as they appear to represent the chones of other Corticatee, it

will be convenient to distinguish them as incurrent and ex-

current chones. The two kinds of chones differ only in size,

both being freely open distally and closed below by a sphinc-

ter, which protrudes downwards into a canal which here re-

presents the crypt (Pl. XVII. figs. 1, 3, 20). Thus there is

no endochone, and the chones are the equivalents of the

ectochone alone.

The incurrent chone leads into a canal which extends

parallel to the surface just below the rind for a variable dis-

tance, giving off one or more branches, which descend radiately

into the interior, and break up into still smaller canals.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 403

These canals are all exceedingly well defined, and all but the

very smallest are provided with a distinct wall, which is

transversely ridged by concentric ruge. Short narrow cana-

liculi lead from the walls of these incurrent canals, main

trunks, branches, and twigs alike, and open abruptly into the

surrounding ciliated chambers. At a point generally opposite

that at which the incurrent canaliculus enters, the ciliated

chamber is gradually produced into an excurrent canaliculus,

which is somewhat wider and less well defined than the corre-

sponding incurrent vessel. ‘The excurrent canaliculi join gra-

dually together to form a trabecular tube, which, joining with

others of a similar character, at length lead into a large canal

with very definite and transversely rugate walls. This canal

finally opens into an excurrent chone through a sphincter, and

so communicates with the exterior.

There is a great difference in the way in which the ultimate

canals of the excurrent and incurrent tubes are connected with

the larger canals: in the former, as previously mentioned,

the junction is gradual, the ultimate canals enlarging a little

towards the point of junction, and then flowing together at an

acute angle; in the latter the ultimate branches are given off

abruptly and, remaining of about the same diameter, end

abruptly ; they also make rather a right than an acute angle

with the larger. branches. ‘The figures of the annexed woodcut

show the difference in character of the ultimate canals of the

two systems very plainly.

1. The ultimate end (7) of an incurrent canal, proceeding from the

noe branch (p), which is vesicular and provided with

iaphragms to the end (x 70).

2. The ultimate ends of an exewrent tube gathering to form a penulti-

mate trabecular tube, which has been cut across transversely.

AN4 Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

The Chones (Pl. XVII. figs. 1, 3).—These, as well as the

whole of the canal-system, with the exception of the ciliated

chambers, are lined by a delicate epithelial layer.

Their walls are chiefly composed of concentrically arranged

fusiform fibres, very sumilar to muscle-fibre, but staming much

less intensely with carmine. Near the lower end of the chone

this layer becomes continuous with the thick conical muscle

which “plugs” the bottom of the chone and protrudes its

apex into the subjacent crypt. The mass of the musele con-

sists of true, fusiform, muscular fibres concentrically arranged

around a central canal, which is lined by epithelium and

associated sharp-rayed stellates. The subcortical layer, where

it joins the muscle, frequently dovetails with it, thrusting a

small wedge of gelatinous connective tissue (c) into its side

and receiving on its lower face a short superficial extension of

the muscle-fibres, while its upper strictly fibrous portion (/)

passes gradually into the muscle, the muscle having very

much the appearance of being an over-development of the

subcortical fibrous layer: this appearance is probably very

near the truth, both structures having most likely been de-

rived from a primitively indifferent fibrous layer, which on the

one hand became modified into connective and on the other

into muscular fibres. The chones are clearly the modified

outermost vesicles of their associated canals, and their sphinc-

ters the modified ruge of these canals. Hence the canal-walls

contribute a share to the formation of the fibrous layer of the

cortex.

The Canals.—The ultimate ramifications of the canal-system,

as well as the smaller trunks into which they collect, are

simple excavations in the mark lined by epithelium, which

gives them, especially those having an incurrent function, a

very sharp and definite outline. In the case of the larger

canals the mark immediately surrounding them becomes a

little less granular than elsewhere, and stains a little less

deeply with carmine; hyaline fusiform fibres and sometimes

granular fusiform cells appear in it, sometimes lying separate

from each other, sometimes accumulated side by side and

with overlapping ends forming a fibrous band. They are ar-

ranged both longitudinally and transversely with respect to

the axis of the canal; but in the trabecular excurrent canals

their position is governed by that of the trabecule, which

they traverse more or less longitudinally. The structure of a

canal-wall when fully developed exhibits, in transverse section,

first, on the inside, a layer of epithelium, next a layer as much

as 0°00125 inch thick of fibrous tissue, and then a layer of

gelatinous connective tissue adjoining the mark.

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 405

The canals, especially the incurrent ones, are ridged _trans-

versely by circular ruge, which are simply thin lamellar

extensions of the wall, composed of epithelium and a small

quantity of a tissue containing numerous very fine fibrille,

which are arranged concentrically in each ruga and are

slightly moreabundant along its edgethanelsewhere. Theruge

are often so greatly developed as to form iris-like diaphragms

extending almost halfway across the canal; and as the canal

is also constricted around the origin of the diaphragm, it thus

becomes divided into a series of bladder-like compartments.

This vesicular character occurs in many other sponges, but in

none so markedly as in Thenea Wallichit, which will be

described subsequently. In Jsops the vesicular character is

most pronounced in the incurrent tubes, if not confined to

them, and the rugee or diaphragms likewise are chiefly charac-

teristic of these tubes, occurring in all, from the largest down

to those having a diameter of only =}; inch or less; in the

excurrent tubes they are never so numerous nor extended so

far across the canal, nor do they occur in tubes of such small

diameter as in the incurrent system ; it appears to me that

they never occur in excurrent tubes unless of considerably

over ;45 inch diameter.

The physiological explanation of this difference in structure

between the excurrent and incurrent tubes appears to lie in

the fact that the water expelled into the former is under a

slight excess of pressure, which is sufficient to keep them

widely open; it is propelled by a vis a tergo. The water in

the incurrent tubes, on the contrary, is drawn through them

by a vis a fronte, and is thus under a slightly diminished

pressure ; they would therefore tend to be compressed by the

water in the surrounding tissues ; and it is possibly to prevent

this that their walls are strengthened by the concentric ruge.

Ciliated Chambers (Pl. XVII. fig. 23).—These organs are

almost spherical in form and 0-001 inch in diameter; they

consist of a structureless membrane, covered on the inner

surface by roundish nuclei, surrounded by granular proto-

plasm, and disposed at very regular distances apart. Cilia

proceed from these nucleated patches, radiating from the walls

towards the centre of the chamber. They thus clearly repre-

sent, as far as they could be preserved, the collared cells of

other sponges.

As previously mentioned, the ciliated chambers everywhere

surround in close proximity the walls of the whole of the incur-

rent canals, large and small alike (PI. XVII. fig. 27). Short

narrow canals, usually about 0°0006 to 00009 inch long and

000025 inch in diameter, open abruptly into them and connect

406 | Mr. W. J. Sollas on the

them with the incurrent system. On the other hand they are

gradually prolonged into the small ultimate canals of the excur-

rent system (Pl. XVII. fig. 25) ; they are the expanded ends

of these canals, which unite together into larger trabecular tubes,

having no direct communication with ciliated chambers, except

that furnished by these tributary ultimate canals.

Herein lies the great distinction between the incurrent and

excurrent system. The tubes of the former communicate

directly at every part of their course with ciliated chambers ;

the tubes of the latter only communicate with the chambers at

the end of their ultimate ramifications, just as a tree only

bears leaves at the end of its twigs.

This observation, in connection with the difference in the

mode of connexion (first pointed out by F. E. Schulze) of the

excurrent and incurrent canaliculi with the ciliated chambers,

is very suggestive. The cells of the ciliated chambers, toge-

ther with the epithelial lining of the excurrent canals, are the

adult representatives of the endoderm of the larval sponge ;

the epithelium of the incurrent tubes, together with the epi-

dermis, are the descendants of the original ectoderm. In

course of growth the ectoderm and endoderm have increased

more rapidly than the intermediate tissue, which I’. E. Schulze

terms mesoderm ; and the result has been an involution in two

opposite directions—the endoderm developing like a racemose

gland in one direction, the ectoderm undergoimg a simpler

involution in the other; such, at all events, appears to me

the origin of the canal-system in Jsops and Greodia.

Our observations might, however, be brought into accord-

ance with Hickel’s theory of the canal-system, if we consented

to regard our incurrent canals as forming an intervascular

system, and the excurrent only as a genuine gastrovascular

system. At the same time this is a purely theoretical view ;

and I cannot see how one reasonable man can blame another

for choosing to consider the canal-system of such a sponge as

Isops or Geodia as having a so-called ‘“ bipolar” arrangement,

which, as a matter of observation, independent of all theory,

it has. In saying this I am far from expressing any difference

of opinion from Hiickel, whose general conclusions are clearly

in the main correct, but simply desirous of adding my testi-

mony to the value of Carter’s observations, which are always

faithful and accurate, and worthy a more generous estimate

than that awarded them by his opponent.

While speaking of the canal system I would take the

opportunity to point out the fact that the vesicular character

of the incurrent canals is of a totally different nature from that

described by Hickel as distinguishing his “ blasenformige ”’

Sponge-fauna of Norway. 407

type of “ Astcanile’’ in the Leucones, and conjectured by

him to exist also in the rind-sponges; one has but to compare

the description given of this structure in the Leucones (‘ Die

Kalkschwimme,’ p. 235) with that given here as regards

Isops, to see that there is no real resemblance between

them.

Pathology.

The exterior of the sponge is covered by various attached

foreign bodies, such as young sponges, both calcareous and

siliceous, minute Hydrozoa, Alge, and Foraminifera. A small

Waldhevmia is also rooted into the sponge at one point, with-

out apparently causing much harm. The larger attached

Foraminifera are covered marginally by athin brownish film,

which has extended onto their upper surface from the dermis

of the sponge. At its extreme edge this film only contains

stellate spicules; but further on a few globates make their

appearance. It would appear that the sponge is making, in

these cases, an effort to overgrow and enclose the foreign

bodies. On touching one of the Foraminifera with a sharp-

pointed instrument, however, it separates from the sponge

with the greatest facility, bearing with it on its under surface

anumber of attached globates, and leaving behind an irre-

gular pit in the cortex. If the removed globates, or those

immediately surrounding the pit left in the rind, be examined

under the microscope, it will be found that they have entirely

lost their fibrillar connective ligaments, which have degene-

rated into a quantity of granular material, probably of the

nature of pus.

In the interior of the sponge foreign bodies also frequently

occur—diatoms, Radiolaria, foreign sponge-spicules, Forami-

nifera (both calcareous and arenaceous), and the fibres of the

Waldheimia-peduncle.

The siliceous inclusions and the fibres of the Brachiopod

are simply imbedded in the mark, without producing or suf-

fering any apparent change; the calcareous Foraminifera,

however, lose the calcareous walls of their test by absorption,

some kind of hyaline material taking their place ; at the same

time the mark surrounding the tests and filling their chambers

becomes converted into gelatinous connective tissue.

Turning, again, to the foreign ‘bodies of the exterior,

one very singular case of commensalism remains to be noticed.

A small Geodine sponge, only just escaped from the larval

stage, has attached itself immediately over one of the incurrent

chones (Pl. X VII. fig. 1, ), and grown in such a manner that

the terminal opening of its single branched excurrent tube is

408 On the Sponge-fauna of Norway.

exactly applied to the ostium of the incurrent chone of the

Isops; and thus the supply of food and water brought to this

particular chone can only reach it after straining through the

intercepting parasite. '

Should the association, which we may here regard as acci-

dental, become permanent, great structural changes would

probably be produced in the parasite: for one thing, the

collared cells would be relieved of the necessity of propelling

water through the organism, and could restrict themselves to

gathering food for it; and no doubt this would lead to various

other modifications. That in certain cases the association does

become persistent is quite certain; for in a large specimen of

Eetyon sparsus contained in the Bristol Museum we find a

large number of the oscules lined each by a small parasitic

Geodia belonging to an undescribed species; but as this

specimen is unfortunately not preserved in spirits, we cannot

determine the kind of histological change which may have

been induced in it.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII.

Isops Phlegrei (nu. gen. et sp.).

Wg. 1, Section across the rind, showing an excurrent chone (E) and an

incurrent chone with a young Geodine sponge (p) grown over

its mouth: f, subcortical fibrous layer; c, gelatinous connective

tissue (x 15).

Fig. 2. A long-shafted spicule enveloped in the spicule-sheath, s, and

encircled by single, fusiform, hyaline fibres, s (x 140).

Fig. 3. Transverse section of the rind, showing incurrent chone with its

sphincter protruding into the subjacent crypt (x 15). Canada-

balsam preparation.

Fig. 4. Transverse section of lower part of rind: g, lowest-lying glo-

bates of globate layer; f, fibrous layer; c, gelatinous connective

tissue with scattered fusiform fibres and an oval granular cell ;

r, rugee of cryptal canal (x 70).

Fig. 5. Fusiform acerate spicule (x 15).

ig. 6. Head of slender ternate spicule with recurved rays (x 60).

tg. 7. Trifid spicule (x 15).

Fig. 8. Head of slender porrecto-ternate spicule, with only one ray deve-

loped (xX 60).

vg. 9. Bifurcated trifid spicule (x 15).

Fig. 10. Large stellate from the mark (x 435).

Fig. 11. Section across the dermal layer: e, epidermis ; d, dermis, with

intercalated stellates; g, outermost globates of the globate layer

(x27).

12. Sehenanin ie of the rind (x 485).

15. Stellate of the mark, usual size (x 435).

Fig. 14. Outline of globate (x 60).

15. A granular cell with terminal filament; from the gelatinous con-

nective tissue of the subcortical layer (x 455).

Fig. 16, Similar to fg. 15, but without the extended filament (x 435),

On new Coleoptera from Madagascar. 409

Fig. 17. A fusiform hyaline fibre, showing a central cayity (nucleus)

with a small spherule (nucleolus) (x 435).

Fig. 18. The hilum of a globate, with its contained nucleus. The nucleus

exhibits a distinctly double contour, fluid contents, and a spheri-

cal nucleolus (x 435).

Fig. 19. A globate cell after treatment with dilute potash (5 per cent.),

showing separated cell-wall and contained nucleus (x 435).

Fig. 20. Transverse section across rind and stthjacent mark, showing an

incurrent chone opening by a sphincter protruding into a rugose

incurrent canal (7), and the smallest branches of the excurrent

canal (e) terminating close to its walls (x 73).

Fig. 21. A fragment of mark containing a granular mark-cell (m) and a

elobate cell (s) (x 435).

Fig. 22. The smallest or earliest stage of globate yet observed (x 435).

Fig, 25, A ciliated chamber (x 435).

Fig. 24. The tubercular surface of a globate, seen face on, showing the

large axial canals perforating the tubercles (x 435).

Fig. 25, Longitudinal section of the terminal branch of an excurrent

canal (e) with its canaliculi ending in ciliated chambers: 7, the

ultimate branch of an incurrent canal supplying the ciliated

chambers (Xx 157).

Fig. 26. An iris-like diaphragm from one of the rugose incurrent tubes,

seen face on ( xX 60).

Fig. 27. Transverse section of an incurrent tube, from which canaliculi

proceed and enter the ciliated chambers (x 204).

[To be continued.

XXXVIII.—New Genera and Species of Coleoptera from

Madagascar. By CHarLes O, WATERHOUSE.

A COLLECTION of Coleoptera recently received at the British

Museum from Madagascar has brought to light several new

species, which I here describe, with some also which were

received from former collections.

Cetoniide.

Parachilia compacta, n. sp.

Nigra, opaca; elytris obsolete punctatis, marginibus obscure piceis ;

pedibus nitidis. ¢, 9.

Long. 13 lin.

Very close to P. bufo, G. & P., but differs in being consi-

aerably shorter, less narrowed posteriorly, and with the elytra

apparently constantly margined with purple-pitchy colour.

The legs are shorter, and the difference in the length of the

tarsi is very great in the male; in P. dufo the posterior tarsi

are longer than the tibiz by the two apical joints, whereas in

P. compacta the tarsus is only about half the apical joint longer

410 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Genera and

than the tibia. The pubescence on the intermediate tibie of

the male is much less.

Hab, Fianarantsoa (Rev. W. Deans Cowan).

Prionide.

Macirotoma obscura, un. sp.

Nigra; capite thoraceque fortiter rugosis, hoc angulis posticis spina

acuta armato ; elytris coriaceis, basi granulis minutis crebre asper-

sis, apice picescente, femoribus tibiisque fortiter spinosis. ¢.

Long. 22 lin.

Resembles MW. serripes, Oliv., but with much less rugose

elytra. Antenne as long as the elytra and half the thorax ;

the first jot oblong, twice as long as broad, very rugose, and

with a few short spies on the margins; the third joint a little

narrowed towards its apex, coarsely punctured and beset with

very short spines ; the four following joints smooth, sparingly

punctured ; the apical joints opaque, longitudinally rugose.

Thorax very coarsely rugose, convex, obliquely narrowed

anteriorly, the sides with numerous short strong spines, the

posterior angle furnished with a strong, acute, recurved spine,

the base strongly bowed in the middle. LElytra a very little

narrowed behind the middle, coriaceous, sparingly beset with

stiff yellowish hairs, the base closely beset with minute round

granules, the sutural angle with a short streng spine. Femora

and tibiz furnished with strong spines on their edges, rather

close together; the anterior tibiz very flat, rugose, the edges

closely spinose. Abdomen pitchy.

Hab, Antananarivo.

Macrotoma leta, n. sp.

Obscure picea; capite thoraceque rugosis, flavo pilosis, hoc lateribus

acute spinosis, angulis postice acute productis ; elytris fulvo-ferru-

gineis, dense rugulosis, apice obtuso. @.

Long. 20 lin.

Antenne three quarters the length of the elytra; the basal

joint subcylindrical, a little narrowed at the base, rather

thickly punctured ; the third joint cylindrical, smooth, sparingly

punctured; the fourth to seventh joints becoming more

closely punctured ; the apical joints dull, longitudinally rugu-

lose. Thorax densely and evenly rugulose, convex, impressed

on each side of the disk, strongly spinose at the sides, which

are slightly arcuate, the posterior angles produced into a

strong acute spine; the base strongly arcuate. Scutellum

moderately punctured. Elytra parallel, pale pitchy, closely

Species of Coleoptera from Madagascar. 411

rugulose, without cost, the extreme suture pitchy, the sutu-

ral angle with a very small spine. Legs irregularly and

sparingly spinose, the anterior femora not “spined above ; all

the tibiw with rasp-like punctures, the four posterior tibie

not spined on the inner margin.

Hab. Fianarantsoa (Mr. Shaw).

Macrotoma asperata, n. sp.

Fusco-picea, obscura ; capite thoraceque confertissime rugoso ; elytris

creberrime minute tuberculatis, sutura spina parva acuta.

Long. 15-17 lin.

3g. Head densely rugose, with an impressed frontal line ;

the eyes widely separated. Antenne the length of the elytra,

the basal joint rather large, not much narrowed at the base,

thickly rugose ; third joint as long as the two following taken

together, rather closely asperate-punctate, except at the apex ;

the fourth to ninth joints more slender, shining, rather spa-

ringly punctured, the tenth and eleventh joints longitudinally

finely rugulose. ‘Thorax convex, densely and strongly rugose,

transverse, obliquely (but not much) narrowed anteriorly, the

margins crenulate, the posterior angles with a distinct acute

(but not very prominent) tooth ; the base arcuately lobed in

the middle, and with a very slight emargination just before

the posterior angle. Elytra subparallel, opaque, very slightly

narrowed at the apex, thickly studded all over with minute

shining tubercles, especially conspicuous near the base. ‘The

sutural angle has a distinct acute spine. Legs compressed,

the femora and tibia rather thickly studded with minute

shining tubercles, the posterior femur more smooth ; the an-

terior tibize are not properly spinose; but on the underside of

the outer edge may be seen a few small teeth. The four

posterior legs are very similarly sculptured. ‘The fifth seg-

ment of the abdomen is widely and rather deeply emarginate.

?. This differs from the foregoing in having the antenne

a little shorter ; the basal joint is less robust, strongly punc-

tured ; the third to sixth joints are shining , sparingly punc-

tured ; the third joint quite as long as the fourth and fifth

taken ‘together ; the seventh is rugulose at the apex, and the

eighth to eleventh are opaque, longitudinally very finely and

closely strigose. The posterior angle of the thorax is pro-

duced into a strong acute spine ; the sides are scarcely crenu-

late. The fifth segment of the abdomen is nearly truncate,

scarcely sinuate in the middle. The legs are more slender,

shining, sparingly asperate-punctate.

Hab, Antananarivo (Mr, Kingdon).

412 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Genera and

Macrotoma vicina, n. sp.

3. Very close to J. asperata, but with shorter antennee

and elytra, and acute anterior angles to the thorax. Antenne

the same length as the elytra; the basal joint closely and

very coarsely rugose-punctate; the third joint as long as the

fourth, fifth, and one third of the sixth taken together, rather

strongly but not very thickly punctured, a little thicker at each

end than in the middle; the following joints slender, the

fourth to ninth very sparingly punctured, the base and apex

of the tenth joint and the whole eleventh joint longitudinally

channelled and opaque. Eyes widely separated as in I. aspe-

rata. Thorax rather less convex, very coarsely rugose, the

anterior angles slightly prominent and dentiform ; the sides

scarcely crenulate, slightly bowed out a little behind the

middle ; the posterior angles with an acute slightly prominent

tooth. Elytra thickly studded with minute tubercles or

granules. Anterior femora rather thickly tuberculate-ragose,

the posterior pair not very thickly punctured, smooth above ;

the anterior tibize opaque, moderately thickly beset with

minute granules; the posterior tibiee moderately thickly punc-

tured. Some few, very small, sharp tubercles may be seen on

the underside of the femora.

The elytra of the specimen above described are pale yellow ;

but this is, I think, evidently from immaturity.

9. This differs from the female of JZ. asperata in having

the elytra relatively shorter; and the tuberculation of the

elytra is rather more distinct. The third joint of the antenne

is the same length as in the foregoing species ; but, the follow-

ing joints being shorter, it is nearly as long as the fourth,

fifth, and sixth joints taken together; the eighth and ninth

joints have elongate punctures ; the tenth and eleventh joints

are short, shining, and longitudinally coarsely grooved; the

three apical joints together are scarcely as long as the third

joint. The sides of the thorax are furnished with short,

strong, acute spines. The fifth segment of the abdomen is

distinctly (but not deeply) emarginate in the middle.

Hab. Antananarivo (Mr. Kingdon).

Macrotoma Pfeiffere, n. sp.

2. Most nearly resembles the female of JZ. asperata, but

is of a paler pitchy-brown colour, altogether of a more elon-

gate slender build, with the base of the antenne and the

femora of a clear reddish brown. Antenne slender, the same

length as the elytra ; the basal joint thickly and rather strongly

punctured, more elongate than in asperata; the third jomt

Species of Coleoptera from Madagascar. 413

very slender, as long as the two following joints taken toge-

ther, rather closely and obscurely punctured; the fourth, fifth,

and sixth joints more distinctly and moderately thickly punc-

tured; the seventh more finely punctured; the eighth to

eleventh joints closely and longitudinally strigose ; the three

apical joits together equalling the third joint in length.

Head closely rugose ; the eyes large and approximate, their

distance above about equal to two thirds the upper part of the

eye; in I. asperata 2 the distance is about one third

greater than the width of the upper part of the eye. Thorax

densely rugose, the margins with a few irregular crenulations,

the posterior angles produced into a very acute spine. Hlytra

very long, subparallel, opaque, rather thickly punctured, the

punctures round and lightly impressed, the base thickly

studded with minute shining granules ; each elytron with three

fine coste, and with a trace of a short fourth one near the

apex, the space between the coste flattened, or even slightly

concave posteriorly; sutural angle furnished with a stout

acute spine, which turns slightly outwards. Femora sparingly

and obscurely punctured; the tibie slightly dull and finely

punctured ; tarsi rather long and slender. Fifth abdominal

segment truncate at the apex.

Hab. Madagascar (Madame Ida Pfetffer).

Macrotoma sodalis, n. sp.

9. Head very strongly rugose-punctate; the distance

between the eyes nearly equal to the width of the upper part

of the eye. Antenne not quite so long as the elytra; the

basal joint not very large, rather closely and strongly punc-

tured; the third joint as long as the two following taken

together ; the third to sixth joints sparingly punctured ; the

seventh and eighth joints with a strigose spot at the apex;

the apical half of the ninth and the whole of the tenth and

eleventh joints longitudinally channelled, opaque; the three

apical joints together as long as the third and half the fourth

together. Thorax closely and strongly rugose-punctate, the

sides with two or three very short acute teeth, or without

any; the posterior angle furnished with a slender very acute

spine. Elytra long, widest behind the middle, and then a

little narrowed to the apex, coriaceous, the base somewhat

closely (but not very strongly) rugulose; near the scutellum

are some minute granules or tubercles ; the sutural angle has

a conical acute spine. ‘The femora are rather sparingly punc-

tured, the anterior pair with a few very acute spines below;

the four posterior femora have a few, acute, thorn-like spines

above and below; the tibie are finely longitudinally wrinkled,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 28

414 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Genera and

furnished with a few acute thorn-like spines on both their

edges; tarsi rather slender. Fifth segment of the abdomen

slightly triangularly emarginate.

Hab. Fianarantsoa (ev. W. Deans Cowan).

Macrotuma mutica, n. sp.

Most nearly allied to MZ. sodalis, but with shorter antenne

and pale brown elytra, with no spine at their sutural angle.

Antenne not quite the length of the elytra; the basal joint

not very large, arrowed towards its base, strongly but not

very thickly punctured; the third jot as long as the two

following joimts taken together, sparingly punctured; the

fourth and fifth similarly punctured; the sixth and seventh

more finely punctured ; the eighth to eleventh opaque, longi-

tudinally finely channelled ; the three apical joints together

as long as the third and fourth joints together. Head very

coarsely rugose-punctate ; the distance between the eyes about

equal to the width of the upper part of the eye. Thorax very

convex, densely and strongly rugose-punctate ; the sides irre-

cularly crenulate ; the posterior angles produced into a strong

acute spine, which is broad at its base. Elytra subparallel,

pale yellowish brown, without costa, rugulose, a little more

strongly so near the scutellum. Femora finely and not very

thickly punctured ; tibize less shining and rather more punc-

tured, with one or two acute spines on the outer edge. The

fifth segment of the abdomen distinctly emarginate at the

apex.

Hab. Fianarantsoa (Mr. Shaw).

Macrotoma Wrightii, n. sp.

3g. Nearly black, with the elytra dark brown posteriorly,

the tarsi pitchy. Head very rugosely punctured, closely

asperate-punctate posteriorly. Antenne a little longer than

the whole insect; the basal joint large, closely and coarsely

asperate-rngulose ; the third joint very long, as long as the

fourth, fifth, and two thirds of the sixth taken together,

densely and very coarsely asperate ; the fourth to seventh

joints sparingly punctured, the fourth with a few asperities ;

the eighth and ninth joints more thickly punctured, especially

the ninth; the tenth and eleventh still more densely punc-

tured, the eleventh with a mixture of short longitudinal

channels. Thorax as long as its width in front, a little more

than one third broader at the posterior angles than at the

anterior, densely and coarsely rugulose, with a slight sweiling

on each side of the disk, and with some yellowish pubescence

on each side of the base ; the anterior margin trisinuous ; the

Species of Coleoptera from Madagascar. 415

sides with irregularly disposed tubercle-like teeth; the region

of the posterior angle is somewhat swollen, the angle itself

produced (slightly backwards) into an acute process; the base

very slightly sinuous (nearly straight) in its middle portion,

but rather strongly sinuate behind each posterior angle. The

elytra are parallel, very slightly narrowed at their apex,

convex at the base, depressed posteriorly ; very strongly,

closely, and rugosely punctured at the base; the rest of the

surface, although strongly and closely punctured, is not so

strongly sculptured as the base; each elytron has an obtuse

ridge near the suture, rising before the middle of the elytron

and terminating before the apex ; there is a somewhat more

marked ,old near the margin, rising near the shoulder and

extending nearly to the apex ; the space between these ridges

is nearly flat (with an indication of a third short ridge in the

middle) ; the side beyond the lateral ridge is suddenly deflexed;

the sutural angle is slightly dentiform. The legs are long;

the anterior femora and tibizw very rough and closely beset

with small shining tubercles, which on the edges of the tibize

form small teeth’; the underside of the femora is transversely

rugulose ; the other legs are not so rough, and the base of the

femora is nearly smooth. The fifth segment of the abdomen

is very slightly sinuate in the middle,

Hab. Seychelle Islands.

A single specimen presented by Dr. E. P. Wright.

Lepturine.

Artelida asperata, un. sp.

Nigra, subtilissime griseo-pubescens; oculis fortiter granulatis ;

thorace medio rugoso, quadrituberoso, lateribus dente conico

armatis ; elytris dorsaliter paulo impressis, regione basali granu-

loso-punctatis ; antennis, tibiis tarsisque piceis.

Long. 6-83 lin.

Rostrum very short. Eyes prominent and strongly gra-

nular, moderately separated below and above. Thorax mode-

rately transverse, constricted in front, rather thickly and

rugosely punctured, with four distinct tumours on the disk ;

the lateral tubercle prominent, conical. Hlytra not much

narrowed posteriorly, finely coriaceous, with the basal region

moderately thickly punctured with horseshoe punctures, the

apex of each elytron obtuse ; there is a slight costa-like fold

running obliquely from the shoulder, not extending to the

apex. The claw-jomt of the male is much dilated at the

apex.

Hab, Antananarivo (Mr. Kingdon).

28*

416 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Genera and

A very distinct species, on account of the granular punctua-

tion at the base of the elytra.

/ED@US, n. gen.

Antenne slender, filiform. Eyes moderately coarsely gra-

nular, rather widely separated. Thorax obliquely narrowed

in front of the middle, with two small tumours on the hinder

part of the disk; lateral tubercle very little prominent, ob-

tusely conical. Elytra evenly convex, moderately narrowed

posteriorly, without costz, the margins very narrowly incras-

sated.

The general appearance of the species upon which I pro-

pose to establish this genus is that of Acmeops; but the

structure of the head and thorax approaches Logisticus. The

finely incrassated margin to the elytra, replacing the narrow

epipleural fold (found in Logisticus &c.), is one of the chief

characters.

The genus should follow Artelida.

Atdeus geniculatus, n. sp.

Capite, thorace supra, scutello genibusque nigris, ceteris piceo-

testaceis, elytrorum sutura apiceque infuscatis.

Long. 5 lin.

Head and thorax clothed with yellowish-grey pile, very

fine and not very dense. Thorax as long as its greatest

width, thickly and excessively finely punctured, constricted

in front of the middle, subparallel behind the lateral tubercle,

which is not very prominent and is obtusely conical; the

disk evenly convex in front, furnished posteriorly with two

distant, small, round, slightly raised tumours. LHlytra at the

base not quite twice as broad as the base of the thorax, mode-

rately narrowed behind, obtuse at the apex, delicately pilose,

very densely and extremely delicately punctured.

Hab. Antananarivo (Mr. Kingdon).

Logisticus suturalis, vo. sp.

Fuscus, griseo-sericeus ; thorace quadrituberoso, lateribus tuber-

culo obtuse conico instructis ; elytris apicem versus modice angus-

tatis, sutura bene determinata, apice truncatis.

Long. 10-12 lin.

Somewhat intermediate in form and appearance between

Artelida sericea, Guérin (Ic. Régne An. p. 252, Toxotus), and

Logisticus rostratus, Waterh. (Cist. Ent. 1. 1878, p. 291) ;

its affinities, however, are with the latter, with which it

Species of Coleoptera from Madagascar. 417

agrees in having very coarsely granular eyes. Rostrum a

little broader than long, a very little narrowed at the base.

Eyes prominent, rather approximate above, especially in the

male. Thorax constricted in front, nearly parallel behind,

with four, round, slightly raised tumours above, with an

obtuse slightly prominent tubercle at the side. Elytra longer

than in A. sericea, but not so long as in L. rostratus, trun-

cate at the apex, the sutural angle scarcely dentiform ; each

elytron has a somewhat oblique, broad but scarcely raised

costa, nearly similar to that of A. sericea, which is absent in

L. rostratus. The suture is narrowly incrassated, and very

clearly marked. The claw-joint of the male is extremely

narrow at the base, dilated at the apex.

Hab. Fianarantsoa (Rev. W. Deans Cowan).

Logisticus angustatus, n. sp.

Elongatus, angustus, nigro-fuscus, subtiliter pilosus ; rostro elon-

gato; elytris brunneis, haud costatis, apice truncato, haud emar-

ginato.

Long. 8-10 lin.

Very close to ZL. rostratus, W., but smaller and with more

decidedly brown elytra. The rostrum is a little narrower;

the eyes are large and prominent, very coarsely granular,

very approximate above, almost contiguous above and below

in the male. Thorax evenly convex, with four scarcely

noticeable dorsal tumours ; constricted in front, with a small

obtuse tubercle at the side. Llytra very elongate, gently and

evenly convex, without coste, narrowed towards the apex,

which is slightly truncate, the angles of the truncature not

prominent. Claw-joint of the male much dilated at the

apex.

Hab. Antananarivo (Mr. Kingdon).

Logisticus simplex, n. sp.

Fuscus, subtiliter griseo-pubescens ; rostro vix breviore quam latiore ;

elytris leviter covexis, haud costatis, apice haud truncato. g.

Long. 6 lin.

Very like Z. angustatus, but not quite so elongate. The

rostrum is shorter and broader, scarcely as long as broad.

The eyes are prominent and coarsely granular, moderately

approximate above, a little more separate below. Elytra

brown, evenly convex, not much narrowed posteriorly; the

apex of each elytron slightly rounded.

Hab. Antananarivo (Mr. Kingdon).

418 On new Coleoptera from Madagascar.

Logisticus obscurus, n. sp.

Fusco-niger, subtiliter griseo-pubescens ; rostro vix longiore quam

latiore ; elytris leviter convexis, haud costatis, apice ipso truncato,

angulo externo producto. 9.

Long. 84 lin.

This has almost completely the form of L. simplex, but is

of a uniform blackish-fuscous colour, the antenne, tibiz, and

tarsi brownish. ‘The rostrum is not quite so short (not so

long as in rostratus); and the eyes are almost contiguous

below, moderately separated above. The apex of the elytron

is a little truncate, with the external angle distinctly pro-

duced.

Hab. Antananarivo (Mr. Kingdon).

APPEDESIS, n. gen.

Antenne very slender, widely separated. Eyes promi-

nent posteriorly, not supported behind by any cheek. Thorax

evenly convex, arcuately narrowed anteriorly in front of the

middle, with no lateral tubercle. Elytra not costate, mode-

rately narrowed posteriorly, slightly truncate at the apex.

Intermediate as well as anterior cox: very prominent. Poste-

rior tarsi not very elongate, the third joint bilobed.

The general appearance of the species for which I propose

this genus is that of some species of Leptura ; but the slender

antenne, the eyes not supported behind by any cheek, and

the shorter tarsi induce me to separate it. The posterior

tarsi are especially relatively less long, less compressed,

and the third joint is broader, strongly bilobed. It should be

placed before Leptura.

Appedesis vidua, n. sp.

Sordide flava; capite abdomineque nigris, thorace ferrugineo-rufo,

scutello piceo; elytris fusco-nigris, fascia lata basali utrinque

vittam elongatam emittente sordide flava.

Long. 34 lin,

Head black, clothed with greyish-yellow pile, very closely

and finely punctured ; flat in front, the antennal tubercles

depressed. yes finely granular, completely free and pro-

minent posteriorly. ‘Thorax dull red, as long as broad, gently

convex, with very short yellowish pile, densely and rather finely

punctured, a little narrowed in front of the middle, subparallel

posteriorly, the extreme base margined with black. Elytra

about one third broader than the thorax, moderately narrowed

posteriorly, slightly truncate at the apex, clothed with very

short, not very dense, yellow pile; moderately, thickly, and

Mr. I’. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 419

distinctly punctured ; pitchy yellow, the extreme base black,

the apical two thirds blackish fuscous, with a sublateral

pitchy-yellow stripe (emitted from basal yellow portion), not

extended to the apex. The apical spines of the tibie and

the claws nearly black.

Hab. Antananarivo (Mr. Kingdon).

Leptocerine.

Leptocera lineatopunctata, n. sp.

Nigra; thorace crebre fortiter punctato, lineis quatuor albo-pilosis ;

elytris obscure cyaneis vel purpureis, fortiter lineato-punctatis,

apice truncato, sutura alba.

Long. 43-5 lin.

Head closely and very strongly punctured, with white pile

on the sides of the face and cheeks. Thorax subcylindrical,

very slightly narrowed in front and at the base, densely and

strongly punctured; with four narrow white silky streaks

above. Hlytra not very much narrowed posteriorly, obscure

purple or deep steel-blue, with lines of very strong punctures ;

the punctures are rather smaller towards the apex; the apex

of each elytron is truncate, the outer angle being slightly

dentiform. The mesothoracic epimera and the metathoracic

parapleuree are pitchy. ‘The femora are rather strongly

clavate.

Hab. Antananarivo (Mr. Kingdon).

This species is allied to L. humeralis.

XXXIX.—New Neotropical Curculionide.—Part I.

By Francis P. Pascog, F.L.S. &c.

As a large number of undescribed Tropical-American Curcu-

lionide are to be found in collections, I purpose to describe

some of the more remarkable, though not necessarily those

most distinguished for size or beauty. My own collection

contains a goodly number derived from various sources, espe-

cially from Parana, a province south of Rio de Janeiro, and

very little known entomologically, forming part of the collec-

tion of the late lamented Mr. W. W. Saunders, and obtained,

I believe, by Mr. Chesterton. There are also many species

from Mr. Bates (Para and the Amazon valley), Mr. Buckley

(Ecuador), Mr. E. Bartlett (Eastern Peru), Mr. E. Janson

(Chontales), and others, including a large number from M.

James Thomson’s collection, chiefly from French collectors

420 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Ourculionide,

in Guiana, Columbia, Panama, Mexico, &e.

These latter

bear in many cases the MS. names of MM. Buquet, Laferté,

Chevrolat, Jekel, and the Comte Dejean.

Of late years the only descriptions of these New-World

tropical insects are those of Dr. Kirsch, and MM. Chevrolat

and Jekel; but they are not very numerous.

The species described in this part, and the subfamily to

which they belong, are :-—

BrRACHYDERINZ.

Platyomus ostracion.

Curiades, n.g. for Platyomus Bois-

duvali, Boh.

Cyphus effusus.

sigillatus.

Trichaptus, n.g. for Rhigus myr-

mosarius, Perty.

Ericydeus, n. g. for Cyphus Han-

cockii, Kirby.

Compsus vestalis.

mirandus,

Compsus yirgineus,

vespertinus.

euchloris.

Eustales coruscus.

cometes.

stellaris.

sejunctus,

—— interruptus.

impositus.

Brachyomus metallescens.

Cleoteges, n. g.

virosus.

Platyomus ostracion.

P. oblongus, densissime supra umbrino-, lateraliter albido-squamu-

losus ; prothorace cylindrico, elongato ; scutello oblongo, postice

ampliato; elytris bifariam seriatim punctatis, lineis tribus ele-

vatis tuberculatis instructis ; apicibus mucronatis. Long. 9 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Oblong, closely covered above with umber-brown scales,

the sides and beneath whitish; rostrum much broader at

the apex, a short median line extending to a fovea on the

front; antenne stout, setulose, the club small, brown; pro-

thorax cylindrical, much longer than broad, deeply and

irregularly pitted; scutellum narrow and linear anteriorly,

expanded behind; elytra broadest at the shoulder, abruptly

declivous behind, the sides moderately rounded, strongly

punctured in double rows, the raised lines between, but not

extending, except the first, to the declivous portion, tubercu-

late, the first or inner line with the tubercles more strongly

developed, the last tubercle spiniform and horizontal; legs

setulose, brownish, mottled.

Allied to P. niveus, but narrower, less strongly tuberculate,

and differently coloured.

CURIADES.

Rostrum breviusculum, apice leviter emarginatum, supra ad frontem

late et profunde excavatum. Scapus antennarum brevis, apicem

versus incrassatus, ad marginem posticum.oculi vix attingens.

Prothorax parvus, transyersus. Elytra ampliata, pilis longis-

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 421

simis erectis obtecta. -Abdomen sutura prima angulata. Corpus

pilosum.

This genus is proposed for Platyomus Boisduvali, Boh., a

very remarkable hairy form, which, as a Platyomus, has long

been an opprobium to our classification. ‘The characters

which separate it from that genus, however, are, when viewed

in relation to the heterogeneity of its species, somewhat feeble ;

the principal relate to the rostrum, which is only slightly

emarginate at the tip, and is deeply and broadly excavated as

far as the eyes, the boundaries of the hollow on each side

being raised into a prominent ridge or crest. One thing is

quite certain, that this species has only a very distant affinity

with any Platyomus.

Cyphus effusus.

OC. ovatus, dense cretaceo-squamulosus, supra viridescenti-undu-

latus ; prothorace transverso ; elytris irregularibus, apicibus

rotundatis, haud productis. Long. 6} lin.

Hab. Macas.

Ovate, covered with cretaceous scales, tinted above with

pale green arranged in waved crossed bands ; head, antenne,

and legs spotted with black setulose scales; rostrum deeply

excavated between the antennz, an impressed line continued

to the head; prothorax very short, the sides, except at the

apex, nearly parallel, a broad excavation along the base ;

scutellum triangular ; elytra uneven, owing to the irregularity

of the raised interstitial lines, the intervals with a double row

of impressed punctures, the apices rounded and not produced.

Body beneath with a pale greenish tinge.

This and the following species differ from the rest of the

genus in having a very short prothorax, with the sides, except

just at the apex, parallel.

Cyphus sigillatus.

C. ovatus, dense cretaceo-squamulosus, pone. medium elytrorum

fascia maculata et maculis duabus posticis notatus ; prothorace

transverso; elytris supra paulo depressis, apicibus rotundatis

haud productis. Long. 6} lin.

Hab. Para.

Ovate, covered with cretaceous scales, having a very slight

tint of green or grey; head, antenne, and legs spotted with

black setulose scales ; rostrum broadly excavated between the

antenne, an impressed line continued to the head; prothorax

very short, nearly parallel at the sides, but a little contracted

anteriorly, a broad excavation along the base; scutellum

triangular ; elytra rather short, depressed above, the interstices

scarcely raised, the punctures small, in not very regular lines,

422 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculiontde.

the apices rounded and not produced, behind the middle a

band of black spots, those near the suture partially coalescing,

an irregular spot posteriorly, and a smaller one near the

shoulder.

ture of the elytra. The difference between Cyphus and

Platyomus is not well marked. Germar included the species

known to him under the former name; and both genera con-

tain species which, from their outward appearance, would not

be supposed to have any generic affinity. Compsus was first

separated as a genus from Platyomus by Lacordaire; among

other minor characters, it is best distinguished by the mucro-

nate anterior tibie. To Cyphus I refer those forms which

have the rostrum not enlarged at the tip as in Platyomus,

lateral scrobes, and a more slender scape. A remarkable form

bearing a strong resemblance to a Mutilla (Hymenoptera)

was proposed to be generically separated by Germar under

the name of Vrichaptus; but the genus was never published.

It was first described as a Lthigus by Perty (2. myrmosarius).

It is, I think, a far better genus than many others whose

claims have never been questioned. The following are its

principal characters :—

TRICHAPTUS.

Caput transversum. Rostrum breviusculum, capite multo angus-

tius; scrobe ab insertione antenna, transyersa, oculum tangente.

Prothorax gibbosus, basi quam medio angustior. lytra elevata,

valde convexa. Cetera ut in Cypho.

The essential character of this genus is in the direction of

the scrobe, which, beginning near the mouth, takes a sudden

bend and passes transversely beneath the eye, which, indeed,

forms part of its upper boundary. The only species was sub-

sequently named by Boheman Cyphus Linnet, after “ the

first of naturalists, past, present, and future.” But, then, this

was in 1833.

There is another species which, as Lacordaire has pointed

out, should be also separated from Cyphus. It is the Cyphus

Hancockii of Kirby, one of the handsomest of the Curculionide,

It differs in having the anterior tibize mucronate as in Compsus,

and in the grooved lower and hind margin of the posterior

and intermediate tibiz, which is also densely ciliated. ‘The

principal characters of this genus, for which I propose the

name of Hricydeus, are as follows :—

ERICYDEUS.

Caput haud latius rostro. Antenne articulo primo funiculi per-

brevi. TZibiew anticxe mucronate, inteymedize et postice extus

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 423

apicem versus inciso-sulcatee, ciliate. Cove postice magis ap-

proximate. Cztera ut in Cypho.

Compsus vestalis.

C. oblongus, squamulis albis, aliis lete viridibus intermixtis, densis-

sime vestitus ; capite, antennis pedibusque squamulis aureo-opa-

lescentibus tectis; rostro in medio lineato-impresso; scapo valido.

Long. 63 lin.

Hab. Macas.

Oblong, closely covered with white mixed with bright

green scales, the whole apparently pale green; head, antenne,

and legs opalescent, covered with golden scales having a slight

rose tint ; scape of the antenne rather short, stout ; head and

rostrum with a slightly impressed median line; prothorax

slightly broader than long, the sides not rounded, sparsely

punctured, a shallow longitudinal impression, the base bisinu-

ate; scutellum small, roundish; elytra a little broader behind

the middle, the apices divaricate, striate-punctate, the inter-

stices raised, the punctures double-rowed.

In coloration agreeing to a certain extent with C. auri-

cephalus (Say), but, enter alia, without the slender scape of the

latter.

Compsus mirandus.

C. elongato-ovatus, squamulis lete aureo-viridibus, maculis denu-

datis nigris elytrorum exceptis, dense tectus; rostro modice

robusto ; elytris postice angustatis, singulatim apice productis.

Long. 7 lin.

Hab. Columbia.

Narrowly ovate, covered above and beneath with rich

golden-green scales, the vertex with two, the elytra with

several round black naked spots; antennz slender, the funicle

rather long, the club darker; prothorax longer than broad,

the base bisinuate; scutellum expanded behind; elytra not

much produced at the shoulders, narrower posteriorly, each

ending in a prolonged apex; knees and tibie with a slight

bluish tint.

A handsome species, with no near ally, so far as I know,

except the preceding.

Compsus virgineus.

sisque pallide ceruleis; scutello transverso; elytris bifariam

seriatim punctatis. Long. 74 lin.

Hab. ‘Trinidad (Peru).

Oblong, densely covered above and beneath with pure

S) Jy I

424 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

chalky-white scales; the antennz, knees, and tarsi with a pale

bluish tint; rostrum with a fine impressed longitudinal line ;

antenne slender, the club blackish ; prothorax slightly trans-

verse, a few scattered irregular punctures ; scutellum subqua-

drate, transverse; elytra convex, a double row of small

punctures between each raised interstice, the apices slightly

produced, divaricate.

Among the white members of the genus this species may

be distinguished by its subquadrate transverse scutellum,

convex elytra, and purer colours.

Compsus vespertinus.

C. sat late oblongus, haud depressus, squamulis albidis dense tectus;

rostro capiteyue supra et medio prothoracis pedibusque, basi

femorum excepta, lete aureo-cupreis ; antennis tenuibus ; scutello

oblongo. Long. 8 lin.

Hab. Sarayacu, Chamicuros.

Rather broadly oblong, not depressed above, covered with

nearly pure white scales ; rostrum and head above, middle of

the prothorax and legs, except the bases of the femora, more

or less of a bright copper with a golden tint ; antennz slender,

darker towards the club; rostrum with a deep impression in

the middle, and another on each side; prothorax above equal

in length and breadth, irregularly and sparsely punctured,

bisinuate at the base; scutellum oblong; elytra convex, a

double row of moderate-sized punctures between each raised

interstice, the apices produced, scarcely divaricate.

In one of. my specimens the copper-colour does not extend

to the prothorax. C. lacteus (Fab.), depressed above, with blue

legs &c., may be considered an ally.

Compsus euchloris.

C. elongato-ovatus, densissime late viridi-squamosus ; rostro supra

convexo, integro; scutello minuto; elytris seriatim punctatis,

postice bituberosis, apicibus paulo productis. Long. 8 lin.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Oblong ovate, closely covered with fine, mostly opaque,

pure green scales, but with numerous golden scales inter-

mixed ; antenne and tarsi cobalt-blue ; rostrum convex above,

without any impressed line; antennee slender; prothorax

rather longer than broad, irregularly pitted above; scutellum

very small; elytra a little flattish above, each with a well-

marked gibbosity posteriorly, the apices slightly produced,

linearly punctate, the punctures small and shallow.

In form resembling C. mirandus, but, inter alia, without

the black naked spots on the elytra.

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide, 425.

Eustales coruscus.

£. elongato-ovatus, squamulis aureo-viridibus fere omnino dense

- tectus; pedibus rostroque in medio ceruleis; elytris postice sat

abrupte declivibus, apicibus acutis haud productis. Long. 5% lin.

Hab. Macas.

Narrowly ovate; body almost entirely covered with rich

golden-green scales; antenne, median line on the head, con-

tinued partially on the prothorax, and legs, except the base

of the femora, cobalt-blue, club of the antenn with a greyish

pubescence ; rostrum not carinate; prothorax about equal in

length and breadth, rounded at the sides, the anterior half

with a deep longitudinal impression and a shallow y-shaped

depression posteriorly, the base straight; scutellum small,

rounded, blackish, pubescent; elytra rather strongly punc-

tured, not striated, slightly depressed above and rather

abruptly declivous posteriorly, and without gibbosities, the

apices pointed but not produced.

Allied to #. opulentus, Boh., which, ¢nter alia, has the rostrum

and legs gold-coloured, and the base of the prothorax bisinuate.

It differs from the following in the colour of its legs, the

absence of gibbosities on the elytra, &c.

Eustales cometes.

E. elongato-ovatus, squamulis aureo-viridibus omnino dense tectus ;

scutello nigro, triangulari; elytris postice sat subito declivibus,

singulatim gibbosis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. Macas. :

Narrowly ovate, entirely covered, except the scutellum,

with bright golden-green scales, including the antenne, but

the club black ; rostrum not carinate ; prothorax rather longer

than broad, slightly bisinuate at the base, the disk with three

punctiform depressions ; scutellum triangular, black; elytra

broadest at the shoulders, depressed above, strongly punctured,

declivous, each with a well-marked gibbosity posteriorly ; the

apices slightly divaricate.

This and the preceding are very brilliantly coloured species ;

under the lens purely golden scales are seen amongst the green

ones.

Eustales stellaris.

E. elongato-ovatus, nitide niger, maculis aureo-viridibus adspersus ;

rostro sat elongato, in medio linea paulo elevata ; elytris modice

conyexis, regularibus. Long. 5? lin.

Hab. Panama.

Narrowly ovate, glossy black, spotted with small pure green

426 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

scales, collected mostly on the spaces between the punctures ;

legs and antenne dark violet; rostrum rather long, with a

slightly elevated longitudinal line; prothorax manifestly

longer than broad, considerably narrower in front, the sides

rounded, roughly punctured above; scutellum small, trian-

gular; elytra regularly but not strongly convex, with fine

lines of punctures, the apices very slightly divergent ; body

beneath glossy black, the sides and base of the femora covered

with bright green scales.

A very distinct species, resembling a slender Otiorhynchus.

Eustales sejunctus.

E. oblongus, late viridi-squamosus, supra lineis abbreviatis nigris

denudatis notatus ; rostro carina triangulari instructo ; scutello

rotundato. Long. 6 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Oblong, partially covered with green scales, leaving on

the upper surface oblong black glossy lines without scales ;

the head with three, the prothorax with five such lines, one

on each side running through the eye and continuous with

one on the prothorax; on the elytra the lines are uninter-

rupted and irregular ; rostrum with a flattish carina, broader

below and gradually running to a fine point between the eyes ;

prothorax subcylindrical, flattish above, with two large median

impressions ; scutellum roundish; elytra broadest behind the

middle, depressed above, linearly punctate, the punctures

much coarser at the base, posteriorly the fifth and seventh

interstices raised, apices divaricate.

This and the following species are remarkable for the

naked interrupted spaces on the upper surface. The club of

the antenne, as in many others of their allies, is black.

Hustales interruptus.

E. angustus, lete viridi-squamosus, supra partim nigro-denudatus ;

rostro in medio triangulariter impresso; elytris apicem versus

paulo ampliatis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Macas.

Narrowly oblong, partially covered with green scales, a

few cobalt-blue, leaving on the upper surface oblong black

patches without scales; rostrum with a triangular median

impression, and on each side a short deep line; prothorax

subeylindrical, longer than broad, two strongly marked de-

pressions on the disk, and on the sides several coarse punc-

tures; scutellum oblong; elytra rounded at the shoulders,

depressed above, towards the apex slightly expanded, very

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 427

coarsely punctured, two rounded elevations posteriorly, apices

divaricate.

A narrower species than the last; the naked black patches

less definite, and absent on the head.

Eustales impositus.

&. elongato-ovatus, albo-squamosus, maculis irregularibus nitide

nigro-fuscis denudatis variegatus ; rostro carinato ; elytris valde

convexis. Long. 5 jin.

Hab. Chontales.

Klongate-ovate, varied above with more or less confluent

patches of white scales on a glossy brownish-black naked

derm ; rostrum strongly carinate; prothorax slightly trans-

verse, well rounded at the sides, subbisinuate at the base ;

scutellum triangular; elytra regularly convex, rounded at

the sides, apices divergent, irregularly punctured, except to-

wards the suture, punctures small, mostly filled in by the

scales ; body beneath with a naked brown longitudinal stripe ;

legs closely covered with small whitish scales.

An isolated species.

Brachyomus metallescens.

B. elongato-ovatus, squamulis cupreo-metallicis variis tectus ; pro-

thorace elongato, cylindrico ; elytris postice bituberculatis. Long.

7 lin.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Elongate-ovate, covered with minute copper-coloured scales

and a few scattered golden-green ones above and on the legs,

golden-green scales more numerous beneath; rostrum slightly

excavated in the middle, a short impressed line on each side ;

antenne slender, dull purplish ; prothorax much longer than

broad, cylindrical, irregularly and somewhat transversely

pitted above; scutellum small, rounded; elytra coarsely

punctured, abruptly declivous behind, declivity marked by

two large slightly compressed conical tubercles; legs rather

slender.

This species differs from the Brachyom? generally in its:

cylindrical prothorax. Ido not think that this is here suffi-

cient to warrant generic separation. The genus is remarkable

tor being “ exhumerate.”’

CLAOTEGES.

Rostrum modice elongatum, apice latius, supra angulare ; scrohes

profund, arcuate, pone oculos desinentes. Antenne articulis

duobus primis funiculi subequalibus. Prothorax margine postico

428 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical, Curculionide.

dilatato. Hlytra prothorace multo latiora. Femora infra den-

tata. Abdomen segmento primo recto.

In all these characters this genus differs from Compsus,

Eustales, and their allies. The anterior tibie are produced

at the apex, but not into a naked mucro, as in Compsus ; and

in this respect it agrees with Platyomus.

Cleoteges virosus.

C. ovatus, squamis fuscis approximatis, aliis in maculis adspersis

parvis viridibus, tectus; scutello majusculo, transverso. Long.

52 Jin.

Hab. Chontales.

Ovate, covered with approximate brownish scales, much

darker on the back, and on which are a few small scattered

pure green spots; the sides, legs, and under surface more or

less obscurely blotched with pale brown and green ; rostrum

flattish above, the sides between the eye and the beginning of

the scrobe bent down at an angle; antenne with a rather

short funicle, greenish, the club dark; prothorax narrow an-

teriorly, rounded at the sides, the basal portion suddenly ex-

panded at the sides against the elytra, the disk coarsely granu-

late; scutellum rather large, transverse ; elytra flattish above,

raised on each side of the scutellum, transversely punctured,

the interstices, except the third, scarcely raised, the third

terminating abruptly at the deflexed portion in a short com-

pressed gibbosity, below which is another, but smaller, on

the fifth interstice, the apices mucronate at the suture.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

The Geological Antiquity of Insects—Twelve Papers on Fossil

Entomology. By Hersmrr Goss, F.L.S. 8vo. London: Van

Voorst, 1880.

Tue subject of Fossil Entomology is certainly one which has not

attracted many investigators. In this country scarcely any one

hitherto seems to have devoted any continuous attention to fossil

insects ; and even on the continent the students of insect-remains

are so few that the more important of them might almost be counted

on the fingers of one hand. ‘This is due, no doubt, to a considerable

extent, to the fact that the occurrence of fossil insects is exceed-

ingly sporadic : beds containing such objects occur only here and

there; and when they turn up in quantity, the specimens obtained

Bibliographical Notices. 429

generally fall into the hands of some one person who undertakes to

work out the whole series. Mr. Goss, in his pamphlet now before

us, suggests as another cause for the limited amount of interest

shown in fossil insects, that very few geologists are capable of

forming opinions upon even the general relationships of such frag-

ments of insects as are usually met within a fossil state. Weshould

be inclined to go even a step further and say that there are very

few entomologists, at all events in England, at all qualified by the

breadth of their previous studies to undertake with profit this line

of investigation.

Nevertheless, especially in view of the great addition to our

knowledge of the insect-fauna of the past which recent researches in

America seem to promise, it must be admitted that the study of

fossil insects ought to be one of primary importance, particularly

with regard to the question of the succession of organisms on the

face of the earth. There can be little doubt that, if ever the theory

of evolution is to be definitively established or disproved from the

study of existing forms of animals, it is to the insects that we shall

have to turn our special attention ; and from this point of view the

careful study of fossil insects and their comparison with those now

living must also be of the highest importance.

Under these circumstances, we think that English entomologists

and geologists have every reason to be grateful to Mr. Goss for

having reprinted, in the form of a pamphlet, a series of twelve

articles which he has lately contributed to the ‘ Entomologist’s

Monthly Magazine.’ Without pretending to go very deeply into the

subject, Mr. Goss has here given an excellent sketch of the constitu-

tion of the successive insect-faunas of the different geological forma-

tions, so far as they are at present known. For the purposes of the

general paleontologist the information here carefully brought

together by Mr. Goss will be of great value, and in many cases

quite sufficient without any supplementary investigations ; but for

the service of those who may wish to carry their study of the

subject, or any part of it, somewhat further, the author has care-

fully given references to the works from which his details are de-

rived; and these, we believe, embrace, if not the whole, very nearly

the whole of the published literature of fossil entomology. Future

students will be much indebted to the industry of Mr. Goss for the

valuable summary of this literature which he has thus produced.

Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society. Vol. ii. nos. 4 to 7

and 7 a, for June to December 1879. 8vo. Williams and Norgate,

London.

Tus publication includes the Transactions and Proceedings of the

Society, and a vast amount of information relative to Invertebrate

and Cryptogamie organisms, and to Embryology, Histology, and

Microscopy, as gathered from other publications at home and

abroad. The enthusiastic Editor, Frank Crisp, LL.B. &c., has

now associated with himself, in the work of translating, compiling,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 29

430 Miscellaneous.

and editing, other accomplished and energetic Fellows of the Royal

Microscopical Society, namely T. Jeffery Parker, B.Sc., A. W. Ben-

nett, M.A., B.Sc., and F. Jeffrey Bell, B.A.; and the results of their

combined work continue to be scientifically good and of great value

to the Society to which they belong, and to the scientific world in

general.

The original communications to the Society, upwards of forty in

number, contain many excellent natural-history notes and memoirs,

mostly illustrated, besides those in which the Microscope itself is

the more important subject.

Proceedings of the Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society.

New Series, vol. vii. part 2, pp. 107-218, with 7 plates. Edited

by J. W. Davis, F.S.A., F.G.8., &. 8vo. Leeds, 1879.

Tuts latest publication of the long-established scientific Society of

the West Riding of Yorkshire bears witness to its vitality and the

intellectual activity of its Members. Mr. W. Morrison’s address,

short as it is, is strong in sensible remarks on the ill effects that

“cramming” and prize-getting have on modern education, in which

work is not done for the work’s sake, but for some material end and

self-aggrandizement. Local geology has many useful illustrations

among the papers in this Part of the Proceedings, ranging from the

coal-fields to the glacial phenomena of Yorkshire ; and some of the

papers, though treating of local facts, have philosophical bearings

of wide application—such, for instance, as the Rev, E. M. Cole’s

paper on the origin and formation of the Wold Dales. For

Natural History we find interesting and new matter detailed by

Messrs. Cash and Hick in their communication on Fossil Fungi

(pl. vi.) from the Coal-measures ; and to the Cryptogams they refer

Carruthers’s Z’raquairia, also from the Halifax coal. Mr. J. W.

Davis describes (without figures) some new Carboniferous fish-

remains as Ostracacanthus dilatatus, which he thinks has strong

Teleostean affinities. A summary of the geological literature

relating to Yorkshire which has been published in 1877-78, the

Minutes of Meetings (comprising a notice of Raygill Cave), the

Report, and some miscellaneous matter complete this useful No.

of the Proceedings.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Formation of the Shell in the Snails.

By MM. Loner and E. Mer.

Tux shell of the Helices consists of two principal layers, of organic

and mineral nature, clothed with a cuticle which is wholly organic.

The first of these layers is composed, commencing exteriorly, of a

structure showing confused striation, of about the same thickness as

the cuticle, and of another thicker one formed of vertical prisms.

Miscellaneous. 431

It is to this that is due the general coloration of the shell, as also

that of the spots and bands. ‘The second layer, which is colourless

and is commonly designated nacre, includes several strata of prisms

arranged horizontally, and the axes of which, in two successive

strata, are nearly perpendicular to each other. The cuticle and the

calcareous layers are produced by different regions of the mantle,

approaching nearer to the collar in proportion as the layers are

more superficial. The cuticle is formed by an apparatus which we

believe has not yet been described, and which we shall call the

cutogenie apparatus (appareil cutogéne). It is composed of two

special organs situated immediately behind the collar. One of them

consists of a furrow, to which we have given the name of the

pallial groove, parallel to the margin of the mantle, and at the

bottom of which glandular cxca open; the other, situated behind

the former, appears, upon an antero-posterior section, like an epithe-

hal wedge buried in the substance of the mantle. It is formed of

long vertical cells, shaped like bottles, the orifices of which open at the

base of the organ which we shall name provisionally the epithelial

organ. These cells contain granules, which are isolable in potash,

and a nucleus situated in their deeper-seated part. We must regard

them as differentiated epithelial cells.

The cutogenic apparatus exists in the embryo when still enclosed

in the ovular envelopes. At this epoch the shell is already fur-

nished with a cuticle. It persists during the whole of the growth

of the young snail, the epithelial organ showing itself under the

appearance of a white border surrounding the margin of the mantle.

In the adult it disappears and is replaced by the tissue of the mantle.

The long-necked cells become converted into ordinary epithelial

cells, capable of producing nacre. ‘The pallial groove, on the other

hand, always persists ; but the glandular ceca which line its bottom

are gradually atrophied. The consequence of this disappearance

and atrophy is that a scar in the shell can no more be covered with

cuticle in this region than in the other parts of the mantle, whilst

this does take place when the animal is still in its period of

growth.

According to our observations the function of the cutogenic organ

is as follows:—The glands of the pallial groove secrete mucus,

perhaps that substance which chemists have found associated with

the calcareous matter of shells, and which they have named con-

chioline. The long-necked cells of the epithelial organ afterwards

deposit the granules they contain in the membrane originating from

the pallial groove. The cuticle is the result of this double secretion.

What justifies our thinking that this is the case is, that when a young

Helix increases its shell it may be seen to apply closely the margin

of the mantle to the last-formed part in such a manner that the

cutogenic apparatus borders this part. Above the groove a mem-

brane destitute of lime soon makes its appearance. The animal is

so adherent to the shell that it does not yield to those slight irrita-

tions which at other times would cause it immediately to withdraw.

432 Miscellaneous.

We may sometimes succeed in killing it in this position, and then

make antero-posterior sections embracing at once both the apparatus

and the cuticle in course of formation. In some of these sections

we have seen a streak of matter issue from the groove and become

impregnated, above the epithelial organ, with granules escaping

from the cells of the latter, the function of which would appear to

be to consolidate the membrane secreted by the glandular cca.

It is well known that the principal character of the adult Helices

consists in the turning-out of the margin of the shell. According

to the preceding statements, this eversion is explained as follows : —

After the atrophy of the epithelial organ the portion of the mantle

which it occupied sinks down, and in this depression carries with it

the part of the cuticle which covered it. The anterior portion of

this membrane situated above the pallial groove, the level of which

has not changed, is thus raised, and is soon lined on its inner surface

with the calcareous deposits which this region has acquired the

power of secreting.

All the parts of the mantle posterior to those we have just been

considering assist in the formation of the nacre. As regards the

primitive forms under which the constituent elements of the various

calcareous layers are deposited, we shall limit ourselves to the fol-

lowing remarks. If we examine a fragment of the delicate mem-

brane detached from the margin of a shell in process of growth, we

observe that the most recent part is formed almost exclusively by

the cuticle; a little further back this is furnished with lines of

spherical granules ; further still these granules form a continuous

calcareous layer lining the inner surface of the cuticle. In a young

Helix from which a portion of the cutogenic apparatus has been

removed, the outermost layer above the injured spot is formed in a

different manner. We first of all see calcareous rods appear; and

these gradually become enlarged at the two extremities, and acquire

the form of small wallets (or saddle-bags). By the addition of fresh

particles these wallets are converted into spheres, the dimensions of

which are increased by concentric deposits with radiating strie.

These spheres finally come into contact with each other. The first

calcareous stratum therefore is formed differently according as it is

uncovered or protected by the cuticle. It is also in the guise of

rods and spheres that the elements of the outermost layer are depo-

sited in the cicatrical fragments consequent on denudations, both

in the adult and in the young animal. ‘This is the case also in the

epiphragms, but with this difference, that granules poured forth by

the calcareous glands of the collar are here mingled with the

spheres with concentric layers. We have ascertained that the

cicatrices of the shell are produced even when the part laid bare is

covered immediately with a fragment corresponding to that which

has been removed. Fine plates of mica introduced between the

the shell and the mantle are lined on the inner surface with a cal-

careous deposit.— Comptes Rendus, April 12, 1880, p. 882.

Miscellaneous. 433

Metamorphoses of the Aphis of the Woody Galls of the Black Poplar

(Pemphigus bursarius, Zinn.). By M. J. Licurensrer.

By indicating as synonymous with his Aphis bursaria the Aphides

of which the galls are figured under the nos. 7-11 in pl. xxvi. of

Réaumur’s third volume, Linné has set his successors a problem to

solve; for in this case the choice is embarrassing. Fig. 8 of the

great French observer in fact presents, under the letters h, g, u,

very different galls united on the same branch; and the entomolo-

gists who have copied Linné have taken sometimes one and some-

times the other species for Aphis bursaria.

Without wishing here to perform ‘a work of criticism, I shall

confine myself to saying that I regard as Pemphigus bursarius the

insect of the gall figured by Réaumur under the letter h. It is the

only gall that is fixed upon the bark; it is the only one that is of

a hard woody consistency ; further, it does not fall with the leaves ;

it is persistent, and may be very readily seen upon the poplars

during the whole winter.

Up to the present time we have only known of the insect which

forms this gall, the foundress-mother, and the emigrant winged

progeny which quit the galls in June and July. No one has yet

been able to discover where this emigrant form goes, nor have I

been able to fill up this gap; but having placed in a tube these

winged emigrant insects, I soon saw them deposit living young, all

alike, and presenting a well-developed rostrum, a certain indication

that they are destined to take food; only I have not yet been able

to find what suited them, and they have all died in my bottles.

Now, in freedom, in the month of August, when the last emi-

grants had quitted the galls, I have seen arriving upon the poplars

winged insects which, quite in opposition to the emigrants, seemed

to endeavour to enter instead of issuing forth, and this, not only

into the already dry galls, but into all the fissures of the bark.

The external appearance of these Aphides is almost the same as

that of the emigrant form; I can find no difference between them

except in the number and form of the crenulations of the third joint

of the antenn, which run all round the antenne in the emigrant,

and only pass half round in the new comers. But their pro-

duct is quite different. Placed in tubes the new arrivals deposit

what I call pupe in the Phyllowere, and pup of two sizes, which

very quickly free themselves from their envelope, and give origin to

small sexual Aphides, male and female, destitute of the rostrum,

and furnished with generative organs. Copulation takes place; and

soon afterwards the female deposits, between the wrinkles or cracks

of the old drying gall, a small yellow egg, surrounded by a white

cottony down or secretion.

Is it not marvellous to see instinct thus carry back the Pupifere

to the dwelling formed by their great grandmother, to bring back

to it the young couples which are to furnish the say egg, the

germ of the future colony ?

Of this egg I have preserved numerous examples in my cabinet

434 Miscellaneous.

through the whole winter ; for if each female furnishes only one egg

there are an immense number of females. The egg hatched on the

11th May [March?]; and I placed the little Aphis which issued

from it, and which is, of course, the larva of the foundress-form,

upon a small poplar, which I planted on purpose in my garden.

Now, on the 3rd April, I have the satisfaction of seeing my little

artisans at work, burying themselves in the tender stalks of the

first buds, and beginning to disappear beneath a little elevation

which surrounds them like a halo, of a bright carmine tinge.

I had wished to be able to give the complete history of the bio-

logical cycle of this Aphis; but I hope that what I have seen may

facilitate the study of these interesting metamorphoses by other

observers. However, the theories which I have already had the

honour of presenting to the Academy with regard to Phyllowera and

other species of Pemphigians are here again fully confirmed: there

are four larval forms preceding the sexual forms ; and of these four

forms two are apterous and two winged.—Comptes Rendus, April 5,

1880, p. 804.

Structure of the Eye of Limulus.

By A. 8. Packarp, Jun.

The eyes of the horseshoe or king crab are four in number, con-

sisting of a pair of compound eyes situated on the side of the head,

and a pair of small simple eyes on the front of the head. As

described by A. Milne-Edwards and Owen, the optic nerves to these

eyes are very long and slender. Those distributed to the larger

compound eyes are very long, and close to each eye subdivide into

an irregular plexus of fine nerves, a branch being, as we have

found, distributed to each facet composing the compound eye. The

structure of the eye is very unlike that of any other Arthropod eye.

The cornea is simply a smooth convex portion of the integument,

which is much thinner than the adjoining part of the chitinous

skin. There are no facets, the cornea externally being structure-

less, simply laminated like the rest of the integument. In the

internal side of the cornea are a series of solid chitinous conical

bodies, separated from one another by a slight interspace and in

form resembling so many minié-rifle balls; the conical ends of

these solid cones project free into the interior of the body, and are

enveloped in a dense layer of black pigment. Within the base of

these cones are secondary, shallow, cup-hke bodies or shallow

secondary cones. It is these primary cones which, seen through

the smooth, convex, translucent cornea, give the appearance of a

faceted surface to the external eye.

All the parts thus far described, except the pigment layer, are

moulted with the rest of the crust; and the large, long, slender

cones can be easily seen by viewing a piece of the cast-off eye, the

solid cones being seen projecting from the inner surface of the

cast-off cornea.

The internal structure of the eye is very simple. There are no

cones and no rods; but a branch of the optic nerve impinges directly

Miscellaneous. 435

upon the end of the solid chitinous cone, as determined by re-

moving the layer of pigment with dilute potash, and treating the

section with acetic acid and then staining with picro-carmine. So

far as we can ascertain, no Arthropod eye is so simple as that of

Limulus. Our observations have been based on a study of the

structure of the lobster’s eye from preparations of very great

beauty and delicacy, kindly made for us by Norman N. Mason,

Esq., of Providence, who has also made beautiful sections of the

LIimulus-eye, after treating them in various ways. The question

as to the nature of the solid cones we are not yet prepared to settle.

Are they crystalline lenses or only analogous organs? Can the

horseshoe crab distinguish objects? We doubt if its eyes enable it

to more than distinguish between the light and darkness. Since

the above remarks were put in type, we have seen Grenacher’s

great work on the eyes of Arthropoda. He regards the conical

chitinous minié-ball-like bodies as corneal lenses. He does not

describe the simple eye, which is a close repetition of one of the

corneal lenses of the compound eye of the same animal, except that

the lens is shorter and with the end much more obtuse.— American

Naturalist, March 1880.

Fossil Crawfish from the Tertiaries of Wyoming.

By A. 8. Packarp, Jun.

Two specimens of fossil crawfish quite well preserved have been

kindly lent us for description by Professor Leidy, who received

them from the fish-beds of the western border of Wyoming, through

Dr. J. Van A. Carter, of Evanston, Wyoming. Of the two speci-

mens the smaller presents a dorsal, and the larger a lateral view,

both being slightly distorted by pressure; the length of the smaller

from the tip of the rostrum to the end of the telson is 38 millims.,

and of the larger 53 millims. They do not differ generically from

existing species of Cambarus, though with some resemblances to

Astacus ; but as the gills are not represented it is not possible to say

to which of these two genera the species belongs; still the weight

of characters ally it nearest to Cambarus affinis, as seen in the long,

narrow, pointed rostrum, and the form of the chele and the second

antennal scales. These scales are also much as in C. obesus, var.

latimanus and Bartonii, but rather narrower, the lateral terminal

spine being long, slender, acute. The flagella of the second

antenne are of the usual size, extending to the terminal fourth of

the abdomen. The distal end of the scape of the first antennze

reaches to near the end of the last joint of the scape of the first pair,

the species in this respect being more like Cambarus than <Astacus.

The carapace is of the proportions of living species of Cambarus.

The first pair of legs are rather shorter and stouter than in our

living crawfishes, and the chele are rather shorter; while the

surface of the carapace and legs is much more coarsely tubereu-

lated than in our Cambari, and in this respect resembles large

specimens of Astacus fluviatilis of Europe, though the tubercles

are larger.

436 Miscellaneous.

The abdomen is of the usual proportions, but the surface is

more coarsely tubercled ; the telson and broad rami of the last

pair of feet are spined as in living species of Cambarus. It is

interesting to observe that this species is most nearly related to Cam-

barus affinis, which, as observed to me by Mr. P. R. Uhler, who

kindly gave me some species for comparison, is the more gene-

ralized American species of the genus, and probably the oldest one.

It would be interesting to know whether this fossil form is actually

a Cambarus or an Astacus, and to ascertain which of these two

genera, now restricted, the latter to the Pacific slope of the Sierra

Nevada, the former to the Central and Eastern zoogeographical

provinces, was the first to obtain a foothold on our continent.

There is a probability that the present fossil form is a member

of the American genus Cambarus. The species may be called,

therefore, Cambarus primevus.— American Naturalist, March 1880.

On the Occurrence of Tachymenis vivax in Cyprus.

By Dr. A. Ginrner, F.R.S.

Major-General R. Biddulph, C.B., has kindly placed in my hands a

snake obtained on the Lapithos road in Cyprus, which proves to be

Tachymenis vivax, a species not contained in the collection described

by me in Proc. Zool. Soc. 1879, p. 741, and, indeed, as far as I can

see, new to the fauna of the island. The captor, Capt. Stevenson,

informed Gen. Biddulph that the natives call it ‘‘ Kufi,” and believe its

bite to be fatal to man; the species, however, is entirely harmless,

and evidently owes its bad reputation to its singular resemblance

to aviperine snake, and more especially to the viper occurring in the

island, Vipera lebetina. This is a case of so-called mimicry which

would be very far from benefiting the species concerned.

The Cyprian specimen differs from all the other specimens in the

British Museum (received from Xanthus, Syria, the Holy Land, and

Dalmatia) in having twenty-one longitudinal series of scales, the

typical form possessing nineteen only. It does not differ in other

respects.

On Dana’s Lysiosquilla inorneta.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GrenttEMEN,—Allow me to state that I think Mr. E. J. Miers is

perfectly right in referring (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. v.

p- 8) the Squilla from La Guayra to Dana’s Lystosquilla mornata.

When I wrote my letter, published in P. Z.8. 1870, I had no access

to Dana’s work ; but I was afterwards able to compare his description

with the specimen in our Museo Nacional; so that another one was

given by me, in December 1877, under that name to Mr. William

Stiirup, Danish Consul-General in this city, who, I believe, sent it

to the Museum in Copenhagen.

I am, yours very truly,

Caracas, March 18, 1880. A. Ernst.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 30. JUNE 1880.

XL.—Report on Specimens dredged up from the Gulf of

Manaar and presented to the Liverpool Free Museum by

Capt. W. H. Cawne Warren. By H. J. Carter, F.R.S.

&e.

[Plates XVIIL. & XIX.]

Tue Gulf of Manaar is an inlet of the Indian Ocean, between

Ceylon and the southern extremity of- India, 150 miles in

width at its entrance; and the specimens, which were dredged

up by Capt. W. H. Cawne Warren, in 65 fathoms and less,

off the town of Negombo, near Colombo, on the coast of

Ceylon, and Tuticorin on the coast of India respectively, to-

wards the end of 1878, were presented to the Liverpool Free

Museum about a year afterwards, when they were sent to me

for examination by Mr. Thomas H. Higgin, F.L.S.

As they all possess a similar facies, it will only be necessary

to allude to them hereafter as “from the Gulf of Manaar,”

without specifying the particular locality more than has

already been done.

Altogether they would hardly fill a quart measure ; and the

largest was not more than three inches in its longest diame-

ter; so that the amount of material is insignificant. But the

representatives of species are comparatively enormous, as will

be seen hereafter; indeed, if this material is to be taken as

typical of what is to be found in the Gulf of Manaar generally,

I should think that this little inlet must contain an epitome of

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 30

438 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

nearly all the marine organisms that exist in the Indian

Ocean.

The ‘ specimens” consist of calcareous nodules of different

sizes, which may be said to originate, in the first place, in

the agglutination of a little sea-bottom by some organism into

a transportable mass, which, increasing after the same manner

as it is currented about, may finally attain almost unlimited

dimensions. They are therefore compounded of all sorts of

invertebrate animals, whose embryos, swimming about in every

direction, find them, although still free and detached, of suffi-

cient weight and solidity to offer a convenient position for

development; and hence the number of species in and about

them.

They vary in form and weight in proportion to the amount

of loose or solid material in them, some being round, hollow,

clathrous, others more solid, but much creviced, and some

almost entirely solid; while they may be more or less rugged

on the surface from the nature of the organisms of which they

are chiefly composed, whether through development in sztu

or subsequent agglutination. Perhaps no family of organisms

has entered into their composition or increased their solidity

more than the calcareous Algee (MJelobesiw), which, in succes-

sively laminated or nulliporoid growths, has rendered these

nodules almost solid throughout or covered with short, thick,

nulliporiform processes. I am not sufficiently acquainted with

the calcareous Algz to say what the species are; but the

common incrusting one hardly differs from our Melobesia

polymorpha ; and this seems also to have produced the nulli-

poroid growths to which I have alluded. There is also

another laminar species with larger cells which are quadran-

gular; but this does not appear to be so common, while

the loose, deciduous, flat, reniform articulations of /Zabellaria

opuntia are agglomerated with every thing, showing that this

calcareous alga or coralline, which is very common in the

tropics generally, is not less so in the Gulf of Manaar.

As it is upon these agglutinated compounds, as well as in

their crevices and the excavated cavities formed by lithodo-

mous sponges in them, that the organisms to be hereafter

mentioned have been developed, I shall henceforth allude to

the former under the term of ‘ Melobesian nodules.”

Next to the part which the Melobeste have taken in their

formation may be mentioned the sessile Foraminifera; and

these have, in their turn, been overgrown, in many instances,

by Polyzoa, which, too, is a class of which I know so little

that Lam not able to point out the different species present ;

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 439

but observing them to be abundant and as beautiful as they

are varied in form, while many are evidently not British, I

have placed such of them as, in breaking up the nodules for

other organisms, were necessarily separated, in a box by

themselves, for some one who, desirous of describing the

exotic species, may one day be permitted to examine them

for this purpose.

For my own part, the Foraminifera and Spongida are as

much as [ can pretend to undertake ; and these, together with

a new genus of the Hydractiniide and a new species of Tubi-

pora, will be found described and illustrated in the following

ages.

: But although the forms of the Foraminifera that I have

mentioned are fully developed, and therefore admit of complete

description and illustration, those of the Spongida in several

instances are not so. Then it should be remembered that the

form of a fully developed sponge is frequently by no means

constant, while every fragment of it is almost sure to contain

its whole spiculation ; and this alone is what is found in many

cases on the Melobesian nodules. Hence, the name of a sponge

being for the most part derived from the form of its spicules,

this enables us to supply it, together with a description of

the latter, which is all that is required until a fully developed

form is found.

Before commencing these descriptions, however, I would

observe that the mountings that I have made of some of the

dust that fell off the root-branch of Huplectella cucumer (now

in the British Museum) which was hooked up by a fisher-

man in deep water off the Seychelle Islands afford a complete

index to the Manaar specimens, with many other forms besides,

which may yet exist in the neighbourhood; but I have not

met with any traces of ,zold among the sand obtained from

some of the nodules, although the blue sapphire which is found

in Ceylon is as evident in them as in the sea-bottom from the

Seychelles (‘ Annals,’ 1878, vol. i. p. 102).

Another fact I would also here mention, viz. that through-

out my examinations, which have chiefly been conducted

under the microscope, and often with high powers, I have

never observed a Coccolith, Coccosphere, or Rhabdolith.

The descriptions and illustrations respectively of the new

genus of Hydractiniide and new species of Tubiporide will

be found in this part of my communication for convenience of

publication &c., rather than on account of proper sequence ;

this will be corrected in the terminal list of the ‘ Report.”

30*

440 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

FORAMINIFERA.

Sessile Species.

Genus CARPENTERIA, Gray.

Generic characters. Test conical, sessile ; composed of elon-

gated more or less triangular chambers developed successively

ma spire, more or less regularly round a hollow axis, towards

which they are inclined and into which they open. Chambers

foraminated on the surface, and more or less filled in the in-

terior with fragmentary sponge-spicules. Hollow axis pro-

longed from the summit into a branched fruticose head.

Carpenteria uiricularis and Carpenteria monticularis.

The former abounds on the Melobesian nodules of the Gulf

of Manaar; but of the latter I have only found one specimen.

In 1876 (Ann. vol. xvii. p. 210, pl. xi. figs. 11-16), I

described and illustrated C. utricularis under the name of

Polytrema utriculare, and in 1877 (Amn. vol. xix. p. 211)

reverted to the old generic appellation, viz. Carpenteria,

adding at the same time (¢bdd. pl. xii. figs. 9-12) a new

species, viz. C. monticularis; while in 1878 (‘ Paleonto-

graphica,’ [3] xxv. 1, Taf. xl. figs. 58-61) Prof. Mébius

figured the same en masse, under the name of Carpenteria

rhaphidodendron.

Genus PoLYTREMA.

Gen. char. Test massive, more or less divided at the sum-

mit, composed of cells or chambers developed laminarly upon

each other, the outer ones foraminated on the surface and

opening into the inner ones, whose cavities, communicating

with each other, finally terminate at the ends of the

branches or lamin into which the summit may be divided,

where they are more or less filled with fragmentary sponge-

spicules.

Polytrema miniaceum, De Blainville.

This species, which abounds everywhere in the tropics

(but is rare, perhaps, beyond the 35th parallel on each side of

the equator), varying in colour from deep red to pink, cinna-

mon, and pure white, is in its pink colour equally abundant in

the Gulf of Manaar, growing apparently indiscriminately on

every organism that will bear its weight. Accompanying it

is another species, which, although not so frequent, beng new

I shall designate as P. cylindricum, in reference to its form, as

will be seen hereafter. Finally, there is a third organism on the

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 441

Melobesian nodules, which, being polytrematous (literally),

possessing fragmentary sponge-spicules in its interior, and

presenting the same red colour as P. minéaceum, I at first

thought to be another new species ; but on further examination

it was found to be a reptant Tubipora so like 7’. musica that,

but for its stoloniferous growth and consequent modifications,

together with the presence of the fragmentary sponge-spicules

incorporated with its corallum, it might be considered identi-

cal. This species I shall designate Tubipora reptans; and,

although belonging to the Polypifera, it will be described here

for convenience, as before noticed, on account of the great

resemblance to Polytrema just mentioned.

Here also I would take the opportunity of introducing

another species of Polytrema, which accidentally came into my

possession, in a rolled state, having probably been picked up

upon some beach ; but where, Tamignorant. Imperfect as it

is, however, it is remarkable for its size and other charac-

teristics : with a Polytrema-like structure and pink colour, it

is so much larger and so differently formed from any hitherto

published, that it must be considered a new species, which

I propose to designate (also in reference to its form) P.

mesentericum.

These species will now be respectively described, beginning

with

Polytrema cylindricum, n. sp. (Pl. XVIITL. fig. 1, a-g.)

Erect, cylindrical, consisting of a thick round pillar deve-

loped from a slightly expanded base, dichotomously divided

at the free end into two short thick branches, which are equal

in length and opposite, terminating respectively in an expan-

sion, from the centre of which radiate a number of more or

less fragmentary sponge-spicules. Consistence stony. Colour

red, cinnamon, or crimson; translucent (PI. XVIII. fig. 1).

Surface of the pillar and branches unifor mly divided into gentle

convexities, pierced with foramina which are sunk into a sub-

reticulated lineation whose interstices vary in prominence with

the development of the organism—being most prominent in the

oldest parts, and vice versd (fies h, aby ends of the branches

rendered irregular by the outgrowth of cells, which are other-

wise hidden in the pillar and branches, as will appear pre-

sently. Cells at the ends of the branches bearing respectively

a large aperture, similar in form, position, and margination to

that of the cells of Planorbulina (fig. 1,¢), which they further

resemble in the form of their pore-tubulation ; divided into

two groups by a central rima, presenting a number of aper-

tures, out of which project the fragmentary sponge-spicules

442 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

before mentioned, some of which may be seen in the large

apertures as well as cavities respectively of the terminal cells

themselves (fig. 1,d). Internal structure consisting of cells

or chambers of different sizes, the largest and most regularly

formed of which are arranged cortically (fig. 1, a), where

their outer wall, corresponding to the “ gentle convexities ”

on the surface, is pierced by the pore-tubules (fig. 1,4 99),

whose sunken apertures there are the holes also before men-

tioned (fig. 1, e) ; opening internally into a cancellated axial

structure (fig. 1, a), whose cavities, communicating freely with

each other, tinally terminate in the rima between the groups

of free cells at the ends of the branches respectively. Cells

generally more or less filled with fragmentary sponge-spicules,

especially the free ones at the ends of the branches (fig. 1, 0).

Size of specimens (which are very constant in this as well as

in their form) about 1-3rd inch long and 1-12th inch thick ;

branches 1-16th inch long and a little less in diameter than

the pillar.

Hab, Marine, growing on hard objects.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. This is undoubtedly a species of Polytrema, as evi-

denced by its structure, colour, and the presence of fragmen-

tary sponge-spicules at the ends of the branches, in the

interior of the cells, and on their way to them respectively

through the apertures mentioned. Its size and form appear

to be very constant, as above stated, although in one instance

there was a tendency to divide in one of the groups of cells

at the ends of the branches. What the object of taking in

alone so many ‘fragmentary sponge-spicules”? can be with

these Foraminifera, when there are so few comparatively in-

corporated with the substance of the test, I am unable to

conceive, especially as the very fact of their being “ fragmen-

tary”’ shows that they must have been drifting objects unac-

companied by any sponge-sarcode for nourishment, since

“fragmentary spicules’ do not, as a rule, exist in a living

sponge.

Tubipora reptans,n. sp. (Pl. XVIII. fig. 2, a-z.)

Corallum strong, stoloniferous, vermiculate or crooked, not

branched, flat, following the form of the surface on which it

may be growing, bearing short, erect, cylindrical calycles

situated at unequal distances from each other. Colour crimson,

translucent (Pl. XVIII. fig. 2). Surface uniformly rough and

foraminated, from the holes being sunk in the substance of the

coral and the intervals in relief (fig. 2, 2). Calycle sur-

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 445

mounted by an octotentaculated head (fig. 2, a), which is

almost colourless, especially towards the centre, and from its

more tender nature now, in the dried state, sunk into the

calycle, while the firmer wall of the latter thus gives it the

appearance of having been truncated. ‘Tentacles composed

towards the extremities of small, cylindrical, curved and

colourless spicules (fig. 2,f), becoming larger, longer, and

tuberculated towards the base (fig. 2,9), where they begin to

assume a pink colour, and finally becoming red their tubercles

unite with those of the neighbouring spicules, and thus the

whole is transformed into the foraminated, fully formed, red,

continuous corallum. Calycle charged at the bottom with

fragmentary sponge-spicules, which are more or less incorpo-

rated with the red substance of the corallum there, and pro-

jecting upwards present, when the soft parts above them are

removed, an echinated appearance, in which the ends of the

spicules are simply branched or otherwise terminated in ac-

cordance with their forms respectively (fig. 2, %). Stolon

compressed vertically (fig. 2, 6); its wall in structure the

same as that of the calycle; its cavity compressed in like

manner, so as to be reduced to a minimum, like that in the

horizontal plate of 7. musica (fig. 2, c).

Size of specimen described about 6-12ths inch long, upon

which there are eight calycles at variable distances from each

other below 1-10th inch. Stolon, of which the growing ends

are broken off up to the part where their spicules have become

consolidated into the fully formed structure of the corallum,

about 1-50th inch broad and 1-130th inch high, including

the walls above and below, which reduces the vertical thick-

ness of the cavity to 1-450th inch. Calycle about 1-36th

inch high and 1-30th inch broad, including the walls; a little

larger above than below.

Hab. Marine, on hard bodies.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. As before stated, the striking resemblance of this

corallum to the test of Polytrema miniaceum in composition,

structure, and colour, together with the presence of fragmen-

tary sponge-spicules more or less incorporated with the coral-

lum, led me to regard it at first as a species of this Foramini-

fer; but subsequent microscopical examination showed that

it was almost identical with Tubipora musica, as the above

description proves. However, I prefer its insertion here, and

alluding to this hereafter by name in its proper place, for the

purpose of pointing out its several characters in common with

Polytrema, which otherwise might pass unnoticed.

A444 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

Polytrema mesentericum, n. sp. (Pl. XVIII. fig. 3, a—-h.)

(Rolled specimen.) ‘Test massive, composed of more or less

erect, thick, meandering lamine united mesenterically. Con-

sistence stony. Colour pinkish red (Pl. XVIII. fig. 3, 3 a).

Surface (¢.e. vertical sides of lamina) uniformly dimpled and

foraminated (fig.30,); margin worn away by attrition (fig.3,c).

Internal structure of lamina consisting of cells or chambers of

different sizes, the largest and most regularly formed of which

are arranged cortically, where their outer wall is pierced by

the pore-tubulation, whose apertures on the surface are the

foramina before mentioned (fig. 3, c, d, e e); opening inter-

nally into a cancellated axial structure, whose cavities, com-

municating freely with each other, finally open at the margin

in a corresponding position with respect to the cortical cham-

bers (fig. 3, d, g); thus presenting a more compact structure

between the layers of the latter, which, in the absence of the

real margin now worn away, presents the appearance of a

stony polyzoarium of a similar form. Fragments of sponge-

spicules incorporated here and there with the substance of the

test (fig. 3, d,7). Size of specimen, which is now rounded by

attrition, subelliptical and compressed vertically, 3-4th inch by

7-12th inch in its greatest horizontal diameters, and about

1-4th inch thick ; lamina 1-16th inch in transverse diameter.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. ?

Obs. Although none of the exposed chambers at present

contains any sponge-spicules (probably from their having been

washed out), and the structure of the margin is worn away,

yet by the presence of fragments of sponge-spicules incorpo-

rated with the substance of the test, and the character of the

structure of the lamina internally, there can be very little

doubt that when in a perfect condition it closely resembled

Polytrema cylindricum in these respects. Still its peculiar

form and size not only claim for it a separate designation, but

the latter precedence also of all other species of Polytrema that

have been publicly noticed. Comparing its form with that of

the figure of Theone, Lamouroux (Jurassic fossil from Caen),

given by De Blainville, Man. d’Actinol. Atlas, pl. Ixvi.

fig. 2, one cannot help being struck with their great resem-

blance. In many respects also it closely resembles the mesen-

teric forms of several exotic Polyzoaria.

Genus GYPSINA.

Gen. char. Massive, sessile or free, incrusting indefinitely

or circumscribed and defined; surface uniformly tessellated

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 445

by foraminated interstices variable in form and separated from

each other by reticulated lines of translucent shell-substance,

which is frequently very prominent and transparent at the

angles, forming the ends of a columnar structure in which the

cells are united laterally by holes of intercommunication, and

above and below by a foraminated plate, like that of the

‘ interstice’? on the surface, through which the innermost cell

thus indirectly obtains communication with the exterior.

No oral aperture. No canal-system.

Such are the characters of this genus, which is founded

on the species, Gypsina melobesioides, that I described in

1877 (‘ Annals,’ vol. xx. p. 172); but as the facts leading

to it were communicated at intervals, and are now confirmed

by specimens of each of the species contained in the genus,

from the Gulf of Manaar, I will briefly recapitulate what has

been stated.

When I showed, in March 1877 (‘ Annals,’ vol. xix. p. 215

et seq.), that Tinoporus vesicularis, Carpenter (Introduction,

p. 224, pl. xv. figs. 1-3), had “no generic affinity with De

Montfort’s 7. baculatus,”’ I was not aware of the existence of

the incrusting species to which I gave the name of Gypsina

melobestotdes (up. et loc. cit.) ; but seeing that the structure of

the latter was identical with that of Dr. Carpenter’s Tinoporus

vesicularis, I at once realized the necessity of changing the

generic name of the latter also to Gypsina, thus making it

G. vesicularis, Carpenter (dbid.). Had Dr. Carpenter, instead

of applying De Montfort’s name of Tinoporus (T. baculatus

being a Calcarina), given it a new name, then this might

have been used instead of the one [ have proposed.

Further, I observe that the Foraminifer to which I gave

the name of “ Polytrema planum” (‘ Annals,’ 1876, vol. xvii.

p. 211, pl. xii. figs. 18, 19), and which came from the south-

west coast of Australia, was a specimen of Gypsina melo-

besioides ; hence its name also will have to be suppressed, at

the same time that another locality is thus added to those

already noticed of G. melobesioides, viz. the Mauritius, the

West Indies, and, lastly, the Gulf of Manaar.

Gypsina melobesioides, sp. 1877.

There are four specimens of this species among the dredg-

ings from the Gulf of Manaar, two of which nearly cover

globular nodules of Jelobesia, respectively half an inch in

diameter, with an incrustation about 1-48th inch thick and

twelve cells deep. The other two are also on the surface of

similar nodules, but not so extensive. The incrustation

spreads itself continuously over whatever wregularities may

446 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

be in its way, so as to give the whole the appearance of

being frosted with sugar like a bridecake; hence it is very

likely, without the aid of a microscope, to be confounded

with Melobesia as well as the white incrustation of some

Gorgonias.

Gypsina vesicularis, Carpenter.

Several specimens of this species also occur, in the sessile

and free forms respectively. The sessile is hemispheroidal

and for the most part the largest, while the free one is sphe-

roidal and much smaller. Frequently the hemispheroidal

form is sunk into the flat surface of a Coralline, subtridentate

articulation (/labellaria opuntia), where it is covered by a

thick sarcodic cuticle ; and in this state I have specimens also

from the Straits of Carimata,on the west coast of Borneo; while

the spheroidal variety, being free, may be found anywhere.

The former is well described and illustrated by Dr. Carpenter

(Introduction, p. 225 &e., pl. xv. figs. 1-3) ; and I have illus-

trated the structure of the latter (‘ Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix.

pl. xvi. figs. 18-20).

TESTAMGBIFORMIA, new group.

Char. Amcebiform, testaceous.

Hitherto almost exclusive attention has been given to the

free Foraminifera, whose exquisitely varied forms, although

in many instances microscopic, have not unnaturally proved

as attractive as the frustules of the Diatomacez; so that it

has become an object of great search among them to find out

a new form, although it can hardly be seen by the unassisted

eye. ‘This to the specialist is a matter of paramount import-

ance, but to the biologist one of insignificance compared with

the less attractive and larger forms, which tend to reveal the

life-history and connexions of the class generally.

For some time past I have anticipated the existence of

amcebiform Foraminifera, differentiated only by the peculi-

arity of their respective pseudopodial expansions; but, of

course, this cannot be ascertained except by minute and labo-

rious examination of the living so-called ‘ Bathybius,” which

probably abounds with them after the manner of freshwater

rhizopods, forming a similar slime to that which may often be

observed over the bottom of stagnant (¢.e. still) freshwater pools.

I was not, however, prepared to find that some of these ever-

changing forms were stereotyped, as it were, by the permanent

secretion of a calcareous test, until the Melobesian nodules

from the Gulf of Manaar came under my notice, when I ob-

served two well-characterized forms to be very abundant in

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 447

them, which I will now describe under the generic names

Holocladina and Cysteodictyina respectively, having already

above defined the general characters of the group under the

term Testamabiformia.

Holocladina pustulifera, n. sp.

(Pl. XVIII. fig. 4, a-g.)

Test radiciform, polychotomous, free towards the centre,

fixed by the terminations of the rootlets at the circumference.

Consistence hard. Composition calcareous. Colour white

(Pl. XVIII. fig. 4). Surtace even, pustuliferous, pustuliform

eminences of different sizes scattered over the surface irregu-

larly (fig. 4, e), plentifully about the centre, sparsely on the

branchlets, in the form of smooth, hemispherical projections,

varying in diameter under 1-600th inch, terminating in a

slight papillary eminence with a punctum in the centre

(fig. 4, b,c), sometimes extended into a short conical spine

(fig. 4,d) ; ends of the rootlets subpalmate, terminating in

amorphous granular projections (fig. 4, 4), alternating with

conical processes, which appear to be perforated at the extre-

mity respectively ; and if so, here would be the oral apertures

(fig. 4,99). Surface of the test between the pustuliform

eminences bearing the appearance of being so minutely micro-

punctate as to be hardly distinguishable under a high power.

Internally, structure of the test-wall, which varies in thickness

under 1-50th inch, composed of extremely minute tubules in

juxtaposition, perpendicularly descending from the surface to

the interior (fig. 4,/), which in its dried state is now hollow

and without foreign material, but still presenting the remains

of the sarcode in the form of a thin yellow layer adherent to

the inner surface of the test. Size of most perfect specimen

about a quarter of an inch in its longest diameter.

Hab. Marine, in the crevices of Melobesian nodules.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. It is evident from the form of this test that the living

animal possessed an amoeboid form ; but whether both were

developed successively (that is, one part after another like the

crust on a stream of lava), or the living animal was fully

developed before the test was secreted, there is no evidence

now to show, beyond the presumption that the former was

most likely the case. The absence of all foreign material in

the interior, together with its form, distinctly separates it from

the genera Carpenteria and Polytrema, while it chiefly differs

trom Aphrosina (Journ. Roy. Microscop. Soc. 1879, vol. i.

p. 500, pl. xvii. figs. 5-10) in not being multilocular. No

oral apertures were satisfactorily seen ; but it may fairly be

448 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

inferred, as above stated, that each of the conical projections

on the terminal branchlets bears one, through which a

pseudopodium issues during the living state, in search of that

subtile kind of nourishment which the present emptiness of

the test indicates to have been the nature of the aliment.

Cysteodictyina compressa, ni. sp.

(Pl. XVIIL. fig. 5, a-e.)

Test bladder-like, flat, compressed, interrupted in its con-

tinuity by holes of different shapes and sizes, which thus give

it a reticulated appearance (Pl. XVIII. fig. 5); spreading

flatly over the surface of hard bodies, and thus following their

irregularities. Consistence firm, but fragile from its thinness.

Composition calcareous. Colour white, yellowish, or lilac.

Surface even, uniformly punctate ; puncta distinct, in juxta-

position ; circumference terminating in short radiciform ex-

pansions like those of Holocladina, viz. in conical points

(fig. 5,dd), mixed with an amorphous structure here and

there like calcareous sand-grains (fig.5, ee). Internally, test

almost too thin for measurement, traversed vertically by tubules

in juxtaposition extending inwards from the surface, termi-

nating on the inner side in the midst of their prismatic divi-

sions respectively (fig. 5,0). Cavity of the test without

foreign material, continuous, and presenting the same kind of

dried sarcodic lining as that of Holocladina. Size of most

perfect specimen about half an inch in its longest diameter,

by about a quarter of an inch wide and about 1-160th inch

thick. Wall, as before stated, almost too thin for mea-

surement.

Hab. Marine, on the surface of hard bodies and in their

crevices.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. This species differs from Holocladina in not being

branched, but membraniform and lobate, in the greater thin-

ness of the test-wall, the absence of pustuliform eminences

on the surface, and the larger size of the pore-tubulation. In

other respects the same observations apply to it as to Holo-

cladina. The amorphous sand-like development here and

there on the processes of the circumference reminds one of the

amorphous structure at the ends of some tendrils in the vege-

table kingdom, and may serve a similar purpose.

CERATESTINA, n. gen.

Gen. char. Test horny ; colour dark amber, translucent.

The composition of the test here brings. us one degree

nearer than that of the Testamcebiformia to the absolutely

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 449

naked Foraminifer, to whose conjectured existence I have

before alluded ; but lest it might be thought that it is merely

the chitine without the calcareous material which characterizes

this genus, it should be mentioned that, if a specimen of

Ceratestina and an ordinary calcareous test of a Foraminifer to-

gether be exposed to the influence of an acid solution (ez. gr.

dilute nitric acid), the latter will be dissolved and leave

scarcely any residue, while the former remains unaffected,

proving that the horny substance of the Ceratestina is some-

thing more than the chitine which may support the calca-

reous material; indeed the best way of extricating a Cera-

testina is to put the calcareous substance containing the

specimen into a strong solution of nitric acid, which, all know,

is instant destruction to a calcareous test. This kind of Fora-

minifer, besides occurring in the cavities excavated by litho-

domous sponges in the Melobesian nodules of the Gulf of

Manaar, is often observed on the surface of oldcoral. In some

cases the foraminiferal test is composed in one part of the

ordinary calcareous material, and in the other of the horny

substance only, which condition is so usually seen in one

species that it would appear to be rather natural than acci-

dental. I allude to a species which I have figured and de-

scribed, conjecturally, as the ‘embryonic form” of Carpen-

teria monticularis (* Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix. p. 213, pl. xiii.

fig. 11), but which now, finding it to be a distinct species, I

would name “ Carpenteria microscopica.” The chambers of

Carpenteria utricularis and also the cells of Polytrema mini-

aceum are often lined by a stiff horny layer of considerable

thickness ; but under what circumstances, [ am ignorant, as it

does not occur always; this, however, is secondary and must

not be confounded with Ceratestina, in which the horny struc-

ture 1s primary and permanent.

Ceratestina globularis, n. sp.

(Pl. XIX. fig. 6, a—g.)

Test composed of four or more subglobular chambers de-

veloped one after another from a primary or embryonic cell,

which is subspheroidal and presents the first bud of the

stolonic siphon. Composition horny. Colour dark amber

(Pl. XIX. fig. 6). Chambers increasing in size as they are

successively developed upon the stolonic siphon (fig. 6, c) pro-

ceeding from the embryonic cell, which is the smallest (fig. 6,a);

arranged more or less spirally, fitting upon each other, as they

are successively developed, by the convex surface of the pre-

ceding being received into a lunate one of the following

chamber (fig. 6, c), and all tied together on the inner side of

450 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

the spire by the stolonic siphon mentioned (fig. 6,¢c). Surface

of the chamber smooth, indistinctly microspinate and micro-

punctate (fig. 6, e). Size of the group about 1-36th inch in

diameter.

Hab, Marine, in minute cavities of the Melobesian nodules,

which have been excavated by lithodomous sponges.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. Besides the specimens which come from the cavities

above mentioned zm the Melobesian nodules, I possess pieces

of old Stylaster sanguineus from the South Pacific Ocean

bearing several specimens on the surface (fig. 6,f). Like

the last chamber in the figured specimen from the Gulf of

Manaar, which has put forth two stolonic knotted tubular

filaments and was in the act of putting forth more (fig. 6, dd),

some of those on the surface of the Stylaster coral are con-

nected with a similar filament. How far the chambers of

those from the Gulf of Manaar were originally arranged to-

gether in juxtaposition and spirally I am not able to state,

further than that their forms indicate it, since to see them

satisfactorily it was necessary to dissolve them out of the

Melobesian substance with acid and mount them in Canada

balsam, during which the chambers became separated.

Ceratestina tessellata, n. sp.

(Pl. XIX. fig. 7, a-h.)

Test lobular, adenoid, connected with a crooked, knotted,

stolonic filamentous tube. Consistence horny. Colour dark

amber (Pl. XIX. fig. 7, a, 6). Developed upon a stolonic

tubular filament in a globular form (fig. 7, ¢), which, becoming

multiplied as the mass increases in size, passes into a lobu-

lated group whose walls are traversed by straight unbranched

lines of fibre intersecting each other at various angles, and thus

giving the surface a meridionated or tessellated appearance

(fig. 7, d), not rising above the level of the outer surface, but

sending inwards processes which in the living state may

have supported delicate partitions, and thus have rendered the

interior multilocular (fig. 7, f). External surface of the wall

smooth, with the exception of microscopic points which are

sparsely scattered over it (fig. 7,4). Stolonic tubular fila-

ments, which are often knotted (that is, bearing several suc-

cessive dilatations and here and there conical processes indi-

cative of budding development), hollow, and characterized

throughout by the tessellated fibrous structure above described,

only in a less visible degree (fig. 7, g). Size of largest group

or specimen 1-25th by 1-45th inch in its greatest dimen-

sions.

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 451

Hab. Marine, in cavities of the Melobesian nodules, which

have been excavated by lithodomous sponges, —

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. In composition, colour, and position, together with the

micropointed surface and its connexion with the crooked,

knotted, filamentous, stolonic tubulation, this organism re-

sembles Ceratestina globularis more than any thing else that I

know of; but there is no visible appearance of punctures

in the wall. The knotted form of the stolonic tubulation

reminds one of the successive moniliform chambers in the so-

called Placopsiline Lituolida—equally so in form, although

not in consistence, of the creeping tubulation of the Sapro-

legniew and Myxomycetic fungi, to which in nature the Fora-

minifera very nearly approach. In consistence, however, they

are more like the penetrating developments of the kerataceous

sponges, but in structure totally different ; for the fibre in the

latter is not only infinitely branched, but, in all instances that

I am aware of, cactiform—that is, puckered up into little mon-

ticules on the surface, which is thus rendered most uneven.

One cannot help here associating the amber colour of

Ceratestina with the bright brown, or red cinnamon colour of

most of the Lituolida, which appears to be thus modified by

admixture of the chitine in the latter with the white mineral

substance of which the test is otherwise composed.

Subsessile Species of Foraminifera.

Genus Roraxia, D’Orbigny.

The genus Lotalia, sometimes parasitic, but, according

to Williamson, “ usually free,” is under the former con-

dition characterized by being flat on one side, by which it

adheres to the object on which it may be fixed, and convex

on the other; but although many of the latter may be easily

detached without injury, still there is one in particular, viz.

Rotalia spiculotesta (‘ Annals,’ 1877, vol. xx. p. 470, pl. xvi.

figs. 1-3), which is so thin and delicate, and so firmly fixed

to the object on which it may be growing, that it may be

fairly inferred that it remains in this position for the whole

period of its existence. As I have found several specimens

of this species on the Melobesian nodules of the Gulf of

Manaar, and hitherto have only had one to describe from,

viz. that to which I have alluded (op. et loc. cit.), although

Mr. H. B. Brady has obtained three from the Red Sea,

whereby he has been able to ascertain that the composition

of the spiculiform bodies in the test is calcareous, still it is

desirable that I should state, by way of confirmation, what

452 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

the Manaar specimens have revealed respecting this beautiful

little organism.

Rotalia spiculotesta, sp. 1877.

To the description of this species given in the ‘ Annals’

of 1877 (/.c.), and the intimation of Mr. H. B. Brady that he

had obtained three specimens out of “ dredgings”’ from the

Red Sea, whereby he had been able to ascertain that the

spiculiform bodies of the test were calcareous, I have little

to add. In the first place, then, it is evident that the

number of specimens about the small amount of material from

the Gulf of Manaar indicates that it is very plentiful there ;

they (six) are all about the same size as that which I origi-

nally described ; and if any difference exists between the two,

it is simply that the spiculiform bodies in the Gulf-of-Manaar

specimens are more quadrangular or oblong than elliptical, while

they are the reverse in that to which I have alluded, viz. that

which came from the South Pacific Ocean ; they are respec-

tively fixed upon the surface of the Melobesian noduies ; and,

with so much material, I have been able to mount a fragment

of the test in Canada balsam for examination of the spicules

under a higher power, whereupon they seem to me to be solid

and the granular matter between them to consist of micro-

scopic bodies of the same form, although of different sizes. I

have also been able to confirm Mr. Brady’s observation that

they are calcareous, inasmuch as they dissolve entirely, with

effervescence, in dilute nitric acid.

Although all the specimens to which I have alluded appear

to contain nothing but the spiculiform bodies in their tests,

I have met with some smaller (? young) specimens of the

same Foraminifer about the Melobesian nodules, which, when

mounted in balsam, show that their tests are at this

period composed of a heterogeneous assemblage of micro-

scopic bodies (? calcareous sand), in the midst of which one or

more of the genuine spicular ones form prominent features,

from their large size and isolated condition. Thus it may be

that sometimes the test 1s composed of foreign material as

well as bodies produced by the animal itself—a condition

among the testaceous freshwater Rhizopoda to which Dr. G.

C. Wallich has alluded in his valuable paper “ on Structural

Variation among the Difflugian Rhizopods” (‘ Annals,’

1864, vol. xiii. p. 233 &c.).

Free Species of Foraminifera.

As it is not my object to give a list of all the free forms of

Foraminifera that occur about the Melobesian nodules, it will

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 453

be restricted to those only whose size renders them most con-

spicuous, none of which sensibly exceed an eighth of an inch

in diameter; and these belong to D’Orbigny’s genus Amphi-

stegina, for a more intimate acquaintance with which I must

refer the reader to Profs. Parker and Jones’s account (apud

Carpenter, ‘ Introduction,’ p. 242).

AMPHISTEGINA, D’Orbigny.

On the borders of the Indian Ocean there are several species

of these nummuline forms; and although they may vary

slightly in their structural features here and there, for some of

the “ borders” are very wide apart (ex. gr. the Gulf of Aden

and the south-west corner of Australia), still the genus extends

to all of them; and therefore the Gulf of Manaar is not with-

out its representatives, among which is the well-known A.

mammillata of D’Orbigny. There is also another compressed

globose form, unless it be the thick part of a Heterostegina

worn down to this, with the same kind of structure as Hetero-

stegina, and a third, which is the largest of all, wherein the

chambers are extremely numerous and regular, closely approxi-

mated, awl-shaped, and much recurved, with a thick nummuline

marginal cord between the whorls.

Calcarina calcar, var. hispida, n. var.

The same remarks respecting the varietal differences apply

to Calcarina calcar, which is found in the Red Sea, at the Mau-

ritius, and, under the form of Trioporus baculatus, in Poly-

nesia, while it is also abundant in the Gulf of Manaar, but

here under the hispid form mentioned. This hispid state

bears the same relation to Calcarina calcar as the hispid

form of Calcarina Spengleri bears to the latter species in Poly~

nesia, well shown in Dr. Carpenter’s representation (‘ Intro-

duction,’ pl. xiv. fig. 6). All, not averaging more than

1-24th inch in diameter, are much smaller than C. Spengler?,

while it is not unusual to find the hispid form of the latter,

like that of the former, sunk into the flat surface of an

articulation of Flabellaria opuntia side by side with Gypsina

vesicularis.

Alveolina sinuosa, n. sp. seu var.

The genus Alveolina also occurs on the borders of the

Indian Ocean generally ; but whether that from the south-

west coast of Australia has been named or not I cannot say.

Sufiice it to state, then, that ifso, A. s¢wosa must be considered

a variety ; for I can see very little difference between it and

that which occurs on the coast of Australia, as well as the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 31

454 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

others that I have found about the Melobesian nodules of the

Gulf of Manaar, beyond its larger size and sinuous form, it

being a quarter of an inch long by 1-24th inch in its greatest

transverse diameter.

HHydroid Zoophyte.

Family Hydractiniide, Hincks.

HYDRADENDRIUM, n. gen.

Gen. char. Polypary dendriform ; stem solid, with the excep-

tion of a small medullary canal, thickly spined.

Hydradendrium spinosum, n. sp.

(Pl. XIX. fig. 8, a-g.)

Polypary dendriform, slender; stem erect, branched ;

branches alternate, about 1-24th inch apart, irregular in length

and disposition around the stem, extending upwards and out-

wards from the fixed to the free end, becoming shorter towards

the latter ; sometimes subdivided, but generally giving off on

each side a regular series of branchlets, arranged alternately

and plumosely, from which again spring sparsely a third set,

chiefly on one side. Consistence horny. Colour dark amber,

translucent (Pl. XIX. fig. 8). Stem and branches smooth,

except where interrupted by the presence of spines ; the latter

also smooth and directed upwards and outwards, in longitu-

dinal lines, wherein they are arranged alternately in adjoiming

rows, the rows increasing in number with the size of the

stem ; spine round, conical, slightly curved upwards, varying

in size from a slight indication at the growing ends of the

branches respectively to 1-200th inch in length where fully

developed (fig. 8, b-f). Stem solid, with the exception of

an axial canal which traverses continuously every part of the

structure, and contains the sarcode upon which the whole has

been developed ; hence at the extremities of the branches the

latter is thicker in proportion to the horny material than at any

other part (fig. 8, c, d), composed of concentric layers through

which branches radiate from the axial canal to the branches

themselves and to the spines respectively (fig. 8, ¢), termi-

nating in the latter a little distance from the point, which is

therefore imperforate and itself formed by concentric layers

on the branch of sarcode first emanating from the medullary

or axial canal (fig. 8, e). Diameter of largest fragment of

stem found 1-90th inch, that of the axial canal in the same

1-600th inch. Ccenosare covering the surface of the skeleton,

but not now elementarily distinguishable, on account of the

specimen having been dried. Spine often bifid, but where

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 455

developed from the ccenosare extending over foreign sub-

stances enlarged, dichotomously branched one or more times,

and thus rendered dendriform (fig. 8, a, g). Largest and

most perfect specimen, which is that figured, about 2 inches

long and 12 inch in its broadest part; stem of the same at

the lower end, which has been broken off, 1-60th inch in

diameter.

Hab. Marine, growing on hard objects.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar, in 65 fathoms, N. lat. 7° 18'. Western

coast of Ceylon.

Obs. It may seem premature to some to establish a new

-zxenus of Hydractiniide on the mere skeleton of a Hydroid

Zoophyte ; but the characters of the family are so peculiar

that, to those acquainted with the species which have been

described, there is little risk of error in this respect. The

generic distinction, however, is founded on the solidity of the

structure, which in all other instances hitherto noticed is

formed of reticulated fibre, like that of Hydractinia echinata.

From the number of fragments of Hydradendrium spinosum

among the Manaar dredgings, it would appear to be very

plentiful in this locality. Under the microscope, when fully

divested of the coenosarc, the regularity of the spination and

clear amber-colour of the whole stem, make it a beautiful

object. In development, of course, the skeleton is formed

upon the embryonic sarcode, which thus becomes separated

from the ccenosarce of the exterior, although it is probable that

subsequently the latter, which must have sprung from the

former too, in the first instance, adds the greater portion of

the horny material in layers, like the sarcode of the sponges

to their structures both horny and siliceous. That the cceno-

sarc can do this is proved by the forest of dendriform spines

which it develops from its surface when extending from the

stem to other bodies, as shown in the illustrations (fig. 8,a &q).

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PuateE XVIII.

Fig. 1. Polytrema cylindricum, n. sp., in situ, showing the sponge-spicules

projecting from the apertures in the ends of the branches respec-

tively: a, horizontal section, to show the cortical and medullary

cell-structure (magnified 2 diameters); b, form of cell about the

ends of the branches, broken open; ce, aperture with sponge-

spicules on their way to the interior; d, the same in the inte-

rior ; é, portion of surface of pillar, to show the arrangement of

pores &c.; f, fragment of outer wall of cortical cell, cut hori-

zontally to show the sunken pore-tubules; gg, tubules. (All

on scale of 1-48th to 1-1800th inch.)

Fig. 2. Tubipora reptans, n.sp., im situ, showing the calycles and their

aL*

456 On Specimens dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar.

stolon (magnified 2 diameters). a, calycle, with portion of

stolon cut off to show the vertically compressed form of the

latter and cavity respectively; 6, vertical section of stolon ;

c, compressed cavity ; d, lateral view of tentaculated head when

restored to position (ideal); e, end view of same sunk into

the calycle: all relatively magnified on the scale of 1-144th

to 1-1800th inch. f, form of young spicule ; g, matured form

(diagrams). A, fragment of the corallum, to show pore-openings

between the calcareous tubipora-spicules, now otherwise con-

solidated ; 7, fragment of siliceous sponge-spicule imbedded in

the same: scale 1-48th to 1-1800th inch. 4, sponge-spicules

imbedded in the corallum at the bottom of the calycle, as seen

on looking down through the end of the latter (diagram).

Fig. 3. Polytrema mesentericum, n.sp., nat. size of specimen. a, por-

tion of mesenteriform lamina, to show—4, pore-surface on the

sides and, e, cortical and medullary cell-structure in the hori-

zontal section: magnified 2 diameters. d, horizontal section of

fragment, more magnitied, to show—e e, pore-tubules, ff, cor-

tical cells, and g, medullary cell-structure; A, fragment of surface,

to show pore-openings (diagrams).

fig. 4. Holocladina pustulifera, n. sp., suspended across a crevice in the

Melobesian nodule, into which the ends of the branches are for

the most part inserted, therefore represented as cut off (magni-

fied about 16 diameters). a, average natural size. 6, end view

of large pustuliform eminence; c, the same, lateral view; d, the

same, with summit extended into a spinous form: scale 1-24th

to 1-1800th inch. e, end of branchlet, much magnified, to

show the distribution and unequal size of the pustuliform

eminences, also f, the structure and thickness of the test,

9 9, the conical, and h, the amorphous terminations respectively

(diagrams).

Fig. 5. Cysteodictyina compressa, n. sp., in contact with the surface of the

Melobesian nodule, represented as cut off at each end where the

continuation of the circumference was not seen (magnified

about 16 diameters). a, average natural size; b, fragment of

surface, much magnified, to show the prismatic structure of the

pore-tubulation; c, end of circumferential lobule, much magni-

fied, to show thinness of test and punctate surface, also d d, coni-

cal, and ee, amorphous terminations respectively (diagrams).

PLATE XIX.

Fig. 6. Ceratestina globularis, n. sp. a, embryonic or primary cell ;

b, terminal cell or chamber; c, connecting stolon; dd, crooked

and knotted stolonic tubulations put forth by the last chamber ;

e, microspinous processes on the surface of the chamber; f, groups

of Ceratestina on the surface of old Stylaster sanguineus from

the S. Pacific Ocean ; g, aperture of terminal cell: scale 1-24th

to 1-1800th inch.

Fig. 7. Ceratestina tessellata, n.sp. a, globuliferous or adenoid portion ;

b, stolonic tubes: magnified about 16 diameters. ¢, commence-

ment of the growth of a globuliferous portion on a stolonic

tube ; d, globuliferous portion, much magnified, to show meri-

dionate or crossing lines of fibre in the horny wall, producing

the tessellated appearance ; e, stolonic portion ; f, internal pro-

cesses ; g, end of stolon, more magnified, to show that it also

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 457

presents the tessellated appearance ; A, tesseral division, much

magnified, to show microspinous processes (diagrams).

Fig. 8. Hydradendrium spinosum, n. gen. et sp., natural size of specimen.

a, growth of dendriform spines (see g); 6, portion of stem,

much magnified, to show rows of spines, viewed laterally ;

¢, horizontal section of stem and spines, to show that the stem is

composed of concentric laminz developed on d, the axial canal,

from which pari passu are developed the spines: scale 1-48th to

1-1800th inch. e, spine, much more magnified, to show that it

also is composed of concentric laminz, but solid and imperforate

towards the free end; f, end of branch, to show commencement

of spinal development on the medullary sarcode: scale 1-24th

to 1-1800th inch. g, dendriform growth of spines produced by

the coenosare (see a): scale 1-48th to 1-1800th inch.

[To be continued ]

XLI.—On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian

Region.—Part IV. Peneidea, Stomatopoda, Isopoda, Suc-

toria, and Xiphosura. By Epwarp J. Miers, F.L.S.,

F.Z.5.

[Plate XV.]

[Concluded from p. 384. |

PENXIDEA,

Pencus avirostris, Dana.

W. Borneo.

I refer to this species two female specimens of Peneus in the

collection. They agree with Dana’s description in the form of

the rostrum, fifth ambulatory legs, &c. In both the rostrum is

prolonged backward into a somewhat indistinct median dorsal

carina, which, however, is obsolete near the posterior margin.

The rostrum, in the only perfect specimen, is 7-toothed

above.

This species was not represented in the Museum collection

when I wrote my analytical table of the species of Peneus

(P. Z. 8. 1878, p. 3806) ; and the examination of the foregoing

examples shows that it should be classed (in that synopsis) in

the neighbourhood of P. monoceros and P. Dobsoni, on account

of the distinct dorsal ridge of the carapace.

Peneus sculptilis, Heller.

W. Borneo (a female).

This specimen agrees very well with the description and

figure of Heller, based on examples from Java. Like the

458 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

preceding it has been hitherto a desideratum to the Museum

collection*.

There is also in the collection a small specimen of Penwus

which, on account of the imperfection of the rostrum, I cannot

at present determine with certainty.

Stenopus hispidus, Latr.

New Guinea (an adult female of large size).

STOMATOPODA.

Lysiosquilla maculata (Fabr.).

Goram (a young male).

Squilla nepa, Latr.

West Borneo (an adult female).

Pseudosquilla ciliata (Fabr.).

New Guinea (an adult female).

* The following additional species have been lately received by the

British Museum :—

Peneus Macleayu, Haswell.

A specimen has recently been purchased (together with one of P.

candliculatus) from Mr. A. P. Goodwin, who collected them at the mouth

of the Richmond River, New South Wales. .Mr. Haswell’s types were

from Port Jackson. This species, with several others still desiderata to

the Museum, has been described by him since the publication of my

paper. Its place in the classification is in the vicinity of P. affinis and

P. avirostris.

Peneus Joyneri, sp.n. (Plate XV. figs. 8-10.)

Carapace more or less pilose above, with the antennal and_gastro-

hepatic sulci faintly indicated; no pterygostomian spine. Rostrum

nearly straight, acute, slender, and not reaching to the end of the an-

tennal scale, armed above with seven or eight teeth, of which the poste-

rior three are situated on the carapace behind its anterior margin, the

last being separated from the rest by a wider interval ; the anterior third

of the upper margin and the lower margin are without spines. A lon-

eitudinal median dorsal line on the surface of the carapace indicates the

obsolete dorsal ridge; and a similar line exists on the first three post-

abdominal segments. The first segment has a rounded tooth on each

lateral margin. The fourth to sixth postabdominal segments are acutely

carinated above. The terminal segment has a longitudinal median

groove on its dorsal surface; its lateral margins are without spines; and

its distal end is produced and acuminated. The eyes are large, the

antennulary flagella very short; the exognathi of the outer maxillipedes

scarcely reach beyond the end of the penultimate joint. The second

joint of the first and second legs (in the male) is armed with a spine

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 459

Gonodactylus scyllarus (Linn.).

Amboina (an adult male), Goram (an adult male), New

Guinea (a male), Lette Island (a female ?).

The specimens from New Guinea and Lette Island approach

G. Bleeker’, A. Milne-Edwards, in having the median dorsal

carina of the terminal postabdominal segment more elevated

and acute; but the rostrum, although acute, is not more pro-

duced at its distal end than in the typical G. scyllarus.

Gonodactylus chiragra (Fabr.).

Java, Karangbollong (an adult female), New Guinea (an

adult male), Amboina (a small male), Celebes, Macassar (an

adult female).

The largest specimen (that from New Guinea) measures

fully 4 inches from the tip of the rostrum to the terminal

segment. The dilatation at the proximal end of the dactylus

is of a pinkish tinge shading into blue; the distal end of the

dactylus is always more or less inflexed.

Gonodactylus graphurus, White.

Amboina (an adult male). A male of small size is in the

collection without special locality, in which, however, the

genital appendages are perfectly developed.

on the under surface; the third legs, in place of this spine, are armed

with a straight and slender styliform appendage, which reaches to the

middle of the merus joint, and is furnished at its distal end with a spear-

like head, which is acute in front, laterally dilated and produced poste-

riorly ; the merus joint of the fourth legs is dilated, carinated, and armed

with a strong tooth in the middle of its inferior margin. This joint in

the fifth legs, which are slender and much elongated, is less dilated, but

distinctly toothed (see the figures). In the female, the third legs are

armed only with a small spine. Length of the single male about

41 inches.

Hab, Yokohama, Japan (1. Batson Joyner, Esq.).

Several specimens are in the collection.

I have much pleasure in associating this species with the name of its

discoverer, who presented it, with several other interesting forms, to the

British Museum. The peculiarity in the structure of the third to fifth

ambulatory legs in the male, and particularly the remarkable appendages

to the basis joints of the second legs (which, it may be presumed, serve

as claspers during the act of coition), distinguish it from its congeners ;

but both sexes are further distinguishable by the form and dentition of

the rostrum, and of the laterally unarmed terminal segment. It is allied

to P. avirostris, Dana, and P. Mastersti, Haswell; but in the former

species the rostrum is much more strongly carinated above, and in the

latter the terminal segment is not acuminate; both, moreover, have

a distinct dorsal carina on the carapace.

460 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

Gonodactylus trispinosus, White.

Amboina (an adult female).

This example agrees in all particulars with the two in the

Museum collection from Sharks’ Bay, W. Australia, which

differ somewhat from the type (from Swan River) in the

larger tubercles of the terminal segment, and the more nume-

rous and regular denticulations of its posterior margin. The

terminal segment is scantily clothed with short hairs.

ISsopopDA.

The Isopoda in Dr. Bleeker’s collection were nearly all

contained in a single bottle, without any special indication of

locality. Upon examination, however, this bottle was found

to contain fourteen out of the sixteen species described by

him in his memoir on the Malaysian Cymothoide, already

referred to*,

Two or three other species, which are not included in that

paper, were also found in the collection, and are described or

referred to below.

In several of the species, and particularly in the large series

of specimens of Cymothoa Leschenaultii, can be traced the

gradual modification of the external sexual organs, accom-

panying the transformation of the young male individual into

the fully-grown and perfectly-developed female, as detailed

by Bullart and Dr. P. Mayer}, in their recent important

researches demonstrating the existence of. hermaphroditism

and illustrating the various stages of development in the para-

sitic Cymothoide. Further details are given below, under

the heads of the different species.

OnIscIDEA.

Ligia Gaudichaudit.

? Ligia Gaudichaudii, M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. iii. p. 157 (1840) ;

? Gay, Hist. Chile, iii. p. 265 (1849); ? Dana, Cr. U.S. Expl. xiv.

p. 741, pl. xlix. fie. 6 (1853).

A considerable number of specimens without definite locality

are in the collection, which agree very well with the descrip-

tion and figure of Dana. Unfortunately in all of these the

antenne are imperfect and the uropoda are wanting. An

* “Sur les Isopodes Cymothoadiens de l’archipel Indien,’ in Acta

Societatis Scient. Indo-Neerlandice, ii. (1857).

+ Journ. Anat. Physiol. xi. p- 118 (1876).

} Mittheil. Zoolog. Stat. Neapel, i. (Heft 2) p. 165 (1879).

My. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 461

example belonging to the same species is in the British-

Museum collection from Madgica Sima.

Whether this be the LZ. Gaudichaudii of Milne-Edwards

must remain somewhat uncertain, on account of the brevity

of his description; the habitat of his types was probably

Chilian.

CYMOTHOIDEA.

Cymothoa Leschenaultit.

Cymothoa Leschenaultii, Leach, Dict. Sci. Nat. xii. p. 352 (1818).

Cymothoa Stromatet, Bleeker, Acta Soc. Sci. Indo-Neerland. ii. p. 55,

pl. ii. fig. 18 (1857), ad. 9.

Cymothoa Edwardsti, Bleeker, t. c. p. 34, pl. ii. fig. 12 (1857), jun. ¢.

This species would appear to be one of the commonest of

the Malaysian Cymothoidea, if one may judge from the very

large series in the collection. I have observed a considerable

variation in the form of the antero-lateral lobes of the first seg-

ment of the body and of the basis joint of the last pair of legs,

and can see no sufficient reason for regarding Bleeker’s species

as distinct from the Cymothoa Leschenaultii of Leach, of which,

unfortunately, only a single specimen from Pondicherry is in

the collection. Adult and full-sized examples of this species

are nearly 14 inch in length; and amongst these are many

in which the brood-pouch is fully developed; but there are

not a few others, scarcely inferior in size, in which no trace of

it exists. ‘Two or three specimens are in the collection

(length of the largest 14 inch), exhibiting that interesting

transitional stage in the development of the animal, recently

described by Prof. Schiddte (see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

ser. 5, il. p. 196), during which copulation takes place, and

in which the ovigerous pouch is developed upon the three

posterior segments of the body only. The largest of the

specimens, in which the external genital organs of the male

are developed upon the ventral surface of the seventh thoracic

segment, measures a little over 1 inch in length; but the

majority are much smaller, some not exceeding half an inch.

These agree in all essential characters with C. Hdwardsii as de-

scribed by Bleeker, which, therefore, I doubt not, was founded

on the younger male form of the species. The adult female

form of the species is apparently not invariably to be distin-

guished by its greater size; for there is in the series one

example which does not seem specifically distinct, although

of somewhat abnormal growth, which bears ova in the per-

fectly formed brood-pouch, yet measures only #? inch in

length.

462 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

Cymothoa trregularis, Bleeker.

Of this species (which, according to Dr. Bleeker, is common

on fishes in the seas of Amboina) a good series is in the col-

lection, including several specimens in which the brood-pouch

is well developed (length of the largest 1 inch), and others in

which it does not exist; but in these examples no external

male organs are observable; the largest is about 8 lines.

Even in the smallest the characteristic lunate form of the first

thoracic segment is very apparent.

There is a specimen in the Museum collection, apparently

referable to the Cymothoa rhinoceros of Bleeker, which cer-

tainly cannot remain in the genus Cymothoa; but, on account

of its very mutilated condition, I cannot refer it with certainty

to any described genus. It has neither male nor female

external genital appendages. ‘The head is transverse, eyes of

moderate size; rostrum reflexed at tip, interantennal process

small, and not dividing the upper antenne at base, the first

joints of the upper antennee are not greatly dilated ; the lower

antenne broken, but evidently reaching beyond the posterior

margin of the first thoracic segment. ‘The so-called epimerze

or coxal joints of the second to seventh legs are distinct.

The basis joints of the legs are not dilated, and the terminal

claw small but strongly curved; terminal segment triangular,

and uropoda with the inner ramus the larger and somewhat

obovate, outer slender, but not acute at apex.

Anilocra marginata.

Cymothoa marginata, Bleeker, Isopodes Cymothoadiens, in Acta Soe.

Scient. Indo-Neerland. ii. p. 56, pl. ii. fig. 14 (1857).

Two specimens are in the collection. According to Bleeker

it is found on fish in the seas of Batavia. This species must,

I think, be placed in the genus Anilocra, on account of the

linear form of the basis jomts of the ambulatory legs. The

violet band on the posterior margin of the body-segments is

in these specimens (that have long been immersed in spirits)

of a brown hue. The larger example (length 11 lines) is a

fully-developed female; the smaller (length about 7 lines),

without brood-pouch, has yet some traces of the median pro-

minences of the sevepth thoracic segment, characteristic of

the male.

Anilocra dimidiata, Bleeker.

A large number of specimens are in the collection, nearly

all of which are fully-developed females. It lives, according

to Dr. Bleeker, on different fishes in the seas of Batavia.

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 463

The length of a full-sized specimen is about 11 inch, of one of

the smallest (with brood-pouch) about 2 inch. There are one

or two specimens in which neither brood-pouch nor external

male organs exist (length of the largest 2 inch).

Anilocra allocerea.

? Anilocra leptosoma, Bleeker, t. c. p. 30, pl. i. fig. 6 (1857).

Anilocra allocerea, Kolbel, Sitz. Ak. Wien, xxviii. p. 407, pl. ii. fig. 1

(1879).

Four specimens, females, are in the collection. In one only

of these are the antenne and uropoda in a perfect condition.

The first pair of antennee agree exactly in the form of their

fourth and fifth joints with Kdlbel’s excellent description

and figure. In every other respect they so closely resemble the

Anitlocra leptosoma of Bleeker, that I at first assigned them

without hesitation to that species ; and I am even now inclined

to regard it as probable that Bleeker’s remarks and figure of

the antenne may be inaccurate, and the two forms really

referable to one and the same species; and this I think the

more likely, as the two species inhabit the same geographical

region. Bleeker, it may be observed, notes that the uropoda

in A. leptosoma do not reach beyond the extremity of the

terminal postabdominal segment ; in his figure, however, they

are represented as distinctly longer than this segment, in this

particular agreeing both with Kdélbel’s description of A.

allocerea and with the specimen before me*.

* I may take this opportunity of noting that the larger of the two

original examples of Ceratothoa trigonocephala (Cymothoa trigonocephala,

Leach, and the one which bears his MS. label and must be consi-

dered as the type) differs from C. trtgonocephala as figured by Kélbel

(pl. i. fig. 3), and resembles C. ovyrhynchena of that author, in the

form of the head (which has the lateral margins straight and the front

acute) and in the form of the antero-lateral processes of the first segment

of the body, which in a lateral view are rather broad, and in a dorsal

view appear narrowed at their apices. It differs from C. oxyrhynchena,

however, in the form of the penultimate postabdominal segment, which

has the posterior margin sinuated in the middle and on each side, and

therein, agrees with Kolbel’s description of the specimens he refers to

trigonocephala. Length 13 inch.

The smaller example (length 103 lines) agrees more nearly with

Kolbel’s figure of C. tr¢gonocephala in having the lateral margins of the

head slightly sinuated and the front less acute; the apices of the antero-

lateral processes of the first segment of the body, however, are narrowed

both in a lateral and dorsal view ; the form of the penultimate postabdo-

minal segment sinuated, as in the larger example. As the exact localities

of these examples are not known, it is difficult to determine whether the

two belong to distinct species, or whether the differences indicated by

K6lbel are not perhaps rather to be regarded as of less than specific

value. The basis joint of the seventh pair of legs is, in both specimens,

much less dilated posteriorly than in C. oxyrhynchena.

464 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

RENOCILA, gen. nov.

Allied to Anzlocra in most of its characters; but the 8-

jointed superior antenne are greatly developed, reaching

nearly to the posterior margin of the first thoracic segment,

with all the joints (the terminal excepted) more or less dilated

and compressed, so as entirely to conceal the very small

inferior antenne; the dilatation is greatest in the third joint

(the second visible in a dorsal view), the following joints

becoming successively smaller. The inferior antenne are

small and 7-jointed, reaching nearly to the end of the fifth

joint of the upper antenne. ‘The eyes are small and indis-

tinct, and placed near the postero-lateral angles of the head,

which is truncated anteriorly ; the front not produced infe-

riorly, so as to conceal the bases of the antenne. The fifth

to seventh thoracic segments are greatly prolonged back-

ward at their postero-lateral angles, so as (in the sixth and

seventh segments) entirely to conceal the ‘ epimeree” or

coxal joints ; the postero-lateral lobes of the seventh thoracic

segment reach beyond the base of the terminal postabdo-

minal segment. The coxal joints of all the legs are poste-

riorly acute; those of the second to fifth legs well deve-

loped and visible in a dorsal view. None of the legs have

the basis joints dilated; and all terminate in very strong

curved claws. The uropoda do not reach to the posterior

margin of the transverse posteriorly-rounded terminal seg-

ment, and are furnished with slender rami, the outer of which

is a little longer than the inner.

This genus, in all its characters, is most nearly allied to

Anilocra, from which it is distinguished by its broad non-

inflexed front, the greatly produced postero-lateral angles of

the three posterior thoracic segments, and the greatly dilated

superior antennee.

Renocila ovata, sp. un. (Pl. XV. figs. 11-14.)

The body is moderately convex, ovate; the head, which is

scarcely broader than long, has the posterior margin rounded,

and the sides slightly convergent to the straight anterior

margin, which is inflexed, but not produced so as to conceal

the bases of the antenne. ‘The first thoracic segment is a

little longer than the two following, and its postero-lateral

angles are slightly prolonged backward and rounded; the

two following segments are not so produced; in the fourth

segment the postero-lateral lobes are very small, in the fifth

to seventh segments they are (as stated above) greatly deve-

loped, not acute, but rounded at the distal ends, and with the

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 465

lateral margins slightly reflexed ; the first five postabdominal

segments are very short, and are not laterally produced ; the

terminal segment is almost semicircular in outline, smooth

above, with a longitudinal median raised line on its upper

surface. ‘The second joint of the antenne (in a dorsal view)

is considerably enlarged and nearly quadrate; the following

joints (except the last) of a similar form, but successively

smaller, the terminal minute and slender. The penultimate

and antepenultimate joints of the inferior antenne are slen-

derer and more elongated than the preceding, the terminal

is minute. The coxal joints of the second to fifth legs be-

come successively more acute; those of the sixth and seventh

legs are acuminate and spiniform (in an inferior view).

None of the basis joints of the thoracic legs are dilated or

‘distinctly carimated ; the rami of the uropoda are slender and

rounded at the distal ends. Length of the larger example

about 11 lines, breadth 53 lines.

Two specimens are in the collection, both presenting the

characters of the female sex, the brood-pouches being deve-

loped. The length of the smaller is 8 lines.

The dilatation of the antennal joints is analogous to that

characteristic of the genus Ceratothoa; but the antenne are

remote from one another at their base.

Lironeca emarginata, Bleeker.

This species is represented in the collection by a single

specimen (a female) of large size (nearly 1 inch 4 lines).

The Lironeca laticauda described by me (P. Z. 8S. 1877,

p- 677, pl. Ixix. fig. 5) from Manchuria is distinguished by

the form of the front, which is not produced, by the much

broader coxal joints of the thoracic legs (which are not fully

exhibited in the dorsal view of the animal given in the figure

cited above), and the more dilated basis joints of the three

posterior pairs of thoracic limbs.

Lironeca Renardi, Bleecker.

Of this species (as of the preceding) there is in the collec-

tion only a single specimen (a female). The strongly-lunate

form of the first segment of the body, with its projecting

antero-lateral lobes, gives it a resemblance to Cymothoa trrequ-

lavis. Length 2 inch (8 lines). Both this and the preceding

species are stated by Bleeker to have been taken from the

skin of various fishes inhabiting the sea of Batavia. JZ.

Renardi bears a considerable resemblance to the freshwater

L. daurica, described by me (/. ¢. p. 676, pl. xix. fig. 4)

466 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

from the River Onon, in Dauria, South-eastern Siberia,

but may be distinguished by the form of the coxe, which

in L. Kenardi extend along the whole length of the lateral

margins of the segments of the body to which they are respec-

tively attached. Of L. Renardi there is in the Museum col-

lection a female taken from a species of Mugil inhabiting the

Indian seas (Dr. F. Day, F.L.S.).

L. daurica is very closely allied to L. Jellinghausit (Ichthy-

oxenus Jellinghausit, Herklots, Arch. Néerlandaises, v. p. 128,

pl. v. fig. 10-18) from the fresh waters of Java, with which I

should be inclined to unite it, were it not for the widely

separated localities of the two species, as it apparently differs

in nothing but the somewhat shorter uropoda of the penul-

timate segment.

I have no information as to whether L. daurica penetrates

the body of its host behind the ventral fins, as does L. Jelling-

hausti, Except for its peculiar habitat, I can see nothing

to distinguish Jchthyoxenus from Lironeca; but because

Herklots had described the Javan species as a distinct genus

I did not suspect its affinity with the Daurian form when I

described the latter.

It does not appear that a generic character can be found in

the position of the cox, 7. e. their insertion in the angles

between the thoracic segments, since Herklots notes a varia-

tion of this character in specimens he considers to be males

of L. Jellinghausii*.

Lironeca Boscii, Bleeker.

A considerable series is in the collection. The largest

example (length about 10 lines) exhibits the characters of the

male sex, and is the only one in which they are distinctly

observable. The greater number are well-developed females,

the largest being about 9 lines long (2 inch).

Lironeca ornata, Heller, from Sambelong, is a nearly allied

form, but is distinguished by the triangular terminal segment,

which is produced greatly beyond the extremity of the rami

of the uropoda.

* Closely allied species are in the Museum collection from the Mauri-

tius (R. Templeton, Esq.), designated, but not described, by White as

Cymothoa micronyx, and from Australia (Earl of Derby and J. B. Jukes,

Esq.), as Cymothoa contracta. Lironeca contracta is apparently distin-

guishable by the much broader, more dilated basis joints of the four

posterior thoracic limbs and subacute rostrum, Lironeca micronyx by the

transverse terminal segment and the less marked carina of the posterior

thoracic limbs; the specimens of the latter species, however, are much

shrivelled from having been preserved in a dry state. In all of the above

the coxee are inserted in the angles between the thoracic segments.

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 467

Lironeca lata, Dana, from the Sandwich Islands, seems to

be in some degree intermediate between this species and L.

emargtnata, as in it the head is somewhat more deeply encased

in the first segment of the body, but the terminal segment

does not project beyond the extremity of the uropoda.

Lironeca pterygota, Kélbel.

This species is represented in the collection by a single

specimen of very small size (length 44 lines) found among

specimens of Neroctla pheopleura. It agrees with Kélbel’s

description in all respects, except in the somewhat longer

antenne, the superior pair reaching to the posterior margin of

the head, and the inferior pair to the middle of the lateral

margins of the first thoracic segment. The very unequal

development of the coxa (those of the convex side of the

body being much the larger) would seem to distinguish it

from LZ. Boscii, to which, in its distorted form, it bears much

external resemblance.

Nerocila trivittata, Bleeker.

This species, which, according to Dr. Bleeker, inhabits the

seas of Amboina, is represented in the collection by a single

specimen (a female, length nearly 9 lines). Dr. Bleeker’s

description was drawn up from a unique specimen; but the

example before me is probably not the one figured by him,

which is of larger size and may have been one obtained sub-

sequently.

Nerocila pheopleura, Bleeker.

A large series of specimens are in the collection, of which

the greater number are females with well-developed brood-

pouches. Length of a full-sized example 1 inch, of one of

the smallest 7 lines. ‘There are several specimens in which

no brood-pouch exists; but in none of these have I observed

external male organs. Length of one of the largest 9 lines.

Nerocila dolichostylis, Kélbel, is a nearly allied form, but

distinguished by having the postero-lateral angles of all the

segments produced into spines. In N. pheopleura usually

only the first and seventh segments are thus produced.

Nerocila levinota, sp.n. (Pl. XV. figs. 15, 16.)

Body narrow-oval, about two and a half times as long as

its greatest breadth, rather convex. Head with the frontal

margin produced, rounded, and concealing ‘the bases of the

antenne. Thoracic segments with their tergal portions

smooth, and in no case produced at the postero-lateral angles ;

468 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

the coxal joints of the second to fifth legs are posteriorly

acute, but not produced beyond the postero-lateral angles

of the segments; those of the sixth and seventh legs are

more elongated, and form distinct spines. The lateral pro-

longations of the second (first exposed) and third postabdo-

minal segments are elongated, laterally compressed, and acute 5

those of the fourth to sixth segments do not exceed half the

length of the preceding; the terminal segment is large, flat,

with the sides straight and parallel, with its distal end rounded,

and with a longitudinal median raised line in the middle of

its upper surface. ‘The eyes are placed close to the postero-

lateral angles of the head; the anterior antenne are 8-jointed,

reach a little beyond the posterior margin of the head, with

the basal joint enlarged and subglobose ; the posterior antenne

also are about 8-jointed. The dactyli of the four anterior

thoracic legs are long and strongly curved; the rami of the

uropoda unequal, the outer the longer and straight, the inner

with a distinct tooth on its inner margin and with the distal

extremity acute. Length about 1 inch.

West Borneo (an adult female).

The absence of tergal spines, the form of the coxe and

of the rami of the uropoda suffice to distinguish this species

from its congeners. It is perhaps most nearly allied to

Nerocila aculeata, an Indian species described by Milne-

Edwards ; but in this species the postero-lateral angles of the

thoracic segments are produced into distinct spines.

A specimen from the Malabar coast in the British-Museum

collection is allied to both N. aculeata and N. levinota, but

apparently distinct from either. The length of the body

barely exceeds twice its greatest breadth. The postero-lateral

angles of the tergal portions of the fifth to seventh thoracic

segments are produced into small distinct spines, as in N.

aculeata ; the form of the lateral prolongations of the seg-

ments of the postabdomen and of the uropoda, however, is

nearly that of N. levinota. It is distinguished from both

species by the great development of the coxal spines of the

sixth and seventh legs, which are acuminate and nearly twice

as long as the segments themselves (see Pl. XV. fig. 17).

This I will designate N. longispina. It is possible that a

large series would show intermediate gradations between the

three forms; but, apart from such evidence, they must be re-

garded as distinct *.

* Nerocila congener is a name applied by White, without description,

to a remarkable species of this genus in the Museum collection from the

Philippine Islands. It is distinguished by the form of the head, which

has the anterior margin broadly rounded and produced, so as almost

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 469

Nerocila (Emphylia) sundaica ?

? Nerocila sundaica, Bleeker, t.c. p. 26, pl. i. fig. 4 (1857). :

Emphylia ctenophora, Kilbel, Sitz. Ak. Wien, Ixxviii. p. 414, pl. 11.

fiz. 4 (1879).

This fine species is represented in the collection by five

specimens (four of which are well-developed females). Length

of the largest about 13 inch; the smallest example (length

1 inch) has no brood-pouch. These agree with the descrip-

tion of Bleeker in all essential particulars, and also with that

of K6lbel, whose excellent figure leaves me in little doubt of the

identity of the specimens before me with his Hmphylia cteno-

phora. Bleeker’s figure, however, differs in some important

points ; e.g. the basal joints of the antenne are not repre-

sented as dilated, but of the form ordinarily characteristic of

Nerocila, and the inner rami of the uropoda as somewhat

sinuated and not shorter than the outer. In all other respects

the figure seems to be a very fair representation of Hmphylia

ctenophora. But in four out of five of the specimens of N.

sundaica in the collection, the superior antennz: have their

basal joints less dilated than in Kolbel’s figure, and not in

contact, but separated by an interval of varying width; more-

over I have shown, in the case of Andlocra leptosoma, that

the accuracy of the minuter details of Bleeker’s plates is not

always to be relied upon. Thus, also the outer rami of the

uropoda of Nerocila sundaica are described by Bleeker as

much longer than the inner (in this agreeing with specimens

before me), although, as stated above, both rami are repre-

sented as subequal in the figure.

On account of the variation in the dilatation of the basal

antennal joints, it seems to me doubtful whether the genus

Limphylia can be permanently maintained; but until a com-

plete transition has been observed from it to Nerocila, it may

be useful to retain it at least as a, subgenus.

Corallana macronema.

Ega macronema, Bleeker, t.c. p. 23, pl. i. fig. 1 (1857).

Two specimens (males) are in the collection. Length of |

the largest 9 lines. These specimens must, I think, certainly

be referred to Corallana, and the species placed near C. basalts

completely to conceal both pairs of antenne. The postero-lateral angles

of the first segment of the body are produced into a small acute tooth, and

those of the seventh segment into a broader less acute lobe. The

coxe of all the thoracic limbs are rather broad, posteriorly acute, but

do not project greatly beyond the postero-lateral angles of their several

segments. The uropoda are wanting. Length 1 inch 2 lines.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 32

470 Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea.

and C. collaris, in the classification recently proposed by

Schiddte and Meinert (Nat. Tidsskr. p. 287, 1879), on account

of the distinct but narrow linear interantennulary process

(lamina frontalis). The maxillipedes are slender, the basal

portion not exceeding the terminal palpus in width, and the

six anterior legs armed with a very small terminal claw.

SuctToria vel RHIZOCEPHALA.

Sacculina rotundata, sp. n. (Pl. XV. figs. 18, 19.)

The animal in outline is transversely oval, somewhat com-

pressed, without any trace of the depression at the proximal

end of the sac which characterizes several of the oriental

species recently described by Kossmann (Arbeit. zool.- zootom.

Inst. Wiirzburg, i. pp. 121-156, 1872-74).

The integument (unless microscopically examined) appears

smooth, but is transversely wrinkled, on account, perhaps, of

the long immersion of the specimen in spirits. On that surface

of the sac which is applied to the sternum of the crab on

which the Sacculina is parasitic are two wide and ‘shallow

concavities, separated by an obtusely rounded longitudinal

median ridge which fits into the sternal suture (as in S. cor-

culum). ‘The opposite face of the sac (7. e. that applied to the

abdomen of the crab) is regularly convex. ‘The funnel-

shaped oral aperture is moderately produced, and very similar

to that of S. corculum as figured by Kossmann (t. ¢. pl. v.

fig. 1a); the distal aperture of the sac (Manteléffnung) is placed

on the sternal surface, and does not project at all from the

plane of the body. Length 5 lines, breadth 7 lines.

A single specimen is in the collection, parasitic on a male

example of Hriphia levimana, without definite locality.

I cannot identify it with any of the numerously described

species; but as I have not had the opportunity of comparing

it with any of Kossmann’s types, it 1s with much hesitation

that 1 regard it as distinct.

In most particulars this species is very nearly allied to S.

corculum, Kossmann (#. ¢. p. 122, pl. v. fig. 1), parasitic on

Atergatis floridus from the Philippines. It differs chiefly in

the transverse oval, not cordiform shape of the sac. The

integument is armed with numerous minute spicules, which

are most abundant and conspicuous near the distal opening,

but quite imperceptible except under the microscope. They

seem to be rooted in the cellular tissue, beneath the outer

cuticle, and furthermore differ from the spinules of S. corculum,

and more nearly resemble the infracuticular spicules of S.

crucifera, Kossmann, in being very slender, not broader at

Mr. E. J. Miers on Malaysian Crustacea. 471

base; their apices are somewhat blunt. Such, at least, is the

form of spicules taken from the vicinity of the distal opening

of the sac (Pl. XV. fig. 19).

XIPHOSURA.

Limulus moluccanus, Latv.

An adult male.

Limulus rotundicauda, Latr.

An adult female.

There is in the collection a specimen of small size (length

of carapace about 13 inch) which probably belongs to this

species. As in all young specimens I have seen, the spines

of the dorsal surface of the cephalothoracic shield are con-

siderably developed. None of the above has any special

indication of locality.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Puate XIII.

Fig. 1. Cycloceloma tuberculatum, gen. et sp. nov. (nat. size).

Fg. 2. Inferior view of buccal, antennal, and orbital region of the same

(x 2 diam.).

Fg. 3. Inferior view of part of the antennal and orbital region of Ziomera

Rodgers, Stimpson (x 4 diam.).

Fig. 4. Pilumnopeus granulosus, sp. n. (xX 13 diam.).

Fig. 5. Inferior view of buccal, antennal, and orbital region (x 2

diam.).

Fig. 6. Outer view of chela of the unique example (a female) (x 13

diam.).

PuaTE XIV.

Fig. 1. Telphusa sumatrensis, sp. u., 6 (X 14 diam.).

Fig. 2. Outer view of larger hand of the same (xX 13 diam.).

Fig. 3. Outer view of hand of Sesarma granosimana, sp.n., d (X 14

diam. ).

tg. 4. Third maxillipede of Pinnotheres obesus, Dana? (considerably

magnified).

Fig. 5. Matuta cireulifera, sp.n., 3 (nat. size).

Fig. 6. Eupagurus japonicus, Stimpson ? (nat. size).

Fig. 7. Rostrum and ophthalmic scales of the same (x 2 diam.).

Fig. 8. Coxze of the fifth ambulatory legs of male Canobita perlata, var.

affinis, n. (X 2 diam.).

PLATE XV.

Fig. 1. Antero-lateral margins of Dromia (Dromidia) orientalis, sp. n.,

showing the form and disposition of the teeth (nat. size).

Fig. 2. Sternal sulci of the same (nat. size).

Fig. 3. Rostrum of Atya moluccensis, sp.n. (nat. size). 3a, teeth of

the inferior margin of the same (magnified).

Fig. 4. Third cephalothoracic leg of the same (nat. size). 2

472 Mr. Oldfield Thomas on a new Bat from Java.

Fig. 5. Rostrum of Atya spinipes, Newport ?, from the Samoa Islands

(nat. size). 6a, teeth of the inferior margin of the same (mag-

nified).

Fig. 6. Third cephalothoracie leg of the same, showing the specific

distinction between this species and Atya moluccensis (nat.

size).

Fig. 7. sprees view of the second postabdominal segment of Enoplome-

topus dentatus, sp.n. (nat. size).

Fig. 8. Basal portion of one of the third cephalothoracic legs of Peneus

Joyneri, sp. n., Showing the remarkable appendage of the second

or basis joint (x 2 diam.).

Fig. 9, Basal portion of fourth cephalothoracic leg of the same, showing

the dilatation and inferior tooth of the merus joint (x 2 diam.).

Fig. 10. Basal portion of the fifth cephalothoracic leg, showing the form

of the merus joint (X 2 diam.).

Fig. 11. Renocila ovata, gen. et sp. nov. (X 14 diam.).

Fig. 12. Head and antennz of the same, dorsal view (x 2 diam.).

Fig. 13. Inferior view of head, showing the form of the front and infe-

rior antennze (X 2 diam.).

Fig. 14. Inferior view of postero-lateral lobe of the sixth thoracic seg-

ment, showing the position of the small coxa (x 3 diam.).

Fig. 15. Nerocila levinota, sp.n. (x 14 diam.).

Fig. 16. Lateral view of coxa of sixth thoracic leg (x 2 diam.).

Fig. 17. Lateral view of coxa of the same limb in WN. longispina, sp. n.

(x 2 diam.).

Fig. 18. Sacculina rotundata, sp. n. (X 2 diam.).

Fig. 19. Spicules from the epidermis of the same, as seen under a }-inch

objective.

XLII.—Description of a new Bat from Java, of the Genus

Kerivoula. By OLprietp Tuomas, F.Z.8., Assistant in

the Zoological Department, British Museum.

THE specimen upon which this description is based was ob-

tained by Mr. H. O. Forbes at Kosala, near Bantam, Java,

2100 feet above the sea, on the 24th of September, 1879,

and is now in the British Museum.

Kerivoula javana, sp. n.

Fur greyish black, each hair being nearly black for its

proximal third, then white for the middle third, the end being

black, with sometimes a shining white tip. Ears rather short ;

laid forward they reach to about halfway between the eyes and

the tip of the nose. Shape of ears and tragus exactly as in

K. Jagori*, the former having the second small concavity in

the middle of the outer edge, and the latter the deep horizontal

Peters, MB. Ak. Berl. 1866, p. 399; Dobson, Cat. Chir. B. M.

p- vvod~7

Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on Gasteropoda. 473

notch above the external basal lobule described in that species,

as shown in the woodcut. Distribution of fur as in K. papu-

ensis*, there being short shining yellowish hairs thickly set

along the forearm, on the thumb

quite to the claw, all along the

second finger, on both phalanges

of: the third, and on the distal

phalanges of the fourth and fifth

fingers. There are also a few

hairs on the proximal end of the

fifth metacarpal. The tail and the

hind limbs quite to the bases of

the claws are covered with similar hairs; the edge of the

interfemoral, however, is without a fringe. The teeth are

"quite similar to those of K. papuensis.

K. javana is thus intermediate between K. Jagori, a

Philippine species, and K. papuensis from New Guinea, dif-

fering from the latter in the shape of the ears and tragus,

and by the absence of an interfemoral fringe, and from the

former by the presence of fur upon the limbs, that species

having these quite nakedt. It differs from both, however, in

the tricolor character of the fur, as they are of a nearly

uniformly dark reddish-brown colour, though the tips of the

hairs are lighter.

Measurements of the type, an adult female in spirit:—Length,

head and body 1/93, tail 1"°72, head 0-78, ear 06, tragus

0'37, forearm 1/°53, thumb 0-27, third finger 3-0, fifth

finger 2"-2, tibia 0"-72, foot 0'"-35.

XLIII.—WNotes on the Gasteropoda contained in the Gilbertson

Collection, British Museum, and figured in Phillips’ s ‘Geology

of Yorkshire.” By R. ErHerivGE, Jun., F.R.Ph.S.Hd.

In the ‘Geological Magazine’ for April 1879 (no. 178) I

gave a few brief notes on the Bivalves contained in Gilbert-

son’s collection of Carboniferous-Limestone fossils in the

British Museum, and the majority of which were made the

subject of illustration in the second volume of Phillips’s

work, ‘ Illustrations of the Geology of Yorkshire,’ part 2,

“The Mountain-Limestone District.”

I now purpose following up this subject by an examination

of the Gasteropoda, and in the present communication shall

* Dobson, tom. cit. p. 339.

+ Cf. Dobson, tom. eit. p. 382.

474 Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on the Gasteropoda

pass in review those species represented on pl. xiii. of the

above work. Notes on the specimens of Gasteropoda illus-

trated by pls. xiv.—xvi. will be given in subsequent commu-

nications.

THE SPECIES FIGURED ON PLATE XIII. or Vot. IT., ‘ GEo-

LOGY OF YORKSHIRE,’ BY JOHN PHIL.ips, F.R.S., F.G:8.

1. Euomphalus pentangulatus, Sowerby (Phillips, p. 225,

t. 13. fig. 13).

This, by far the handsomest species of the genus Huom-

phalus, is well represented in Gilbertson’s collection. The

section figured in the above plate exemplifies in a_parti-

cularly well-marked manner the peculiar septation and divi-

sion into chambers which takes place in the older whorls

of this species. With the view of studying this subject more

fully, I have had a number of sections of various species made,

and hope to speak on this subject at some future date. ZL.

pentangulatus has been described in detail by Profs. de

Koninck and M‘Coy, and need not be again redefined. From

E. catillus the present species is distinguished by its more

convex back, more prominent whorls on the non-umbilicated

sides, and by the very much less marked character of the

ridge bounding the umbilicus as compared with that on the

upperside of the shell. The manifest dissimilarity to E.

calyx is at once apparent. I quite agree with Prof. M‘Coy

in considering the form established by Col. Portlock as LH.

Bronni only a variety of H. pentangulatus, in which the

spire is elevated to a more or less greater degree above the

keeled edge of the last whorl. The Gilbertson collection

ia specimens of this variety. The present species is

the

E. pentangulatus, J. Sowerby, Min. Conch. 1814, i. p. 97, t. 45 (2

upper figures).

Skenea perangulatus, Fleming, Brit. Animals, 1828, p. 314.

E. pentangulatus, Bronn, Lethea Geogn. 1835, i. p. 94, t. 2. fig. 2, a, 6.

E. pentangulatus, Phillips (as above).

Schizostoma catillus, Fischer, Oryct. Gouvy. Moscou, 18387, p. 129, t. 49.

figs. 3, 4.

E. Bronni, Portlock, Geol. Rep. Londond. 1843, p. 417.

ae quinguangulatus, Goldfuss, Petref. Germ. pt. 3, p. 87, t. 191.

g. 5, ac.

E. pentangulatus, M‘Coy, Synop. Carb. Limest. Foss. 1844, p. 87; Bronn,

Index Pal. Nomen. 1848, p. 480; Brown, Foss. Conchol. 1849, p. 81,

t. 42. figs. 28, 29; M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 540;

Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss, 1854, ed. 2, p. 248.

E. quinquangulatus, Eichwald, Letheea Rossica, 1860, i. pt. 2, p. 1155.

E. pentangulatus, Romer, Lethea Geogn. Atlas, 1876, t. 45. fig. 10,

a~c.

Jigured in Phillips’s ‘Geology of Yorkshire.’ 475

2. Huomphalus catillus, Martin (Phill. p. 225, t. 13.

figs. 1, 2). i

The figure is drawn from a much fractured example, the

breaks not being shown in the figures. The leading character

of this species is the equally angulated ridge on each side of

the back; at least it is said by most writers to be equal,

although that on the lower or non-umbilicate side is usually

somewhat sharper than the other, which has a tendency to

become a little rounded like a marginal cord. ‘The points of

difference between this shell, H. calyx, and EL. pentangulatus

respectively have been well expressed by M‘Coy. The

section is quadrate, the back being the longest of the four

sides. It is the

Helicites catillus, Martin, Petr. Derb. 1809, t. 7. figs. 1, 2.

Euomphalus catillus, J. Sow. Min. Conch. 1814, i. p. 98, t. 45. figs. 3, 4;

Phillips, doe. cit.; De Koninck, Animaux Foss. p. 427, t. 24. fig. 10,

a, 6; Goldfuss, Petr. Germ. pt. 3, p. 87, t. 191. tig. 6, a—d.

Straparollus ? catillus, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 538.

Euomphalus catillus, Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. ed. 2, 1854, p. 247;

Eichwald, Lethza Rossica, 1860, ii. p. 1153; De Koninck, Mon.

Foss. Carb. Bleiberg, 1873, p. 103, t. 4. fig. 4.

3. Euomphalus calyx, Phillips (p. 225, t. 13. fig. 3).

The umbilicus in this shell is not so definitely shown as

represented in the figure ; it is more or less obscured by matrix,

whilst the opposite side of the specimen is wholly imbedded

in the limestone. Prof. de Koninck* is quite in error in

referring this species to /. catillus, Phill.; it is in no way a

cast ‘of the spire of a specimen of F. catillus,” the true

shelly matter being retained over the whole of the specimen.

The figures and descriptions of J. de C. Sowerby and Prof.

M‘Coy are quite conclusive on this point. The aperture is

here more nearly triangular than in the last species, although

it is decidedly four-sided. It is the

Euomphalus calyx, Phillips, loc. cit.; J. de C. Sow. Min. Conch. 1844,

vii. p. 47, t. 633. figs. 8-10; Brown, Foss. Conch. 1849, p. 81, t. 42.

fig, 23.

asnaiales tabulatus, De Koninck, Animaux Foss. p. 429, t. 24. fig. 11.

Straparollus ? calyx, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 537.

Euomphalus calyx, Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. 1854, ed. 2, p. 247.

4, Euomphalus bifrons, Phillips (p. 225, t. 18. fig. 4).

‘The Gilbertson collection contains three very well-marked

examples of this shell. Phillips describes his species as with

“‘ whorls carinato-tuberculated above, obtusely angulated or

* Animaux Fossiles, p. 428.

476 Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on the Gasteropoda

rounded below.”” There can, however, be no possible doubt

that these examples, including the figured specimen, had

tubercles on the lower side, as on the upper; these can even

now be indistinctly traced by the naked eye, but are more

distinctly perceptible to the touch on passing the finger round

the edge of the large whorl. This fact was noticed by Mr. J.

de C. Sowerby, who, writing some few years later than Prof.

Phillips, says, in describing £. pugilis, “ the tubercles be-

neath are sometimes very slightly prominent or irregular, when

it approaches to LH. bifrons, Phill... .. and is probably a

variety of it” *, Later on Mr. Sowerby united the two forms

under the name of . pugilis, var. bifronst. The shell

figured by Phillips also served Mr. J. de C. Sowerby as his

type; he expressly states that his illustration was taken from

an example in the Gilbertson collection; and an inspection of

the shells confirms this statement. I suspect this example

has met with an accident since it was figured by Messrs.

Phillips and Sowerby. It is in five pieces, no indication of

which is shown on Mr. Sowerby’s illustration; had such frac-

tures existed they would have been shown, so very faithfully

were all the representations throughout the ‘ Mineral Con-

chology,’ as a rule, executed. The union of &. bifrons with

LE. pugilis was made by Prof. de Koninck, at much about the

same time} as proposed by Mr. J. de C. Sowerby; and in

this they have been followed by Prof. M‘Coy, who likewise

drew attention to the resemblance of L. tuberculatus, De Kon.

Notwithstanding the more elevated spire of this, | think it

very probably only a variety of EH. bifrons or E. pugilis,

whichever name may be adopted. It is the

Euomphatus bifrons, Phillips, loc. cit.

E. pugilis, Phillips, tom. cit. p. 225; J. de C. Sow. Min. Conch. 1841, vii.

p- 22, t. 621. figs. 2-4; var. bifrons, id. op. cit. 1844, p. 48, t. 683.

fig. 2; De Koninck, Animaux Foss. p. 422, t. 25. fig. 4, a-c.

E. pugilis et bifrons, Goldfuss, Petr. Germ. pt. 3, p. 85, t. 190. figs. 4,

a, b, and 5, a-c.

Straparollus pugilis, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 541.

Euomphalus pugits, Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. 1854, p. 248.

5. EHuomphalus pugilis, Phillips (p. 225, not figured).

The Gilbertson collection contains two specimens of this

variety of the foregoing species; neither of them, however,

is that figured by My. J. de C. Sowerby§, nor can I find any

specimen in the ‘‘ Sowerby collection” corresponding with

the figures in question.

* Min. Conch. vii. p. 22. 2 bids

{ Animaux Fossiles, p. 422.

§ Min. Conch. vii. t. 621. figs. 2-4.

Jigured in Phillips's ‘Geology of Yorkshire.’ ATT

6. Huomphalus cristatus, Phillips (p. 225, t. 13. fig. 5).

This fine specimen was made the subject of a distinct

genus, at a somewhat later date, by Mr. J. de C. Sowerby,

under the name of Phanerotinus. Its characters, as compared

with Huomphalus generally, are so anomalous that it could

scarcely be retained in the latter with propriety. I therefore

agree with Prof. Morris in the retention of the name for this

species at least. The shell was of considerable thickness, and

with its shelly outgrowths must have presented a handsome

appearance. It is the

Euontphalus cristatus, Phill. loe. cit.

Phanerotinus cristatus, J. de. C. Sow. Min. Conch. 1843, vii. p. 29, t. 624.

figs. 1,2; Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. 1854, ed. 2, p. 267.

Eccyliomphalus cristatus, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 8, p. 542.

7. Cirrus acutus, J. Sowerby (Phillips, p. 225, t. 13. fig. 12).

As represented by Phillips the figured specimen is only a

portion of a larger one; the position, however, in which it is

placed is rather misleading. I cannot for a single moment

agree with Prof. de Koninck in his statement that with the

exception of the height of the spire this species has nearly all

the characters of L. pentangulatus. In the first place, Cirrus

acutus possesses no angulation on the underside of the body-

whorl, which is a well-marked feature in 4. pentangulatus ;

secondly, in the former the portion of the shell above the

angulation of the body-whorl, on the upper surface, is flat or

concavely bent upwards, whilst in the latter species the cor-

responding portion of the body or last-formed whorl is concave

inwards and downwards. Now, if fragments of these shells

are met with, these features would give to them a very great

and marked difference. Further, this is repeated in each

whorl of H. pentangulatus, making it therefore constant ;

whereas in Cirrus acutus the angularity of the body-whorl is

quite lost in the upper ones, they becoming simply rounded.

On the other hand, I think it more than probable that Prof.

de Koninck is correct in regarding Phillips’s Cirrus pentago-

nalis as only the young form of C. acutus. A much nearer

relative of the latter than H. pentangulatus is C. tabulatus,

Phillips, as pointed out by Prof. M‘Coy, especially in the

young state of the last named, although the whorls in C. acutus

have not the depressed, truncated, and markedly rectangular

appearance of C. tabulatus, which will at once separate the

two. It is the

Cirrus acutus, J. Sow. Min. Conch, 1816, ii. p. 43, t. 141. fig. 1 (2 figs.),

Cirrus acutus, Phillips, loc. cit.

Cirrus pentagonalis, id. ibid, p. 226, t. 15. fig. 8.

478 Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on the Gasteropoda

Euomphalus acutus, De Koninck, Animaux Foss. p. 433, t. 24. fig. 7,

a, b.

Straparollus acutus, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 587.

Euomphalus acutus, &c., Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. ed. 2, 1854, p. 247.

Cirrus tabulatus, J. de C. Sow. Min. Conch. 1844, vii. p. 65, t. 638.

fig. 2 (excl. figs. 3, 4).

8. Cirrus tabulatus, Phillips (p. 225, t. 13. fig. 7).

This figure is an improvement on the original, which is

not quite so mathematically precise as the illustration repre-

sents it. It is, further, a small example of C. tabulatus, which

at times grows to a very large size. Prof. M‘Coy’s remarks

on this species are very much to the point; and he refers with

great distinctness to the chief character, next to its tabulate

whorls, viz. the truncation of the spire. I quite agree with

M‘Coy as to the resemblance borne by C. tabulatus to the

variety of Euomphalus pentangulatus with the centre whorls

somewhat elevated above, instead of depressed below, the mar-

ginal keel of the body-whorl. Under the name of Zuomphalus

tabulatus, Phill., Trautschold has figured* a shell in no way

agreeing with the true characters of the species. It is there

represented as a planorbicular biconcave shell (at any rate

more or less so), whereas in reality H. tabulatus has an ele-

vated spire with large tabulate whorls.

There should be no mistaking this species after the figure

of the fine specimen in the Gilbertson collection given by

Mr. J. de C. Sowerby. . tabulatus will, I believe, form the

European type of Meek’s subgenus Omphalotrochus. It

is the

Cirrus tabulatus, Phillips, loc. cit.

Euomphalus tabulatus, M‘Coy, Synop. Carb. Limest. Foss. 1844, p. 38.

Straparollus tabulatus, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 541.

Cirrus tabulatus, J. de C. Sow. Min. Conch. 1844, vii. p. 65, t. 638.

fig. 1 (excl. figs. 2-4).

9. Cirrus pentagonalis, Phillips (p. 226, t. 14. fig. 8).

I have already expressed my concurrence with Prof. de

Koninck in regarding this as probably the immature form of

C. acutus. The figured specimen is easily to be recognized

by the fracture above the mouth on the body-whorl.

10. Cirrus rotundatus, J. Sowerby (Phillips, p. 226, t. 13.

fig. 15).

With the outward form of C. acutus, to a great extent, this

species is distinguished, as originally pointed ou by Mr.

Sowerby, by having the upper part of each whorl rounded

* Die Kalkbriiche yon Mjatschkowa, 1874, pt. i. t. 4. fig. 12, a, 6, ¢.

Jigured in Phillips's ‘ Geology of Yorkshire.’ 479

and not flattened. The spire varies in height, and the body-

whorl in relative convexity. C. rotundatus of Sowerby has

been universally regarded as a synonym of the Straparollus

Dionysti, De Montf. On the other hand, Prof. M‘Coy has

to a great extent shown reasons for believing that a gradual

passage may be traced between S. Dionysii, Cirrus acutus,

Phill., and Huomphalus anguis, M‘Coy; but Prof. Morris

goes further and places the last-named species as a synonym

of Straparollus or Euomphalus Dionysit, De Montf. The pro-

bability, I think, is, that they all three form varieties of an

extended species, of which S. Dionyszz, as the first described,

may be taken as the type; it is a point, however, which can

only be satisfactorily determined by the placing side by side

of a large number of examples of each. It is the

Straparollus Dionysi, De Montfort, Conch. Syst. 1810, ii. p. 175,

xliv® genre.

Cirrus rotundatus, J. Sow. Min. Conch. 1823, v. p. 36, t. 429. figs. 1, 2;

Phillips, loe. cit.

Euomphalus rotundatus, M‘Coy, Synop. Carb. Limest. Foss. 1844, p. 37.

E. anguis, M‘Coy, tom. cit. p. 35, t. 3. fig. 11.

E. Dionysii, De Koninck, Animaux Foss. p. 438, t. 24. figs. 1-5, 8;

Goldfuss, Petr. Germ. pt. 3, p. 88, t. 191. fig. 7,.a-e.

Straparollus Dionys, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 539.

Euomphalus Dionysti, Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. 1854, ed. 2, p. 247.

11. Cirrus pileopsideus, Phillips (p. 226, t. 13. fig. 6).

There are several examples of this shell in the Gilbertson

collection; and it is in many ways a peculiar one: there is

one which corresponds more nearly with the figure than any

of the others. C. pileopsideus is discoid and much depressed,

and has, indeed, a very different appearance from any of the

other Carboniferous Huomphali. The whorls are, as described

by M‘Coy, somewhat imbricating ; and the spire is more fre-

quently than not depressed below the edge of the body-

whorl. It is the

Cirrus pileopsideus, Phillips, loc. cit.

Euomphalus clausus, J. de C. Sow. Min. Conch, 1844, vii. p. 45, t. 633,

fig. 1 (8 figs.).

E. pileopsideus, M‘Coy, Synop. Carb. Foss. 1844, p. 37.

? E. neglectus, M‘Coy, loc. cit. p. 36, t. 5. fig. 25.

E. ee De Koninck, Animaux Foss. p. 497, t. 24. figs. 4,

6, a, b.

Straparollus pileopsideus, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 540.

Euomphalus pileopsideus, Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss, 1854, ed. 2, p, 248.

12. Cirrus spiralis, Phillips (p. 226, t. 13. fig. 14).

I have not succeeded in unde a specimen which I could

satisfactorily consider the figured example, unless it be one

480 Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on the Gasteropoda

with some matrix attached to it, not shown in the illus-

tration.

This is a bluntly conical species, with a rather expanded

base as compared with the height of the spire, the only break

in the continuity of the cone being the slightly impressed

sutures, there being no shoulder or upper flattened sur-

face to each whorl as in many species of Huomphalus. It

is a connecting link between L. Dionysti and EL. rotundatus.

The base is much flattened, becoming concave, with a by no

means large umbilicus; spire short. The surface is orna-

mented with obliquely sigmoidal, crossed in some specimens

by fine spiral lines. Very little appears to have been written

concerning this species. It is the

Cirrus spiralis, Phillips, loc. cit.; Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. 1848, p. 142;

Bronn, Index Pal. Nomen. 1848, p. 302; Brown, Foss. Conchol.

1849, p. 80, t. 41. fig. 18.

The name Huomphalus spiralis has been twice applied by

Von Miinster to shells described in the ‘ Beitriige’*; but as

one bears date 1840 and the other 1841, neither will clash

with Phillips’s species, which, whether we call it Cirrus or

Euomphalus, has priority. It appears to me that the two shells

so named by Von Miinster on different occasions are specifi-

cally distinct.

On the Species named Kuomphalus and Cirrus by Phillips.

The use of the names Straparollus, De Montf., Huomphalus,

Sow., and Cirrus, Sow., has been made the subject of much

confusion by conchologists and paleontologists. In the

following remarks I shall endeavour to distribute the species

described by Phillips, appertaining to one or other of these

genera or subgenera, whichever term may be used, in their

proper and respective sections. With this view it will be

necessary to go over, to some extent, the early history of the

names in question.

Straparollus was established by Denis de Montfort in

1810+ for a cirroid shell from the Carboniferous Limestone of

Namur, which, he remarked, possessed a large and smooth

umbilicus, and an entire and inclined mouth: type S. Dio-

nysit, De Montf.

Euomphalus was first introduced by James Sowerby in

1814} for an involute planorbicular shell with a depressed

spire, and concave or largely umbilicate below, the mouth

being ‘‘ mostly angular :” type H. pentangulatus, Sow.

* Beitrage zur Petrefactenkunde &c. Heft 3, 1840, p. 85, t. 15. fig. 8 ;

ibid. Heft 4, 1841, p. 105, t. 11. fig. 2.

+ Conchyl. Systém. ii. p. 175, xliv® genre. { Min. Conch. i. p. 97.

Jigured in Phillips's ‘Geology of Yorkshire.’ 481

The same author founded the genus Cirrus in 1816*, and

described it as a spiral conical univalve, without a columella,

with the volutions united and funnel-shaped beneath; type

C. acutus, Sow.

In 1837 Dr. Bronnf established the genus Schizostoma for

certain of Sowerby’s Huomphali, but with the mouth, as he

supposed, sinuated and furnished with a band, as in Pleuro-

tomaria and Pleurotoma: type Huomphalus catillus, Sow.

Prof. L. G. de Koninck { and Prof. F. M‘Coy§, writing

almost simultaneously, united the genera Huomphalus and

Cirrus of Sowerby in one genus, under the name Luom-

phalus. The latter of these authors did so “ knowing of no

character by which to distinguish them; at the same time

I am perfectly aware that Huomphalus, as it now stands,

requires revision.”” Prof. de Koninck, on the other hand,

went a step further than M‘Coy, and referred the united Huom-

phalus and Cirrus to Straparollus, Montf.; however, to show

the widely different outward form represented by such shells

as LH. pentangulatus, Sow., and C. acutus, Sow., or S. Dionysia,

De Monttf., he subdivided the combined genus into Huomphali

schizostomatotdet and H. cirroidet.

In 1850 D’Orbigny|| united the three genera, adopting for

the combination the name first given by Denis de Montfort,

Straparollus.

The next important contribution to this subject is that by

Prof. M‘Coy, who, in the second fasciculus of his ‘ British

Paleozoic Fossils’ {], restricted the name Huomphalus to those

forms with an entire peritreme, and often thickened, nearly

entire circular lip, not indented by the preceding whorl : types

E. rugosus, Sow., and EL. discors, Sow. On the other hand,

Cirrus is abandoned, and the name Séraparollus used for both

those cirroid and planorbicular shells in which the mouth is

indented by the preceding whorl.

The last opinion I think necessary to refer to in this

matter is that of Messrs. Meek and Worthen**. These re-

markably astute paleontologists poimt out that there is a

discrepancy between the figures of Straparollus Dionysti, given

by De Montfort and De Koninck, in the form of the mouth.

On the general question they remark:—‘‘ We are aware Prof.

M‘Coy and some others regard Huomphalus, as typified by

E. pentangulatus, as an exact synonym of Straparollus, and

* Min. Conch. ii. p. 93. t Lethzea Geogn. i, p. 95.

t Descr. Anim. Foss. p. 418.

§ Synop. Carb. Limest. Foss. 1844, p. 34.

|| Prodr. de Pal. i. p. 6. q BP. 297.

** Tllinois Survey Rapist; 1866, ii. p. 158.

482 Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on the Gasteropoda

that he proposes to transfer the former name to another group,

consisting of rough Cvtrrus-like shells, of which £. discors

and EL. rugosus, Sowerby, are examples (see Brit. Pal. Foss.

p- 279). It seems to us, however, that if the name Huom-

phalus is to be retained at all, we should apply it to the forms

for which it was originally proposed, and that we have no

right to transfer it to another type because Sowerby subse-

quently in another place refers this other type to his genus

Euomphalus. If we regard Straparollus, Montfort, 1810, and

Euomphalus, Sowerby, 1815, as exactly synonymous, then

the latter name should be dropped from use, except in the

synonymy of Straparollus, and could not, according to the most

generally accepted rules of nomenclature, be transferred to

the E. discors group, whether we view these shells as consti-

tuting a section of the genus Straparollus, or as an entirely

distinct genus.”

Now, notwithstanding the discrepancy in the figures of De

Montfort and De Koninck, pointed out by the last-mentioned

writers, I think, after investigating the matter thoroughly,

there can be little doubt paleontologists have done wisely in

uniting Straparollus, De Montf., with Cirrus, J. Sowerby,

and that, in whatever form we look upon this combination in

relation to those which follow, whether as a genus, subgenus,

or section, the name adopted must certainly be Straparollus.

We next have to consider the name Huomphalus. By

M‘Coy the planorbicular shells for which Sowerby instituted

the name were merged with the cirroid forms under the one

name. Freely admitting that the total want of a columella

and the existing large open umbilicus are points which of

necessity place these shells in close generic contiguity, I still

think that the very great discrepancy in form demands more

than mere specific separation. In the present state of concholo-

gical science such a difference would be seized upon by workers

amongst recent shells. It has been expressed by De Koninck

in a sectional sense by using the terms #. schizostomatoidet and

E. ctrroidet, whilst Meek and Worthen have not hesitated to

adopt Huomphalus in a subgeneric sense under Straparollus

for the same purpose ; in so doing I am quite in accord with

them. Again, I quite agree with these writers in deprecating

the use made of the term Huomphalus by Prof. M‘Coy in his

later work, viz. as a section for those Huomphali (typified by

E. discors and E. rugosus) in which the peritreme is quite

entire. The name Huomphalus, if retained, must, by all laws

of nomenclature, be so (as they have pointed out) for those

shells typified by EH. pentangulatus. ‘That Prof. M‘Coy is

right in retaining the shells in question separate from the £.

Figured in Phillips’s ‘Geology of Yorkshire.’ 483

pentangulatus group I am convinced. I merely differ from

him as to the nomenclature of this section, which, I think,

requires a name for its recognition.

The classification of these Euomphaloid shells now advo-

cated will be found expressed in the following table, which

will also give the synonymy of each group, and the species

which fall into it described by Phillips, with two exceptions.

The sheljs in question (Cirrus tabulatus, Phill., and Huom-

phalus cristatus, Phill.) require a separate notice. The first

of these will, I have very little doubt, constitute itself a species

of Meek’s subgenus Omphalotrochus, the resemblance between

his type (O. Whitney?) and the fine example of C. tabulatus

figured by Mr. J. de C. Sowerby being very great.

The second of these shells (4. ertstatus, Phill.) has been

- made the subject of a distinct genus by Mr. J. de C. Sowerby,

viz. Phanerotinus *, which I propose to retain as such, fol-

lowing in this respect my friend Prof. J. Morris. It most

certainly is not a Huomphalus simply.

Genus STRAPAROLLUS, De Montfort, 1810.

Section (a) Straparollus (proper), De Montf. 1810.

Type S. Dionyst?, De Montf.

= Cirrus, J. Sow. 1814; Euomphalus (pars), Fleming, 1828; Euom-

phalus, M‘Coy, 1844; Euomphal cirrodei, De Koninck, 1843; idem,

Bronn, 1848; Cirrus, Brown, 1849 ; Straparollus (pars), D’Orbigny,

1850; Straparollus (pars), M‘Coy, 1853; Euomphalus (pars), Eich-

wald, 1860; Straparollus, Meek and Worthen, 1866,

Species described by Phillips :—Otrrus acutus, J. Sow. ;

C. pentagonalis, Phill.; C. rotundatus, J. Sow. (=S. Dio-

nysti, De Montf.); C. pileopsideus, Phill.; and C. spiralis,

Phill.

Section (2) Huomphalus, J. Sowerby, 1814.

Type E. pentangulatus, J. Sow.

= Bifrontia (pars), Deshayes, 1824 ; Schizostoma, Bronn, 1837 ; Schizo-

stoma et Huomphalus, Fischer, 1837; Euomphalus (pars), M‘Coy,

1844; E. schizostomatoidei, De Koninck, 1848 ; idem, Bronn, 1848 ;

Straparollus (pars), D’Orbigny, 1849 and 1850; ? Discohelix, Dun-

ker, 1846; Euomphalus, Brown, 1849; Straparollus, M‘Coy, 1853 ;

Euomphalus, G. & F. Sandberger, 1850-56; Euomphalus (pars),

Eichwald, 1860; Hwomphalus, Meek and Worthen, 1866.

Species described by Phillips:—Huomphalus pentangulatus,

Sow.; E. catillus, Martin; E. calyx, Phill.; £. bifrons,

Phill. (=. pugilis, Phill.).

* Min. Conch. 1843, vii. p. 29.

484 Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on Gasteropoda.

), M‘Coy, 1853.

Types: 2. rugosus, Sow.; LE. discors, Sow.

= Straparollus (pars), D’Orbigny, 1850; Euomphalus (pars), Kich-

wald, 1860; L. discors group, Meek and Worthen, 1866.

Species described by Phillips, none.

Section (c) (

Section (d2) Omphalotrochus, Meck.

Type O. Whitneyt, Meek. ,

= Euomphalus (pars), Phillips, 1836; idem, J. de C. Sowerby, 1844.

Species described by Phillips— Cirrus tabulatus, Phill.

Genus PHANEROTINUS, J. de C. Sowerby, 1843.

Type P. cristatus, Phill.

=? Eeeuliomphalus, Portlock, 1843 ; ? Serpularia, F. A. Romer, 1843.

Species described by Phillips— Huomphalus cristatus,

Phill.

Various other generic names have at times been proposed

7 : D

for Huomphalus, or for sections of the genus, such as Oma-

laxis, Deshayes, Bifrontia, Deshayes*; but as these are all

pti hr Ceres. Oe

posterior in date, or otherwise ineligible, I shall not now

refer to them.

13. Turbo tiara, Sowerby (Phillips, p. 226, t. 13. fig. 9).

This is a fine example of the species, but much decorticated

and not in a good state of preservation. The figure is a tole-

rably good representation. I have compared the Gilbertson

specimen with that contained in the ‘ Mineral Conchology

Collection.”” It is the

Turbo tiara, Sow. Min. Conch. 1827, v. p. 97, t. 551. fig. 1 (2 figs.) ;

Phillips, doe. eit.

Platyschisma tiara, M‘Coy, Brit. Pal. Foss. 1858, fase. 3, p. 535;

Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. 1854, ed. 2, p. 269.

Turbo tiara, Brown, Foss. Conch. 1849, p. 73, t. 38, fig. 82; Bronn,

Index Pal. Nomen. 1848, p. 1526.

14. Turbo semisulcatus, Phillips (p. 226, t. 23. fig. 10).

The type specimen of this so-called species is a beautifully

preserved little shell; and the figure is good, except that some

matrix remaining about the aperture is not represented. I

quite agree with Prof. de Koninck in considering this only

a variety of the next species, Turbo biserialis. The elongated

* Descr. Coq. Foss. Env. Paris, ii. p. 221.

On new Cerambycide from Ecuador. 485

tubercles on the shell are open to much variability; we

have specimens with only one row, some with two, and others

with one row on one part of the surface and two on another

portion of the same shell. The striz of growth are strongly

marked.

15. Turbo biserialis, Phillips (p. 226, t. 13. fig. 11).

There are several examples of this in the Gilbertson col-

lection ; and it is difficult to pick out the figured shell. The

descriptions by Prof. de Koninck and M‘Coy are clear and

comprehensive. It is the

Turbo biserialis et T. semisulcatus, Phillips (as above).

Littorina biserralis, De Koninck, Animaux Foss. p. 458, t. 40. fig. 6.

Turbo bisertalis, Bronn, Index Pal. Nomen. 1848, p. 1318; M‘Coy,

Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. 3, p. 535.

Turbo hiserialis et T. semisulcatus, Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss. 1854, ed. 2,

pp. 282, 283.

On the Shells called Turbo by Phillips.

Turbo tiara has been placed by M‘Coy in his genus Platy-

schisma, and has doubtless found an appropriate resting-

place there. 7. bisertalis (= T. semisulcatus) is in want of

a generic receptacle ; and for it, in all probability, a name will

have to be coined. By De Koninck it was placed in Littorina,

and by M‘Coy doubtfully in the genus under which it was

described. By Meek and Worthen* it has been regarded

as forming a section of Naticopsis. We shall examine this

‘subject further when we take up the species of that genus in

the Gilbertson collection.

[To be continued. }

XLIV.—New Cerambycide from Heuador.

By Cuar.es O. WATERHOUSE.

Since my last paper on Coleoptera from Kcuador I have de-

termined three more species of Cerambycide from among

those collected by Mr. Buckley to be new, which I here de-

scribe.

In the Prionidz, the specimens of Prionacalus Buckleyi, W.,

taken by Mr. Buckley differ immensely in size and develop-

ment, in the same way as is seen in P. cacicus and P. atys ;

and the sculpture of the thorax varies also somewhat in all

the species. I have seen one small example of P. Buckleyt

* Tllinois Geol. Survey Report, ii. p. 364.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 33

456 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on

which has the antenne partly ferruginous ; but this, [ think, is

clearly not a specific character.

Cerambycide.

Xestia polita, n. sp.

Nigra, nitidissima; thorace transversim rugulose, elytris sat crebre

punctatis, ad apicem fere levibus, quadrispinosis ; femoribus rufo-

castaneis, apice nigris, tibiis tarsisque piceis.

Long. 12 lin.

Antennal tubercles obtuse, thickly punctured, as well as the

front of the head. Antenne as long as the elytra and half

the thorax; the basal joint strongly and thickly punctured.

Thorax as long as broad, subcylindrical (scarcely at all ar-

cuate at the sides), constricted at the extreme base and apex,

in the usual way, with coarse close punctures at the sides; the

dorsal ridges rather regular and carried evenly across the

disk, which is not impressed. Scutellum smooth and without

pubescence. Elytra parallel, highly polished; the punctua-

tion is moderately close, at the base very distinct, but almost

entirely wanting near the apex; the extremely fine zigzag or

vermiculate striation, usually apparent among the punctua-

tion in the species of this genus, is almost entirely wanting,

but can be traced_near the base: each elytron has two short

acute spines at the apex; the outer one is scarcely longer than

the sutural one. The abdomen is pitchy at the apex.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Mallocera costifera, n. sp.

Fusca, flavo-griseo tomentosa, opaca; thorace tuberculis duobus

discalibus nigris; elytris fuscis, costis sex flavo-tomentosis, apice

unispinoso; femoribus quatuor posterioribus apice spinosis.

Long. 17 lin.

A rather broad flat species. Fuscous, clothed with yellowish

pile. Head rather large and broad; antenne nearly twice as

long as the whole insect, the joints without spines. ‘Thorax

as long as its width at the base ; with two small tubercles on

the disk rather before the middle; the sides with a slightly

swollen cicatrice before the front angle, and with a conical

tubercle rather behind the middle. Hlytra fuscous, brownish

towards the apex, not very much narrowed posteriorly ; each

elytron with three obtuse costa, one close to the suture, one

near the side, the middle one not quite so long as the others ;

the intervals gently concave, and rather thickly but obscurely

punctured; the apex of each elytron is obliquely truncate,

the outer angle produced into an acute spine. Femora some-

new Cerambycide from Heuador. 487

what compressed, subparallel, the four posterior furnished at

the apex with a strong spine.

Hab. Sarayacu.

CATORTHONTUS, n. gen.

Head deflexed in front almost at right angles with the

forehead; the muzzle nearly as long as broad, parallel seen

from the front; antennal tubercles a little elevated on the inner

side like two ridges between the antenne. Antenne short;

the second joint a little longer than broad, the third joint as

long as the first and second together, the fourth scarcely more

than half the length of the third, the following joints subequal.

Kyes deeply emarginate above. Thorax a little broader than

long, very convex and arched anteriorly, a little constricted

at the base, and very deeply transversely impressed above the

base. Elytra at the base a little broader than the thorax, and

three times the length, meeting at the suture for more than

half their length, beyond the middle rapidly acuminate, so

that the apices are widely distant from each other. Anterior

coxe nearly globular, only very slightly conical, moderately

raised above the prosternal process, which is very narrow and

arched. 'The mesosternal process is moderately broad, slightly

arched anteriorly. Metathoracic episterna very broad, straight

on the inner side (¢. e. parallel with the middle of the ster-

num), arcuately narrowed (from the outside) posteriorly. Ab-

domen not narrowed at the base. Femora pedunculate, much

swollen at the apex.

This genus appears undoubtedly to belong to the Rhinotra-

gine, but differs from all the genera of that subfamily in the

form of the thorax, which recalls Clytel/us (Tillomorphine),

and in the form of the metathoracic episterna, which are nar-

rowed from the outer margin, not from the inner.

I propose placing it before Ommata.

Catorthontus collaris, n. sp.

Flavus; capite thoraceque nigro lineatis; elytris fortiter punctatis,

singulis ad basin nodo nitido, ante medium strigis binis fuscis,

apice acuminato piceo, extus carinato.

Long. 6 ln.

Antenne short, about the same length as the elytra, pitchy,

darker in the middle, the apical joints gradually becoming a

little more slender, the third and two or three following

joints sparingly fringed above; each joint with a long stiff

hair at its apex. Head with a stripe below each eye, two

stripes in front, the inner angle of the antennal tubercle, a

stripe across behind the eyes, and the back part of the head

33*

488 Mr. J. Gould on two new

above, black. The cheeks behind the eyes are considerably

swollen. Thorax a very little broader than the head, very

convex and arched in front, depressed and transversely im-

pressed at the base, where it is also a little constricted; with

a black band in front, quadridentate posteriorly, and with a

second narrower curved band behind the middle, bidentate

behind in the middle, touching the lateral projection of the

anterior band and nearly uniting with it at the apex; the

anterior band is thickly and very strongly punctured. Elytra

one fifth broader than the thorax, flat on the back, perpendi-

cularly deflexed at the sides of the shoulders, thickly and

strongly punctured ; each elytron has a raised oblong-ovate

spot in the middle of the base, with a brown streak under the

shoulder and two oblique dusky streaks before the middle,

the second one turned backwards at an acute angle on the

side; the apex is very acuminate, pitchy, with a strong ridge

along the outer margin, continued anteriorly by an oblique

paler yellow line. There is a black band across the meta-

sternum ; and the episterna are bordered in front and behind

with black. There is a spot at the side of the basal segment

of the abdomen, a complete band across the second and third

segments, and a spot in the middle of the posterior femora,

all black.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Allesia bicolor, n. sp.

Nigra, capite thoraceque rufis, antennis flavis ad apicem fuscis ;

elytris cyaneis xeneo tinctis, creberrime sat fortiter punctatis.

Long. 63-9 lin.

Resembles A. chlorophana in form and appearance. The

raised parts of the thorax are smooth, the impressed portions

are strongly punctured; at the base there is a triangular

purple spot. Scutellum black. Elytra rather strongly and

very densely punctured ; blue or blue tinted with green. The

first five or six joints of the antenne are yellow, the apical

joints fuscous. The form of the thorax is that of the variety

nitedipennis, Chevr., having a small obtuse tubercle at the

side.

Hab. Chiguinda.

XLV.—Description of two new Humming-birds from Bolivia.

By Joun Goutn, F.R.S.

Mr. CLARENCE BuCKLEY, who has distinguished himself by

his zoological researches in South America, passed, as is well

Humming-birds from Bolivia. 489

known, some considerable time in Bolivia some few years

ago. On his return to this country I became the fortunate

possessor of many of his specimens of Humming-birds; but,

owing to the illness which has afflicted me for a considerable

time, I have not been able, till lately, to incorporate Mr.

Buckley’s specimens in my collection of Trochilide. Having

now been able to examine my series more closely, I have come

to the conclusion that two species, at least, are new to science,

and I place a description of these two birds at once before the

public. One is anew Cynanthus; but the other is a new form

so different that it must be generically separated.

Cynanthus bolivianus, sp. n.

Similar to C. mocoa from Ecuador, but much smaller and

of a brighter metallic green, and with the tail more of a bril-

liant steel-blue than a vivid green, Total length 6:3 inches,

culmen 0°7, wing 2°6, tail 4:1, tarsus 0°2.

Hab. Bolivia.

I possess several males of this new species, as well as of

the allied C. mocoa; so that it is not without ample material

before me that I describe the Bolivian bird as new to science.

C. mocoa measures 8 inches in length, and has a wing of

3 inches and a tail of 5:5 inches.

PINAROLZMA*, gen. nov.

The general appearance of this bird reminds one of Zam-

pornis; but it has an extremely long wing. In the latter

respect it resembles Oreotrochilus; but it differs from this

genus in its strongly curved and lengthened bill and in its

very broad tail-feathers, while its extremely small feet seem

peculiar to the genus.

Pinarolema Buckley?, sp. un.

Brown, with a purplish gloss on the back; the upper tail-

coverts and tail-feathers brown, glossed with purple, and

having a subterminal band of steel-blue; under surface of

body brown, slightly washed with metallic green; the throat

lighter brown, the feathers edged with paler brown, giving a

scaly appearance; vent and under tail-coverts white, the

latter washed with brown. ‘Total length 4-6 inches, culmen

1:05, wing 2°95, tail 1°85, tarsus 0°15.

Hab. Misqui, Bolivia, 10,000 feet.

* muvapos, sordidus ; Aayos, guttur.

490 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

XLVI.—New Neotropical Curculionide.—Part I.

By Francis P. Pascor, F.L.8. &c.

THE species described in this part, and the subfamilies to

which they belong, are :—

HyLoBIINnz. ZYGOPINE.

Pileophorus procerus. Copturus conjunctus.

expletus.

CrYPTORHYNCHINS. bisellatus.

Bothrobathys anticus. —— lyra.

Hpitasis, n. g. —— paroticus.

niveosparsa. —— musculus.

Nettarhinus granulatus. —— crux.

rudis. —— collaris.

Thrasyomus, n. g. —— eximius.

tumens.

angulatus.

Pileophorus procerus.

P. angustus, parallelus, squamositate brunnea, obscure pallidiore

varia, tectus; elytris singulatim apice late emarginatis. Long.

4 lin.

Hab, Cayenne.

Narrow and elongate, the sides nearly parallel, but the

prothorax a little broader than the elytra, covered with a dark

brown squamosity mixed with a paler brown approaching to

dull yellowish, especially a median line on the prothorax and

along the elytral suture ; rostrum shorter than the head ; eyes

lateral and widely apart ; antennz very short, the club large ;

prothorax granulate, the apex extending beyond the head ;

scutellum punctiform ; elytra slightly narrower at the apex

than at the base, coarsely and closely seriate-punctate, poste-

riorly deelivous and tubereulate, the apex of each elytron

ending in two small tubercle-like processes, between which is

a well-marked curvature; legs and body beneath with a dense

pale brown squamosity.

The type of this singular genus, P. nictitans, a very rare

insect, is compared by Lacordaire to an Apate; the above

differs in its longer and narrower form and in the absence

of the white band on the elytra.

Bothrobathys anticus.

B. sat late ovatus, dense squamosus, prothorace transverso, apice

tubulato et bifasciculato-squamoso, lateraliter gradatim angus-

tiore ; elytris breviusculis, lateribus rotundatis. Long. 2 lin.

Hab. Parana.

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 491

Rather broadly ovate, closely covered with scales of a dark

brown colour, but paler on the sides of the prothorax and

middle of the elytra; head with four fascicles of erect dark

brown scales, among which are a few white; rostrum dark

brown, without scales, except at the base; antenne ferrugi-

nous ; prothorax nearly twice as broad as long, tubular in

front, two fascicles of dark brown scales at the apex, behind

the tubular portion the disk of the prothorax rises abruptly

into a transverse ridge marked more or less with paler erect

scales, sides gradually narrowing to the base; scutellum not

apparent ; elytra short, somewhat cordiform, seriate-punctate,

tuberculate, two compressed tubercles on each side, crowned

with erect scales; legs varied with brown and whitish pro-

Jecting scales; third and fourth joints of the abdomen very

short.

EPITASIS.

Rostrum modice arcuatum, capite sesquilongius, apicem versus

latius, basi semialatum; scrobes medianz. Antenne mediocres;

articulo primo funiculi validiore; clava distincta. Prothorax

transversus, ad latera rotundatus. Scutellwm distinctum. Elytra

subovata, prothorace paulo latiora. ima pectoralis mesosterno

terminata. Abdomen segmentis intermediis sequalibus; sutura

prima arcuata. Memora mutica; tibie rect; tars modice

elongati ; wngues approximati.

The aftinity of this genus is not obvious ; but it is certainly

to be placed among the numerous forms which are classed

with Zragopus, Acalles, T'ylodes, and their allies. Its essen-

tial character lies in the form of the rostrum, which is ex-

panded, although but slightly, at the base, its junction with

the head being marked by a notch or incision on each side.

Epitasis niveosparsa.

E. ovalis, squamulis fusco-silaceis tecta, aliis niveis setulisque fuscis

erectis adSpersa ; antennis flavidis. Long. 13 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Oval, closely covered with yellowish-brown scales, others

of a snow-white colour forming conspicuous spots on the

prothorax and elytra, and long, erect, dark brown scales (those

arising among the white spots also white) intermixed; ros-

trum with a raised line at the base; antennee yellowish ferru-

ginous ; prothorax rather short, bisinuate at the base, a few

white scales in the centre ; scutellum round, black, scaleless ;

elytra rather convex punctate-striate, but the punctures nearly

concealed by the scales, the apex broadly rounded; legs

covered with more or less projecting scales.

492 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionidae.

Nettarhinus granulatus.

N. subcylindricus, silaceo-squamosus, granulis numerosis nigris

nitidis adspersus; seapo modice elongato; elytris apice acutis.

Long. 44 lin.

Hab. Venezuela.

Subcylindrical, covered with brownish-yellow scales, the

upper surface studded with numerous black shining granules ;

head and rostrum black, the former with scattered scales, a

few extending to the base of the latter, its lower half un-

equally punctured ; antenne pale ferruginous, the club darker,

scape rather long, slender; prothorax about equal in length

and breadth, much constricted anteriorly, towards the base

two elevated somewhat pointed tubercles; scutellum indis-

tinct ; elytra rather short, broader than the prothorax, pointed

at the apex, granules arranged in rows, the intervals closely

covered with scales ; body beneath and legs with paler scales,

the last three abdominal segments darker.

A short thick-set form like N. b¢lobus (Ol.), but differs in

coloration and sculpture.

Nettarhinus rudis.

NV. subcylindricus, piceus, squamulis parvis silaceis adspersus ;

scapo breviusculo ; elytris apice rotundatis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Subcylindrical, pitchy, with small scattered brownish-yellow

scales; head and rostrum black, coarsely punctured, except

the latter, towards the apex ; antenne ferruginous, the club

darker, scape rather short; prothorax rather broader than

long, the sides well rounded, constricted anteriorly, closely

and strongly punctured, the base with three tubercles ;

scutellum elongate; elytra coarsely punctured, the intervals

granulate, each granule bearing a short, thick, erect scale, the

apex rounded; body beneath and legs pitchy; tibiae short

and much compressed.

This species differs inter alia from its congeners in the

rounded apex of the elytra.

THRASYOMUS.

Rostrum modice elongatum; scrobes mediane, rect. Antenne

graciles ; funiculi.articulis duobus basalibus equalibus ; clava

breviter ovata, distincta. Prothorax transversus, lobis ocularibus

nullis. Hlytra breviuscula, convexa, prothorace multo latiora,

regione scutellari depressa. ima pectoralis metasterno termi-

nata, apice aperta. Pedes robusti; femora valida, infra dentata ;

tibie unguiculate. Abdomen segmentis tribus intermediis

eequalibus.

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 493

The pectoral canal extending to the metasternum or beyond

is the character of a small group of Cryptorhynchine forming

Lacordaire’s ‘‘sous-tribu Sophrorhinides.” In this new genus

the absence of ocular lobes and the short broad elytra differen-

tiate it from Mecistocerus ; in Metrania, another genus with-

out ocular lobes, the pectoral canal is prolonged to the basal

segment of the abdomen. The sides of the elytra bounding

the scutellum, sloping inwards or depressed, will, I think,

often afford a valuable generic character.

Thrasyomus tumens.

T. niger, subnitidus, setulis griseis adspersus ; rostro basi carinato ;

elytris rude punctatis ad latera haud ampliatis. Long 5} lin.

Hab. Chontales.

Black, somewhat glossy, with scattered grey setulose

scales, more crowded in the punctures; rostrum smooth,

pitchy, an elevated line at the base; head and prothorax

granulate-punctate, the latter transverse, much narrower an-

teriorly, a smooth elevated line in the middle; scutellum

oblong, pointed behind; elytra somewhat triangular, very

convex, shoulders prominent, apex rounded, striate-punctate,

the interstices scarcely raised, punctures coarse and quadrate ;

body beneath sparingly punctured, each abdominal segment

having only a single row ; tibiz fluted, the inner edge straight ;

tarsi rather short, equal, the third joint broadly bilobed.

Thrasyomus angulatus.

T. niger, setulis griseis adspersus, lateribus prothoracis condensatis ;

rostro haud carinato; elytris subgranulato-punctatis, ad latera

subito deflexis. Long. 44 lin.

Hab. Nauta.

Dull black, with scattered greyish scales, which are more

numerous on the sides of the prothorax ; rostrum smooth,

pitchy, without an elevated line at the base; antenne ferru-

ginous ; prothorax as in the preceding, but less granulate, and

the elevated line confined to the apex; scutellum shortly

oval; elytra trigonate, the sides abruptly deflexed and marked

off from the back by a sharply-defined angle, seriate-punctate,

the punctures coarse and bounded behind on each side by a

small glossy granule ; body beneath irregularly punctured ;

legs as in the preceding species.

This species is at once distinguished by the sharply angular

or carinated sides of the elytra and their peculiar sculpture.

Both species have a slightly marked ridge on the front between

the eyes.

494 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

Copturus conjunctus.

C. oblongus, subangustatus, niger, elytris brunneo-fuscis; rostro

tenui; antennis ferrugineis, funiculo articulo secundo longissimo;

prothorace oblongo, basi gibboso ; elytris supra depressis, apice

suturali mucronato. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Cayenne.

Oblong, rather narrow; rostrum slender, black; antenne

ferruginous, second joint of the funicle as long as the next

five together ; prothorax about equal in length and breadth,

gibbous behind, black, with two faint yellowish lines at the

side; scutellum rounded; elytra depressed above, a littie

rounded anteriorly at the sides, and abruptly rounded at the

apex, the suture terminating in a short spine, contiguous to

its fellow, chocolate-brown, the middle with an obscure round

black spot with a narrow whitish line behind, punctate-striate,

the interstices flattish; body beneath black, scaleless, except

that the first abdominal segment and a triangular spot on the

second are closely covered with minute ochreous scales ;

femora strongly toothed beneath and bidentate at the apex,

black, the posterior with the basal two thirds ochreous ; pec-

toral canal confined to the propectus.

Copturus illustrates the difficulty of defining a large genus.

Every character is liable to exception, not one appearing to

have a generic value, although there is a common interresem-

blance which is not to be mistaken; the group, in fact, is a

natural one, but which perhaps might, for the advantage of

the systematist, be artificially divided into several genera.

Among the few species with mucronate elytra this may be

known by the mucro being confined to the sutural edge, so that,

when the elytra are closed, it appears only ‘as one.

Copturus eaxpletus.

C. subrhomboidalis, niger, prothorace lineis tribus, elytris in medio

squamis ochraceis ornatis ; rostro modice elongato, piceo-fusco ;

antennis fulvis, funiculi articulo secundo quam primum sesqui-

longiore ; elytris rude striato-punctatis. Long. 32 lin.

* Hab. Para.

Somewhat rhomboidal, black, varied with ochraceous ; ros-

trum moderately long, pitchy brown ; ; antenne fulvous, second

joint of the funicle half as long again as the first, the third

and fourth equal and as long as the first ; prothorax trans-

verse, the sides gradually narrower towards the apex, black,

strongly punctured, three lines on the disk of yellowish scales;

scutellum oblong; elytra flat above, strongly punctate-striate,

the punctures in the striz large and nearly confluent, a broad

stripe of ochraceous scales along the suture, but confined to

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 495

the interstices, the strize between with a row of snowy-white

scales ; body beneath closely covered with cretaceous’ scales ;

legs with the scales setulose and less approximate; femora

sharply toothed beneath, the posterior scarcely attaining the

end of the elytra; last joint of the tarsi and claws black ;

pectoral canal extending between the anterior coxee, not limited

behind.

The flat disk of the elytra and the relative length of the

joints of the antennz appear to be good differential characters.

Copturus bisellatus.

C’.. rhomboidalis, niger, squamulis ochraceis maculatim ornatus ; pro-

thorace transverso, antice haud constricto, postice scutellum

versus producto ; scutello conspicuo ; elytris subcordatis, fortiter

sulcato-punctatis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. 8. Paulo.

Rhomboidal, black varied with spots and patches of ochre-

ous scales; rostrum black ; antenne ferruginous ; prothorax

transverse, closely punctured, the sides with a broad ochreous

stripe, which descends on the sides of the pro- and meso-

thorax, enclosing a large black scaleless space; scutellum

conspicuous, rounded; elytra subcordate, punctate-striate,

punctures coarse, the raised interstices smooth, scaleless; a

large ochreous spot behind the scutellum, and a smaller one

behind, both lying in and dividing a broad black sutural stripe,

an ochreous spot also midway at the side; body beneath with

close-set greyish scales, the four posterior abdominal segments

with a common large black patch; legs with grey setulose

scales; femora toothed beneath.

The large enclosed patch on the side of the pro- and meso-

thorax seems diagnostic of this species.

Copturus lyra.

C. rhomboidalis, niger, squamulis ochraceis inequaliter et macu-

latim vestitus ; prothorace transverso, postice producto, scutellum

tegente; elytris subcordatis, pone scutellum figura X-formi macu-

lisque quatuor ochraceis ornatis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Rhomboidal, black, with more or less scattered ochreous

scales, but collected in spots on the elytra; rostrum rather

short, black ; eyes comparatively small; antenne yellowish,

second joint of the funicle as long as the three next together ;

club short, rounded ; prothorax transverse, constricted at the

apex, acutely produced posteriorly and hiding the scutellum ;

elytra subcordate, broadly rounded at the apex, an x-shaped

spot at the base, one on each side at the middle, and two at

496 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

the apex, pale ochreous and distinctly limited ; femora slightly

toothed beneath, the posterior extending about a third of their

length behind the elytra; posterior half of the first and the

whole of the second abdominal segment closely covered with

ivory-white scales.

The scutellum, if present, covered by the scutellar process

of the prothorax is a remarkable character, so far as I have

noticed, confined to this species. In this and the preceding

species the pectoral canal extends to the intermediate coxe,

and the posterior femora pass beyond the end of the elytra.

Copturus paroticus.

C. subrhomboidalis, niger, squamulis ochraceis maculatim varius §

rostro breviusculo, apicem versus ferrugineo; antennis fulvis,

funiculi articulo secundo quam primum dimidio longiore ; elytris

punctato-striatis, interstitiis crenatis. Long. 13 lin.

Hab. Parana.

Subrhomboidal, black, nearly scaleless above; rostrum

comparatively short and stout, ferruginous towards the tip ;

antenne fulvous, second joint of the funicle half as long again

as the first; prothorax transverse, a large oblique patch of

ochraceous scales curving upwards on each side; scutellum

punctiform ; elytra subcordate, broadly rounded at the apex,

punctate-striate, the punctures separated by glossy spaces, the

interstices crenate, a small ochraceous spot in the centre,

another close to the apex, and one or two nearly obsolete at

the side; body beneath with scattered greyish setulose scales ;

femora toothed beneath, the posterior not extending to the

end of the elytra; tarsi ferruginous; pectoral canal extending

to the intermediate cox.

Allied to C. vestitus, Boh., but more rhomboidal and dif-

ferently coloured.

Copturus musculus.

C. ovatus, fuscus, squamulis setiformibus ochraceis sparse vestitus ;

rostro breviusculo, nigro, apice antennisque fulvis ; funiculo arti-

culis duobus basalibus longitudine subzequalibus ; femoribus haud

dentatis. Long. 14 lin.

Hab. Parana.

Ovate, dark brown, sparsely covered with ochraceous setu-

lose scales ; rostrum comparatively short and stout, black, the

tip fulvous ; antenne fulvous, scape short, first joint of the

funicle stout, second about the same length, the rest gradually

shorter; prothorax transverse, a nearly scaleless space on

each side the median line; elytra rather short, callous at the

shoulders, the apices rounded, punctate-striate, interstices

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 497

flattish, scales more crowded posteriorly ; body beneath with

subapproximate ochraceous scales; femora not toothed be-

neath, the posterior not extending to the end of the elytra ;

pectoral canal extending to the intermediate coxe.

In size and shape this species resembles C. confinis, Boh. ;

but, ¢nter alia, the femora are edentate.

Copturus crux.

C. ovatus, niger, elytris postice litera T signatis ; antennis modice

elongatis, funiculi articulis duobus basalibus fere squalibus ;

femoribus obsolete dentatis. Long. 12 lin.

Hab. Parana.

Ovate, black, the elytra at the apex with a snowy-white

T-shaped mark; rostrum comparatively short, ferruginous ;

antenne moderately long, fulvous, the first two joints of the

funicle nearly equal; prothorax transverse, slightly rounded

at the base, very coarsely punctured, a raised longitudinal

line in the middle; scutellum oblong or subtriangular; elytra

rather short, their apices rounded, coarsely striate, the striz

apparent, impunctate, the interstices crenate; body beneath

closely covered with white scales; femora short, obsoletely

toothed ; tibiz and tarsi ferruginous.

This species in outline and mutic femora resembles the

preceding, but is larger and differently coloured.

Copturus collaris.

C. rhomboidalis, niger, maculatim albido-syuamulosus ; rostro te-

nuato, piceo-nigro ; funiculi articulo secundo quam primum qua-

druplo longiore ; prothorace apice late rufo-fasciato ; elytris tenu-

iter striatis. Long, 24 lin.

Hab. Figa.

Rhomboidal, black, varied with yellowish-white spots ;

rostrum slender, pitchy black; antennz fulvous, second joint

of the funicle four times as long as the first; prothorax

transverse, rather finely and closely punctured, a broad band

of pure red scales at the anterior border, and at the base three

small yellowish spots; scutellum rounded ; elytra subcordate,

callous at the shoulders, finely striate, the striez apparently

impunctate, the interstices flattish and minutely punctured,

three distinct yellowish spots on the suture, the basal largest,

and two on the disk at the side; body beneath covered with

approximate white scales ; femora sharply toothed beneath ;

pectoral canal not extending beyond the anterior coxe, but

the rostrum impinging on the metathorax.

Allied to C. rubricollis, Boh., but rhomboidal in outline,

differently sculptured, and spots otherwise modified.

408 Miscellaneous.

Copturus eximtus.

C. ovatus, ater, prothorace supra (medio excepto) elytrisque plaga

magna tripartita coccineis; femoribus infra bidentatis, posticis

valde elongatis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Columbia.

Ovate, jet-black, with bright scarlet patches on the pro-

thorax and elytra; rostrum elongate, slender, broader towards

the tip, glossy brown; antenne fulvous, scape short, funicle

long, the second joint twice as long as the first ; prothorax

transverse, rounded at the base, a black spot in the middle,

and the sides black, the rest covered with scarlet scales ;

scutellum black; elytra rather shorter, broadly rounded at

the apex, punctate-striate, a broad scarlet band rather behind

the middle and continued anteriorly along the suture to the

base ; sides of the sterna, second and third abdominal seg-

ments closely covered with yellow scales; femora slender,

sinuate beneath, and in the sinus two teeth, the proximal by

far the largest ; posterior femora very long, their tibie at the

apex, and tarsi, except the last joint, ochraceous, claws ful-

vous ; pectoral canal extending to the intermediate coxee.

This beautiful species is remarkable for its long posterior

femora, which extend for more than half their length beyond

the elytra. The pectoral canal extends to the anterior border

of the metasternum.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Origin and Development of the Ovum in Encope before

Fecundation. By M. C. Mrresxowsxy.

Tur ovaries of the Medusa, arranged in the interior of the bell,

have the appearance of four little sacs, produced by an evagination

of the gastrovascular cavity. In the walls of the ovaries, from

without inwards, we find a layer of ectodermic cells, the limits of

which are not well defined, and the entoderm composed of several

layers of better-defined cells. The innermost layer of the ento-

derm, that which covers the inner surface of the ovary, is composed

of the same cells (furnished with a vibratile cilium) as the ento-

derm of the radial canals.

Towards the base of the ovary, where it becomes confounded

with the lower surface of the bell, the entodermic layer is as yet

only formed of a single stratum, as in the radial canal; but in

proportion as we advance towards the interior of the ovary, we see

the entodermic cells divide in a direction perpendicular to their

length, and thus form two superposed layers of entoderm; the

Miscellaneous. 499

division of the cells continuing in all directions, we thus find the

entoderm grow thicker and thicker.

Between these two lamellae of entoderm and ectoderm forming

the ovary, there is a third, more delicate lamella destitute of struc-

ture; this is the intermediate lamella, which separates them in a

very marked manner, and assists to define with certainty which

layer produces the ova of the Encope ; these ova always occurring

beneath the intermediate lamella, and being thus separated by that

lamella from the ectoderm, can only be developed from the ento-

derm. But another reason leads us to accept the entodermic origin

of the ova of the Encope, if we observe directly all the graduated

transitions between the ordinary entodermic cells and the young

ova. ‘The changes in an entodermic cell destined to be developed

into an ovum, which I must now notice, consist in the increase of

the volume of this cell and the transformation of the nucleus into

- a germinal spot.

In the entodermic cells lining the radial canals, the protoplasm

is perfectly transparent and destitute of granules; the nucleus

appears in the form of a clear round spot, containing at the centre

a round nucleolus of greater density. Subsequently we observe

that the cells, as well as their nuclei and nucleoli, increase in size,

and the protoplasm becomes more and more granular. The nucleolus,

which is at first simple and furnished with a small vacuole, begins

to divide. As I have described in the case of a Medusa of the

White Sea *, at the commencement of the division the nucleolus

elongates, becomes constricted in the middle, makes a bend which

gives it the form of a horse-shoe, and finally divides into two parts,

each of which possesses a central vacuole; then each half divides

again (simultaneously or not) into two parts, but in a direction

perpendicular to the first (as in the segmentation of the ovum), and

so on.

Although these phenomena are constant and normal in the

Medusze of the White Sea, I have only observed them exceptionally

in the Medusz of the Gulf of Naples. Usually in the latter the

division of the nucleus takes place in a perfectly different manner,

which has not yet been described. When, after it has become

elongated, the nucleolus presents a median constriction, it does not

divide into two parts, but simply becomes elongated in the form of

a band twisted upon itself; constrictions then forming at various

parts of it, the nucleolus, from being originally round, becomes a

long moniliform ribbon rolled up in several turns. Each division

of the chaplet is fusiform and round; it regularly contains in the

middle a very small vacuole, and is united to the neighbouring

divisions by a thin and sometimes rather long articulation. Some-

times this long sinuous band, which reminds us of the nucleus of

certain Infusoria (Stentor, Spirostomum), splits into two bands.

Finally the grains or articulations of the chaplet separate, and,

* «Studies on ae, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. i, p, 254,

pl. xiii. figs. 9-14 (1878).

500 Miscellaneous.

instead of a nucleolus, there is formed at the centre of the nucleus

a whole group of several dozens of small round balls, which collect

into a sphere placed at some distance from the walls of the nucleus.

Afterwards these balls continue to divide for some time, thus

becoming more and more minute at the same time that their

number reaches several hundred. During all the time that these

phenomena are being produced the ovum enlarges and attains its

definitive diameter, which is nearly twenty times that of the ento-

dermic cells which gaye origin to the ovum.

The definitive aspect of the perfectly mature ovum before fecun-

dation is that of a sphere of granular protoplasm with a central and

perfectly uniform nucleus, showing not the smallest trace of any

nucleolus whatever. The hundreds of granules into which the

nucleolus has been divided have become dissolved in the protoplasm

of the nucleus.

Summary.—1. The ova of Encope are developed from entodermic

cells.

2. The nucleolus acquires the form of a chaplet twisted upon

itself; the grains of the chaplet become isolated and continue to

divide.

3. The mature ovum before fecundation has no longer the least

trace of a nucleolus in its nucleus, which is entirely homogeneous.

—Comptes Rendus, April 26, 1880, p. 1012.

Observations on the Megapodes. By M. EK. Ovsrarer.

A commission given to me by the Ecole des Hautes Etudes

having enabled me to visit the great museums of England and

Holland, I have been able to complete the investigations that I had

undertaken upon the Gallinaceous birds of the family Megapodiide,

and I have ascertained that the number of species admitted by

modern ornithologists is too large, and may be reduced to about

twenty-five.

By a comparative study of skeletons of Talegallas, Maléos (Mega-

cephalon), Megapodes, Guans (Penelope), and Guinea-fowl, I have

also ascertained that the creation of a separate group, proposed by

Prof. Huxley*, that of the Peristeropodes, including the two families

Cracide and Megapodiide, was fully justified ; but that the Pintados

present certain analogies of structure with these birds which

that learned zoologist has not, perhaps, sufficiently brought out.

On dissecting a Talegalla I met with certain arrangements indi-

cated by Dr. Garrod in the Maléo; but, on the other hand, I

remarked that other peculiarities in the mode of insertion of the

muscles of the wing and leg were not of so much zoological import-

ance as that anatomist thought it right to ascribe to them.

Again, on examining a collection recently sent by M. Bruijn I

found that Talegallus jobiensis also occurs on the continent of New

Guinea, and that 7. pyrrhopygius, when adult, possesses a wattle

on the front of the neck, and that it always has the nostrils rounded

* “On the Alectoromorphe,” in Proc. Zool. Soc. 1868.

Miscellaneous. 501

and the bill and feet much stronger than in 7. Cuvieri. Analogous

characters, but still more strongly marked, may be observed in a

new species from the island of Waigiou, a species which I shall

propose to call Talegallus Bruijnit. This Talegalla from Waigiou

not only bears a wattle on the front of the throat, but it has on the

middle of the head a regular crest which is continued posteriorly

by a sort of hood with two pendants. It deserves to be classed,

with 7. pyrrhopygius, in a new subdivision of the genus Talegallus,

the subgenus Apypodius*.

Recent discoveries have compelled me partially to rectify the

frontiers assigned to the Peristeropodes by Prof. Huxley, and have

proved that the northern limit of these birds only coincides at one

point, near Lombok, with Wallace’s line. Considered generally,

the area of habitat of the Peristeropodes forms on the surface of the

globe a band extending between 20° of north latitude and 40° of

-south latitude, but cut up in the direction of the meridians by two

enormous gaps. ‘The Hoccos and the Penelopes occupy a consider-

able portion of this band, namely that which corresponds to tropi-

cal America; while the Megapodes and their allies are spread over

islands which seem for the most part to be the fragments of an old

southern continent. This hypothesis is supported by the fact that

the Megapodes cease suddenly towards the east in the region where

the atolls commence. To the west the Megapodes are still more

widely separated from the Cracide ; but it is important to remark

that in this direction the African continent is inhabited by the

Pintados or Numidide, the affinities of which to the Megapodes are

greater than is generally supposed.

Thus the geographical distribution of the Megapodiidaw seems to

be perfectly in agreement with their zoological relationships ; but

when we study the habitat of each genus, or, still better, of each

species, we recognize many anomalies which it is often difficult to

explain in a satisfactory manner. To cite only one example, we

are astonished to find on the Nicobars a Megapode allied to those

of New Guinea, whilst we find no analogous form in Java, or in

Sumatra, or in Malacca. I do not think, as Mr. Wallace does, that

this species has been imported by the Malays, but rather believe

that it has remained, along with Culenas nicobarica, as the evidence

of a fauna that has disappeared. Every thing, in fact, concurs

to prove that the Megapodiide represent an extremely ancient type

among the Gallinacee. In their mode of reproduction they seem

to have retained some characters of the reptiles, since they lay eggs

of extraordinary size, the incubation of which they often abandon

to the action of the sun’s rays.

Lastly, it may perhaps be well to recall the fact that up to the

present day there has not been discovered in the Tertiary strata of

these countries the smallest fragment that can be referred to a

* From aimvs, elevated, and méd:ov, support, foot. I should certainly

have preferred the name Apypus to Atpypodius, if the latter had not

the advantage of reminding us by its termination of the word Mega-

podius.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. v. 34

502 Miscellaneous.

Peristeropode, still less to a Talegalla or a Megapode. From this

negative result we may, I will not say assert, but at least suppose

that at that distant epoch this remarkable type of Gallinaces was

already foreign to Europe, and was confined to the Indo-Australian

region.—Comptes Rendus, April 19, 1880, p. 906.

On the Structure of some Coralliaria. By M. C. MeresKowsxy.

Among the Coralliaria, the Actiniw especially have been the best

investigated. The almost total deficiency of facts relating to the

microscopic structure of the other groups decided me to undertake

a special study of some species common in the Bay of Naples, such

as <Astroides &c. The following are the results at which I have

“arrived.

The ectoderm, examined by means of sections and of maceration,

proved to be composed of the following elements :—

1. Ordinary ectodermic cells of very elongated form, strongly

depressed and dilated at the superior extremity, which is constantly

furnished only with a single cilium. In this respect the ectodermic .

cells of Astroides are very notably distinguished from those of the

Actiniz described by M. Heider, which have always several very

short cilia.

2. The preceding cells, but with this difference, that they become

transformed at their base into an excessively long and delicate fila-

ment, sometimes furnished with several inflations, which our know-

ledge of the group of the Coelenterata authorizes me to call nervous

filaments. '

3. Epithelio-muscular elements composed of cells no. 1 (more

normal, that is to say shorter and broader) united at their base to

muscular fibrille. This kind of element is not, however, so fre-

quently met with here as in the endoderm; at their apex there is

always a long cilium.

4. Nematocysts of two kinds: larger ones, often surrounded by

protoplasm, with a nucleus and a long filament (nervous) in the

posterior part; the others smaller, of a different form, and always

provided with a long posterior filament; the filament here and

there bears small nodosities.

5. The last elements of the ectoderm are the glandular cells,

always pyriform and with coarsely granular contents.

Mesoderm.—The elastic and structureless membrane which sepa-

rates the ectoderm from the entoderm varies in thickness in the

different parts of the body; it forms longitudinal protuberances

upon the faces of two mesembryenthal septa which unite at the

surface of the stomach. The muscles which line this elastic mem-

brane in a single layer are longitudinal in the interior of the

animal, and arranged in horizontal circles at the exterior. They

are either long slightly flattened filaments, the relations of which

to the other histological elements it is not easy to ascertain, or they

are fibrille forming a part of the epithelio-muscular elements.

We must also mention another very curious element, consisting

of cells of comparatively large size and execedingly flattened, much

Miscellaneous. 503

ramified, united to each other by their ramifications, and filled with

granular contents, with nucleus and nucleolus. They are arranged

in a layer, and rest immediately upon the outer surface of the elastic

membrane. In some cases I have been able to convince myself

that their ramifications, which, beyond all doubt, are nervous, are

continued into strongly refractive fibrille. Their form, their whole

habit, their position beneath a layer of ectoderm rich in cells fur-

nished with long filaments directed towards the elastic membrane,

and, lastly, the fibrillee in which their ramifications sometimes ter-

minate, leave no room to.doubt that they are nervous ganglia in

which the numerous fibrille of the different ectodermic cells termi-

nate. This supposition is rendered the more probable by analogous

facts observed in the Actiniz and the Meduse.

Entoderm.—The entoderm is almost exclusively composed of very

typical epithelio-muscular cells. The epithelial cell is not so

~ strongly elongated as in the ectoderm; it is broader and shorter,

with the base much dilated, and furnished at the extremity with

a single cilium. The muscular fibril is very refractive, fusi-

form, nearly three times as long as the cell itself. Besides these

elements we also find glandular cells not differing essentially from

those already described. These unicellular glands are met with

in great numbers, especially upon the parts of mesembryenthal par-

titions nearest the stomach, as well as on the mesembryenthal fila-

ments.

Besides Astroides, I may cite Sagartia parasitica and Medusa

equorea as having shown me epithelio-muscular elements in very

great numbers in the entoderm. As to the presence of a single

cilium at the extremity of the ectodermic cells, this is not a cha-

racter peculiar to Astroides, but appears to be very common in the

Coralliaria; I have ascertained its occurrence, for example,‘in

Paraleyonium elegans, Isis, Caryophyllia, Anthea cereus, and Sa-

gartia parasitica.

Mesembryenthal filaments.—The surface of the stomach is not

smooth, but covered with longitudinal elevations, each of which

corresponds to the place where a partition is united with the

stomach. These protuberances are very rich in glandular cells, and

it is only in them that the stomach presents such cells. At the

extremity of the stomach the protuberances form the free edges of

the mesembryenthal partitions ; there is therefore an uninterrupted

continuity of these longitudinal protuberances at the surface of the

stomach with the mesembryenthal filaments ; and this fact explains

the complete unity in the structure of these two organs, and enables

us to assert that they can only act as stomach, that is to say, as

organ of digestion. The filaments are solid and have no cavity in

the interior; they have in the centre a mesodermic trunk formed

by elastic membrane, which unites with that of the partitions. I

have been able to demonstrate the absence of any canal passing

through the partitions and uniting the chambers formed by them.

The organs of generation and the development of this coral will

constitute the subject of an early communication.— Comptes Rendus,

May 3, 1880, p. 1086.

504

INDEX tro VOL. V.

ACTENIA, new species of, 393.

AXdceus, characters of the new genus,

416.

Agamana, new species of, 593.

Alloesia, new species of, 488.

Ameeba Blattz, observations on, 193.

Amphipoda, on some blind, of the

Caspian Sea, 85; on the Austra-

lian, 30.

Aphides, on the resistance of, to

severe cold, 344.

Aphis bursaria, on the metamor-

phoses of, 483.

Appedesis, characters of the new

genus, 418.

Arachnida, on the locomotion of the,

196.

Archeeopteryx macroura, on, 185,

Artelida, new species of, 415.

Azygograptus, new species of, 159.

Barrois, Dr. J., on the development

of the Spiders, 197.

Bat, description of a new, 472.

Bellesme, J. de, on the phospho-

rescence of the glowworm, 345,

Birds, new, 488.

Books, new :—Nicholson’s Manual of

Paleontology, 74; Macalister’s

Animal Morphology and Sys-

tematic Zoology, 78; Goss’s Geo-

logical Antiquity of Insects, 428 ;

Journal of the Royal Microscopi-

cal Society, vol. 11., 429; Pro-

ceedings of the Yorkshire Geo-

logical and Polytechnic Society,

vol. vil., 480.

Bose, P. N., on some undescribed

fossil Carnivora, 184.

Bothrobathys, new species of, 490.

Brachyomus, new species of, 427.

Brachyura, on the Australian Maioid,

Brahmeea, note on the genus, 188.

Brooks, W. K., on the artificial fer-

tilization of oyster-eggs, and on

the embryology of the American

oyster, 82.

Bryograptus, characters of the new

genus, 164.

Bryozoa and Polyzoa, on the terms,

34, 127, 220.

Butler, A. G., on the genus Brahmea,

188; on a collection of Lepido-

tera from Western India and

eloochistan, 221; on new Lepi-

doptera from Madagascar, 333,

384.

Cecilie, on the, 263.

Calliphenges, characters of the new

genus, 296,

Callyphthima, characters of the new

genus, 339.

Calopheena, new species of, 286.

Cambarus primevus, description of,

455.

Campanularia angulata, on the his-

tology, development, and origin of

the testis and ovary in, 265,

Canide on the genera of, 36, 92.

Carlet, G., on the locomotion of

Insects and Arachnida, 196.

Carnivora, on some fossil, 184.

Carpenter, P. H., on some Coma-

tule from the British Secondary

rocks, 182.

Carter, H. J., on specimens dredged

up from the Gulf of Manaar, 437.

Castalius, new species of, 336.

Catopsilia, new species of, 338,

395.

INDEX.

Catorthontus, characters of the new

genus, 487.

Cave-Bear of California, on the, 260.

Cephalopods, new species of, 191.

Cerambycidie, new, 485.

Ceratestina, description of the new

genus, 448,

Charaxes, new species of, 394.

Chloridella, new species of, 15.

Chlorophyll, on the function of, in

plants, 62, 517. :

Chrysopsyche, characters of the new

genus, 387.

Cidaride, on the French Jurassic,

547.

Cirrus, on some species of, 477.

Cleoteges, characters of the new

- genus, 427.

Coccoderus, new species of, 292.

Coelenterata, on the spiral character

of the development of the, 212.

Coleoptera, new, 147, 215, 2385, 409,

419, 485, 490.

Comatule, on some undescribed,

182.

Cometes, new species of, 296.

Compsus, new species of, 425.

Copaxa, new species of, 387.

Cope, E. D., on the genera of Felidae

and Canide, 36, 92; on the Cave-

Bear of California, 260.

Copturus, new species of, 494,

Coralliaria, on the structure of some,

502.

Cotteau, G., on the French Jurassic

Cidaridee, 547.

Crawfish, on a fossil, 435.

Criodon, new species of, 292.

Crothzema, characters of the new

genus, 388.

Crustacea, new, 1], 31, 145, 302,

304, 370, 457; new classification

of the, 189; on the structure of a

species of the Willemoesia group

of, 269.

Cryptograptus, characters of the new

genus, 174.

Cryptolechia, new species of, 304.

Curares, on the plants which serve

as the basis of various, 267.

Curculionide, new, 419, 490.

Curiades, characters of the new

genus, 420.

Cyclocceloma, characters of the new

genus, 228.

Cynanthus, new species of, 489,

Cyphus, new species of, 421.

9005

Cyproidea, characters of the new

genus, 31.

Cyrtograptus, new species of, 158.

Cysteodictyina, new species of, 448.

Davis, J. W., on the genus Pleura-

canthus, 259; on the Teleostean

affinities of the genus Pleuracan-

thus, 349.

Dicellograptus, new species of, 160.

Dinictis, new species of, 44.

Diplograptus, new species of, 166.

Distenia, new species of, 295.

Ditoneces, new species of, 213.

Docela, new species of, 225.

Dromia, new species of, 370.

Dysodus, characters of the new genus,

Echidnas, on the salivary glands of

the, 83.

Emmelesia, new species of, 392.

Encope, on the origin and develop-

ment of the ovum in, before fecun-

dation, 498.

Endameeba, characters of the new

genus, 195,

Kpicausis, characters of the new

genus, 341.

Episacus, characters of the new

genus, 291.

Epitasis, characters of the new genus,

Ernst, A., on Dana’s Lysiosquilla

inornata, 436,

Erycideus, characters of the new

genus, 422.

Etheridge, R., Jun., on the Gastero-

poda figured in Phillips’s ‘Geology

of Yorkshire,’ 473.

Euomphalus, on some species of, 474.

Eusemia, new species of, 359.

Kustales, new species of, 425.

Fabres, J. H., on the habits and par-

thenogenesis of the Halicti, 194.

Felide, on the genera of, 36, 92.

Flints, on the origin, mode of for-

mation, and the cause of the strati-

fication of the chalk, 188.

Foraminifera, descriptions of new,

440,

Fraipont, J., on the histology, deve-

lopment, and origin of the testis

and ovary in Campanularia angu-

lata, 265.

Gasteropoda, notes on some, 473.

Gelechia, new species of, 394.

Geodia Barretti, on the structure of,

247.

506

Geological Society, proceedings of

the, 181, 259.

Glaucitine, new, 215.

Glowworm, on the phosphorescence

of the, 346.

Gonodactylus, new species of, 125.

Gould, J., on two new Humming-

birds, 488,

Graptolites, on new British, 149.

Grimm, Dr. O., on some blind

Amphipoda of the Caspian sea,

Ginther, Dr. A., on the occurrence

of Tachymenis vivax in Cyprus,

436.

Halicti, on the habits and partheno-

genesis of the, 194.

Haruspex, new species of, 294.

Haswell, W. A., on the Australian

Amphipoda, 30; on the Austra-

lian Maioid Brachyura, 145; on

two new species of Paratymolus,

302.

Hesperia, new species of, 539.

Hestias, new species of, 261.

Hincks, Rev. T., on the terms Poly-

zoa and Bryozoa, 127; on a sup-

posed Pterobranchiate Polyzoon

from Canada, 239.

Holocladina, new species of, 447.

Hulke, J. W., on the vertebrae of

Ornithopsis, 181.

Humming-birds, on two new, 488.

Hydradendrium, characters of the

new genus, 454.

Hyperythra, new species of, 223.

Hypochlorin, on the microchemical

characters of, and the conditions

Bf its production in the plant, 70,

317.

Icticyon, new species of, 104.

Idiograptus, new species of, 170.

Insects, on the locomotion of, 196.

Jolaus, new species of, 595.

Tresioides, new species of, 215.

Isops, description of the new genus,

396,

Isorropus, characters of the new

genus, 342.

Ites, characters of the uew genus,

297.

Jones, Prof. T. R., on the nomen-

clature of Polyzoa, 220.

Keller, Dr. C., on the systematic

position of the sponges, 268.

Kerivoula, new species of, 472.

Lapworth, C., on the geological dis-

INDEX.

tribution of the Rhabdophora, 45,

273, 358; on new British Grapto-

lites, 149.

Lasiograptus, new species of, 175.

Latheticus, description of the new

genus, 147.

Lechriolepis, characters of the new

genus, 385.

Leidy, Prof., on Amceba Blatte,

193.

Leiodon anceps, supplements to re-

storation of, 177.

Lepidoptera, new, 221, 355, 584.

Leptocera, new species of, 419.

Leptosquilla, characters of the new

genus, 12.

Lepturine, new, 215.

Lichtenstein, J., on the metamor-

phoses of Pemphigus bursarius,

433; on the resistance of Aphides

to severe cold, 344.

Light, on the action of, and the func-

tion of chlorophyll in plants, 62,

317.

Limulus, on the structure of the eye

of, 434.

Logisticus, new species of, 416.

Longe, M., on the formation of the

shell in the snails, 450.

Lophacanthus Taylori, description of,

217.

Lycaneptia, new species of, 500.

Lycidze, new species of, 215.

Lycidola, new species of, 298,

Lycomedes, new species of, 288.

Lyropeeus, new species of, 215.

Lysiosquilla, new species of, 11.

inornata, note on, 456.

Macrotoma, new species of, 410.

Mallaspis, new species of, 290.

Mallocera, new species of, 486,

Mammals, new American Jurassic,

84.

Mantodea, on the systematic posi-

tion of some little-known Asiatic,

261.

Marcala, new species of, 390.

Marsh, Prof., on some American

Jurassic Mammals, 84.

Matuta, new species of, 315.

Megapodes, observations on the,

500.

Mer, E., on the formation of the shell

in the snails, 480.

Merejkowsky, C., on the origin and

development of the ovum in En-

cope before fecundation, 498; on

INDEX.

the structure of some Coralliaria,

502.

Miers, E. J., on the Squillide, 1,

108; ona collection of Crustacea

from the Malaysian region, 226,

804, 370, 457.

Monograptus, new species of, 153.

Mosasauroids, on the affinities of the,

Mydrodoxa, characters of the new

genus, 340.

Nemoria, new species of, 224.

Nerocila, new species of, 467.

Nettarhinus, new species of, 492.

Nosoderma, new species of, 214,

Octopus, new species of, 192.

Ornithopsis, on the vertebre of,

181.

~Orthosia, new species of, 224,

Oustalet, E., on the Megapodes,

500.

Owen, Prof. O., on the occurrence in

North America of rare extinct

Vertebrates found fragmentarily

in England, 177.

Oxychila, new species of, 285.

Oyster-eges on the artificial fertiliza-

tion of, 82.

Packard, A. S., jun., on the sea-

weeds of Salt Lake, 80; on a

new classification of the Crustacea,

189; on the structure of the eye

of Limulus, 454; on a fossil craw-

fish, 435.

Palestes, new species of, 286.

Panagra, new species of, 391.

Panchylissus, characters of the new

genus, 294.

Panopea, new species of, 336.

Parachilia, new species of, 409.

Paratymolus, new species of, 302.

Pascoe, F. P., on new Neotropical

Curculionidee, 419, 490.

Pedicellaster, on the occurrence of,

in the far North, 216.

Pemphigus bursarius, on the meta-

morphoses of, 455.

Penzeus, new species of, 458.

Peters, Prof. W., on the Cecilie,

263.

Phosphorescence of the glowworm,

on the, 345.

Pileophorus, new species of, 490,

Pilumnus, new species of, 235.

Pinaroleema, description of the new

genus, 489,

Planchon, G., on the plants which

507

serve as the basis of various

Curares, 267.

Plants, on the action of light and

the function of chlorophyll in, 62;

on hypochlorin and the conditions

of its production in, 317.

Platyomus, new species of, 420.

Pleuracanthus, observations on the

genus, 259, 349.

Polycheles sculptus, on the structure

of, 269.

Polycystus, new species of, 81.

Polyschisis, new species of, 294.

Polytrema, new species of, 441.

Polyzoa and Bryozoa, on the terms,

34, 127, 220.

Polyzoon, on a supposed _ptero-

branchiate, from Canada, 239.

Poulton, KE. B., on Mammalian re-

mains at Reading, 260.

Pringsheim, Prof., on the action of

light and the function of chloro-

phyll in plants, 62, 317.

Protorma, characters of the new

genus, 288.

Pseudonympha, new species of,

5384.

Pyrgus, new species of, 223.

Raphipeza, characters of the new

genus, 386.

Renocila, characters of the new genus,

464,

Rhabdophora, on the geological dis-

tribution of the, 45, 278, 358.

Rhodophthitus, characters of the

new genus, 592.

Rotalia spiculotesta, observations on,

452.

Sacculina, new species of, 470.

Sagridola, new species of, 215.

Sea-weeds of Salt Lake, on the, 80.

Sesarma, new species of, 312.

Shell, on the formation of the, in the

snails, 430.

Sigerpes occidentalis, description of,

265.

Sladen, W. P., on the occurrence of

Pedicellaster in the far North,

216.

Sollas, W. J., on the sponge-fauna of

Norway, 130, 241, 396.

Smith, Prof. 8. L, on the structure

of a species of the Willemoesia

group of Crustacea, 269.

Snails, on the formation of the shell

in the, 430.

Sommeria, new species of, 348.

508

Spiders, on the development of the,

197.

Spodochlamys, new species of, 287.

Sponge-fauna of Norway, on the,

130, 241, 396.

Sponges, new, 132, 396; on the

systematic position of the, 268.

Squillide, revision of the genera and

species of, 1, 108.

Stauroteuthis, characters of the new

genus, 191.

Stelletta, new species of, 132.

Stock, T., on Lophacanthus Taylori,

217

Synagodus, characters of the new

genus, 99,

Sypna, new species of, 389.

Tachymenis vivax, on the occurrence

of, in Cyprus, 436,

Telphusa, new species of, 304.

Temnocyon, new species of, 94.

Terias, new species of, 337.

Testamcebiformia, characters of the

new group, 446,

Thalassodes, new species of, 391.

Thalera, new species of, 390.

Themistonoé, new species of, 300.

Thomas, O., on a new species of

Kerivoula, 472.

Thrasyomus, characters of the new

genus, 492.

Trichaptus, characters of the new

genus, 422.

Tubipora, new species of, 442.

INDEX.

Udeterus, new species of, 290.

Verrill, A. E., on two new Cephalo-

pods, 191.

Viallanes, H., on the salivary glands

of the Kchidnas, 83.

Vogt, Prof. C., on Archzopteryx

macroura, 185.

Wallich, Dr. G. C., on the origin

and mode of formation of the Cre-

taceous flints, 183.

Waterhouse, C. O., on a new genus

and species of Heteromerous Cole-

optera, 147; on new Coleoptera,

218, 285, 409, 485.

Waters, A. W.,on the terms Bryozoa

and Polyzoa, 34.

Willemoesia group of Crustacea,

on the structure of a species of,

269.

Wood-Mason, J., on the systematic

position of some Asiatic Mantodea,

with descriptions of two new

species of Hestias, 261; on Siger-

pes occidentalis, 263.

Xanthodura, characters of the new

genus, 384.

Xestia, new species of, 486.

Young, Prof. J., on the spiral cha-

racterof Coelenterate development,

212.

Zanclopteryx, new species of, 391.

Zoophyte, on a new hydroid, 454.

Fantini, new, 214.

END OF THE FIFTH VOLUME.

PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,

RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET,

Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. §.5. Vol. 5. PUL.

Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. 8. 5.Vol.5. PU IL.

Mintern Bros, imp.

C.Berjeau del et ith.

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist.S. 5. Vol. 5. PULI

CBerjeau delet hth. Mintern Bros. imp.

Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. 8. 5.Vol.5. PL.IV

eee ae MAY % ee ee

— Rkkhen SYANRAE SN . EL es

Lol

2 “A

aed qZZZZZZ A

= \

We ceo Semen ae

ROOKERY BERRA mi ese

a ae “ETAL”

Lon |

SY Se LRQRLEMMEEE

Ys ox

wee ad

OO EXKXEREREKE KEHOE S res, ; ; 3

\ \ S ( XX xx DOE Heats et a: 2 LL —<— Hol pt. a nN WACO 8

SS = “

SESEQOCRNOOOORE Ee

- ee ae eo COCO SEASON

Se Se KRKAALA LA ‘ Dx pf Se

= =

= id

GEL fitlbldLninid Lean ~ oe ed dee ele 1B 6)

KE TP

: —<— UN ; SSS UA Sees

ia i |) ge AP pe Soe ail i

er)

ey [i man BS: PINS Sie Susan's nae ee ae Us

=< ea ra eee SEAS A L rete sabes sia a

S SEMA MDEE AD Lise SY rin RADE AOAATARNY, Y peeoenererome FY

\ \ EVEN ; 1 V4 — — ALASLA AL 7 rm

\ a LOAM NANA oS iy

Mintern. Bros, imp.

Chas, Lapworth, del.